GIFT OF
SEELEY W. MUDD
and
GEORGE I. COCHRAN MEYER ELSASSER
DR.JOHNR. HAYNES WILLIAM L. HONNOLD
JAMES R. MARTIN MRS. JOSEPH F. SARTORI
to the
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
SOUTHERN BRANCH
GESENIUS'
HEBREW GRAMMAR:
SEVENTEENTH EDITION,
WITH NUMEEOUS COERECTIONS AND ADDITIONS,
BY
DR. E. RODIGER.
TRANSLATED BY
T. J. CONANT,
PROFESSOR OF HEBEEW IN EOCHESTEE THEOLOGICAL SEAONAKT.
WITH
GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES
AND
A CHRESTOMATHY,
BY THE TRANSLATOE.
6 2 ^ ;
NEW YORK :
D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 346 & 348 BROADWAY.
1859.
■ 87039
Entered, according to act of Congress, in the year 1856, by
D. APPLETON & COMPANY,
In the Clerk's office of tlie District Court for tlie Southern Dist)\ct of New York.
4",
a?
G-3 3 HE
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.
The apparatus for the grammatical study of the Hebrew
language, contained in this volume, consists of three parts :
1) A translation of Dr. Rodiger's seventeenth edition of the
Hebrew Grammar of Gesenius.
2) A course of grammatical exercises, to aid the learner in
acquiring and applying a knowledge of the elementary principles
of reading and inflection, and in the analysis of forms.
3) A Chrestomathy, consisting of explanatory notes on select
portions of the Hebrew Bible.
The translation has been prepared from the manuscript
revision for the seventeenth German edition, furnished by Dr.
Rodiger in advance of its publication in Germany. This has
been strictly followed in the revision of the translation, which
has been in great part rewritten, so as to make it an exact repre-
sentation of the original work, in its present improved form, and
of the present state of Hebrew philology, as it is exhibited by
Dr. Rodiger.*
* In consulting the references to the grammar, in Gesenius' Hebrew Lexicon
(Dr. Robinson's translation, fifth, revised edition, 1854), and in other works, it
should be remembered that the numbering of the sections, in this edition, is increa-
sed by one after §48, by two after §86, and by three after §126, of the former
editions.
X PREFACE
The grammatical exercises have been entirely rewritten, on
an improved plan. The attention of teachers is respectfully
requested to the method of study, proposed on page fourth of the
Exercises, which has been found to lighten greatly the laboi
both of the teacher and learner.
A new and much more extended selection has been made of
Hebrew reading lessons, with grammatical and exegetical notes
suited to the wants of the student. It is the plan of these notes,
to repeat nothing which is contained in the grammar and lexi-
con, and for the statement of which they can be referred to.
On a different plan, the same information might have been
spread over many times the number of pages, with no other
effect than to embarrass the learner, and retard his real profi-
ciency.
No pains have been spared to secure perfect accuracy in the
printing of the book. My thanks are due to the conductors of
the press of Mr. Trow, especially to Mr. W. F. Gould, for the
extraordinary care bestowed upon the proofs, before they were
sent to me for examination. They have since been subjected to
several careful revisions ; and it is believed that no error, of any
importance, has escaped detection.
CONTENTS.
Page
Introduction ..... 1
Section
1. Of the Semitic Languages in General .... 1
2. Historical View of the Hebrew Language .... 7
3. Grammatical Treatment of the Hebrew Language . . 12
4. Division and Arrangement ...... 14
PART L — Of the Elements.
Chapter I. — Of Reading and Orthography.
5. Of the Consonants, their Forms and Names .
6. Pronunciation and Division of Consonants
7. Of the Vowels in General, Vowel-Letters, and Vowel-Signs
8. Of the Vowel-Signs
9. Character and Value of the several Vowels .
10. Of the Half-Vowels and the Syllable-Divider (Sh^va)
11. Signs which affect the Reading of Consonants
12. Of Daghesh in General, and Daghesh Porte in Particular
13. Daghesh Lene .......
14. Mappiq and Raphe ......
15. Of the Accents .......
16. Maqqeph and Methegh .....
17. a<=ri and K^hibh
Chapter U.— Peculiarities and Changes of Letters ^ of Syllables
and the Tone.
18. In General ........
19. Changes of Consonants ......
20. Doubling of Consonants ......
21. Aspiration, and the Removal of it by Daghesh Lene .
22. Pecuharities of the Gutturals .....
23. Of the Feebleness of the Breathings X and n .
24. Changes of the Feeble Letters 1 and i ...
- 25. Unchangeable Vowels ....
26. Of Syllables, and their Influence on the Quantity of Vowels
' 27. Changes of Vowels, especially in Respect to their Quantity
28. Rise of New Vowels and Syllables ....
29. Of the Tone ; Changes of the Tone ; and of the Pause . 63
15
18
21
23
27
32
34
35
35
36
37
39
40
41
41
43
45
47
49
52
53
55
58
61
xii CONTENTS.
PART II. — Op Forms and Inflections, or op the Parts of Speech.
Section Page
30. Of the Stem- Words and Roots (Biliterals, Triliterals, duadri-
literals) . . 66
31. Of Grammatical Structure . . . . . . 70
Chapter I. — Of the Pronoun.
32. Of the Personal or Separate Pronoun ..... 71
33. Suffix Pronoun ..." 73
34. The Demonstrative Pronoun ...... 75
35. The Article 75
36. The Relative Pronoun 77
37. The Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns ... 77
Chapter II. — Of the Verb.
38-41. General View 78
I. Of the Regular Verb.
42. In General 83
A. Of the Ground-Form, or Kal.
43. Its Form and Signification ...... 83
44. Perfect of Kal and its Inflection ..... 84
45. Of the Infinitive 86
46. Of the Imperative 87
47. Of the Imperfect and its Inflection ..... 88
48. Lengthening and Shortening of the Imperfect and Imperative
(Jussive and Cohortative Forms) .... 90
49. Perfect and Imperfect with i Consecutive . . . .92
50. Of the Participle 94
B. Derived Conjugations.
51. Niphal 95
52. Piel and Pual 97
53. Hiphil and Hophal 99
54. Hithpael 102
55. Unusual Conjugations ....... 103
56. Gluadriliterals . 105
C. Regular Verb witli Pronominal Suffixes.
57. In General 105
58. The Suffix to the Verb .106
59. The Perfect with Pronominal Suffixes 108
60. Imperfect with Pronominal Suffixes . . . 110
61. Infinitive. Imperative, and Participle with Suffixes . Ill
CONTENTS.
XIU
II. Of the Irregular Verb.
A. Verbs with Gutturals.
Section
62. In General
63. Verbs Pe Guttural. E. g.
64. Verbs Ayin Guttural. E.
65. Verbs Lamedh Guttural.
B. Contracted Verbs.
^aS to stand, Parad.
g. arna to slaughter.
E.g
nbo to send.
D .
Parad. E
Parad. F
66. Verbs ■)£). E. g. taas to approach. Parad. H
67. Verbs V^ . E. g. 22D to surround. Parad. G
C. Feeble Verbs (Verba Q,uiescentia).
Feeble Verbs x"s . E. g. bsx to eat. Parad. I
69. Feeble Verbs "^SJ. First Class, or Verbs originally IS.
2123^ to dwell. Parad. K
70. Feeble Verbs "I's . Second Class, or Verbs properly ''3 .
Dt:^ to be good. Parad. L .
71. Verbs ^'s . Third Class, or Contracted Verbs ''"a .
72. Feeble Verbs IS . E. g. nstp to rise up. Parad. M .
73. Feeble Verbs "^b . E. g. ')'^3 to perceive. Parad. N
74. Feeble Verbs xb. E. g. NS^ tojind. Parad. O
75. Feeble Verbs iib. E. g. iibs ^o reveal. Parad. P .
76. Verbs doubly anomalous .....
77. Relation of the Irregular Verbs to one another
78. Defective Verbs .......
Chapter III. — Of the Noun.
79. General View .....
80. Of Forms which mark the Gender of Nouns
81. Derivation of Nouns ....
82. Primitive Nouns .....
83. Of Verbal Nouns in General
84. Nouns derived from the Regular Verb
85. Nouns derived from the Irregular Verb
86. Denominative Nouns ....
87. Of the Plural
88. Of the Dual
89. The Genitive and the Construct State
90. Remains of Ancient Case-Endings [Paragogic Letters]
91. The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes
92. Vowel-changes in the Noun .....
93. Paradigms of Masculine Nouns ....
94. Vowel-changes in the Formation of Feminine Nouns
95. Paradigms of Feminine Nouns ....
96. List of the Irregular Nouns ...
E.g.
Page
112
112
114
115
116
118
121
123
125
126
127
130
132
133
139
140
141
142
143
145
145
146
147
150
152
153
155
157
158
161
164
168
173
175
177
XIV
CONTENTS.
Section
97. Numerals.
98. Numerals.
I. Cardinal Numbers
II. Ordinal Numbers
Chapter lY .—Of the Particles.
99. General View .......
100. Adverbs
101. Prepositions .......
102. Prefix Prepositions .....
103. Prepositions with Suffixes, and in the Plural Form
104. Conjunctions ......
105. Interjections ......
Pagtt
178
181
182
183
185
186
187
190
191
PART III.— Syntax.
Chapter I. — Syntax of the Noun.
106. Relation of the Substantive to the Adjective, — of the Abstract
to the Concrete ........ 193
107. Use of the Genders 194
108. Of the Plural, and of Collective Nouns . . . . . 197
109. Use of the Article ...'... 200
110. Ditto 202
111. Ditto 203
112. Connection of the Substantive with the Adjective . . . 204
113. Of Apposition 205
114. Of the Genitive 206
115. Expression of the Genitive by Circumlocution . . . 207
116. Farther Use of the Construct State 208
117. Designation of the other Cases . . . '. . 209
118. Use of the Accusative ....... 210
119. Modes of Expressing the Comparative and Superlative . 212
129! Syntax of the Numerals 213
Chapter II. — Syntax of the Pronoun.
121. Use of the Personal Pronoun ...... 215
122. Of the Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns . . 218
123. Relative Pronoun and Relative Clauses .... 219
124. Mode of Expressing those Pronouns for which the Hebrew has
no Proper Forms ........ 221
Chapter III. — Syntax of the Verb.
125. Use of the Tenses in General ...... 222
126. Use of the Perfect 223
127. Use of the Imperfect ....... 227
128. Use of the Lengthened and Shortened Imperfect (Cohortative
and Jussive) ........ 230
CONTENTa XV
Section Page
129. Use of the Imperfect with Vav Consecutive . . . .231
130. Of the Imperative 232
131. Use of the Infinitive Absolute 234
132. Infinitive Construct 237
133. Connection of the Infinitive Construct with Subjec and Object 238
134. Use of the Participle 240
135. Construction of the Participle ...... 241
136. Expression of the Optative * ...... 242
137. Persons of the Verb 243
138. Construction of the Verb with the Accusative . . . 244
139. Verbs which govern two Accusatives . ... 246
140. Construction of Verbs with Prepositions . -^ . 247
141. Constructio Prsegnans ....... 24S
142. Union of two Verbs for the Expression of one Idea . . 248
143. Construction of Passive Verbs ...... 251
Chapter IV. — Connection of the Subject with the Predicate.
144. Manner of expressing the Copula ..... 252
145. Arrangement of the Parts of Speech in a Sentence ; Case Ab-
solute .253
146. Relation of the Subject and Predicate in respect to Gender and
Number ......... 254
147. Ditto 256
148. Construction of the Compound Subject .... 258
Chapter V. — Use of the Particles,
149. In General 258
150. Of the Adverbs 259
151. Construction of Adverbs ..... . 261
152. Of Words which express Negation . . . . . 261
153. Of Interrogative Words and Sentences . . . 263
154. Of the Prepositions 265
155. Of the Conjunctions ...... . 270
156. Of the Interjections ....... 275
TABLE OF THE OLDER SEMITIC ALPHABETS.
Phoenician coins
and inscriptions.
Old-Hebrew
coins and gems.
Aram.-Egypt.
inscriptions.
Palmyren i
inscriptions.
The square 1
character.
^ ^Ty</
K- X
f<
Jx
^ 9
6 3
y
:3 i
•2.
1
1
'\
A
>
A <^
A T
H
T
1
^
^
4 -71
^
r\
m
?^
T
x-^
1
'V 1
1
1
T
^n
B
H li
;r{ jv)
n
63 «j •
0
0
t9
/W rA
^l
A-»
7
^
4Hi/N
IJ
'f
i! J
^ 1
U
L
t, L
iJ
^
'^ y^
^
•^
>3
>3 D
>
1')
^
6 J
M
^
1
73 C3
t
o o
o o
0
^
V
1
1
1
-3
C)C|
r '<r
A^/\
!r
\
^ \
t T
f
f
»
Ip
^ °»
'\
'1-7
1
^ 1
•-H M-' LU
W yj
V
V «i^
w
-h n
+ X
f^
:)i
INTRODUCTION.
§1.
OF THE SEMITIC LANGUAGES IN GENERAL.
1. The Hebrew language is only a single branch of a great
parent-stock in western Asia, which was native in Palestine,
Phoenicia, Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, and Arabia ; Jiat is,
in the countries extending from the Mediterranean sea to the
Tigris, and from the mountains of Armenia to the southern coast
of Arabia, But in very early antiquity, this family of languages
had spread from Arabia over Ethiopia, and through Phoenician
colonies over several of the islands and coasts of the Mediterra-
nean sea, and particularly over the whole Carthaginian coast.
There is no ancient name for the collective nations and langua-
ges of this stock. The now generally received name, Semites,
Semitic langtiages, borrowed from the fact that most of the
nations who spoke these languages were descended from Sem
(Gen. X. 21), may be retained in the want of one more appro-
priate.*
2. From this Semitic stock have proceeded three principal
branches. I. The Arabic, in the southern part of the Semitic
domain. To this belongs the Ethiopic, as an offshoot of the
South-Arabic (Himyaritict), and the language of the Sinaitic
inscriptions, a descendant of the North-Arabic. t II. The Ara-
* From Sem proceeded the Aramaean and Arabic branches, as well as the
Hebrews; but not the Ethiopians (Cush), and the Canaanites. The two latter are
referred to Ham (vs. 7, 15, f.); though their language belongs decidedly to those
called Semitic. Among the Semites are reckoned also (v. 21) the Elamites and
Assyrians, whose language has not yet been thoroughly investigated.
f Rodiger, Excursus to Wellsted's Reisen in Arabien, Halle, 1842, Bd, II., S.
361.
X Tuck, in the Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenl. Gesellschaft, Bd. III., S. 129. i
1
2 INTRODUCnOK
mcBa?i, in the northern and northeastern division. It is called
Syriac, in the form wliich it takes in the Christian Aramaean
Uterature, and Chaldee, as it exists in the Aramaean writings of
Jews. To these writings belong some later portions of the Old
Testament, viz. Ezra iv. 8 — vi. 18, and vii. 12-26 ; Dan. ii. 4 —
vii. 28.* To the Aramaean belongs also the Samaritan, in its
fundamental character ; though, like the Chaldee, it often has a
strong tincture of the Hebrew. The Aramaean of the Nestorians
is a very debased and corrupted dialect, as is also the present
Vulgar-Syriac. III. The Hebrew, with which the Canaanitish
and Phoenician (Punic) nearly coincide ; holding a relation, in
its character as well as geographical position, about midway
between the Arabic and the Aramaean. All these languages are
related to eacli other in much the same manner as those of the
Germanic family (Gothic, Old-northern, Danish, Swedish ; high
and low German, in the earlier and later dialects) : or as those
of the Slavic tongues (Lithuanian, Lettish ; Old-Slavic, Servian,
Russian ; Polish, Bohemian). They are now either wholly ex-
tinct, as is the case with the Phoenician, or they exist only in
altered and decayed forms, as the modern Syriac among the
Jews and the Syrian Christians in Mesopotamia and Curdistan ;t
the Ethiopic in the modern Abyssinian dialects (Tigre, Amharic) ;
and also the Hebrew, among a part of the modern Jews, though
the latter in their writings aim at the reproduction of the lan-
guage of the Old Testament. The Arabic alone, has not only
retained to this day its original seat, Arabia proper, but has
encroached in all directions upon the domains of other tongues.
The Semitic stock of languages is bordered, on the east and north,
by another of still wider extent, which has spread itself from India into
the western parts of Europe. This stock, as it comprehends, under the
most varied ramifications, the Indian (Sanscrit), ancient and modern
Persian, Greek, Latin, Slavic, the Gothic with the other Germanic lan-
guages, is hence called the Indo-Germanic. With the Old-Egyptian
language, an offspring of which is the Coptic, the Semitic has had, in
very high antiquity, manifold points of contact. Both have much in
common ; but their relation is not yet precisely determined.J The Chi-
* The most ancient passage, -where Arama;an words as such occur, is Gen.
xxxi. 4Y. Comp. also the Aramffian verse in Jer. x. 11.
f See Rodiger in der Zcitschrift fiir die Kunde des Morgenlandes, B. II., S. YY. ft
\ For comparisons of the Egyptian and Semitic, see Oescnius in d. Allg. Lit.
Zeitung, 1889, No. 11. ft'., 1841, No. 40, and in his Thes. ling. Hebrsese; Schwarzt
in d. Alten ^gypten ; BunserCs ,^gypten I. S. 520. ff.
§ 1. SEMITIC LANGUAGES IN GENERAL. 3
nese. the Japanese, the Tartar and other languages, exhibit a radically
different character.
3. The Semitic stock, in its grammatical structure compared
with that of other languages, particularly the Indo-Germanic,
exhibits many peculiarities, which collectively constitute its dis-
tinctive character, although many of them are found singly in
other languages. These are : a) among the consonants (which,
in general, form the body and substance of these languages) a
number of gutturals, of different gradations in sound ; the vowels
proceeding all from the three primary sounds (a, i, u). and serving
rather to mark subordinate distinctions : b) word-stems, mostly
consisting of three consonants : c) in the Verb, only two tense-
forms, each having a peculiarly defined usage ; and a marked
regularity pervading the formation of verbals : d) in the Noun,
only two genders, and a very simple designation of case : e) in
Pronouns, the designation of oblique cases by appended forms
{suffixa) : /) scarcely any compounds, either in the Noun (many
proper names excepted), or in the Verb : g) in the Syntax, a
simple succession of members, with little of periodic structure in
the subordination of clauses.
4. In the province of the Lexicon also, the Semitic languages
differ essentially from the Indo-Germanic ; though there is here
apparently more agreement than in grammatical structure. Very
many stem-words and roots are coincident in sound with those of
the Indo-Germanic stock. But, aside from expressions directly
borrowed (see below), the actually similar restricts itself, partly
to words imitative of natural sounds (onomatopoetic), partly to
those in which the sameness or similarity of meaning follows of
itself from the nature of the same sounds, after the universal
type of human speech. Neither of these establishes any histo-
rical (gentilic) relationship ; to the direct proof of which, the
agreement also in grammatical structure is essential.*
* The points of connection, between the Semitic stock and the Indo-Germanic,
Gesenius has endeavored to point out in his later lexical works ; and others have
carried this comparison still farther, or have taken it up in their own way. But
nowhere is illusion more easy, or more common, than in investigations of this kind ;
and one requires great circmuspection, and especially a comprehensive knowledge
of the whole system of sounds in both families, in order to be secure from error in
these obscure paths. It is here as indispensable, to be strict in noting what does not.
fulfil all the conditions of a common origin, as to be able to discover superficial
ooints of agreement. So much, at least, is to be held as certain : that these two
4 INTRODUCTION.
As examples of stems originating in the same natural sound (onomcf
topoetic), we may class together the following : Pl^b , pnb , hlxw, lingo
San. lih, Fr. lecker, Germ, leckeii, and Eng. to lick j hh^ (kindr. bjX
bss!), x/XAw, xekXw, xvXm, volvo, Germ, quellen, wallen. and Eng. to well ,
Tna, I3nri. rrnn, ;^«^«ttw, Pers. kharidan. Ital. grattare, Pr. gratter,
Germ, kraizen, and Eng. io grate, to scratch; PtJS, frango, Germ,
brechen, Eng. ?o break, &c. An example of another kind is a??z. Aa?7j
(sam), g'a??i, /fa?7i, in the signification together [gathered] ; e. g. in Heb.
oax (hence HHX people, prop, assemblage), ds together-with, DttS
(hence na also), Arab. 3>»3 to collect ; Pers. ham, hania, at once ; San.
amd, with, Gr. uiia (afxcpb)), ofiog, ofiov, (ofidog, ofiadog), and hardened,
xoLvog, Lat. cum, cumuhis, cunctus, and with the corresponding sibilant,
San. sam, avv, %vv, ^vvog^^ xoivog, Goth, sama, Germ, sammt, sammeln:
though doubts may still be raised in regard to some of the instances
quoted.
Essentially different from such internal coincidence, is the
adoption and naturalization of single words from other langua-
ges (borrowed words). Thus,
a) When Indian, Egyptian, Persian objects are expressed in the
Hebrew by their native names. E. g. "iSf^ (Egypt, ior, iero, iaro) river,
Nile ; WX (Egypt, ake, achi) Nile-grass ; 0'n"iQ = nngadsKTog, Persian
pleasure-grounds, park ; ')ia3'i^ , daric, Persian gold-coin ; C^'Sn , from
the Indian (Tamul.) togai, peacocks. Several of them are found also in
Greek: as, Cjlp (San. kapi) ape, xrjnog, nij/iog ; 0e'i3 (San. karpAsa)
cotton, xagnaaog, carbasus.
b) When Semitic words, names of Asiatic products and articles of
trade, have passed over to the Greeks along with the objects themselves.
E.g. y^3 ^maoQ, byssus ; <^5i^. , kt/^uvoizog, frankincense; n3p. xuvt),
navva, canna, reed ; Ti^S, xvfiivov, cuminum, cvimin ; "ib, fivQQa, myrrha ;
W'^^p , xaaaia, cassia ; hv^ , xdfirjXog, camelus ; I'S^?. . aQqa^wv, arrha-
bon, arrha, pledge. Such transitions would be facilitated, especially, by
the commercial dealings of the Phoenicians.
5. The written form of a language is never so perfect, as to
express all its various shades of sound. The writing of the
Semites has one very remarkable imperfection ; viz. that only
the consonants (which do indeed constitute the kernel and body
of language) were written out as real letters ; whilst, of the
vowel-sounds, only the more prolonged ones, and not always
even these, were represented by certain consonants (§ 7). At a
later period, in order to represent all the vowel-sounds to the
families do not hold a sisterly, or any near relationship to one another; and that the
characteristic structure of each must first be dissected and analyzed, before any
original elements, which tliey may have in common, can be discovered. This com-
parison, moreover, belongs more to the Lexicon than to the Grammar.
§ 1. SEMITIC LANGUAGES IN GENERAL. 5
eye, there were attached to the letters (§8) small, separate signs
(points, or strokes, above or below the line) ; though, for more
practised readers, they were wholly omitted. The letters are
always written, moreover, from right to left.*— Dissimilar as the
different Semitic alphabets may appear, they yet all proceed, by
various tendencies and modifications, from one and the same
original alphabet. Of this the truest copy, among all existing
specimens of alphabetic writing, is preserved in the Phoenician,
from which sprang the old Greek, and mediately all the Euro-
pean written characters.
For a complete view of the Phoenician alphabet, and of all those fvhich
have proceeded from it, see Gesenius Monuraenta antiqua Phoenicia
(Lipsiae, 1837, 4.) p. 15. ff. and Tab. 1-5, and his article PalcBogiaphie, in
Ersch and Gruber's Encyclop. Sect. III. Bd. 9.
6. In regard to the relative age of these languages, the oldest
written works are found in the Hebrew (§ 2) ; the Aramaean com-
mence about the time of Cyrus (in the book of Ezra) ; those of
the Arabic branch not earlier than the first centuries of the Chris-
tian era (Himyaritic inscriptions, Ethiopic translation of the
Bible in the fourth century, North-Arabic literature after the
sixth). But it is still another question, which of these languages
longest and most truly held to the original Semitic type ; in
which of them, as they have come to us, we trace the earlier
phase of their development. For the more or less rapid progress
of language, in the mouth of a people or of tribes of the same
people, is determined by causes quite distinct from the growth of
a literature ; and often, before the formation of a literature, the
organism of a language has already become shattered, especially
by early contacts with other tongues. Thus, in the Semitic
domain, the Aramaean dialects suffered the earliest and greatest
decay ,t and next to them the Hebrew-Canaanitish. The Arabic
* The EthioiDJc is written from left to right. But this is probably an innovation
of the earliest missionaries, by "w^hom Christianity was introduced into Ethiopia ;
for an ancient inscription still exhibits the reversed direction, as does also the
South-Arabic (Himyaritic) writing, -which is most nearly related to the Ethiopic,
and which regularly runs from right to left. See Rodiger, in the Zeitschr. f. d.
Kunde des Morgenl. Bd. IL, S. 332. ff. and his Excursus to Wellsted's Reisen in
Arabien, II. 376. ff.
f A new element must -be taken into account, should the language of the
cuneiform inscriptions, found within the Aramaean district, prove to be of the
Semitic stock. But this is still so doubtful, that we here leave it out of view.
6 INTRODUCTION.
longest retained the natural fulness of its forms ; remaining
undisturbed, among the secluded tribes of the wilderness, in its
fully stamped organism. But at length, in the Mohammedan
revolutions, this also became greatlj'^ impaired ; and hence, at
this so much later period, it begins to exhibit about the same
stage as the Hebrew had reached, so early as the times of the
Old Testament.*
Hence the phenomenon, accounted so strange, that the ancient
Hebrew accords more, in its grammatical structure, with the later than
with the earlier Arabic ; and that the latter, though first appearing
as a written language at a late period in comparison with the other
Semitic tongues, has yet preserved a structure in many respects more
perfect, and greater freshness in its system of sounds ; holding among
them a relation similar to that of the Sanscrit among the Indo-Germanic
languages, or of the Gothic in the narrower circle of the Germanic.
How a language can preserve its fuller organism, amidst decaying
sister tongues, is seen e. g. in the Lithuanian compared with the Slavic
languages, properly so called. So the Doric held tenaciously to earlier
sounds and forms ; so the Friesic and Icelandic, among the German and
northern languages. But even the firmest and most enduring organism
of language often decays, in single forms and formative tendencies; and
vice versa, in the midst of universal decline, the ancient and original
form is here and there preserved. Such is the fact, in regard to the
Semitic tongues. The Arabic too, has its chasms, and its later accre-
tions ; but in general, it may justly claim the priority, especially in the
system of vowel-sounds.
To establish more definitely these principles, and carry them out
fully, belongs to a Comparative Grammar of the Semitic languages.
But. from what has been said it follows: 1) That the Hebrew lan-
guage, as found in the ancient, sacred literature of the people, has
already suffered more considerable losses, in respect to its organism,
than the Arabic at the much later period, when it first comes historic-
ally within our field of view. 2) That notwithstanding this, we cannot
award to the latter an exclusive priority in all points. 3) That it is a
mistaken view, when many regard the Aramsean. on account of its sim-
plicity, as nearest to the original form of Semitism ; for this simplicity
it owes to a decay of organism and the contraction of its forms.
On the character, literature, grammatical and lexical treatment of
these languages, see Gesenius' preface to his Hebraisches HandwOrter-
buch, eds. 2-4. — [Biblical Repository, vol. III.]
* Among the Bedouins of the Arabian desert, the language still preserves many
antique forms. See Burckhardt, Travels in Arabia, Append. VIII. p 466; his
Notes on the Bedouins and Wahabys, p. 211; and Wallin, in the Zeitschrift dei
ieutsch. morgenl. Gesellsehaft, Bd. V. (1851,) p. S. 1. fF. VI., S. 190. fif. 369. ff.
§ 2. HISTORICAL VIEW OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGK 7
$2.
HISTOEIOAL VIEW OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE.
See Gesenius' Geschichte der hebraischen Sprache und Schrift, Leip-
zig, 1815, §§ 5-18.
1. This language was the mother-tongue of the Hebrew or
Israehtish people, during the period of its national independence.
The name, Hebrew language (rii"iay T^'^'^, ylcJOOa tcov'^E^qui-
cov, 6iSQai'0Ti), is not found in the Old Testament, and seems
rather to have been in use among those who were not Israelites.
We find instead of this, hanguage of Canaan (Is. xix. 18) from
the country where it was spoken ; and rT'^i^n';', Judcice (2 K.
xviii. 26, comp. Is. xxxvi. 11, 13 ; Neh, xiii. 24). The latter
term belongs to the later usage, which arose after the return of
the ten tribes from captivity, and in which the name Jeio, Jeivs,
came gradually to comprehend the whole nation. (Jer. Neh.
Esth.)
The names. Hebrews (n'^'nas, '^E^qrnoi, Hebroei) and Israelites (ija
^^'^^'?)) were distinguished as follows. The latter bore the character of
a national name of honor, which the people applied to themselves, with
a patriotic reference to their descent from illustrious ancestors. The
former was probably the older and less significant name of the people,
by which they were known among foreigners. For this reason, it is
used in the Old Testament particularly when they are to be distin-
guished from other nations (Gen. xl. 18; xliii. 32); and where persons
who are not Israelites are introduced as speaking (Gen. xxxix. 14, 17 ;
xli. 12). Compare Gesenius' Hebr. lexicon, Art. "^"i^y . On the contrary,
among the Greeks and Romans, e. g. in Pausanias, Tacitus, and also
Josephus, it is the only name in use. As an appellative it might mean,
belonging to the other side, people of the land on the other side (with refer-
ence to the country beyond the Euphrates), from "^a? land on the other
side, and the formative syllable "i— (§ 86, 5). It might then have refer-
ence to the colony, which under Abraham migrated from regions east
of the Euphrates into the land of Canaan (Gen. xiv. 13); though the
Hebrew genealogists explain it as a patronymic, by sons (posterity) of
Eber (Gen. x, 21 ; Num. xxiv. 24).
At the date of the writings of the New Testament, the term Hebrew
{i^qa'iail, John v. 2 ; xix. 13, 17, 20. k^Qu'ig duiXexTog, Acts xxi. 40 ; xxii. 2.
xxvi. 14) was applied also to the language then vernacular in Palestine,
in distinction from the Greek. Josephus (ob. about A. D. 95) uses it in
this sense, and also for the ancient Hebrew.
The name lingua sancta is first given to the Hebrew in the Chaldee
paraphrases of the Old Testament, as the language of the sacred books,
in distinction from the lingua profana, or the Chaldee popular language
8 ' INTRODUCTION.
2. In the very earliest writings, as they have come down ic
us in the Pentateuch, we find the language in nearly the same
form which it continued to bear till the time of the exile, and
beyond it ; and we have no historical facts respecting the earlier
stages of its formation. So far as we can learn from history, its
home was Canaan. It was substantially the language spoken
by the Canaanitish, or Phoenician* races, who inhabited Pales-
tine before the immigration of Abraham and his descendants, by
whom it was transplanted to Egypt, and again brought back
with them to Canaan.
That the Canaanitish races in Palestine spokc the language now
called Hebrew, is shown by the Canaanitish proper names. E. g. "'^S^'?
p"!^ i. e. king of righteousness ; "iSO n^'ip i. e. city of books.
There is an equally close agreement with the Hebrew, in the remains
of the Phoenician and Punic language. These are found, partly in their
own peculiar character (§ 1, 5) in inscriptions, about 130 in number, and
on coins. For copies of them, see Gesenius, Monumenta Phoenicia;
Judas, Etude demonstrative de la langue phenicienne, Paris 1847 ;
Bourgade, toison d'or de la langue phenicienne, Paris 1852. Partly, they
are found in Greek and Roman characters, scattered here and there in
ancient writers, and among them is one continuous passage in Plautus,
Poenulus, 5, 1, 2. From the former, we learn the native orthography ;
and Irom the latter, the pronunciation and vocalization. The two toge-
ther furnish a distinct image of this language, and of its relation to the
Hebrew.
As examples of variations in orthography and in forms, maybe cited,
1) the almost constant omission of the vowel-letters (§ 7, 2) ; as, n2 for
n^a./iouse; hp for bip voice; pS for "JIT'S; DSna for D'^3r;2i priests;
2) the feminine ending n (ath) in the absolute state (§ 80, 2), and it (o),
besides many others. In pronunciation they are still more remarkable,
especially in the Punic. In this, i was pronounced commonly as u ; e. g.
UBilJ S7fet (judge) ; laibia salus (three) ; T!3"i rus = lasi (head) : for short
i and e, it has often the obscure, dull sound y ; e. g. ^lasn ynnynnu (ecce
eum), riK yth: the S it sounds as o; e.g. ip5>?3 Mocar (comp. t^SSia
Sept. Mcaxd). For the entire collection of these grammatical peculiari-
ties, see Gesenius, Monum. Phoen. p. 430 sqq. and Movers, Art. Phaeni-
zien, in Ersch and Gruber^s Encyclop. Sect. ill. Bd. 24, S. 434. ft'.
3. In the language of the ancient documents which have
come down to us in the Old Testament, we can distinguish no
more than two distinct periods : the iirst, extending to the end of
* "iSSS , ''3S33 is the native name both of the Canaanitish tribes in Palestine,
and of those who dwelt at the foot of Lebanon and on the Syrian coast, whom we
call Phoenicians, while they are called "JSJS on their own coins. Also the people
of Carthage gave themselves the same name.
§ 2. mSTOEICAL VIEW OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 9
the Babylonian exile, which may be called its golden age ; and
the second, or silver age, after the exile.
To the first belongs the greater part of the books of the Old
Testament : viz. of prosaic and historical writings, the Penta-
teuch, Joshua, Judges, Ruth, Samuel, Kings ; of poetical writ-
ings, the Psalms (a number of later ones excepted), Solomon's
Proverbs, Canticles, Job ; the earlier prophets, in their chronolo-
gical order, as follows : Joel, Amos, Hosea, Isaiah, Micah, Ze-
phaniah, Habacuc, Nalium, Obadiah, Jeremiah, Ezekiel. The
last two, as they lived and taught shortly before, as well as
during the time of the exile, and also the latter part of the book
of Isaiah (chs. xl.-lxvi. with some earlier chapters), stand on the
borders of both ages. •
The point of commencement for this period, and in general, of the
literature of the Hebrews, must certainly be fixed as early as the time
of Moses ; even though we should regard the Pentateuch, in its present
structure and form, as modelled by a later hand. It suffices for the his-
tory of the language and for our object to remark, that the Pentateuch
has certainly peculiarities of language, which may be regarded as
archaisms. The words Nin he (§ 32, R. 6), and "i?5 a lad, as there
used are of common gender, and mean also she and maiden, like o and
ri naiq; and certain harder forms of words, e.g. pS^, P^ll, are here
the usual ones, whilst in other books they are exchanged for the softer
forms, as pST , pniu .
On the other hand, there are found in Jeremiah and Ezekiel. clear
instances of approximation to the Aramaean coloring of the second, or
silver age (see No. 5).
4. The different writers and books, though each has certainly
peculiar characteristics, exhibit no very important differences
bearing on the history of the language during this period ; as,
indeed, the date of composition of many of these books, especially
the anonymous historical ones, cannot be determined with entire
certainty. On the contrary, the poetic diction is every where
distinguished from prose, not only by a rhythmical movement in
measured parallel members, but also by words, forms and signi-
fications of words, and constructions, peculiar to itself: a dis-
tinction not so strongly marked, however, as in the Greek for
example. But most of these poetic idioms are employed in the
kindred languages, particularly the Aramaean, as the common
forms of speech. They may in part be regarded as archaisms,
which the poetic diction retained, in part as additions made to
the stores of the language, by poets to whom the Aramaean was
10 INTRODUCTION.
familiar.* The prophets, moreover, at least the earlier ones, in
language and rhythm are to be ranked almost as poets ; except
that with these poetical speakers, the sentences often run on to
greater length, and the parallelism is less measured and regular,
than in the writings of those who are strictly poets. The lan-
guage of the later piophets keeps more closely to the form of
prose.
On the poetic rhythm in Hebrew, see De Wette, Comraentar uoer die
Psalmen (4th ed. Heidelb. 1836), Einleit. § 7;t Ewald, die poetischen
Bucher des alten Bundes, Th. I. (Gottingen ]839) ; and (briefly treated)
Gesenius. Hebr. Lesebuch, Vorerinnerungen zur 2ten Abtheilung.
Of poetic words, (occurring along with those used in prose.) the fol-
lowing are examples : UJisX vian, -= D'lN ; rriX path. = Tj"!'!! ; i^nx to
come, = Xia ; <i^^ word, = "i^'n .
To the poetic significations of words belongs the use of certain epithets
in place of substantives : e. g. "i''3i< strong (one), for God ; "I'^ai* strong
(one), for bullock, horse ; t^JS^ alba, for luna ; n^'^H'^ uniciis, dearest.
for life.
Of poetic forms, we may note, e. g. 1) the longer forms of preposi-
tions denoting relations of space (§ 103, 3); as, ""bs = hv, "'bx = bx,
ins = 1» ; 2) the endings •'-7, 1, in the noun (§ 90) ; 3) the svjj.ves
■iia,' 113—, iia— , forD, Q— , d— (§ 57); 4) the plural-ending "p— for
d-^- (§ 87, 1, a).
To the poetic peculiarities in syntax belong, e. g. the far more sparing
use of the article, of the relative pronoun, of the accusative-particle n!St ;
the construct state before a preposition ; the shortened form of the imper-
fect, in the signification of the usual form (§ 128, 2. R.) ; and in general,
a concise vigor of expression.
5. The second or silver age, from the close of the exile to the
times of the Maccabees (about 160 B. C), is marked chiefly by
an approximation in tlie language to the kindred Aramaean
(Chaldee) ; the Jews having the more easily accustomed them-
selves to the use of it, during their residence in Babylonia, on
account of its near resemblance to the Hebrew. After the return
from the exile, the Aramaean came more and inore into use ; its
influence was felt more and more on the old Hebrew language
of books (and now also upon the style of prose), which was thus
gradually banished from common use, though it continued to be
understood and written by the learned.
* That in Isaiah's time (2d half of the 8th centin-y before Christ) tlie more
educated Hebrews, at least the officers of state, understood Aramseaii is expressly
mentioned in 2 Kings xviii. 26 ; comp. Is. xxxvi. 11.
f Biblical Kepository, No. IX. — Tr.
§2. HISTORICAL VIEW OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE 11
We may form a conception of the relation of the two languages, at
this later period, by comparison with that of the High and Low German
in Lower Saxony, or with that of the High German and the popular
dialects in the south of Germany and in Switzerland ; for here also, even
among the more educated, an influence is commonly exerted by the
popular dialect, on the oral and written expression of the High German.
It is a false view, founded on an erroneous interpretation of Neh. viii. 8,
that the Jews had at this time wholly lost the knowledge of the ancient
Hebrew, and must learn its import from priests and adepts in the
language.
The writings of the second period, all of which exhibit this
Chaldee coloring, though in various shades, are the following
books of the Old Testament : Ezra, Nehemiah, Chronicles,
Esther ; of the prophetical books, Jonah, Haggai, Zechariah,
Malachi, Daniel ; of the poetical books, Ecclesiastes, and the
later Psalms. In their character also as literary compositions,
they stand far below the writings of earlier times ; though there
are not wanting productions of this period, which, in purity of
language and eesthetic Avorth, are little inferior to those of the
golden age. Such e. g. are many of the later Psalms (cxx. ff.
cxxxvii. cxxxix).
Examples of later words (Chaldaisms) for which the earlier writers
employ others : )'a] = ns time ; i'Sp = n|5^ to take ; Cll'D = yp^ end ;
^^^ =^^'? ^0 f^ie. — OC later signiJicatio7is : 152X (to say) to command;
njS (to answer) to begin speaking. — Of later grammatical usages : the
frequency of the scriptio plena i and '^—, e. g. T^^i'n (elsewhere Ti'^),
even ^"lip for ttiVp, ain for a'"i ; the interchange of final n— and X—;
the more frequent use of substantives in "p, "j— , etc.
But the peculiarities of these later writings are not all Chaldaisms.
Some do not occur in the Chaldee, and must have belonged to the
earlier popidar-dialect of the Hebrews, especially, as it seems, in the
northern parts of Palestine. There the book of Judges and Canticles
may have been written ; and hence the occurrence, in these earlier
writings, of the form •^. for ll^N (§ 36). which was the common form
in the Phoenician.
Rem. 1. Of diversities of dialect, in the old Hebrew language,
only a few, and those but slight, traces are found; namely, in Judges
xii. 6, according to which the Ephraimites appear to have pronounced
tj as b or D ; and in Neh. xiii. 23, 24, where an Ashdod (Phihstine)
dialect is spoken of
2. The remains of Hebrew literature, which have come down to us,
cannot be supposed to contain the entire- stores of the old Hebrew
language ; and we must regard it as having been far more lich and
comprehensive, than it now appears in the canonical literature of the
Old Testament, Avhich is itself but a part of the entire national litera-
ture of the ancient Hebrews.
12 INTRODUCTION.
§3.
GRAMMATICAL TREATMENT OF THE LANGUAGE.
(Gesenius, Geschichte der hebr. Sprache, §§ 19 — 39.)
1, At the time of the gradual extinction of the old Heb/ew
language, and when the collection of the Old Testament wiitinga
was closed, the Jews began to apply themselves to the explana-
tion and criticism of this their sacred codex, and to the prepa-
ration of translations from it into the popular languages now
prevalent among them. The oldest is the Greek translation of
the so-called seventy interpreters (LXX), commenced at Alexan-
dria in Egypt with the translation of the Pentateuch, under
Ptolemy Philadelphus, and completed in later years. It was in
part made from knowledge of the original Hebrew as a living
tongue, for the use of Jews whose language was the Greek,
particularly those who resided at Alexandria. Somewhat later,
the Chaldee translations (the Targums, ']'i'a'i5"ir\, translations)
were composed in Palestine and Babylonia. The e.Tplajiatiotis,
professedly derived in part from tradition, have almost exclusive
reference to civil and ritual law and dogmatic theology, with as
little scientific value as the remarks on various readings. Both
are contained in the Talmud ; the first part (Mishna) composed
in the third, and the second {Gemara) in the sixth century.
The Mishna is the beginning of the neiu Hebrew literature ; in
the Gemara, on the contrary, the language has more the form of
the Chaldee.
2. In the interval between the composition of the Talmud
and the earliest grammarians, falls mainly the vocalization of
the yet unpointed text (§ 7, 3) ; as also the collection of critical
remarks, under the name of Masora (H'lb'a, tradltio), to which
the manuscript copies of the Textus Receptus of the Old Testa-
ment have ever since been conformed, and from which it is
called the Masoretic text.
One of the oldest and most important portions of the Masora is the
collection of various readings, called Q^ri (§ 17). The punctuation of
the text, moreover, is not to be confounded with the compilation of the
Masora. The former was settled at an earlier date, and is the fruit of a
much more thorough work than the Masora, which was finished con-
siderably later.
§ 3. GRAMMATICAL TREATMENT OF THE LANGUAGE 1 3
3. It was about the beginning of the 10th century, that the
first collections in grammar were made by Jews, in imitation of
the Arabic grammarians. The first attempts, by Rabbi Saadia
(ob. 942) and others, are lost ; but those of R. Judah Hhayug
(called also Abu Zacharia Yahya) about the year 1000, and of
R. Jonah (Abu-'l-Walid Marvan ibn Ganach) about 1030, com-
posed in the Arabic language, are still extant in manuscript.
Assisted by these previous labors, Abraham ben Ezra and R. D.
Kimchi, especially, (the former about 1150, the latter about 1190-
1250,) won for themselves a classic reputation as grammarians.
Ficm these earliest grammarians proceed many methods of
arrangement and technical terms, which are still in part retained ;
e. g. the designation of the derivative and irregular verbs, after
the old paradigm bS'B, the voces memoj^iales, as tlBS'l^S, and the
like.*
The father of Hebrew philology among Christians was Jo/m
Reuchlin (ob. 1522), to whom Greek literature also owes so much.
But he, as also the grammarians of the next succeeding period
down to John Buxtorf (ob. 1629), still adhered almost exclu-
sively to .Jewish tradition. It was not till after the middle of the
17th century, that the field of view began gradually to extend
itself; and that the study of the sister tongues, chiefly through
the labors of Albert Schultens and N. W. hSchroder, was made
tributary to the grammatical knowledge of Hebrew.
The comparative value of such subsequent works as have
any claims on the ground of enduring, scientific merit, must be.
estimated by comparison with what is required in the grammar
of every ancient language : viz. 1) that all the phenomena of
the language shall be fully and accurately exhibited, in their
organic connection (the empirical and historico-critical element) ;
2) that these facts of the language shall be explained, partly by
comparison with one another and with the analogy of the sister
tongues, and partly from the general philosophy of language (the
philosophical element, or rationale).
* On the rise of Hebrew lexicography, and its early history, see Gesejims
Preface, <fec. (as quoted above, p. 6) ; and also, on the earliest grammarians, Sam.
David Luzzalto, Prolegomeni ad una gramm. ragionata della lingua ebraiea, p. 26. f. ;
JT. Ewald and L. Dukes, Beitrage z. Geschichte der altesten Auslegnng u. Sprach-
erklarung des A. T. ; Hupfeld, de rei grammaticae apud Judieos initiis antiquissi-
misque scriptoribus ; and Munk, notice .sur Abou'l-Walid et sur quelques autres
granunairiens hebreux du X« et du XI« si^cle, in Journal asiatique, 1850.
U INTRODUCTION.
u.
DIVISION AND ARRANGEMENT.
These proceed naturally from the three constituent parts of
every language : viz. 1) articulate sounds denoted by written
signs, and their connection in syllables ; 2) words ; 3) sentences.
Accordingly, the first part (the elements) includes the doctrine
of the sounds, and of the manner of designating them in writing.
It describes, therefore, the nature and relations of the speaking
sounds, the manner of reading written signs (orthoepy), and the
customary mode of writing (orthography). It then treats of the
combination of sounds into syllables and words, and of the laws
and conditions of this union.
The second part (doctrine of forms) treats of words in their \
character as jjarts of speech, and contains : 1) the doctrine of the
formation of words, or of the rise of the different parts of speech
from the roots or from one another ; 2) the doctrine of inflection,
i. e. of the varied forms which words assume, according to their
relation to one another and to the sentence.
The third part (syntax) teaches : 1) the use of the various
inflections, existing in the language, for expressing different
modifications of the ground-thought ; and the manner of express-
ing, by periphrasis, others for which no forms have been coined
in the language ; 2) the laws, by which the parts of speech are
combined into sentences (doctrine of the sentence, or syntax in
the strict sense).
V
PART FIRST.
OF THE ELEMENTS.
CHAPTER I.
OF READING AND ORTHOaRAPHY.
§5.
OF THE CONSONANTS, THEIE FOEMS AND NAMES.
1. The Hebrew alphabet consists of twenty-two consonants,
some of which have also the power of vowels (§7, 2).
Form.
Pronuncia-
tion.
Hebrew
name.
Sounded as
Signification of the name.
Numerical
value.
Final.
m
'
qbx
A'-Uph
Ox
1
2
b, bh
n-'n
Beth
House
2
^
g, gh
b^a-^a
Gi-mH
Camel
3
^
d, dh
^)l
Dd-rnii
Door
4
n
h
^^
He
Window
5
T
V
1^
Vav
Hook
6
T
z
v\
Zd'-yin
Weapon
7
n
ch
mn
Cheth
Fence
8
t:
t
n^t:
Teth
Snake
9
1
y
ni-i
Yodh
Hand
10
1
D
k, kh
^^
Kap/i
Bended hand
20
b
1
^^5
La-t?iSdh
Ox-goad
30
D
12
m
c^
Mem
Water
40
)
D
n
r=
Nan
Fish
50
D
s
1\'Q0
Sd-mSkh
Prop
60
V
y or '
vi
A'-yin
Eye
70
^
&
p, ph
mti
Pe
Mouth
80
r
:s2
P
ts
q
Tsd-dlie
Fish-hook
90
100
Qoph
Back of the head
n
r
ttj^n
Resh
Head
200
TO ■
sh
r^
Shin
Tooth
300
to
s
ri?
tSln
n
t, th
in
Tav
Cross
400
..J
16 PART I. ELEMENTS.
2. The letters now in use, with which the manuscripts of the
Old Testament are written (called the Assyrian or square char-
acter), are not of the original form. On the coins of the Macca-
beean princes* is found another character,t which at an earlier
period was doubtless in general use, in form strongly resembling
the Samaritan, and connected immediately with the Phoenician
letters! (§1, 5). The square letter may also be traced back to
the Phoenician ; but it has most agreement with certain Ara-
maean inscriptions found in Egypt § and at Palmyra. II
An important document, for illustrating the history of the Hebrew
square-letter^ has been recently discovered by Col. Rawlinson in the
Babylonian district ; viz. an Inscription found at Abushadr, just above
the junction of the Tigris and Euphrates. In its characters, there is
retained a resemblance, partly to the Phoenician, and partly to the Pal-
myrene. See : The Inscr. of Abushadr, expl. by Prof. Dietrich. Load.
1854.
3. The five characters which have a different form at the end
of a word {final letters)^ 7> ^j I5 1^? Ij terminate (with the excep-
tion of D) in a perpendicular stroke directed downwards, whilst
the common form has a horizontal connecting line, directed
towards the following letter.
4. Hebrew is read from right to left. The division of a word
at the end of a line is not allowed. To complete a line, certain
letters {dilatabiles) are at times dilated. These are in our
printed books the five following :
c=3, m, b, n, ^4, (DP^'?r!i<.)
1. The figures of the letters were originally hasty and rude repre-
sentations of visible objects, the names of which began with the sounds
of the several characters ; e. g. Gimel, in the older alphabets the rude
figure of a camel's neck,ir denotes properly a camel (^^"'5 = ^'9^), but as
a letter only the initial 5 ; Ayin, prop. eije. y^_if_ , stands only for 5, the
initial letter of this word. In the Phoenician alphabet, the similarity of
the figitres to the object signified by the names may still be seen for the
most part, and even in the square character it appears yet in some let-
ters ; e.g. ^, ^ -J, 3, h, y, ir.
The most probable signification of each name is given in the alphabet.
However certain it is, on the one hand, that the Semites were the
first to adopt this alphabet, yet it is highly probable, on the other, that
* And on some ancient signet-stones. See Rodiger, On tlie Old-Hebrew signet-
stones, in the Zeitschr. der d. morgenl. Gesell. Bd. III., S. 243 u. 347.
f Table of Alphabets, col. 2. % Ibid. col. 1. § Ibid. col. 3. || Ibid. col. 4
^ Ibid. cols. 1, 2, 3.
§5. THE CONSONANTS. 17
the Egyptian writing (the so-called phonetic hieroglyphics) suggested
the principle though not the figures ; for these hieroglyphic characters,
for the most part, indicate the initial sound in the name of the pictured
object; e.g. the hand, tot^ indicates the letter f; the lion, /a6oi, the
letter I*
2. The order of the letters (on which we have an ancient testimony
hi the alphabetical poetic compositions in Ps. xxv., xxxiv., xxxvii., cxix.
Lam. i. — iv.) certainly depended originally on a grammatical considera-
tion of the sounds, as Ave may see from the occurrence in succession of
the three softest labial, palatal, and dental sounds, viz. 3, S, ^, also of
the three liquids, b, a, 3, and other similar arrangements (see Lepsius'
sprachvergleichende Abhandlungen, Berlin, 1836, No. 1) ; but yet other
considerations and influences must also have had some effect upon it,
for it is certainly not a mere accident, that two letters representing a
hand ( Yodh and Kaph), also two exhibiting the head ( Qoph and Besh),
are put together, as is done also with several characters denoting objects
which are connected (Mem and Nun, Ai7i and Pe).
Both the names and the order of the letters (with a trifling altera-
tion) passed over from the Phoenician into the Greek, in which the
letters, from Alpha to Tati, correspond to the ancient alphabet ; whence
proceeded also, directly or m^ediately, the Old-italic, the Roman, and
those derived from them.
3. The letters are used also for signs of member, as the Hebrews had
no special arithmetical characters or ciphers. But this numeral use did
not, according to the existing MSS. take place in the O. T. text, and is
found first on coins of the Maccabees (middle of 2d cent. B. C). It is
now employed in the editions of the Bible for numbering chapters and
verses. As in the numeral system of the Greeks, the units are denoted
by the letters from K to a, the tens by ''—5. 100—400 by p— n. The
hundreds, from 500 — 900, are sometimes denoted by the five final letters,
thus, "] 500, D 600, ) 700, C] 800, y 900 ; and sometimes by n = 400,
with the addition of the remaining hundreds, as pn 500. In combining
different numbers the greater is put first, as X^ 11, NSp 121. Fifteen
is marked by lU = 9 + 6, and not by tii , because with these the name
of God [mn^J commences ; and 16 by Tl:, for a like reason. Thousands
are denoted by the units with two dots above, as x 1000.
4. Abbreviations of words are not found in the text of the O. T. On
coins, however, they occur, and they are in common use by the later
Jews. The sign of abbreviation is an oblique stroke, as 'v"^ for bsiirJ'^ .
'q for *'3'bQ aliquis, '"^ST for laiil et completio = et ccBtera, "'7 or ■''^ for
* See the works of Young, Cliampollion, and others on the Hieroglypliics.
Lepsius exhibits the chief results in his Lettre d, Mr. Rosellini sur V alphabet hiero'
glyphique. Rom. 1837. 8vo. Oomp. Gescnius iu der AUgem. Litt. Zeitung, 1839.
No. 77—81. Hitzig, die Erfindung des Alphabets. Ziirich, 1840, fol. /. Oh-
kciuscn Uber den Ursprung des Alphabets. Kiel, 1841, 8vo,
2
18 PAET L ELEMENTS.
§6.
.PRONUNCIATION AND DIVISION OF CONSONANTS.
1. It is of the greatest importance to understand the original
sound of every consonant, since very many grammatical pecu-
liarities and changes (§ 18, (fcc.) are regulated and explained by
the pronunciation. Our knowledge of this is derived partly from
the pronunciation of the kindred dialects, particularly of the yet
living Arabic, partly from observing the resemblance and inter-
change of letters in the Hebrew itself (§ 19), partly from the tra-
dition of the Jews.*
The pronunciation of the Jews of the present day is not uniform.
The Polish and German Jews adopt the Syriac, while the Spanish and
Portuguese Jews, whom most Cliristian scholars (after the example of
Reuchlin) follow, more properly prefer the Arabic pronunciation.
The manner in which the Seventy have written Hebrew proper
names in Greek letters, furnishes an older tradition of greater weight.
Several, however, of the Hebrew sounds they were unable to represent
for want of corresponding characters in the Greek language, e. g. S , UJ ,
which is true also of Jerome's expression of Hebrew words in Roman
letters, after the Jewish pronunciation of his time. For that of the Jews .
now in northern Africa, see Barges, Journ. Asiat. 1S4S.
2. The following list embraces those consonants whose pro-
nunciation requires special attention, exhibiting in connection
those which bear any resemblance in sound to each other.
1. Among the giitlurals, N is the lightest, a scarcely audible breathing
from the lungs, the spiriUis leni's of the Greeks; similar to n, but softer.
Even before a vowel, it is almost lost upon the ear ("i^S{, ufirtq) hke the
h in the French habit, homme [or Eng. Jwii?-^. After a vowel it is often
not heard at all, except in connection with the preceding vowel sound,
with which it combines its own (NS^ mdtsd, § 23, 2).
n before a vowel, is exactly our h {spiritJis asper) ; after a vowel at
the end of words, it may like X unite its sound with that of the preceding
vowel [^\\ gillu), or it may retain its character as a guttural (pTDa gA-
Ihah), which is regularly the case at the end of a syllable in the middle
of a word, as in "3113 neh-pdkh (§ 7, 2, and § 14).
* Important aid may also be derived from an accurate physiological observa-
tion of the whole system of soimds, and of their formation by the organs of speech.
See on this subject Liskovhis' Theorie der Stimme, Leipzig, 181-4, /. Miiller's
Handbuch der Physiologic, Bd. II., S. 179, <fec., also Strodlmann' a Anatomische
Vorhalle zur Physiologic der Stimme und der Sprachlaute, Altona, 1837. In its
reference to grammar, see U. Ilupfcld in Jahn's Jahrbiichcr f. Philologie, 1829, H. 4,
and //. E. BindneWs Abhandlungen zur allgem. vcrgleichenden Sprachlehre
(Hamb., 1838). I. Physiologic der Stimm- und Sprachlaute, S. 1, <fec.
§6. PROI^UNCIATIOK 19
5 is nearly related to X ; and is a sound peculiar to the organs of tho
Semitic race. Its hardest sound is that of a g- slightly rattled in the
throat, as 'TibSJ , LXX. Fo/joquu ; iiiv , Fu^u ; it is elsewhere, like X .
a gentle breathing, as in ^bs, V/A/ ; p^'ss, "a^iuUx. In the mouth of the
Arabian, the first often strikes the ear like a soft guttural r, the second
as a sort of vowel sound like a. To pass over S>, as many do in reading
and in the expression of Hebrew words by our letters (e. g. ^bs Eli^
pb^ss Amalek), and to pronounce it simply as g, are equally incorrect.
The best representation we could give of it in our letters would be gh or
'g- (but softer), as SS'iX, something like arba^'*, JTibS ^g'^mora. The
nasal pronunciation, gn or ng, of the Polish Jews, is entirely false. '
n is the hardest of the guttural sounds. It it a guttural ch. as uttered
by the Swiss, e. g. Macht, resembling the Spanish x and j. While the
Hebrew was a living language this letter had two grades of sound, being
uttered feebly in some words and more strongly in others.*
1 also the Hebrews frequently pronouncea with a hoarse guttural
sound, not as a lingual made by the vibration of the tongue. Hence it
is not merely to be reckoned among the liquids (Z, «i, ?i, r), but, in many
respects, it belongs also to the class of gutturals. (§ 22, 5.)
2. In sibilant sounds the Hebrew language is rich, more so than the
Aramasan. which in part adopts instead of them the flat, lingual sounds.
"d and iu were originally one letter U3 (pronounced without doubt like
sh), and in unpointed Hebrew this is still the case. But as this sound
was in many words very soft, approaching to that of s, the grammarians
distinguished this double pronunciation by the diacritic point into 1!3 sh
(which occurs most frequently), and i^ s.
iU resembled D in pronunciation: it differed from this letter, however
and was probably uttered more strongly, being nearly related to ly.
Hence 130 lo close up, and "i3iU io reward, have different meanings,
being distinct roots, as also bao to be foolish, and bS'iJ to be wise. At a
later period this distinction was lost, and hence the Syrians employed
only O for both, and the Arabians only lu. They also began to be inter-
changed even in the later Hebrew ; as ISO = "isia to hire, Ezr. iv. 5 ,
mlob for nnb30 folly, Eccles. i. 17.
T was a soft, murmuring s, the Gr. 'C (by which the LXX. represent
it), the Fr. and Eng. z.
3. p and a diflfer essentially from 3 and n. The former (as also S)
are uttered with strong articulation, and with a compression of the
organs of speech in the back part of the mouth, answering to k and t.
* In the Arabic language, the peculiarities of -which have been carefully noted
by the grammarians, the liai'd and soft sounds of V and n (as well as the different
pronunciations of 1, U , U), are indicated by diacritic points. Two letters are
thus made from each : from y the softer p Ain, and the harder a Ghain ; from
n the softer c^ Bha, and the harder ^ Kha,
20 PART I. ELEMENTS.
3. The six consonants (the so-called Mutes)^
n, B, D, "I, \ n. (nB37?a,)
have a twofold pronunciation :* 1) a harder, more slender sound
{tenuis), as h, g, d, k, p, i, and, 2) a soft sound uttered with a
gentle aspiration {aspirata). The former is the original sound.
It is found at the beginning of words and syllables, Avhen there
IS no vowel immediately preceding, and it is indicated by a point
in the letter {Daghesh lene), as 3 6 (§ 13). The aspirated sound
occurs after a vowel immediately preceding, and is denoted in
manuscripts by Raphe (§ 14, 2), but in the printed text it is
known by the absence of the Daghesh. In some of these letters
(especially ^) the difference is less perceptible to our ear. The
modern Greeks aspirate distinctly />*, y, §, and the Danes d at
the end of a word. The Greeks have two characters for the two
sounds of the other letters of this class, as 3 ?e, D^, S ;r, B gc,
n r, n t9-.
For tke precise cases in which the one pronunciation or the other
occurs, see § 21. The modern Jews sound the aspirated D as r, and
the n nearly as s, e. g. f^''UJi<'n reshis, il"! rav.
4. After what has been said, the usual division of the conso-
nants according to the organs of speech employed in uttering
them, will be more intelligible and useful. The common divi-
sion is as follows :
a) Gutturals, H, n, y, «, (3?rini?)
b) Palatals, p, 5, ^, \ (pT^)
c) Linguals, t:, n, *!, with 3, b, C^^'^^)
d) Dentals or sibilants, 1% IS, D, T, (tJSDT)
e) Labials, S], n, tt, 1, (=1^^3)
The letter 1 partakes of the character of both the first and
third classes.
The liquids also, "1, D, '52, b, which have in many respects a
common character, are to be regarded as a separate class.
In the Hebrew, as well as in all the Semitic dialects, the strength
and harshness of pronunciation, which characterized the earlier periods
of the language, gradually gave way to more soft and feeble sounds.
In this way many nice distinctions of the earlier pronunciation were
neglected and lost.
* Sound Pi as <, n as th in thick; "^ &i d, ^ dh as th in that ; Q as ^, B aa
ph or /; ^ as h, '2 bh aa v ; & as jr in go ; 3 as k. To give the aspirated sound of
3 and 3 , pronounce g and k, rolling the palate with the same breath. — ^Tr.
§ 7. THE VOWELS. 21
This appears, 1) in the preference of the softer letters ; e. g. p?S,
pSt (see § 2, 3, Rem,), Syr. pSt ; 2) in the pronunciation of the same
letter ; thus in Syriac S has almost always a feeble sound ; the Gali-
leans uttered it as well as n like X ; in iEthiopic t: has the sound of »",
n that of h.
OF THE VOWELS IN GENERAL, VOWEL-LETTERS, AND
VOWEL-SIGNS.
1. The origin of the scale of five vowels, a, e, i, c. u, in the
three primary vowel-sounds A, I, U, is even more distinctly seen
in the Hebrew, and its cognate dialects, than in oth^r languages.
Here, E and O have in all cases arisen from a blending of two
pure vowel-sounds into one ; viz. e from the union of /, and 6
from the union of U, witli a preceding short A. Hence, they are
properly diphthongs contracted, e arising from ai, 6 from au
according to the following scheme :*
A
az, a, e / \ mi, o
The more ancient Arabic has not the vowels e and 6, and always
uses for them the diphthongs at and au ; e. g. ')''3 , Arabic bain, di^ ,
Arab. yaum. It is only in the modern popular language that these
diphthongs are contracted into one sound. The close relation of those
sounds appears from a comparison of the Greek and Latin (e. g. Csesar,
KaiauQ; &aviiu, Ion. i^w/ia), from the French pronunciation of ai and au.
from the Germanic languages (Goth, auso auris, old High-Germ. Ora
Ohr ; Goth, snaivs, old High-Germ, sneo Schnee), and even from the
German popular dialects {Oge for Auge, Goth, augo; Steen for Stein.
Goth. Slains).
The Arabic, as now pronounced among the Bedouins, departs less
from the three primary vowel-sounds, a, i, u, than that spoken in Syria
and Egypt ( IVallin, as quoted p. 22, note). A similar fact is stated by
Barges, respecting the Jews in the province of Oran (Journ. Asiat. 1S48,
NovJ.
2. With this is connected the manner of indicating the vowel-
sounds in writing. As only three principal vowel-sounds were
distinguished, no others were designated in writing ; and even
* For the sound of these vowels, see note on § 8, — Tr,
22 PART I. ELEMENTS.
these were represented not by appropriate signs, but by certain
consonants, whose feeble sounds had a very close affinity with
the vowel-sounds to be expressed. I Thus, 1 (like the Lat. F and
the old Ger. W) represented U and also O ; ^ (like the Lat. /)
represented / and U. The designation of A, the purest of all
the voAvels, and of most frequent occurrence, Avas regularly omit-
ted,* except at the end of a word where long a was represented,
in Hebrew, by n, and more seldom by i5.t These two letters
stood also for final e and o.
Even those two vowel-letters (1 and '') were used but sparing-
ly ; primarily, and regularly, only when the sounds represented
were long.l In this case, also, they were sometimes omitted
(§8, 4). Every thing else relating to the .one and quantity of
the vowel-sounds, whether a consonant should be pronounced
with or without a vowel, and even whether T and ^ were to be
regarded as vowels or consonants, the reader was to decide for
himself.
Thus for example, h'op might be read qatal. qatel, qatol, qHol, qoiel,
qiiteJ, qattel, quttal ; "iS'i, dahhar (a word), dehher (a pestilence), dibber
(he hath spoken), dabber (to speak), dobher (speaking), dubbar (it has
been spoken) ; T\^•Q might be maveth (death), or muih, moth (to die) ;
I'^a might be read bin, ben, bnyin.
How imperfect and indefinite such a mode of writing was, is
easily seen ; yet during the whole period in which the Hebrew
was a spoken language, no other signs for vowels were employed.
Reading was, therefore, a harder task than with our more ade-
quate modes of writing, and much must have been supplied by
the reader's knowledge of the living mother-tongue.
* So ill Sanscrit, the aucient Persian cuneiform writing, and Etliiopic, short a
alone of all the vowels is not indicated by any sign, but the simple consonant is
pronounced with this vowel.
■f The close connection between H, t*, and the A-souud, 1 and the U-sound,
*i and the I-sound, admits of easy physiological explanation, if we attend to the
formation of these sounds by the organs of speech. The vowel A is formed by
opening the mouth without changing the position of the organs; so also PI and X.
^7 is sounded in the fore part of the mouth, with the lips a little projecting and
I'ounded ; so also 1 [linglish w]. / is formed at the fore part of the palate ; so
also *^ [our y]. E is formed at the back of the palate, between i and a; 0 in the
under part of the mouth, between u and a.
\ The Phoenicians did not indicate even the long vowels, except in very rare
cases ; their oldest monuments can hardly be said to have any designation of
vowels. See Mon. Phoenicia, pp. 57, 58 ; and above, § 2, 2.
§ 8. THE VOWEL-SIGNS. 23
3. But when the Hebrew ceased to be a spoken language, and
the danger of losing the correct pronunciation, as well as the
perplexity arising from this indefinite mode of writing, continu-
ally increased, the vowel-signs or points were invented, which
minutely settled what had previously been left uncertain. Of
the date of this invention we have no account ; but a compari-
son of historical facts warrants the conclusion, that the vowel
system was not completed till about the seventh century of the
Christian era. It was the work of Jewish scholars, well skilled
in the language, who, it is highly probable, copied the example
of the Syrian and Arabian grammarians.
See Gesch. d. hebr. Spr. S. 1S2 fl'. and Hupfeld in ^^en tlieolog. Studien
und Kritiken, 1830, No. 3, where it is shown that the Talmud and Jerome
make no mention of vowel-points.
4. This vowel system has, probably, for its basis the pronun-
ciation of the Jew^s of Palestine ; and its consistency, as well as
the analogy of the kindred languages, furnishes strong proof of
its correctness, at least as a whole. It seems to have expressed,
however, not so much the pronunciation of common life, as the
traditional one which had become customary in the public and
solemn reading of the sacred books. Its authors have labored
to exhibit by signs the minute gradations of the vowel-sounds,
carefully marking even half-vowels and helping sounds, sponta-
neously adopted in all languages, yet seldom expressed in writ-
ing. To the same labors we owe the different marks by which
the sound of the consonants themselves is modified (§§ 11-14),
and the accents (§§ 15, 16).
In Arabic, the vowel system is much more simple. It has only three
signs for vowels, according to the three primary vowel-sounds. The
Syriac punctuation is likewise founded on a less complicated system. It
is possible that the Hebrew also had at an earlier period a more simple
vowel system, but no actual traces of it are found.
OF THE VOWEL-SIGNS.*
1. The full vowels (in distinction from the half-vowels, ? 10,
1, 2), are exhibited in the following table, classed according to
the three primary vowel-sounds.
* The vowels, as represented in this translation, are sounded as follows: — ■
& and <t as a iu father ; a as the second a in abaft ; d as e in error ; e and i as am
24 PART L ELESIENTS.
il5= Vowels essentially long (§ 25, 1) are denoted by «, e, 6 ;
tone-long vowels (§9, 1, 2 ; 7; 10, 3) by a, e, o; short vowels
by u, S, 6. For the i and ?« sounds, only the first and third ol
these signs {i and t, u and w) are required (§9).
Flrsl Class. For the A sound.
a) — Qdm8ts, a, d, ^"^ i/ddh, D|5 qdm.
b) — PuttQch, a, rQ bath.
c) — jSSghOl, a, as in the first syllable of 1\^'Q mdlSkh, where
— has sprung honi — * [tf^'O], and also in union with '', as ?j'i'T|^
yddhdkhd^ T\yhlif g''ldnd^ like the French e in mere [or nearly ae
our e in t/iei'e].
Second Class. For the I a7id E sound.
J a) ^— and — long CliirSq, i, Cp^l? tsuddiqim.
\^ b) — short Chir&q^ t, ilSi? immo.
^ c) "^-^ and — Tsere with and without Yodh, e, L^ iT'3
„ J beth, DTlJ shem.
j (/) _ tSSg/iul, obtuse ^, "1BD sejiher, "^jTiJ s/id'w, accented
l^ e, HTn chOze.
Third Class. For the U ancZ O sound.
f a) ^ iS/mrSk, ii, T)^12 mtith.
C/-^ b) — Qibbi'its, u, D^D sulldm ; but also w (Shureq de-
l^ fectively written, No. 4), ''^'0 (for "^nTO) muthi.
j c) i and — ChoUni^o, o, bip (^6Z, n"l roft/t.
I r/) — Q,dmets-chdtiij)}i., d, "pH cAOy.
e) also — , obtuse g, so far as it springs from u or o, as
in Drii? a^^t%^, "HX Cth (from nis).
The names of the vowels are, according to the usage of the Semitic
grammarians, almost all taken from the form and action of the mouth in
uttering the sounds. Thus ntnQ signifies opening, "''i^ (also '^'^'4) burst-
ing (of the mouth), p"i"^n gnashing, ch'in fulness, from its full tone (also
C>iS ^h-qfull mouth), 'py^'^ properly avQia^iog, 7=i3p closing (of the mouth).
This last meaning belongs also to y53|5 ; and the reason why long a and
short 0 (t|1^n 'j'Tip Qariiels correptuni) have the same sign and name is,
apparently, that long a was sounded rather obscurely, nearly as o,
fate ; e as c iu 7net ; i as i in pique ; z as i in pick ; 6 and <J as o in hull/, 6 as o in
whoUj/ ; u as oo in moon, w-<is u in full; au as oti in found; ai sounded as aye.
The long and short sounds of the same vowel should differ only in length. — Tr.
* The Jewish grammarians call Se/jhol also "small rattaeh."
§8. THE VOWEL-SIGNS. 25
the full sound of which it now has among German and Polish Jews .
comp. the Syr. a, among the Maronites = o, the Swedish a, and the
early change in Hebrew from a to o, § 9, 10, 2.* The distinction between
them is shown in § 9. Only Seghol (^iJD cluster of grapes) appears to
be named after its /orm.
The names were, moreover, so formed that the sound of each vowel
was heard in the first syllable ; and in conformity to this, some write
Snghol, Qoineis-chatuph, Qiibbuts.
2. As appears in the above examples, the vowel-sign is regu-
larly put under the consonant after which it is to be pronounced,
n rd, "] ru, "1 re, "l ru, &c. There is an exception to this rule in
Pattach, Avhen it stands under a guttural at the end of a word
{Pattach furtive, see § 22, 2, h), for it is then spoken before the
consonant. We must also except Cholem (without Vav), which
is put to the left over the letter, "I ro.
When Cholem (without Vav) and the diacritic point over l!3 (b, la)
come together, one dot serves for both, as XlJb sc-ne for ^53*iU, ri'iJ?2 not
nuJb moshe. U3 (with two points), when no vowel stands under it, is sho,
as "I53ttj sho-mer ; when no vowel goes before it, os, as disi") ylr-pos.
The figure i is sometimes sounded ov, the 1 being a consonant with
Cholem before it, as nib lo-vs (lending) ; and sometimes vo, the Cholem
being read after the Vav, as "pS a-v6n (sin) for "pi?. In very exact
impressions a distinction is made thus : l" or, i vo, and i o.f
3. The vowels of the first class [for the A sound] are, with
the exception of "^-^ in the middle and of n— , ^!_ at the end of a
word, indicated only by vowel-signs (§7, 2) ; but in the two other
classes [for the / and E soiuid and for the U and O sound] the
* It has been conjectured that the signs for these vowels were originally dif-
forent (as 7 a, t 6) and became identical only through carelessness in writing; but
such a difference cannot be proved, for these two marks are quite identical, the
former {-) being only the original, and the latter ( t ) the modified form.
f Of late there haS come to our knowledge a system of vowel-signs, differing
in many respects frc.n the common one. It is found in certain Manuscripts, ori-
ginating among Persian Jews, which are now at Odessa. The vowel-signs, all
except >1 , stand over the consonants. In form also they are almost wholly differ-
ent, and even, to some extent, in respect to the representation of sounds. For
example : Pattach and Seghol, when accented, are represented by one and the
same sign ; and on the contrary, the unaccented short vowels are indicated by
different signs, according as they stand in a syllable sharpened by Daghesh forte,
or not. In the accents there is less variation ; and they also stand, in part, under
the line of consonants. See farther in Pinner's Prospectus der der Odessaer Gesell-
schaft fiir Geschichte u. Alterthiimer gehorendeu altesten hebr. u. rabbin. MSS.,
Odessa 1845; and a general description of this Persian-Jewish vowel-system by
Rodiger, in the Halle Algem. Lit. Zeit. 1848, Aug. JS^o. 169
26 PART I. ELEMENTS
long vowels are mostly expressed by vowel-letters, the uncertain
sound of which is determined by the signs standing before or
within them. Thus,
^ may be determined by Chireq ('^_), Tsere 0—), Seghol ('^^).
1 by Shureq (1) and Cholein (i).*
In Arabic the long a is regularly indicated by the vowel-letler Aleph
(X — ) written in the text, so that there, three vowel-letters answer .o
the three vowel-classes. In Hebrew the relation is somewhat different
(§ 9, 1. and § 23, 2).
4. When in the second and third classes the long vowel is
expressed without a vowel-letter, it is called scrvptio defectiva,
when with a vowel-letter, scriptio ple7ia. Thus bip and D^p are
written /wZ/y, Ji'bp and Dp defectively/.
The choice of the full or the defective mode of Avriting is not
always arbitrary, as there are certain cases in which only the
one or the other is admissible. Thus the full form is necessary
at the end of a word, e. g. ^btpp, '^nb'Op, '^^'^, ^Db^ ; but the defec-
tive is most usual when the vowel is preceded by the analogous
vowel-letter as consonant, e. g. Dt'iS for U"^^^^ .
But in other cases much depended on the option of the transcribers,
so that the same word is written in various ways. e. g. Til^il^n Ezek.
xvi. 60, '^ST'Spn Jer. xxiii. 4, where other editions have "^nixipn. It may
be observed, however, •
a) That the defective writing is used chiefly, though not constantly,
when the word has increased at the end, and the vowel of the penultima
has lost somewhat of its stress in consequence of the accent or tone of
the word being moved forward [see § 29, 2], as p'''^S, C'^p'ns ; bip, niVp;
b) That in the later books of the Old Testament the full form, in the
earlier the defective, is more usual. f
* The vowel-sign which serves to determine the sound of the vowel-lttter, is
Baid to be homogeneous with that letter. Many, after the example of the Jewish
grammarians, nse here the expression, " the vowel-letter rests [quiesces) in the
vowel-sign." Hence the letters "^ and 1 (with N and n , see § 23) are called Uteres
quiescibiles ; when they serve as vowels, quiescentex, whm they are consonants,
mobiles. But the expression is not suitable : we should rather say, "The vowel-
letter is sounded as this or that vowel, or stands iu place of the vowel." The
vowel-letters are also called by grammarians, matres lectionis [becaiise they are
used as guides iu reading the unpointed text].
\ The same historical relation may be shown in the Phcnnitian and (in the
case of K as a vowel-letter) in Arabic — iu the latter especially by means of the
older Koran MSS. and the writing on coins.
§ 9. CHAEACTER OF THE SEVERAL VOWELS. 27
5. Ill the kindred dialects, when a vowel-letter has before it
a vowel-sign that is not kindred or homogeneous, a diphthong is
formed, e. g. 1-^ au, 1— eii, '^-^, '^— ai. But in Hebrew, accord-
ing to the pronunciation handed down by the Jews, 1 and "^ retain
in such cases their consonant power, — as av, ev, ay* e. g. IT vav^
15 gev^ "^n chuy, "''13 goy. In sound T^— is the same with 1—,
namely, av^ as *^'y^ (Tbhurdv.
The LXX. give generally in these cases an actual diphtliong. as in
the Arabic, and this must be considered as an earlier stage of pronun-
ciation ; the modern Jewish pronunciation is, on the other hand, similar to
the modern Greek, in which nv, iv sound like av, ev. In the manuscripts
Yodh and Vav are, in this case, even marked with Mappiq (§ 14, 1).
§9.
CHAEACTER AND VALUE OF THE SEVEEAL VOWELS.
Numerous as these signs appear, they yet do not suffice to
express, completely, all the various modifications of the vowel-
sounds, particularly in reference to their quantity, as long or
short, acute or grave ; and, moreover, the designations of the
speaking sounds, by these signs, cannot always be said to be
perfectly adequate. We give here, therefore, for the clearer
understanding of this subject, a brief commentary ,on the char-
acter and value of the several vowels, with special reference to
their quantity, but having respect at the same time to their
mutability (§25 and §27).
L First Class. A sound.
1. Qamets is always long a ; but yet it is in its nature of two
kinds :
1) The essentially long and unchangeable a, for which the
Arabic has i?-;: , as sriS kHhuhh (writing), S35 gannuhh (thief),
D^ qdm (surrexit), written at times Di^p. 2) The prosodially
long a,t both in the tone-syllable and close before or after it.
This sound always comes from short a,+ and is found in an open
syllable (i. e. one ending with a vowel, see §26, 2), e. g. bu]?,
* AVhcn y represents the consonant power of "^ , it should have its full sound,
as in you. — ^Tr.
f See § 25, and § 26, 3.
X lu Arabic, the short « is every -where retained.
28 PART I. ELEMEIs^TS.
b^^S, D^p!^j and also in a closed (i. e. one ending with a conso-
nant), as ^^, Dbiy. In the closed syllable, however, it can stand
only when this has the tone, "ill, obis? ; but in the open, it is
esjDecially frequent before the tone-syllable, as "li'l, "JjpT, bi^ll,
''D5::p, D5b. When the tone is moved forward or lessened, this
vowel becomes, in the former case, short a (Pattach), and in
the latter, vocal SJfva (§27, 3), "ini, nn^ {d^bhdr)] DDn, ODH
(ch^khdm) ; bt:jp, ob-Jjp.
As the closing sound of a word, Qamets can stand by itself
(ri5uj5, T^b) ; but here, it is often represented by n, among the
original consonant-letters (nns, niEiS).
2. Pattach, or the shorter a, stands properly only in a closed
syllable^ with and without the tone (b'^p, DPibup). Most of the
cases where it now stands in an open syllable ("i??, ^'}^), were
originally closed ("15'2, iTi'l'S, see §28, 4) ; and in such cases it has
generally become long a
On the union of Pattach Avith X (J^— ) see § 23, 2 : on a as a helping
sound {Pattach furtive), see § 22, 2, 6.
3. Seghol {ci, S) belongs chiefly to the second class of vowels,
but now and then, according to its origin, to the first or the third
class. It belongs to the first, when it is a modification of a (like
the German Gast, Gdste, e. g. y'^i< from y^i^. Although an
obtuse sound, it can stand in the tone-syllable, as in the first
syllable of p'lS tsddSq, and even in the gravest tone-syllable at
the end of a clause or sentence (in paiise).
II. Second Class. I and E sound.
4. The long i is most commonly expressed by the letter ^ (a
fully written Chireq *'— ) ; but even when this is not the case, it
makes no essential difference, provided the vowel is long by na-
ture (§8, 4),'e. g. p^^2 pi. D^p^l* ; sn^:" pi. ^xn;^. Whether a
defectively written Chireq is long, may be best known from the
grammatical origin and character of the form, but often also from
the character of the syllable (§ 2G) or from the position of Methegh
(§ 10, 2) at its side, as in 1i<1\
5. The sliort Chireq (always written without '^) is specially
frequent in sharpened syllables (b^p, '^'QX),* and in closed unac-
cented syllables (bbpb). Not seldom it conies from a by shorten-
* For this sliarj) i the LXX, mostly use «, ^i<>i35a3J 'Hfiftaiovijl.
§9. CHARACTER OF THE SEVERAL VOWELS. 29
ing, as in '^ria (my daughter) from ma, '^n^'l from *i^'n, VtDfp';" out
of bbj?\ Sometimes also it is a mere helping vowel, as in fi"^^
for n;'^ (§ 28, 4).
The Jewish and older grammarians call every fully written Chireq
Chireq magnum, and every defectively written one, Chireq parvum. In
respect to the sound, this is a wrong distinction.
6. The longest e, Tsere with Yodh i^—), comes from the
diphthong ai "^ (§ 7, 1), which also stands for it in Arabic and
Syriac, as bD''?n (palac,e) in Ar. and Syr. haikal. It is therefore a
very long and unchangeable vowel, longer even than "*— , since
it approaches the quantity of a diphthong. This ''— is but seldom
written defectively ("'Dl^ for '^D^'y Is. iii. 8), and then it retains the
same value.
At the end of a word ''— and ''— must be written fully : very rare is
the form Th'qp^ (§ 44, Rem. 4).
7. The Tsere without Yodh is the long e of the second rank,
which stands only in and close hy the tone-syllable, like the Q,a-
mets above in No. 1, 2. Like that, it stands in either an open
or a closed syllable, the former in the tone-syllable or before it
("ISO, n5tp), the latter only in the tone-syllable ('(3, b^jp).
8. The iSeghol, so far as it belongs to the second class, is
most generally a short obtuse e sound, a shortening of the (— ),
"■jS from )2 (son). It arises also out of the shortest e (vocal
Sh°va, § 10, 1), when this is heightened in pronunciation by the
tone, as "'H'^l for Tl^l , ^tjb for "^tib • and besides it appears as an
involuntary helping sound, ISO for "iBD, %"} for bSi';' (§28, 4).
The Seghol with Yodh (''--) is a long but yet obtuse a (e of the
French) formed out of ai, n3ib|i galena, and hence it belongs ra-
ther to the first class.
See more on the rise of Seghol out of other vowels in §27, Rem. 1, 2, 4.
III. TViird Class. U and O sound.
9. In the third class is found nearly the same relation as in
the second. In the u sound we have : 1) the long u, whether
a) fully written ^ Shureq (answering to the ''— . of the second
class), e. g. b^3T (dwelling), or h) defectively written without
Vav -- (analogous to the long — of the second class), Qibhuts,
namely, that which stands for Shureq, and which might more
properly be called defective iShnreq ("'^^T, I'lfltt^), being in fact a
30 PART I. ELEMENTS.
long vowel like Shureq, and only an orthographic shortening foi
the same ;
2) The short ii, the proper Qibbuts (analogous to the short
Chireq), in an unaccented closed syllable, and especially in a
sharpened one, as ^nblp (table), najP (bedchamber).
For the latter the LXX. put o, e. g. ^\^?, , ^OdolXan, but it by no
means follows that tliis is the true pronunciation ; indeed, they also
express Chireq by t. Equally incorrect was the former custom of giving
to both kinds of Qibbuts the sound ii.
Sometimes also the short u in a sharpened syllable is expressed by 1,
e. g. n^^i = ^h:_, § 27, Rem. 1.
10. The O sound stands in the same relation to U, as E to
/in the second class. It has four gradations : 1) the longest 6,
viz. from the diphthong an (§ 7, 1) ; it is mostly written in full,
i {Cholem pleniun)., as tsitJ (whip), Arab, saut, tb'ys (evil) from
Tbys ; sometimes it is written defectively, as ^'ITC (thy bullock),
from nilij ;
2) The long o, which has sprung from an original a (cor-
ruptly sounded) ; it is usually written fully in a tone-syllable
and defectively in a toneless one, as bt3p Arab, and Chald. qatel,
Wb^ Arab, and Chald. eluh^ plur. D^nibii;, Dbl> Arab, and Chald.
*cdam ;
3) The tone-long o, which is a lengthening of short o or u by
the tone, and which becomes short again on its removal, as bs
(all), -bS [k6l), Dbs {kidlam), bb]?-', ^bts]?;', ^btp;:^ (in this last in-
stance it is shortened to vocal Sh^va, yiqflu). In this case the
Cholem is fully written only by way of exception ;
4) The Qcmiets-chatuph (— ), always short and in the same
relation to Cholem as the iS'eghol of the second class to the Tsere,
"53 kOl, Dj?^'l vuy-yiX-qOm. On the distinction between this and
Qamets, see below in this section.
11. The )Seg-hol belongs here also, so far as it arises out of m
or 0 (No. 3), e. g. in Ons, Dnbl2]:. (§ 27, Rem. 4, b.)
On the half-voivels see the next section.
12. In the following table we give a scale of the vowel-sounds
m each of the three classes, with respect to their quantity, from
the greatest length to the utmost shortness. The table does not
indeed suffice to exhibit all vowel transitions which occur hi the
language, but yet it furnishes a view of those in more frequent
use.
; 9. CHAEACTER OF THE SEVEEAL VOWELS.
31
F^rst Class. A.
— longest d (Arabic
— tone-lengthened a
(from short a or —7) in
and by the tone-sylla-
ble.
~z short a.
— obtuse a.
Greatest shortening
to -n" or — * in an open,
and to -72 in a closed
syllable.
Second Class. I and E.
"^—e diphthongal (from
ai).
'^-::C (from ai).
^— or — ; long i.
— tone-lengthened e
(from -7 ^ or — :: obtuse e)
in and immediately be-
fore the tone-syllable.
— short t.
-7 obtuse e.
Greatest shortening
to — " or -7* in an open
syllable, besides the —^i
or '— in the closed.
Third Class. O a7id U.
i 6 diphthongal (from
an).
1 or — 6 corrupted
from d.
^ or — 7 long u.
■^ tone-lengthened 0
(from — 6 or -^) in the
tone-syllable.
— short u, especially
in a sharpened syllable.
— short 6.
-7 obtuse e.
Greatest shortening to
_o or —" in an open syl-
lable, besides the short
— or — 6 in the closed.
ON THE DISTINCTION OF QAMETS AND QAMETS-CHATUPH.
Of the inadequate repiesentation of the vowel-sounds, there
is a striking- example in the use of the same sign (J both for
long a (Q,amets) and for short Q (Q^amets-chatuph). In distin-
guishing between them, the learner, who has not yet a know-
ledge of the grammatical derivation of the words to be read (the
only sure guide), will be directed by the two following rules :
1. The sign (J is o in a closed syllable which has not the
tone [or accent^ ; for such a syllable cannot have a long vowel
(§ 26, 3). Examples of various kinds are —
a) When a simple Sh^va follows, dividing syllables, as in >^^rC chokh-
vid (wisdom), fr^^T z6kh-ra ; with a Meihegh, on the contrary, the (^)
is a, and closes the syllable, but then the following Sh®va is a half-vowel
{vocal Sh'^va),as fT^^J za-kli^ra, according to § 16, 2.
b) When Daghesh forte follows, as QTia hvttim (houses), "'isn chon-
ne-ni (pity me) ; also D?"^!!}! bvttikhem (notwithstanding the Methegh,
which stands by the vowel in the second syllable before the tone).
c) When Maqqeph follows (§ 16, 1), as cnxn-bs kvl-haadlmm (all
men).
d) When the unaccented closed syllable is final, as Dj^'ji vaij7jdq6m
(and he stood up). — There are some cases where d in the final syllable
loses its tone by Maqqeph (§ 16, 1) and yet remains unchanged, e. g.
Mn-nns Esth. iv. 8 ; i^-nd Gen. iv. 25. Methegh usually stands in
these cases, but not always.
* This portion must, in order to be fully understood, be studied in connection
with what is said on the syllables in § 2G, and on Methegh in § 16, 2.
32 PART I. ELEMENTS.
In cases like •^st^'rj.i "^iV ^'^'"''"'^! where the (t) has the tone, it is a,
according to § 26, 5.
2. The sign (,) as short 6 m an open syllable is far less fre-
quent, and belongs to the exceptions in § 26, 3. It occurs a)
when Chatcph-Qatnets follows, as i^5^5* pd-^Zo (his deed); b)
when another Q,amets-ChaUij)Ji follows, as 'ribys ^^O-sr-AVmt (thy
deed) ; c) in two anomalous words, where it stands merely for
(^. ), which are found so even in manuscripts, viz. C'lp'!})^ qO-dha-
shim, sanctuaries, and D'''l2?'^^ sliO-ra-shim, roots. (§93, 6, 3.)
In these cases (t) is followed hj Methegh. although it is 6, since
Methegh always stands in the second syllable before the tone. The
exceptions that occur can be determined only by the grammatical deri-
vation, as "'3X3 in the ship (read: ha-°ni) 1 Kings ix. 27, with the article
included ; on the contrary v]N '''^Oi? b6-cli°ri aph Ex. xi. 8. without the
article.
§10.
OF THE HALF- VOWELS AND THE SYLLABLE-DIVIDER (SH-^VA).
1. Besides the full vowels, of which §9 chiefly treats, the
Hebrew has also a series of very slight vowel-sounds, which may
be called half -void els. t We may regard them in general as ex-
treme shortenings, perhaps mere traces, of more full and distinct
vowels in an earlier period of the language.
To these belongs, first, the sign — , the slightest and most
indistinct half-vowel, somethijig like an obscure half S. It is
called *S*/i*va,§ and also simple Sh''va to distinguish it from the
composite (see below. No. 2), and vocal SIfva {Sh^va mobile) to
distinguish it from the silent {Sh^va quiescens), which is merely
a divider of syllables (see below. No. 3). This last can occur
only under a consonant closing the syllable, and is thus distin-
guished from the vocal Sh®va, whose place is under a consonant
beginning the syllable, whether a) at the beginning of the word,
as bbj? q^tol, ii^'a'a nfmalle^ or b) in the middle of the word, as
* That a ought here to be considered and divided as an open syllable ibs | Q
appears from § 26, 7.
f This case is connected with the foregoing, the second Qamcta-Chatuph having
originated in Chateph-Qamets.
\ In the table § 9, 12, the half- vowels have already been exhibited for the sake
of a complete view. Tliey are expressed by small letters.
§ The name NITli (written also i<312J) is of doubtful origin and signification.
§ 10. HALF- VOWELS AND SYLLABLE-DIVIDEK. 33
'nbti'^p qd-fld, 1^t:p^ yiq-fla, ^btOp qit-flu. So also in cases like
ibbn ha-lHit (which stands for ^b^n hal-lHu), Vi^V'^^. la-m^nats-
tse"ch (for 'lH^) ; farther, biUian ha-ni''shol Judges ix. 2 (where the
interrogative H makes a syllable by itself), ''Db'a nial^-khe. In
the last examples the Sh^va sound is specially slight, in conse-
quence of a very short syllable preceding.
The sound e may be regarded as representing vocal Sh^va, although
it is certain that it often accorded in sound with other vowels. The LXX
express it by s, even rj, Drains Xtgov^ifi, ti^ ^^i??! ulhjXovia, oftener by a,
^5<!1JQ\U 2ufiovriX, but very often they give it a sound to accord with the
followring vowel, as D"!© Sodofi, tia^lU ^o).o[x(xiv, niX32 2!a^au&* A simi-
lar account of the pronunciation of Sh^va is given also by the Jewish
grammarians of the middle ages.f
How the Sh®va sound arises from the slight or hasty utterance of a
stronger vowel, we may see in <^3'^3 (for which also •^3'^? occurs, see
No. 2) from barakha, as this word also sounds in Arabic. This language
has regularly for vocal Sh^va an ordinary short vowel.
The vocal Sh^va is too weak to stand in a closed syllable ; but yet it
can with the consonant before it form a hasty open syllable, as appears
from the use of Methegh (see § 16, 2), and also from the fact, that it can
become an accented -r, as Ti^ from ''t\h . Comp. § 26, 4.
2. With the simple vocal SIfva is connected the so-called
composite Sh^va or Chateph (rapid), i. e. a JSh^va attended by a
short vowel to indicate that we should sound it as a half a, e, or 6.
We have, answering to the three principal vowel-sounds (§ 7, 1),
the following th?-ee :
( .. ) Chateph-Pattach, as in liian cJfmor (ass).
( .., ) Chateph- Seghol, as in "ibi5 ^mor (to say).
(^. ) Chateph-Q,amets, as in ''bH clfli (sickness).
The Chatephs, at least the two former, stand chiefly under the
four gutturals (§ 22, 3), the utterance of which naturally causes
the annexed half-vowel to be more distinctly sounded.
Rem. Only ( -: ) and ( t: ) occur under letters which are not gutturals.
The Chateph-Pattach stands for simple vocal ShH-a, but without any
fixed law, e.specially a) under a doubled letter, since the doubling causes
a more full utterance of the Sh^va, as '^^3' Zech. iv. 12 ; also where
the sign of doubling has fallen away, "^JlJ? for "^SSS Gen. ix. 14. w^^i^Fi]
* This law obtains in the Phoeniciaii language, e. g. tiD^ia Malaca, D^biaa
gubulim (see Mon. Phoenicia, p, 436 ; Movers, Art. Phonizicn in Ursch and Gruber^s
Encyclop. S. 436) ; comp. the Latin augment, in momordi, pupugi, with the Greek in
xhv(fa, rsTVfifiivog and the old form memordi.
\ See especially Juda Chayug, p. 4, f. and p. 200 of the ed. by Dukes, and also
in Ibn Ezras Tsachoth, p. 3 ; Oesenius, Lehrgebaude der heb. Sprache, S. 68.
3
34 PART I. ELEMENTS,
Judges xvi. 16 ; h) after a long vowel, e. g. Sfit (gold of), but atitl
Gen. 11. 12 ; SToa (hear), but ^Xit^ Deut. v. 24, com'p. Gen. xxvii. 26, 38.
The Chaleph- Qamets is less restricted to the gutturals than the first
two, and stands for simple vocal Sh^va when an O sound was originally in
the syllable, and requires to be partly preserved, e. g. '^S'l for "^Xl vision
(§ 93, VI), ^E^'?'? for the usual ?ia.'^"i': Ez. xxxv. 6 from tl^TnY ;^ inj^nj?
his crown from ip^if? . It is used also, like ( -= ), when Dagliesh forte has
fallen aAvay, n^P? for '^rjPr' Gen. ii. 23. In "^^J^'O^ 1 Kings xiii. 7 and
■^pSji!! Jer. xxii. 20, the choice of this composite Sh^va is occasioned by
the following guttural and the preceding f/ sound.
3. The sign of the simple S'h^va (— ) serves also as a mere
syllable-divider, without expressing any sound, and therefore
called in this case silent iSh^va {Sh^va quiescens), the Arabic
iSukiin, i. e. rest. It stands in the midst of a word under every
consonant that closes a syllable ; at the end of words, on the
other hand, it is omitted, except in final *I, e. g. ^5)3 (king), and
in the less frequent case where a word ends with two consonants,
as in "I"!.? (nard), rii? (thou, /em.), nbl2)? (thou hast killed), 310^1,
rilDri'bi?, 'l"lfi? (proper name), &c.
Yet in the last examples Sfi^'va under the last letter might rather
pass for vocal, since it is pretty clear that a final vowel has been short-
ened, e. g. nx ail'' from ^nx atii, nbaj? from TnVjp? , S'IJ7 yishb' from
n2d'^,*&c. The Arabic actually has a short vowel in the analogous
forms. In "nns , borrowed from the Indian, this is less clear. K'llJp (truth)
Prov. xxii. 21, seems to have been sounded qosht.
§11.
SIGNS WgiOH AFFECT THE EEADING OF CONSONANTS.
In intimate connection with the vowel-points, stand the
reading-signs, which were probably adopted at the same time.
Besides the diacritic point of TXJ and IIJ, a point is used in a letter
in order to show that it has a stronger sound or is even doubled ;
and on the contrary a small horizontal stroke over a letter, as a
sign that it has not the strong sound. The use of the point m
the letter is threefold : a) as Daghesh forte or sign of doiihling ;
b) as Daghesh lene or sign of Jiardcning ; c) as Mappiq, a sign
that the vowel-letter (§ 7, 2), especially the n at the end of a
word, has the sound of a consonant. The stroke over a letter.
Raphe, is scarcely ever used in the printed text.
* So thought Jiida Charjug among the Jewish grammarians.
1
§§12, 13. DAGHESH FORTE AKD DAGHESH LENE. 35
§12.
OF DAGHESH IN GENERAL, AND DAGHESH EOETE IN
PARTICULAE.
1. Daghesh, a point written in the bosom* of a consonant, is
employed for two purposes : a) to indicate the doubling of tlie
letter (Daghesh/or/e), e. g. bDp qit-tel ; h) i\\e,hard sound of the
aspirates (Daghesh lene).
The root ffiST, from which TlJS'i is derived, in Syriac signifies to thrust
through, to bore through (with a sharp iron). Hence the word Daghesh
is commonly supposed to mean, with reference to its figure merely, a
prick, a point. But the names of all similar signs are expressive of
their grammatical power; and in this case, the name of the sign refers
both to its figure and its use. In grammatical language T23:(1 means.
1) acuere literam, to sharpen the letter by doubling it; 2) to harden the
letter, to utter it without aspiration. Accordingly ^l.'a'n means sharp
and hard, i. e. sign of sharpening or hardening (like Mappiq, p''Q^ pro-
ferens, i. e. signum prolationis), and it was expressed in writing by a
mere prick of the stylus (punctum). In a manner somewhat analogous,
letters and words are represented, in the criticism of a text, as expunged
(^ex-puncta) by a point or pointed instrument (obeliscus) aflixed to them.
The opposite of Daghesh lene is ns'n soft (§ 14, 2). That 12351, in gram-
matical language, is applied to a hard prommciation of various kinds,
appears from § 22, 4, Rem. 1.
2. Its use as Daghesh forte^ i. e. for doubling a letter, is of
chief importance ; (compare the Sicilicus of the ancient Latins,
e. g. Lucidus for Lucullus, and in German the stroke over ni
and n.) It is wanting in the unpointed text, like the vowel and
other signs.
For further particulars respecting its uses and varieties, see § 20.
§13.
DAGHESH LENE.
1. Daghesh lene, the sign of hardening, belongs only to the
aspirates {literm aspiratce) n&5'753 (§ 6, 3). It shows that they
are not aspirated, but have their original slende?^ ox pure sounds
* Daghesh in 1 is easily distinguished from Shureq, which never admits a
vowel or Sh'va under or before the 1 , The Vav with Daghesh ( ^l ) ought to have
the point not so high up as the Vav with Shurcq ( !l ). But tliis difference is oftea
neglected in typography.
36 PART L ELEMENTS.
{literce tenues), e. g, tfb'a md-lekh, but isbtt mal-ko ; "ISPI ta-phar
but "iSt^i yith-por ; <iriT^ sha-thd, but ?1I?T2J^ yish-te.
2. Dagliesh Ze«e, as is shown in §21, stands only at the
beginning of words and syllables. It is thus easily distinguished
from Daghesh ybr^e, since in these cases the doubling of a letter
is impossible. Thus the Daghesh is folate in D'^S'i rahhim, but
lene in b'l^';^ yigh-dal.
3. Daghesh /or^e in an aspirate not only doubles it, but also
excludes aspiration, thus serving at once for hoih. forte and lene^
as "i&i? ap-jn ; rriS") rak-koth. (Compare in German stechen and
stecken, wachen and wecken.)
This is accounted for by the difficulty of doubling an aspirated letter
in pronunciation. In confirmation of this rule we may refer to certain
Oriental words, which, in the earliest times, passed over into the Greek
language, as XS3 amiJia (not xacpcpa), T^QD aoiTKpsiQog.
The doubling of a letter does not occur in Syriac. at least in the
western dialects. Where it would be required, however, according to
etymology and analogy, the aspiration at least is excluded : thus pQX
in Syriac is read apeq, for appeq.
§ 14.
MAPPIQ AND EAPHE.
1. Majyjiiq, like Daghesh, to which it is analogous, is a point
in a letter. It belongs only to the vowel-letters 1, i, and the
breathings ii, H, and shows that they are to be sounded with
their full Qpnso7iant power, instead of serving as vowels. It is at
present used only in final n ; e. g. ^33 ga-bhah (the h having its
full sound), »^5t1X ar-tsah {her land), in distinction from HS'lS
dr-tsa {to the earth).
Without doubt such a n was uttered with stronger aspiration, like
the Arab. He at the end of the syllable, or like h in the German Schiih,
which in common life is pronounced ScJnich. The use of it zn and
under S, 1, ^, is confined to manuscripts, e. g. "jia (goy), 1j5 {qav).
The name p'^BM signifies pro(Z?(ce?zs, and indicates that the sound of
the letter should be clearly expressed. The same sign was selected for
this and for Daghesh, because the design was analogous, viz. to indi-
cate the strong sound of the letter. Hence also Raphe is the opposite of
both.
2. Raphe (HB'l), i. e. soft, written over the letter, is the oppo-
site of both Daghesh and Mappiq, especially of Daghesh Zewe.
§ 15. THE ACCENTS. 37
In exact manuscripts an aspirate has generally either Daghesh
lene or Raphe, e. g. trbtt jjialekh, IBR ; but in printed editions of
the Bible it is used only when the absence of Daghesh or Mappiq
is to be expressly noted, e. g. ^"S^^jHI for ^ntlssri] , Judges xvi.
16, and v. 28 (where Daghesh lene is absent), Mappiq in Job
xxxi. 22.
§15.
OF THE ACCENTS.
1. The design of the accents in general is, to show the rhyth-
mical members of the verses in the Old Testament text. But as
such the use is twofold, viz. a) to mark the tone-syllable in
each w^ord ; 6) to show the logical relation of each word to the
whole sentence. In the former respect they serve as signe- of the
tone, in the latter as signs of inter punction.
The Jews, moreover, regard them as signs of declamation, by which
they regulate the accentuation in reciting, or rather cantillating the
O. T. in the Synagogue. This use of them also is connected with their
general rhythmical design.
2. As a sign of the tone in single words, the accent, what-
ever may be its rhythmical value in other respects, stands regu-
larly on the syllable which has the chief tone ; (comp. Rem. 2.)
In most words the tone is on the last syllable, more seldom on
the penultima. In the first case the word is called mil-rCL i^'i'T^
Cliald.,//-owi- heloiu), e. g. b'^]^ qatdl ; in the second, inil-el (^""^^^
Chald.,//-om above), e. g. tjb'a mdlekh. On the third syllable
from the end (antepenultima) the chief tone never stands ; but
yet we often find there a secondary one, or by-tone, chiefly indi-
cated by the Methcgh (§ 16, 2).
3. The use of the accents as signs of inter j^unction is some-
what complicated, as they serve not merely to separate the mem-
bers of a sentence, like our period, colon, and comma, but also as
marks of connection. Hence they form two classes, Distinctives
{Domini) and Conjunctives {Servi). Some are, moreover, pecu-
liar to the three properly poetical books (Job, Psalms, and Pro-
verbs), which have a stricter rhythm.
The following is a list of them according to their value as
signs of interpunction.
S 70 39
38 PART I. ELEMENTS.
A. Distinctives (Domini).
I. Greatest Distinctives {Imp er at ores), which niaj^ be com
paved with our period and colon. 1. (— ) Silliik (end), only at
the end of the verse, and always united with ('.) Soph-pusilk,
which terminates each verse, e. g. t f^^T} • 2. (— ) Atlmdch {re-
spiration), generally in the middle of the verse. 3. {—) Merka
with Blahpukh ;* in Job, Ps., Prov., greater than No. 2, marking
the chief division of the verse, of which Athnach then divides the
second half.
II. Great Distinctives {Reges) : 4. (— ) Segh6ltaA'\ 5. (— )
Zaqeph-qdton. 6. (— ) Zuqeph-gadhol. 7. {—) Tlphcha.
III. Smaller {Duces): 8. (-) mhhia. 9. (-) ZarqaM
10. (1) Pashta.n 11. (-) Yethibh.t 12. (_) Tebhlr. 13.
{—) JShalsMlSth* 14. (— ) Tiphcha initiale.t
IV. Smallest {Comites): 15. (— ) Pdzer. 16. (— ) Q,arne
phara. 17. (-) Great Tmsha.t 18. (— ) Gdresh. 19. (-)
Double Gdresh. 20. ( i ) Pesiq, between the words.
B. Conjunctives (Servi).
21. (_) Merkd. 22. (_) Mitndch. 23. (_) Double MSrkd.
2L {-) Mahpukh. 25. C-)^Qadhmd. 2&. {-)Dargd. 27. (-)
Ydr'ach. 28. (-) Little TellshdAt 29. (_) Tlphchd* 30. (-1)
MSrkd with Zarqd* 31. (^) Mahpukh with Zarqa*
REMARKS ON THE ACCENTS.
I. As Signs of the Tone.
1. As in Greek (comp. eI/^I and dni). words which are written with
the same consonants and vowel-signs are often distinguished by the
accent, e. g. 133 baml {they built), 133 banit {in us) ; ti^Sj? qdina {she
stood rip), nwf? qamd {standing uj), fem.). [Compare in English com-
pact and c6)vpac(.'\
2. As a rule the accents stand on the tone-syllable, and properly on
its initial consonant. Some, however, stand only on the first letter of a
word {prepositive), others only on the last letter {postpositive). The
former are designated in the table by f, the latter by ft- These do not,
therefore, determine the tone-syllable, which must be known in some
other way. Those marked with an asterisk are used only in the poetical
books.
3. The place of the accent, when it is not on the final syllable, is
indicated in this book by the sign ( * ) e. g. R^^FJ qa-tal-ia.
§ 16. RIAQQEPH AND JVIETHEGH. 39
II. As Signs of Inlerpunction.
4. In respect to this use of the accents, every verse is regarded as a
period, which closes with Silluq,* or in the figurative language of the
grammarians, as a realm (drlio), Avhich is governed by the great Dis-
tinctive at the end (Imperator). According as the verse is long or
short, i. e. as the empire is large or small, varies the number oi^ Domini
of different grades, which form the larger and smaller divisions.
5. Conjunctives {Ser-vi) unite only such words as are closely con-
nected in sense, as a noun with an adjective, or with another noun in
the genitive, &c. For marking the closest connection of two or more
words, Maqqeph is also used (§ 16, 1).
6. In very short verses few conjunctives are use^l, and sometimes
none ; a small distinctive, in the vicinity of a greater, having a connec-
tive power {servit domino inajori). In very long verses, on the contrary,
conjunctives are used for the smaller distinctives [Jiunt legaii domi-
norum).
7. The choice of the conjunctive or distinctive depends on subtile
laws of consecution, with which the learner need not trouble himself at
present. It is sufficient for him to know the greater distinctives, which
answer to our period, colon, and comma, though they often stand where
a half comma is scarcely admissible. They are most important in the
poetical books for dividing a verse into its members.
§16.
MAQQEPH AND METHEGH.
These are both closely connected with the accents.
1. Maqqeph {'^'^'Q hinder) is a small horizontal stroke be-
tween two words, which thus become so united that, in respect
to tone and interpunction, they are regarded as one, and have
but one accent. Two, three, and four words may be united in
this way, e, g. D7J$"53 every man ; 3tiy"b5"ni« every herb, Gen.
i. 29 ; 15""nrif;"b2"ni5 all which to him (was). Gen. xxv. 5.
Certain monosyllabic words like "^N to, "nX sign of the Ace, "bs all.
are almost always thus connected. But a longer word may also be
joined to a monosyllable, e. g. ^^"T^^iir'n Gen. vi. 9 ; or two polysyllables,
e. g. -ibs-ns3':3 Gen. vii. 11.
2. Methegh (^inia a bridle), a small perpendicular line on the
left of a vowel, forms a kind of secondary tone, or a check upon
the chief tone indicated by the accents, and shows tbat the vowel,
* This bus the same form with Methegh {§ 16, 2) ; but they are readily distin-
guished, as Silluq always stands on the last tone-syllable of a verse, while Methegh
never stands on the tone-syllable.
40 PAKT I. ELEMENTS.
though not accented, should not be hastily passed over in pro-
nunciation. It stands, therefore, regularly by the voicel of the
aiitepenultima when the last syllable has the tone, whether that
vowel be long, as DliJvJ, ns'np, or short, as D"'ilJ'7)5 qddashim.
DD'^riS bOttekhem. But here it is to be observed, that the half-
vowel also {sbnple iSh''va vocal and composite Sh'^va) is to be
regarded as forming a syllable (§ 10, 1 and §26, 4) ; accordingly
Methegh stands a) by the vowel which precedes a vocal Sh^va
{simple or composite), nbipj^ qa-f-la, '^•'i^')'^'^. yiY-u, "^inizj, '^'??'7>
1"!?,?, "i^ys pQ-^-lo, and b) even by vocal iSh%-a, e. g. N"^'^)?
Job V. L "
When it stands by Sli^va, many Jewish grammarians call it Ga'ya
X''j;5, while others use this name in general for every Methegh.
N. B. It is of special service to the beginner, as indicating (accord-
ing to letter a above) the quantity oC Qainels and Chireq before a SMva.
Thus in !T^2t za-hh^-ra the Methegh shows, that the (t) stands in the
anlepenullima, and that the SMca is here vocal and forms a syllable ;
but the (t) in an open syllable before ( : ) must be long (§ 26, 3), con-
sequently Qamets not Qamets-chatitph. On the contrary nnat without
Methegh is a dissyllable [z6kh-ra]. and ( t ) stands in a closed syllable,
and is consequently shoit (Qanieis-chatuph). Thus also ^X'^''^ (they
fear) with Methegh is a trisyllable with a long i, yl-r''-u ; but ixn^ (they
see) without it, a dissyllable with short i, ytr-u. See above, the rules
for Qamets and Qaniets-chatuph in § 9 at the end.
§17.
Q^RI AND K^THIBH.
The margin of the Bible exhibits a number of various read-
ings of an early date (§ 3, 2) called ''"'.p {to be read), because in
the view of the Jewish critics they arc to be preferred to the
reading of the text called Si'^fiS {written). Those critics have
therefore attached the vowel-signs, appropriate to the marginal
reading, to the corresponding word in the text. E. g. in Jer.
xlii. 6 the text exhibits ^!i|!, the margin "'Ip i:n;i5. Here the
vowels in the text belong to the word in the margin, which is to
be pronounced ^"H^i?. : but in reading the text IIS, the proper
vowels must be supplied, making ^:s?. A small circle or asterisk
over the word in tlie text always directs to the marginal reading.
Respecting the critical value of the marginal readings, see Gesenius
Gesch. dor hebr. Sprache, S. 50, 75.
; 18, 19. CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 41
CHAPTER II.
PECULIARITIES AND CHANaES OF LETTERS : OF SYL.
LABLES AND THE TONE.
§18.
In Older fully to comprehend the changes which words
undergo in their various inflections, it is necessary first to survey
the general laws on which they depend. These general laws
are founded partly on the peculiarities of certain letters and
classes of letters, considered individually or as combined in sylla-
bles, and partly on certain usages of the language in reference to
syllables and the tone.
§19.
CHANGES OF CONSONANTS.
The changes occasioned among consonants by the formation
of words, inflection, euphony, or certain influences connected
with the history of the language, are commictatioti, assimilation,
rejection and addition, transposition.
1. Commutation takes place most naturally among letters
which are pronounced similarly, and by the use of the same
organs, e. g. "pby, Dby, i^'J to exult ; HXb, nnb, Aram. TOb to
tire ; D"*— and X'— (as plural endings) ; fnb, yn: to ]}ress ; l^??
*1DD to close ; tibia, tjbs to escaj)e. In process of time, and as the
language approximated to the Aramaean, hard and rough sounds
were exchanged for softer ones, e. g. bsa for b;^5 to reject ; pTW
for pn:^ to laugh ; for the sibilants were substituted the corres-
ponding flat sounds, as ^ for T, 12 for 2, M for W.
This interchange of consonants affects the original forms of
words more than it does their grammatical inflection ; the con-
sideration of it, therefore, belongs properly to the lexicon.* Ex-
amples occur, however, in the grammatical inflection of words ;
viz. the interchange a) of Jl and t: in Hithpael (§ 54), b) of 1
and "> in verbs Pe Yodh (§ 69), as "ib^ for 'ibl.
2. Assimilation takes place most frequently, when the closing
consonant of a syllable is exchanged for the one with which the
* See the first article on each letter in Geseniits' Hebrew Lexicon.
42 PART L ELEMENTS.
following syllable begins, forming with it a double consonant, aa
illnstris for inhistris ; diffusns for disfnsiis ; 6vX)ucfi/3av(o for
6v-vXa[.ii3dvco. In Hebrew this occurs most frequently,
a) with the feeble, nasal 3 before most other consonants, espe-
cially the harder ones, e. g. D^jJ^'Q for D'lpp'a frotii the east ;
nra for 'r\1Vafrom this ; in;' for inp ; Pn? for PSnj. Before
gutturals i is commonly retained, as bnp'p he icill possess ; sel-
dom before other letters, as MDl^ thoii hast dwelt ;
b) less frequently and only in certain cases, with b, 1, ri. E. g.
n]?;i for n):b:' ; isisn for tsisnn ; -w for itc^ (§ 36).
In all these cases, the assimilation is expressed by a Daghesh
forte in the following letter. In a. final consonant, however, as
it cannot be doubled (§ 20, 3, a), Daghesh is not written, e. g.
?|i5 for vlpN or vl.rx ; nSP contr. nn ; WS contr. na ; tn) contr. nb.
Comp. Tui/jccg for rvipccvg.
In the last cases the assimilated letter has not Sh^va, but the helping
vowel Seghol (§ 28, 4). which, however, does not render the assimilation
impracticable.
In the way of assimilation, we occasionally find a second weaker
sound swallowed up by the stronger one before it ; e. g. W^Bp from
^innbup (§ 59). ^iss^ for ^in?^^ from him (§ 103, 2). Here we may also
refer ab'; for aao"^ he surrounds (§ 67. 5).
3. The rejection or falling away of a consonant easily hap-
pens in the case of the breathings and vowel-letters i5, tl, 1, i,
and also of the liquids. It takes place.
a) at the beginning of a word {apharesis), when such a feeble
consonant has no full vowel, and its sound is easily lost upon
the ear, as ^:n: and ^:ri2S [ive) ; nt? sit for a©;' ; iri (give) for
ins ; -t for mr^!:, who, comp. No. 2, b;
b) in the midst of a word (contraction), when such a feeble con-
sonant is preceded by a Sh^va, e. g. t^b'sb, the prevailing form
for Tfbianb ; bvjj?^ for bii:;5n;i (§ 23, 4. §35, R. 2. § 53, 1) ;
c) at the end of Avords {apocope), e. g. 'lb'Jp';i for "Jlbipp^ ; D^sa
so?iSj before the genitive ^sa.
Bolder changes were made in the infancy of the language, particu-
larly in casting away consonants at the end of a word ; thus from *|rx
was formed "5* ; from n^s, a ; from bn , ri (see § 99). Here belongs
also the weakening of the feminine ending n-^ ath to Ti— a (see § 44. 1.
and § 80).
A. In other cases a harshness in pronunciation is prevented
by the addition of K {Aleph prostheticiufi) with its vowel at the
§20. DOUBLING OF CONSONANTS. 43
beginning of a word, e. g. ?ilT and ?i^|^ ar7n ; (comp. ;^&£g,
ixOkit sjnritus^ Fr. esprit.)
5. Transposition, in grammar, seldom occurs. An example
of it is 1'BPi'Cn for "I'BTiJtin (§54, 2), because st is easier to sound
than ths. Cases are more frequent in the province of the lexi-
con, as iSSS and 3itJ? lamb ; nb'aiE' and rrabilJ garment ; they are
chiefly confined, however, to the sibilants and liquids.
Consonants may also, especially the weaker, at the end of a syllable
be softened to vowels, like ilc, from tvq, chevaux from cheval (compare,
below, § 30, 2, e) ; e. g. 3313 star from 3333, 33^3 ; d\«< man from 11J5X
or U325^ (where the Seghol is merely a helping vowel, see above, No. 2).*
§20.
DOUBLING OF CONSONANTS.
1. The doubling of a letter by Daghesh forte takes place,
and is essential, i. e. necessary to the form of the word {Daghesh
essential),
a) when the same letter is to be written twice in succession, with-
rt* out an intermediate vowel ; thus for ^2?!ni we have 13ti5 we
' have given ; for ''r*?!^, "^nT? I have set ;
h) in cases of assimilation (§ 19, 2), as 'jri'' for '}!??'?. In both
these instances it is called Daghesh comptensative ;
c) when the doubling of a letter originally single is characteristic
of a grammatical form; e. g. 1'ab he has learned, but "172b he
has tanght {Daghesh characteristic).
The double consonant is actually and necessarily written twice, when
ever a vowel-sound, even the shortest (a vocal Sh^va), comes between.
Hence this is done a) when a long vowel precedes, Dibbl'n which is
read ho-lHim (§ 26, Rem.), and even after a merely tone-long vowel,
iiaaia , where compensation is more usual ; b) when a Daghesh has
already been omitted, as ib^n ha-Nu for ^hhT] hal-lHu ; c) when
by composition the two consonants have come to stand together, but
properly belong to two words, as '!]3*i3'i (he blesses thee), ''ii'iN'ip'^ (ihey
call me), where T^ and "^3 are suffixes ; d) when the form has come from
another which has a full vowel, as nb^p construct of nbbp?. Sometimes
the same word is found in both the full form and the contracted, e. g.
t^ll^'? Jer. V. 6, and D^^7 Prov. xi. 3, Q^ri; ''SSSn Ps. ix. 14, and ''SSn
Ps.'iv;2.
* In the Punic, "^b^ malkh (king) is in this way contracted to nidfch, see Men,
Phoenicia, p. 431.
44 PART I. ELEMENTS.
2. A consonant is sometimes doubled merely for the sake of
euphony. The use of Daghesh in such cases {Daghesh eupho-
nic) is only occasional, as being not essential to the forms of
words. It is employed,
a) when two words, of which the first ends in a vowel, are more
closely united in pronunciation by doubling the initial conso-
nant of the second {Daghesh forte conjunctive), as HtTl'a what
is this ? for HT ma ; ^SiSI ^'Q'p qii-muts-tsyi {arise ! depart !)
Gen. xix. 14 ; Dl^ PibDS) Deut. xxvii. 7*
In some instances words thus united are contracted into one,
as ri;7^ for nrnia, DD^'Q for a^^"^, ns^ tr^ what (is) to you 7
[s. iii. 15.
Analogous to the above usage is the Neapolitan le llagrime for le
lagrime, and (including the union of the two words in one) the Latin
reddo for I'e-clo, and the Italian alia for a la, della for de la.
b) when the final consonant of a closed syllable, preceded by a
short vowel, is doubled in order to sharpen the syllable still
more, e. g. "^535? for "'32^ grapes, Deut. xxxii. 32. Compare
Gen. xlix. 10, Ex. ii. 3, Is. Ivii. 6, Iviii. 3, Job xvii. 2, 1 Sam.
xxviii. 10, Ps. xlv. 10. Examples of this, however, are com-
paratively rare, and without any regard to uniformity.
Compare the following forms as found in very ancient Greek inscrip-
tions, viz. vcgiaaiog, TshcraTui, ^ylaaxlriniog {Bijckh, Corpus Inscr. Gr. I.
p. 42), and in German anndere, unnsere (for andere, unsere) as written
in the time of Luther.
c) when it is inserted in the final tone-syllable of a sentence
(§ 29, 4), in order that it may furnish a more firm support for
the tone, e. g. ^2113 for ^:rip they give, Ez. xxvii. 19, ^^n';* for
'^T}'} they waited, Job xxix. 21, Is. xxxiii. 12.
3. The Hebrews omitted, however, the doubling of a letter
by Daghesh forte, in many cases where the analogy of the forms
required it ; viz.
a) always at the end of a word ; because there, at least in tlie
pronunciation which has come down to us, the syllable did
not admit of sharpening. Thus the syllable all would be
pronounced, not as in German with a sharpened tone, but
* Here belong such cases as nxa nXJ, Ex. xv. 1, 21 ; so that the assertion is
not correct, that the first of the two words must be a monosyliable, or accented
on the penultima.
§ 21. ASPIRATION AND ITS REMOVAL. 45
like the English all. call, small. Instead, therefore, of dou-
bling* the consonant, they often lengthened the preceding
vowel (§ 27, 2). E. g. UV (people), with a distinctive accent
(§ 15, 3), for D? from COl^. The exceptions are very rare, as
PiS5 thou,f., ritip thou hast given, Ez. xvi. 33 ;
h) often at the end of a syllable, in the body of a word (where
the doubling of a letter is less audible, as in Greek dXro
Homeric for alltro) ; e. g. D^TDJ^S^n for D^TSJ^n^n ;
c) in the gutturals (§ 22, 1).
In the case &, it may be assumed as a lule, that the Daghesh remains
in the letter with Sh^va (which is then vocal, § 10, 1), and is never left
out of the aspirates, because it materially affects their sound, e. g.
nnBDwN: ""khapp'^ra (not n'^sa!!^, "khdphra) Gen. xxxii. 21, ^rns Is. ii. 4,
''5'ir'Dj "^nf?!- On the contrary, it is usually omitted in the preforma-
tives 7 and a in Piel, as "lai^^, Q'^'ia'i^ri ; rt^i-oh for n;i552b ; so also
in '^f)i':, and in cases like >i^n''for ^b^h, 'i33n for '^ssn.
In some cases a vowel or half-vowel was inserted to render the dou-
bling of the letter more audible, e. g. D352S with you for 0335 ; fJI^O for
naO (§ 67, 4), ^3315'^ Is. Ixii. 2.
Bern. In the later books, instead of the sharpening of the syllable by
Daghesh for le, the preceding vowel is sometimes lengthened (comp.
mile for mille), as 'jniri'i he terrifies them for 'jfin';' (Hab, ii. 17), D'^^i'^'ni^a
threshing-sledges for nia"i"ia, 1 Chron. xxi. 23.
§21.
ASPIRATION", AND THE REMOVAL OF IT BY DAGHESH LEKE.
The pure hard sound of the six aspirates (fi, S, D, 1, !*, H),
with Daghesh lane inserted, is to be regarded, agreeably to the
analogy which languages generally exhibit in this respect, as
their original pronunciation, from which gradually arose the
softer and weaker aspirated sound (§ 6, 3 and § 13). The origi-
nal hard pronunciation maintained itself in greatest purity, when
it was the initial sound, and after a consonant ; but when it
followed a vowel-sound, or stood between two vowels, it was
softened by partaking of the aspiration with which a vowel is
uttered. Hence the aspirates take Daghesh lene :
* So in Latin, fel (for fell) gen. fcllis ; met, mellis ; 6s, ossis. In mid. high-
German a consonant is doubled only at the beginning of a syllable, as was the case
in the old high-German. E. g. val (Fall) valles ; si>a?;i (Schwamm), <feo. Grirmn,
d. Gramm. 2. Ausg. L 383.
46 PART I. ELEMENTS.
1. At the beginning of words, when the preceding word ends
with a vowelless consonant, as )'2~b'$ ul-keii {therefore), "^12 f^
Ms 2^^^'i {fruit-tree) ; or at the beginning of a chapter or verse,
or even of a minor division of a verse (consequently after a dis-
tinctive accent, § 15, 3), e. g. nit3S'n3 in the beginning, Gen. i. 1 ;
TliJi?3 ''tl'l^l and it hapjiened, when, Judg. xi. 5 ; on the contrary
P"'''?''^ (i-nd it luas so, Gen. i. 7.
Also a diphthong (§ 8, 5) so called, is here treated as ending in a
consonant, e. g. 2i "'"ib Judges v. 15.*
2. In the middle and at the end of words after silent JSh^a,
i. e. at the beginning of a syllable, and in immediate connection
with a preceding vowelless consonant, e. g. DPi^Pp ye have killed,
^aD';i he is heavy, TW^ bibat. On the contrary, after vocal Sh^va
they take the soft pronunciation, e. g. blST dioelling, "Tins she is
heavy.
Exceptions to No. 2 are :
a) Forms which are made, by the addition or omission of letters, imme-
diately from other forms in which the aspirates had their soft sound.
E. g. ^211 (not ilSS^-i) from Cl'in ; 15b?? (not "^sb^) formed immediately
from tJi^b^a (on the contrary ''Sb^a mal-ki, because it is formed directly
from J"|b7a malk) ; snsa (not 30D2) from l^riS. In these cases, tha-t
pronunciation of the word, to which the ear had become accustomed,
was retained ; hence, rzdk^-phu. mal^-khe, bikh"-thdbh.1;
b) The 3 in the suffi.res Vj— -, D3— 7, I?-;-, has always its feeble sound,
because vocal Sk'^va is before it. See § 57, 3, b.
c) Finally, certain classes of forms are to be noticed, e. g. WDb^
(mal^khidh), mib'^.
Re7n. 1. In Pif]^l2J, we might expect the feeble pronunciation of n on
account of the preceding vowel. But the original form was Pitibt^,
and the relation of n, notwithstanding the slight vowel-sound thrown
in before it, remained unchanged. Comp. § 28, 4.
2. The tone sometimes affects the division of a word into sylla-
bles, and consequently the sound of the aspirates; thus nbob Num.
xxxii. 14, but nnbob Ps. xl. 15 ; ')a'i)5 {qdrbd7i), but ')5'?|5'i (in pause)
Ez. xl. 43.
That the hard or soft pronunciation of these letters did not affect
the significaiion of words, affords no reason to doubt that such a distinc-
tion was made. Compare in Greek -O^^i^, JQixog.
* Hence the use of Daghesh lene after JTirii , because instead of it '^3'IN was
read.
f A particulai-ly instructive case occurs in § 45, 3.
§ 22. PECULIARITIES OF THE GUTTURAI.S. 47
§22.
PECULIAKITIES OP THE GUTTURALS.
The four gutturals, 5<, n, n, y, have certain properties in
common, which result from their peculiar pronunciation ; yet S
and y, having a softer sound than H and n, differ from them in
several respects.
1. The gutturals cannot be doubled in pronunciation, and
therefore exclude Daghesh forte. To our organs also there is
difficulty in doubling an aspiration. But the syllable preceding
the letter which omits Daghesh naturally loses its sharpness by
the omission ;* hence its vowel is commonly lengthened, espe-
cially before the feebler letters i5 and V, e. g. ']'^7n the eye for
r^r? ; "l^i?!^ for Ta^':, (fcc. The harder gutturals n and H allow
ed a sharpening of the syllable, though orthography excluded
Daghesh forte (as in German the ch in sicher, machen, has the
sharp pronunciation without being written double), and hence
these letters almost universally retain before them the short
vowel, e. g. tC'lhin the month, X^Hil that.
As these last forms are treated as though the guttural were doubled,
the grammarians not inappropriately speak of them as having a Daghesh
foric impiicittcrn, ocailliim, or delitescens ; e. g. D"''^5< for Ditt5< brothers ;
nirrs snares ; cnn thorns. See more in § 27, Rem. 2.
2. They are accustomed to take a short A sound before them,
because this vowel stands organically in close affinity to the gut-
turals. Hence,
a) before a guttural, Pattach is used instead of any other short
vowel, as f, S {Chireq parvimi, Seghol), and even for the
rhythmically long e and o ( Tsere and Choleni) ; as, tliT sa-
crifce for H^T, V'Qtl report for y^^'ilJ. This preference was
yet more decisive when the form with Pattach was the origi-
nal one, or was used in common with another. Thus in the
Imp. and Impf. Kal of verbs ; rtb'O send, I^^'ip? (not n'^TJ?'?) ;
Perf. Piel, n\t} (not n^TT) ; ^^\ a youth, where Pattach in
the first syllable is the original vowel ; 'l^Ti'^ for ibfli •
* Comp. terra and the French ierre ; the Germ. Holle and the French role,
drollig, Fr. drole. The Hebrew here betrays its decline ; while tlie Arabic, where
the pronunciation retains more of its original freshness, allows the doubling of the
gutturals.
48 PART I. ELEMENTS.
b) but a strong and unchangeable vowel, as i, 1, '>— (§25, 1),
and in many cases Tsere, was retained. Between it and the
guttural, however, there was involuntarily uttered a hasty a
{Pattach furtive), which was written under the guttural.
This is found only in final syllables, and never under X,
E. g. n^n ric^'ch, nibto sha-ld^'ch, n-in rtch, ?n re* fniaa ga-
bho^'h, n^bton htsh-ltch, &c.*
For the same reason the Swiss pronounces ich as i'^ch. and the Ara
bian n^llJa mesi^h, though neither writes the supplied vowel.
The Pattach furtive falls away when the word receives an accession
at the end, e. g. nil, *'n>i"i, where the n is made the beginning of the
new syllable.
The LXX write s instead of Pattach furtive, as nb Nat.
Hem. 1. The guttural sometimes exerts an influence on the following
vowel. But the examples of this usage are few, and are rather to be
regarded as exceptions than as establishing a general rule, e. g.'^S'l foi
"isS ; bSQ for bSE, The A sound is preferred wherever it would be
admissible without the influence of the guttural, as in the Imp. and Impf.
of verbs, e.g. p^f, P'^AI- If however, another vowel serves at all to
characterize the form, it is retained, as nn^'^, bn^T not bfi*^.
2. Seghol is used instead of Pattach both before and under the gut-
tural, but only in an initial syllable, as ^3)1);, ''ban. Without the
guttural these forms would have Chireq in place of Seghol.
When the syllable is sharpened by Daghesh, the more slender and
sharp Chireq is retained even under gutturals, as b|fi , njfi , n::n ; but
when the character of the syllable is changed by the falling away r*"
Daghesh, the Seghol. which is required by the guttural, returns, e. g.
Tiian, const, state Ti"^^n ; 'ji"'-m, f^Tn.
3. Instead of simple (Sh%a vocal, the gutturals take a coni-
jwsife Sh'va (§ 10, 2), e. g. bDjJN, ^m ; ^p?T, ^p5>T^ This is the
most common use of the composite Sh^vas.
4. When a guttural stands at the end of a (closed) syllable,
in the midst of a word, and has under it the syllable-divider
{silent Sh^va, § 10, 3), then the division of syllables often takes
place as usual, especially when that syllable has the tone, e. g.
rinbliJ {thou hast sent). But when the syllable stands before the
tone, there is usually a softening of the sound by giving* to the
guttural a slight vowel (one of the composite /Sh''vas), which has
the same sound as the full vowel preceding, as iton|;| (also Ston;;'),
^f^TCri'^. (also TV^I), ptT}!^ (also pit}';!) ; this composite Sh^va is
* The accent is on the proper final vowel, and Pattach furtive is sounded like
a in real, denial. — Tb.
§23. FEEBLENESS OF !!< AND n. 49
changed into the short vowel with which it is compounded,
whenever the following consonant loses its full vowel in conse-
quence of an increase at the end of the word, e. g. ^pTn^;; , ^IDI?^
yd-6bh^-dhu (from "iny";), ^DBn^. ya-hu-ph^-khu (from ^brjj;).
Rem. 1. Simple Sh'va under the gutturals, the grammarians call
hard (U55'n), and the composite Sh'vas in the same situation soft (ns"i).
See observations on verbs with gutturals (§§ 62-65).
2. Respecting the choice between the three composite Sh^vas it
may be remarked, that
a) ii, n, S>, at the beginning of words prefer (-:), but X (•.•:), e. g. 5""in,
lian , "lias . But when a word receives an accession at the end, oi
loses the tone, N also takes (-.-), as ^bx to, C3''^i!< to you; bbs to eat,
but -b3N Gen. iii. 11. Comp. § 27, Rem. 5. '
6) In the middle of a word, the choice of a composite Sh^va is regulated
by the vowel (and its class) which another word of the same form,
hut without a guttural, would take before the Sh^va ; as Perf. Hiph.
*^'''?^r! (according to the form b">M]5l-i), Inf. T^asn (conformed to
bittpti), Perf. Hoph. "iJiSn (conformed to bcpn).
For some further vowel-changes in connection with gutturals, see
§ 27, Rem. 2.
5. The "1, which the Hebrew uttered also as a guttural (§6,
2, 1), shares with the other gutturals only the characteristics
mentioned above in No. 1, and a part of those given in No. 2 ;
viz.
a) the exclusion of Daghesh forte ; in which case the vowel be-
fore it is always lengthened, as tfi^ for 1\'^'2, TfiS for 'FJ'^ia ;
b) the use of Pattach before it in preference to the other short
vowels, though this is not so general as in the case of the
other guttural sounds, e.g. ii^i^jT and he smo from nX"i;i ; np^l
for 10^'] and he turned hack, and for "ip^T and he caused to
turn back.
Unfrequent exceptions to the principle given under letter a are ITniD
mor-ra, Prov. xiv. 10 ; T('?^ shor-rekh, Ezek. xvi. 4, where "i is doubled j
in Arabic also it admits of doubling, and the LXX write n^U 2uQQa.
In a few other cases, there is neither the doubling of the Resh nor the
lengthening of the vowel ; as tin"!?? (for r]'T^^) 2 Sam. xviii. 16.
§23.
OF THE FEEBLENESS OF THE BREATHINGS « AND fl.
1. The X, a light and scarcely audible breathing in the
throat, regularly loses its feeble power as a consonant (it quies-
ces), whenever it stands without a vowel at the end of a syllable.
4
50 PART I. ELEMENTS.
It then serves merely to prolong the preceding vowel (like the
German h in sah)^ as ^Tfll he has found ^ J^^IS he has filled, i^'^H
she, S'2i^ to find, SS^n he; n^5|^, HDS^^n. This takes place
after all vowels ; but in this situation short vowels with few
exceptions become long, as SS'a for ^V^, ^'^'Q'^. for i^?''?'!'.
2. On the contrary, 55 generally retains its power as a conso-
nant and guttural, in all cases Avhere it begins a word or syllable,
as Tax he has said, lOi?''? they have rejected, bb^b for to eat. Yet
even in this position it sometimes loses its consonant-sound, when
it folloAvs a short vowel or a half-vowel [vocal Sh%a) in the mid-
dle of a word : for then the vowel under ^ is either shifted back
so as to be united with the vowel before it into a long sound, as
nbsb for 1^555?, b?N^^ for bsx;;, also bsi?'' [a obscured too) for
bsii'^ : or it wholly absorbs it, as in DS^^ for QX'lS Neh. vi. 8,
DiSph {chotmi) for D'^Xph [sinning) 1 Sam. xiv. 33, D'i'f]^''? [two
hundreds) for Q^ns^^, D^TSSsn [heads) for D''T^K'-|.* Sometimes
there is a still greater change in the word, as bsi^'a'O';' for b&52?'D'iai,
HDSb'a [business) for HDSjb'a. Sometimes also the vowel before
X remains short when it is a, e. g. "'j^iil for '^?'lfi?|l, '^'t^^ for
''sniiib, n^^njpb for nxn;?b.
Instead of the i? thus quiescing in Cholem, Tsere, and Chi-
req, we often find written, according to the nature of the sound,
one of the vowel letters 1 and "', e. g. "iSs for 1i?S [cistern), D""!
[buffalo) for QS?"!, ]'W^') [the first) for )^m'^ Job viii. 8, comp. ib
for iib [7iot) 1 Sam. ii. 16 K'tltibh ; at the end of a word fl also
is written for fi?, as nb^^ [he fills) for xb)2^ Job viii. 21.
3. Such a quiescent N sometimes falls altogether away, e. g.
■in^^ [I went forth) for Ti<^^ ^^^"^ [I am full). Job xxxii. 18,
for "^nsbTa, n'ai? [I saij) constantly for TaSX, niirnb [to lay waste)
2 Kings xix. 25, for nisffinb Is. xxxvii. 26, ^b^'for 1«bl2 Ezek.
xxviii. 16.
Rem. 1. In Aramtean the K becomea a vowel much more readily than
in Hebrew ; but in Arabic, on tlie contrary, its power as a consonant is
much firmer. According to Arabic orthography, i< serves also to indi-
cate the lengthened A ; but in Hebrew the examples arc very rare, in
which it is strictly a vowel-letter for the long A sound, as DN|? Hos. x. 14,
for the usual Df? , llis'i Prov. x. 4, xiii. 23, for ^"i. Hebrew orthography
generally omits, in this case, the prolonging letter (§ 8, 3).
* Tlie feeble St being lost to the ear, the previous vowel is naturally prolonged
{iS-'mOr, then le-niOr) ; and its vowel, when its own sound is lost, is heard with
thft pi-evious vowelless consonant, first bo-th'dm, then bO-tham. — ^Tr.
§23. FEEBLENESS OF N AND n. 51
2. In Syriac, X even at the beginning of words cannot be spoken with
a half-vowel (vocal Sh^va), but always receives a full vowel, usually E,
as e. g. the Chald. bax is in Syr. ekhal. So also in the Hebrew, instead
of a composite Sh'va, it takes, at the beginning of many words, the cor-
responding long vowel, as "liix girdle foT "litx, o^^nx tents for D'^^i^s?,
nii-ix stalls for ni^nx .
T \ tt:
3. We may call it an Arabism, or a mode of writing common in Arabic,
when at tlie end of a word an X (without any sound) is added to a ^ (not
being part of the root), as VA'^h'n for >i3bln {they went), Josh. x. 24, X13X
{they were willing), Is. xxviii. 12. Similar are X^pj for "'pj pure, X^lb
for ^b if, XIBX for I'SN , The case is different in X^in and Xin , see § 32,
Rem. 6.
4. The il is stronger and firmer than i<, and scarcely ever
loses its aspiration (or quiesces) in the middle of a word ;* also
at the end it may remain a consonant, and then it takes Mappiq
(§ 14, 1). Yet at times the consonant-somid of the <^ at the end
of a word is given up, and H (without Mappiq, or with Raphe JH)
then remains only as representative of the final vowel, e. g. fib
(to her), Nam. xxxii. 42, for tlb • Job xxxi. 22 ; Ex. ix. 18. At
the beginning of a syllable H is often not heard, and is omitted
in writing, as "ij^sb [in the morning) for "^psrib, f"iSJ3 [in the
land) for f"ixr;2, "jrijin^ contracted 'jn^i''. In these cases of con-
traction, the half- vowel * (— ) before H, is absorbed by the full
vowel under it. In other cases, however, the vowel under H is
displaced by the one before it, as D3 {in them), from Dri3 ; or
both are blended into a diphthong, as io^D (also Hb^D) from ^HD^O,
iVjp from ^nbtafp [ahu, a-u, 6).
Accordingly, the so-called quiescent ii at the end of a word stands,
sometimes, in the place of the consonant tn. But usually it serves quite
another purpose, namely, as an orthographic expression, in the consonant
text, of final a, as also o, e, and a (Seghol), e. g. nt^N, nbs, riba, iiba,
nba-:, § 7, 2 and § 8, 3.
Bern. In connection with o and e it is occasionally changed for 1 and "^
(iX'i = nx'i , "130 = nsn Hos. vi. 9), and in all cases for X according to
later and Aramtean orthography, particularly in connection with a,
e> g- !>*;'r? (s^eep), Ps. cxxvii, 2, for njd, k^: {to forget), Jer. xxiii. 39,
for nitJS, &c.
*A very fe-w examples are found in proper names, as bxtltoS, ^^l£ri1Q,
which are compounded of two woi-ds, and in many MSS. are also written in two
separate words. One other case, n^S'.IS';' Jer. xlvi. 20, is also in tlie printed
text divided by Maqqeph, in order to bring the quiescent fl at the end of a word.
52 PART L ELEMENT
§24.
CHANGES OF TIIE FEEBLE LETTERS ^ AND V
The 1 {2v) and the "^ (y) are as consonants so feeble and soft,
approaching nearly to the corresponding vowel-sounds u and i,
that they easily flow into these vowels in certain conditions. On
this depend, according to the relations of sounds and the charac-
ter of the grammatical forms, still further changes which require
a general notice in this place, but which will also be explained
in detail wherever they occur in the inflections of words. This
is especially important for the form and inflection of the feeble
stems, in which a radical 1 or ^ occurs (§ 69, (fcc. § 85, III-VI).
1. The cases where 1 and "^ lose their power as consonantP
and flow into vowel-sounds, occur only in the middle and at the
end of words, their consonant-sound being always heard at the
beginning.* These cases are chiefly the following :
a) when 1 or '^ stands at the end of a syllable, immediately after
a vowel. The feeble letter has not strength enough, in this
position, to maintain its consonant-sound. Thus ItDin for
nWin or rnsin ; f )5i'' for Y'P'!^ ; mT\^^ for n'l^n^'a ; so also at
the end of the word, e. g. ^bX'ito'^ yisi'deli (propeily, -liy, hence
fern, -liyya), W^ {made, Job xli. 25), for ^iW (comp. niW5>
1 Sam. XXV. 18, K^thibh). After homogeneous vowels, par-
ticularly pure u and i, 1 and *^ constantly quiesce in these
cases. But after a heterogeneous vowel they sound as conso-
nants (according to h 8, 5), as ibiD quiet, IT May month, "'in
nation, "^^ba disclosed. But with short a, 1 and "i mostly form
a diphthongal d and e (see below. No. 2, h) ;
b) after a vocal Sh^va, when such syllables would be formed as
(fvom, ¥vo. Hence Xi3 for ^^'^3, D^p for Dip. So, especially,
when they stand at the end of a word and are preceded by a
ShVa ; as ^n;' for ^n;' (from n^n^), ^IS/rniY for ""ns ;
c) when the feeble letter has a full vowel both before and after
it; as Dip for Dilp, Dip for Dllp. Comp. mihi contr. mi,
quum contr. cum,.
In Syriac, where these letters flow still more readily into vowel-
eounds, i is sounded, even at the beginning of words, merely as r, not as
"^ or "^ (as for i<, e) ; and so in the LXX rTilIT;! is written ^Iov8d, P^^"!,
laaux. Hence may be explained the Syriac usage, examples of which
* Except «l for n, and, § 2G, 1, and § 104, 2, b.
§ 25: UNCHANGEABLE VOWELS. 63
occur also in Hebrew, which transfers the vowel ?, belonging to the feeble
letter, to the preceding consonant, which should properly have simple
ShVa, e. g. linnis for liin-^S Eccles. ii. 13, ^hn-^) (in some editions) for
si^n'^'l Job xxix. 21.
2. When such a contraction has taken place, the vowel-lettei
quiesces regularly in a long vowel. Respecting the choice of this
vowel, the following rules may be laid down :
a) when the vowel, which an analogous form without the feeble
letter would take, is homogeneous with the vowel-letter, it
is retained and lengthened, as yo^"; for ^12";'^ (analogous form
bt:)p^) ; niiJ^.n {hahitare f actus est) for 312Jin' ;
6) when a short a stands before "^ and 1, it forms with them a
diphthongal e and 6 (according to § 7, 1) ; thus l'^t2?«r becomes
c) but when the vowel-sign is heterogeneous, and at the same
time is an essential characteristic of the form, it ccjitrols the
feeble letter, and changes it into one which is homogeneous
with itself. Thus 'ttJ'1'1'' becomes ^T'^ ; Qlj? becomes Djp qdm ;
"bl and ^bi» become nb5 and nbilj.t
-T -T TT* TT
An original "^-^ at the end of words becomes :
a) ii— (for "i— is never written at the end of a word), when tlie impure
sound a is to be used; e. g. Th^'i for 'hT- (§ 75, 1); i^'^^'^form, for
"^^y^'i '^'i^ field (poet.), common form fTib ; J
6) n— , when the A sound prevails, as being characteristic of the form ;
as n^a, nh, nsa for -^bs, -'\t;, ^h.
§25.
UNCHANGEABLE VOWELS.
What vowels in Hebrew are firm and unchangeable, can be
known, with certainty and in all cases, only from the nature of
the grammatical forms and from a comparison with the Arabic,
where the system appears in a purer and more original form
* Instances in which no contraction takes place after a short a are D'^Si^i^
1 Chron. xii. 2 ; B'l'^O'l'X Hos. vii. 12 ; "'Fl'lVa Job iii. 26. Sometimes both forms
are found, as HblS and flbiS evil; in (KOTwgr), construct state "^n. Analogous is
the contraction of T^IZ death, constr. niB, y^b eye, constr. "jiS.
f In Arabic is often written, etymologically, i^a , but spoken gala. So the
LXX -write "'S'^p , 2iva. But for ibtJ is written in Arabic Nb\».
X When an addition is made to the ending ri-^, it is written i-:;; and some-
times the original i— reappears (§ 93, 9, Rem.).
64 PART I. ELEMENTS.
than in Hebrew. This holds, especially, of the essentially lo7ig
vowels in distinction from those Avhich are long only rhythmi-
cally, i. e. through the influence of the tone and of syllabication,
and which having arisen out of short vowels readily become short
again by a change in the position of the tone and in the division
of the syllables. The beginner may be guided by the following
specifications :
1. The essentially long and therefore unchangeable vowels
of the second and third class, namely, z, u, e, d, are regularly
expressed among the consonants [or in the line] by their vowel-
I letters, i and e by "i, m and 6 by 1, with their appropriate vowel-
signs, thus "i— , "i— , ^, i, as in H'^TJ?''? anointed. ^D"*?! palace, b'lSil
a hound, ^ip voice. The defective mode of writing these '■ owels
(§8, 4) is indeed pretty frequent, e. g. tlT^'a for n'^TT'O, Dibp voices
for nibip, baa for biaa ; but the difference is merely one of ortho-
^raphy^ not affecting the nature of the vowel, which still retains
its character as essentially long. Comp. § 8, 4.
Occasionally, a merely tone-long vowel of these two classes is writ-
ten fully, but only as an exception ; e.*g. the 6 in i'i^P'^, for ^bp*].
2. The unchangeable a has in Hebrew^, as a rule, no repre-
sentative in the consonant-text, though in Arabic it has, namel}''
the S, which occurs here but very seldom (§ 9, 1, § 23, 3, Rem. 1).
For ascertaining this case, therefore, there is no guide but a
knowledge of the forms ; see § 84, Nos. 6, 13, 28.
Such cases as i<^^o (§23, 1) do not belong here.
3. Unchangeable is also a short vowel in a sharpened sylla-
ble, followed by Daghesh forte, e. g. 325 thief ; likewise in every
closed syllable, when another of the same kind follows, e. g.
ID^Sb'a garment, 'ji"'^S5 j^oor, '^S'l'Q loilderness.
4. So are also the vowels after which a Daghesh forte has
been omitted on account of a guttural, according to § 22, 1 {for-
ma dagessanda), e. g. bj)5"i'nn for b!S"'^';)ri mountains of God ;
?Jliil for Tf^a he has bee7i blessed*
* A convenient division is: 1) vowels unchangeable by nature (Nos. 1, 2, 4);
2) vowels unchangeable by position (No. 3). In the first class, the vowels of No. 1
and 2, being representatives of original and essential elements of the word, are
unchangeable ; as for a like reason are those in No. 4, the omission of a letter
being indicated by the consequent lengthening of a vowel in the open syllable.
In the second class (No. 3), the position requires a vowel, and it is already short
— Tu.
§26. SYLLABLES. . 5fi
§26.
OF SYLLABLES, AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON THE QUANTITY'
OF VOWELS.
A survey of the laws whicli regulate the choice of a long or a
short vowel and the exchange of one for the -other, requires a
previous knowledge of the theory of the syllable, on which those
laws are founded. The syllable must be viewed with reference
to its initial sound (No. 1) ; and also to its close, or ^nial sound
(Nos. 2-7), which is the more important of the two.
1. With regard to the commencement of the syllable it is to
be observed, that every syllable must begin with a consonant ;
and there are no syllables in the language which begin with a
vowel. The single exception is ■=! {and), in certain cases for 1,
e. g. in tJ^'Q'^,.* The word "TaX is no exception, because the i?
has here the force of a light breathing.
2. With regard to the close of the syllable, it may end :
a) with a vowel, and is then called an oj^en or si?nj)le syllable,
e. g. in si^P)? the first and last are open. See No. 3.
6) with a half-vowel or vocal Sli^va, as j^^ in "i"!?? j)^-ri (frtiit),
ch"- in ''Sn chUsl {half), t" in ^btp)^ qa-f-lu. Such we call
half -syllables, or j^i'^fv-syllables. See No. 4.
c) with one consonant : a closed or ??iixed syllable, as the second
in b^, nnb. See No. 5.
Here belongs also the sharj)ened syllable, as the first in
bDp qat-tel. See No. 6.
d) with two consonants, as p"ttJp, Pibt2p (§ 10, 3). We shall now
(in Nos. 3-7) treat in particular of the vowels that are used
in these various kinds of syllables.
3. The open or simple syllables have, as a rule, a loiig-
voweljt whether they have the tone, as ?ja in thee, ISO book,
* See § 104, 2, b. The word wmiilekh, in pronunciation, readily becomes
umdlekh, as the sound oo precedes the formation of the feeble consonant w. Comp.
Note *, p. 22.— Tr.
f This is cei'tainly a fundamental law in Hebrew, as its pronunciation is now
indicated by the vowebsigus, but not a matter of absolute necessity, for other
languages very often have short vowels in open syllables, as iyivsTO, Arab, qa-
tiila. At an earlier period the Hebrew, like the Arabic, most probably liad short
vowels in those open syllables in which the vowel was not essentially long ; and
the present pronunciation is derived in part from the solemn, slow, and chanting
way of reading the Old Testament in the synagogues.
56 PART I. ELEMENTS.
ttJlp sanctuary, or not, as b'JjP, nnb /imr/, ^S'l;;' ^Aey will fear.
Usually tlieie is a long vowel ( Qamets, less frequently Tsere)
in an open syllable before the tone (pretonic vowel), e. g. Dln^,
D^p;', bt:jp, nnb.*
Short vowels in o/;e« syllables occur only in the following cases :
a) In dissyllabic words formed by means of a helping-vowel (§ 28, 4)
from monosyllables (6'eg-Ao/aZes), as Ty^fo. "i3.'D youth, n'^3 house, ZTp^,
from T)^^. 153, n';'2, a^V The reason is that the final helping-vowel
is very short, and the word sounds almost as one syllable. Yet the
first vowel is also lengthened, as in ap^ another form for 3p^ (§ 75,
Rem. 3, h).
b) In certain forms of the suffixes, as "^^^^P, ^7:5? (f''om "H-?'?)-
c) Before the so-called He local, which has not the tone (§ 90. 2), e. g.
nba^S towards Caj-mel, l^'^%^'0 to\cards the "mlderness.
In all these cases the short vowel is supported by the chief tone of
the word. Elsewhere it has at least the support of Methegh, viz.
d) In these connections — — , — — , — — , as i'o'J'^ his taste, "ibx,';j he rcill
bind, i^SQ his deed, ^p'^^'^ and thy ornament.
e) In forms like ^ptn-; ye-chi-z^qii {they are strong), t^,S^ pv-ofkha {thy
deed) ; also in C'r'y'jj sho-ra-shhn {roots), comp. page 32, and § 28, 3.
The first syllable in n"''n!nfi, '.iJinfi, and similar forms, does not belong
here, but to No. 6, below.
4. There is also a slighter sort of open syllables, consisting
of one consonant and a half-vowel (or vocal iSh^va, § 10, 1, 2).
They may be called half syllables, or prefix-syllables, as being
so slight and unsubstantial that they always attach themselves
to the following stronger syllable ; e. g. "^nb {cheek) r-chi, ^'Tobl'
yil-m''-dhd, ''bn {sickness) ch^-li, ib^S po-"-lo.
Modern grammarians do not regard these as actual syllables, but
always reckon them as part of that which immediately follows. The
half-vowel is certainly not such as to serve for the final sound of a full
syllable ; and according to the pronunciation handed down to us. this
syllable with Sh^va is obviously of a different kind from the open syllable
with a full vowel (No. 3). But that half-vowel is in general a shorten-
ing of an original full vowel, which is commonly still retained in Arabic;
and the Jewish grammarians, from whom came the vowels and accents,
* For this, the Arabic lias always a short vowel. The Chaldee has only vocal
Sh'va, "jin^ to them, Olp"^ , blJp. DSb ; into which, in Hebrew also, this vowel
passes over so soon as the tone is thrown forward (§ 27, 3, a). Not that this
pretonic vowel was adopted (perhaps in place of a Sh"va) on account of the accen-
tuation of the following syllable. It is the original vowel of the syllable, retained
on account of its position immediately before the tone, on the removal of which
it is reduced to a vocal Sh*va.
§26. SYLLABLES. 57
have assigned to the union of a consonant with a half-vowel the value
of a syllable, as appears especially from the use o? Methegh (see § 16
2,6).
5. The closed syllables, ending with one consonant, have
necessarily, when without the tone, sho^t vowels, both at the
beginning" and at the end of words,* as •HSb'O queen, "jiSTlJn under-
standing, n'opn wisdom; ID^T and he turned hack, D)5^T and
he set up, D|P^!] and he stood uj).
When with the tone, they may have a long vowel as well as
short, e. g. DDn he ivas wise, D3I7 rvise ; yet of the short vowels
only Pattach and Seghol have strength enough to stand in such
a syllable having the tone.t Examples of long vowels, in the
final syllable, are ll'l, bDp, bbp';' ; in the last but one, flDblSj?,
niVup. Examples of short vowels, bu]?, QriN, DDtJ ; in the penul-
tima, r.'p^)?, 'I3b'tpp\
6. A peculiar sort of closed syllables are the sharpened, i. e.
those which end with the same consonant with which the follow-
ing syllable begins, as "^^5!! im-mi, 'b^ kul-li. Like the other
closed syllables, these have, when ivithout the tone, short vowels,
as in the examples just given ; when with the tone, either short,
as ^ao, ^23 n, or long, as niaffi, nrin.
Sharpened syllables are wholly avoided at the end of words, see
§ 20, 3, letter a.
7. Closed syllables, ending with two consonants, occur only
at the end of words, and have most naturally short vowels, as
ribt3)5, ^t^^, yet also Tsere and Cholem, as 'in?, ^n^l , "JTSp. But
compare § 10, 3. Most commonly this harshness is avoided by
the use of a helping-vowel (j 28, 4).
Rem. In the division into syllables, accordingly, a simple Sh^va after
a short vowel belongs to the foregoing syllable and is quiescent, as i^^'ia
mir-ma ; but after a long vowel, to the following, and is vocal (§ 10, 1),
as i^^kJlp qo-t^-la, C^hhiji ho-lHim. The composite Sh^va belongs always
to the following syllable, as ibsb po-Ho, even after a short vowel, aa
* There are some exceptions, when a word loses the tone through ilaqqeph, aa
n'nn-sns {k'thabh), Esth. iv. 8.
f See § 9, 2. Short Chireq {%) occurs only in the particles DJt and WS . which,
however, are mostly toneless because followed by Maqqeph.
58 PART L ELEJSIENTS
§27.
CHANGES OF VOWELS, ESPECIALLY IN RESPECT TO THEIE
QUANTITY.
As to the changes which the vowels undergo by the inflection
of words, we may lay down ihese, fundamental prmcij)les :
a) that they generally occur only in the last syllable and the
last but one, very seldom in the antepenultima, e. g. "I3'l,
w; linsT, ^iiDT ; Tjn, li^n ; ^
b) that they are usually made within the limits of one and the
same vowel-class (§ 8). Thus a may be shortened into d and
a, e into l and S, 6 into 6 and u ; and with the same limita-
tion the short vowels may become long. But such a change
as a into u never takes place.
The most material exception is the approximation of the first class to
the second, when Pattach is attenuated to Chireq or blunted to Seghol;
see below, Rem. 2 and 3. So also in the origin of obtuse Seghol out of
vowels belonging to all three classes, see Rem. 4.
The vowels with the changes of which we are here chiefly
concerned, are the whole of the short ones and as many of the
long as owe their length simply to the tone and rhythm, viz. :
Long vowels (sustained by the tone). Corresponding short vowels.
— a —a
— I
— 6 {Qamets-chatuph)
— w
To these add the half-vowels
or Sh^vas — , _, _, _,
as extreme shortenings.
Let the student compare here again what was said in § 9 on the
character and value of the several vowels, and in § 25 on the unchange-
able vowels.
According to the principles laid down in § 26, the following
changes occur :
1. A tone-long vowel is changed into a kindred short one,
when a closed syllable loses the tone (§ 26, 5). Thus when the
tone is moved forwards, 1^ liand becomes 1|^, as nin^i"*!^ hand-
of- Jehovah ; )^. son, D'lSn"]^ son-of-man ; bb whole, D J'r}~b3 the
§ 27. CHANGES OF VOWELS. 59
whole-of-the-j)eople ; also when the tone is moved backwards,
e. g. Dj?^, Dj?f|1 ; ^S!?, ?J^^1. Farther, when an open syllable
with a long" vowel becomes by inflection a closed one, e. g". ISO
6ooA', "^"IBD my hook ; '(D'if sanctuary, '^tC'ljP my sanctuary. In
these cases, Tsere (e) passes over into tSeghol (e) or Chireq (?),
Cholem (o) into Qamets-chatujjh {6). But when a closed sylla-
ble with a long vowel becomes a sharpened one, i. e. ending with
a doubled consonant, Tsere is attenuated into Chireq, and C^o>-
/em into Qibbuts ; as DX mother, ^l^i^ my mother, pn statute,
plur. D''j?n.
The short vowels i and m are more pure, and hence are accounted
shorter than e and 6.
2. On the contrary, a short vowel is changed into a corres-
ponding long one —
a) when a closed syllable, in which it stands, becomes an open
one, i. e. when the word receives an accession, beginning with
a vowel, to which the final consonant of the closed syllable is
attached, as bDjp, ibJDp he has killed him, ; 3.T}, plur. ^3[n give
ye ; '^t^'O'^L, directly from riD^D ;
b) when a syllable, which should be sharpened by Daghesh
forte, has a guttural for its final consonant (see § 22. 1), or
stands at the end of a word (see § 20, 3, a) ; *
c) when it meets with a feeble letter (§ 23, 1, 2 ; § 24, 2) ; as S32'D
for NS'a he has found ;
d) when the syllable is in paiise, i. e. is the tone-syllable of the
last word in the clause (§ 29, 4).
3. When a word increases at the end, and the tone is at the
same time shifted forward, all vowels (long and short) may,
according to the effect on the division of the syllables, either pass
over into a half-vowel {vocal Sh^va), or Avholly fall away, and
give place to the mere syllable-divider {silent Sh^va), An exam-
ple of the former is DtJ {name), '^'5310 {my name) ; p/?/?'. T&Qt:
{names), DJniiaTlJ {their names) : of the latter, HD'ia {blessing),
constr. nsnS . Whether the full vowel remains, or becomes a
half-vowel {Wn, i^a'i ; Dttj, ''^tJ), and which of the two vowels in
two successive syllables disappears, depends on the nature of the
word. In general it may be said, that in the inflection of nouns,
the first vowel is usually shortened, while the second, if immedi-
ately before the tone (pretonic vowel), remains ; as 1p^, pre-
■60 PART I. ELEMENTS.
cious, fern. •T^^'? y^qd-ra : but in verbs, the second is commonly
shortened, as 1]?^ was precious, fern. '*T}'P1 ya-cfrd. Thus a half-
vowel comes in place of —
a) Q,amets and Tsere in the first syllable (principally in the
inflection of nouns), as '^2'^ loord, plu7\ U'^'^y^ ; bina great,
fern. n5il^ ; 32b heart, ''Iilb my heart ; HITDri she will return,
nrn'iTiJn* they (fem.) icill return ;
h) the short or merely tone-long vowels, a, e, o, in the last sylla-
ble, especially in the inflection of verbs, e. g. b'^'^,fet}i. nbp]?
qatHa; bpip, p/^r. D-'b-jp qotTim ; bbp;^, ^blpp:! yiqflii. The
helping-vowel, JSeghol, wholly falls away (becomes silent
ShVa), e. g. ^blQ (for tfb^), ^3b^. If there is no shifting of
the tone, the vowel remains notwithstanding the lengthening
of the word, as muJ;', ^n^TT^ ; b^ns, nb^ns.
Where the tone is advanced two places, both the vowels of a
dissyllabic word may be so much shortened, that the first be-
comes t and the second a Sh®va. From "13", a ivord, we have
m the jilur. D^'?^^ ; and with a grave suffix this becomes DH'^'IS'l
their words (comp. § 28, 1). On the shortening of u into i, see
especially in Rem. 3, below.
Some other vowel changes, mostly with respect to quantity,
are exhibited in the following remarks :
Rem. 1. The diphthongal 1 6 (from aii), as also the 6 sprung from
the firm il (§ 9, 10, 2), is longer than ^i ii; and hence, when the tone is
moved forward, the former is often shortened into the latter. E.g. CipJ,
m"a^p3 (see Paradigm 3/, Niph.); G13^ fight, fem. iiO'lia, with stiff .
tp!!:^ ; pina sweet, fem. nj^wa. Tlie ^ stands sometimes even in a
sharpened syllable, nssin Ps. cii. 5, "'istn Ez. xx. 18, l^!)-^ Jiulg. xviii. 29.
About the same relation exists between ''-^ e and ''— i (see § 75, 2).
On the contrary ^ m is shortened into 6, which appears in the tone-
syllable as a tone-long o {Cholem). but on the removal of the tone
becomes again o (Qamets-chadiph). as B>!p^ (he will rise), Dp^ (jussive:
let him rise), Dp^l (a7id he rose iij)), see Parad. Af, Kal. So also from
■1— comes the (less lengthened) tone-long Tsere (e), and without th«
support of the tone, Seghol (e). as c^p^ (/le iinll set up), op^ (/e/ him
set up) Dp^l! (a?jcZ he set up), see Parad. M, Hiphil.
2. Prom a Pattach («) in a closed syllable there arises a Seghol (e),
through a farther shortening, or rather weakening and blunting, of the
sound. This happens,
* The vowel, which here passes into a half- vowel (vocal Sh'va) when the tone
is thrown forward, is the so-called pretonic vowel in an open syllable ; see § 9, 1,
2, and § 26, 3.
§ 28. RISE OF NEW VOWELS AND SYLLABLES. 61
a) Sometimes when the tone hastens on to the following syllable, as
0?.1!! your hand for D^.l!^, "it^^^X (prop, n.) for "iri^2X ; especially
when a syllable loses something of its sharpness by the omission of
Daghesh forte, as '^j^aN Ex. xxxiii. 3 for '^PJA I destroy thee, h:<p^'n.'l
Ezekiel for ^i^pin"? {whom God strengthens).
b) More regularly when Daghesh forte is omitted in a guttural that
has a Q,amets under it. Thus, H— for H— (n-r). e. g. T^rjX his
brothers for T^HN, from C^nx ; '{^"^T^^ the vision; \lJn3 false for !lin3,
and 80 always with n. With n and 5> the Seghol is used only where
a greater shortening is required on account of the distance of the tone ;
hence t3'1^^^l^ for D'^inri the mountains, hx:.*. "inn the mountain; '|isrt
the misdeed, but ci'n the people. Before S and "i, where a short
sharpened vowel cannot so easily stand (§ 22. 1), Qamets always
remains, as niaxfi the fathers, ?''p■^'^ the firmament. Comp. further,
on the interrogative ri (n , rt) § 100, 4.
c) In syllables properly ending with two consonants, e. g. a^3 (also in
Arabic pronounced kiilb) from which comes first sbs, and then with a
helping Seghol (§ 28, 4) 3^3 dog ; l?3i^ (jussive in Hiphil from <^^5),
then h^, and finally ba^* " •'
3. In a closed (and sharpened) syllable, which loses the tone, a is at
times attenuated into i, e. g. Q?53'7 your blood for B5^';i , i'n^ /j/s measure
for i'n^ ; '^ri'l?'; / have begotten, ?]''ni^'? / Aai-e begotten thee.] Comp.
above, oni-ia^.
4. The Seghol arises, besides the cases given above in Rem. 2, also
a) From the weakening of « ( Qamets) at the end of a word (comp. Roma,
French Borne; Arab. nS'^bn read khalife), as nn and na w^a? ? § 37,
1, c ; see similar examples in Ps. xx. 4 ; Is. lix. 5 ; Zech. ix. 5.
6) Even from the weakening of u, as DRN (you) from the original attum
(Arab, anlum), § 32, Rems. 5. 7 ; Crtb (io them) from the original
lahum. Comp. page 24.
5. Among the halt-vowels, (-:) is shorter and lighter than (•.•:) and
the group (— — ) than (-rTr), e. g. dSx Edom, "i^^N Edomite ; npx
irw/^, iR^x his truth; nh^yhiddeJi, pbir.^'^'ah^i^ -, ''Finasiri ; ip'isni.
§28.
RISE OF NEW VOWELS AND SYLLABLES.
1. When a word begins with a half-syllable (§26, 4), i. e.
with a consonant which has a half-vowel (vocal Sh^va), and
there comes another half-syllable before it, then this latter re-
ceives instead of the Sh*va an ordinary short vowel, which is
* So the LXX also say MfAj^tfff^s'x for p'^S"' 'Sbn.
f Analogous to this attenuating of H into ? is the Latin tango, attingo ;
laxus, prolixus ; and to that of a into S (in Rem. 2) the Latin carpo, decerpo ;
spargo, conspergo.
62 PART I. ELEMENTS.
regularly i (Chireq), but with gutturals a (Pattach). E. g. bbS
(to fall) n^phol, with the preposition 3 not bs?^ b^n^'phol, but bsDS
hin'plwl ; so also bblS kui'phol for b>SD3 ; ^nsb for ''"ifib ; n^^H^S
(whence tTl^rr^a according to § 24, 1) for JTl^n^a ; 'Ci1l12T\ [niim
paruvi est ?) hunfat for tiS^'an Jfin'^at. At times another division
of syllables takes place, so that tlie second consonant gives up its
half- vowel and forms a closed syllable wdth the first, as bS3b Un-
vol Num. xiv. 3, "13T3 Jer. xvii. 2.
A similar process occurs in the body ofa word, as ''5^'n rish^phe and
iQiuT reshpe, "'lUSi* from Di^JX ; but here Jie initial vowel comes imme-
diately from a full vowel, and is more like i in oni";;;':} (§ 27, 3).
In Syriac, the usual vowel here is a (e). even in the absence of gut-
turals ; in Chaldee it is the same as in Hebrew ; the Arabic has retained
every where, in plac5 of vocal Sh^va, the usual short vowel.
2. When the second of the two consonants is a guttural with
composite Sh^va, then the first takes, instead of simple ShVa,
the short vowel with which the other is compounded ; whence
proceed the groups — — , ——^ — — , e. g. ^TiJi?!3 so as, 13?^ to serve,
Isbsb to eat, ''bna ill sickness, for -n»i?3, ^il?b, bbiib, ^bn^. The
new vowel in such cases has Methegh according to § 16, 2, a.
3. When the first Sh^va is composite and stands after an
open syllable with a short vowel, then it is clianged into the
short vowel with which it is compounded, e. g. ITQ^]^ yaam^dhii
for "^TG^I they ivill stand, IDSn?. nehepJfkii for ^2£nD they have
turned themselves, '^bS'E p66l''kha, thy ivork ( j 26, 3, e).
4. At the end of Avords, syllables occur which close with two
consonants (§ 10, 3, j 26, 7) ; yet this takes place only when the
last of these is a consonant of strong sound, 13, p, or an aspirate
with its hard sound {tentiis), namely, 3, "H, ■=}, r\,* e. g. t3ilJ|^ let
him ttirti aside, p'CJ;)^ and he watered, ribt2j3 thoii (f.) hast killed,
?ja^1 a7id he wept, 'l"!.'' let hi?7i rule, ^V"^"] and he took captive.
This harsh combination of letters is, however, avoided in gene-
ral by supplying between the tw^o consonants a helping-vowel,
which is mostly Segliol, but Pattach under gutturals,! and Chi-
* An instance of A and C) (which should likewise have Daghesh) scarcely
occui'3. Alone stands 6]0in (shortened from CjOin) Prov. xxx. 6 ; in several MSS. 5)
(with Daghesh).
f With the exception, however, of St , as N^Q wild ass, NlU'n fresh grass. On
account of the feeble sonnd of the K the helping-vowel may also bo omitted, as
Xan sin, r^1l valley.
§ 29. THE TONE AND ITS CHANGES. 63
req after ^^ e. g. b^'^l for hy^^ ; mf for T»7j? ; ^5>5 for ^^3 ; rinSiB*
for rinbi^ I n^3 for !n^a. These helping-vowels have not the
tone, and they fall away whenever the word increases at the
end.
These helping-vowels have inappropriately been coWeA furtive, a
term which should be restricted to the Pattach sounded before a final
guttural, according to § 22, 2, b.
5. Full vowels arise from half-v»wels also, by the influence
of the Pause ; see 9 29, 4,
§29.
OF THE TOJ^E ; CHANGES OF THE TOmi ; AND OF THE PAUSE.
1. The principal tone, indicated by the accent (§ 15, 2), rests
on the final syllable of most words, e. g. ^tDj?, ^^'l ; i'n^'l, Qri^Pp
(as these two examples show, even on additions to the root) ;
less frequently on the penultima, as in ^^'KJ, ^^^^ nighty ^^^)?-
Connected with the principal tone is Methegli^ a kind of
secondary accent (§ 16, 2). Small words which are united by
Maqqeph with the following one, are destitute of the tone
(§16,1).
It is not necessary here to single out the words accented on the
penultima {voces penacnlce) ; for the sake, however, of calling attention
to these words, they are generally marked in this book with —, as a
sign of the tone.
In Arabic the tone is more on the penultima, and even on the ante-
penultima. The Syriac accents mostly the penultima; and the Hebrew
is pronounced thus, contrary to the accents, by the German and Polish
Jews, e. g. X^3 n'^Bx'na breshis boro.
2. The original tone of a word frequently shifts its place on
account of changes in the word itself, or in its relation to other
* In. this and the analogous examples (§ 65, 2) Baghesh lene remains in the
final Tav, just as if no vowel preceded (§ 22, 2), in order to indicate that the
helping Paltach has a very short sound, and at the same time to suggest PlH^UJ
as the original form. (Accordingly ritlfsb thoio hast taken is distinguished also
in pronunciation from Hflpb ad sumendum.) The false epithet furtive given to
this helping-vowel, in connection with the notion that such a vowel must be
sounded before the consonant, caused the decided mistake which long had its
defenders, namely, that nnblU should be read shaldacht ; although such words aa
'^'l^j '1? were always correctly sounded shdchath, ndchdl not naachl. Strictly
analogous is 'nn'^ yX-had (Trom iTnO, § 75, Rem. 3, d).
64 PART I. ELKMENTS.
words. If the word is increased at the end, the tone is thrown
forward {descendit) one or two syllables according to the length
of the addition, as nn"!, D^Sa^, DS'^nn^ ; TIJ'lp, Q''p'})5 ; nbt3]5,
^npblJp. For the consequent shortening of the vowels, see §27,
1,3:"^
In one case the tone is thrown forward in consequence of accession
at the beginning of the word. See § 44, Rem. 5, 6.
3. On the contrary, the*original tone is shifted from the final
syllable to the penultima (ascetidit),
a) when the syllable (•']), § 49, 2, is prefixed, as ^^ih he ivill say,
TOi?^] and he said ; 1^'^, he will go, 1\)p}^ and he icent ; Dp^
let him rise, Dp^l and he rose np ;
b) when a monosyllabic word, or one with the tone on the penul-
tima follows (in order to avoid the meeting of two tone-sylla-
bles).* E. g. i2 i^^Hi Job iii. 3, for i3 ";5lX ; D?| Dbin Is.
xli. 7, for n?S n5in ; Gen. i. 5, iii. 19, iv. 17 ; Job xxii. 28 ;
Ps. xxi. 2 ;
c) in Pause. See No. 4.
The meeting of two tone-syllables {letter b) is avoided in another
way, viz. by writing the words with Maqqeph between them, in which
case the first wholly loses the tone, as Dtj"aFia^1 . The above method
is adopted whenever the penultima is an open syllable with a long
vowel. Compare § 47, Rem. 1, § 51, Rem. 3, § 52, Rem. 2.
4. Yery essential changes of the tone, and consequently of the
vowels, are effected by the Pause. By this term is meant the
strong accentuation of the tone-syllable of the word which closes
a period or member of a period, and on which the tone of the
whole rests. This syllable is marked with one of the great dis-
tinctive accents, as V'?i$»7, Q'''^n' The changes are as follows :
a) when the syllable has a short vowel, in pause it becomes
long ; as bTJp, btDp ; U'J'a, U^^^ ; Pib'Jp, nb'jp ; y"i«, ynx, Jer.
xxii. 29 ; "iTCp {conspiracy), "\tDp 2 K. xi. 14 ;
h) when a final tone-syllable has a prefix half-syllable (as nbp|p,
§ 26, 4), the half-vowel of the latter gives place to a full vowel,
which takes the tone, A more fitting cadence is thus pro-
duced, than by the accentuation of the final syllable. E. g.
nbpp, nb-Jp ; nijb^, nxbia ; ibup^', ^bbp^ The vowel select-
* Even the prose of the Hebrews proceeds, aecording to the accentuation, in
a kind of Iambic rhythm. That the authors of the system intended to secure this
object is evident, particularly, from the application of Methegh.
§ 29. THE TONE AND ITS CHANGES. 65
ed is always that which had been shortened, in the same syl-
lable, to vocal Sh®va.* Moreover, vocal Sh\-a in pause be-
comes /Seghol, as "'nb, "^Tlb ; and a Chaieph gives place to
the analogous long vowel, as '^SS?, ""SX ; "^bin, "hVj, ;
c) this tendency to place the tone on the yenultima in pause^
shows itself moreover in several words which then regularly
retract the tone, as ^six, ^pbsj ; nnx, nnij ; nn?, nr^ ; and
in single cases, like ^bs Ps. xxxvii. 20, for ^bs, and also ^5?b
Job vi. 3, for lyb from nVb.
7 IT T T
The rule given under letter a respects principally Pattach and
Seghol. Seghol is however strong enough to be retained in pause
(tj^a , p'l'S) especially when the syllable is sharpened by Daghesh forte.
as ^sf^pV
Pattach is sometimes adopted in place of Seghol, as TJ^^], in pause
"l^?!! ; Ir'.Jj''"^' ^" pause l^P|"^!i< Jud. xix. 20. Pattach even takes the
place of Tsere in pause. E. g. 3^n for DtJrj Is. xlii. 22 ; ^5<3^ , in pause
^sai: Is. vii. 6. But more commonly, Tsere is retained ; and on the
contrary, Pattach sometimes takes its place out of pause, as TiPl for T^R
Lam. iii. 48.
Some other changes, occasioned by the Pause, will be noticed as they
occur, in the next division.
* Such a Pause-syllable is sometimes strengthened by the doubling of the fol-
lowing consonant ; § 20, 2, c.
PART SECOND.
OF FORMS AND INFLECTIONS, OR OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH,
§30.
OF THE STEM- WORDS AND EOOTS (BHITERALS, TRILITERALS,
QUADRILITERALS).
1. The stem-words of the Hebrew and of the other Semitic
languages have this peculiarity, that by far the most of them
consist of three consonants, to which the essential meaning is
attached, while its various modifications are expressed by changes
in the vowels, e. g. D'lX he loas red, DIN red, D^li? man (prop.
red one). Such a stem-word may be indifferently either a verb
or a noun, and usually the language exhibits both together, as
i^ViZ he has reigned, tfb'a king. But it is customary.and of prac-
tical utility for the beginner, to consider the third j)erson si?ign-
lar of the Perfect, i. e. one of the most simple forms of the veiii,
as the stem-word, and the other forms of both the verb and the
noun, together with most of the particles, as derived from it ; e. g.
p"!! he was righteous, p*!^ righteousness, p'^^lS righteous, &c.
Sometimes jiie_Jaiigiiag;e^as handed down to us, exhibits pnly
the verbaf stem without a corresp'onding fOTm for the noun, as
>pO to stone, pnp to bray ; and^^ficcasionally the noun is found
without the cori-espondlng verb, e. g. SW south, ^tcri 7iine. Yet
it must be supposed tharthe language, as spoken, often had the
forms now wanting.
Hem. 1. The Jewish grammarians call the stem-word, i. e. the third
person singular of the Perfect, the root. 'O']^, for which the Latin term
radix is often used; and hence the three consonants of the stem are
called radical letters, in contradistinction from the servile letters.^ namely
X, a, n, 1, "i, 3. b, a, 3, tIJ, n, which are added in the derivation and
inflection of words. We however employ the term root in a different
sense, as explained in No. 2.
2. Many etymologists give the name root to the three stem-conso-
nants, viewed as vowelless and vinpronounceable. from which the stems
§ 30. STEM- WORDS AND ROOTS. 67
for both the verbs and the nouns are developed, as in the vegetable
kingdom (from which the figurative expression is taken) the stems grow
mt of the concealed root. Tlius for example —
Root : "jba (to reign).
, _^
Verb-stem : Ty^'O he has reigned. Noun-stem : '^h^)2 king.
This supposition of an unpronounceable root is, however, an abstrac-
tion too remote from the actual state of the language ; and it is better,
at least for the liistorical mode of treatment, to consider the concrete
verb [3 pers. sing. Perf ] as the stem-word.
3. These triliteral stems are generally of two syllables. But among
them are reckoned also such as have for their middle letter a "l, which
is uttered as a vowel (§ 24, 2, c), and thus reduces the form to one sylla-
ble, e. g. B|5 for d;!|5 .
2. The use of three consonants in the stems of the verbs and
nouns is so prevalent a law in the Semitic languages, that we must
look upon it as a characteristic peculiarity of this family. Even
such monosyllabic nouns as might be deemed originally mono-
syllables {biliteral roots), since they express the first, simplest,
and most common ideas, as ns father, Di? mother, ns brother,
come under this law ; thus we have '^T2S my mother, as if deri-
ved from D^X. But, on the other hand, stems with three conso-
nants {triliteral roots) may be reduced to two consonants, which
with a vowel uttered between form a sort of root-syllable, from
which spring several triliteral stems with the same fundamental
meaning. Such root-syllables are called primary or biliteral
roots. They are very easily made out when the stem has a fee-
ble consonant or the same consonant in the second and third
place. Thus, the stems l^^'l, tf^^, XS^, ns^, have all the mean-
ing to beat and to beat in pieces, and the two stronger letters 1*
dakh constitute in each of them the monosyllabic root. The
third stem-consonant also may be strong. To such a monosylla-
bic root there often belongs a whole series of trihteral stems,
which have two radical letters and the fundamental idea in
common.
Only a few examples can be presented here : —
From the root yp , which imitates the sound of heioing, are derived
immediately y^p^, nsps to cut off; then, z^^.p, 2)2;?, ^ri;?, with the kin-
dred significations to shear, to mow, and metaph. to decide, to judge
(hence y:ip, Kadi, a judge). Related to this is the syllable VSp , Op
from which is derived DD]^ to cut into; Z'iip to sharpen; nvp to pare.
With a lingual instead of the sibilant, up, 'ip ; hence sai? tV cut down.
G8 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
to destroy ; ^tip; to ad doxcn, to kill ; liip? io ait off, to shorten ; til?)? to
tear off, to pluck off ; Ti)^ to ail asunder, to split. A softer form of this
radical syllable is D3 ; hence DD3 to act off] to shear off'; 033 Syr. to
sacrifice, to slay for sacrifice. Still softer are tM and 15 ; hence fta to
mow, to shear ; rtts to hew stones ; QTa, stj. btJ, "lU to hew off, to cut
off] to eat off] to graze ; and so IIJ to cut, 5)15 to cut off' ; compare also
nia, tiia. With the change of the palatal for the guttural sound, 3^H,
aiin to hew stones and wood, I'Nn, nsn to split, divide, yn arrow {yxlQa).,
11H to sharpen, T'^tn arrow, lightning, also rtjn ^o see (Lat. cemere,
Germ, scheiden), and many others.
The syllable on expresses the humming sound made with the mouth
closed {^voi) ; hence "i^fi, E>iJ (°!v??), Arab, dnan to hum, to buzz. To
these add DHD io 6e dumb ; nm io become mute, to be astonished.
The radical syllable 3J1, of which both letters have a tremulous
sound, means to tremble, in the stem-words ll^i , b?"j , DSl , liJSl : then
It is expressive of what causes tremulous motion or agitation, as thunder
(DS>"i), the act 0^ shattering, o^ breaking in pieces (yj)"!, ysi).
Compare further, on the radical syllable 135 with the idea o^elevation,
curving upward {gibbous), and on IS to break, "Sb, nb, to lick, to sup,
the articles 3^5, liQ, ?^^ in G'esej^izis' Hebrew Lexicon.
From a further consideration of this subject we may draw the follow-
ing observations : —
a) These roots are merely deduced from stems in actual use, and are
themselves not in use. They merely represent the hidden germs
(semina^ of the stems which appear in the language. Yet the latter
have, now and then, so short a form that they exhibit only the elements
of the root itself, as Dtn perfectus fuit, bjD light.
b) Most of these monosyllabic roots are imitations of natural sounds,
and sometimes coincide with the roots of the Indo-Germanic stock.
E. g. t^an [comp. Eng. /a;;], ivTiica {tvtio}). NEI ^wtttw (^wqpw), tjbs,
xoluJiTb), a^b i.di&b), Xav&avw.
c) The stems with hard, strong consonants are to be regarded, accord-
ing to the general progress of language (§ 6, 4), as the oldest, while
the feebler and softer consonants distinguish forms of a later period,
which consequently are more frequently used for the derivative and
metaphorical significations. E. g. nii^ and riba to be smooth, to be
shorn, to be bald; and even nb5 to be bare. Sometimes, however,
the harder or softer sound is essential to the imitative character of the
word, as bba to roll (spoken of a ball, of the rolling of waves), but "iia
rather of the rough sound made in the act of scraping = aalqa, avgco,
verro; 3Sn to cut stones or wood, requires a stronger sound than It J
to cut grass, to mow.
d) It appears also that those consonants which resemble each other in
strength or feebleness, are commonly associated in the formation of
root-syllables, as yp, DD, T5, 15 (never ^'S, y:,, C35, tp) ; yS, TD
^seldom tS); Up, 15 (not W5). Scarcely ever are the first two radi-
§ 30. STEM- WORDS AND EOOTS. 69
cals the same (iT^^) or very similar (in!!*)- On the contrary the last,
two are very often the same (§ 67).*
e) The tendency to substitute smooth for harsh sounds (see letter c) is
sometimes so great that I, n, ?-, especially when used as middle stem-
letters, are even softened to vowels, as ^^'^, ttJW to tread down, to
thresh; yk^, y^^ (comp. G3S), to press, and many others. Comp,
salvare, French smiver ; caiidus, Ttal. caldo, in Naples caudo, French
chaud ; falsus. falso. in Calabria fauzu, French faux ; and the pro-
nunciation of the English words talk, walk. Comp. § 19, 5. Rem.
f) Often, however, the three stem-letters must all be regarded as origi-
nal, since all are necessary to make the sound of the word expressive
of the sense, e. g. T|5ri. pJPl, p\v to be narrow, to afflict ; w//o), ango ;
T|"iv ^(^ tread ; Cia , pgsfxco, fremo, to make a humming sound {to buzz,
hence to spin), &c.
A full development of this action of the living elements of the lan-
guage, may be found in the later editions of Gesenius'^ Hebrew Lexicon.
It is important that even the learner should be taught to regard the
roots and their .significations, not as the arbitrary creation of a people
secluded from all the rest of the ancient world, but as imitations of
nature, and as intimately connected with the well-known treasures of
other languages, spoken by nations more nearly related to ourselves.
3. To a secondary process, or later epoch of the language,
belong stem-words of four and, in the case of nouns, even ofj^ye
consonants. These are, however, comparatively far less frequent
in Hebrew than in its sister dialects. t This lengthening of the
form is effected in two ways : a) by adding a fourth stem-letter ;
6) by combining into one word two triliteral stems, so that then
even quinquelitei'als are formed. Such lengthened forms as
arise from the mere repetition of some of the three stem-letters,
as b::i5, bt:bt2)5 ; nno, '2'O^'q, are not regarded as quadriliterals, but
as variations in conjugation (§ 55). So likewise the few words
which are formed by prefixing t , as rinnb tlj flame from nnb ,
Aram. conj. Shafel ^nblD.
Rem. on a). Some forms are made by the insertion particularly of /
and r between the first and second radicals ; as DD3 , CD"i3 to shear off,
to eat off; E5"i2n\JJ = aad sceptre ; 5]St to glow ; rnssb? hot wind (the
* Letters which are not found associated as radicals are called incompatible.
They are chiefly such as too strongly resemble each other, as 5p , p5 , 5l2 23 .
Some letters, however, have been falsely considered incompatible, as bl , wliich
are sometimes associated, e. g. in hy^ and b'ln, from the harsher forms "na.
I'in. Comp. yqumog, together with yguiSdi^r, oxtw, along with oydoog, and
much that is analogous in Sanskrit.
t Especially in yEthiopic, where these forms are very frequent.
70 PAET II. PARTS OF SPEECR
first form with ^ frequent in Syr.). This mode of formation is analogoua
with Piel, and in Aramaean the two forms exist together, as b^3J, b5"iS.
In Latin there is a correspondent lengthening of the stem; as Jindo,
scindo, tu7ido,jungo (in Sanscr. Class VII), i'romjid. scid (axiduw), tud,
jug. Additions are also made at the end, principally of I and n; as l.'!"ia
an axe, from the stem TnJi to cut; ^2i"i3 an oj chard, from 01.3; ^2>as
Jlower-cup, from ?^35i cup ; from ann to tremble, ^a'lri to hop. The ter-
mination -I has perhaps a diminutive force, as it has in many languages.
Rem. on h). In the combination of triliterals, it generally happens
that letters common to them both are written but once in the compound
form, as ?'|]*1S:J a frog, perhaps prop, marsh-hopper, from "iSS to hop,
and Arab. S^xin a marsh; "Ijxbu tranquil, from fib^ to be quiet, and
"|5NUJ to be at rest ; or a feeble letter is cast away, as vl^os a bat, from
bay dark and ti'S Jlying. Still bolder changes are sometimes made in
the amalgamation of words, as ^'i'ab'B (6 SBiva) Dan. viii. 13 from
It should be remarked that quadriliterals may be shortened again
mto triliterals. E. g. from ba"in (Ao/j, see above), bsn with the same
signification ; hence "^^5)1 a partridge (from its hopping, limping gait) ;
n\and a chain for tTiilJnia', from "inid, "id")^.
4, To an earlier stage of the language, on the contrary, be-
long the pronouns (§ 32 foil.), and some particles, especially inter-
jections (§ 105, 1), which as an ancient and crude formation have
not attained to the model of the triliteral stems, and follow pecu-
liar and freer laws of inflection.* Most of the particles, however,
are either derived from nouns or resemble them in inflection,
although their form is often very much shortened on account of
their enclitic nature, and their origin can no longer be known.
(See § 99, &c.)
§31.
OF GRAMMATICAL STRUCTURE.
1. The formation of the parts of speech from the roots, and
their inflection, are eflfected in two ways : 1) by changes in the
stem itself, particularly in its vowels ; 2) by the addition of for-
mative syllables. A third method, viz. the use of several sepa-
rate words in place of inflection (as in expressing the comparative
* Comp. Hup/eld's System dor semiti?chen Dcmonstrativbiklung und der damit
zusammenhangenden Prouominal- und Partikelnbildung, in the Zeitscbrift fiir die
Kunde des Moi^enlandes, Bd. II., S. 124 ffi 427 ff.
§ 32. THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 71
degree and several relations of case), belongs rather to the syntax
than to that part of grammar which treats of fortns.
The second mode of forming words, namely, by agglutination, which
is exemplified in the Egyptian, appears on the whole to be the more
ancient of the two. Yet other languages, as the Semitic stock, had
early recourse also to the first mode, namely, internal modification of the
stem, and in the period of their youthful vigor this formative ten-
dency was actively developed ; but in later periods its force continually
diminished, and it became necessary to resort to the constructions of
syntax. This is exemplified in the Greek (including the modern) and
in the Latin with its corrupt branches, the Romanic languages. — The
formation of words by agglutination is prevalent in ancient and modern
Egyptian ; that by internal modification in Sanskrit and Greek ; the
Chinese is almost entirely destitute of any grammatical structure, and
supplies its place by the relations of syntax.
2. Both methods of formation and inflection are found in
Hebrew. That which is effected by vowel-changes exhibits con-
siderable variety (^t:]?, bp]^, bbj5, bDp, ^Dp). We have an exam-
ple of the other method in bDptn?1, and of both in the same word
in blDptiri. Inflection by the addition of formative syllables occurs,
as in almost all languages, in the formation of the persons of the
verb, where also the import of these annexed syllables is still, for
the most part, perfectly clear (see §§ 44, 47) ; moreover it occurs
in the distinction of gender and number in the verb and the noun.
Of case-endings, on the contrary, there appear in Hebrew only
imperfect remains (§ 90).
CHAPTER I.
OF THE PEONOUN.
§32.
OF THE PERSONAL OR SEPARATE PRONOUN".
1. The personal pronoun (as well as the pronouns generally)
is among the oldest and simplest elements of the language (§ 30,
4). For this reason, and as forming the basis of verbal inflection
(§§44, 47), it properly claims our first attention.
2. The pronouns in their separate and full forms, or as
expressing the nominative, are the following :
72 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
/Singular. Plural
I cowm.'^pbJ*, in pause ]
'^T.i^ ; '^?S?:,m pause >•/.
( m. nns? ( ns ), in i
2 -< pause nri^ ^ thou.
3
comm. ^:n;N, Cijns),
/. ni< (•'riix pr. "inx)
)
m. «in
/ie.
/• ^^57
she.
w. on, n^n
ye.
if/tey.
The forms included in parentheses seldom occur. A com-
plete view of these pronouns with their abbreviated forms [suf-
fixes) is given at the end of the grammar in Parad. A.
Remarks.
I. First Person.
1. The form ""Dix is nearly as frequent in the Old Testament ae ''3X.
The former exists in the Phoenician, but in no other of the kindred dia-
lects ;* from the latter are formed the suffixes (§ 33). In the Talmud
"'SSt is constantly used, and *i3bx very seldom.
2. The formation of the plural in this and the other persons, though
analogous with that of verbs and nouns, exhibits (as also in the pronoun
of other languages) much that is irregular and arbitrary. IsnSN is made
from ■'33X (with the exchange of 3 for n) by the addition, as it seems,
of ^3X . The form 13X . from which the suffixes are derived, occurs only
in Jer. xlii. 6 (K^thibh). The form wnj is found only six times ; e. g.
Gen. xlii. 11, Numb, xxxii. 32. (In the Talmud !i3>t alone appears.)
3. The first person alone is of the common gender^ because one that
is present speaking needs not the distinction of gender as does the
second person addressed (in Greek, Latin, and German the distinction
is omitted here also), and the third person spoken of
II. Second Person.
4. The forms nnx, Fix, drns, "jrix, are contracted from nnJX, &c. ;
the kindred dialects yet have n before the n, Arab, anta f anti thou,
plur. anhim f antimna ye. The essential syllable is iijn ta, to which
the meaning thou belongs (see § 44, 1) ; the an prefixed is demonstra-
tive, and gives more support to the form. PX without ti occurs only
five times, e. g. Ps. vi. 4, and each time as K^thibh with the Q'ri SiPX.
As the vowels of the text belong to the Q^ri (§ 17), the reading of the
KHhibh may have been Fix as an abbreviation from nnx .
* In Phcenician it is ■written "^SX , without the ending ''—7, and spoken some-
what like anckh (Plauti Pcenulus, V. 2, 35., Gesenii Mon. Phcenicia, pp. 376, 43*7).
A trace of this form ia found in the ^thiopic qatalku (/have killed). In ancient
Egyptian ANK (pronounced anok).
§ 33. THE SUFFIX PRONOUK 73
The feminine form was originally pronounced '^flX (with the feminine
designation ''-r, probably from X'^fi she, properly thou she, compare
"^h^pU, § 47, 2), as in Syriac, Arabic, and ^thiopic. This form is still
found in a few instances (Judg. xvii. 2, 1 Kings xiv. 2). Some forms in
the inflection of the verb are derived from it (§ 44, Rem. 4, § 59, 1).
The final "^—7 being gradually lost to the ear (in Syriac it was at length
only written, not pronounced), its Yodh was omitted, so that the Jewish
critics, even in the above-mentioned passages, place in the Q^ri FIS,
whose Sh^va stands in the punctuation of the text (§ 17). The same
final ■'— r appears, moreover, in the unfrequent forms of the suffix "^3-::.
''?1— (5 58).
5. The plurals CFiJt , "JPIX are blunted forms (comp. § 27, Rem. 4, b) of
nsinx (Arab, antum, Chal. "I'lPX, a form which lies at the foundation of
some verbal inflections, § 59, 1), and y\T\ii or 1'^ns, the full final vowel
giving place to the obtuse sound of e, somewhat in the manner of the
third person. "jFiit is found only once (Ezek. xxxiv, 31. where another
reading is IPX); and «^2riN (for which MSS. have also i^SPiX (occurs
only four times, viz. in Gen. xxxi. 6 ; Ez. xiii. 11, 20 ; xxxiv. 17. For
the ending fi— see No. 7.
III. Third Person.
6. The X indicates a kind of half-vowel heard at the end of wn and
X'^ii) hiia, Ma, like e in the German die (old GermAhiu^thid), sic, wie.
A trace of this appears in the Arabic ; as huwa, hiya, in the common
dialect hiia, hia.
The masculine NW is of common gender in the Pentateuch, in which
it is used also for she. (See § 2, 3.) The punclators, however, whenever
it stands for N"^!i, give it the appropriate pointing of this form (Klfi), and
require it to be read XT) (comp. § 17). It is, however, to be sounded
rather according to the old form NW.
7. The plural forms en and ",11 come from i<>in and N^n in the same
manner as EPS from nnx . In Arab, where they are pronounced hum,
himna, the obscure vowel-sound is retained; for which the suffixes on,
in still have Seghol (§ 27, Rem. 4, 6). The n— in both forms has a
demonstrative ^OYce. (See § 90, 2.) In Chald. (liart; I'^n). Arab, and
jSlthiop. {humu, homu) there is an appended o, ii, which occurs in
Hebrew in the poetical forms i'O, i?2^— , ia^ § 58, 3, Rem. 1).
8. The pronouns of the third person X^n, Xin. an, "jn, are also
demonstrative pronouns (see § 122, 1).
§ 33.
SUFFIX PRONOUN.
1. The full and separate forms of the pronoun, as given in
the foregoing section, express only the nominative :* the accusa-
* See an exception in § 121, 2.
74 PAET II. PARTS OF SPEECK
live and genitive, on the contiar}^, are expiessed by shortened
forms or fragments which are joined to the end of verbs, nouns,
and particles {suffix j^rotioims, usually suffixes), e. g. in him
and i his (from i^^H he), thus W^rib^J? I have killed him, iO'lD his
horse.
Instances of the like contraction occur in Greek, Latin, and German,
as nttxrjQ /xov for naxriQ ifiov, Lat. eccuvi in Plautus for ecce eum, Germ.
du hasVs for dii, hast es. In Hebrew this is done systematically, as in
Egyptian, Hungarian, and some other languages,
2. Concerning the cases which these sufSxes denote, let it oe
remarked :
a) when joined to verbs, they denote the accusative (but comp.
§ 121, 4), ^H'^rib'Jp I have killed him ;
h) when joined to substantives, they denote the genitive (like
LiarrjQ f-LOv, "pater ejus), and then serve as possessive pro-
nouns, as '^SX [ahh-i) tny father ; iO^O, equus ejus, and equus
suns (§ 124, i, b) ;
c) when joined to particles, they denote either the genitive or
the accusative, according as the particle has the meaning of
a noun or a verb ; e, g. "^rilSl (prop. m,i/ vicinity) with me, like
mea caussa, on the contrary '^isn behold ine, ecce me ;
d) the dative and ablative of the pronoun are expressed by com-
bining the prepositions that are signs of these cases (b sign of
the dative, 3 in, ^Qfrom, § 102) with the suflfixes, as ib to him,
is in him, ^p2from me.
3. Some of these suffixes are probably derived from forms of
the separate pronoun of which no trace now remains, as ^— thee
from a form like HSX = SIPS thou. This applies also to the affor-
matives of the verb (§44, 1).
4. The suffix of the verb (the accusative) and the suffix of the
noun (the genitive) are mostly the same in form, but sometimes
they are different, e, g. "^3 me, ^— my.
A tabular view of all the forms, both of the separate pronouns and
of the suffixes, is exhibited in Paradigm A. In §§ 58-61 are given more
full explanations of the forms oi^ verbal suffixes and of the modes of
attaching them to the verb, and in § 91 of the forms and attachment of
nominal suffixes. On the prepositions with suffixes, see § 103.
1 34, 35. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN AND ARTICLE. 75
§34.
THE DEMONSTEATIVE PEONOUN.
Sing", m. HT*
/. ns<T (iT, HT) ' ^^'^•
Plur. comm. !l^2^ (rarely bi5) these.
The feminine form iniiT is for nST (from ST = mT and the
feminine ending n, see §80, 2) ; and the forms it, MT, which are
both of rare occurrence, come from fiiJT by dropping n. The
forms 5S and H^S (related to the Arabic article bs5, §35, Rem. 1)
are plural by usage, and not by grammatical inflection. The
form b»5 occurs only in the Pentateuch and 1 Chr. xx. 8, and
always with the article bsn (Rem. 1). The ending n_ in nbx
(same as H— .) is a demonstrative appendage, as in TTsri (§ 32,
Rem. 7).
Another form of the demonstrative is ^7 , used only in poetry.
It stands mostly for the relative, like that for who^ and is used
for all numbers and genders, like lltJS (§ 36).
Rem. 1. This pronoun receives the article (n^iri, n^xin, bxn) accord-
ing to the same rules as the adjectives, § 111, 2. There are, besides,
some peculiar forms in which b is inserted after the article, l^.t^^! Gen.
xxiv. 65 ; xxxvii. 19 ; flt^fi fern. Ez. xxxvi. 35, and shortened t^rt
usually masc. Judges vi. 20 ; 1 Sam. xiv. 1 ; xvii. 26 ; but fern, in
2 Kings iv. 25. In Arabic there is a corresponding form alladhl as rela-
rive pronoun.
2. Some other pronominal stems occur among the particles, § 99, &c.
§35.
THE AETICLE.
Originally the article was a demonstrative pronoun, akin to
the pronoun of the third person, but of so feeble import that it
was never used except in connection with the noun. Its usual
form is 'H, with a short sharp-spoken a and a doubling of the
* In most languages the demonstratives begin with d, hence called the demon-
strative sound, which is, however, interchanged with a sibilant [as in Heb. ntj
or a rough breathing. Thus in Aram. Jfn, I'n, "^'n this, Arab, dhu, dhi, dha ;
Sansk. sa, set, tat, [Gr. o, fj, to'], Goth, sa, sd, thafa; Germ, da; der, die, das [out
the, this, th'U], &c.
76 PART 11. PARTS OF SPEECH.
following consonant (by Daghesh forte), e. g. liJ^iln the sun,
"IS^n the river for "li^^n (according to §20, 3, h).
When the article -H stands before a word beginning with a
guttural, then the Daghesh forte cannot (according to § 22, 1)
be used, and hence the short and sharp a (Pattach) is lengthened
into a (Qamets) or a (Seghol).
But to be more minute :
1. Before the Aveakest guttural i? and before "l (§22, 5) the
vowel of the article is always lengthened to Q,amets, as nsn the
father, "insn the other, Di?n tlie mother, TC'^Sn the 7nan, ^?")n the
foot, IDS^in the head, 'S'&'\T\ the evil-doer.
2. For the other gutturals it is in general the rule, that the
stronger the guttural, the more firmly does the sharpness of the
syllable, and consequently the short a, maintain its«lf. But there
are then two cases to be distinguished :
4.) When the guttural is followed by some other vowel than a
(__) or ° (-—). then a) before the stronger H and T\, the arti-
cle regularly remains H , as i5^!iri that, Ti^nnri the month, ^^flH
the strength ; with rare exceptions, as "'Hn Gen. vi. 19, and
always Dnn those ; b) before V the Pattach is generally
lengthened, as ')|'?n the eye, I'^S'n the city, 'l^yn the servant,
plnr. □"''TSyn. (Exceptions in Jer. xii. 9, Prov. ii. 17.)
B) But when the guttural is followed by a (— ), then a) before
n and ^ the article is always <!, provided it stands immedi-
ately before the tone-syllable, else it is H, e. g. DlJn the j)eoj)le,
inn the mountain, X!'^f) (in pause), ninn towards the vnoiin-
tain, on the contrary D^'inH the mountains, "jiyn the guilt ;
b) before n the article is always H, without regard to the
^place of the tone, as D^n*^ ^^*^ wise, i^nn the feast ; so also
c) before H, as ''^nn the sickness, D'^'C'inn the months. (On
the contrary "'asnn according to A, a.)
Gender and number have no influence on the form of the
article.
Rem. 1. The form of the Hebrew article •?] appears to have come
from bli, the h being always assimilated to the following letter (as in
nj57, Irora Hj^b';!, § 19, 2). The uniform assimilation is explained by
the enclitic nature of the article. In Arabic, its form is bx (spoken lial
among the Bedouins*), in which also the b is assimilated, at least before
all s and t sounds, as well as before /, n. and r. E. g. al- Koran : but,
* See Wallin in d. Zeitscbr. der D. Morgenl. Oes. Bd. VI., S. 195. 217.
§§36, SY. RELATIVE, INTERROG. AKD INDEF. PRONOUNS. 77
as-sana (Beilouin, has-sana), the same as ^^^^<Z the year. — The Arabic
article itself occurs in the Old Testament, in the Arabic name Tii/Q^x
Gen. X. 26, and perhaps in ^"^na^X ice, hail= '^■'25, Ez. xiii. 11, 13;
according to others, in Q'lp^U? (the people), Prov. xxx. 31.
2. When the prepositions 3, ^, and the 3 of comparison (§102)
come before the article, the n falls away (by contraction) and the pre-
position takes its pointing (§ 19, 3, 6, and § 23, 5), as D;^Vi'3 in the heaven
for D';i^Tari3 ; wsh to the people for Bi'•^^ , C'lrjS on the mountains. With
3, however (which is less closely connected with the word), the n very
often remains, as Di^ns Gen. xxxix. 11, but also ni'3 Gen. xxv. 31, 33 ;
seldom with other prefixes, except in the later books, as csnb 2 Chron
X. 7. (But see 1 Sam. xiii. 21; Ps. xxxvi. 6.) With "], which in con-
ception is still less closely connected with the word, the n always
remains, as Disni and the people.
§36.
THE RELATIVE PRONOUK
The relative pronoun for both genders and numbers is "niBift
who, which. In the later books, and even in some of the earlier,
as in Canticles throughout, and occasionally in Judges, it takes
the form '11? by the elision of X and assimilation of "l. according
to § 19, 2, 3 ; more rarely the form • 10 Judges v. 7, Cant. i. 7,
and before i5 in a single instance it Judges vi. 17, though else-
where 12? before the gutturals. The still more abbreviated form
tp* occurs Eccles. ii. 22 [in some copies] ; iii. 18. For the man-
ner in which the cases of the relative are expressed, see § 123. 1.
"ilZJX is used also as a conjunction, like quod, oti, that. Closely con-
nected with it in meaning is "'S , which also belongs to the pronominal
stems, § 104.
§ 37.
THE INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
1. The interrogative pronoun is '^'Q ivho 7 (of persons), and
Sra ichat 7 (of things).
The pointing of tia with Qamets is seldom found out of pause, except
before N and 1 , as onx Ma what are ye 7 nn'^xn n^ %o?iat do ye see ?
rarely before n as in Josh. iv. 6, 21. It is commonly written in close
* In the Phcenician it never occurs in the full form, but as ttJ, and U3S,
spoken sa, se, si, and ys, es. Gesenius Men. Phoen. p. 438 ; Movers Phcenic. Texte I.,
S. 81, ff. II., S. 44. Comp. above § 2, 5. In modern Hebre'W" also, ttJ has become
the prevailing form.
78 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
connection with the following word : a) "r\'q with Maqqeph and Daghesh
forte conjunctive (§ 20, 2), as Tl^^'n^a quid tibi? and even in one word,
as Ds|53 quid vobis? Is. iii. 15, njrja what is that? Ex. iv. 2 ; b) before
the harder gutturals rt, n, S, it also takes PaMac/i with the Daghesh
implied in the following guttural (§ 22, 1), xwna Num. xiii. 18;
c) before a guttural with Qamets, it takes Seghol (according to § 27,
Rem. 2), as n'^bS'na what hast thou done 7 This Seghol stands also
occasionally before letters that are not guttural, as 'l5i bip np rcha.t
voice, &c. ? 1 Sam. iv. 6 ; 2 Kings i. 7, but only when the tone of the clause
is far removed from the word ; moreover in the form ni33 , 11532 (see
more in the Lexicon under fia in the note).
2. Both I'D and JTa occur also as an indefinite pronoun, in
the sense of whoever, whatever.
CHAPTER 11.
OF THE VERB.
§38.
GENERAL VIEW.
1. Of the Hebrew parts of speech, the verb exhibits the
greatest completeness and variety of development. It is also, in
several respects, the most important ; especially, as it generally
contains the word-stein (§ 30), and as its various modifications
furnish, mainly, the forms of the other parts of speech.
2. All verbs, however, are not stem-words. They may be
divided, in respect to their origin, into three classes :
a) Primitives, e. g. tf^'Q to reign ; 2TI?^ to sit.
b) Verbal Derivatives, derived from other verbs, e.g. p^S to jus-
tify, y^^'^'^ to justify otie^s self, from p'l:^ to be just ; com-
monly called conjugations (§ 39).
c) Denominatives, or those derived from nouns ; e. g. briij and
btys^ to iritch a tent, from briS a tent ; llJ'ntt? to root out and
TCinffin to take root, from TDniC a root.
These appear to be of later origin than the two preceding
classes, which they imitate in their forms.
The noun from which the denominative verb comes, is in most cases
itself derivative ; e. g. "jab to be white, hence •'^^a^ a brick (from the
color), and hence again lia^ to make bricks; from tij'n to increase
greatly, W a fish, and hence again J>i'n to fish.
§39. CONJUGATIONS. 79
A peculiar kind of secondary verbs, and at least of rather late forma-
tion in the language (hence frequent in the later dialects), are those
denominatives, one of whose consonants, originally a servile, has become
a radical. E. g. 013 to rest, to set one's selfdoicn; hence the noun nnS
a setting down; hence again nnj to descend; in like manner rin!ij,
a pit. destruction (from H^lU), hence nJiia to destroy.
§39.
1. The third person of the Perfect, in the simple, primitive
form of the verb (i. e. Kal, see No. 4), is regarded as the stem, or
ground-form ; as bu]? he has killed, ^13 he was heavy * From
this come the other persons of the Perfect, and with this the
Participle connects itself. There is still another, of the same
form as the Infinitive (Vt3j?, also ^tJp), with which are connected
the Imperative and the Imperfect.
The first ground-form, of two syllables (Arab, qatala, qatila, qattda),
may be called the concrete ; and the second, which is generally mono-
syllabic (Arab, qatl, qitl, qiitl), the abstract. The same analogy prevails
in the division of nouns into abstract and concrete.
In verbs whose second radical is 1, the full stem appears only in the
second form ; e. g. aiiiJ, of which the third person Perf. is 3^.
2. From this stem are formed, according to an unvarying
analogy in all verbs, the verba derivata, each distinguished by
a specific change in the form of the stem, with a corresponding
definite change in its signification (intensive, frequentative, cau-
sative ; passive, reflexive, reciprocal). E.g. Tab to learn, Tab to
cause to learn, to teach ; DDtC to lie, l''3pn to cause to lie, to lay ;
tiSTC to judge ; tOSTp; to contend before a judge, to go to laio. In
other languages such words are regarded as new derivative verbs ;
e. g. to fall, to fell ; jacere to throio,jacere to lie ; yh'OjLiai to
be born, ytvvaco to bear. But in Hebrew, where these forma
tions are far more regular than e. g. in German, Greek, or Latin
they are called, since the time of Reuchlin, conjugations't (Hebr.
D''2^513, more correctly species, modifications) of the ground-form,
and both in the grammar and the lexicon are always treated of
in connection, as parts of the same verb.
* The infinitive is here used for the sake of brevity in most grammars and
lexicons, thus lia^ to learn, prop, he has learned.
t Not in the sense in which this term is used in Greek and Latin grammars.
80 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
3. The changes of the ground-form consist partly in varying
its vowels, or doubling one or more of its letters (^25p, b^]? ; buip
^1??^ ; ^f'Ppj "'P'?'^!? ; comp. to lie, to lay ; to fall, to fell) ; partly
in the addition of formative letters or syllables (blDpS, b'^ppn ;
comp. to speak, to bespeak ; to count, to recount ; hid, forbid) ;
sometimes in both united, as bapti^l. (Comp. §31, 2.)
In the AramEean this is effected less by the change of vowels than
by the addition of formative syllables ; the variations by vowels having
almost gone out of use ; so that, for instance, all the passives are sup-
plied by the reflexives, with the prefix syllable Pix, nx. The Arabic
is rich in both methods, while the Hebrew holds also here the middle
place (§ 1, 6).
4. Grammarians differ as to the number and arrangement of
these conjugations. The common practice, however, of giving
to them still the old technical designations, prevents any error.
The ground-form is called Kal ('bp light, because it has no for-
mative additions) ; the others (D'^'75? heavy, because burdened
with formative additions) derive their names from the Paradigm
used by the old Jewish grammarians, bys he has done* Several
of them have passives which distinguish themselves from their
actives by the obscure vowels. The most common conjugations
(including Kal) are the five following ; but few verbs, however,
exhibit them all.
Active. Passive.
1. Kal, bti]? to kill. (wanting.)
2. Niphal, bup; to kill one's self. (very rare.)
3. Piel, ^^UokUlnmny, )
[to massacre. \ ' -'*
4. Hiphil, bi'jpn to cause to kill. Hophal, ^^PO
5. Hithpael, bDpnn to kill on.'i's self. Hothpaal, btOpriH
* This verb, on account of the guttural which it contains, is unsuitable for a
Paradigm, and was accordingly exchanged for 1|5B, which has this advantage,
that all its conjugations are actually in use. There is, however, some indistinct-
ness in the pronunciation of some of its forms, as Fl'I^Q, tSh'ipS. The Paradigm
btap , in common use since the time of Danz, obviates this inconvenience, and is
especially adapted to a comparative treatment of the Semitic languages, inasmuch
as it is found with a slight change (Arab, and ^Ethiop. bnp) in all of them.
In Hebrew, it is true, it has only the forms of Kal, which are not frequent, and
occur only in poetry ; yet it may be retained as a type or model sanctioned by
usage.
§40. CONJUGATIONS. 81
There are several other less frequent conjugations, of which
some, however, are more common than these in the kindred lan-
guages, and in the irregular verb in Hebrew they sometimes take
the place of the usual conjugations (§ 55).
Ill Arabic there is a greater variety of forms, and a more perfect
arrangement, than in Hebrew. Arranged after the Arabic manner, the
Hebrew conjugations would stand thus : — 1. Kal. 2. Piel and Pual.
3. Poel and Poal (§ 55, l). 4. Hipkil and Hophal. 5. Hithpael and
Hothpaal. 6. Hithpoel (§ 55). 7. Niphal. 8. Wanting in Hebrew.
9. Pilel. The most appropriate division is into three classes ; 1) Tlie
intensive Picl, with the analogous forms derived from it ; 2) The
causative Hiphil, and its analogous forms (Shaphel, Tiphel); 3) The
reflexive and passive Niphal.
§ 40.
1. The Hebrew verb is indebted, for whatever copiousness it
exhibits, chiefly to these co7ijugations or derivative verbs. In
moods and tenses it is ver}^ poor, having only two tenses {Perfect
and Ini^s^xfeet*), an Lnperative^ an Lifinitive (with two forms),
and a Participle. All other relations of time, absolute and rela-
tive, must be expressed by these, either alone (hence the multi-
plicity in the uses of the same form, § 125, &c.) or in syntactic
connection with other words. The jussive and optative are
sometimes indicated by peculiar forms of the Impf. (see § 48).
In the Germanic languages also there are distinct forms for only two
tenses (the present and imperfect). In the formation of all the others,
auxiliary verbs are employed. Comp. Grimni's d. Gram. 2. A. I. 835.
2. In the inflection of the Perf. and Imjf. by persons, the
Hebrew differs from the Western languages, having in most
cases distinct forms for both genders.^ as in the personal pronoun,
which is incorporated in the forms of these tenses.
The following table exhibits the formative syllables [afforma-
tives and preformatives) of the two tenses. The stem-letters
are indicated by dots. For the details, see § 44 ff".
* See § 47, note * wheve the relation of these two terms to each other, and
their general import, are explained. The learner will observe, that the cor-
responding terms in the Hebrew lexicon of Gesenius (translated by Dr. Robinson,
fifth edition, 1854) are Prctter for Pei'fect, and Future for Imperfect. — Tr.
6
82
PART n. PAHTS OF SPEECH.
PERFECT.
3
m
3
/•
2
m
2
/
1
c.
3
m
3
/•
2
m
2
/
1
c.
Sing,
n.
P?Mr.
3 c.
2 m.
dn .
. .
2/.
1^ •
. .
Ic.
513 .
• •
IMPERFECT.
•
3 m.
1 .
. . ^
n
3/
ns .
:
r\
2 m.
1 .
. . n
:
2/.
T
:
b(
Ic.
,
. . ?
§41.
In the formation of all the verbs there is the same general
analogy ; and the Hebrew has properly no anomalous verbs,
like those, for instance, in Greek, which end in ^u. The devia-
tions which occur from the general model of the regular verb
are owing —
a) to the presence of a guttural as one of the stem-letters or radi-
cals, which occasions various vowel changes according to § 22
{guttural verb, §§ 62-65) ;
6) to the falling away of a strong stem-letter by assimilation or
contraction {contracted* verb, §§66, 67), as liJSii, HID ;
c) to the presence of a feeble letter as one of the radicals (§§ 23,
24), so that many changes occur through its commutation,
omission, or quiescence {quiescent ox feeble verb, §§ 68-75), as
The letters of the old Paradigm bl^s are used in naming the letters
of the stem, S designating the first, V the second, and b the third.
Hence the expressions, verb NS for a verb whose first radical is X {primes
radicalis i<) ; verb rtb for one whose third radical is ti {terticB radicalis
ti) ; verb ISS (S doubled) for one whose second and third radicals are the
same {medice radicalis geminates).
* The term defective, by which some designate this class, we apply to those
whose forms are not all in use (§ 7 8).
§§42, 43. THE REGULAR VERB; KAL 83
I. OF THE REGULAR VERB.
§42.
As the rules for the formation of the regular verb apply, with only
occasional modifications, to all the irregular verbs, it will be most con-
venient (and will also exhibit the subject in the most clear light to the
learner) to present, while treating of the former, whatever belongs to
the general analogy of the verb.
In Parad. B, and the above table § 40, 2, are given the usual and
normal forms, with full explanations in the following sections (43-55).
In these, each subject is explained where it first comes under notice ;
e. g. the inflection of the Perfect and Imperfect, with the modifications
of the latter, in treating of /faZ — as also the forms and significations of
the several conjugations in treating of the regular verb, though the
same things are applicable to irregular verbs, &c.
A OF THE GROUND-FORM, OR KAL.
§43.
ITS FOEM AND SIGNIFICATION.
1. The common form of the 3d person Perf. in Kal is bap
[middle A)* especially in tra7isitive verbs. There is also a form
with E (Tsere), and another with O {Chole?}i), in the second
syllable ; the two latter usually employed in an intransitive
sense, and for expressing states and qualities, e. g. '^5? io be
heavy, Itijp to be S7nall. Sometimes both forms, the transitive
and the intransitive, exist together, as i^b'a to Jill (Esther vii. 5),
itb'Q to be full (comp. §47, Rem. 2), yet also with the same sense
for both forms, as D"!)? and S'l^ to app7'oach.
A verb middle E will be found in the Paradigm by the side of a verb
middle A. The example selected shows, at the same time, the effect of
inflection on Daghesh lene in the middle stem-letter.
Rem. 1. The vowel of the second syllable is the principal vowel,
and hence it distinguishes between the transitive and intransitive. The
pretonic Qamets in the first syllable has little strength, and becomes
vocal Sh^va on the shifting of the tone, as DnVap. In Aramtean it
wholly lalls away in the root itself^ as bap, bup.
Rem. 2. Examples of denominatives in Kal : "inrj to cover with
pitch, from "iian pitch ; tCtq to salt, from nhh salt.
* A verb middle A is one that has Pattach (short a) under the middle radical.
or in the second syllable ; a verb middle E, one that has Tserc ; and a verb
middle 0, one that has Cholem. — Tr,
84 PART n. PARTS OF SPEECH.
§44.
PEKFEOT OF KAL AND ITS INFLECTION.
1. The inflection of the Perfect in respect to person, number,
and gender, is effected by appending fragments of the personal
pronouns, plural and feminine endings, (as afforonatives,) to the
end of the ground-form. In explaining this connection, we may
treat the ground-form as a jiarticiple, or a verbal adjective* ex-
pressing by itself the ^d sing. Perf. ; as b'Jj^ he has killed, r»"'5'J^
thoii hast killed ( = killing-thou, or killer-thou, a, killer wast thou,
nriS? ^T\p), S}"!^ he was fearing, Utr^y; fearing were ye, for
DFifi? £51''. In the second person this is readily seen, as well as in
^Sbajp for ^DS!| bT2)?. In the first person sing. ^Tb^"^ we have '^—,
the simple germ of the pronoun, united with the demonstrative
sound In, by which the afformative is at the same time distin-
guished from the suffix forms "^D and "i— (as if one would form
■ippX, "^riN /, after the analogy of nni?). In the third person, tl—
(originally fl— , comp. Rem. 4) is a designation of the feminine (as
in the noun § 80, 2), and ^ (originally "Jl) is a sign of the plural.
In the Indo-Germanic tongues the inflection by persons originated in
the same manner, namely, by appending pronominal forms ; as, e. g. in
the Sanscrit and Greek, from the stem as {to be) Sanscr. asmi, dfil, Dor.
f|U(Ui for ifffxl (I am), where the ending ^t belongs to /xol and fii; Sanscr.
asi, Dor. icrai (thou art), where ai is about = av ; Sanscr. asti, iaxi (he
is), where xt corresponds to the pronoun to, and so fortli. For the most
part, indeed, the etymology is more obliterated here, as it sometimes is
in the Semitic languages ; e. g. 1st pers. sing., Arab, katallu, Syr. ketlet,
where the characteristic i is wholly lost.
2. In respect to vowel changes, the analogy of the 3d fern,
sing, flbp)? is followed by the 3d masc. j)lur. 'ibpS, and that of
the 2d masc. sing, ri*?^)? by all the forms of the first and second
persons.t
* On the intimate connection between the Perfect and the verbal adjective,
see what has already been said § 89, 1. In intransitives they often have the same
form, as St Via full, or he was full ; "jbi? small, or fic was small. In traiisitives the
participle has, indeed, a difTerent form (btSp) ; but the adjective-form, ^lip ,
may be compared with ptij? , although it generally denotes properties, as fiSn
wise, "]13U5 (inimical) adversary, § 84, 1.
\ In the Paradigms the forms f^'^p and n?t?p are, therefore, designated
with an asterisk as model-forms, for the notice of the beginnei-.
§ U. PERFECT OF KAL AND ITS INFLECTION. 8S
Only ur\b'Upj 'Jl!iVtDj3 have the tone on the last syllable, and, in
consequence, Sh\a under the first radical (§27, 3).
N. B. Bern. 1. Verbs middle E, falling back in their inflection to the
type of verbs middle A, generally lose the E sound, which passes over
into (-), as the Paradigm shows. The original E remains, however,
regularly in the feeble stems Ni> (§ 74, Rem. 1) ; in strong stems only
in pause, i. e. when the stress of voice falls upon it, as •^fj^'^. Job xxix.
10 ; comp. 2 Sam. i. 23 ; Job xli. 15.
2. In some feeble stems middle A, the a under the second radical,
sometimes passes over into — or — , when the syllable is closed and
toneless, and the first radical has not a full vowel (§ 27, Rem. 2. 3).
Thus DPi^Xiy ye have asked 1 Sam. xii. 13, BPiia-i'i ye possess Deut. iv.
1, 22 ; so also before suffixes I'^n^NlU / have asked him 1 Sam. i. 20,
'T^f^lr''? I have begotten thee Ps. ii. 7. Such forms must not be considered
verbs middle E : the weakening of the vowel is owing simply to the
general weakness of the form, and the 3d person Perf is ix^, lan';;, n^V
not bxia, ^-i;, nbv See § 64, Rem. 1, and § 69, Rem. 4. "
3. In verbs middle O, the Cholem is retained in inflection where it
has the tone, as nn'i^ . But when the tone is thrown forward. Cholem
becomes Q,amets-chatuph, as I'^n^S'? / have overcome him, Fibs'^'i (see
§ 49, 3) and thou wilt he able, Ex. xviii. 23.
4. Unfrequent forms.* Sing. 3d fern, in n— (as in Arab. iEthiop.
Aram.), e. g. ri^ts, Deut. xxxii. 36. Before suffixes this is the prevail-
ing form (§ 59, 1) ; more frequent in stems sb and nb , § 74, Rem. 1. § 75,
Rem. ]. — 2d masc. tin for Pi (difl'ering only in orthography), as nn'iaa,
Mai. ii. 14, comp. Gen. iii, 12. — 2d fern, sometimes has still a Yodh at the
end; as "'Fiabn, Jer. xxxi.. 21 (according to one form of the pronoun "iriN .
§ 32, Rem. 4). especially in Jeremiah and Ezekiel. It is properly pro-
nounced "'Pisbn, and the vowels of the text belong to the marginal
reading (without '') as in the corresponding pronoun. With this is
connected the form Tibap before suffixes (§ 59, 1, c). — 1st com. sometimes
without Yodh, as sVj'j^, 'Ps. cxl. 13 ; Job xlii. 2 ; 1 Kings viii. 48. This
however is found only in K^thibh ; the d^ri substitutes the full form.—
Pltir. 2d fern, mh (or nsn) Amos iv. 3.— 3d com. seldom with the full
plural ending )^ (often in Chald. and Syr.), as I'S"!^, Deut. viii. 3, 16,
or with a superfluous X (after Arabic orthography), as N^sipn , Jos. x. 24.
In the Imperfect the form with ■)>! is more frequent, see § 47, Rem. 4.
N. B. 5. In connection with the affbrmatives n, "^ti, ^3, the tone is
on the penultima, and the word is Milel; with the others it is i]///ra
(§ 15, 2). The place of the tone is shifted, a) in several persons by
the Pause (§ 29, 4), where it is moved backwards and at the same time
the vowel of the second syllable, if it had become (.), is restored, as
* Almost all these forms, which in Hebrew are unfrequent, are the usual ones
m the kindred dialects, and may, with a proper iinderstanding of the terms, be
called Chaldaisms, Syriasms, and Arabisms.
86 PAET n. PARTS OF SPEECH,
nbofs, 1^^i5, i^^^'?; ^)by Vav consecutive of the Perfect, where it is
moved forward one syllable (§ 49, 3).
H5.
OF THE INFINITIVE.
1. The Infinitive, originally a verbal-substantive, has two
forms. The shorter, in Kal Vujp, is the prevailing form [Injin.
construct). In this form it is united with suffix pronouns, and
with prepositions (p'^p^ to kill, § 132, 2), and takes after it a
nominative of the subject or an accusative of the object (§ 133).
The longer form {Infin. absolute, or em])hatic), in Kal bit3]?, is
used when the action of the verb is presented by itself, without
direct cormection with other words ; and most frequently, when
the Infinitive, as an adverbial accusative, is added to the finite
verb for the sake of emphasis. The first is the more original
form, and has more of the nature and mobility of the verbal-
substantive ; the second is somewhat rigid and immovable, ex-
pressing the verbal idea more in the abstract. For the details,
see Syntax, § 131-133.*
2. In form, bbp and bitaj? are distinguished, by a firm immu-
table 6 in the latter, and a mutable o in the former (hence with
suff. "^^P)?). In the derived conjugations, except Hiph. and Hoph.
the Inf. absol. has generally an immutable 6, although the Inf.
constr. has other vowels ; e. g. Piel, ^itSp, with bD]?.
Besides ibp the Infin. constr. has the following unusual forms in
Kal:
a) b::p , e. g. :3?il5 to lie Gen. xxxiv. 7.
6) nVjp and t^Vj;?, i^\'::ip (feminine forms from bap and bbp) ; as nssiu
to hate, '^3'?p to approach Ex. xxxvi. 2, t^^'Sfi to j^iiy Ezek. xvi. 5.
(As a verbal noun, the Infin. may also take the feminine ending.)
c) b^pa (as in Chaldee) ; e. g. i<'ip53 to call Numb. x. 2.
These unfrequent forms are in more common use as verbal nouns
(§ 84, Nos. 10, 11, 14).
3. A sort of Gerund is formed in Hebrew by the Inf. constr.
with the preposition 1?, as Vupb interficiendo, ad interficiendum,
bsib ad cadendutn (for to fall).
* In the Paradigms the Inf. constr., as the predominant form, is jnit before tht
other under the name of Infinitive, x«r' i^oxriv.
§46. THE ISIPERATm:. 81
The h is here closely combined with the Inf. into a grammatical form
as is shown by the division of syllables and the use of Daghesh lene.
namely Vs;b lin-pol (§ 28, 1). so also liq-tal. ]ust as in the Impf. ''33",
bispv On the contrary ^353 Job iv. 13, VS33 2 Sam. iii. 34. where the
prepositions 3 and 3 are conceived to be less closely connected with the
Infinitive : so also ^. as an exception ; yinsbli UJinDi, Jer. i. 10.
§46.
OF THE IMPERATIVE.
1. The chief form of the Imperative bbjp (^t^Jp) is the same
that Hes also at the basis of the Imperfect (§47), and which in
another view, as Infinitive (§ 45), connects itself with the noun.*
It expresses only the second person, but has inflections for the
feminine and the plural. For the thh'd person it has no form
(see § 130, Rem. 2), and supplies its place by the jussive Imper-
fect ; and even the second must be so expressed when a nega-
tive precedes, as btJpn bs? 7ie occidas (not blip bjs). The proper
passive conjugations have no Imperative ;t but the reflexives, as
Niphal and Hithpael, have it.
2. The inflection is analogous to that of the Imperfect, and
will be understood from the explanations given below in § 47, 2.
Like the Imperfect, the Imperative also has a lengthened and a
shortened form, the first in the manner of the cohortative, the
second after the analogy of the jussive (see §48, 5).
Rem. 1. Besides the form bbp there is also one with Pattach. as 33123
(as in the Inf. and Impf) 2 Sam. xiii. 5. The Pattach is regular in 133
from 133 ; see the Paradigm.
2. Less frequently there is found in the first syllable of the feminine
and plural form an 6 (Q,amets-chatuph) instead of the z, as ^STrTa diaw
ye Ez. xxxii. 20 ; ''sba reign thou f. Judges ix. 10.
* Also the Inf. absol. is occasionally used, like the Greek Infinitive, for the
Imperative (§ 131, 4, h). But this is no ground for taking the Imperative to be
properly an Infinitive ; for the Inf. absol. stands also for a Present, Perfect and
Imperfect. It might rather be supposed, that the Imper. is a shortening of the 2d
person of the Impf (bbp from iibpPi) ; but in reality these three forms are each
independent, and have not arisen one fi-om another, but all alike have been formed
on the basis of the abstract verb (^ 39, 1). The inflection of the Imper. may cer-
tainly have been borrowed from the Impf.
f An Imper. is found twice (Ez. xxxii. 19, Jer. xlix. 8) in Hophal, but with a
reflexive meaning.
88 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH
3. In tlie form iij^ap the n— at times falls away, and then a helping
vowel is introduced, as in ll^aiT hear ye f. for "^JS^iy Gen. iv. 23; coinp
'S'np call ye f for HJXlp Ex. ii. 20. The shortening is probably owin^
to the guttural.
h^7.
OF THE IMPERFECT AND ITS INFLEOTIOK*
1. Fragments of the personal pronoun are employed in the
inflection of the Imperfect as well as of the Perfect ; but in the
Imperfect these fragments are j^jrefixed [preformatives) to the
root in the abstract form, viz. the Inf. constr. (52t2p). These for-
mative particles, inasmuch as they stand before the verbal form,
towards the end of which the tone continually tends, are much
more abbreviated than the afformatives of the Perfect, so that in
every case, only one consonant remains (■>, P, X, 3), mostly with
a very short vowel, viz. vocal Sh^a. But as this is not always
sufficient to mark at the same time the distinction of gender and
of number, the defect is supplied by additions at the end. Comp.
the table, § 40, 2.
2. The derivation and signification, both of the preformatives
and afformatives, are still in most cases clear.
In the \st pers. Vi2pS5 , plur. Vi2p3 , X is an abbreviation of "^Siil ,
3 of ^3i|!. This person required no addition at the end.
In the 2d jiers. sing, the n in Vl2pr\ is from nrii?, the '^— in
■^blipn is the sign of the feminine, as in ^^riK thou (feminine, see
§32, Rem. 4). In the 2d pers. phir. the ^ (more fully 1^, see
Rem. 4) in ^''pjpri, is the sign of the plural as in the 3d person,
* The name Imperfect is here used in direct contrast with Perfect ; in a wider
sense, therefore, than in the Latin and Greek grammar. The Hebrew Perfect
denotes, in general, the finished and past, what is come to pass or is gone into
effect ; but at the same time, that which is represented as perfected, whether
extending still into the present, or in reality yet future. Tho Imperfect, on the
contrary, denotes the imfinhhed and continuing, that which is being done, or coming
to pass, and is future (hence called also Future) ; but also that which is in progress
and in connected succession, iu past time (the Latin Imperfect). This distinction
shows itself in the mode of their formation. Thus, in the more objective Perfect,
the vei"bal-stem precedes, and the designation of the person follows as something
suboi'dinate ; but in the Imperfect, the subject, from which the action proceeds, is
expressed by a prefixed pronoun. A like twofold division of the tense-forma
occurs in the older branches of the Aric family, and as revived again in the Parsi
and Modern Persian. — See farther, in the Syntax, § 125, fl^.
§47. THE IMPERFECT AND 11^ INFLECTION. 89
and as in the Perfect also (§44, 1), and is here appropriated to
the masculine ;* "3 in nsbbpH is the sign of the plural /emwime
(in Chaldee )—), or borrowed from n|n ece.
In the 3d person ^'^'p'!, the "^ is less easily explained, there
being no clearly corresponding pronominal form in Hebrew. It
stands, perhaps, as a stronger consonant for 1 (from N'^H), pro-
perly biopn (comp. y^O"; for man § 69). The plur. (fully l^Vj]?^) is
formed by the plural ending "jl, shortened 1. The T\ in the femi-
nines ^bpn, n]b'i5pri, which are precisely the same as the second
person, may be connected with the feminine ending n_.
3. In the course of inflection the final vowel is dropped in
some forms, while in others it is retained. In this respect the
analogy of ^tDpi is followed by all the other forms which receive
no addition at the end, and that of ''btppri by the forms ^bljpl',
ibupri j analogous to nDbupri is nsbi:]? in the Imperative.
Rem. 1. The final 6 {Cholem) is only tone-long (§ 9, No. 10, 3), as in
the Injin. and Iinper. Hence, a) The examples in which it is written
fully are very rare, and are to be regarded as exceptions, b) Before
Maqqeph it becomes Qamets-chatupli ; e. g. d^"3nD^T and he wrote
there, Josli. viii. 32. c) It becomes vocal Sli^va before the afformatives
■'— 7 and 1. In the few instances in whicli it remains before such affor-
matives, the pointing becomes ^, because it stands close before the
pause, e. g. ^ais'iji yish-putu {they will judge), Ex. xviii. 26 ; Ruth ii. 8 ;
comp. Prov. xiv. 3.
N. B. 2. Tliis Cholerii is confined, ahiiost exclusively, to verbs mid-
dle A, like biii^. IntransUive verbs (middle E and O) take a {Pattach)
in the Imjierf! , as b'la to be great, Imp/. b'lS'^ ; 'bj? to be small. Imp/. IBp"; .
Sometimes botli forms exist together ; the Impf. with o is then transi-
tive, and that with a intransitive. E. g. "iJ£p'^ he will cut off, will reap ;
"^^P.l he will be cut off, i. e. will be short. So also ^libn , Inqyf. 0, to sub-
due ; Impf. a, to be subdued. Ex. xvii. 13 ; Job xiv. 10. More seldom,
both occur without any difference in signification ; e. g. T\^^, and T\^^, he
will bite. In the irregular verbs, the feeble e (T'sere) is also found in
the final syllable, as )'Fi'; for 'P?"!. These three forms of the Imperfect
are called Impf O, Impf. A, Impf E.
3. For the 3d plur.fem. rijls'bptn occurs in three instances (as if to
distinguish it from the 2d pers.), the Ibrm tijbiSp';!, as in Chaldee and
Arabic. E. g. •li'iJa?^ they will arise, Dan. viii. 22 ; comp. Gen. xxx. 38 ;
1 Sam. vi. 12. In several instances nsbSptn seems to have been used
improperly for the 3d pers. singidar, Ex. i. 10 ; Judg. v. 26 (and accord-
* This is also the proper geuder of the plural-syllable un, u. It is true that in
the Pcrf. the Hebrew employs it for both genders, but in the kindred tongues, it
stands eveu in the Perf. for the masculine alone ; as in Syriae, masc, qetalun, fern
qctaltn, so in Arabic, masc, qdtalu, fern, qatdlna.
?Q PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
ing to some Job xvii. 16 ; Is. xxviii. 3). (In the vulgar Arabic, necul^
properly we eat, is the common form for I eat ; and in the French patois,
favons for fai.) — In the Pentateuch ^"1 {na) occurs in place of n3 , espe-
cially after Vav consecutive (§ 49, 2) ; e. g. Ex. i. 18, 19, xv. 20, as in
Arabic, and in a still more abbreviated form in the Imp. (§ 46, Rem. 3).
— Once occurs (Ezek. xvi. 50) the anomalous form n3ifi3">Pi with '^—
inserted, after the manner of verbs 's'v and 51 (§ 67, 4, § 72, 5).
N. B. 4. The plural forms ending in >i appear also not unfrequently
with the fuller ending "Jl, most commonly with obvious sfrress on the
word at the end of a clause, where the vowel of the second syllable is
then retained, as '\^\^')1 they tremble, Ex. xv. 14, l^iS^UJn ye shall hear,
Deut. i. 17. But it is not confined to this position ; see e. g. Ps. xi. 2,
ncp "i^S'il':; corap. iv. 3, Gen. xviii. 28, 29. 30, 31, 32; Is. viii. 12;
1 Sam. ix. 13. But the preference for this form at the end of a clause
is clearly seen in Is. xxvi. 11, l^is'^'i Itn;] )^''1^'!. ^3 they see not; let
them see and be ashamed.* This original ending l^i is common in Ara-
maean and Arabic ; but in the vulgar Arabic it is shortened. Of the
Impf with X (the Arab, orthography, § 44, Rem. 4), XlbS';' Jer. x. 5 is
the only example.
5. In like manner "^^tipn has a longer form with final "i, namely
'pbtJpFi , which is also common in Aram, and Arabic. The )''— here is
scarcely original ; perhaps it arose from imitation of the plural ending 11 .
See examples in 1 Sam. i. 14 ; Ruth ii. 8, 21 ; iii. 4, 18.
6. In Pause, the vowel of the second syllable, if it had become Sh^va.
is restored and takes the tone, as "'^iapFi, ibbp'^. Comp. § 29, 4.
§48.
LENGTHEmNG AND SHORTENING OF THE IMPERFECT AND
IMPERATIVE.
{Jussive and Cohortative Forms.)
1. The want of definite forms for expressing the relative
tenses and the moods, in Hebrew and the kindred dialects, is
partially supplied by changes in the form of the Imperfect, to
which a certain signification is either exclusively or principally
appropriated.
2. Thus, the language distinguishes between the common
form of the Imperfect and two others, viz. a lengthened form
(with a cohortative force) and a shortened form (with a jussive
force). The lengthened Imperfect, however, occurs only in the
* It is worthy of remark, that the Chronicles often omit the Nun where it
stands in the books of Kings ; see 1 Kings viii. 38, 43 ; comp. 2 Chron. vi. 29, 38.
— 1 Kings xii. 24 ; 2 Kings xi. 5 ; comp. 2 Chron. xi. 4 ; xxiii. 4.
§48. JUSSIVE AND COHORTATTVE FORMS. 91
first person (with unimportant exceptions), while its shortened
form is confined to the second and third. In Hebrew, however,
the short-spoken Jussive is not always orthographically distin-
g-uished from the common form of the Imperfect.
In Arabic the distinction is always clear. Besides the common Indi-
cative Imperf. yaqiulii, it has, a) a Subjunctive, ydqtula; b) a Jussive.
yuqtul ; and c) a so-called Imperf. energic, yaqtulan, which is nearly
related to the Heb. Cohortative.
3. The characteristic of the Cohortative is a long a (H— .)
appended to the first person ; e. g. nbppx for ViipS. It is
found in all the conjugations and in all classes of regular and
irregular verbs (except in the Passives), and has the tone
wherever it is taken by the afformatives ^ and '^— , and hence it
affects the final vowel in precisely the same manner as these do.
E. g. in Kal, rr^•nm ; in Piel, HjJnDS Ps. ii. 3 ; but in Hiphil,
Very rarely, the duller sound i^—^ takes the place of ii— (§ 27, Rem.
4), e. g. 1 Sam. xxviii. 15 ; Ps. xx. 4. As rarely is it attached to the
third person (Is. v. 19 ; Ez. xxiii. 20 ; Ps. xx. 4). The second person,
however, receives it in the Imperative. See No. 5.
il— denotes, as accusative ending to a noun, motion or ten-
dency towards a place (§ 90, 2) ; and after the same analog}^, the
Cohortative with this ending expresses effort and the direction
of the unll to an action. Accordingly it is used especially to
express excitement of one^s self, determination, wish (as Opta-
tive), &c. (see § 128).
4. The Jussive occurs only in the second and third persons.
Its form is often orthographically the same as that of the Indica-
tive ; e. g. "513)5^ as Indie, he will kill, as Jussive let him kill.
It is sometimes, however, plainly distinguished by the orthogra-
phic shortening of the form, as will be shown in every instance
in the appropriate place. In the regular verb, it is externally
distinguished from the Indicative only in Hiphil ; Indie, ^''p)?!],
Jussive ^Up!'. It is found in Kal and Hiphil of verbs iy, as rib|^
and rra^ for ty^iy^ and iT''a^ ; and in all the conjugations of verbs
n5, where it consists in the removal [apocope) of the ending H— :
e, g. b^^ for Thy] . (The name Future apocopated, derived from
the mode of forming it in verbs fib, is applied generally to this
form of the Imperfect.) But in all cases the plural forms of the
Jussive coincide with the common, except that the ending )'^ is
92 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
excluded. So also the 2d sing, fern., as ^'?^l3jpn, ^ni^n, ^b^t^.
&c. ; and all forms, sing, and plur., with pronominal suffixes, as
'^Sri'^'Qri Indicative .Ter. xxxviii. 15, Jussive xli. 8.
In signification this form is similar to the other, with some
modification occasioned by diflference of person. In general it is
used where a command, loish, or condition is expressed.
5. The persons of the Imperative, as it is allied in form and
meaning to the Imperfect, are also lengthened (by n_) and
shortened, in a manner perfectly analogous. So also the Arabic
has an Imperativus energiciis. In most conjugations only one
of these forms is found, in others both are employed. The length-
ened Imp. occurs, e. g. in Kal of the regular verb, as "i^Tl?, fT^''?^,
SDttJ, riDDTlJ ; the shortened Imp. in verbs nb, as ba for n^5 ; both
together in Hiphil, as bupn and nb^'tapn for ^''lipn. The signifi'
cation of these forms is not always so strongly marked us in the
Imperfect. The longer form, however, is often emphatic, as D^p
.stand up^ iTTD^p up ! 'jri give, T\iT\ give up.
§49.
PERFECT A¥D IMPERFECT WITH 1 CONSECUTIVE.
1. The use of the two tenses, as will more clearly appear iu
the Syntax (§§ 126, 127), is by no means confined to the expres-
sion of the past and the future. One of the most striking pecu-
liarities in their use, and, indeed, in the Hebrew diction gene-
rally, is this : that in continued narrations of the past, only the
first verb stands in the Perfect, the narrative commencing with
the Perf. and proceeding with the Itnpf. ; and, on the contrary,
continuous description of the future is commenced with the Imq>f.
and proceeds with the Verf. Gen. i. 1 : In the beginning God
created (Perf.) the heavens and the earth. Ver. 3 : And God
said (Impf ), Let there he light, and there vms (Impf.) light.
Ver. 4 : And God saio (Lnpf ), &c. Just the reverse in Is. vii.
17 : Jehovah loill bring (Impf.) upon thee, and upon thy people,
and upon thy father'' s house, days, such as have not come since,
&c. Ver. 18 : And it will happen (Perf. n^ril) on that day ....
Ver. 19 : and they will come (Perf.). This progress of time, this
succession of thought, is usually indicated by the Vuv copula-
tive ; with a change, however, partly affecting the form of the
§49. PERFECT AND IMPERFECT. 93
Vav, and partly that of the Perfect and Imperfect to which it is
prefixed.*
2. The Vav consecutive of the Imjierfect is the most impor-
tant. This a) is regularly prefixed with Pattach and a Da-
ghesh forte in the next letter, as btipt^l and he killed, but to
the 1st pers. sing, with Qamets (according to §22, 1), as bljpj^lj;,
a?id I killed [see another exception with Daghesh forte omitted,
as ^'2lT}'\ and "^n^l , in § 20, 3, h\ ; h) it takes a shortened form of
the Imperfect, when that exists (comp. §48, 4), e. g. in Hiphii
^Pp!!] (§ 53, Rem. 4). and often at the same time draws the tone
back to the penultima, as fT^'X2!|', shortened ri^^, with Vav consecu-
tive t^12\^ [and he died), § 67, Rem. 2, 7 ; § 68, 1 ; § 69, Rem. 3 ;
§ 71 ; § 72, Rem. 4, 7 ; § 73, Rem. 2.t To the 1st pers. on the
contrary, especially in the sing., the ending ?1— is often append-
ed, but chiefly in the later books ; e. g. rru'l'DKI and I plucked
out, Ezra ix. 3. See more in § 129.
This 'I is a strengthened form of Vav copulative (comp. n^as. ri523.
HBb. where the prepositions 3, 3, b are strengthened in a similar way),
in the sense o? and then, and so.
The drawing back of the tone is found also in similar connections,
like <"il2^; and the shortening of the verb at the end (apocojae) is merely
an accidental coincidence with the form of the Jussive, though it seems
to have favored the increasing use of the Cohortative form in the first
person.!
3. As the opposite of the above, we have Vav consecutive of
the Perfect, by which it is joined to a preceding Imperfect. In
form it is the usual Vav copulative (1), e. g. •^^•7'] (after Impf.)
* Since it affects iu some measure the use of the tenses, it is called by gram-
marians Vav conversivc (i. e. converting the Impf. into the Per/., and the Per/.
into the Imp/.). Tlie name Vav consecutive is more appropriate, since it essentially
denotes sequence or progress.
\ Also the forms in "jil and 1^— :• occur very seldom after Vav cons., "I'lS"''^'?]
Judg. viii. 1 ; Ez. xliv. 8.
X The opinion of earlier grammarians, that ^iip'^5 is a contraction of bbp"" n^n
(which was explained, it happened that he hilled), is in every respect erroneous, and
is now antiquated. The ^^ is always an emphatic and ; and when it begins entire
divisions and books of the Old Testament, it indicates, that they were either origi-
nally connected with what goes before, or have been brought into connection with
it (e. g. Levit., Num., Josh., Jud., 1 and 2 Sam., Esth., Ruth) ; just as some other
books, for a like reason, begin ynih the simple copula 1 (Ex., 1 K., Ezra). — Equally
false is its derivation, according to some, from bbp^ ^"^f^? •
94 PART 11. PARTS OF SPEECH.
and it will be ; but it has generally the effect of shifting the tone
to the last syllable, in those verbal forms which would otherwise
have it on the penultima,* e. g. '^S^33n I iveiit, ''Ppbn'i (with pre-
ceding Impf.) and I will go, Judges i. 3 ; nb^'^D?! Perf, JlSi^li?!'!
and it shall divide, Ex. xxvi. 33. See more on the use of the
Perfect, in § 126.
This shifting forward of the tone does not always take place, and the
exceptions are sometimes strange. It is omitted, specially, a) in the
Istpers. pi. >i3a^;'] Gen. xxxir. 16 ; b) in verbs xb and rib ; e. g. ri'^'^SI
Ex. xxvi. 4; 6, 7, 10 ff. (on the contrary, ri^iarj^ the 9th and other verses).
§50.
OF THE PARTICIPLE.
1. Kal has two forms of the Participle, viz. an active, called
also Poel, and a passive or Pa-ul (b'iS'S).t
The latter is to be regarded, without doubt, as a remnant of a lost
passive form of h'0'\^. In the Aramaean the passives of Piel and Hiphil
are in like manner lost, except in the participles.
2. In intransitive verbs mid. E and mid. O, the active Parti-
ciple of Kal coincides in form with the Perf. 3d sing. ; as 1^^
sleejnng from 111?^, "iy^ fearing from "iy^. Comp. the formation
of the Participle in Niphal, § 51, 1. But in verbs 7nid. A, it has
the form btDp ; in which the d is a corruption of the original a
{qotel from qutel, § 9, 10, 2), and is immutable. (The form btlp
is in common use only as a verbal noun, §84, 1.) In Piel, Hi-
jthil, and Hithpael, the Participle is formed after a different
manner.
3. Participles form their feminine and plural like other nouns
(§§87,94).
Bern. 1. An unfrequent form is '^lain prehendens Ps. xvi. 5 (for
tj^in from Tl'?!^), comp. a'^sb 2 Kings viii. 21, and the prop. n. b'^a'ix
1 Chron. xxvii. 30. Many reckon here also vjOi^ Is. xxix. 14, xxxviii. 5 ;
but this is rather the 3(Z sing. impf. Hiphil of CiO" . Comp. a quite similar
construction Is. xxviii. 16. The Cholem in buip is unchangeable, though
* Whether the liastening of the toue forward expresses the reference to the
future, and, on the contrary, the shifting of it backward, a close connection 'with
■what '\& past, is left undecided.
f The Jewish grammarians call the participle also '^3i3''3 {middle word); yet
not in the sense of the Latin name, but as \ised for a present tense, and accord-
ingly holding the middle place between the Perfect and the Imperfect (§ 181, 2).
§51. NIPHAL. 95
it is generally written defectively. The form Qbl'n, Is. xli. 7, for fibl'n is
explained by § 29, 3, h.
2. Tlie participle in the passive form has not unfrequently an activt;
signification, especially when it belongs to an intransitive verb, which
cannot take a passive meaning. Compare in English risen, Jlown. Thus
tinx means holding (not held), Cant. iii. 8. H!i::3 conjisus for confidens,
Ps. cxii. 7. Comp. the deponent verbs in Laiin
B. DERIVED CONJUGATIONS
§51.
XIPHAL.
1. The full characteristic of this conjugation is the syllable
DH (in the corresponding seventh conjugation in Arabic Sijl) pre-
fixed to the ground-form. It appears only in the Inf. const?'.
btijjn, contracted from bpppn. With the Inf. are connected, in
form, the Imp. ^t2jjri and the Itnpf. ^PJ^o contracted from b'D'^'n\
In the Pe?f. the (less essential) He has been suffered to fall
away, and only Nun remains as the characteristic, hence ^t3j33.
This applies also to the Participle, which is distinguished from
the Perfect only by the long (J, as bupD,/ey;i. "^^'^p? or nbtJ^D.
The inflection of Niphal is perfectly analogous to that of Kal.
Niphal may be distinguished in the Perf and Part, by the Nun pre-
fixed ; in the Imp., Inf., and Impf by the Daghesh in the first stem-letter.
The same marks are found in the irregular verbs ; except that where
the first stem-letter is a guttural, Daghesh forte must be omitted (§ 63, 4).
In consequence of this omission, the preceding vowel is made long
(§ 22, 1).
2. In signification., it bears a resemblance to the Greek mid-
dle voice ; and hence a) It is primarily reflexive of Kal, e. g.
*TaTC3 to look to one's self, to beware, (fvXaOGtoO^at., "^F^P? to hide
one's self ; often of emotions which act upon the subject, e. g.
QH? to trouble one's self, to grieve, niS3 to bemoan one's self, to
betoail, comp. odvQtO&c/i, lamentari, contristari. b) Then it
fiequently expresses reciprocal action, as tJSIiJ!: to contend with
another at law ; f^r ^^ counsel, Niph. to considt together ;
comp. the middle and deponent verbs i^ovXbvtoOaL, f.iaxt6^((i
(DTib:), altercari, luctari, prosliari. c) It has also, like Hithpael
(§ 54, 3, c) and the Greek middle, the signification of the active
with the addition of self, for one's self, e. g. bSTCp to ask for
one's self {i Sam. xx. 6, 28), precisely like alroujuai OS rovio,
96 PART 11. PAETS OF SPEECH.
svbvOaa&ai XLTOJVCc lo irut on {one's self) a coal. Here,
instead of the accusative (se), the remote object (expressed by the
dative, slbi) lies in the idea of the conjugation, d) It is often
also passive of Kal, e. g. 'i^'^ to bear, Niph. to be born ; likewise
of Piel and Hiphil, when Kal is intransitive or not in use, e. g
(from ^151 to be in honor) Piel to honor ; ^tV2 in Piel to conceal,
Hiph. to make disappear, to destroy; Niph. passive of each:
and in this case its meaning may again coincide with Kal (nbn
Kal and Niph. to be sick) and even take an accusative (§ 138, 2,
Rem. 1).
Examples of denominatives are ; I3t3 to he horn a male, Ex. xxxiv.
19, from "i3t a male ; 33^3 cordatum fieri. Job xi. 12, from 33^ cor.
The older grammarians have represented Niphal as the proper
Passive o? Kvi\. This representation, however, is decidedly incorrect.
Niphal has not the characteristics of the other passives. There are
still found in Kal traces of another passive form (§50, 1) ; and the Arabic
has an independent conjugation, corresponding with Niphal (inqatala),
which has its own Passive ; nay, in Hebrew itself there is probably a
trace of the Passive of Niphal in the form hi<i.i , Is. lix. 3 ; Lam. iv. 14.
According to the usage of the language, the passive signification is cer-
tainly a very common one ; but it was first derived from the reflexive.
The )T} prefixed has the force of a reflexive pronoun, like infi in Hith-
pael.*
Hem, 1. The Iiif. absol. ^bps connects itself in form, with the Per-
fect, to which it bears the same relation as iiafs to ^Bjs . Examples of
this form, ^SiUJ? rogando 1 Sam. xx. 6, CjbDS desiderando Gen. xxxi. 30 ;
of the other, "jiiSii Jer. xxxii. 4 ; once t^thx e.xaudiendo Ez. xiv. 3. The
i in the final syllable (which is essentiallj' long), the Infinitive form has
also in Piel and Pual, and it resembles, in this respect, several Arabic
Infinitives, in which there is a corresponding d. Not untrequent is the
form bi^isn as Inf. absol. ; e. g. Num. xv. 31 ; Deut. iv. 26 ; IK. xx. 19.
2. In Pause, Pattach often takes the place of Tsere in the final syl-
lable, e. g. b^aa*"! and he was weaned, Gen. xxi. 8 ; as also in other cases
(see p. 65). In the second and third persons plural feminine, the form
with Pattach is more common than that given in the Paradigm, e. g.
npajPi they shall be remembered, Is. Ixv. 17 ; but these forms are unfre-
quent.
3. When the Impf , or the Inf, or the Imp. is immediately followed
* In other languages, also, may be observed the transition of the reflexive into
the passiye. So in Sanscrit and in Greek, it is still clear, how the formation of
the middle precedes that of the passive. The r, in the teriiiinatiou of the Latin
passive, is the reflexive pronoun se. In the old-Slavic and Bohemian, amat-se
stands for amatur ; in the Dacoromanic, io me laudu =1 am praised. See Pott's
Etymologische Forschungen, Th. 1, S. 133 fF. Th. 2. S. 92. Bopp's Vergleichende
Graramatik, S. 680 ff.
§ 52. PIEL AND PUAL. 97
by a word of one syllable, the tone is commonly drawn back upon the
penultima, and consequently the final syllable, losing the tone, takes
Seghol instead of Tsei^e. E. g. t^S birJl"^ he stumbled at it, Ez. xxxiii.
12 ; ii "ir^l?!! (ind he heard him, Gen. xxv. 21, comp. Q'^fibx iti^?!l and
God heard, 2 Sam. xxi. 14 ; xxiv. 25. In a few words, this form with
the retracted tone has become the usual one ; as "it:^"!l take heed, Ex.
xxiii. 21 ; Dtl^'^^ a7id he fought, Num. xxi. 1.
4. A frequent form of the 1st pers. is bri|3X, as liJ"!'nx I will be found,
Ez. xiv. 3, ?2^i< / swear. Gen. xxi. 24. Comp. § 69, Rem. 5.
§52.
PIEL AND PUAL.
1. The characteristic of this conjugation (Arab. Conj. II.
qattala, Aram, ^ta)?) is the doubling of the middle stem-letter.
In the active, the Impf. bC5J?i and the Part, ^nj^'a (whose prefor-
matives retain their original Sh'^va) are formed, according to the
general analogy, from the Inf. and Imp. b^p. The passive (Pual)
has a more obscure vowel, of the 3d class, under its first radical,
and a under the second. In other respects the active and passive
follow the same analogy. In the inflection of the Perfect of Piel,
Pattach takes the place of Tsere in the first and second persons
(bap, r^b^p, "^ribap), which, properly, have for their basis the
form bap. See Rem. 1.
The a which occurs also in the succeeding conjugations as the char-
acteristic of the Part, is related to "^a who 7 z= whoever, one who.
Piel and Pual are throughout distinguished by the Daghesh in the
middle stem-letter. It is omitted only in the following cases : a) Always
when this letter is a guttural (§ 64, 3). h) Sometimes, though rarely,
when this letter has Sh^va (§ 20, 3, 6); as Wnir:'^ Job xxxvii. 3. for
siiTiia-i he directs it; ^rpts for nn^TlJ Ez. xvii. 7; xxxi. 4; then also
the omission is at times indicated (§ 10, 2, Rem.) by a Chateph under
the littera dagessanda ; e. g. !^n|3^ for rtnjsb she is taken Gen. ii. 23 ;
comp. ix. 2 ; Judges xvi. 16. In the Impf. and Part, the Sh''\'a under
the preformatives may also serve as a mark of these conjugations.
2. Significations of Piel. a) It denotes intensity and repe-
tition (comp. the Nomina intensiva and iterativa, which are
also formed by doubling the middle stem-letter, § 84, 6-9) ;* e. g.
* Analogous examples, in -which the doubling of a letter has an intensive force,
are found in the German words reichen, recken ; streichen {stringo, Anglo-Saxon
ttrecan), strecken ; comp. Strich, Strecke ; Wacker, from tcachen : others in which
it has the causative signification, are stechen, stecken ; wachcn, wecken ; in Greek,
7
98 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECIL
pns to laugh, Piel to sporty to jest (to laugh repeatedly) ; bi$© to
ask, Piel to beg ; hence it denotes that the action is performed
upon many, as "IDJP to hiiry {one), Gen. xxiii. 4, Piel to bury
{many), 1 K. xi. 15. (So in Syiiac frequently.) This significa-
tion of Piel is found with various shades of difference, as nriB to
ojjen, Piel to loose ; "ISO to count, Piel to recount. With the
eager pursuit of an object is connected the influence which the
subject of it exerts upon others. Hence, b) It has a causative
signification (like Hipliil), e. g. Tab to learn, Piel to teach. It
often takes the modifications expressed by to permit, to declare
or to regard, to help, as H^H to let live ; p'|T2 to declare inno-
cent ■ '1^1' to assist in child-bearing, c) Denominatives are fre-
quently found in this conjugation, which in general mean to
7nake a thing (sc. that which the noun expresses), or to be in
any way occupied ivith it ; as from Ij? nest, |2p to make a nest ;
from IS!? dust, ISi? to throw dust, to dust. It also expresses the
taking away or injuring the thing or part of which the noun is
the name (as to head, old Engl, for behead, to skin), e. g. "SiySO
(from ©"itJ a root) to root out, extirpate ; 33T (from Sit fail) pro-
perly to injure the tail, hence to rout the rear-guard of an army ;
'J'ffi'l to remove the ashes. So also in verbs whose origin cannot
be traced to a noun, e. g. b^p to stone, and also to remove the
stones, sc. from a field.*
The significations of the passive will present themselves spon-
taneously, e. g. 2^ to steal, Piel to steal, Pual to be stolen.
In Piel the proper and literal signification of a word is often retained
when Kal has adopted a figurative one, the former being the stronger
and more prominent idea. E. g. NS"! in Piel to sew up, in Kal to heal;
Sfia Piel to cut, to hew out, Kal to form, to make ; nba Piel to uncover,
Kal to reveal.
In an intransitive sense, Piel occurs as an intensive form, but only in
poetry, as r^'nn frangi Jer. li. 56 ; nns to be open Is. xlviii. 8 ; Ix. 11 ;
W"i to be drunken, Is. xxxiv. 5, 7.
lillbj to bring to an end, from the stem teAco to end, yswao) to beget, and to bear,
from yivct) to come into being. The above examples from the German show also
that ch when doubled takes tlie form of kk, ck, in accordance with the laws relat-
ing to the Daghcsh in Hebrew (§ 13, 3).
* In Arabic, Denominatives of Conj. 11. often express injury done to a member,
the removal of vermin or of any injiirious thing. This force is not wholly wanting,
ali?o, in the simplest Conj. I. Comp. Hebrew Kal "13^ (from "ia\B) 'n buy and
sell grain ; Lat. causari, pradari, <fec.
§ 53. HIPHIL AND HOPHAL. 99
N. B. Rem. 1. The Perf. Piel has frequently ( - ) in the final syllable
instead of (••), e. g. lax to destroy, "lanJ to break in pieces. This occurs
especially before Maqqeph (Eccles. ix. 15; xii. 9) and in the middle of a
period, when other words immediately follow; but at the end of a period,
Tsere is the more common vowel. Compare h"^^ Is. xlix. 21 with b'ns
Josh. iv. 14; Esth. iii. 1. Some verbs have iSeghol, viz. "i3'n to speak.
"iS3 to atone, 033 to wash clothes,
A single instance of(_) in the^rs^ syllable (after the manner of the
Chaldee) is found in Gen. xli. 51, iii^2 to cause to forget, occasioned by
the play upon the name n^iJDX:. Compare the quadriliteral Tl2J"iQ, which
is analogous, in form, with Piel (§ 56).
2. The Impf, Inf , and Imp. when followed by Maqqeph, generally
take Seghol in the final syllable, e. g. ib"©j33';i he seeks for himself Is. xl.
20 ; '^V^'!!r? sanctify to me Ex. xiii. 2. So in Hithpael. In the 1st pers.
eing. Impf besides b^J^x there occurs also (very seldom) the form ri"!tN
Lev. xxvi. 33, and ISDN Zech. vii. 14 (according to § 23, 3, Rem. 2).
With Vav cons, we have also ^^|5^{5 for ^^i5i>^3 Judges vi. 9. Instead
of nsb^iisri are found such forms as njb^fJpi, e. g. Is. iii. 16; xiii. IS.
3. The Inf. abs. Pual has sometimes the separate form given in the
paradigm, as "ib^ castigando, Ps. cxviii. 18 ; but far more frequently,
that of the Inf constr. ''^'^P,.
4. In Pual, instead of Qibbuts is found less frequently Q,amets-cha-
tuph, e. g. t.'^^'q dyed red Nah. ii. 4; comp. iii. 7; Ps. xciv. 20. It is
merely an orthographic variation, when Shureq takes the place of Q,ib-
buts, as l^l'^ Judges xviii. 29.
5. As Inf. abs. Pual we find 335, Gen. xl. 15. An Inf constr. Pual
does not occur in the regular verb.
6. The Part. Pual sometimes occurs without the prefix ^ ; it is then
distinguished, like the Part. Niph., only by the Qamets in the final syl-
lable, e. g. n^sb taken 2 Kings ii. 10 ; comp. l|<l'i for ll^l'^o Judg. xiii. S.
also Eccles. ix. 12 ; Hos. i. 6, 8 ; Prov. xxv. 9.
§53.
HIPHIL AND HOPHAL.
1. The characteristic of the active is fl, in the Perf. n, mak-
ing a closed syllable with the first radical, and i {''—) inserted
after the second. From the Inf. b''t3pn are formed the Impf. and
the Part. b^Pf?^, ^^'^^"Q, for b'^Upn;',' b'^ppn^ (§23, 4). In the
passive, H is uttered with an obscure vowel, and the second syl-
lable takes a in place of i ; btJpn or bupH, Impf. bt2p^ or bwp"'.
Inf. absol. bt2pn ; in other respects the formation is analogous.
Of the inflection it is only to be noted, that in the 1st and 2(1
pers. Perf the i— falls away and Pattach takes its place, as
b'^Ppn, nb'bjpn ; which is explained by the analogy of the Ara-
100 PAET n. PARTS OF SPEECH.
msean (^tDjpi*), and of the Arabic (^t:pS), wheie the ''— is not
found. It is not an essential characteristic of the form, and
undoubtedly arose from an originally shorter vowel.
The marks of this conjugation are, therefore, in the Perf., Imp., and
Infl , the prefix rt ; in the Impf. and Part., the vowel under the prefor-
matives, which in Hiphil is Patlach, in Hophal Qibbuts or Qameis-
chatuph.
2. Significations of Hijihil. It is properly causative of Kal,
and in this sense is more frequently employed than Piel (§ 52,
2, 6), e. g. S2;|i to go forth, Hiph. to bring out of, to lead forth ;
tj"!]? to be holy, Hiph. to sanctify. When Kal is transitive, Hiph.
takes two accusatives (§ 139, 1). Frequently Piel and Hiphil
are both in use in the same signification, as 'llifi to perish, Piel
and Hiph. to destroy ; but generally only one of them is found,
or they have some difference of signification, as in "5| to be
heavy, Piel to honor, Hiph. to make heavy. Intransitive verbs
merely become transitive, e. g. ni3p to bow (intrans.), Hiph. to
bow (trans.).
The causative and transitive signification of Hiphil is employed, in
accordance with a mode of conception familiar to the Hebrew, for the
expression of ideas, which take in other languages an intransitive form.
Especially was any change in one's habit of body conceived (and often
rightly) by the Hebrew as the result of personal agency, and was repre-
sented, in the mode of expression, as produced by the individual himself;*
e. g. yiyiO Hiph. to become fat (properly to produce fat) ; p]ri and yait
Hiph. to become strong- (properly to develop strength) ; Vm^ Hiph. to
become feeble. After the same analogy iiU», Hiph. to become rich (pro-
perly to make, to acquire, riches) ; and particularly, words which express
the taking of a new color, as D'^'7?<n to become red, T^aVrt to become white,
&c. Moreover, what is merely state or condition becomes, in the Hebrew
mode of conception, an act ; e. g. ^'^'in-^ not to be silent, but properly
to keep silence {silentium facer e, Plin.); ?'^^'^^ quietem agere,^'y<'^, to
prolong (one's stay), to tarry. In such cases there is often an ellipsis, as
a''Bin to deal xcell, n'^Hian to do wickedly, properly to make good, or bad
(sc. 13'^'?, l"'2'n'n , which are also often expressed).
These remarks apply also to Denominatives, i. e. the verb often
expresses the idea of producing or putting forth that of which the ori-
ginal noun is the name ; e. g. d'^nian to put forth roots, T^'^RH to put forth
* The verb riiUS to make, is employed in the expression of the same ideas,
e. g. to make fat {fatness), for, to produce fat upon his body. Job xv. 21 ; to mak*.
fruits, to make branches, for, to produce, to put forth, Hos. viii. 7 ; Job xiv. 9.
Compare in Latin corpus facere, Justin. 11, 8 ; robur facere, Hirtius, Bell. Afr. 86 ;
soholem, divitias, facere, Plin., and in Italian /ar corpo, far forze, far frutto.
§ 53. HIPHIL AND HOPHAL. 101
horns. It also expresses the active use of a member, as "pfSrt to listen
(properly to make ears); T^lJJbn to chatte?', to slander (after the same
analogy, properly to make tongue, to use the tongue freely) .
3. The signification of Hophal, as of Niphal, may sometimes
coincide with that of Kal, e. g. bb^ potuit, Impf. Hoph. pote?is
fiet, i. e. j)oterit.
Rem. 1. Only the Perfect of Hiphil retains always the "i— 7 of the final
syllable (in 3d pers. sing, and plur.); the Imp. and Impf often take —
instead of it, in the 2d and 3cZ m. sing, (in Chaldee the usual form),
although usage generally makes a distinction between forms with i and e.
Tsere is in this case only tone-long, and hence in the lengthening of the
forms it becomes vocal Sh^va, and with gutturals it is changed into
Pnttach. The Jiif. abs. has a firmer and longer e. More particularly:
2. The Lifin. absol. has generally Tsere, with and without Yodhj
as llJ-ipn Judg. xvii. 3 ; lasn Ex. viii. 11 ; T^OilJn Amos ix. 8. Strictly
Chaldee, with X instead of the n, is D'^SllJx rnane surgendo Jer. xxv. 3.
Unfrequent exceptions, in which the form with Tsere stands for the Inf
constr., are found in Deut. xxvi. 12 ; xxxii. 8.
3. The Imp. but seldom takes the form ^'^Mpri (Ps. xciv. 1 in pause,
perhaps also Is. xliii. 8); instead of it, the shortened and the lengthened
forms biiprt (— tone-long) and nbiDpn, as l^a^n, make fat, n^i^ptt
attend ! The first takes Seghol before Maqqeph, as NJ-j3Gn Job xxii.
21. "^biapn and ib'^apln are never shortened,
N. B. 4. In the Impf. 2d and 3d m. sing, the form with — is the usual
one for the Jussive, as b-isn-bs make not great Obad. 12, nns;; let him. cut
off Ps. xii. 4, and also with 1 consec, as ^"[12^1 and he divided Gen. i. 4.
Before Maqqeph this Tsere becomes Seghol, as ia'ptn^l and he held
him Judg. xix. 4. In the plural, the full forms are used for the jussive
also, and with 1 consec. ; as >ip'^2'7l;l and they pursued Judg. xviii. 22.
The single exceptions, where i (as in Aramsean) is shortened to vocal
Sh^va, are I2'n"i?l Jer. ix. 2, 'ipa'iLl 1 Sam. xiv. 22 ; xxxi. 2. The defec-
tive mode of writing Chireq, e. g. D^'U?, is not an essential variation.
5. The form of the Part, with (..) in the sing, is doubtful (Is. liii. 3) ;
but perhaps the plurals D^aVn?? dreamers Jer. xxix. 8, Bi"iT2.'53 helpers
2 Chroii. xxviii. 23, are derived from this form. The /ej?J. is nbopa.
e. g. Tt"^;q Lev. xiv. 21. Comp. Gen. xxxv. 8.
6. In the Perf are sometimes found the forms ^isab'sn we have re-
proached 1 Sam. xxv. 7, and "^nbxJiX I have stained (with K as in Aram.)
Is. Ixiii. 3, comp. Job xvi. 7.
7. In the Impf and Part, the characteristic n regularly gives place
to the preformatives, as b'''Jp'^ , ^'•■qp^ , but not to prepositions in the
Inf, ^''Dprib, because their connection with the ground-form is less
intimate than that of the preformatives. To both rules there are some
few exceptions, as 3''llJin'i he will save Ps. cxvi. 6, for Itf'^di"' , iTiin^ he
will praise for tTii^ (in verbs IS only) ; on the contrary S'^^Uib for J2'^52iijnb
to sing Ps. xxvi. 7, n-i-iitb for a-^lNnb to cause to faint, 1 Sam. ii. 33 '
comp. Is. xxiii. II ; Ps. Ixxviii. 17.
1 02 PART n. PARTS OF SPEECH.
N. B. 8. The tone, in Hiphil, does not fall on the afformatives 1, n—
and ''—7. They take it, however, in the Perf. when Vav consecutive is
prefixed, as Hib^'nat-i'i Ex. xxvi. 33.
9. In the Passive (Hophal) Perf., Impf., and Part, u ('-.) is found in
the first syllable as well as 6 (t), bwpn, but not so often in the regular
verb, e. g. nscn Ez. xxxii. 32, and na'siun xxxii. 19 ; r\\^.^, Part. Ti^iua
2 Sam. XX. 21, and RS^^an Is. xiv. 19; but verbs fs have ft constantly,
as iSrt (according to § 9, 9, 2).
10. The Inf abs. Hophal (as in Hiphil) has (••) in the final syllable ;
©• S- ^'!^^r} fasciando Ez. xvi. 4; isn nuntiando Jos. ix. 24. Of the
Infinitive construct there occurs no example in the regular verb.
11. On the Imp. Hophal, see § 46, 1, note (*).
§54.
HITHPAEL.
1. This conjugation connects itself with Piel, inasn.uch as it
prefixes to the form bSJp the syllable nn (Chald. inx, Syr. ^2$*),
which, like 3n in Niphal, has undoubtedly the force of a reflexive
pronoun (§ 51, 2, Rem.).
2. The n of the syllable inn suffers the following changes, as
also in Hithpoel and Hithpalel (§ 55) :
a) when the first radical of the verb is a sibilant (D, f , IB), it
changes places with t\ (§ 19, 5), as iTarnBH to take heed, for
nriTiJnn, banpn to he hurdeiied, for baonn. With 1, more-
over, the transposed T\ is changed into the more nearly related
t:, as P'nt32tn to justify one's self for p'nn^n. (Single excep-
tion in Jer. xlix. 3.)
6) before ^, U, and ri, it is assimilated (§19, 2), e. g. IS^in to
converse, IHi^n to clea7ise one^s self, Q^rir^ io conduct one's
self uprightly ; sometimes also before 2 and D, as X2l2n to
prophesy, elsewhere iiSSrT' ; IP'^^n foi" IP'isrin to make one's
self ready. Once before T, Is. i. 16 ; before TS, Eccl. vii. 16 ;
before 1, Is. xxxiii. 10.
3. The significations of Hithpael. a) Most frequently it is
reflexive, primarily of Piel, as tC'lprin to sanctify one's self,
Dpinn to avenge one's self, 'y^^'^T\T\ to gird one's self Then
farther it means : to make one's self that which is expressed by
the first conjugation : hence, to conduct one's self as such, to
* See also, in Hebrew, "lantlX 2 Chron. xx. 35.
' « V
§ 55. UNUSUAL CONJUGATIONS. 103
show one's self, to imagine one's self, to affect, to be such ; pro-
perly to make one's self so and so, to act so and so. E. g. ^'IJSfiri
to make one's self great, to act liroudly, DSnrifl to show one's
self cunning, crafty, also, Eccles. vii. 16, to think one's self
wise ; ^WT\T\ to make, i. e. to feign one's self rich. Its siguifi-
cation sometimes coincides with that of Kal, and both forms are
in use with the same meaning, e. g. bsii Kal to mourn, is found
only in poetry ; Hithp. in the same sense, is more common in
prose, and even takes an accusative (§ 138, 2, Rem. 1). h) It
expresses reciprocal action (like Niph. § 50, 2, h), as nx'irin to
look upon one another Gen. xlii. 1. More frequently c) It
expresses what one does indirectly to ox for himself {comp. Niph.
§50, 2, c). It has then an active signification, and governs an
accusative, e. g. TJiBStin exnit sihi {vestem), TlPSTiT} solvit sibi
{vincula). So without the accusative, '^^nriH to walk about by
one's self {ambulare). Only seldom d) It is passive, e. g.
^I^Stin to be numbered, mustered, Judges xx. 15, 17, xxi. 9.
Comp. Niphal, § 50, 2, d.
The passive Hothpaal is found only in the few following examples :
silpsnri (so always for 'pBnrt) ihey were viustered. Num. i. 47 ; ii. 33 ;
i!<53L:ri to be rendered icnclean Deut. xxiv. 4 ; 033fi to be washed Lev.
xiii. 55. 56 ; n3T^'iif7 it is smeared with fat Is. xxxiv. 6.
Denominatives with the reflexive signification are: ■^■^^^l!^ to embrace
Judaism (make one^s self a Jew), from l^iT^, rriiilT^ Jews; "i^^sn to pro-
vide one's self with food for a journey, from 'T^'^^.
N. B. Rem. The Perfect, as in Piel, has frequently Paitach in the
final syllable, as pinHli to be strengthened, 2 Chr. xiii. 7 ; xxi. 4. Final
Pattach occurs also in the Imperf and Imper., as QSHn"^ he deems him-
self vrise, Eccles. vii. 16 ; ■>iJ'!)r3n!7 sanctify thyself Jos. iii. 5. In Pause
these forms take Q,amets. and are the usual ones, as baxn"^ Ez. vii. 27,
iiTsbn-^ Job xxxviii. 30. With the form in Piel nibbi^F? (§ 52, Rem. 2)
comp. Hithp. nwfnnpi Zech. vi. 7.
§55.
UNUSUAL COl^JUGATIOFS.
Of the unusual conjugations (§ 40, 2), some are connected, in
form, with Piel, and are made by the doubling or the repetition
of one or more stem-letters, or by the lengthening of a vowel,
i. e. by changes ruithiji the stem itself ; others are analogous to
Hiphil, and are formed by the addition of prefix letters or sylla-
bles. To the former class, besides a passive distniguished by
104 PAliT II. PAETS OF SPEECH.
the vowel in the final syllable, belongs also a reflexive form with
the prefix fin, after the analogy of Hithpael.
Those which are analogous to Piel, and which follow it in
their inflection, are :
1. PoH; as h'^^'^p , pass. i>i:i'p, reflex. ?3i:ipri!i (corresponding to Conj.
III. and VI. in the Arabic, qdtala, qidila, taqiUala), Impf. i'Mip'^, Part.
btsipa , Impf. pass. ^l?lp'^ , &c. In the regular verb it but seldom occurs.
E. g. Part. ■'L2SUJa my opposer, he who pleads with me, Job ix. 15 ; "^Pii^nii
I have appointed 1 Sam. xxi. 3 (unless we should read ■^Pi^'i'in) ; ;ij'ni\2j
to take root, Den'om. from ltJ"itl3 root. In verbs 52) (§ 67) it is far more
frequent; e.g. bbin, anio, J3in.
Its signification, like that of Piel, is often causative of Kal. Some-
times both are in use in the same signification, as ysil and f'St'n to
oppress ; sometimes each has its peculiar modification of meaning, as
33p to turn about, to change, aaio to go about, to surround ; b^rt to exidt,
bbin to make foolish (from bbn to be brilliant, but also to be vain-glorious,
foolish); 12n to make pleasant, "jiin to commiserate; UJ'nia to root out,
ttSnid to lake root.
With baip is connected the formation of quadriliterals by the inser-
tion of a consonant at the end of the first syllable, as biJTp (§ 30, 3).
2. Pilel, Pidal, Hithpalel ; as bb:2p and bbap, pass. bbi:p, reflex.
bbapnn, like the Arab. Conj. IX. iqtalla, and XI. iqldlla, used especially
of permanent states or conditions, e. g. of colors, as 13N^ to be at rest,
1??1 fo be green, Pass. bb^X to be withered ; of these verbs there is no
example in Kal. It is more frequent in verbs ^^S , where it takes the
place of Piel and Hithpael (§ 72, 7).
3. Pealal ; as babijp, with repetition of the last two stem-letters,
used especially of slight motions repeated in quick succession ; e. g.
"ininp to go about with quick motion, hence (of the heart) to palpitate,
Ps. xxxviii. 11, I'rom "inp to go about ; Pass. "i^")?aH to ferment with vio-
lence, to make a rumbling sound, Lam. i. 20. Nouns of this form are
diminulives (§ 84, 23). Nearly related to this is,
4. Pilpel, formed from verbs S3 and ISJ by doubling both of the essen-
tial stem-letters; as npap from 2p=33p; bsbs from bs (biD). This
also is used of motion rapidly repeated, which all languages are prone*
to express by repetition of the same sound, as ClSBS to chirp, bstbs to
tinkle, I5na to gurgle, 51SSS to flutter {^vom ?|!is> tojiy).
With Hiphil are connected :
* Compare tinnio, flntinnus, and in German Tick-tack, Wirrwarr, Klingklang
[our ding doJigJ. Tlie repetition of the same letter iu verbs SS produces also the
same eflfect; as in ppb to lick, pp'n to beat, !r)Sl3 to trip along. Other languages
express the same thiug by diminutive forms ; comp. in Lat. the termination -illo,
as in cantillo, in Germ, -eln, em, in jlimmern, trillern, trbpfeln. Hence we may
explain the relation, mentioned under No. 3, between these forms and the dimi-
nutives.
§§56, 51. REGULAR VERB WITH PR0n6mIN"AL SUFFIXES. 105
5. Tipliel ; as iiuSpri , with t\ prefixed, as i>5"iPi to teach one to walk,
to lead (dcnoni. from b3"i afoot) ; tTiriF] , Impf. iTinn'^ to emulate Jer. xii.
5 ; xxii. 15 (from !Tnn to be ardent, eager). The Aramaean has a similar
form na'^Fi to interpret.
6. Shaphel; as ^Bpia, frequent in Syriac, as a«^^l2j to Jlame, from
2inb . In Heb. it is found only in the noun nsnbTlJ Jlame, § 84. No. 35.
Forms of which single examples occur : — 7. ts^tJp, pass. '^\^p ; as
DQOn^a scaled off, having the form of scales, Ex. xvi. 14, from vjor;, Cli^H
to peel, to scale. — 8. bj5D|:5, as 'q'^l'il a violent rai7i, from Cj'nt. — 9. b::;5na
(frequent in the Rabbinic), a form compounded of Niphal and Hithpael,
found in the examples ^"i&li? for 1i&;iri3 they siffer themselves to be warned,
Ez. xxiii. 48, 1Q33 for "isanj to be expiated, Deut. xxi. 8.
Worthy of note is also, — 10. the form "iSian to sound^ the tnimpet,
commonly derived from the stem "i^tl . But it is probably a denom. from
irnaiiiri a trumpet, an onomatopoetic form like the old Latin taratantara,
from the sound of the trumpet. Ennius apud Servium ad ^n. 9, 503.
§56.
QUADEILITEKALS.
Of the formation of quadiiliterals we have already spoken
(§30, 3). The few verbs of this kind (of nouns there are more)
are formed after the analogy of Piel, once after Hiphil. The
following are all the examples that occur :
Pret. filJ'nS he spread out, Job xxvi. 9 (with Pattach in the first syl-
lable, as in Chaldee). hnpf ns^onDi he will devour it, Ps. Ixxx. 14.
Pass. ^Sii'n to become green again, Job xxxiii. 25. Part, ^a'la^ 1 Chr.
XV. 27. After Hiphil b-ix^ain contracted b-'X^qii to turn to the left
(denominative from ^X^iU), Gen. xiii. 9 and other places.
a REGULAR VERB WITH PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES.*
§57.
The accusative of the personal pronoun after a verb active
may be expressed 1) by a distinct word, MX (the sign of the
accusative) with the suffix (§ 101), as irik b'^jp [he has killed
him) ; or 2) by a mere suffix, as ''inb'Djp or ib'jp [he has killed
* We treat this subject in connection with the regular verb, in order to show
here the general analogy. As to the irregular verbs, the shortening of their forms
before the suffixes will be noticed under each class.
106
PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
him). The second method is the usual one, and of this only we
now treat.*
Two things are to be considered here, viz. 1) the form o/
the suffix itself (treated in § 58) ; 2) the changes in the verbal
stem to which it is attached (§§ 59-61).
§58.
THE SUFFIX TO THE VERB.
1. The suffixes appended to the verb express the accusative
of the personal pronowi. They are the following .
Plural.
/Singular.
1 comm. "'p ; "^S^ ; ''3-1
r m. ^, ^— (fkha), in
2-1 pause ^—
me.
m. T\, 1] ^ni-, (n),
thee.
him.
her.
1 comm. ^3 ; ^D-1
us.
you.
in. DD, DD_
''m. DHjtD; D— (con-
tr. fr. Dn_), D^ ;
D— (contr. from
3-{ , DH— ), Dtt-^; poet. )-them.
iia, 1^4 j i^4
2. That these suffixes are shortened forms of the perso7ial
pronoim, is for the most part clear of itself, and only a few of
them require any explanation.
In the suffix of the second person {"^^ DD, p) the basis appears
to be a lost form of the pronoun nriX with DJ instead of T\ (nSpN,
nSS ; D3X), which was employed here in order to distinguish the
suffixes from the affiDrmatives of the Perfect (§ 44, 1).
* On the cases where the former must be employed see § 121, 4.
■f drt occurs very seldom as verbal suffix (Deut. xxxii. 26), )'n not at all. But
they are given in the list as being ground-forms, which frequently occur with
nouns and prepositions.
^ Traces of this lost form appear still in the afformatives of the ^Ethiopic Per-
fect, as qatalka (thou hast killed), and also in the Samaritan (see Gescnii Anecdota
Orientalia, I. 43). Comp. what was said in § 44, 1, on "^riblip. — The sounds t and
1e are not unfrequently interchanged.
§ 58. THE SUmX OF THE VERB. 107
In the 3d pers. 'masc, from ^n_, by dropping the feeble h
there arose a-ii, and thence 6 (§23, 4), usually written i, much
more seldom ri. In the /em. the suffixes from i^Tl ought, accord-
ing to analogy, to sound H, ITI— ., ri— . ; but izistead of n_. we have,
for the sake of euphony, simply fl— where the n is regularly a
consonant, and therefore marked with Mappiq. Once (Ez. xli.
15) i^n stands for H, as in Chaldee and Arabic,
3. The variety in the forms of the suffixes was occasioned
chiefly by the regard had to the form and tense of the verb which
received them. Thus three forms of almost every suffix may be
distinguished :
a) one beginning with the consonant itself, as ''5, l!l, ID, dH, D,
(fcc. This is appended to verbal forms which end with a
vowel, as ^3^5i:]5, iniribpp ;
h) a second and a third with the so-called union-vowels* C'?-^,
''S-l.), for the verbal forms which end with a consonant (with
one exception, § 59, Rem. 3) : with the union-vowel a for the
forms of the Perfect, as "^p^tpp, ^55t2p, DbtJp ; with the union-
vowel e (rarely a) for the forms of the Imperfect and the Im-
perative, as ^nBpp';', D^P)?- To the Perfect belongs also i,
from 'in.l. With 7^, DD, ^D the uniting sound is only a half-
vowel {vocal SJfva)^ as ^— , 03—, p— , e. g. ^^t3jp {(fta-Vkha) ;
or when the final consonant of the verb is a guttural, ?j— ,
e. g. 'nri^^- In Pause this Sh®va becomes a Seghol with the
tone, '^-^.
Rem. 1. As rare forms may be mentioned ; Sing. 2d pers. masc. ns
1 Kings xviii. 44, in pause t]— Is. Iv. 5, and 03^: Pro v. ii. 11; fern. "^D,
"^3-^ Ps. cxxxvii. 6, and in the later Psalms frequently, (t^-^, contrary
to the rule, appended to the Perf. in Judges iv. 20.) — In the 3d pers.
masc. ri Ex. xxxii. 25 ; Num. xxiii. 8 : fern. Ti— without Mappiq Num.
XV. 28; Jer. xliv. 19. — The forms ip, I'iS^, 153-^ are strictly poetic
(except Ex. xxiii. 31) ; instead of iJ3 we find la once in Ex. xv. 5. On
the origin of these forms see § 32, Rem. 7.
2. By comparing these suffixes of the verb with the suffixes of the
noun (§ 91) we observe : a) There is here a greater variety of forms
than there (because the forms and relations of the verb are themselves
more various) ; b) the verbal suffix, where it differs from that of the
* We retain the common name union-vowel, although it rests on a rather super-
ficial view and is somewhat vague. These union-sounds seem rather to be rem-
nants of old verbal-endings, like the i in ^iniribap , Comp. e. g. the Hebr. form
q'tal-ani with the Arab, qatala-ni ; and on the contrary, Hebr. q'talat-ni, Arab.
qatalatni.
t08 PART II. PART« OF SPEECH.
noun, is longer, as ^3, '^3— , ^^— (me) ; '^— ; (my). The reason is, tha
the object of the verb is less closely connected with it, than the posses-
sive pronoun is with the noun ; on which account also the former may
even be expressed by a separate word (§ 117, 2).
4. The suffix gains still more strength, when instead of the
union-vowel there is inserted a union-syllable 5_, D— (common-
ly called Nun epenthetic, but better Nun demonstrative), which,
however, occurs only in the Imperfect and in Pause, e. g. '^n55"in'|'
he loill bless him (Ps. Ixxii, 15), iDp^2D'|i he loill honor me (Ps. 1.
23). This Nun is, however, for the most part incorporated with
the suffixes, and hence we have a new series of forms, namely,
Istpers. ^3^, ^3r^, for ^:}—, ''ii— ;
2d jjers. 5^, once 'JfSl-; (Jer. xxii. 24) ;
3^ pers. 'isl- for ^n2_, also 12 (Num. xxiii. 13) ; fe?n. <1|^,
for n5_ ; ' ' '
1st pers. plur. 13^ for 125_.
In the other persons this Nun does not occur.
Bevi. The forms with Niin written out are rare, merely poetic (Jer.
v. 22), and do not occur at all in 3d fern. sing, and 1st plur. The con-
tracted forms (with the Nun assimilated) are pretty frequent, especially
in pause.
This Nun is in its nature demonstrative, and belongs to the appended
accusative of the personal pronoun, to which it serves to direct atten-
tion, as the object of the verb. In Chaldee, besides the Nun, there is
also inserted a consonant Yodh ; in Samaritan a 3 is appended also to
the Perfect, and in similar cases a n inserted.
§59.
THE PERFECT WITH PRONOMmAL SUFFIXES.
1. The endings {afformafives) of the Perfect have in part a
somewhat different form, when connected with the suffixes.
Namely :
a) in the 3d sing, f em. the original feminine ending ri— , n_.,
for ri— ;
h) the 2d sing. masc. besides ri has also T\, to which the union-
vowel is attached ; but the only clear instance of it is with
* Here also, the short « probably belongs to the verbal form ; see § 58, 3, b;
uote (*).
§ 59. PERFECT WITH PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 109
c) the 2d sing. fern, has ^Pt, likewise an older form for H (comp.
in«, inb-J^ § 32, Rem. 4 ; §44, Rem. 4). This form is to be
distinguished from the 1st pers. sing, only by the connection ;
d) the 2d plur. masc. has 11^ for DPI, which is explained by the
Arabic antum, qataltum^ Chald. "jWi?, l^nV^J? for QriS, Dri'stip
(§ 32, Rem. 5). Of the/em. ']ri'?Up with suffixes no example
occurs, but it probably took the same form as the masculine.
We exhibit, first, the forms of the Perfect in Hiphil as they
appear in connection with the suffixes, because there is here no
change in the stem itself, except in reference to the tone (see
No. 2).
Sing.
Pmr.
3d m. b^tpjpn
3d c. ^b^tppn
3d f. nb^Ippn
2d m. S?'5t:ipn,
ribispn
2c? m. ^r\bt3jpn
2d f. "^nbDpn,
r^^Ppr^
1st c. ^nVjpn
1st c. ^sVjpn
The learner should first exercise himself in connecting the suffixes
with the forms of Hiphil, and then with those of the Per/. Kal (in
No. 2).
2. The tone inclines towards the appended suffix, so that it
seldom remains on the stem itself. This occasions certain
changes of vowels, particularly in the Perfect of Kal, in conse-
quence of which it takes the following forms :
Sing. Plur.
3d in. btpp (bi:p, Rem. 1) 3d c. ^bt3p
3d f. nbip
2d m. Pibt:p (nbt:p, Rem. 4) 2dm. inbtDp
2df. ^nbt2p (nyjp,Rem. 4)
l"*^ c. "inbup " ' 1st c. ^Dbtjp
The connection of these forms with all the suffixes is shown
in Paradigm C. It will there be seen also, that Tsere in Piel
is shortened sometimes into Seghol and sometimes into vocal
Sh^va.
Rem. 1. The suffixes for the 2d per. plural, dd and 13, are (together
with on and yn) rather weightier (more strongly accented) forms than
the others, and hence are called grave suffixes. They always have the
tone, and cause in the 3d m. sing, of Perf. Kal a greater shortening than
the others (called light suffixes), e. g. ^^.^P , ti^^i^p . The difference has
still greater effect in the case of nouns (§ 91).
110 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
2. In the 3d sing. masc. ^nHiip is also contracted into ibup according
to § 23, 4. and so likewise in the 2d sing. masc. ifrnVjp into in^l?!?.
3. The 3d sing, f em. vb'^p^ (=nb:^;5) has the twofold peculiarity,
a) that it constantly draws the tone to itself, except with D3 and la
(see Rem. 1), and then takes the suffixes that make a syllable by them-
selves (""S, tj, ^<i, <7, 13, 03, T?) without a union- vowel, contrary to the
general rule (§ 58, 3, a) ; b) that with the other suffixes it takes indeed
the union-vowel, but draws the tone back on the penultima, so that they
appear with shortened vowels (y[-r-i t^), e. g. T^r!2f^^{ she loves thee
Ruth iv. 15, snS'}^ it burneth them Is. xlvii. 14, cnsjii she has stolen
them Gen. xxxi. 32. For ''3n^, ?]ri— , &c. are found \n pause ^?n— Ps.
Ixix. 10, ^r*— Cant. viii. 5 ; and also without pause, for the sake of corres-
pondence in sound, ^r'^3'7 (she has borne thee), in the same verse. — The
forms IPi^Dp, tiTrh'op are contr. from wnbrjp, nnbap. after the analogy
of !l3-r, for \r\i^ (§58, 4).
4. In the 2d si7ig. masc. Fi^^P is always used ; and the suffixes have
no union- vowel, except in "isnbtip, from Pibtip and ''3^. e.g. ''Sn'ipn
thou searchest me Ps. cxxxix. 1, but also ''SFi^TS thoii hast forsaken me
Ps. xxii. 2. — In the 2d sing. fern, "^n is written also defectively 'I3ri'ib'i
Jer. XV. 10 ; Cant. iv. 9 ; Ex. ii. 10 ; instead of it the masc. form is also
used !i3Pi^S^ii thou (fem.) adjurest us Cant. v. 9 ; Jos. ii. 17 ; and with
Tsere isPJllin thott hast let us down, ver. 18.
5. Of a verb middle O there occurs the form 1"'pV?'? I have prevailed
over him, Ps. xiii. 5, with a shortened o in a syllable that has lost the
tone (§ 44, Rem. 3).
§60.
IMPERFECT WITH PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES.
In the forms of the Imperfect Kal which eiid with the last
fstem -letter, the vowel o of the final syllable is shortened gene-
rally to simple Slfva vocal (— ), sometimes to Chateph- Qamets
(__ ) Jer. xxxi. 33, but before ?;, DD, ^D to Qamets-Chatuph (— ).
Instead of npbbjpn the form ^^PpJ?* is used as 2d and as 3d pers.
Cant. i. 6 ; Jer. ii. 19 ; Job xix. 15. The form with Nun de-
monstrative (§ 58j 4) stands most naturally at the end of the
clause or period.
N. B. Rem. 1. Verbs with Impf A (such are all verbs h guttural),
prefer the full A in the Impf and Imp.; and the Pattach, when it
comes to stand in an open syllable before the tone, is lengthened intc
Qamets, e. g. "^snb^ij send me Is. vi. 8, "'sBa^'^ it put me on (as a gar-
ment) Job xxix. 14, iiniib'sa'i let them demand it back Job iii. 5.
» Which occurs also &s feminine without a suffix, Jer. xlix. 11 ; Ez. xxxvii. 7.
§61. IKF., IMP., AND PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES. Ill
2. Not seldom, by way of exception, suffixes take also in the Impf.
the union-vowel a, as ni2Jab^ Ex. xxix. 30 ; comp. ii. 17 ; Gen. xix. 19 ;
xxix. 32.
3. The siffixes are sometimes appended also to the plural forms in
T') e. g. ''3 3 4^13'in ye crush me Job xix. 2, elsewhere always without a
union-vowel i3Dnx3^'i they will find me Prov. i. 28 ; Is. Ix. 7, 10 ; Jer.
V. 22.
4. In Piel the Tserc of the final syllable, like the Cholem in Kal,
becomes Sh^va ; but before the suffixes r\, dd, "jd it is only shortened
into Seghol, e. g. ^^aj''!' he toill gather thee t)eut. xxx. 4, more rarely
into Chireq, as QDiJMNX I icill strengthen you Job xvi. 5; corap. Ex. xxxi.
13 ; Is. XXV. 1.
5. In Hiphil the long i remains, as ''S^J'^a^n thou clothest me Job x. 11 ;
rarely there are forms like iiSnilJStn thoii, enrichest it Ps. Ixv. 10 ; 1 Sam.
svii. 25. Comp. § 53, Rem. 4.
§61.
INFINITIVE, IMPERATIVE, AND PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES.
1. The Infinitive of a verb active can be construed with an
accusative, and then it takes the verbal suffix (i. e. the accusative
of the personal pronoun), as ''P^Pj? to kill me ; but as a noun, it
can take also the nominal snffi,.v (the genitive), as ''^13)? my kill-
ing (§ 131, 1, 2). In Kal it then has usually the form bp)? (short
6, qdtl) ; comp. noutis of the form biJp, to which bbp is nearly
related (§ 84, No. 10, 11 ; §93, Parad. VI.).
Beni: 1. The Inf. of the form aailJ becomes with suffixes 3^^, e. g.
nasia Gen. xix. 33, like nouns of the form ttJa'n.
2. Before tj, Q5, "D, are found forms which depart from the analogy
0^ segholate nouns, e. g. fi3.c'^!!< yorcr eating Gen. iii. 5, ^I's? </«?/ standing
Obad. 11. The analogy is adhered to, however, in C^l^p your harvest-
ing Lev. xix. 9; and C3qi<?3 (m6-6s^khein) your contemning Is. xxx. 12.
2. What has been said of the Inf. applies also to the leading
form bpip of the Imp. Kal. The forms "'bpp, ^bt3p, which are
not presented in the Paradigm, suffer no change. For ihefem.
njb'^p is substituted the masculine form ^bpf?, as in the Imperf.
On •'pnbiJJ see § 60, Rem. 1. In Hiph. Imp. the form b-itppn (not
b'^Ip*"') is chosen ; e. g, in5i"ipri offer it, Mai. i. 8.
3. In the Participles the shortening of the vowels is the
same as in nouns of the like form, e. g. btDp, b^p'Q, according to
§ 93, Parad. VII. ''
On the difference between "'^lip and ''J^^ip, see §135, 2.
1 1 2 PART n. PARTS OF SPEECH.
II, OF THE IRKEGULAR VERB.*
A. VERBS WITH GUTTURALS.
§62.
Verbs which have a guttural for one of their three stem-letters
are governed, in their deviations from the regular verb, b5^ the
general principles laid down in § 22. Of course i5 and n come
under consideration here, only when they retain their power as
consonants ; *^ also partakes only in part of these anomalies
(§ 22, 4). For convenient representation, we distinguish the
cases in which the guttural is the first, second, or third stem-
letter. Their inflection is shown in Paradigms D, E, and P
(omitting those conjugations which are wholly regular), and
explained more fully in the following sections.
§63.
VERBS PE GUTTIJEAL.
(E. g. n^as to stand. Paradigm D.)
The deviations from the regular verb are as follows :
1. When the first stem-letter, at the beginning of the word,
requires a Sh°va (VtSj?, DHbtJ)?), in these verbs it takes one of the
composite Sh^vas (§10,2; §22, 3), e.g. /^^/. "lb?, bbX to eat,
Perf. Qni^?, Dr>2t&n from fSn to he inclined.
2. When a preformative is prefixed to such forms, it takes
the vowel corresponding to the Chateph (§28, 2), as T^?,'!!, Ci^r!|]
he will dream, v|bS!^ he ivill gather ; or the composite Sh®va
conforms to the vowel of the preformative, when the latter is an
essential characteristic of the form ; e. g. Perf. Niph. TQ?3. (for
"Iia:?5), Hiph. T^?n (for T^yn), Inf. and Impf 1^^?n, TXJ?;!,
Hoph. Perf "t^^^j ^»^Pf- ^'^Vr- (On the idethegh in these
forms, see § 16, 2, a.)
In many verbs, however, the guttural, especially 11 , when it
stands after a preformative at the end of a syllable, retains the
simple Sh^va ; but in this case the preformative always has the
vowel corresponding to the composite Sh^va, which the guttural
* See the general view of the classes in § 41.
§63. VERBS PE GUTTURAL. 113
would take according to the above rule. E. g. Imjyf. Kal ^'^H^
he rvill desire, T2J!3ln|^ he mill bind, Niph. '?fS?75 he turned himself,
nTNI2 girded, Hiph. '^p^'i^ to cause to fail.
The grammarians call the latter the hard, the former with the comp.
Sh^va the soft combination. Both often occur in the same verb.
3. When in forms like "lb5^^, W5, the vowel of the final
syllable becomes a simple Sh^va vocal, on the addition of a suffor-
mative (^, '^— , f1— ), the composite ShVa of the guttural is ex-
changed for its short vowel, as l^^,"^, ])lur. ^^W^; (pronounced
ya-um''-dh{L) ; S^^T?.? she is forsaken. But here again there is
also a harder form, as ^^3H|] they take a pledge, '^pT'?!? as well as
^prn;: they are strong. See § 22, 4, § 28, 3.
4. In the Inf., Imp., and Impf. of Niph.^ vhere the first
stem-letter would regularly be doubled (^t3|^n, ^'^)5?), the doubling
is always omitted, and the vowel of the preformative is length-
ened into Tsere, as W."! for W\
Remarks.
I. On Kal.
1. In verbs XS the Inf. consir. and Imp. take {-^) under the first letter
(according to § 22, 4, Rem. 2) ; as "I'tx gird Job xxxviii. 3, anx love thou
Hos. iii. 1, bbx to eat, with a prefix ths^, bbwSb. The {—) is found here
only when the tone is forcibly thrown forward ; e. g. HJSti bbxa Num.
xxvi. 10. For the same reason was written Qr)"i?3X not CFi'iiax.
In the other forms also of the Imp. the guttural often exerts its influ-
ence upon the vowel, which becomes Seghol, as iiS^S set in order Job
xxxiii. 5, "^QiiJr! v.ncover Is. xlvii. 2, especially when the second radical
is also a guttural, as 12I1X Ps. xxxi. 24. Pattach occurs in ^t^^an take
a pledge of him Pro v. xx. 16.
2. The Impf. A, as the Parad. shows, has regularly under the first
two letters -r— 5 and with the hard combination 777, as ^''^h;; he ceases,
can;) he is wise. This is also true of those verbs which are at the same
time lib, as ri.Tn|] he sees, fi^nj;; he divides. Less frequently the pointing
— — is found also in verbs Impf O ; as tlbs^, Clbn;] he uncovers. Q,uite
unique is the form aJJJni and she loves Ez. xxiii. 5. In these forms the
pointing —— is very frequently shortened to -^— (according to § 27,
Rem. 5) J as IDS'; he binds, plur. with suf. ^n^^tiii^ ; also ^on;;, snon^.
II. 071 Hiphil and. Hophal.
3. The rule given in Rem. 2 respecting ——;: and -::— applies again
here in the Perf. after Vav consecutive ; i. e. the throwing forward of the
tone occasions a change of e* into a" as Pi'i^J^n thou didst set, TC^.'O^tX)
and thou wilt set. Num. iii. 6 ; viii. 13 ; xxvii. 19 ; '^Pi'iaS'^, ''n"?3yni.
4. In the Perf. o[ Hiph. is sometimes changed into , and
114 PART II. TARTS OF SPEECH.
— : — into — — in Hoph. Perf. by prolonging tlie short vowel, which waa
sustained by Methegh, e. g. !^"i2J;n thou hast brought over Jos. vii. 7
nbsn he brings up Hab. i. 15 ;Vi^2J'n Nah. ii. 8.
III. In General.
5. In the verbs rr^n to live, apd !T;n to be, the guttural is treated as
such in very few forms; Impf. f^^.f^?, fT?.""?- The rule given under
No. 1 is indeed true of these verbs, hence ni^n ; but so soon as a letter
is prefixed, tiie first radical drops the peculiar pointing of the guttural,
as niinb, ni'inb, oniini Ez. xxxvii. 5, 6.
6. For stems in which the initial K loses its consonant-power, see
§68.
§64.
VERBS AYIN GUTTURAL.
(E. g. '^tvii to slaughter. Paradigm E.)
The deviations from the regular verb are not so great as in
the former class, and are mainly as follows :*
1. Where a Sh®va is required, the guttural takes without
exception a composite Sh%'a, namely {,). E.g. Perf. ^tSTO,
Imj)f. ^"on^IJ';', Imp. Niph. ^Dntsn. In the Imp. Kal the vowel,
supplied under the first radical, conforms to the Chateph of the
second ; as ^'^rw, rjnir.
So in the Inf. Kal fern., as narix to love, nsx-i to languish.
2. The preference of the gutturals for the A sound has gene-
rally less influence on the following than on the preceding vowel
(§ 22, 2, a, and Rem. 1) ; accordingly, not only is the Cholem in
Inf. Kal ish©, t2imy retained, but also, for the most part, the
Tsei^e in I?}ipf Niph. and Piel onb'^ he fights, Dn?|' he consoles,
and even the more feeble iSeghol (after Vav consecutive) Un}'^^ .
But in the Impf. and Imp. Kal the last syllable generally takes
(J, through the influence of the guttural, even in transitive
verbs, e. g. unilJ, t:rn2J:' ; p^T, 'pVI'^ ; "1113, IJlS^ (seldom as Dhr) ;
and in the Perf, Piiil also, Pattach occurs somewhat more fre-
quently than in the regular verb, as i:np.
3. In Pial, Piial, and Hithp., the Daghesh forte cannot
stand in tiie middle stem-letter ; but in the greater number ot
examples, particularly before H, n, and V, the preceding vowel
* Hophal, which is not exhibited in the Paradigm, is varied like Kal. Hiphil
is regular.
§ 65. VERBS LAjVIEDH GUTTURAL. 115
remains short and sharp, the guttural having Dagltesh forte
implicihmi (§22, 1). E. g. Piel pntp, /w/. pnilJ to jest ; PncU
YTn ^0 ^^ washed ; Hithp. T\T\^T) cleanse yourselves. Before i?
the vowel is commonly prolonged, and always before ^, as Piel
'jii'a to refuse, l^"^^ to bless, Inypf. ^'^i^'!', Pass. ^Jt!^, seldom as
fji?? to commit adultery.
Rem. 1. In the Perf. Kal of the much used verb bxiU to ask, to de-
mand, the peculiar feebleness of the X occasions a weakening of its a
to -7, and in a closed syllable to -^ and — , when the syllable loses the
tone and X is not preceded by a full vowel (as in some verbs ''S , § 69,
Rem. 4). E. g. with suff. tjbx^ Gen. xxxii. 18, siiJlbxTZ? Ps. cxxxvii. 3 ;
2dplur. tDtnbxia 1 Sam. xii. iS ; xxv. 5; 1st sing, with suff. iinipibxTU
Judg. xiii. 6; VSam. i. 20; also in Hiph. ^'n-'V\h^'qri 1 Sam. i. 28. Comp'.
§ 44, Rem. 2.
2. In Piel and Hithp. the tone is sometimes drawn back upon the
penultima, and the Tsere of the final syllable shortened to Seghol ; viz.
a) Before a word of one syllable (according to § 29, 3, b), as Dia ri"iab
in order to serve there Deut. xvii. 12, comp. Gen. xxxix. 14 ; Job viii. 18.
b) After Vav consecutive, as t^i.S'?] and he blessed Gen. i. 22, ^'iS'?^ and
he drove out Ex. x. 11, comp. Gen. xxxix. 4.
3. The following are unfrequent anomalies in the Perf. Piel: ^iriN
they delay Judges v. 28 for ^^nx ; and the similar form '^Jn^ri'^ she con-
ceived me Ps. li. 7 for '''^rian;; or ''snrn').
4. For some examples, in which a middle X loses its feeble consonant-
power, see § 73, Rem. 1.
§65.
VERBS LAMEDH GUTTURAL.
(E. g. nbir to send. Paradigm P.)
1. According to 9 22, 2, a and b, we here distinguish two
cases ; viz. either the regular vowel of the final syllable remains,
and the guttural takes Vdiii<x.c\\ furtive, or the full vowel Pattach
takes the place of the regular vowel. The more particular state-
ment is as follows :
a) the strong unchangeable vowels "i— , i, ^ (§25, 1) always re-
main ; hence Inf. absol. Kal r?'^^^. Part. pass. ri^bT^, Hiph.
n^b^^n, Impf n^blU^ Part. niblSia ; as also the less inn o of
the I?if. constr. n'btp, which is thus distinguished from the
Imp. (as in verbs 5? guttural) ;
b) the merely tone-long O of the Imjf. and Imp. Kal becomes
Pattach, as Tibt!^ , nbiT . (With siiff. ^^nb©:' , see § 60, Rem. 1);
116 PART IL PAETS OF SPEECH.
c) where Tsere is the regular vowel of the last syllable, the
forms with final Tsere {e") and final PaMach are both em-
ployed, but are generally distinguished in usage. Thus :
In the Part. Kal and Piel )i?^, 1^^^^ is the exclusive form, and the
full Pattach first appears in the constr. state nbilj. n^di2.
In the Impf. and Inf. Niph. and in the Perf. Inf. and Impf. Piel, the
form with (—7) is employed at the beginning and in the middle of a
clause, the one with -7:7 at the end, and in Pause. E. g. S'na'^ it is dimi-
nished Num. xxvii. 4 and S'la'^ xxxvi. 3 ; 2J|557 he cleaves Hab. iii. 9. and
5153': Ez. xiii. 11 ; 5^2 to swallow Hab. i. 13 ;' Num. iv. 20. It may fur-
ther be observed that the Inf. ahsol. retains Tsere, which is lost in the
Inf. constr. E. g. r!^\a Deut. xxii. 7 ; 1 K. xi. 22 ; but rkt to send.
In Hiph. the shortened forms of the Imp. and Impf admit only (-r),
6. g. nb^n prosper.^ ^?^!5 ct*^^ ^e trusted. The Inf. ahsol. takes {-rz) ^^
snasrt to make high ; hut as Inf. constr. occurs also riDin Job vi. 26.
2. The guttural here has simple Sh^va whenever the third
radical regularly takes it (because it is Sh^va quiescent, which is
generally retained even under gutturals, § 22, 4), as Htl^©, "^nn^lD,
But in the 2d fern. Perf. a helping-Pa^^acA takes its place, as
Pn^lb (§ 28, 4), yet also more rarely tir\p}i (without Daghesh in
ri) Gen. XXX. 15 and riH^b 1 Kings xiv. 3.
The softer combination with composite Sh^va occurs only a) In some
examples of the 1st plur. Perf. when the tone is thrown forward, aa
;^^325']';i ^ce knoio thee Hos. viii. 2 ; comp. Gen. xxvi. 29. h) Before the
suffixes ^, 03, "js, as ?inb^N / will send thee 1 Sam. xvi. 1, ?]i^|i^st
Gen. xxxi. 27, ?]?>''5att!N Jer. xviii. 2.
On the feeble verbs xb , see especially § 74.
B. CONTRACTED VERBS.*
§66.
VEEBS fs.
(E. g. laaj to apyproach. Paradigm H.)
The irregularities of these verbs are caused by the feebleness
of the nasal letter Nun^ and are as follows :
1. The Imj). and Inf. constr. often lose their Nun, which
would here take Sh^va, as m for 12J5? (§ 19, 3). The Inf. then,
* Including the two classes, Pe Nun and Ayin doubled, -which have this in
common, that one of the stem-letters is in many forms expressed by a Daghesh
forte. Strictly speaking, however, the term applies only to the latter class, the
former belonging rather to the feeble verbs. — Tk.
§G6. VERBS IS. 117
however, has regularly the feminine ending ri_I, or, with a guttu-
ral, n_ (§ 80, 2), as rmaSf, , n?5 (from ^52) to touch. The /m;^.
has usually P attach ; but also Tsere, as "jn ^ive (from ipz).
The lengthened form is frequent here, as T\ZT\ give up.
2. In forms which take a prefonnative, where the Nun is
thus made to stand at the end of a syllable, it assimilates itself
to the following stem-letter (§ 19, 2, a) : viz. a) in the Lyipf.
Kal, e. g. bs^ Ae t^i// fall, for bjsr ; 1C5:' for m}^ ; 'jn:' /ie will
give for 'jri?;' (the Imp/. O as in the regular verb most common,
the Impf. E only in this example*) ; h) in the Perf. Niph.,
e. g. TIJ53 for TlJa23 ; c) in the whole of Hij)hil and Hophal
(which here has always Qibbuts, §9, 9, 2), e. g. tJ^Sn, ican for
TS''53n, T2Ja:n.
The other forms are all regular, e. g. Peif., Inf. absoL, Part.,
of Kal, Piel, Pual, &c. Only those conjugations which are
irregular aie included in the Paradigm H.
The characteristic of these verbs in all forms which begin with a
formative letter, is the Daghesh forte following it in the second radical.
Some forms, however, of one class of verbs "'S (§ 71), and even of verbs
's'-S (§ 67. 5), exhibit the same appearance. Verbs IS likewise exhibit
such forms of the Imp. as \I3a, also "1^5 (Gen. xix. 9), and 'iH.
Rem. 1. The instances are comparatively few in which the forms
mentioned in Nos. 1 and 2 retain their Nun, e. g. Imp. ^li: permit, ^ibsJ
fall ye; Inf. ?i3 (but also n:sr>) to touch j Impf ibS'i he keeps Jer. iii. 5
(elsewhere "its'!'). In Niph. this never occurs, and in Hiph. and Iloph.
very seldom, as Tj'^ln?'! to melt Ez. xxii. 20, ^plnJ^J they are cut o^ Judges
XX. 31. It regularly occurs, however, in all verbs which have a guttural
for their second stem-letter, as ^^^'! he will possess. In these verbs the
Nun rarely falls away, as nn;^ and rins^ he will descend ; Niph. ons for
C)133 he has comforted himself.
N. B. 2. These anomalies are in part shared by the verb n;?^ to
take, whose h is treated like the Nun of these verbs (§ 19, 2). Hence,
Impf ni?"^, Imp. nj'3 (seldom Hj^b), Inf. constr. nn^, Hoph. Impf riiS^.
Niphal, however, is always riplsD .
N. B. 3. The verb "jPia to give has the further irregularity, that its
third radical (as a feeble nasal sound) is also assimilated ; e. g. "'Pin?
for '^FisriJ, Fjb? for PiJna ; Inf. constr. nn for rsn (see § 19, 2), with
suff. TIP) my giving.
* The vei'b TIJSJ , employed as a Paradigm, has the Impf. A, which is not pre-
Bcnted, however, as the most usual form of the Impf. in verbs of this class, but
only as the actual form of this particular verb. The Tsere in "jn" is owing to tlie
double feebleness of the stem "jrii (comp. Rem. 3).
1 1 S PART II. PAETS OF SPEECH.
§67.
VERBS VV.
(E. g. 330 to surround. Paradigm G.)
1. The principal irregularity of these verbs consists in the
contraction of the second and third radicals often into one double
letter, as ^ISD for ^3DD, even when a full vowel would regularly
stand between them, as 30 for Dip, 3D for 120 • Only those
forms are not contracted which contain unchangeable vowels, or
a Daghesh forte, as 3inD, 3310, 330.
2. The monosyllabic stem thus obtained takes, throughout,
the vowel which the full form would have had in its second syl-
lable, and which, in the regular verb also, is the characteristic of
the form (§ 43, Rem. 1) ; e. g. Perf. 3p for 330 ; Inf. 30 for 330 ;
Hiph. 3pn for 33Dn (comp. No. 6).
3. The Daghesh forte, which, after this contraction, properly
belongs to the final stem-letter, is excluded from it (§ 20, 3, a),
except when formative additions are made at the end, as ^30,
^30, Impf. ^30;^, but not 30, 3b.
4. When the afibrmative begins with a consonant (3, ri), a
vowel is inserted before it in order to render audible the Daghesh
of the final stem-letter (§ 20, 3, c, Rem.). This vowel in the
Perf. is i, in the Imp. and Impf '^—, e. g. fii3p, ^Diio, Impf
n:^3Dn.
The Arabian writes indeed regularly rill^a , but 'pronounces in the
popular language especially rr^ia inaddeit, maddU, also maddat, which
last is exactly analogous to the Hebrew inflection.*
5. The preformatives of Impf Kal, Perf Nij^h., and of Hiph.
and Hoph., which in consequence of the contraction stand in a
simple syllable (3b|'^ instead of 33|D"i), take, instead of the short
vowel of the regular form, the corresponding long one (§ 27, 2, a).
Hence Kal Impf O 30^' for 330;: = 330^ ;t Impf A, "113^ for TP^'} ;
* The explanation here given, of this inserted vowel, may perhaps suffice,
especially if a certain approximation be supposed to verbs of tlie class fi?; com-
j)are niap and Arab. ?na(Z(/tte with tiiba or n"^!?, and tiraOPl with nphn .
\ It might seem an easier explanation of the Impf. DD^ (as well as of the Impf.
in verbs "IS, B^P"^), to regard it as formed from the contracted stem-syllable 20
by prefixing "^ ; so also in Hiph. and Hoph. But the mechanically easier way is
not always the natural one.
§67. VERBS sir. 119
Hiph. ncn for ssDJi , Inf. npn for sacn ; Hoj)h. nc^n for n^on
This long vowel (except the ^ in Hophal) is changeable.
There is still another mode of constructing these forms (the common
one in Chaldee), according to which the Inipf. Kal ab"^ comes from
32D1, Impf. Iliph. cn^ irom D^n;;>, Hoph. ns;' from nriDi, the first syl-
lable being sharpened, with a consequent douhling of the first radical.
When these forms receive an addition at the end, the first radical com-
monly appears single (i. e. without Daghesh forte, as if the sharpening
of the first syllable sufficed for this), the tone at the same time falling
on the accessory syllable. E. g. ^"^P,"! they bow themselves (from ^1|5),
^351 (from nns) ; but see !ia&:;i Judges xviii. 23, ^tns^ Job iv. 20. They
omit also the vowels 1 and 1 — , e. g. nj^^n (from bb:i) Jer. xix. 3. The
Parad. exhibits this form by the side of the other in Impf. Kal.
6. The originals of these contractions are several unusual
forms, which in part are older and more nearly primary than
those of the regular verb. Thus, Sb^ is contracted from n3p|;i,
the preformative having a as in the regular verb in Arabic ;*
Hiph. icn for 33cn has in the contracted stem-syllable the
shorter e (like tlie Aram. VjpK comp. § 53, 1 and Rem. 1) ; Perf.
NipJi. nc: for n?c: ; Inf. Niph. ns;' for nne:', comp. bi:]^i, §51,
Rem. 2. '
7. The tone has this peculiarity, that it is not thrown forward
upon the formative syllables beginning with a vowel (H— ., .^, ^i— ),
but remains before them on the stem-syllable, as ^30. t Before
the otlier afformatives, it rests upon the inserted syllables i and
*i__ (with the exception of DP and "JFI, which always take the
tone), and in consequence the vowels of the word are shortened,
as ^3Dr\, nriicn ; rapn, but niicn.
8. Instead of Piiil, Pual, Hithp., arid in the same significa-
tion, is found in numerous verbs of this kind, the unfrequent
conjugation Poel (§55, 1), witli its passive and reflexive, e. g.
bbiy to treat one ill, Pass, bbis?. Reflex, bbiynn (from bby) ; in
some is found Pilpel (§ 55, 4), as bsba to roll, ^^b^lnn to roll one^s
self (from bb:\). Pass. ^Wt to he caressed (from VVt). They are
inflected regularly like Piel.
* Hebrew ^bp^ from h'^p^., § 9, 5. The a appears also in verbs S guttural,
especially in verbs XS § 68, and verbs ^^S § 72.
f The terminations for gender and number in the Participles take the tone,
these not being a part of the verbal inflection, as n|"j53 , Msop .
120 PART 11. PARTS OF SPEECH.
Remarks.
I. On Kal.
1. In the Perf. are found some examples with Cholem (comp. bb^
§ 43, 1), as >l53"i from Db"! they are exalled Job xxiv. 24, ^3"n from Dh"
Gen. xlix. 23.
2. The Cholem of the /?j/l, /mp., and /«y/. (nb , ab^), is a change-
able vowel, and is written defectively, with a few exceptions, which are
found especially in the later orthography. E. g. tin^ for Thb to -plunder
Esth. iii. 13; viii. 11. It is consequently shortened into Qamets-chatuph
or Qibbiits, whenever it loses the tone, as Inf. "I"! to rejoice Job xxxviii. 7,
with suff. "ipna when he founded Prov. viii. 27, /?hj3. iJsn pzV?/ wie, /mjs/^
with Vav consec. 2G*1 Judges xi. 18, with suff. C^'^j'? /je lays them waste
Prov. xi. 3, aM.
3. Of final Pattach in the Inf., Impf. an& 'mp. (Vjp, b'Jp-^) the fol-
lowing are examples : '^'O to stoop Jer. v. 26. Imp. ba ro/Z Ps. cxix. 22,
Impf "^"02 he is bitter Is. xxiv. 9, bp;; he is despised Gen. xvi. 4, 5, T^ti!!
he becomes weak, Is. vii. 4. Examples of the Cha.ldaizing Impf are :
23"^ even though sb^ is also in use ; D'iZJ^ he is astonished 1 Kings ix. 8 ;
!l1|3^l and they bowed themselves, from 1^j5 .
4. In the Participle occurs the Aramsean form DXiU for Otgit) Jer. xxx.
16, K^thibh.
II. On Niphal.
5. Besides the most usual form with Pattach in the second syllable,
as given in the Paradigm, there is still another with Tsere, and another
with Cholem (analogous with h^p^, ^133, bb^. § 43, 1), extending through
the whole conjugation. E. g. Perf. b;?3 (also b;?3) it is a light thing
Is. xlix. 6, Part. D123 wasted away 1 Sam. xv. 9 ; with Cholem, ^y^ they
are rolled together Is. xxxiv. 4, Impf. ^ann thou art destroyed Jer. xlviii.
2. In The Inf. and Imp. there occur no forms with Pattach, but only
with Tsere and Cholem ; e. g. /»/". &52li to melt Ps. Ixviii. 3, Inf. abs.
Tistn ^0 6e plundered Is. xxiv. 3, //»;>. ^iHTi"; g-e^ ?/oz« ?<p Num. xvii. 10.
Examples oi' Niph. with the sharpening of tlie first syllable are : bns is
profaned Ez. xxv. 3 (from b^H), '^n? (from "'"in) Ps. Ixix. 4; cii. 4 (also
"ins Jer. vi. 29), T^XV: fractiis est (from rnn) Mai. ii. 5.
III. On Hiphil and Ilophal.
6. Besides Tsere the final syllable in Hiph. has also Pattach, espe-
cially with gutturals, as "i^n Ac v/mc/e 6/Wer ; Inf. "i3n ^o cleanse Jer. iv.
11. But also without a guttural, as p'lrs he broke in pieces 2 Kings
xxiii. 15, Plur. ^laon 1 Sam. v. 10, Part, bsa shadowing Ez. xxxi. 3.
7. The Imperfect with retracted tone takes the form T]0^ he protects
Ps. xci. 4. bi^] tt«(/ /ie rolled Gen. xxix. 10.
8. Chaldaizing forms ol' Hiphil and Ilophal: 2&?1 Ex. xiii. 18. W3?l
a»(Z //<ey iroAv' Deut. i. 44, bnx prnfanabo Ez. xxxix. 7, ^la^ii they are
destroyed Job xxiv. 24, rs^ zs broken Is. xxiv. 12. >lpn;i in pause (Job xix
23) for ^pn^ . '
§ 68. VERBS XS . 121
IV. In General.
9. Verbs SS are very nearly related to verbs IS (§ 72), as appears
even from the similarity in their conjugations, which are parallel through-
out. In form the verb V'J is generally shorter than the other (comp. "b^
and O^ip^, 3Dn and n''|?ln). In some cases they have precisely the
same form, as in the Impf. consec. of Kal and Hiphil, in Hophal, and in
the unfrequent conjugations. On account of this relation, they have
sometimes borrowed forms from each other, e. g. I^i^ for '|"i;|' he rejoices
Prov. xxix. 6.
10. Along with the contracted forms ihere are found, especially
in certain conjugations and tenses, others which are wholly regular.
E. g. Perf. Kal ITS to plunder, Plur. ^tT3, WT3 (also !i3ila Deut. ii. 7);
Inf. 3ho and 30; Ini))/. '^ri^ he is gracious Amos v. 15, elsewhere yn^ ;
Hiph. ■|''?"}n, Impf. T'3"!'^ he will rejoice (which is never contracted),
Paft. Dixiir^ astonished Ez. iii. 15. The full form is rather poetic, and
is used with some degree of emphasis (Ps. cxviii. 11).
11. We have seen above (No. 5), that in the Impf. of the Chaldee
form, the Daghesh of the third radical, together with the preceding
vowel, is omitted before afformatives, the tone at the same time falling
on the latter, as ^"ii?^!] . This sometimes occurs also in other forms, as >^^23
Gen. xi. 7 for nV33 ice will coifound (cohortative irom bbs) ; ^"Q^"^ for ^5an
ver. G they will devise; Perf. Niph. ^203 for n3D3 Ez. xli. 7 ; cnbiss for
Dn'^'23 Gen. xvii. 11 (from ^h'O =b^'0 to circumcise) ; comp. Is. xix. 3 ; Jer.
viii. 14. Without Daghesh, but with the accented full vowel : ntsti for
nj2Jn Prov. vii. 13, nj33 1 Sam. xiv. 36; comp. Q-i^n; Is. lvii.5 for t3"i53n3.
12. Although the tone falls less on the afformatives here (see No. 7),
yet this occasionally takes place ; sometimes as an exception, e. g. li'i
Jer. V. 6; Ps. iii. 2; civ. 21, ^ihp^ Gen. iv. 13; sometimes on account
of appended suffixes, as ^30, i3^3D Ps. cxviii. 11. The vowels suffer
before Daghesh the changes pointed out in § 27, 1, viz. Cholem in the
Impf. becomes Qibbuts, less frequently Qamets-chaiuph, Tsere in Hiph.
becomes Chireq (after the analogy of njisori. nniipn) ; the preforma-
tives then, in place of the full vowel, take Sh'^va. E.g. "'3307 Ps. xlix.6,
inbO': Job xl. 22, mn"! Ps. Ixvii. 2, Hiph. ^i^t)"] Ez. xlvii. 2."
C. FEEBLE VERBS (VERBA QUIESCENTIA).
§68.
FEEBLE VEPvBS XD.
(E. g. bax to eat. Paradigm I.)
So far as X retains its power as a consonant and a guttural,
these verbs have all the properties of verbs Pe guttural exhibited
in § 63. Here we treat of them, only so far as their N quiesces,
i. e. loses its consonant-sound, and is blended with the preceding
122 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
vowel. This happens only in a few very common verbs and
forms, worn away as it were by frequent use. The limitationg
are as follows :
1. In the Liipf. Kal of five verbs, viz., 13i5 to perish, H^S to
be wllliug, ^3i5 to eat, "Tas to say, nsx to hake, the X always
quiesces in a long 6 {Chole?)i), as 13i<''. In some others, the
form in which it retains its power as a consonant is also in use,
as TnS'^ and tHx^;; he takes hold of. The 6 in this case is a
corruption of the vowel a (§ 9, 10, 2), which is itself derived by-
contraction from — — or ——. The feebleness of these verbs
(§41, c) affects also their last syllable, so that it takes instead of
the stronger vowel o an e ( Tsere), particularly with distinctive
accents at the end of a period or clause ; but with conjunctive
accents, which mark the continuance of the discourse, it takes a
{Pattach), e. g-. "i?b iniin Ps. ix. 19, on the contrary ins?n Ps. i. 6
(comp. a similar exchange of e and d § 65, 1, c). When the tone
moves back, the last stem-syllable has sometimes Pattach, as
Di"' "ns"" perish the day Job iii. 3, ^Di?''!! and he ate, and some
times Seghol, as l^fi^^!! {Milel), with conjunctive accents, but
I^.SJ'il {Milra) with distinctives (but in Job a few times "MZ^k^^ in
pause).
Very seldom does l^sere stand in the frst syllable in the Jmpf. Kal^
as nnsn it shall come Mic. iv. 8, contracted from f^ri^^f} : always, how
ever, in the form "laxb dicendo {Inf. with h). for "I'^xb.
2. In the 1st j^ers. si)ig. Impf the radical i5 (to avoid the
repetition of this letter) is regularly dropped (§ 23, 3), as "l12i? for
n^S<55 / loill say.
Except in this case the radical ^« seldom falls away, as C|Oh for ClOXP.
Ihou takest aivaij Ps. civ. 29, Tj^i^^ for T]!i-irx"' they speak of thee Ps.
cxxxix. 20, "'bl'n thou goest away (from ^!i<), Jer. ii. 36.
The Paradigm I. gives the feeble forms (namely, Impf. Kal),
and indicates the other more regular forms.
jRem. 1. Out of Kal X seldom quiesces, as Perf. Niph. ^itnxs Jos.
xxii. 9 ; Hiph. ^3X^1 and he took aicay Num. xi. 25. '('^TX I hearken Job
xxxii. 11, tTiifiX (/> from A) I will destroy Jer. xlvi. 8, ■j'^'tTa attending
Prov. xvii. 4, Imp. ^'^'nf} bring ye (from nnx) Is. xxi. 14.
2. In Piel X sometimes falls away by contraction (like n in b'^apfl'^,
^iiap'^) ; e. g. rj^n (so, regularly, in Syr. Chald. and Samar.) for C)5NO
teaching Job xxxv. 11.
§69. VERBS ''B. 123
§69.
FEEBLE YERBS <tl.
First Class, or Verbs originally IS.
(E. g. t:^'; to d^oell. Paradigm K.)
Verbs ""'s fall principally under tv)o classes, which are wholly
different from each other in their origin and iniiection. The
Jirst embraces those verbs which have properly a ^ for their first
stem-letter. In Arabic they are written with 1 (e. g-. ^h"^ , Arab.
loalada) ; but in Hebrew, by a difference of dialect, they take "^
instead of it, wherever the first radical is the initial letter. The
second embraces those which are properly T, and which have
Yodh also in Arabic (§ 70). There are also a few verbs "^S,
partly of the first and partly of the second class, which in certain
forms sharpen the first syllable like verbs fs, and thus form in
some measure a third class (§71).
In the verb "iS'; the forms are divided according to their signification ;
viz. 1) ^^; (of the first class), Impf. ~is;], "iS^I to be in a strait;
2) "iS'; (of the second class), Impf. "iS.^«1 to form.
The peculiarities in the inflection of the first class, which is
analogous with the Arabic "^"s, are the following :
1. In the Impf., Imp., and Inf. constr. of Kal there is a two-
fold form. About half the number of these verbs have here the
feeblest forms, namely :
Impf. 'yit^, with a tone-lengthened e in the second syllable, which
may be shortened to Seghol and vocal SMva ; and with a
somewhat firmer e in the first syllable, which in some degree
still embodies the first radical ^ that has fallen away (though
scarcely ever written HlIJ'^.'') ;
Imp. 311^ contracted from y^,"! by the falling away of the feeble
1" ; and
Inf. m^^ shortened in like manner at the beginning, and with
the feminine ending n^, which again gives to the form more
length and body.
The other half of these verbs are inflected with stronger
forms ; they have the hnpf. A and retain the Yodh initial : e. g.
Im,p. '^'T! and Inf. ^b';', where it is a consonant ;
Impf. ^T'^., where it is resolved into the vowel i (§24, 2).
124 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
That the latter mode of inflection belongs to verbs actually IS (which
has often been overlooked and falsely denied) is shown, partly by the
numerous verbs which take these forms in Kal, and at the same time
have 1 in Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal ; partly by the analogy of the
Arabic, where the verbs fs have likewise a double inflection.
Even in the same verb are found both forms, the weaker and the
stronger, as p^ 2 Kings iv. 41, and pbJ"^ pmir Ez. xxiv. 3, ^^ 1 Kings
xxi. 15, ^"i Deut. ii. 24, and liJ'n'^ possess, with lengthening ■^^'^7 Deut.
xxxiii. 23 ; Imp/, ij^i'^ Deut. xxxii. 22, and ipi; he vnll hum up Is. x. 16.
To the first mode of inflection belong, e. g. lb^ to bear, X^^ to go
forth, a^^ to sit, to dwell, Ti^ to descend, S'l; to knoio, (Imp/. SiT|] with
Pattach in the last syllable on account of the guttural) ; to the second
belong Cis; to weary, yTl to counsel, U33; to he dry, though the latter is
in Arabic "'S .
2. The original Vav maintains itself, as a consonant, wher-
ever it must be doubled ; namely, in the Inf., Imp., and Impf.
of Niphal, as niC^n, ^tr} (precisely as bpj^n, bt?]^^) ; moreover,
in Hithp. of some verbs, as yi'irin from S^*!^, and in a few nomi-
nal forms, as 'ibl jji'oles, from 1^'^ to hear. As a vowel, at the
end of the syllable, it is sounded u (^) in the whole of Hophal
(e. g. ^TU^n for ^TiJir') ; and, combined with a preceding a, as a
diphthongal d (i) in the Perf. and Part, of Niphal, and through-
out Hiphil (e. g. iTBii for 3TC)D, n'iffiin for n^tJIH).
3. The other forms, with few exceptions (see Rem. 3, 4), are
regular.
In those forms in which Yodh does not appear, these verbs may be
distinguished, in the Impf of /la/ by the Tsere under the preformatives ;
in Niph., Hiph., and Hoph. by the Vav (1, i, ^l) before the second radical.
(Forms written cZe/edtt'eZ?/, like T'^H, are rare.) Forms like 211J, n3^3,
they have in common with verbs "jS . Hophal has the same form as in
verbs 'S'J and IS .
Rem. 1. The Inf. o^ Kal, of the weaker form (see No. 1), has very
seldom the masculine form like S^ to know Job xxxii. 6, 10, or the femi-
nine ending n— , e.g. ns'n Ex. ii. 4. With a guttural, ri-^;^ becomes n^,
e. g. ris^ to know, irnf to hear in 1 Sam. iv. 19 is contracted to nb
(§ 19, 2). Examples of the regular full form occur with siiffixes, "''lO^
Job xxxviii. 4, i'lO^ Ezra iii. 12. The full form has seldom the feminine
ending, as Thp'>_ to be able.
2. The Imp. Kal often has the lengthening ti— ;-, as nsttj seat thyself
iTTn descend. From niili to give the lengthened Lnp. is n2fi g-ive up,
fern, "'an, plur. ^2ri, with accented Qaniets, owing to the influence of
the guttural.
3. The Impf of the form niZJ';; takes Pattach in its final syllable when
it has a guttural, as ^^"^ he will know, also T^P? Jer. xiii. 17. When the
tone is drawn back upon the penultima, the final syllable takes Seghol.
§"70. VERBS "IS. 125
namely, before a word of one syllable and after Vav consecutive. E. g.
S<3-3d^ Gen. xliv. 33; 1-ii], 2ia^1, but in Pause aiiJ'l and 'T^^}. A
very rare exception, in which an /mjj/". of this kind is written fully, is
•"iDb^X Mic. i. 8. — The form ^t!'^? when lengthened can also lose its radi-
cal ""j as ISS^ Is. xl. 30. ^"5|; Ixv. 23. Yet the cases are rare and ques-
tionable where this occurs after other preformatives than "^ (see Is.
xliv. 8).
4. In some stems the feebleness extends also to the Per/. Kal, so that
the a under the second radical becomes e or i. as •i^TlJ'i'^ , on'iU'n'i , rpin'i!?';!
from ^'n^ , "hj^ . Examples are found in Num. xi. 1 2 ; Deut. iv. 1 ; viii. 1 ;
xix. 1 ; xxvi. 1 ; Ps. ii. 7 ; Ixix. 36, &c. In Syriac, e :jb here predomi-
nant ; in Hebrew the feeble vowel is found only in such forms of the
Per/, as have no full vowel under the first radical. See a similar case
in § 73, Rem. 4.
5. As an exception, the Impf. Niph. has sometimes Yodh instead of
Vav, e. g. bn^*! and he waited Gen. viii. 12 ; comp. Ex. xix. 13. The
1st pers. sing, has always the form aiiJ^X not Siyj!* ; comp. § 51, Rem. 4.
6. In Piel the radical Yodk sometimes falls away after 1 preforma-
tive, which takes its punctuation (comp. § 68, Rem. 2). E. g. iMDa^T
for 1!iffl3;^'^l and he drieth it up Nah. i. 4.
7. In Hiphil, as in Kal, the Imp/, with retracted tone takes Seghol,
as CjOi^ let him add Prov. i. 5, t]0i'1 and he added. On forms like
SiiaiiT;!, see § 53, Rem. 7. — In Hophal, there are some examples of i in
place of 1, as S'lin (for S"i!in) Lev. iv. 23, 28.
N. B. 8. With verbs I's of the first class is connected, also, the verb
"n^'l io go; for it forms (as if from "^1) Inipf. Ty?!^., with Vav ~^*!], in
pause Tl^*!), Inf. constr. nab, Imp. T)b, lengthened nsb and also ?|b,
and so Hiph. '^''bin. Rarely, and almost exclusively in the later books
and in poetry, are found also the regular inflections from T]bfi ; e. g. Impf.
r\^flt^, Inf. Ti'bn (Num. xxii. 14, 16 ; Eccles. vi. 8, 9), Imp. pi iisfl-i (Jer.
li. 50). On the contrary, Perf Kal is always T^bri, Part. T\?i^, Inf. abs.
"^ibrj, Piiil T^^H) Hithp. T^trrlr) ; so that a "^ nowhere appears decisively
as the first radical. An obsolete stem T^b^ is commonly assumed, how-
ever, for the explanation of the above forms ; though, in a word of so
frequent use, the stem with the feeble breathing T]bii may itself be sup-
posed to have admitted those forms, after the analogy indeed of verbs
"I'a. Comp. also the feeble NS forms, e. g. "'btn from btjj (§ 68, 2), like
labF] from "r^bn ; Impf Hiph. n'n''^i< from 'nnst,' like na'^bix 2 Kings vi. 16
from Ti^rt.
§70.
FEEBLE VEEBS "I'S.
Second Class, or Verbs properly ''S.
(E. g. Da"^ to be good. Parad. L.)
The most essential points of difference between verbs properly
■'S and verbs '^B are the following :
126 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
1. Kal has only the stronger formation described in § 69, 1,
namely, that in which the radical ^ remains. Inf. 3b';', with the
Inipf. A, as ny^, fp"'^ ; with retracted tone, the Pattach becomes
Seghol, as f'i^'^'Tl. and he aiooke Gen. ix. 24, IIS'^^'I (from 12?"'';') and
he formed Gen. ii. 7,
2. In Hiphil the "^ is pronounced as a diphthongal e ( Tsere),
and is regularly written fully, e. g. ^'^p'^n (for Dip';'!!), Impf.
31'J''.'^ ; seldom with the diphthong ai, ay, as in 'lI'^T!?^!;' they make
straight Prov. iv. 25 ; Ps. v. 9, Gt^ri.
The following are the only verbs of this kind : '2'^'^ to be good, pJ"; to
suck, ■J'p'; to awake, is; to form, hh^ Hiph. b^b-^n to bewail, ir;; to be
straight.
Of the Impf. Hiph. there are some anomalous forms with preforma-
tives attached to the ScZ pers. b'lb; ; as b'^b;^';! he wails, b'lbl^x / wail,
^^■^b;;?! ye xcail, Is. xv. 2; Ixv. 14; Jar. xlviii. 31; Hos. vii. 14; and
besides, n^ta^'^ Job xxiv. 21 ; once even in Impf. Kal Si'i^"] Ps. cxxxviii. 6
from 'S'Yi . This anomaly was caused by mistaking, from a superficial
view the Yodh of the simple form for a part of the stem.
§71.
VERBS IS.
Third Class, or Contracted Verbs "^S.
Here are reckoned those verbs ''S of the first and second
classes, whose Yodh is not resolved into a vowel, but is assimi-
lated like a Nun. In some verbs this is the invariable usage,
e. g. 5?2;;i to spread under, Hiph. ^'^^n, Hoph. ^^T^\ ; in'l'^ to burn
up, Impfiy^"}, Hiph. Ti'^^t} • in others, such sharpened forms
occur along with the weaker ones of the first and second classes,
e. g. ps; to po7ir, Impf pk^i and p2^] (1 Kings xxii. 35) ; '^T^ to
form, Impf nit-i^T and "i^^ (Is. xHv. 12; Jer. i. 5); m»;i to be
straight, Impf ^t^*! and 'r^'} (1 Sam. vi. 12).
The learner may easily mistake these for forms of a verb 'S ; and
when such an one is not found in the lexicon, he should look for a
verb ""S .
The Paradigms jffand L exhibit the characteristic forms of the first
and second classes ; those of the third conform wholly to verbs fs, ami
are, moreover, of very rare occurrence.
^72. VERBS I'sJ. 127
§72.
FEEBLE VERBS ^'b.
(E. g. 0>ip to rise up. Paradigm M.)
1. The middle stem-letter 1 gives up its consonant sound in
these verbs (with the exception of a few stems, see Rem. 10),
and is lost in the sound of the chief vowel of the form ; and this
not only in the more usual cases (§ 24, 1) where Sh'^va precedes
or follows, as TlJi2 hosh for ICiS b^vosh, but also where the Vav
stands between two full vowels, as Dip Part. Pass, for Dip, Dip
Inf. abs. for Dip. The stem is, therefore, always monosyllabic.
2. The vowel of the stem thus contracted is, essentially, the
vowel of the second syllable, which almost every where, in the
verb, contains the characteristic of the form (§ 67, 2). This
vowel, by its union with the Vav, gains greater fullness and
stability ; e. g. Inf. and Itnp. Dip for Dip. It cannot, therefore,
be displaced ; but it may be shortened, as in ri'Qp (with short a)
from Dp, and in the Jussive Impf. oi Hiph. Dp^ shortened from
D^P;^ (from D^lp^).
The Pe?f. Kal, in intransitive verbs middle E, takes the
form tra (from ill's) he is dead; and in verbs middle O, the
form lii5 (from "liSJ) luxit, 1213 (from ffiis) he ivas ashamed.
Comp. Rem. 1.
3. The preformatives in the Impf. Kal and Peif. Niph. and
throughout H'iph. and Hoph., which before the monosyllabic
stem form a simple syllable, take instead of the short vowel of
the regular form the corresponding long one (§27,2). E.g.
Dlp^* for Dip^ ; D^pH for D^lpH ; Dpin for DIpH.
This vowel is mutable, and becomes ShH'a when the tone is thrown
forward ; e. g. before suff. ^Jniri"^ he will kill him, and in the full plural
form of the Impf. 'iniri'i they will die.
The only exception is the ^ in Hophal, which has become a firm and
unchangeable vowel ; as if, by the transition of 1 to the first syllable.
D^pri had become Cplti, and then Cl^in.
4. In some cases, forms of the regular verb not now in use
lie at the foundation of those of which we are treating. E. g.
Impf Kal Dip;! for Dip;? (see § 67, 6), Part. Dp , either for Dip
(after b'Jp , the original form of btsp , Chald. and Arab, qutel, § 9,
* For the a sound under the preforuiative, see No. 4.
128 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
10, 2, and § 50, 2), or for 01)5 (after the form of the verbal adjec-
tive btpip, comp. § 84, No. 1. Those which conform to the regular
Hebrew verb, are generally the most unfrequent, as tCiD"^ (after
the form TiJiS';!), The o in Nlph. comes from loa (= ?m), as DIpS
from D^I??, hn})/. Dip>^ from ^y^'^.
5. In the Perf. Niph. and Hij)h. the harshness of pronuncia-
tion in such forms as J^'JSipS, Pi'Opri, is avoided by the insertion
of i before the affbrmatives of the first and second person. For
the same purpose '^~ is inserted in the Inipf. Kal before the ter-
mination nS (comp. § 67, 4). These inserted syllables take the
tone and shorten the preceding vowels, as Q^p?, tii^^p? ; CpDj
riibipn, or i^i'a^pH, also riiiapn ; np'b^pn.
But in some cases the harder forms, without the inserted syllable,
are also in use. Thus Impf. Kal ^ptliln Ez. xvi. 55 (also nj'^^'iun in the
same verse); somewhat oftener in Iliph., as npisEri Ex. xx. 25, but also
inis-^jn Job xxxi. 21, njaBln Job xx. 10, once i^J^'^pn Jer. xliv. 25. The
Imp. has only the harder form ■^J'sp , tijXJ^ii.
6. The tone, as in verbs ^y, is not thrown forward upon the
afTormatives n_, ^, ''_, as STap, ^'Op, except in the full plural
form l^'aip';' . On the accentuation of i and "i— , see No. 5. Where
these are not inserted, the accentuation is regular, as ri'Qp ; so
always in Hophal, as n'apin,
7. The conjugations Piel, Pual, and Hithpael are very sel-
dom found in feeble verbs 1^. The only instance in which 1
appears as a consonant is ^.vl? to stirround, the Piel of 1^^ (but
see Rem. 10). In some others 1 has become '^, as in d))p from
Dip, 3.^n from iirt ; a formation which belongs to the later He-
brew, having been borrowed from the Aramaean. On the con-
trary, the unfrequent conjugation Pilel (§ 55, 2), with its passive
and reflexive, is the common form employed in the signification
of Piiil and as a substitute for it. E. g. Q^ip to raise uj), from
Dip; Diail to elevate, Pass. D'ai■^, from Dll ; TliS^fin to rouse
one^s self, from "11^. Less frequent is the conjugation Pilpel
(§ 55, 4), e. g. ^3^3 to sustain, to nourish, from biS.
Remarks.
I. On Kal.
N. B. 1. Of verbs middle E and O, which in the regular verb also
have their Perf. and Part, the same (§ 50, 2), the following are exam-
ples; viz. Perf. ria (for W^) he is dead, 1st sing, •'in^, Istplur. liH'a,
%'72. VERBS IS. 129
2d phir. ^T\h; iria (for laia) he was ashamed, "^PiitJl, I3iaa, viJia ;
"lix he has shined ; Part, na dead ; D'^IlJia ashamed Ez. xxxii. 30.
The form DJ? . as Perf. and as Part., is very seldom written with K
(the Arabic orthography), as BXj5 Hos. x. 14, D'^tJNb despising Ez.
xxviii. 24, 26, comp. xvi. 57. The Part, has rarelythe Ibrm Dip instead
of Dp 2 K. xvi. 7, and even with transitive signification, as tiib occultans
Is. XXV. 7 ; Zech. x. 5.
2. In the Inf. and /hi/), of some verbs, 1 always quiesces in Cholem,
as Xia, aiw, "lix. In most verbs, however, it quiesces only in Shia^eq;
but even in these the Inf. absol. has i in the final syllable (after the
form ^113)5), as laiip^ Dip surgendo surgent Jer. xliv. 29. Those verbs
which have i in the hif. retain it in the Imp/., as xia"; he will come. In
one verb alone the preformatives of the Impf. have Tsere, viz. ttJia,
Imp/, ^ia;; (for TiJia";). See No. 4.
3. In the Imp. with afformatives {'''O^p , ^"n^b) the tone is on the
penultima, with a few exceptions as in Judges v. 12. The lengthened
form, on the contrary, has the tone usually on the last syllable (rtatip ,
iiaiittj) with a few exceptions where the word is Milel (Ps. vii. 8 ; Jer.
iiL 12 ; xl. 5).
N. B. 4. The shortened Imp/, as Jussive (§ 48, 4) has the form Dpi
(very seldom Dip^, Dp^). E. g. au5|; lei him return Deut. xx. 5-8;
aiD'j bx let him not return Ps. Ixxiv. 21 ; T^b'^) 1 Kings xxi. 10 and lei
him die; in poetic language, as Indicative, d'"i1|. Din, he, it shall be high,
Num. xxiv. 7 ; Micah v. 8. With Vav consecutive, and before words of
one syllable, the tone is also drawn back upon the penultima, and the
vowel of the last syllable is shortened to Qameis-chaiuph, as Dj^^i,
T]^ D|5'; Job xxii. 28. In Pause, however, the tone remains on the last
syllable, as nb^l ; comp. Gen. xi. 28, 32, with v. 5, 8. With a guttural
or a Resh, the final syllable may take Patiach, e. g. "iD*i and he turned
aside Ruth iv. 1 (from "ilD).
The full plural-ending 'i^i has the tone (according to No. 6 of this sec-
tion) ; hence ■jWJSPi Gen. iii. 3, 4, I^ID^IS': Ps. civ. 7, )A:i^'\'! Joel ii. 4, 7, 9.
II. On Niphal.
5. Anomalous forms are : Perf. Dni^'s? ye have been scattered Ez. xi.
17 ; XX. 34, 41, 43 ; Inf. constr. irsi'^n Is. xxv. 10. Comp. Rem. 9.
III. On Hiphil.
6. Examples of the Perfect without the inserted i: t\ti\r\ thou wavest
Ex. XX. 25 ; nn^n thou killest, and even Dnart Num. xvii. 6, &c.
7. In the Imp., besides the shortened form Dpli, occurs also the
lengthened one T^io'^pii .
N. B. The shortened Impf has the form Dp^, as IG^'J that he may
take away Ex. x. 17. With Vav consecutive the tone falls back upon
the penultima, as W^^"] ; ys^l and he scattered. The final syllable
when it has a guttural or Resh takes Patiach, as in Kal, e. g. ^0)^1 and he
removed Gen. viii. 13.
9
130 PART II, PARTS OF SPEECH.
V. In General.
8. On account of the intimate relation between verbs liy and /s (§ 67)
it is necessary, in analyzing ibrms, to note particularly the points in
whicli these classes differ. Several forms are exactly the same in both,
6. g. Imjif. Kal with Vav consecutive ; Pilel of IS and PoH of SJJ . Hence
it is that they often borrow forms from one another, as in Kal TS he
despised (Per/, of T^a, as if from TT3) Zech. iv. 10, ntt he besmeared (for
nra) Is. xliv. 18.
9. In common with verbs s's" (§ 67, 5), those of this class have in
Niphal and Hiphil the Chaldee and Rabbinic formation, which has,
instead of the long vowel under the preformatives, a short one followed
by Daghesh forte. This form and the common one are often both in use.
E. g. ri^Sii to incite, Imp/. rr^S"! (also riiGH, n^D^) ; inj;T and he shows
the way 2 Sam. xsii. 33 (and in"; Prov. xii. 26) ; sometimes with a dif-
ference of signification, as n"^3.fn to cause to rest, to give rest, H'''?'!) Impf.
niiD to set down, to lay down ; Y^l to spend the nighty to abide ; yh^_ ,
'I'liiig, to he headstrong, rebellions. Other examples: Niph. bi523 (from
h'TQ, not ^535) to he circumcised Gen. xvii. 26, 27; xxxiv. 22, with a
guttural nis'S Zech. ii. 17 ; Hij)h. ^"'•tn to despise Lam. i. 8, ^T^^;] they
depart Prov. iv. 21.
Here, too, may be classed some forms of verbs Pe guttural with
Daghesh forte implied, which others would derive from a stem of a dif-
ferent form, or emend ; viz. '0'nv\'\ for ^nnl and she hastens (from tJW)
Job xxxi. 5, us'^i, OSPil 1 Sam. xv. 19 ; xxv. 14, from '^^S , 1:12) to rush
upon.
10. Verbs whose middle stem-letter remains a consonant Vav are, in
respect to this letter, perfectly regular. E. g. ^in to he white, Impf.
"i^l!! j "^Vi to expire, Impf 3']^''_ ; particularly all verbs that are also 'rib,
as ri'iS, PiM nj^ to command, njp to wait, &c. .
§73.
FEEBLE VERBS '^'S?.
(E. g. I'^a to perceive. Paradigm N.)
1. These verbs have the same structure as verbs 13^, and then*
1 is treated in the same manner as the 1 of that class. E. g.
Ferf. Kal ma (for X^y^J) he has set, Inf. n^llj, Inf. absol. n-'T^ (for
n'lTZJ), Imp. mo. Impf. i^'^V'^, Jussive ^V.'^, with Vav cons. ntD^n.
But the Perf. Kal has, in several verbs, still a second set of
forms, which resemble a Hiphil shortened at the beginning, e. g.
inirn (same as inirnn) Dan. ix. 2, also ^33 Ps. cxxxix. 2, rii:3''n
thou contendest Job xxxiii. 13, also PiS'1 Lam. iii. 58. Often also
full forms of Hiphil occur, e. g. Perf. ^^n, Dnis^nn, Ivf. ]^nn
(also ^^3), Imp. "j^n (also ^^3), Part. V^^ j so likewise l^n^ (also
.1: §73. VERBS "^S. 131
^n), U^tSIZ setting (also DTI?), f'^Sia glittering^ also in Perf. f2.
Moreover, as Passive we find a few times Hoiih. Imjif. ItO^"^
*from "liT» ^0 sing^ ntj^"' from nip ^o set.
2. These Hiphil forms are as easily traced to verbs lb, and
may in part belong strictly to that class. The same is true of
Niph. 1123, Pil. ].:^:3 and Hithpalel l.sisnn (is if from 1^3). In
every respect, these verbs are closely related to verbs lb. Hence,
several verbs occur, proraiscuousl}^ and in the same signification,
as iy and "'y ; e. g. ^h {denoin. from b^b) to spend the night, Inf.
also )^b ; D^TJ? to set, Inf. also DW, l7?ipf. D^©;^, once DITS;^. In
other verbs one of the two is the predominant form, as b^a to exult
(bl5 only in Prov. xxiii. 24). But few are exclusively ''V, as riiTp
to set, I'^l to contend, iD'^iZ) to rejoice ; to which should be added
bs (in Arabic middle Yodh) to contain, to measure Is. xl. 12,
and the denom. f j5 (from y^J?) to summer Is. xviii. 6.
The older grammarians did not recognize this class of verbs, but
referred all the forms to verbs 13? . This may, in some instances, be
quite right ; the later Arabic has an exactly corresponding abbreviation
of the Hiphil (Conj. IV) in verbs IS. On the contrary, the Arabic, as
well as ^thiopic, has also actual verbs "'S; nor is the Hebrew without
such, in which Yodh even retains its consonant power, as a^N to hale,
and Ji;;^ tofainl. There is certainly to be assumed a vacillation among
etems so nearly related, and encroachment of one upon the other.
The Paradigm N is placed in connection with that of verbs IS, iu
order to exhibit more clearly the parallelism of the two classes. The
conjugations which are omitted in it, have the same form as in Para-
digm M.
Remarks.
1. Examples of the Inf. ahsol. are 2'i liligando Judges xi. 25, PtlJ
ponendo Is. xxii. 7, but also a'^'i Jer. 1. 34.
2. The shortened Impf. is '2^ ; with retracted tone it takes the form
ii 3"!^ Judges vi. 31. So with Vav conseciUive, ciu^l and he set. "a'^i
and he perceived.
3. As Pari. act. Kal we find once "jb passing the night Neh. xiii. 21 ;
Part. pass. n"'b or D>ib (a various reading) 2 Sam. xiii. 32.
4. Verbs i<S retain the consonant-sound of their X almost invariably,
and hence are irregular only as represented in § 64. Of its quiescence
in these verbs there are, however, some examples ; as 11N; thei are
beautiful Is. lii. 7 (from nxj) ; j\sj^ he blooms, Impf. Hiph. from y^},
for y»i''_, Eccl. xii. 5. [§ 2372].
132 PART n. PARTS OP SPEECH.
§74.
FEEBLE YEEBS Xb.
(E. g. N2?3 to find. Paradigm O.)
The i5 appears here, as in verbs SS, partly as a consonant
with a soft guttural sound (scarcely audible at the end of a word),
partly as a quite inaudible (quiescent) letter, according to the
following rules :
1. In those forms which end with the third radical, the final
syllable has always the regular vowels, e. g. iiSb, iiSt'Q, i^lSia,
X'12'an ; but Pattach before the feeble letter S? is lengthened into
Qa7nets (§23, 1), viz. in the Peiif. Imjjf. and Imj). Kal, in the
Peiif. Niph.^ Piial, and Hoj)h. The (J however is mutable
(§ 25, 2, Rem.), hence in the plural 1i<^)3\
The Imp/, and Imp. Kal have A, after the analogy of verbs Lamedh
guttural.
2. Also before afformatives beginning with a consonant (ri, D)
N is not heard. The vowel which precedes it in the Per/. Kal
is Qamets, f)S5^^ ; in the Pej'f. of all the other conjugations it
is Tsere^ ^^^''3? ; in the Imp. and Inipf. of all the conjugations
it is Seghol, ^i?X^12, HSKS^n.
The Tsere and Seghol of these forms arose doubtless from the close
resemblance of these verbs to the nb class (comp. § 75, 2), and from an
approximation to the latter.
Before the suffixes ?], C3, 13, the S< retains its character as a gut-
tural, and takes (-.-); as ?^i<^'aJ? Cant. viii. 1, ?]X'naii Ez. xxviii. 13, comp.
§ 65, 2, Rem. The reason (as in verbs Lamedh guttural) is, that those
suffixes require before them a half-vowel.
3. Before afformatives beginning with a vowel, i< remains a
consonant, and the form is regular, as ^i^S'a.
A complete view of the inflection is given in Farad. O.
Remarks.
1. Verbs middle E, like 6<^a to befidl, retain Tsere in the other per
sons of the Per/., as *irixb». Instead of f^^<S^ is sometimes found the
Aramaean form Hif^i? for nx'ip she names Is. vii. 14 ; comp. Gen. xxxiii.
11 (after the form n^lfi^, § 44,'^Rem. 4).
2. In the Inf. occurs the/e??i. form rxba to fill Lev. xii. 4, for r^'^a
3. The Part. fern, is commonly, by contraction, ^X2b, more rarely
nxsb Cant. viii. 10, and without N (see Rem. 4) nsi'i (from NS^) Deut.
xxviii. 57. In the forms n^xa'n peccantes I Sam. xiv. 33, and UX'i'3.
§15. VERBS fi'b. 133
feigning them Neh. vi. 8, the vowel is drawn back in the manner of the
Syriac [§ 23, 2].
4. The N sometimes falls away, as in ^^'^'3 Num. xi. 11, '^ri.^a Job
xxxii. 18. Niph. Ofip^i ye are defiled Lev. xi. 43. Hiph. "'^tyl^ Jer.
xxxii. 35.
See the Remarks on verbs rfb, No. VI.
§75.
FEEBLE VERBS ^b
'E. g. nba to reveal. Paradi^rm P.)
These verbs, like those ''S (§§69, 70), embrace iwo different
classes of the irregular verb, viz. ''b and lb, which in Arabic, and
especially iEthiopic, are still more clearly distinguished. In
Hebrew the original ■" and 1 have given place to a feeble H, as a
representative of a closing vowel-sound (§ 23, 4), in all those
forms which end with the third radical. Hence they are called
in Hebrew verbs nb ; e. g. nb5 for "b^ he has revealed, nbl^ for
ibis he has rested. By far the greater number of these verbs are
originally "^b ; only a few forms occur of verbs lb. The two
classes are therefore less prominently distinguished than verbs
IS and ^S.
A true verb lb is nbo tn be at rest, whence "iniibii; , Pai^t. ibia , and
the derivative nibl2i rest; yet in the Impf. it has I'^HlJi'^ (with Yodh).
In njy (Arab. "3") to ansioer, and HD^ (Arab. 13S) to suffer, to he op-
pressed, are two verbs originally distinct, but with the same form in
Hebrew (see Geseuius^ Lex. art. i^J^). In Syriac the intermingling of
these forms is carried still farther, verbs 5<b also being confounded with
those tib, i. e. with the two classes "lb and "^b of the Arabic.
Wholly different are those verbs whose third stem-letter is a conso-
nant M (distinguished by Mappiq) ; e. g. ri^a to be high. They are
inflected throughout like verbs Lamedh gidtural. It is certain, how-
ever, that some feeble verbs rtb originated in verbs with final t^, this
letter having lost its original strong and guttural sound, and become
softened to s. feeble ti, e.g. f^ns, Arab, ttns to be blunt. Hence it is
that verbs nb are sometimes related to those rib, for which the verb tnb
may be assumed as an intermediate form ; e. g. tl^j? and rn2i|D to be hard.
nns properly = nns to be open.
The grammatical structure of these verbs (whi«ii Paradigm
P exhibits) is as follows :
1. The original Yodh or Vav, in all forms which end with
the third radical, gives place to H as a vowel-letter, which repre-
134 PAET II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
sents the closing vowel. This vowel is the same in each fonn
through all the conjugations, namely :
In all the Perfects, n_ : nbjl , nb^D , n'55 , (fee.
In all the Imperfects and Participles Active, n_ : nb!J';i, Jlbij,
(fee.
In all the Imperatives, 51— : nbs , 71^3 , (fee.
In the Inf. absol. (except in Hiph. and Hoj>h., Rem. 13), H— :
n'ba, (fee.
The Part. Pass. Kal forms the only exception, in which the
original "^ appears at the end, "^^^5, as also in some derivatives
(§85, Y).
The Inf. const?', has always the feminine form in T\, viz. in
Kal nib5, in Piel ni>a, (fee.
In explanation of these forms we observe :
That in the Per/. Kal, fiba stands for "'^a according to § 24. 2, c ; so
in Niph. and Hophal. Piel and Hithp. are based on the forms bssp ,
^ai^nn {§ 52, Rem. 1), Hiph. on the form baprt after the manner of the
Arabic aqtala (§ 53, 1).
The Impf. Kal., i^^?"^, is an Impf. A for "^bs'^ (according to § 24, 2,
Rem. a), whence also are such plural forms as ^"'bs';! (see Rem. 4). The
same is true of the other conjugations, all of which have, even in the
regular verb, in connection with the usual form, another with Pattach
in the final syllable. See § 51, Rem. 2, § 54, Rem.
The Tsere of the Imp. l^ba is, at any rate, a shorter vowel than the
accented Seghol, with its broader sound, in the Impf. nba^ ; comp. the
construct state of nouns in n^:, § 89. 2. c.
2. Before the afformatives beginning with a consonant (tl, 2),
the original "^ remains, but not as a consonant. Properly it would
here form with the foregoing u. {Pattach) the diphthong ai ;
which, however, in the Perf., is first contracted into e i^—) and
then farther attenuated into « (§27, Rem. 1), but in the Impf
and Impt. passes into the broad and obtuse "^-^ . Thus in Perf
Piel, from T^'j''^^ (after J?'?^)?) comes first S^'^^S, and then by atten-
uating the e into i H'^^S ; in the Impf Piel np^JH. In the pas-
sives the e is always retained ; in the actives of the derived con-
jugations and in the reflexives e and i are both used (see Rem. 7,
0, and 13) ; but in Kal (the most frequent of all), only i is found.
Accordingly :
The Perfect of Kal has i, as T)^^^ ;
Perfects of the other active as well as reflexive conjugations have
promiscuously e and i, as ri'^^S and riiJii ;
§Y6. VERBS nil. 135
Perfects of the Passives have only e, as 'D'^f^ ;
Imperfects and Imperatives have always '^—, as <"ip?3, JlS'i^Stn.
In Arabic and ^Ethiopic, the diphtbongal forms have every where
resisted contraction, which talves place only as an exception and in the
popular idiom. In Chaldee and Syriac. the contracted forms prevail,
though the Syriac has e. g. ri';i^5 in Kal, and so also the Chald. along
with niba.
3. Before the afformatives beginning with a vowel (^, ''— , <^— ),
the Yodh, together with the preceding vowel, is usually displaced,
e. g. ^b5 (for l^ba), ^b^n C^^b-^n), Part. fern, nba, j)hir. O^bh ; yet
it remains in ancient full forms, particularly in pause, as '^^^'y'}
(see Rem. 4 and 12). Before suffixes also it falls away, as ^b3
(Rem. 19).
4. The Yodh disappears also in the 3cZ Perf. sing, f em., when
D— is appended as feminine ending, namely rib5. But this an-
cient form is become rare (see Rem. 1) ; and to this mark of the
gender, as if it were not sufficiently clear, a second feminine
ending H— . has been appended, so as to form nriba. So in all
conjugations, e. g. Hiph. nb^n, common form nrib^fi, in pause
nnbsin.
See analogous cases in § 70, Rem., § 91. 3.
5. The formation of the shortened Imperfect, which occurs
in all the conjugations, is strongly marked in verbs of this class,
and consists in casting away the •!— , by which still other chan-
ges are occasioned in the form (see Rem. 3, 8, 10, 15). A short-
ened hnperative is also formed, in some conjugations, by apocope
of then- (Rem. 11, 15).
Remarks.
I. On Kal.
1. In the 3fZ Perf. fern, the older and more simple form rts (from
f^-H' comp. the verb xb, § 74, Rem. 1), is almost entirely banished
from common use (see above, No. 4). An example of it is nbs she
makes Lev. xxv. 21. So in Hiph. and IJoph., e. g. t'^'nti she paijs, Lev.
xxvi. 34, f^bsn she is carried captive, Jer. xiii. 19. But with suffixes it
is always used, see Rem. 19.
.2. The Inf. absol. has also the form iX'n videndo Gen. xxvi. 28. As
Inf. constr. occurs, rarely, Mit"! Gen. xlviii. 11, nl!JX 1. 20, or i'lU? xxxi.
28, as well as the feminine form fijiii^ io see Ez. xxviii. 17, like nbap
) 45, 2. letter b.
N. B. 3. The shortening of the Impf. (see above. No. 5). occasions
in Kal the foUowinsr chancres :
136 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
a) The first stem-letter most commonly takes the helping-vowel Seghol,
or, when the middle radical is a guttural, Pattach (§28,4). E. g. bs^
for \TI '■> "?!^ ^'^'^ /'6 built ; 5?ui^ let him look, for "liJV
6) The Chireq of the preformative is also sometimes lengthened into
Tsere (because it is now in an open syllable), as N"!7. ^^^ ^'■'^'"' ^^^ from
nx'n , tnsni from ntiB ^0 become weak.
c) Elsewhere, and chiefly in the cases mentioned in § 28, 4, the helping-
vowel is sometimes omitted ; e. g. S'iJ'I'T and he took captive Num.
xxi. 1, t)^J^ and he drank, Tjl'^l and he wept. The verb ns<T has the
two forms S<"j^ hi him see, and XI^T and he saiB, the latter with
Pattach on account of the Resh.
d) Examples of verbs which are Pe guttural (§ 58) as well as Lamedh
He: ias'^i and he made, from niUS, "]»''! and he answered, from nSS.
Sometimes the punctuation of the first sy..able is not affected by the
guttural ; as in in*^i and it burnt, 'jn''nl and he encamped, 'nn^ (with
Dag. lene in second radical) let him rejoice Job iii. 6.
e) The verbs n^fi to be, and ti^n to lire, which would properly have in
the shortened //?!/j/! I^l, I'll?; change these forms to "'ft'} and '^n'^,
the Yodh drawing the i sound to itself, and uniting with it in a long i
(comp. the derivative nouns "'Da for '^32, i3^ for "^^i', &c., §84, No. V).
From nitn to be occurs once the form x^in'i for W^ he will be Eccles.
xi. 3. "
With J'av consecutive occur not unfrequently the fall forms (viz.
without apocope of the n— ), especially in the first person, and in the
later books ; e. g. nx'^X^! and I saw (in twenty places, but not in the
Pentateuch), n'^?^5 <^"<^ ^^ made (four times).
4. The original "^ sometimes remains also before the aiformatives
beginning with a vowel (comp. No. 3. above), especially in and before
the Pause, and before the full plural ending )A — . or where for any rea-
son an emphasis rests upon the word. Petf. n^ori she takes refuge Ps.
Ivii. 2, si-^on Deut. xxxii. 37 ; Imp. !iii"3 ask ye Is. xxi. 12 ; Impf. "i'^-'^T.
they increase Deut. viii. 13, more frequently like "^""FiiiJ^ '^*^^ drink Ps.
Ixxviii. 44 (comp. Rem. 12).
5. The Part. act. has also a fern, of the form nijai:;: spying Prov.
xxxi. 27, n^-iis fruitful Ps. cxxviii. 3, in the Plur. like m'nix coming
(things) Is. xli. 23. The Part. pass, is sometimes without "> , as ^bS for
•'Vas made Job xli. 25, >isa xv. 22.
6. Rare are such defectively written forms as ri^«^ 2 Sam. xv. 33,
njiysn Job v. 12, and the pronunciation n3iX"in Mic. vii. 10.
II. On Niphal.
1. In the Perf. 1st and 2d pers., besides the Ibrme with '^-^ are found
others with '^— :; as ^li'^b'jJ 1 Sam. xiv. 8, Pi^pJD Gen. xxiv. 8.
8. The apocope of the Impf. occasions no other change than the
rejection of n-;;, as PJI' from J^V.^"? 5 but in a verb S guttural we find a
Ibrm with ( — ) shortened to (^r), viz, ns"] (for na'^) Ps. cix. 13. Simi-
§75. VERBS n"i). 137
lar in PUl is ^Stn (ti-oni 'T^Sf?) Ps. cxli, 8, and in Hithp. S'lrin (from
nsnnn) Prov. xxii. 24.
III. On Piel, Piial, and Hithpael.
9. In the Per/. Piel, the second syllable has the less prolonged
Chireq instead of the diphthongal '^— in the greater number of examples,
as n'^B'7, ■^P'^'^ip?, and always before suffixes, e.g. n3n"'3^ Ps. xliv. 20.
In the Paradigm, the older form with "^-n- is placed first. Hithp. has "i — .
but sometimes also ^— (Ps. xxvi. 10; IK. ii. 26 ; Jer. 1. 24); Pual, on
the contrary, always retains '^— .
10. The Lnpf. loses, after the apocope, the Daghesh forte of the
second stem-letter (comp. § 20, 3, a) ; hence Piel l^'^l and he com-
manded ; Hithp. bsn^l and he uncovered himself Gen. ix. 21. Less fre-
quently is the Pattach then lengthened into Qameis, as in^^ and he
scrawled 1 Sam. xxi. 14, ixri'^ he desires Ps. xlv. 12. Comp. Rem. 8.
11. In Piel and Hithp. are found also apocopated forms of the Imp.,
as D3 for n&5 prove Dan. i. 12 ; bnnrt /e/g-?! thyself sick 2 Sam. xiii. 5.
12. Examples of Yodh retained in cases wliere more commonly it is
omitted : Impf. '^31153'in will ye liken me Is. xl. 25, i^^pa'^ they cover
them Ex. xv. 5.
IV. On Hiphil and Hophal.
13. In the Perf Hiph. the forms ni^.?in and n^^?"! are about equally
common; before suffixes the latter is used as somewhat shorter than the
other. In the Paradigm, the older form with "i— is placed first. Hoph.
has always '^-^_.
14. In the Inf. absol. Hiph. ?^^3v] Tsere is the regular vowel (as in
bispn) ; but to this the Inf. absol. Hoph. also conforms, as in ni]a" Lev.
xix. 20. The verb nan to multiply, has three forms of the Inf. Hiph., viz.,
nanri much (used adverbially), na";ri used when the Inf. is pleonastic
[see § 131, 3, a], ma"ir! the Inf. constr. Comp. Gen. xli. 49 ; xxii. 17 ;
Deut. xxvili. 63.
15. The shortened Impf Hiph. has either the form "^"^^ let him subdue
Is. xli. 2, BS^ let him enlarge Gen. ix. 27, piiJ^l! and he watered, or (with
a helping-vowel) b^7. (for ^^;;) ; as b^^l and he carried captive 2 Kings
xviii. 11. "iS"1 and. he made fruitful Ps. cv. 24. Examples with guttu-
rals : bi'^l Num. xxiii. 2, ^?Xi, &c., which can be distinguished from the
Impf. Kal only by the signification. The Imp. apoc. has invariably
the helping-vowel Seghol or Pattach, as nnn mnltiply, for S^ifli •^5";^
Ps. li. 4 [C^ri], q'nn rfesis^ for l^-in , nenn Deut. ix. 14, b?n for nbsn
Ex. xxxiii. 12.
16. The Impf. with Yodh retained occurs only in ')!i''5n Job xix. 2,
from nj^
V. /?i General.
17. In the Aramaean, where, as before remarked, the verbs X b and
nb flow into one another, both classes terminate, in the Impf and Part.
of all the conjugations, without distinction, in X-^- or '^-^. As imitations
138 PAKT IL PARTS OF SPEECH.
of this mode of formation we are to regard lliose forms of the Inf.^ Imp.
and Impf. in n— , more seldom X— and i— , which are found in Hebrew
also, especially in the later writers and the poets. Inf. Ti'^^ti, to be Ez.
xxi. 15 ; Imp. Nin he thou Job xxxvii. 6 ; Impf. 'n'^ptrh^ jer. xvii. 17,
xah-bx folloxo not Prov. i. 10, nbrn'^X do not 2 Sam. xiii. 12 ;* Piel Inf.
isn Hos. vi. 9.
The ending in ^— occurs (also a Syriasm), in place of ti— in the
Impf. Kal. as "^itPi^ Jer. iii. 6, and even (according to others) in place
of n— in the Perf. Hiph. "^^nt^. he made sick Is. iiii. 10 ; comp. the Plur.
l*'pBf7 they caused to melt Jos. xiv. 8.
■"8. In three verbs is found the unfrequent conjugation PileU or its
reflexive (§ 55, 2), Avhere the third radical, which the conjugation re-
quires to be doubled, appears under the form m ; viz. ^1X3, contracted
njN3 to he beaut fid, from nX3 ; Diini:?: the archers Gen. xxi. 16 ; but
especially nniy to boiv, Pilel iiind, hence the reflexive ninniun to how
one^s self to prostrate one's sef 2d per s. T^'^— and f)*''— , Impf nifirnii^,
apoc. sinn\a*1 for inn^''^ (analogous with '<n'i for "p^).
19. Before suffixes, in all forms ending with rt , the so-called union-
vowel (§ 58. 3, h) takes the place of in and of the preceding vowel ;
e.g. "liBs he ansivered me, t;?^, OiV, Impf "n?.?^, ^3?^, Hiph. ■'33n,
'^^S'.n- Very seldom "^-^ takes the place of the final M— : or ti— , as in
i^'iqD';' he will cover them, Ps. cxl. 10, "^Silfi smite me 1 Kings xx. 35.
The Zd Perf. fern, always retains before svff. the older form nbr> (see
No. 4), yet with a short a, as in the regular verb, e. g. tPi^S for "inn^S
Zech. V. 4 ; \n pause I3nb^ Job xxxiii. 4.
VI. Relation of Verbs til'b and x'b to each other.
20. The verbs of each of these classes, in consequence of their inti-
mate relation (see second paragraph of this section, and Rem. 17), often
borrow the forms of the other, especially in the usage of the poets and
of the later writers.
21. Thus there are forms of verbs x'b,
a) Which have adopted the vowels of verbs Tib, e.g. Perf. "^nN^s /
restrain Ps. cxix. 101 ; Part. XiiiPi sinning Eccles. ix. 18 ; viii. 12 ;
Piel Perf. sfep he fills Jer. li. 34J '^nxEn I heal 2 Kings ii. 21 ; Impf
ftS5';i he swalloweth Job xxxix. 24; Niph. Perf . fern. nnx^JEJ was ex-
traordinary (after nnb;;) 2 Sam. i. 26 ; Hiph. Perf. fern, nnxsnn she
concealed Jos. vi. 17.
6) Which retain their own vowels, but are written with n, e. g. Imp.
ns'i heal Ps. Ix. 4 ; Niph. !^?t^^! to hide one's self 1 Kings xxii. 25 ;
Piil Impf 'rk:q') he will fill Job viii. 21.
* The examples of the Lnpf. here quoted have the Jussive signification, and
their agreement in pronunciation with the Imp. (in the -^ common to both), can
certainly be exphiined on this ground. But this will not apply to other examples ;
and the reading, moreover, varies in most passages between — and -^. See Gen.
xxvi. 29 ; Lev. x^nii. 1 ; Jos. vii. 9 ; ix. 24 ; Dan. i. 13 ; Ez. v. 12.
§76. VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS. 139
c) Which in all respects have the appearance of verbs ri' b , e. g. nas
thou thirstest Ruth ii. 9 ; lb?3 they are full Ez. xxviii. 16 ; Inf. i'jri to
sin Gen. xx. 6 ; Impf npenn they heal Job v. 18 ; Part. fern. ^"T^
Eccles. X. 5 ; Part. pass. liiiUJ Ps. xxxii. 1 ; Niph. i^no")? Jer. li. 9 ;
Hithp. n"'33niri thou prophesiest 1 Sam. x. 6; Inf. niasnn 1 Sam.
X. 13. ' '
22. On the contrary there are forms of verbs rt"b which, in some
respects, follow the analogy of verbs x"b. E.g. in their consonants,
^Vii-l it is changed Lam. iv. 1 ; «311J 2 Kings xxv. 29 ; X^np and he was
sick 2 Chron. xvi. 12 ; in their vowels, nbsin 1 Kings xvii. 14 ; in both,
DilStbm 2 Sam. xxi. 12.
§ 76.
VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS.
1. Such are verbs which have two stem-letters affected by
the anomalies already described, with the exception of those
occasioned by gutturals. These verbs exhibit no new changes ;
and even in cases where two anomalies might occur, usage must
teach whether the verb is actually subject to both, or but one of
them, or, as sometimes happens, to neither.
Thus from Ti; tojlee are formed Impf "i'"^"^ Nah. iii. 7, and Tn"^ Gen.
xxxi. 40 (all;er the analogy of verbs '|2), Hiph. nsn (as a verb SS), but
in Impf. Hoph. I^;' (as IB).
2. The following are examples of doubly anomalous verbs,
and of difRcult forms derived from them :
a) Verbs 'iS and xb (comp. §§ 66 and 74) ; e. g. Xb; to bear, Imp. Xia,
Inf. conslr. nsb (for nxtj), also nxb (comp. § 74. Rem. 3), Impf. iisian
for njN'in Ruth i. 14.
b) Verbs ^S and !ib (comp. §§ 64 and 75), as naa to bend, iId; to smite.
Hence Impf Kal na^, apoc. is'^l and he bowed, t^l and t'^i and he
sprinkled (from nij) ; Perf. Hiph. nsn he smote, Impf ns";, apoc. T\2,
t^^V so also T''l ; Imp. i^'2'n , apoc. T\n smile ; Inf. m'Sii ; Part, MSa.
c) Verbs NS and n"b (comp. §§ 6S and 75), as nnsj to come, fiSX to bake.
Hence Impf. nsx"i, plur. ^lEJX", xn;^i Deut. xxxiii. 21 for nnN*_^ ; Impf
apoc. rx?:: Is. xii. 25 for P5<!1 ; Imp. ^lipx for ^inx. ^I'^rii* (§ 23, 3. Rem.
2, § 75, Rem. 4) ; Hiph. Imp. ^"^hq for >i"'nNn Is. xxi. 14 ; Impf. apoc.
i'S'il and he adjured 1 Sam. xiv. 24, from nbx .
d) Verbs ''"s and ii'h (comp. §§ 67, 70, and 74), as NS;| to go forth, Imp.
N^ , Inf. nxa , Hiph. xi:£in /o bring out.
e) Verbs "I's and Ti'b (comp. §§ 69, 70, and 75), e. g. rTi; to throw, in /ri/j/i.
to profess, to praise, properly l"s, and rrn'j to throw, ns;j to be beautiful,
140 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
which are really ''3. Inf. nn", nin^ ; Imp. >in'i ; Impf. ?|i*5, with
suff. n'i'i? \De shot at them (from iTi^), Num. xxi. 30 ; Piel ^I'n^l for
ii'n^l'ii (§69, Rem. 6); Hiph. tTiin "trnin, /jz/. nhin ; /mp/. n-iii,
apoc. "ii'»i .
/) Verbs IS and xb, particularly the verb Xia to come; Per/, xa, nX2,
once !l3a for >13i<a 1 Sam. xxv. 8 ; /fi>/t. Ni3fi , inxnn . and r kian ;
//?!/)/. "las for X'^ax Mic. i. 15; /??jj;. "^an Ruth iii. 15; /?bp/i. Pait.
xa^ia 2 K. xxii. 4. So ''3^ he refuses, Hiph. from X^D Ps. cxli. 5.
Deserving of notice also, §■) is the verb "^^ri i^o live, which is treated
as a verb sis, and hence has 1)1 in the 3d Perf Kal, Gen. iii. 22. In
Hebrew it occurs only in this form, the synonymous and kindred stem
iTin, as a verb iib. beinof the one in common use.
h77.
RELATION" OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS TO ONE ANOTHER.
1. Several classes of irregular verbs, e. g. those IS and ''S,
xb and Jib, iy and W, stand in a very intimate relationship, as
appears from the similarity in their meaning and inflection, from
the forms which they have in common, and from their mutual
interchange of forms. The relation is based, as a rule, on the
essential sameness of two firm stem-consonants, to which the
common signification attaches itself (the hiliteral root, § 30, 2),
the third weaker radical not being taken into account. Thus
1\y^ , -f ^1 , iiS'n all mean to smite, to beat in pieces ; ^15 and TlS
tojlee.
In this manner are related in form and signification,
1. Verbs IS and s'sJ (in which the essential stem-letters are the first
and last), e. g. T^>153 and T\^_^ to become poor; iti^iri and "OiTTa to feel, tr
touch; 1>13 and 113 to fee.
2. Verbs ^S and 'jS (in which the two last are the essential stem-
letters), both to each other and to the former class. They are related
to each other in the verbs as^ and as3 to place, ttJp: and 'iip^ (yaqosh)
to fowl; to the former class, especially to verbs 1», in "iia and "i3|^ to
fear; aia and ai2^ to be good ; n's'^ and fi'iQ to blow ; "j^BJ and y^B to
dash in pieces. Verbs XS are more seldom found connected with these
classes, as U^i< and D^;;; to be destroyed ; UJlit and 0*11 to thresh, &c.
3. Verbs xb and tib (in which the first two consonants properly form
the stem), both to each other and to (he former classes ; to each other
in N^'i and nM to crush; X"i|^ and tii;? to meet ; to verbs of the former
classes, in ns^ and "j^aia to suck, nni and Hill to thrust, &c.
§78. DEFECTRrE VERBS. 141
§78.
DEFECTIVE VEEBS.
It often happens, when two related hregular verbs are in use
in the same signification, that both are defective, i. e. do not
occur in all the verbal forms. As these, however, are not gene-
rally the same in both, the two taken together make out a perfect
verb, as in Greek tQ/Ojiiat, Aor. iiXi^ov, Fut. aXtvOojuai, and
m Latin, /ero, tuli, latum, f err e ; with this difference, that in
Hebrew these verbs are almost universally related in form as
well as signification, like the Greek ^aivco, Aor. 2 k^r]v\ from
the same stem ^cc-co.
Of these verbs the following are the most common :
laia to be ashamed, Hiph. tj-^an , but also d-^lsin (from UJn^), espe-
cially with the intransitive signification to feel shame.
aia to he good, Perf ma, Imjf. nai'i (from nD';i). Hiph. S'^ain
(from "y^J^).
^5; to fear. Impf ^^la; (from ^^la).
as^j and aS3 to place, neither used in Kal. Niph. :333 to stand.
Hiph. and Hoph. aisn and 32n . Hithp. as'^nn.
ySD to dash in pieces. Impf. f^ti'^ (from ysis). Imp. y^lQ . Niph.
yiSi . Piel yQ3 (from fDD). Pil. ysi's (from ysiQ). Befea:. ysisnri .
Hiph. ys_ri . Pilpel yssQ Job xvi. 12.
"i"is and i:£^ to he strait. Hence Perf. *ib ^^ I am in a strait, lit.
it is strait to me, from "I'nS. Impf. "i^;; (from "is;;) and ^S»1. Hiph.
■isn, "i:in, Zo hring into a strait, to distress. The related form "i^S is
transitive, <o press, hence to hesiege.
nniy to drink, used in ifaZ; but in Hiph. nj^ian i^o give to drink,
from nj^ia.
On T|^n ^0 g-o, see above, § 69, Rem. 8.
Rem. 1. The case is similar when different conjugations of the same
verb, having the same signification, borrow tenses from each other :
hbi he is able, b3>i"> Impf. Hoph., he will he able, used for Impf. Kal
which is wanting.
C]D;j he has added, borrows its Inf. and Impf from Hiph. Ci'^O'in.
TUas to approach. Perf Niph. 12353 for the Perf. Kal which is not in
use; but Impf "6^^^, Imp. ira, and Inf. nm, all in Kal.
Rem. 2. The early grammarians often speak o^ mixed forms (formis
viixtis) in which, as they maintain, are united the character and signifi-
cations of two tenses, genders, or conjugations. On correct grammatical
principles most of the examples adduced are at once set aside (e. g.
142 PART II. PAIITS OF SPEECH.
nDan;^ , § 47, Rem. 3) ; in others, the form seems to have originated in
misapprehension, e. g. T^^niDa thy hidlding Ez. xvi. 31 (where the
plural sufHx is appended to the ending ni, which had come to be
regarded as plural). Others again are merely false readings.
CHAPTER HI.
OF THE NOUN.
§79.
GENERAL VIEW.
1. In treating of i\\e formation of the noun, it s necessary tc
keep in view its relation to the verb, since most nouns may be
derived from verbs (namely, the 3c? sing. Perf. as the stem-form,
according to §30, I); and even those which are not, whether
primitives or derived from other nouns, follow the form and ana-
logy of the verbals. On this connection, moreover, is based the
explanation of the forms by which the gender of nouns is- distin-
guished (§ 80, comp. § 94).
The adjective agrees entirely with the substantive in form, though
it is manifestly only by a metaphor that forms with an abstract signifi-
cation can be treated as adjectives (§ 83, Rem. 1).
2. The Hebrew has no proper inflection of the noun by cases ;
some ancient, almost wholly extinct remains of case-endings
(§ 90) being barely traceable. The relation of case is either
known merely from the position of the noun in the sentence, or
is indicated by prepositions. The form of the noun suffers no
change ; and the subject belongs, therefore, to the Syntax. (See
§ 117.) On the contrary, the connection of the noun with suf-
fixes, with the feminine, dual, and plural terminations, and with
a noun following in the genitive, produces numerous changes in
its form ; and to these is limited the inflection of nouns in He-
brew.* Even for the comparative and superlative the Hebrew
has no appropriate form, and these relations must be expressed
by circumlocution, as taught in the Syntax (§ 119).
* This has been eulleJ the declension of the Hebrew noun.
§ 80. THE GENDER OF NOUNS. 143
§ 80.
OF FOEMS WHICH MAEK THE GEXDER OF NOUNS.
1. The Hebrew, like all the Semitic languages, has but two
genders, the masculine and fertiinine. Inanimate objects pro-
perly of the neuter gender, and abstract ideas, for which other
languages often have a neuter forin, are regarded in Hebrew as
either masculine or feminine, most commonly the latter (Syntax
§ 107, 3).
2, The tnasculine, as being the most common and important
form of the noun, has no peculiar mark of distinction.
The ending for the feminine was originally ri_, as in the 3d
sing. Perf. of verbs (§44, 1). But when the noun stands abso-
lutely, i. e. without a genitive following (§ 89), the ri— usually
appears in the truncated form n_, or is shortened to an unac-
cented ri^. The original Jl— very seldom remains, except when
the noun is in close connection with a following genitive or pro-
nominal suffix. Except in this case (for which see § 89, 2, 6,
§91, 4), the feminine ending is, therefore :
a) most usually, an accent&l H— -, as C^O Jiorse, noiD m,are ;
h) an unaccented ri^, after a guttural Vi-l (which also remains
unchanged before the genitive), as btlp, fe9Ji. f^^pp killing,
^y\'^,fem. ny'liia acquaintance. Here the final syllable of
the word follows the manner of segholate forms (§ 94, 2).
When the masculine ends with a vowel, a simple Sn takes the
place of n.^, as ^n«i^ Moabite, n^3Xi^ Moabitess ; mn sin-
ner, ri55^n sinfulness, sin. The vowel-changes occasioned
by these endings are shown in § 94.*
Remarks.
1. The feminine form in T^—r, is, in general, less frequent than the
other, and seldom occurs except when the other is also in use. It is
only in the Participles and Infinitives, that it is found more frequently
than the otlier (e. g. nbb'p oftener than n^^p, n";!? than iT^^) ; it is
employed, moreover, in common with n-^, as a form for the construct
state (§ 95, 1).
2. Unusual feminine terminations :
rt) ri— accented, as rip'ia emerald Ez. xxviii. 13, nxj? pelican Is. xxxiv.
11, rrsu." crowd 2 Kings ix. 17, and often in proper navies among the
■■■ 0 the feminines not distinguished by the form, see § 107, 1, 3, 4.
144 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECK
Phcenicians (in whose language ri-7 was the prevailing form, § 2, 2)
and other neighboring tribes, as ns'i2 Sarepla, n^'^X jElafh in Idumea,
on the Arabian Gulf^
6) n— , almost exclusively poetical, e. g. rints help Ps. Ix. 13, but in
prose also is found n'nna morrow Gen. xix. 34.
c) N — , Aramaean orthography for rt— , found chiefly in the later writers,
e. g. N3ia sleep Ps. cxxvii. 2, !ftnT|^ baldness Ez. xxvii. 31, X'^Mia mark
Lam. iii. 12.
d) Very rarely n-:;. a weakened form of n— (§ 27, Rem. 4), as triilT for
nn^T Is. lix. 5.
e) rw, without the accent, as irjn'n Deut. xiv. 17, nnsJ'a ^^isn biirning
oven Hos. vii. 4; comp. Ez. xl. 19; 2 Kings xvi. IS. In all these ex-
amples there should be the usual accented i^— ; but the Punctators,
deeming the feminine-ending unsuitable here, sought to conceal it by
the retraction of the tone. Their opinion, however, is not binding on
us. The accentuation of nb'^H night seems to indicate a masc. form,
especially since it is always construed as masc and as h'^h , 'b'h are
concurrent forms. Of a similar character are the forms (also con-
strued as masc.) f^OIHvi the sun Judges xiv. 18 (elsewhere D"in), nbns
brook Ps. cxxiv. 4, nni^tt death Ps. cxvi. 15, and some others. But
there is much here that is yet doubtful.*
/■) nn^ in poetry, properly a double ending (as in ntixtn this f = nx-Tii
Jer. xxvi. 6 KHhibh, and in the verbal form f^nba, § 74, 4), e. g. "^ri^T?
help (=n'it5;, rrnTS), nnsv::'^ salvatmn ( = 'niw'^_), nn^i? wickedness
( = n?3'is); see Ps. iii. 3; xliv. 27; xcii. 16; Job v. 16; Ex. xv. 16, and
other passages.f
3. It is not at all to the purpose, to regard the vowel-ending «^— J as
the original termination of the feminine, and the cotisonant-ending n—
as derived from it. The .<Ethiopic every where retains the n ; and in
the Phoenician also, feminines end mostly in n (sounded aih in the words
found in Greek and Roman writers), more rarely in X (see Gesenii Mon.
Phcen. pp. 439, 440 ; Movers, in Ersch u. Gruber's Encyclop. Sect. III.
Bd. 24, S. 439, f ). The Old-Arabic scarcely admits the truncated vowel-
ending, except in pause; in modern Arabic, the relation has become
about the same as in Hebrew.
* The ending H— in these words has been taken for that of the Aramaean em-
phatic state, as if n^Il3 were = hnttl . Against this are the following objections :
1) that some examples have the Heb. article, which would have been inconsistent
with the recognition of the Aramsean form ; 2) that the examples belong in part to
the older books; 3) that among them is so old and common a word as i^h'^i.
But this Avord might properly be an accusative with the adverbial signification
noctu, and then be used for nox without reference to the ending, somewhat like
naSiS § 88, 2, c. See Gesenius' Lexicon, Art. h^h , Note.
+ This ending f^r^— has also been compared with that of the Aram, emphatic
itate, or been regarded as an accusative ending.
\ A consonant n h, in this ending, is out of the question. '
181,82. DERWATION OF NOUNS— PEIMITIVES. 145
§81.
DERIVATION" OF NOUNS.
Nouns are either primitive (§ 82), as iij father, Db5 mother,
or derivative. The latter are derived either from the verb, Ver-
bals (as explained §79, 1, §§83-85), as p^"^^ just, p^lS?, np'lS
righteousness, from p'l'^ to he just, D^ high, H'a'n high ylace,
Di"l^ height, from D'll ^ 6e /«^/i ; or from another noun {Deno-
minatives), as riiba'^'Q place at the feet, from ^'y] foot. The ver
bals are by far the most numerous class.
Rem. 1. The older grammarians admitted only verbs as stem-icords,
and classed all nouns as verbals, dividing them into a) Formce nudce.
i. e. such as have only the three (or two) stem-letters, and h) Formce
auctcB, such as have received formative letters or syllables at the begin-
ning or end, as i^s^^^ , Msbo . These formative letters are :
1, '1, n, D, a, x, n, (rnsiasn)*
According to the view of roots and stems given in § 30, 1, the relation
of the noun to the verb is strictly somewhat different, since according to
it many nouns are formed immediately from the (ideal) root. But we
here retain the common view, as being easier for the learner.
2. Of compound nouns, as appellatives, the number in Hebrew is very
small ; e. g. ^?*i?3 properly wortldessness. baseness. As proper names,
they occur very frequently ; e. g. cbirsiTi foundation of peace, ^X^naa
man of God, nip^'in';i ichom God raises up, ^ir^ptn whom Jehovah
strengthens, Tib^aiax father of the king.
§82.
PEIMITIVE NOUN'S.
1. The number of primitive nouns, in the stricter sense, is
very small, those which are in most languages primitive being
here usually derived from verbal ideas ; e. g. most of the names
of natural objects, as 'niS'iE' he-goat (prop, shaggy, from ^"SJ^),
fTnyiC barley (prop, bearded, also from "^yiS), n'l'^pn stork (prop.
pia sc. avis), ISHT gold (from DnT=iJlS to be yellow). There
are only a few nouns (as e. g. many names of members of the
body, in men and beasts), for which no fitting stem-verb can be
pointed out ; as y\p horn, X!% eye, %^foot.
* From this vox memorialis (§ 3, 3, 2d ^) the nomina aticta are also called, by
(lie old grammarians, nomina heemantica.
10
146 PART II. PART^ OF SPEECH
2, The /orm of the primitives is that of the simple verbals, as
bUj^, bt3p, &c. ; and in the grammatical treatment of nouns, it
makes no difierence whether they are accounted primitives or
verbals.
E. g. Dix man follows the analogy of verbals, whether it has come
from n'lS to be red, or not ; ax father, dX mother, have the form of
verbals from the stems 'i^'^'^, O'?!!*, though such a derivation is hardly
possible.
§83.
OF VERBAL NOUNS IN GENERAL.
1. In Hebrew, as in Greek and Latin, the verbal noims are
connected in form and signification with certain forms of the
verb, particularly with the Participles and Infinitives, which even
without any change are often employed as nouns, e. g. 'DV'l {to
knoiv) knoioledge. "2^^ {hating) an enemy. Still oftener, how-
ever, have certain forms of the Infinitive and Participle, seldom
or never found in the regular verb, though employed in the kin-
dred languages and in the irregular verb, become the usual forms
of the verbal noun, e. g. the participial form btJ]?, the Infinitives
biapia, !nb"6p (§ 45, 2), (fee. Some, as the Arabic shows, are pro-
perly intensive forms of the Participle.
2. As to signification, it follows from the nature of the case,
that norms which have the form of Infinitives regularly denote
the action or state, with other closely related ideas (such as the
place of the action), and are, therefore, mostly abstract ; that
participial nouns, on the contrary, denote, for the most part, the
subject of the action, or of the state, and hence are concrete. It
is observable, moreover, that to many of the forms of derivative
nouns a definite signification attaches itself, although not equally
pervading in all of them.
Rem. 1. It need not appear strange, moreover (for it is found in all
languages), that a noun which in form is properly abstract, should be
employed metaphorically as a concrete, and vice versA. So in English
we say, his acquaintance, for those with whom he is acquainted ; the
Godhead,, for God himself; in Heb. Sni'a acquaintance and an acquaint-
ance ; "^na simplicity and a simple one; on the contrary nxijn that
which sinneth for sin. which is a frequent use of the ^m. concrete (§ 84
5,6,11).
2. For facilitating the general view we first treat of the derivatives
§84. NOUNS FROM THE REGULAR VERB. 147
from the regular verb (§ 84) and then of those from the irregular verb
or derivatives of the weaker stems (§ 85).
§84.
NOUNS DERIVED FROM THE REGULAR VERB.*
We distinguish here,
I. Participial No2ins, of Kdl.
1. iiLi;?, fern. p^i^P, one of the simplest forms of this kind, analogous
with the two following (Nos. 2 and 3), but not used as a Participle. It
is most frequently employed as an adjective expressing quality, as Dsn
iMse, ^"^^ new, ii^'^ upright. But the same form occurs, also, with an
abstract signification (No. \2).
2. ^'^,'\^, fern. nbuJp, Part, of verbs middle E (§ 50, 2), mostly with
intransitive meaning (§ 43), and for adjectives of quality, e. g. "Jl^t old^ old
man; 'i^'y^ dry; "id^/cr^
3. bb;:? and bi:2|^ (with firm 6), fern, <^^.t3p, primarily Part, of verbs
middle O and properly with intransitive signification, e. g. "li^ fearing,
")b|:3 small, ^P"^ fowler ; then frequently as an adjective, even when no
Perf with Cliolem is found, as biia great, pinn distant, TUTi|5 holy. As
a substantive, abstractly, 1133 honor, Dibiy ■peace. No. 21, with the
doubling of the last radical, must not be confounded with this.
4. ^l:'p, b:3lp, ^Hi. nbap, nbbp, the usual active Participle of transi-
tive verbs ; e.g. 3;;;X enemy, pJi"" suckling; hence of the instrument by
which the action is performed, as tnh a cutting instrument ; the femi-
nine sometimes with the collective signification, as nn"ii!< caravan, pro-
perly the wandering, wandering troop.
5. I'^i^rj and ^''^i^, passive Participles of Kal, the latter usual in
Aramsean as a Participle, but in Hebrew employed rather as a Substan-
tive, like the Greek verbals in to,. E. g. "i>lDN imprisoned, H^ltJ^ anointed,
"I'^DX prisoner, H'^'iJa anointed one. With an active signification also, in
intransitive verbs ; as T^5^ small, C!iS^ strong. Some words of the form
b"iL3p express the time of the action, as "i"'^!^ time of cutting, harvest,
UJ'i'in time of ploughing, like the Greek verbals in log, e. g. ap-ijTog, ago-
Toc, properly the being harvested, or ploughed. The feminines are prone
to take the abstract signification (Synt. § 107, 3, b), e. g. MS-lllJi deliver-
ance {the being delivered,).
6. bap (Arabic bs<^P), with vowels unchangeable (§ 25). In Arabic
it is the usual intensive form of the Participle, and hence in Hebrew
expresses what is habitual, e. g. nj3 apt to butt, XSp (also ^iip) jealous,
Natl sinner (ditf. from Xah si7ining), 335 thief; so of occupations, trades,
e. g. n2D cook, \I3'nn (for iiJ'nn)/a&er. Here again the feminine (nb^p or
* Under the regular verb we here include the verb with gutturals, ^§ 63-65, a?
well as the stronger forms of the irregular verb.
148 PAET n. PARTS OF SPEECH.
n^.^i5) often takes the abstract signification, as nxan female sinner and
sinfulness, sin; fii^fn burning fever, with a guttural n??!? signet. Such
intensive forms are also the three following.
7. bllSiD. ^i'^ls;?, of which forms are most adjectives in the Chaldee ,
as p'^'n^ righteous. "'"'2N strong, ')l3n compassionate. In Hebrew, of in-
transitives only.
8. biiip, as "liS'^ censurer, listti drunken one, "liaa strong one. hero,
seldom in a passive sense, as liiJ"^ born.
9. bap indicates very great intensity, often excessive, bo as to become
a fault or a defect, e. g. "las hunch-hacked, n'np bald-headed, DSX dumb,
"iJiSJ blind, nas Za?He, "iJ"!n f/eq/1 UJ|32J perverse. The abstr. signification
is found in the fern., as n^HN perverseness.
II. Nouns after the manner of Infinitives of Kal*
10. bup, bi^p , bbp (with changeable vowels), are with No. 11 the
simplest forms of this class, of which the first and third are employed in
the verb as Infinitives, the former being a rare and the latter the usual
form (§ 45. 2). As nominal forms they are unfrequent, e. g. "iSJ man, "iNS
ornament, pn^ laughter. Far more frequent are the nearly related forms.
11. biap, ^Ljjp, bt3p, the so-called segholate forms. E. g. T\^h king
(for T^baj 'r^_-q', §27, 'Rem. 2, c), nso (for nso) feooA:, llJ'ip (foriaYp)
sanctuary ; these have the characteristic vowel in the first syllable,
and the helping-vowel Seghol (§ 28, 4) in the second. When the second
or third stem-letter is a guttural, Pattach is used instead of Seghol, as
STT seed, T\'l\ eternity, bi'Q work. Examples of feminines. iisb^a queen.
ns-i'i fear, n,yv help, naan wisdom.
In masculines as well as feminines the abstract is the proper and pre
vailing signification, yet not unfrequently the concrete occurs, especially
in the form bap, e. g. Tjbb king, "i?D a youth, "isa brutish, 13S servant,
bsa /ore?, "135 ??ian. In such forms, either the concrete sense is secondary
and derived from the abstract, as in "iS3 prop, hrutishness, 1S3 prop.
season of youth (comp. Eng. youth and a youth) ; or the form of the word
is shortened from another with a concrete sense, as Tjb'^, 13?! from par-
ticipial forms, meaning riding, serving.] But altogether, the meaning
of these forms is very various ; e. g. even for the instrument, as a'ln
sword, Li"in graving-tool, and passively 5"is a web. In the passive sense
the form bop is more common, as ^ys, food; and also in the abstract
sense, as "is 5 a youth, "i?a" youth.
12. bap, like No. 1, fern, ^^bap, both very frequent with the abstr.
sense. E. g. 'Z^'^ hunger, Qizjjj guilt, S3ia satiety (with the concretes 3^'n
* All these forms are found, mutatis inutandis, in the Arabic as Infinitives, or
80-called nomina actionis.
\ Such an origin of "nbxi may be proved from the Arabic ; and in some other
nouns it is obvious. Comp. "1"I5 as the name of a town with the appellative "ITJ
a wall, and the shortening of C|n3 (in the constr. state) from rjns shoulder.
§ 84. IN^OUNS FflOM THE REGULAR VERB. 149
hungry, ndx, ?3b);/em. nj^'i:: righteousness, n^^: vengeance. More
rare is the form ^M)5, as "istti tenieiiim, 335 uva.
13. b-Jp, iiiJp, bi::p, bi::p, brjp, all witli an unchangeable vowel
(§ 25) between the second and third radicals, and a S/i^va under the first, as
3n3 book, 3XT woZ/J b-^^d u-ay, nibn dream, b^iaa boundary ; sometimes
with il/epA prosthetic, as si"iTi< =Si-i'r ar?re, H'iSN ftroorf. The corres-
ponding/e??? mines will suggest themselves; the forms ■"ibiDp, i^hrcp
coincide with those of feminines in No. 5.
14. b:::|552 , the Aramaean form of the Infinitive, e. g. I2S12J^ judgment.
Related forms are : "li'STD song, 1521-153 desire, nipba ioo;?/, h'^h-q-o king-
dom, rr\ii'-iyq wages. Under this form, besides tlie action itself, is ex-
pressed very often the place of the action, as naf^J altar, "la*!^ (from ~i3^
to drive) place of driving, i. e. to ichich cattle are driven, wilderness ; and
the instrument, as nbsxa knife, sbt^a fork, nPiSa key.
15. libDp. l^ap, and other similar forms, with the terminations )i
and 1—, as ■,'i-iriQ interpretation, "Jtibd table, 'jS'ip offering ; but there
are also forms like '|i-i3t remembrance, ']i"'jn prophetic vision.
For IT there is a truncated form 1, written also ri, which occurs
especially in proper names, as il^^ and li'^a^ , nb'bd for "I'iia'b^U (comp.
nXuiav, Plato). In Patronymic and Gentilic nouns (§ 85, 5) the Aim
is retained, e. g. '^3'^ia from n'bid the city Shilo (still Shilun).
16. "With the feminine ending nsi, e.g. r^^h'2'q folly, nsiNS"^ healing.
In the Aramtean, this is a usual termination of the Infinitive in the
derived conjugations (comp. No. 28). It comes into frequent use only
in the later books of the Old Test. As a synonymous ending, n^— is
found occasionally in earlier use, as nili^TlJ remnant. Comp. the deno-
minative nouns § 86, 6.
Til. Participials of the derived Conjugations.
17. From Niph. bapD, as nlxbsa (pliir.) wonders.
18. 19. From PiUl and Hiph., e. g. rrnstis snuffers, fT^53t3a pruning-
knife.
20. From Poel, as bbiy (abbr. from hhivn Is. iii. 12) and bbis c/jzYtZ.
21. From Pilel V::^,fem. fi^'^p, and 22. bbup, for the "most part
adjectives of color, as thi<,fem. nia'ix red, 'fiS'i green, liXTU quiet.*
23. brabup, bbbi^p have an iterative sense, as 'T^sasn flexuosus,
bhbna versutus, and are forms of adjectives with a diminutive significa-
tion (§ 55, 3), as B^a'ix reddish, -iITinizJ blackish; hence in a contemp-
tuous sense (like wase?', misellus, Germ. Gesinde, Gesindel), as tl&SOS
(with the passive form, after Cl^Ox) collected rabble. ^ '
IV. Infinitives of the derived Conjugations.
24. From Al/j/i. of the form Dib^flS! plur. struggles.
25. From Piiil, like yS3 dispersion, more frequently in the fern., as
nil3|3a request, with Qamets unchangeable.
* No. 21 may be regarded also as a mere modification of No. 3.
150 PART n. PARTS OF SPEECH
26. ^IMp, and 27. ^^Jpn, ^''^pfl, likewise Infinitives of Piel (tiir
latter the common form in Arabic), e. g. D^i^O requital ; p^^T] folding of
the hands; b^iastn requital; Tp'l'^n mantle.
28. From Hiph. of the form IT^StN rememhrance-offering ; nsiSOUJf]
annunciation (with unchangeable Qamets), Aramsean Infinitives.
29. From Ilithp. bn^nn register.
30. From PoeZ, like nb^in/oW?/, and perhaps also 31. like "^iss'^p smoke,
p2''J£ prison.
32. From Pi'/eZ "i"""!?!© ^eavy ram, tJ^SXi adultery.
33. nipni^Q opening, Inf to No. 23.
34. bt?p5ii?, e. g. nanbia^^ame (comp. § 55, 6;.
35. Q,uadriliterals, like BSbO locust.
§85.
NOUN'S DEEIVED FROM THE lEREGULAR VERB.
These are formed in the same maimer as those of which we
have already treated, with few variations, except such as are
occasioned by the pecuUarities of irregular verbs. Accordingly
we shall refer these forms to the corresponding ones already
described, mentioning only such as exhibit some important irre-
gularity.
I. From Verbs "lE.
To the Inf of Kal belong (14). in^ gift, tiss^ overthrow; to the Inf.
of Hiph. (28), rtban deliverance. — The noun 5>'ia knoxcledge, from S"!^ ;
see § 71.
II. From Verbs yb .
From the Part. Kal (1), an upright (like bW|5), commonly with
Paltach (to indicate the sharpening of the syllable), b'n abject, S'n much,
fern, n^^, nsn ;* (21 ryqfal. From the /i?/". (10, 11), ta booty, y^ favor,
ph law, fern, ii^^a worrf, n^sn law; (14), is^ fastness, at?-a that which
surrounds {environs), fern. ^1^553 roZZ. The form 3D^ sometimes, by
retraction of the tone, becomes a segholate form, as "i^t; bitterness (from
n-iT3), "l^a timidity (from Ti?"^). (27), i^^nf!" praise, S^^sn prayer, with
the segholate form also, as D^n a melting away (from OD53), "jn'tn 7«asi
(from I?"! ^0 9/raA:e a tremulous sound). From Pilpel {§ 55, 4), b^^a wheel,
from b^a ifo roZ/, bp'bp .
III. From Verbs US a?2rf ''S.
The Participial forms are regular. To the Infinitives belong :
(10), ?'n, fern. n:y'n, m^'n knoivledge, riss counsel. (13), *iio for lio"^
* On the formation of feminines without the Bagliesh, see § 94, Rem. 2.
§85. NOUNS FROM THE IRREGULAR VERB. 151
divan. (14), K'li'O fear, "Opi^ snare, nnbi^ birth, IDW punishment ;
from verbs prop. "'S, 'y^'^'O the best. (27). airin inhabitant, nn^in g-e??e-
ration, I'^in iAe south.
IV. F?-o);i Fer&.9 is" antZ '^S'.
Participles: (1), ^^ foreign; (2), ""S stranger, tTiy a witness, testimony ,
(3), 2ia ^oorf, nni:: ■jc/m^ j's g-ood. Infinitives: (11): various segholate
/orms. as inii death, and tr^a house ; hip voice, ni"! spirit ; feminines,
nWj and nbis et-iY, nuJi shame ; (14), nivOj/ey/;. nniiXJ 7'esi, Dip^ p/ace,
also LJiTi;^ oa?' (trora L:>i;iJ) ; (27), nJiinPi intelligence, irili'n testimony;
(28), nnan res^
V. From Verbs Tib,
Participles: (2), nB;j /a;>, nup? hard, fern. nS";, Htt3;5. Some lose
the n-^, as IPi sign, for "^1.^. (4), i1N"i seer, fern, nbis burnt-offering.
(5), "1^03 covering, "^pj pz/re, "^35 poor. — Infinitives: (11). the segholates
in different forms ; not often with the n-^ retained, as in fiSS a weeping,
nsn friend, nm, ni<'"i vision, revelation (Is. xxviii. 7, 15), commonly
without it, as S'l (for nsn). Sometimes the original ^ or 1 appears. The
"^ then quiesces in Chireq (comp. on ''fi'^ , § 75, Rend. 3), as in "^IQ fruit,
''Vn sick)iess. The i also quiesces, as in ini£ waste. In masculines the
third radical rarely remains a consonant, as in "^l^ sickness, though in
feminines it is always so, as in iij^ui rest. Ti'^ib garland. (13), ino ■u^m-
ter, ''p^.fem. n^nuj a drinking ; f em. T^i^ part, fii^in the half, 'n^n^
and n^nd p?7. (14). nsp^ possessio7is, t^N'i'? appearance ; fern. JnliJ^
command. Apocopated form, b>^ height, for n^3)'2 . (15), "J^pp jpeaZ^/t,
■ii"'|3 destruction. (27), nibnri annihilation, ri''32la building, n^tsi'npi
6roocZ. (28), Tj'^X ZesZicZe, for nsai-^i , from riDlU.
VI. From doubly anomalous Verbs.
We present only some cases of especial difficulty to the learner:
1. From a verb IS and xb, niU elevation for riNb, from Xi^3, Job
xli. 17.
2. From a verb "^S and nb , nyin instruction, lav), fiSia s/o-n, prob.
from rtS^.
3. From a verb x'y and fib, nd tunmlt, Num. xxiv. 17, for rxB, from
4. From a verb llJ and tnb, I'n a watering, for '^'I'l, from '^5'^ ; "'X
island, for "''ix, from MIX to dwell ; ITiX s/^u for nix, from tilX; Ij^ corcZ,
from n'|5; xn chamber for IPl. from Hin to dwell; *'15 people, from riia.
Arab, to flow together.
To the learner the stem is often obscured also by contraction, when
it originally contains Nun, Daleth, or He, e. g. ns wine-press for PiSJ
nsj"^, from "i?;; ; CjX a?io-er for vipx ; r.'Q'!< fidelity, for ns^X. from "jON ;
rs ?i/He for iTii;, from Tvrs ; "il brightness, for 1^'^T, from nfij.
1 52 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH,
§86.
DENOMINATIVE NOUNS.
1. Such are all nouns which are formed immediately from
another noun, whether it is primitive, or derived from a verb ;
e. g-. 'ji^'lj? eastern, immediately from D*!^ the east, which is
itself derived from the verb Q^JP.
2. Most of the forms which nouns of this class assume have
already been given, the denominatives (which seem in general
to be a later phenomenon of language than verbals) being formed
in imitation of nouns derived from the verb. The verbal with 1Z
prefixed, e. g. was employed to express the place of ati action
(§ 84, No. 14) ; accordingly this )2 was prefixed to a noun in
order to make it a designation of place (see No. 3). In Greek
and German also, the verbals and denominatives are exactly
analogous.
The principal forms are the following:
1. In imitation of the Part. Kal (No. 4 of the verbals), ^3>iiJ porter,
from "1?^ gote ; ^J^S herdsman, from 1)^3 cattle; CilD vinedresser, from
n"|3 vineyard.
2. Like verbals of No. 6, r^p archer, from n^.^ bow ; n^a seaman,
from Tihh salt, (sea). Both these forms (Nos. ], 2) indicate one's busi-
ness, trade, &c., like Greek nouns in rrjs, teii-;, e. g. nolU)]?, yqa^fiaTixq.
3. Nouns with '^ prefixed, e.xpressing the place of a thing (comp.
No. 14 of tlie verbals) ; e. g. "';^'52 place offoimtains. from ''^b fountain;
nibjnia , riirxn^, place about the feet, — about the head, from bsn, Tax'l ;
napri lor fiiivip^ feld, of cucumbers, from XTBp ciicumber. Comp. ufim-
Aoj»', from ufinnXoi,.
4. Concretes formed by the addition of "ji, 1—, as T'i'^Tp eastern, from
^"!p. ) "I'i"''^^ hinder, from inx ; ")t^^!i^ V)ound, hence coiled animal, ser-
pe7it, IVoni rrjlb a winding.
'i and "i*! form also diminutives like the Syriac "ii, as ']i"iJ"'X little man
(in the eye), apple of the eye, from ilJiX ; isi-i^nrj'^ the dear, good people
(from "1*1113'^ = "iia'^ upright, good), a term of endearment for Israel ;
perhaps also. 'jiS'^Sia little snake.
5. Peculiar to denominative nouns is the termination "i— 7, which con-
verts a substantive into an adjective, and is added especially to numerals
and names of persons and countries, in order to form Ordinals, Gcntilics,
and Patronymics. E. g. ^'naj strange, from "isb" any thing foreign; ''UJW
the sixth, from u3u six; •'asji'a Moabite, from nxia ; i^Nnia"^ Israelite,
from bx'iiU^. When the stem-substantive is a compound, it is commonly
resolved again into two words, e.g. "is^xiyja Benjayninite from "jiri'^sa.
For the use of the article with such forms, sec § 111, 1, Rem. Rarely,
§ 87. THE PLURAL. 163
instead of "'— we find a) the ending "^-r (as in Aramaedn), as "^bis
deceitful, and in proper names, as ■'^n? (ferreus) Barzillai ; and h) the
parallel n-^, as n32b (prop, milky) slorax-tree.
6. Abstract nouns formed from concretes by the addition of T\'!\ and n"^—
(comp. the Eng. terminations dom, hood, ness, &c.) ; e. g. r>i3b?2 A-iVjo--
rfoTO, immediately from T\?.^. ; niDJsbx widowhood, from "i^sbx , njTDbs ,
widower, widow; niiuxn principium, from TL'X") ;= 12Ji<"i princeps. (See
the verbals No. 16).
§87.
OF THE PLURAL.
1. The juZwra/ termination for the masculine gender^ is D''— ,
e. g. DID horse, flnr. D'^p^D horses, seldom written defectively
D— , as in Gen. i. 21, Qp^sR. Nouns ending in "^— take U''^— in
the plural, as D^^^nny Hebreivs from ^n^y (Ex. iii. 18) ; but usu-
ally a contraction takes place, as D'''^3y (§ 93, YIII), D""?!? crimson
garments from '^3'©. Nouns in ln_. lose this termination when
they take the plural ending, e. g. nth seer, plur. W'Y'n.
This ending iin is also prevalent in Phoenician, e. g. D5TS Sidoiiii;
m Aramtean it is in, in Arabic un (nominative) and in (oblique cases),
in iEthiopic dn. It is, moreover, identical with the ending "|1 in 3d
pers. plur. inasc. of verbs. Comp. also the verbal-ending "j^.*
Unusual terminations of the plur. masc. are :
a) "i"^ — _ as in Chaldee and Syriac, almost exclusively in the poets
and later writers, e. g. "pa^^ kings Prov. xxxi. 3 ; T^^i; days Dan. xii. 13,
defectively 'j'^iX islands Ez. xxvi. 18. Comp. Judges v. 10; Job xv. 13;
xxiv. 22; xxxi. 10 ; Lam. i. 4 and other places.
h) ^— (the n cast off, as in the Dual iT^ for □'^1'^ Ez. xiii. 18 ; comp.
the constr. slate, § 89, 2), e. g. "'3'2 chords, Ps. xlv. 9 for Q"i352 (unless this
be the true reading) ; ^'B'S peoples 2 Sam. xxii. 44 (for which the parallel
passage Ps. xvi^i. 44 has WS , but the other form occurs also in Lam. iii. 14
and Ps. cxiiv. 2). This ending is by many called in question, in single
passages (see also 2 Sam. xxiii. 8, comp. 1 Chron. xi. 11 ; 1 Sam. xx. 38
K^thibh). or altogether ; see Gesenius, Lehrgebaude der Heb. Sprache,
S. 524 ff.— Still more doubtful is—
c) ''—z (like the constr. state in Syriac). Here are reckoned, e. g.
"''nln white cloths Is. xix. 9; ^yii pritices Judges v. 15, "'i'i^H windows
Jer. xxii. 14. But this last is perhaps Dual (§ 88, 6, Rem. 1)'; '^'ib may
be my princes (with suff.), and "i— 7 in "i"!!!! may be a formative syllable.
Farther, iBlbn in Is. xx. 4 is constr. state; but in '^'nd (prob. = "''nia
after the form bap) the Mighty One, and in ■'2'ia locust-swarm Nah. iii.
* On the identity of all these endings, see Dietriches Abhandlungen zur hcbr.
Grauimatik, Leipz. 1846, S. 62 ff.
154 PART II. PARl^ OF SPEECH.
17 (from nari), the ''— belongs to the stem ; and finally, in ''SiliS! the
Lord (prop, my Lord, from tJipX Lord) it is originally a suffix, see
§121, Rem. 4.
d) t3— , obsolete and rare ; e. g. DS3 =tiS3 g7iats [Ex. viii. 13] ; C^D
ladder [Gen. xxviii. 12] from b^O , prop, steps, comp. English stairs*
2. The jilural termination for the feminine gender is HI.
Tliis takes the place of the feminine termination ri— , ri— , H— .
appended directly to the form of the singular ; as nbnpi song of
praise, -plur. ni^nn ; JTias letter, plur. Sni"i5X ; "li?2i a uwll, plnr.
ni"i^{3. Feminines in lni_ form their plural in 'TiV—, and those
in fl% in ni''— ; e. g. !rii"i2'5a Egyptian woman, plur. ni'^nst'a ;
in^Db'a kingdom, plur. ni'^Db'a. These plural terminations have,
however, for their basis, the endings n^— and H^— in the sin-
gular.
It is only from a neglect of the origin of the terminations M and H"^— :<
that the plural-ending Di— is appended to some words which end Avith
them ; e. g. rT^ili spear, plur. D'^n'^Dn and niniDO ; nsst whoredom, plur.
D'TiilSt ; DiniJ^bi? widoichood, and many other instances. Strictly in the
manner of the Syriac is the formation of the plural ni"::; (edh^-vdth) laws,
with Vav as a consonant, from the singular n*!'!?.' .
This ending rii (-r'th) stands directly for -dth, as it is sounded in
Arab.. ^Ethiop., and Chald. (see, on the corruption of the d sound to 6,
§ 9, 10, 2) ; and -nth is, properly, nothing but the prolonging and
strengthening of the sing. fern, ending -dth (§ 80, 2). The strengthening
was intended to denote plurality. But this ending was then, by a still
farther application of it, appended also to nouns Avhose singular does
not terminate in -dth.
How the changeable vowels are affected by the addition of
the plural endings, is shown in §§92-95.
3. Words which are of two genders (§80, 2, h, § 107, 3) have
often, in the plural, both the masculine and feminine termina-
tions ; e. g. tl3s5 sonl, plur. DiTJ?B3 and nillDBS. Both forms may
be employed as masculine or feminine ; but their gender must be
determined by observing the usage of the language in respect to
each word. This is also true of several other words of both gen-
ders and. both {masc. and fern.) terminations, e. g. li'^ an age,
masc, plur. U^yil and fiili'^ ; HSID a year, fern., plur. Di:© and
niDffi. The gender of the singular is here retained in both the
plural forms ; e. g. "^Hb!; tnasc. a lion, ini">'li? masc. Zeph. iii. 3 ;
ni'ni'n masc. Job xlii. 16.
* See the Adverbs in c— § 100, 3, and Dietrich, vbi supra, S. 66 ff.
§88. THE DUAL. 155
Sometimes usage makes a distinction between the two plural forms
of the same word. Thus fi'^a^ days, and D'^SIU years, are the usual,
f^ia^ , ni3^ the unfrequent and poetical forms. This distinction appears
especially in the use of several words which designate members of the
human body. The dual of these words (see § 88) is employed as the
name of the living members themselves, while the plural in ri (which
here corresponds to the neuter) represents something similar, but inani-
mate. E. g. ti'}h'2 hands, niss handles, manubria ; o"^?"!]^ horns. rii5"i|5
cornua allaris ; B";'3"'5? eyes, vS'il'S fountains.
4. A considerable number of masculines form their plural in
tli, while many feminines have a plural in D'^— . In both cases,
however, the gender of the singular is usually retained in the
plural. E. g. DJ< father, 'plur. fii^SJ ; Wt natne, niasc, -plur.
T&iytD_ ; on the contrary, T^12 word, fern., plur. D'^^'a ; TB5i'?5 co7i-
ciihine, fern., plur. D'^IBIS^B, &c.
5. It is chiefly in the adjectives and participles, that the dis-
tinction of gender is maintained in the use of the plural endings ;
e. g. Q'^litS honi, flilit: bonce ; D'^^pp masc, tib'dp fern. ; as also
in substantives of the same stem, representing objects in which
there is a natural distinction of sex, as d'^SS fHii, lni:a filice ;
D'^pb'a res^es^ f^'i^b'a reginm.
Rem. 1. In some few words, to the plural form in ni is added the
other termination of the plural Di^- (before the genitive "^ — , comp.
§ 89, 2), or that of the dual 'Q']^ ; e. g. fi^a height, plur. rri^a, construct
slate "^niaa ; b^ixia ''niil\y'n^ from at iheheadofiiaul, 1 Sarn. xxvi. 12;
nrin wall, plur. m'TaiPi mcenia, dual Wjhi'nin double wall. This double
designation of the plural appears also in the mode of connecting the
suffixes with the plural forms in ni (§ 91, 3).
2. Some nouns are used only in the plural, e. g. t2''ri5a men (the
.iEthiopic has the singular, met, man); some of them with the sense of
the singular {§ 108, 2), as ci5Q face. The plural of the latter can be
expressed only by the same form ; hence, D"^DQ means also faces, Ez. i. 6.
OF THE DUAL.
1. There is a modification of the Plural in the Dual form.
In Hebrew, however, it is found only in certain substantives (not
at all in adjectives, verbs, and pronouns). The Dual termina-
tion for both genders is U"^^, appended to the singular ; as D'^'l'^
both hands, D^ioi'i tivo days. The original feminine ending ath
is always retained here, with long a in an open syllable ; as nsto
1^6 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
lip, D'l'infito both lips ; from feminines with the ending fi— , e. g
msn;, the Dual has the form D^PTZJn: double fetters.
The shortening of the vowels, occasioned by the compara-
tively heavier dual ending, is in some cases rather greater than
with the plural termination, especially in the segholate forms
(§84, 11); as b^-) foot, plur. W'b^'}, dual D^b'^n ; but also DtiSnp
(along with Q!^?"!)?) from 1"lj5 horn, ^^'iTJb from Tib cheek.
Bern. 1. Unusual forms of the dual, mostly found only in proper
names : a) )^^ (as in Chald.) and contracted )—, as yiy^ Gen; xxxvii.
17 and "i^^ 2 Kings vi. 13 (name of a place, prop, fwo loells) ; 6) n—
and O"^— . as nps, C3? (proper names). B"'3^ t^oo in the combination
-,b:y ni;d ticeh-e ; c) i— (c cast off), i*!; Ez. xiii. 18, probably also "'Jiin
(double windoxc) Jar. xxii. 14.
2. The words D";^ water, n-^aia heaven. B7?i2i!i-i*i or nb'iun'i Jerusalem,
are dual only in appearance. The first two are plurals from the lost
forms "'Ja , i:Q'a ; the third is a protracted form for the older D^^!i"i'^ ,*
comp. the shorter form Dbir Ps. Ixxvi. 3, and the Chaldee DbTUIT^ .
2. The Dual in Hebrew, besides the numeral forms for 2, 12,
200, &.C. (§ 97), is used chiefly of such objects as are, by nature
or art, connected in pairs ; e. g. D']'"!^ both hands, D^ITX both ears,
d'l^lllj teeth (of the tivo rows), D^b;?3 pair of shoes, D";5T55'^ pair of
scales ; or at least are conceived as forming a pair, as W^I^S"^ two
days together, biduuni, D^riDTiJ tivo years (in succession), bien-
nium, D^riTSS tivo dibits. In the former case the dual is used
also for a greater number of objects, either indefinite, or limited
by a numeral ; e. g. W^tz^ TL'ffi si.v ivings Is. vi. 2, Ez. i. 6, "b3
D^ilna all knees Ez. vii. 17, D^Pb^iia cymbala Ezra iii. 10, D:^r)STri
forked hooks Ez. xl. 43. With some degree of emphasis, the
dual takes also the numeral tivo, Amos iii. 12 ; Judges xvi. 28.
See other remarks on the use of the dual, in § 87, Nos. 3, 5 (Rem.).
It cannot be questioned that the Hebrew, at an earlier period, em-
ployed the Dual more freely and to a greater extent, and that the above
limited and fragmentary use of it belongs to a later phase of develop-
ment in the language. The early Arabic forms the Dual in the noun,
pronoun, and verb, to about the same extent as the Sanscrit, or the
Greek ; but in the modern, it disappears almost wholly in the verb, pro-
noun, and adjective. The Syriac retains it only in a few forms, but not
as a living element, somewhat as the Roman in duo, ambo. So also it
disappears in the younger Indian languages. On the Germanic Dual,
see Grimm's d. Gramm. I., S. 114, 2 Ausg.
* See Qesenii Thesaurus Ling. Hebrsese, p. 629.
§ 89 GENITIVE AND CONSTRUCT STATE. 157
§89.
" THE GENITIVE AND THE CONSTRUCT STATE.
1. The use of case-endings* no longer appears in Hebrew, as
a living element of the language. The relations of case are
either not indicated by any external sign, like that of the nomi-
native and for the most part of the accusative, or are expressed
by prepositions (§ 117) ; that of the genitive being shown by
subordination and close annexation to the governing noun.
Thus the noun, which as genitive serves to limit another, retains
its own form unchanged, and is only uttered in closer connection
with the preceding nomen regens. In consequence of this con-
nection, the tone hastens on to the second of the two nouns 1
(the genitive), and the first, or governing noun, is thereby com-
monly shortened, either in its consonants or its vowels (when
mutable), or in both ; e. g. 13'n ivord^ D'^H"^^ "13'n word of God
(a sort of compound, as we say in reversed order, God's-word^
landlord^ fruit-tree)] ^'^ ha7id,1\^1^T\ ^\^ Jiand of the king ; D'i"in'7
words, oyn '^'yy^ loords of the j^eople. Thus in Hebrew, the
the noun which stands before a genitive suffers the change by
which this relation is indicated, and in grammatical language is
said to be in the construct state, while a noun which is not thus
followed by a genitive is said to be in the absolute state.
Such words are often connected by Maqqeph (§ 16, 1). The insertion
or omission of it, however, does not affect their relation to each other,
and depends merely upon the accentuation. On the further use of the
constr. slate see the Syntax §§ 114, 116.
2. The t;oi^e^changes which many nouns exhibit in the co7i-
siruct state are shown in §§ 92, 95. There are also terminations
peculiar to this form of the noun : thus,
ff) in place of the plural and dual terminations D"!— and d^l-, it
has always (by throwing off the m) simply i— . (comp. Rem.) ;
e. g. D^C^D horses, nbns ''D^,D the horses of Pharaoh; D":?^?
eyes, 'C'^Ntri "i^iy the eyes of the man ;
h) the original /ew. ending H— . is always retamed m this connec-
tion with the genitive (instead of n_ which has become the
* On some traces of obsolete case-endings, see § 90.
f In accordance with the universal tendency of the tone, in the Hebrew lan-
guage, to hasten towards the end of words (§ 29, 1).
168 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
usual ending" in the absolute state) ; as nsb'a queeii^ i^^ll^ Snabia
queen of Sheha. When the same word has also the termina-
tion '^z—i this form of it is adopted in the construct state
(§ 80, i, Rem. 1) ;
c) nouns in ri_ fiom verbs Jib (§ 85, V) form their construct state
in n_ ; but nouns in "^-^ change this termination to '^— .
Exs. ns'"l, const r. nX"! seer ; "'H, constr. ^T] life; and so also
i{^5, constr. fi^''5 valley.
On the endings i and '^— in the construct state, see § 90.
Mem. The liquid sound of D was lost at the end of a word, just as in
Latin the final m before a vowel was slurred over in the language of
common life and in poetry. Q,uinct. Inst. Orat. IX. 4. §40. So also dis-
appears the corresponding n of the plural ending in Arabic and Aramaean,
as well as in the plural ending '^l of the Hebrew verb (§ 44, 1. and § 47,
Rem. 4). The final vowel i, after the rejection of the m. was strength-
ened by an a sound preceding it (the China of Sanscrit grammar),
whence the diphthong ai, which is contracted to e (§ 7, 1 and § 9, 6).
Instead of this "^-^ the Syriac still retains "^-^^ of which there is in He-
brew also a clear trace in the union of .suffixes with the plural noun
(§ 91, 2) ; and probably the example Pi'iJ ^S^bn Is. xx. 4 also belongs
here (according to others Judges v. 15. The dual ending "^-^ obvionsly
arose from "> — .
§90.
REMAIN'S OF ANCIENT OASE-EKDINGS.*
rV— local ; *^— and 1 as endings of the construct state.
1. As in Arabic three cases are distinguished by terminations,
so the Hebrew noun has three endings, which correspond to those
of the Arabic in sound, but have mostly lost their original signi-
jQcance. They are mere fragmentary remains of a nlore full and
vital organism, than the language exhibits in the stage at which
we find it in the Old Testament, when it no longer knew the
regular distinction of cases by appropriate endings.
In Arabic, the case-endings are : -u for the nominative, -i for the
genitive, and -a for the accusative (answering to the three leading
vowels). In modern Arabic tliese endings have almost wholly disap-
peared ; and when now and then used, among the Bedouins, it is without
rule and with no distinction of the endings ( Wallin. in Zeitschrift der d.
morgenl. Gesellsch. Bd. V. 1851, S. 9.). Even in the Sinaitic inscrip-
* The so-called paragogic letters. — ^Tb.
§ 90. RE^FAINS OF AXCIEMT CASE-ENDINGS. 159
tions, their regular use is found already impaired (Beer, Studia Asiatica,
III. 1840, p. xviii ; Tuch, in Zeitschr. der d. m. G. Bd. III., S. 139 f.) ;
and still, among the Arabs of the Peninsula of Sinai, ^ammuk {thy uncle,
nominative) is heard also for 'ammick (gen.) and for ''aminak (accus.).
The ^thiopic has preserved only the -a; employing it, however, not
only in the whole sphere of the accusative, but also (withoui distinction
of case) for the ending of the conslr. state in connection with a following
noun.
2. The relation of the accusative, in the toneless ending n-_
appended to substantives, is the one most clearly retained in
Hebrew. It is used,
a) most frequently, to express direction to, motion towards;*
e. g. rrs^ towards the sea, ivestivard, niis^ toivards the north,
northward, rni^X to Assyria, nbns to Babylon, Hi'ns to the
earth, l^^i"'! homeward, ritnjy to Gaza (from n^y) Judg. xvi.
1 ; with the article, rnnr; to the mountain, X\TT]%X\ into the
house, nbns^n to, or into, the tent [Gen. xviii. 6, xxiv. 67] ;
with the plural, n'a'^'lTIJS to the Chaldeans, TMr^h^T^ toicards
the heavens ; even with the construct state followed by a
genitive, wjpii X\Tp% into the house of Joseph, pTS^'l "^f ■^'^''^ t^
the wilderness of Damascus, liJ^aiZJ nn")T'a {^oith the tone, an
exception to the rule) toivards the rising pf the sun, east-
ward ;
b) sometimes in a weaker sense of the H-., Avith only a general
direction to the place where an object is,t as S^^^Si at Babylon
Jer. xxix. 15, nbnT in the habitation Hab. iii. 11 ; comp. also
tyiz% there Jer. xviii. 2 (oftener thither) ;
c) the significance of the ending H— is still more obscured, when
a preposition is prefixed to the word, as nbj^tjb to the world
below Ps. ix. 18, nby'bb uf wards, HS^fs in the south Josh.
XV. 21, f^b:|3'a from Babylon Jer. xxvii. 16, tlpSi?. 1? unto
Aphek Josh. xiii. 14.
The local reference, in this ending, is the prevailing one
(hence the nTime n_- local) ; but there is also, rarely, a refer-
ence to time, as perhaps in T\T\V noiv, at this time (from 1P5?),
r\)a'''a^ D''^^''? from year to year. Peculiar is the form iTlb'^bn,
prop, ad profanum ! = absit ! We have the accusative of the
object (though bordering on the local reference) in 'j'lblT "S'nS
* See, on this signification of the accusative, the Syntax, § 118, 1.
•j- So also the accusative ■without this form, § 118, 1.
160 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
and "ibna? n^"iN is. viii. 23, t^bt^r^ Ez. xxi. 31 ; comp. Job
xxxiv. 13.
Being regularly without the tone, it has commonly no effect on the
vowels of the word (as shown in the above examples), except that in
segholate Ibrms the helping vowel becomes Sh'va (§ 93, 6). and also the
Chireq in D'^bd. — The ending n— is itself sometimes shortened to n— .
as nni: to Nob 1 Sam, xxi. 2, comp. Ez. xxv, 13.
3. More rare, and almost confined to poetry, are the other
two endings, which like the accusative "_ seem to correspond to
Arabic case-endings ; viz. '^— for the genitive, and i (also ^ in
proper names) for the nojninative. But here, the recognition of
the relation of case is wholly lost in the language ; and it treats
these forms as archaisms, employed in poetry or other more ele-
vated style, and found also in many compound names, the relics
of an earlier age. As in such names, so elsewhere, these endings
keep their place only in the closest connection of noun with noun,
namely in the construct state*
a) The ending "'— is not very unfrequent in the construct state,
and commonly has the tone. Exs. "JSkn i^Tb forsaking the
flock Zech. xi. 17, HSp ^3pi2J diueller in the thorn-hush Deut.
xxxiii. 16 ; with the feminine, nb'^b "^innSii stolen hy night
Gen. xxxi. 39 (in prose), tSElZJ'a ''t^J^^'a plena justitice Is. i. 21,
p'1^-i2b'a ^tn'T] by after the maimer of Melchizedek Ps. ex.
4 ; oftener with a preposition following (comp. § 116), as ^t"}^*^
D^in:! mistress among the nations Lam. i. 1, "jS^b i"lpi5 bind-
ing to the vine Gen. xlix. 11, comp. Is. xxii. 16, Micah vii.
14, Ps. cxiii. 5-9, and other passages ; so also with many
particles, which are strictly nouns in the construct state, as
ir^bn; ( == nb^T) besides, ^p^ ( = TO) from, '•nba not, and in com-
pound names, as p'lS""'3b'a (i. e. king of righteousness), b!^'^"iaa
(man of God), bx'^^n (favor of God), and others ; comp. the
Punic name Hannibal, i. e. byi''3n (favor of Baal).
h) The ending i is much more rare, in prose only in the Penta-
teuch, and that in elevated style, as Gen. i. 24, Y")^. '^^^H the
beasts of the earth for f "li? rfiT] (the same word repeated from
* In old, cslablislied combinations of words are often preserved ancient end-
ings, whicli are otherwise lost or have become rare ; e. g. the fcm. tcrmiuatiou
n , -with the noun in connection with a following genitive (§89, 2, b), and with
the verb in union with suffixes (§ 59, 1). So also much, that belongs to the ancient
form of the language, is preserved in proper names and by the poets.
§ 91. NOUN WITH PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. ICl
that passage in Ps. 1. 10, Ixxix. 2, civ. 11, 20, Zeph. ii. 14, Is.
Ivi. 9) ; still other examples, 1^3 i:2 the son of Beor Num.
xxiv. 3, 15, Q;*''? r.y_i2 foimtain of water Ps. cxiv. 8, and per-
haps bsy iirs? the soul of the sluggard Prov. xiii. 4.
The effect of these endings on the vowels, is seen in the above exam-
ples. The Paltach of the feminine ending n— sometimes becomes
vocal Sh^va, and sometimes Qamets.
Rem. The relation of case being entirely lost in the terminations "i—
and i, they can no longer be regarded as case-endings. Yet the proba-
bility is, that as such they were once living elements of the language,
no less than the other termination n— (no. 2) ; especially, as the Old-
Arabic has precisely the corresponding endings, which, like the Hebrew,
it subsequently lost (see above). The same phenomenon is often
repeated in other languages. In the Latin, e. g. we find a fragmentary
use of the casus localis, with the same ending as in the Sanscrit (in
names of towns, ruri, domi, &c.); in the plural endings an and hd of the
modern Persian, lie ancient case-endings, but wholly extinct as such :
to say nothing of the Romanic and Germanic tongues.— Even where,
in Old-Arabic, the case-endings have penetrated the word-stem, and
hence take stronger sounds, as in !13K , "^as , X2X {co)istr. state of ai<
father), the modern has indeed all the three forms, but without distinc-
tion of case. Accordingly, in the Hebrew constr. state "^ns, "^nSj a
properly genitive ending should be recognized, and a nominative ending
intheChald. ^3J{, the Heb. ^n?a (nbcw?a), ^atJ (bs^rmi), ^5Q (^x^ss) ;
and hence, the more readily, the occurrence of both the forms ^S'^SC
and bNi3S, "^ainx and "{bBinst.
§91.
THE NOUN" WITH PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES.
In the union of the noun with pronominal suffixes, which are
here in the genitive (§ 33, 2, b), there are two things to be con-
sidered (as in the verb, § 56 foil.), namely, the form of the suffix
itself, and the effect on the form of the noun. Here we are con-
cerned chiefly with the former, as the latter will be considered in
connection with the paradigms of nouns, in §§ 92-95. A general
view of the suffixes is given also in Paradigm A. We treat of
the suffixes as they appear, first, in connection with the singular,
and then with the plural and dual of the noun.
1. The suffixes, as appended to the singular, are :
11
162
PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
Sitigular.
1 C0771. '^—
my.
1
^ j m. ^,T]_, in pause 7^_
1 / ^, ^^
Xthy.
2;
,j f 971. ^n, 1 ; ini_, i, ri
1 /• 0= ^^: ^'-r
his.
3
her.
Plural,
com. ^D, ^Dl_
m. DD, D5—
w. on , D— , poet. ilS-^
/. in. li K
our.
your.
their.
Rem. 1. There is less variety of forms here than in connection witii
the verb, and their use is as follows :
a) The forms without a union-vowel are joined to nouns which end with
a vowel, as ^"^^ij, wix and I'^nx, f7"^2!$, ^3''3i$, B?"'^'*., "l?''??^)
Dri"i2X, "niax . But nouns ending in H— and n-^ (see below, no. 4)
do not come under this rule.
6) The forms with a union-vowel (§ 58, 3, 6) are attached chiefly to
nouns ending with a consonant, which are by far the most numerous.
As to the union-vowel, the a sound is the prevalent one in the 3(i sing.
1, ri (contracted from *T\—), fern. PT— , and 3d plur. D— , 'i'3-7, )—,
and here e is very rare (e. g. ifTnis his light Job xxv. 3) except with
nouns in ti— ^, (the closing vowel-sound being combined with that of
the union-vowel or displaced by it), as Wib hisjield, fiN'i^a her aspect,
O"'^ her field ; on the contrary Tj — , ^3-^: are the customary forms,
while T]— , 'is^ are of rare occurrence, see Rem. 2.
2. Rare forms are :
Sing. 2d pers. m. n2^, e. g. MSSS thy hand Ps. cxxxix. 5 ', fi'm. Tj"^—
Ez. V. 12, ■'a^ Ps. ciii. 4, once ^3-^ Nah.ii. 14 (in several MSS. ns^,
ii^7 prob. = "^—7), also T\— Is. xxii. 1. — 3d pers. ri , e. g. in the frequent
ri^nx Gen. ix. 21 ; xii. 8 ; xiii. 3 ; xxxv. 21 ; tikp 2 Kings xix. 23, for
which we find isjp Is. xxxvii. 24, nmo Gen. xlix. 11 (A'Vi iniiD).
P/zir. 1st pers. ^3^. as >i3^'^p Job xxii. 20. and so Ruth iii. 2, Is. xlvii. 10.
—2d pers. njD Ez. xxiii. 48, 49.— 3d pers. m. cn^ 2 Sam. xxiii. 6 for
nin— (whence also, by contraction, the usual form D— ). /^e»i. "^JH"
1 Kings vii. 37, nj-^ Gen. xli. 21, f^3-7 Ruth i. 19, elsewhere chiefly
in pause ; '\T\ also is rare (Is. iii. J7), usually "|— .
2. When suffixes are appended to the plural masc. in D'^—
and the dual in D?— , these endings must take the form of the
construct state in i— (§89,2). This termination is combined
with the suffix, and hence the following forms :
SUFFIXES OP PLURAL AND DUAL NOUNS.
Singular
Plural.
com. ''—
my.
1 C0771. '^^"'^
our.
m. Tj'i —
Xthtj.
y your
m. 1''—, poet. ^fT'— :7
his.
her.
I m.nn^— ,poet.W^
■ their
)
§ 91. NOUN WITH PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 163
In most of these forms, the ending of the j)hiral construct "'—
remains unchanged, as 'in|''D^D, 'i:|''D^,D, DDJ'^DID ; in some it takes
Seghol in place of Tsere, as ^I'^D^D, •n|''r>1D ; in three forms with
very short suffixes it has P attach (§89, Rem.), as '^.^D^iD from
"jiD^D, ^f^D^D from ^I^D^D (comp. §28,4), ^DID siisa'i contracted
from susai-i.
Rem. 1. The Yodh, which distinguishes these suffixes, is occasion-
ally omitted in most of the persons, e. g. 5^2.'7'^ for ^i"^?'^'^ thy ways Ex.
xxxiii. 13, !!rt|;n for IfT'?"] his friends Job xlii. 10, nnr^^ after their
kinds Gen. i. 21. This is most frequent in the siiff. 3d pers. m. sing..
which is very often written 1—, but is almost always changed in the
K^ri to T^— ; e. g. isn Ms arrows Ps. Iviii. 8, K^ri I'^an.
2. Unusual forms : sing. 2d pers./! "X^-z Eccles. x. 17, '^3';'— r Ps- ciii.
3, 4, 5 ; 3d pars. m. ini (a strictly Chaldee form) Ps. cxvi. 12 ; 3d fern.
xnil_ Ez. xli. 15.— Plur. fern. i^;V~ ^z. xiii. 20, n^n''— Ez. xl. 16,
run-'— Ez. i. 11.
T V
3. On ia"'^ see farther in § 103. 2, Note.
3, That the Yodh, in these stiffi,xes to plural nouns, belongs
to the ending of the construct state, is clear and beyond doubt.
But this was so far lost sight of, in the use of the language, as to
give rise to this strange anomaly (inaccuracy, indeed) of speech,
viz. that suffix-forms with the plural ending '^~ were attached to
the feminine plural in fii, thus making a twofold designation of
the plural ; e. g. ^s^nic^o, ^^nioiD, i^nio^D.*
N. B. This is the rule ; but tlie naked suffix (as in No. 1) is also
attached to the ending ni, as ■^ni']3| Ps. cxxxii. 12, ?jni353 Deut. xxviii.
.59; indeed, with the 2Aplur. this is the more common form, e. g. cn"i2X
^/iei>/ai/iera, oftener than sninhx, as also nni53'r their names, Dni-i^
their generations.
4. In order to give a clearer view of what has been said, we
now present the following paradigm of the masctdine and femi-
ni?ie nouns ; selecting for it a w.ord whose stem-vowel is un-
changeable. In place of the feminine ending !l— in the singular,
appears the ending of the construct state, viz. ri_ , Its Pattach
is retained before QD, 'JD, but is lengthened to Qamets before
the other suffixes, where it comes into an open syllable (§ 89,
2,6).
* See an analogous case iu §8*7, 4, Rem. 1 Comp. the double feminine ending
in § 80, Rem. 2, /.
164
PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
1 c.
1
2m
91
6
5
2/
3 m
l3/
^Ic.
2 m.
3 m.
13/
1 C.
2 m.
i
2/
3 m
13/
^Ic.
6*
2m
2/
3 m
13/
Masculine Noun.
SINGULAR.
D^D equus.
"^pID equus Tneus.
Tfp'lD equus tuus.
•JD1D equus tuus, f.
iOlD equus ejus (suus).
?1D1D equus ejus (suus), f.
^DD'.D equus noster.
DDDID equus vester.
■JDDID equus vester, f.
DD^D equus eorum {suus).
■JD'lD equus earum {suus).
PLURAL.
1D1D e^'^Az mei.
tfliDID equi tui, f.
T^D'lD e^'i^i ejus {sui).
ri''p^D e^-^a e/M5 (sui), f.
^3'iD'lD eg^j^i nostri.
DD'^p'lD e^'^fi vestri.
P'^P^D e<7?fz vestri, f.
DH'^P^O e^'i^i eorum {sui).
'jn'^pID eg'7fi earum {sui).
Fembiivie Noun.
iriD^D eg-wa mea.
tfriDTO equa tua, f.
ino^D equa ejus {sua).
firiD^D e5'?<a ejus {sua), f.
■^ilTiDID eg'ifa nostra.
Dptlp^D e^-i^a vestra.
IDt^p^D e5'?<a vestra, f.
DlnD^D eg?/a eoriim {sua).
■jnp'^D e^f^m earum {sua).
nio^D equce.
•fliriiD^D eg?^® ^?<«, f.
I'lJniolO e^ifte ejus {sucb).
JniriiD^C e5'?f« e;w5 {sum), f.
'iS'^riiDIO eg-^f^ nostrcB.
DD'^riiOID eg'i/ffi vestrce.
■jD^'riioiD eg'?^^ vestrcB, f.
Qniriio^D eg-ifce eorum {sua).
inifiiO'iD eg-MCB earum, {suce).
§92.
YOWEL-OHANGES IN THE NOUN".
1. The vowel-changes in the noun are caused, a) by a fol-
lowing genitive ; h) by pronominal suffixes ; c) by the plural
and dual endings, to which is added, again, the effect of a geni-
tive following, or suffix.
2. The tone, in all these cases, is moved forward more or
less or even thrown upon the following word. We here distin-
guish three cases, viz.
a) When the tone is moved forward only one place. This
effect is produced by most of the suffixes for singular nouns
(V; ^-, n-.; "i, ^n-,; n_, r;_ ; ^li^- D-, it:i-), and
by the plural and dual terminations ; as nn'^ word, ^'^^^ my
§ 92. VOWEL-CHANGES IN THE NOUN. 165
word, plur. D'^"!^'^ ; vjiS loing, dual D'pSiS wings ; y^^ enemy,
"^yy!^ my enemy, D'^r!'^. Such is also the effect of the light
suffixes for plural nouns,* as ^— ; T-^rj =1'!'-^; 'T'— ? ^•^"'-^•
ir^L^ ; iri^, rd^^, e. g. ^nn^, 'i:^5^'7.
6) When the tone is moved forward two jilaces ; as in the plural
construct state, and when the grave suffixes are appended to
the plural (D?''— , QO"^— )• There is here a greater shortening
of the vowels (if mutable), e. g. D^H "''1^'^ ivords of the peo-
ple ; DD'''13'1 your words ; DSl'^'ll'l their words.
In segholates, as the tone is on the penullima, there is still another
distinction. The appended suffix has less effect than the (graver) plu-
ral ending D"'-^, ni : the former leaves the chief vowel still under the
first letter, as ''3^'? ; the latter takes in its place a vocal Sh^ca, and
Qamels under the second stem-letter, as Q'^3^^. Comp. § 93, 6.
c) Wheii a half-syllahle loith vocal Sh^'va precedes the ptronom-
inal suffix- ; as with ^ ; DD, "jD ; also Avith ori, "JH, "jH (for
which we have far more frequently D— , "}— ). Of these the
first is a light suffix, and regularly affects the tone in just the
same manner as '^— , i, e. g. '^'Q'^^, ^"'^^j ^?)?T- The others
are grave suffixes, and have more effect in shortening the
vowels, DD"12"7, &c., as is shown in the Paradigms. A simi-
lar effect is seen in the construct state of the singular number,
as D'n'bs nn^ ; n^2n n:2n (from isn).
3. The vowel-changes in feminine nouns (§ 95) are less con-
siderable, the addition of the feminine ending having already
occasioned a shortening of the vowels (§ 94).
Most of the vowel-changes, which form this internal infection of the
noun, are based on the principles laid down in §§ 23-29. There are
others, however, which are occasioned by the peculiar structure of cer-
tain forms of nouns exhibited in §§ 84, 85, 86. They are nearly all
confined to the last two syllables of the word, the third syllable from the
end seldom having a mutable vowel (§ 27, init.). — There is this marked
difference between the vowel-changes in the verb and the noun : viz.
that ill the verb, the second o( two changeable vowels mostly disappears
(ba;^, r\hjq\i, !iVj;5), in thenounthe//-s< (12'n, '^'la'n, C"'"!^'^); comp. §27,
3. — Changes of consonants are very few, and occur only in Parad. IX.
N. B. For the more convenient exhibition of the inflections and other
changes in the nominal forms, we now subjoin Paradigms, first of the Mas-
culines (§ 93), and then of the Feminines (§ 95), prefixing to the latter the
statement of vo^vel-changes in the formation of the Feminine (§94).
* On the light and grave suffixes, see Note, pp. 166 and 167.
166
PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
Paradigms of
I.
II.
III.
IV.
(foithmt change.)
a.
Sing, absol.
D^D
T
T)?fe
^5^
(horse)
(eternity)
(overseer)
(word)
constr.
tm
dbi^
Ti?a
- t
light suff.
lp>lD
''^bij?
"^IT^
• T t
grave suff*
Q3D^0
QS'abis?
c?Tp3
B5'?=^1
Plur. absol.
D^WO
D^)3bi2>
t3''T)?S
d^nn^
constr.
ID^D
i^bi>
''I'^ps
'''D^'7
light suff.
ID^D
'^^biy
''ITS
- T I
grave suff.
DDiD'lD
dD'i^bi^
Q^^'I'^pS)
ds'^r^n'i
Dual absol.
Dtittii
B'?'nl?b'a
• - \ I
n?B53
constr.
(two days)
(pair of tongs)
(two weeks)
(wings)
VI.
r
d.
e.
f.
g-
h.
S'm^. aftsoZ.
^fl
J^??
b?J3
V T
»T?T
(a youth) (perpetuity)
(work)
(death)
(olive)
constr.
^?l
ns5
b?J3'
nitt
m
light suff.
^'^t)
''n^!?
''b^B
•iriiii
''in'^l
grave suff.
D3'l?5
03^!^?
dsbJs
dDini-a
l=?J^^T
Plur. absol.
d'ln:?^
u-^rih
d'lbis
d^nia
d'^ri'^'r
constr.
"•t????
V^^
*• t: it
iriitt
^TPy.
light suff.
^^^r^
inis
iby&
- T :
''initt
''^\'f
grave suff.
^T^h
B^'^t)^?
!=?''!??&
ds'^riiia
03''^?''!
Dual absol.
i3?b?5
(sandals)
(eyes)
constr.
"•^S?
"^r?
* By grave (i. e. the more strongly accented) suffixes, are meant most suffixes
of the 2d and 3d persons; viz. for sing, nouns, d3 , "jS , on . ")n (but not D— , ia- ) ;
§ 93. PARADIGMS OF MASCULINE NOUNS.
167
Masculine Nouns.
IV.
VI.
b.
f
a.
b.
c.
1
a.
b.
c.
T T
VI
m
•• T
n>^
"^50
^'^p
(sage)
(elder) (shoulder)
(court)
(king)
(book)
(sanctuary)
D?H
m
fl^l
"l?'^
1^%
^5?
'^'ip
''^sn
iSj?T
""^V"}.
""S^^
• I •
^'<^1'^
D?^?*!!
t3?rl?T
^T^V^.
£333^^
ts^'isp
DDTB'I]?
o'liasri
Q^'SpT
D^"??"
• T :
d'l'ii&D
aiT^i]?^
''^^'l
15|?T
''^^^n
■ ''?^^
^y^^
^tn
- T -:
^5J5T
'^'D^il
- T :
I'lSD
^tp...
03^'K?Dn
D3^3]5f
D5''':?^ri
DDiDbU
t3?'''DS0
cp^'isil?
Q^iibin
o'r?':??
D?^!!
D??S3
t3??f;i'?
(hips)
(thighs)
(feet)
(two folds)
(loins)
''Sbn
.'•^a'l
'lintt
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
L
a.
b.
1 —
a.
b.
c.
• :
n?i5
DtO
T
. Bi?
ph
njh
(fruit)
(enemy)
(name)
(sea)
(mother)
(statute)
(seer)
T^^
=i:?i^
DT»
Q!!
Q$
-Pri
riTn
""Tk
Itt©
h^h
'i^X
'^l?^?
im
to^i'is
D?;i?i5
DD^T^
t33tl^
^!?^^
Q?)?0
B?|n
a^^is:
• :
ni^TO
fi^^:?
niriii:
d'-j^n
d^iTh
(gazelles)
•• <
nitt©
'^^::
ni^si.
''i?*^
"'in
- I
ini^ti
lis;)
'T&ii'i^
^Wl
'im
t3?'';i;'i5
QD'iriittTiJ
03^^::
dD^niiz^
C3?''I5n
M'^in
• - T J
I3!?51^tt
D^SX
d;>2T»
(cheeks) (p
lair of scales)
(nostrils)
(teeth)
•^STSia
'^fibK
''.l^
xl forjoZwr. nouns, OS''—, 1?"^—, t^ri*'— , 'jll'^— (but not 'i^''— ). Tlie others nit,
i!Ied light suffixes. ,
168 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
§93.
PARADIGMS OF MASCULINE NOUNS.
Masculine nouns may be most conveniently arranged, with
reference to their vowel-changes, in nine classes, as in the pre-
ceding table. The necessary explanations are subjoined. We
here only remark in general,
a) that all feminines without a distinctive termination (§ 107,
1, 3) are inflected like masculine nouns, e. g. S")l1 sKwrd ;
with only this distinction, that they commonly take the plu-
ral ending rii ; e. g. ijIut. ahsol. riil'ntn, consti'uct state mnnn,
where with suffixes the more perfect shortening always re-
mains, as seen in the Paradigms oi feminine nouns, § 94 ;
b) tliat in the plural, all light suffixes are attached to the ahso-
lute, and grave siiffixes to the construct state.
EXPLANATIONS OF THE PARADIGMS.
1. To Parad. I. belong all nouns whose vowels are immuta-
ble (§ 25). Of course there are no vowel-changes in this Para-
digm, and it is inserted only for comparison with the others.
E. g. according to § 25. 1, T^^ cily, hip voice, HJ^inb garment, SiiT arm ;
. § 25, 2, D|? for DN|5 standing tip, 15 for "i''r< stranger; § 25, 3, "liaa Ae/'o.
pn^^ -nghieous, "iisn merciful, niPlira destruction; § 25, 4, TUns for TIJS'nQ
liorseman. Here belong, therefore, the classes o^ verbal nouns given in
§ 84, Nos. 6, 7, 8, 13, 26, 27.
2. To Parad. II. belong nouns which have a inutahle Qamets
in their final syllable, and are either monosyllabic or have the
preceding vowels immutable. E. g. 1^ hand, HDis star, "^^yo
wilderness.
Witli the suffix 133 there is the normal shortening, as in Bap^l'y ; but
"i;! becomes DD"7;| (for DDT^), and tn becomes D3^':i ; see § 27, Rem. 2, 3.
Of course, nouns whose final Qamets is unchangeable. Avhich resem-
ble, in form, the above examples, do not belong here ; e. g. forms like
Vjf?, b-Jp (§ 84, Nos. 6, 13), 0^3 as Part, of verbs IS, &c. Derivatives
from verbs iib also commonly retain their Qamets, e. g. !!<'^pa assembly,
plur. constr. "isni:?^.
3. Parad. III. embraces those nouns which have an immuta-
ble vowel in the final syllable, and a mutable Qamets or Tsere
(pretonic vowel, §26,3) in the penultima. Exs. bina great, "jilSl
lord, D^iy strong, l^'QX, plur. W'Z'^'CiVi, faithfulness, l^yyS') famine.
§ 93. PARADIGMS OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 166
pIST remejnhrance. The last two take in the construct state
the forms X^1'$'\ and pnDT.
There are also nouns of the above forms, which have a firm Qainels
before the tone-syllable. Exs. ^■''^3 for yi'ns tyrant, y^^n for y^i'^n
diligent (see verbal nouns, § 84, No. 7) ; also lU'^blU chariot-warrior,
pliir. Qiiaib^, Ex. xiv. 7. Many are not uniform in this respect; e. g.
'S^'2^ week, see the Lexicon.
4. Parad. IV, embraces nouns of two syllables with a muta-
ble Qamets in both. Sometimes one, and sometimes both are
shortened, according to the change in the place of the lone (§92,
2). Nomis of this form are very numerous. The influence of a
guttural, especially on the form of the plural construct state, is
seen in the second of the two examples given in the Paradigm.
Other examples are : ntlT gold, HST tail, and with a guttural
DT^iJ guilt, '2.T\ faniine.
In like manner are declined nouns of the less frequent form
bT:];?, e. g. 3Db heart, "^DTI' strong drink ; with a guttural, "lyil?
hair, 333? grape.
Some nouns of this class take a segholate form in the sing, conslr.
state J e. g. 2'^S (rib) constr. 'Sh%, but also "sh^. 2 Sam. xvi. 13 ; and so
-ID3 (foreign) constr. 135 Deut. xxi. 16, iSb (hair) constr. "i^U and i?b,
before Maqqeph once ""jab (for "3b) from ')ab white Gen. xh'x. 12, ""irj
(ornament) constr. 'Titi and itFi Dan. xi. 20, "JIU^ (smoke) conslr. 'jiiis and
liyj.; Ex. xix. 18 (comp. No. V, and "ina together with naj § 84, Nos. 10
and 11). Qamets is immutable in both syllables of i-Jnn (faber) for
UiN'Tin and ^'^}^ (horseman) for 'lUX'nQ , § 84, No. 6.
5. Parad. V. is properly a mere variation of the preceding
one. The final Tsere is treated like the final Qamets in Parad,
IV., except that in the construct state ^J^T stands for "jpT . Some
nouns, however, take the segholate form (No, VI.) in the con-
struct state; e.g. 5riri| shoulder, constr. st. '^^7)2 for vl^S ; "Tia
u^all, constr. st. I'll! for Tl3 ; Tf°}^ thigh, constr. st. 1\~\\ for tj"?';^.
Still more rare is the occurrence of both forms, as 132 (lieavy)
constr. St. 1D5 Ex. iv. 10 and 133 Is. i, 4 ; biy (uncircumcised)
constr. st. bl? and biy .
Rare exceptions are forms like "bSN Ps. xxxv. 14 (followed by
Maqqeph) constr. state of b3X mourning. Other examples of the first
kind are : iri^ il^eg), 1?^ neighbor, Sib (sated) constr. state "30. ^lij?
Some nouns of this form retain their Tsere in the plur. constr. state ;
^- »• "l^'^ (sleeping) plur. conslr. ''i'a'} ; so also ibnN monrning, "^n?^
rejoicing, ^'r\'^,^_ foigi:tti)ig ''^sn desiring.
1 70 PART II. PAR'm OF SPEECH.
6. To Paiad. VI. belongs the large class of nouns denomi
nated Segholate forms (§ 84, No. 11). The chief peculiarity in
their inflection is, that before suffixes and in the construct state
of the plural and dual, they appear in their original monosyllabic
form, with the stem-vowel (a, ?, 0) under the first stem-letter ;
e. g. '^3'?^, '^"iSD, 'i^^'li?- B'^it ill (^lie absolute state of the plural,
an a. sound comes in before tbe tone of the ending (in an open
syllable, hence Qa?Jiets)^ whilst in the proper place of the stem-
vowel (under the first radical) there is only a vocal &7i''va ; e. g.
^jb-a (king) plur. D"^Dbl2. Comp. §92, 2.
These forms may be arranged in three general classes, the
first having A, the second E, the third O, in the first syllable.
The Paradigm exhibits under a, b, c, derivatives of the regulai
verb ; under d, e, f, forms which have a guttural in the final
syllable ; under g, h, derivatives from feeble stems '^^ and '^V ;
and under i a derivative from a verb nb. Comp. §85, IV. No.
11,V. No. 11.
Remarks.
1. In the form T\^h (for Tj^^. § 27, Rem. 2, c) appears the original A
of the first syllable not only before suffixes, as in "'S^'?, but also mostly
in pause (§ 29, 4), e. g. D"!? in pause C^^S, and before n— local (§ 90. 1)
as ni£"ii<. In the Septuagint, also, proper names like ^^h, rsf are
regularly written with A in the first syllable, as 'A^sk, 'f(x(pi&. The
word 7")5<, with the article, is constantly written ']-"iXfi ; derivatives
from verbs l'^ also take Qamets for their first vowel, as r\in. The
word K"^? valley has the original monosyllabic form. Many of these
scgholates retain the .S'eg7(o/ of the first syllable in pause, e.g. T\?,^.
p'lS, N^Q, uip ; on the contrary. 1^23, rJ^llJ , n"in. The latter form is
most frequent, and with a guttural is the prevalent one.
There are, however, nouns of this form, which take r instead of a,
whether from shortening the a to that degree, or from passnig over
entirely to the form "id6 ; e. g. I3p grave (in pause 13^). "'")^P, plur.
constr. "^"Iiap ; "Ua womb, "'SDa ; n53 garment, "^"laa (bigh^clhi). varying
from the usual form ''S^^ , the Daghesk required by rule in i being
omitted in this word; P7.^ righteousness. '^P'lS ; n3T sacrifice. "TiaT.
In some words, both forms occur, as ^b"| child, "^"^h"^ Hos. i. 2 and "'"ib"^
Is. Ivii. 4.
Nouns of the form T^h, when their third stem-letter is a guttural,
are sounded as nST sacrifice, "^t seed, 2."b6 rock; when the second
stem-letter is a guttural, as bn: brook. i?? (see Parad. d). seldom like
onls bread. It is to be observed, moreover, that in the hard combination
(viz. where the second radical has ciuiescent Shh-a. and the ihird radi-
cal would take Dnghesh lenr, as in '^3b'2) simple Slfva may be retained
§ 93. PARADIGMS OF IMASCULINE KOUKS. 171
here also, as in '^onb ; on the contrary, tiae forms corresponding to "^5^.0
(§ 21, 2, a) are always pointed as ■'bnj , ^nSJiZJ.
2. The form ISO, nS3 (6, e). when its first letter is a guttural, takes
Seghol before suffixes in the singular and in the phir. conslr. ; e. g. bss
calf. ""^5^, '^^??. The monosyllabic form appears in NlJn. With ti—
local, Tsere is retained, as <T91^ from Cip. </ie ^as^. Examples of this
form are : oaui staff] "iTS i^ow, "j^sn delight.
3. The form IZJ'ip (c) in connection with suffixes takes also Qibbiits,
but rarely ; e. g. b'la greatness, ibna Ps. cl. 2. Like Q?^i'2 liudVkheni is
formed also (without a guttural) ^^ajj?, from aiip.p pestilence Hos. xii-i. 14.
— From bss (letter/) occurs also with sufF. ib^Q for 'ibs^S (not from bss)
Is. i. 31, and so also iixin Is. lii. 14 for iij^n 1 Sam, xxviii. 14, where the
Qamets-chatuph (supported by Methegh) is protracted to a long vowel ;
comp. § 62, Rem. 4.
In the plural absolute, but few nouns have the form in the Paradigm
with Chateph- Qamets under the first radical, e. g. D"'l!J'ir|i months, t3'i"iSS'.
gazelles, ninnx ways ; most nouns take simple Sh^va, as Q'^'ips from ^^3
morning, ti'^nio"! from ri^'l spear, hence Dfi'^liJa'i with Qamets-chatuph, but
also "^530 from T^ab thicket ; two have in the plur. abs. Qamets-chatuph,
as D'^^Tp {qu-dha-shim), hence also with light sujf. '^V^'p^-, "^'ly'^S,
li'd^l^ (but also ranj^-rx, and with the article always ta^'ii:'!)?!! with
Chateph- Qamets), and C'Uli'^tJ (slw-rd-shhn) roots, with light svff. T'dniiJ,
n-'uin^ , from lU'iiiJ (see § 9, Rem. 2). The word binS has, by a Syriasm,
D-'briLVfor Q'^bnx, with light suff. "'brtx, ^^''^rj^*, 1'^bnx (see § 23, 4, Rem.
2) ; but with a preposition and the article n"'bnx3, constr. state and with
grave suff. "'briN , DsibriN . With n— local the Cholem is retained, as
nbrtSri tmoards the tent.
4. After the same analogy are inflected the kindred monosyllabic
forms, whose vowel is between their last two stem-letters (§84,. No.
10); as a=\!3 shoidder, \Y\\h suff. ''asd ; Injin. bbp, "^baf? ; 33^:3, i33ir
(so usually with the Inf., omitting Dag. lene in the third radical, not as
isb^s).
5. Only derivatives from verbs 15 and "'S' change their form in the
sin^g-. co?2s/r. sto/e (by contraction of the diphthongs aw and ay into 6
and e, § 24, 2, b and Note *) as n'l^ prop, mawth, maidh, contracted m'J2.
Before in— /oca/ this contraction does not take place ; e. g. <"in'i^ ; •^ri'??
(except in the conslr. state, as v|OT^ nn"i3). The middle radical some-
times appears as a consonant in the plur. abs., as B"'l!i^ri from UJ';in he-
goat, Tiii'^V fountains from I';'? ; and even in some Avords, where by con-
traction it has become a vowel in the ground-form, as "lili: o.i; plur.
ni-iTO ; "T^"^ pot, jAur. d'^IJ'^ ; p'ld street, plur. D'^p;iiy .
6. Of segholates from verbs nb there are also properly three classes,
distinguished by the A, E, and O sounds (§ 85, V. 11). E. g. "'"iX lio)i,
"^rib cheek, ■'bn sickness; in pause, ''iX . inb, "^bn ; with suff. res. "''^"iN,
"^l^}., ■''?r'n ; in the plur. and dual, Q''']^ii, Q'tinb, fi-'ibn. In the plu-
ral, some nouns take K instead of "^ , on account of the preceding A sound
(§ 24. 2. c) ; as i3:r gazelle, plar. t:"iX3}£ ; "ins simple, plur. n-^xns.
172 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
7. To Parad. VII. (nearly resembling Parad. II.) belong
nouns which have mutable Tsere in their iinal syllable, and are
either monosyllabic, or have their preceding vowels immutable.
It accordingly embraces all participles in Kal (of the form b'Jp,
not Vjp), and those in Piel and Hithpael, the form bDp (§ 84,
No. 9), and several others, e. g. b'^^ staff, 1?i^ ti7?ie, ?'1'1B2|:
frog, &c.
The following deviations from the Paradigm are to be noted :
a) Several nouns take Pattach in the constr. state (as in Parad. V.) ;
e. (f. ^QCa mourning, constr. slate ''Qp'S ; especially with gutturals, as
nat^a altar, constr. state Hafa. b) Before suffixes occur such forms as
nalsp'O, cansi'a from risiri sign, or as ^iNpS from NS3 throne, or as ?jnb(D.
c) in words of one syllable Tsere is retained in the plur. ahsol. as the
Paradio-m shows ; it is also retained in several words which are not
monosyllabic, as C^^^ descendants of the third generation, W^hrvp^
assemblies.
8. Parad, VIII. embraces nouns which double their final
stem-letter when they receive any accession at the end ; whether
the doubling results from contraction within the stem itself, or is
merely euphonic. The vowel before the doubled letter is then
short, and the syllable is sharpened (§ 27, 1). The preceding sylla-
bles, when the word has more than one, are treated as the nature
of the syllables requires. E.g. '5n|l camel, plur . Li'^bl2l^ , ''V/25 ;
'jSis wheel, plur. a^2B'^X ; ^^ba loheel, plur. D'^^aba. Nouns of
almost every form are found among those w4iich are inflected
according to this Paradigm. Whether a noun belongs here can-
not, therefore, be known from its form, though its etymology
will generally decide.
Etymology refers to this Paradigm the following classes of nouns;
viz. 1) All contracted derivatives of verbs VV (§ 83, II.), as b'n, 'jn, ph,
yya., &c. and primitives which follow the same analogy, as Q^ sea, "iti
mountain, ^i^fre. 2) Contracted forms, like riX anger (for Cl.SS, § 19.2)
with suff. "isx, na daughter (for n;a) with svff. "^na, ns) time (for nns),
plur. nTiS and ninS. 3) Denominatives, especially Patronymic and
Gentilic forms in ''— , as D'"»lb levites, D'l'^i'isiri'J Jews, though the forms
niisirr;! , n'i"i33 foreigners, are at least equally common. 4) Derivatives
of the stronger stems (§ 84) under the following Ibrms : 10. "l^T time ;
14. ~^H^ darkness. Tari^ delight; 15. "Unx gift, ',bas plur. n^SJSa moun-
tain-peaks; 21. c'nx red; 36. b:ana orchard, with stiffi i^a"!? , oann,
plur. C^sanri sacred-scribes. But there are also words of all these fivc^
forms which do not take Daghesh in the plural, and those which arc
here adduced are to be regarded rather as exceptions to the prevailina
usage. They are pointed out in the Lexicon.
§ 94. VOWEL-CHANGES IN FElVnNINE NOUNS. 173
Before suffixes with only vocal Sh'va for a union-vowel (as T] — ,
D3— ), the Daghesh may be omitted. The same vowel is generally
retained, however, except that in words of the form ph it is more com-
monly Qamets-chahiph.
Pattach before the doubled letter is retained in some words, as 31
much, plur. d'la'i ; in others it is shortened into Chireq, as PiQ morsel,
9. Parad. IX. embraces derivatives from stems Tb (§ 85, V.)
which terminate in n_ ; as T&'l beautiful, ns^'l sesr, TiKI'a aspect.
Only the changes which affect the final syllable ru. (which is
treated very much as in verbs <lb) are peculiar to this Paradigm ;
the preceding syllables being treated as their own nature re-
quires.
As the ending n— stands for "'— (§ 24, 2. Rem. a. and § 75, 1, Rem.),
there occur, not unfrequently, singular forms with suffixes which have
the appearance of the plural; e. g. ?]''S3^ thy covering, Is. xiv. 11 (not
thy coverings). ^C^Sp^ thy cattle Is. xxx. 23, 'T]'?N'ia thy form Cant. ii. 14.
tsniNia, Dan. i. 15,' Gen. xli. 21, T^iUS^ his doing 1 Sam. xix. 4, "^Jp^ my
cattle, Ex. xvii. 3. and so also perhaps "^iuiJ ony maker Job xxxv. 10.
But with these occur also the forms, in which (as in the Parad.) the n—
falls away, or becomes merged in the union-vowel ; as ^^sp^i Gen. xxx.
29, ^inspa Gen. xxxi. 18. In the plural, we find also D^-^nxj^a (from
nn?ari for ''n^o Part. Pual). Is. xxv. 6.
§94.
VOWEL-OHANGES IN" THE FORMATION OF FEMININE NOUNS.
1. The termination !n_ (§80, 2) appended to a masculine
noun affects the tone of the word, and consequently its vowels,
in the same manner as the light suffixes beginning with a vowel
(see § 92, 2, a). The following are examples of the formation of
feminines in the several Paradigms ;
Parad. I. DID, fern. HD^O. II. 5?Si^, fern. HXlti'a outgoing.
III. bina great, fern, nbiia. IV. DjPp, fern. "TKilP? vengeance.
V. I)?: old, fern. n:pT. VI. ^b^j fern, nsb-a queen; ^np, fern.
nnnp covert; X)'S,, fern. riD^r delight; W^, /em. nbsx /ooc?;
^^j./ew. nnys damsel ; *^'^^,fem. Sl'l'^S game ; "''lb (not in use),
"n^)^ wreath. VII. bpp,/em. nbtpp. YIll. ^'^.fem.'ny^ 7?iuch ;
pn, f€?n. npn laiv ; ^"Q, fern. JTl'a measure. IX. HS]?, /em.
nsp end.
174 PART I[. PA HI'S OF SPEECH.
2. The ending Sn-l shortens the vowel of the preceding sylla-
ble in the same manner as n_ ;* e. g. HTJ? and constr. state
mtb? croivn ; "^llT} fellow, fern. S^'^^H- ^^^ ^^ ^^^° affects the
vowel of the final syllable in several ways, so that the termina-
tion of the word follows the analogy of the segholate forms ;
namely,
a) Qmnets and Pattach are both changed to jSeghol, e. g. Dnin
seal, fern, rrariin.
b) Tsere in some words is retained, in others is changed to Se-
ghol, e. g. TiJ'HO) fern,, constr. rrCD^n five ; 'I'lS, fern, cotistr.
tT^"l5 ivall.
c) The firm and very long vowels (i, 1, ''-) are changed to the
corresj3onding mutable vowels, e. g. 1013, /em. nt^n shame;
nnairs? night-iuatch (also nnTOtDJ?) from the masc. iTOtDS ;
nnnil mistress (also fT^'^35) from "i"^35.
Hence, for feminine nouns also, there are three segholate
forms, ri;:^ (for T\^ or i^rv), J^:rr) and riT-*, corresponding exactly
to the forms of masculine nouns in Parad. VI. The same corres-
pondence appears also in their inflection in the singular. The
termination T\-l (when the word ends with a guttural) always
changes the preceding vowel to Pattach, e. g. ''jy\12,fem. n?niT2
acquaintance ; 1p\,fem. t\in knowledge ; mn? rest, from nb (not
in use).
Rem. I. An unusual form, n— for n^^f, has already been noticed in
§ 74, Rem. 3. Of another kind is the form Fi^b^ for n-i^^ Gen. xvi. 11,
Judges xiii. 5, 7 (like "^b"? = Ty??^). As this form, in all the three places
where it occurs, stands connected with the 2d pers./e)».. Perfect, it may
in this case have been so uttered with a designed approximation to that
Perfect form ; for with the 3d pers. we find the regular form '^l^'^ Gen.
xvii. 19 ; Is. vii. 14.
2. When masculines of Parad. VII. receive the termination Pi-^,
they necessarily omit the doubling of their final stem-letter; hence
nia^n constr. ri^j^n five; cnis'iit reddish, plur. Ci"'5a'n^nx, but /em.
na^a'is. So b'l and n^fi door (fi-om bb'n), nsn rack, from qsn.
* This is contrary to the general rule (§ 27, 3), since (he tone is not thrown for-
ward. But the exception is accounted for by the fact, that this T\—- is a short
ened form of the accented Pi— :•; see § 80, 2.
§ 95. PARADIGMS OF FEMNINE NOUNS.
175
§95.
PARADIGMS OF FEMININE NOUNS.
The inflection of these nouns is more simple than that of
masculines (§92, 5), the addition of the feminine ending having
already occasioned as much contiaction and shortening of the
vowels as is admissible. E. g. from Parad. III. Tibia ; YH.
tlbipp ; VIII. nsi, niia, "1?^- All these feminine forms belong
to the single Parad. A. In the plural, there is no distinction
made between the light and the grave suffixes, the former as
well as the latter being appended to the construct state.
These nouns have only three modes of inflection, Parad. A
(which is inserted merely for the sake of comparison) having no
vowel-changes. A general view of these inflections is presented
in the subjoined table, which is followed by the necessary expla-
nations.
A.
{no voicelchanges.) '~
B.
a.
b.
c.
Sing, absol.
T
T T
T ■•
't t :
(mare)
(year)
(sleep) (righteousness)
constr.
light stiff.
.
grave
suff.
DDPC^O
03ri?T^
°?r?^
Q?f?I?':i2?
Plur. absol.
pio^D
1
niD©
ni:iu
nipi^
constr.
ric^o
1
ni:TiJ
Piiiij
pipi^
with siiff.
'^n-'c^D
•^Tfab
^ni;u3
^nip-ts
Dual absol.
D^ins^
D^'nxs
constr.
(lips) (two sides)
a '
D.
iSing. absol.
Tdya
b.
c.
nam
T : T
^I?*?'^''
b.
nbaba
constr.
(queen)
rsb-o
(reproacli)
rsnn
(waste)
(sprout)
(skull)
light suff.
Ti?'"^
insnn
^^T}'^
^npDi'i
■ipbaba
grave suff.
Dsnsb^ n?r'S'?n
Q^nnnn
D?!???"!^
D?^'?!!^
Plur. absol.
nisbia
nisnri
niann
n"ip2i^
nibaba
constr.
niDb)2
piB"in
ninnn
nipsi"!
nib^ba
with suff.
Dual absol.
^ninnn
^nip3i^
D^^nbs^
^nibaba
constr.
(two sides'* (double em-
IPST^ broidei-y)
(cymbals)
(fetters'.
176 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
EXPLANATIONS.
1. To Paiad. B belong those feminiiies which have a muta-
ble Qainets or Tsere before the feminine ending o—. E. g. nsp
end, n23? counsel, •^)P'7? righteousness, '*'\^VyP\ abomination. It
accordingly embraces the feminine forms of nouns belonging to
Parads. II. IV. V. and of several belonging to Farad. IX.
When the Qamets, or Tsere, is preceded by a half-syllable
with vocal iSh^va (§ 26, 4), there is formed, on the falling away
of the former, a closed syllable with a short vowel in place of the
vocal Sh'^va, as shown in the Parad. rijy'^r. In like manner •
nbns corpse, nbn:, inbn? ; nbj? a wain, Tr?.?-
Many nouns of this form, however, take in the construct state
and before suffixes the coexisting form in r— or ri^(§89, 2, b,
§94, 2). E. g. nDb)2ia Jdngdom, constr. state t^3?^ia, with suff.
^vdra^Z ; so also rrnSSn ornament, ^"iSSn ; nHBTS'a family,
Qamets is imnmlable in all nouns like niy)53, HTStN (§ 84. Nos. 25.
2S), constr. state rid)?a, n'^S'lN. Tsere is also unchangeable in most
verbals of the form iTinx destruction, fibn plunder (§ 84, No. 13); but
in others it is mutable, as in fi^XtJ request (§ 84. No. 2). The character
of the vowel, in each case, is given in the Lexicon.
2. To Parad. C belong feminines derived from the segholate
forms (Parad. VI.), to which their inflection also is analogous.
As tfb'a forms D'^pb'a in the p^?<r. ahs., so also here a Qamets
comes before the third radical in the plural ; as SniDb'Q queeiis ;
niiuns latnbs, from nicns.
Care must be taken not to confound with nouns of this class, those
feminines of the same form which are not derived from segholates, parti-
cularly the derivatives from verbs fih of the form S^^iS^, iiN"!^, whose
masculine form is M.'^l?^. f^^*"}^. The first syllable of these nouns is
immutable, e. g. niS^D ,' nix-i?? .
3. To Parad. D belong segholate nouns formed by the addi-
tion of the feminine ending r.T^(§ 94, 2). These correspond, in the
inflection of the singular, to masculine segholates (§ 93, Parad.
VI). To the examples in the Paradigm may be added, fT^aptt
enclosure, ^"13^1 letter, H'listo'a loages.
Of the form "^ED, which is rare in this class of nouns. ri^;x woman.
with suff. "^ni^X, would be an example. The same inflection, however,
is exhibited by some words ending in rvp, viz. those in which this ter-
§96. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 177
mination takes the place of n^ ; e. g. H'lH (for rrib') to bear, with sriff.
^Pi'ib ; in like manner naiij, ''T\'2i!i (from the masc. 3'^). — ns'iiia takes
with suffixes the form ''Fiyniia .
Many nouns of this class borrow their plural from the coex-
isting' form in H— , T\— (Parad. B) ; as ri"?Jli5 capital of a col-
umn, j)lur. rii"iini3 ; mc")n'a lyloughshare, jilur. tniiij'in'a ; nnDiri
reproof, plur. tiinsin ; trnn©;? Astarte, plur. niintpy.
§96.
LIST OF THE IRREGULAR NOUNS.
1. There are several anomalous forms of inflection, chiefly
occurring in single examples only, or at most in very few, which
may be best exhibited in an alphabetical list of the words in
which they are found. They are the more important, because,
as in all languages, the words which they affect are those in
most common use.
2. Most of these irregularities of inflection consist in the deri-
vation of the construct state, or of the plural, not from the abso-
lute state of the singular, but from another wholly different form ;
precisely similar to what we have seen in the inflection of the
irregular verb (§78). Compare yuv)], yvvaixoQ ; vdojQ, v8a-
Tog.
3S (as if for r.2N from t^^'A*) father ; constr. state^'2'i^,,
with suff. ^ns {my father), T^^, ^T'^% plur. niss? {}i%l , 4).
HX brother, constr. '^HS, with suff. "^HX {qny brother), ^'^^'^,
DD^'n^, phir. constr. ''nji?, Dp'^ns. All these forms follow the
analogy of verbs nb, as if HK stood for nnK from ^T}^. But
the plur. absol. is D'^nji with Dag. forte implicitimi (§22, 1),
as if from nns? ; hence 'iHS, '^'^HX, H'^ns, &c. For the form
THX (Avhich is always used instead of T^Hii) see § 27, Rem. 2, b.
ini< ojie (for ll^i?, also with Dag. forte implicitum, see
§22, 1, and comp. §27, Rem. 2, b), constr. state ^HS, fern.
nns for tTini? tma (see § 19, 2), in pause nns? . In one in-
stance, Ez. xxxiii. 30, it takes the form in (by apharesis,
§ 19, 3), as in Chald. and Syr. Plur. D'^IHifl some.
* As these nouns, though primitives, follow the analogy of yerhals (§ 82, 2),
it is necessary, in order to understand their inflections, that we should know to
which class of irregular verbs they respectively conform.
12
178 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
niniJ sister {contr. for Snini}, as if from a masc. T\^= H^),
plur. ZTT'nil!, with stiff. ''O'i'^n^ (from a sing. n^HN^yem. from
TlS?), also !i:'nins (as if from a sing. Hnx).
TZJ^iN a man, a softened form of TC:x, T»2X (§ 19, 5, Rem.) ; in
the i)lur. it has very seldom D'^TC'^X, the usual form being D'^TppS
(from TIJ.:S), coiistr. ^tJfX. Comp. nifs.
rras maid-servant, plur. (with H as consonant) miTTaX,
nirrax. Comp. in Aram. 'IT}'^^ fathers, and similar cases.
ntSS woman (for mL':if:,yew. from tDjN, see ©"li?), constr.
state mSN (/ew. from ©■'X, with e for t) ; with stiff. '^nCSI,
Til^lSS, 7j/m;-. D'^1^3, abbreviated from D'^ll?2X, constr. "^TC?.
n'l'S house (perhaps a softened form from rsi (1^33), § 19, 5,
Rem.), derivative of Hja ^o ftzriM (like do/uog from dt/uco),
constr. state fT^S, pZ«r. D'^PS bQt-thn (perhaps a contr. of D''riD3
from another sitig. nh for riD3, like DS for fl.?3).
13 5oyi (for n:^, from T\}1^), constr. s^a^e "13, seldom "la,
once ■'pa (§90, 3, a) Cxen. xlix. 11, and i:a (§90, 3, h) Num.
xxiv. 3, 15. With stiff. ''^, ^=3 ; plur. D'^33 (as if from 13, for
n.]3), constr. state ''iS.
ri3 daughter (for ri:3, /em. 13, comp. §19, 2), with suff.
"^riS (for ■'3?:3) ; plur. rii:3 (from the st««-. n23, comp. D'^:3
sons), constr. state rii:3.
□n fat] ler -in-law, with 5?(^. T'^'7? ^^^ fli)2n mother-in-
law ; comp. nx brother, and ninx sister.
Di^ (/ay, rf?mZ Q^'ai% but jt;Z. D^^;', ^'Q'' (as if from d^ for 7\iy^).
'h'2 vessel, plur. wh^ (as if from b2, nb3).
U'^'h plur., ivater (comp. §88, 1, Rem. 2), constr. state '^'O,
and also doubled '^'a^'a, with suff. Ora'^'a.
n^y r«7y, plur. D^-iy, "i-i^ (from i:?, which is still found in
proper names).
ns motith (for nSD, from the stem HSS to breathe), constr.
state "IS (for "'"'E), with suff. "^B mi/ mouth, T^'^B, T'B.
rJS'-i head (for ri<n), /j/m/-. D^ffiSn (for D'^irxi, §23, 2).
§97.
NUMERALS.— I. CARDINAL NUMBERS.
1. The cardinal numbers from 2 to 10 are substantives with
abstract meaning, like trias, decas, nLvraz, though they are
also used adverbially (§ 120). Only HHi? one {units), fern. rins5
; 97. NUMERALS.— CAEDINAL NUMBERS.
179
{una, see § 96), is construed as an adjective. Of the remaining
numbers of this series, each has a mascuHne and a feminine
form ; properly without any difference of meaning, but so distin-
guished in the prevailing usage of the language, that the former
is construed with feni., and the latter with niasc. nouns. Only
in the dual form for ttvo, 0^2X0, fern. D^ntD, does the gender of the
numeral agree with that of the object numbered.
NUMERALS FROM 1 TO 10.
With masc.
nouns.
With fern.
nouns.
■ Absol.
Constr.
Absol.
Constr.
1.
^"i?
nnK
nns
nns?
2.
D-;|C
^ST?
n;in©*
^r\w
3.
T :
mr5»
T
isb^D
4.
nyans
n?a-i«
ya^ix
ya^x
5.
nffi^n
^TS^tj
•• T
^^n
6.
niBtJ
^i»i?
T2JT2J
icffi
7.
nynp
n?ii2j
3^?^
3?ntj
a
9.
T :
yen
ycr;^
10.
^i^t
^iw
"^W.
^i??t
* Abbreviated from D'^F)5T!3 (according to others, for D'^iplliix with Aleph pros-
thetic, § 19, 4), hence the Daghesh lene in the Tav.
\ The simple numerals are certainly words of very high antiquity. They are
essentially the same in all the Semitic languages ; and it is here also that the main
point of connection is found, for the historical affinity between the Semitic and
Indo-Germanic tongues, since the numerals from 1 to 7 in these two families seem,
at first view, to have a certain degree of resemblance. Thus, with IIJIU (which,
however, is properly (li'llU, as the Arab, and ^thiop. show), are compared the
Sanscr. shash, Zend cswas, £|, sex, Old-Slav, she sty ; with 3.''2W, theSanscr. saptan,
Zend hapta, mod. Pers. haft, Gr. 'sTiia, Lat. septem, Germ, sieben ; with dbu
(Aram, nbn), the Sanscr. tri, fem. tisri, Zend thri, fern, tisard, Gr. tqeic, Lat. tres ;
with ins, the Sanscr. eka; with HJ^H, the Sanscr. pantshan, Gr. nivis, Lat
qtdnque ; with 3.'3'1N , the Lat. quatuor ; with C^Sia (Aram. ')'''^Pl), the Sanscr.
dva, Lat. duo, Ac. But a rigid analysis renders all this apparent accordance
doubtful ; and there is, on the other side, a far greater probability, that e. g.
n'^SUJ , \!3l3n (prop, the fist, the five fingers) as also "liUjJ (prop, band, company)
are to be referred to the purely Semitic stems nsilj to bend, to fold, to double, to
repeat, ttJian to draw together, to contract (comp. y?!^ . Y'^P, «^c-)) ^°*-^ ''^•?
to bind together {aoxn^. "iDS, "*^|5 Ac),
180 PAET n, PARTS OF SPEECR
The other Semitic languages exhibit the same peculiarity in the use
of the genders of these numerals. This is explained by the supposition,
that they were originally abslt^act substantives, like decas, trias. As
such, they could have both the masculine and feminine form. The
latter was the chief form, and hence was used with words of the more
prevalent masculine gender ; a distinction which usage only could
establish.* The exceptions are very rare ; e.g. C^i^J f^^.^^; Gen. vii.
13, Job i. 4 ; comp. Ez. vii. 2, Jer. xxxvi. 23.
2. The numbers from 11 to 19 are expressed by adding to
the units the numeral teti (in the form ITSy masc, TViW^fem.),
written as separate words and without a conjunction. In such
as are of the feminine gender (masculine in form) from thirteen
onward, the units are in the construct state, which in this case
indicates merely a close connection, not the relation of the geni-
tive (§116). These numerals have no construct state, and are
always construed adverbially.
In the first two of these numerals are some deviations from
analogy ; the third shows the manner in which the rest are
formed.
Masc. Fern.
j -\w 'ins nnto? nns
( ^ii ■'3116 rriia:^ ^n©
13. ntoy msb^ rr\w sthii
Rarely, the units take also in the masc. the form of the constr. state ;
as nb:y niyan^ileen, Judges viii. 10 ; nbs Mjiab eighteen. Judges xx. 25.
3. The tens from 30 to 90 are expressed by the plural forms
of tlie corresponding units, so that the plural here always means
tenfold; as U^thlt 30, n"i:?3-\S 40, D^TEian 50, U^ttt 60, D^yiTC 70,
* In the vulgar dialects of the Arabic, and in the JLthiopic, the feminine form
of the numeral is used almost exclusively. This form is used in Hebrew also,
when speaking of the number by itself and in the abstract (Gen. iv. 15). We
may refer, moreover, to the use of the feminine form for collectives and ideas ol
multitude (§ lOT, 3).
\ The etymology of this word is obscure. R. Jona explains it by tTDbS "'initJ IS
tuito twelve, as it were close upon twelve, an expression like undeviginfi, but not so
suitable here. Moreover, this explanation applies only to the feminine ; and yet
tlie masculine is also -liys "'Fl^? i where "li!>S "^iViV for nbS i3(!i IS would be
expected, unless we assume an inaccuracy of expression. Others explain it : some-
thing conceived beyond ten, from n\lJ5 to think, to conceive.
\
§ 98. NUMERALS.— II. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 181
D'^ib© 80, D'lyTlDn 90. Tioenty is expressed by D^-licy, plur. of
ito? ten* They are of comtnon gender, and have no construct
• state. When units and tens are written together, the earlier
writers commonly place the units first (e. g. tioo and twenty, as
in Arabic) ; but in the later writers the order is almost invariably
reversed {twenty and two, as in Syriac). Exs. Num. iii. 39 ;
xxvi. 14 ; 1 Chron. xii. 28 ; xviii. 5. They are always connect-
ed by the conjunction.
The remaining numerals are as follows •:
100 HiJ'a fern, constr. inX'a, jilur. inis'sa hundreds.
200 D^nxi? dual (for D^niJTaj.
300 tr\'&'q th'^, 400 niK^'yanx, &c.
1000 vjb^, constr. ^^^, plur. Q'^S^ij! thousands.
2000 D^sbX dual.
3000 n^sbi? ntJ'sTS , 4000 Q^&bi)! n?a^s< , &c.
10000 nnn^in laterwritersni=in,Xi2n \ iv^^^^ltit^flvluj.
" = ■ [ riii53n ten thousands.
20000 Dinia-l cZwaZ.
30000 nisian ttjbis, 40000 nisan ya'is, &c.
i?ew.. L The dual form occurs in some of the units, with the eflfect of
the English/oZrf; as Ci'ins'3'i N /oi«r/bZd 2 Sam. xii. 6 ; Ci';ins:;t3 sevenfold
Gen. iv. 15, 24 ; Ps. Ixxix. 12. The plural ^inx means some, some
few, and also the same {iidem) ; niiiUS decades (not decern), Ex. xviii.
21, 25.
2. The suffixes to numerals, as with other nouns, are properly geni-
tives, though we translate them in the nominative, as cSFiTabia ye three,
prop, your triad.
§98.
NUMERALS.— II. ORDINAL NUMBERS.
The ordinal numbers from 2 to 10 are expressed by the cor-
responding cardinals with the termination ''— (§ 86, No. 5), in
addition to which another '^— is commonly inserted in the final
syllable. They are as follows: ^-^t, ^•^'hlt, ^T'^T}, ''^^n and
i^W, ^'ffilZJ, '^r^T^, ^T^^^, TTiJIi^, ^TW.- The ordinal ^rsHs
* The plural forms D"'-lil35;, Q'^S21U, D'^^»ri, from the segholates, ibs, Saia,
ydn , take in the absolute state the shortened form, which, in other words of this
class, appears first in the construct state. Analogy would require D'^'ltJ? .
182 PART n. PARTS OF SPEECR
expressed by "jilDii'l (for 'jiTiJ''i?1 , from 'Ciil head, beginning, with
the termination ]i (§ 86, No. 4). The feminine forms have the
termination ni—., more rarely t^^— , and are emplo3'ed also for
the expression of numerical parts, as fT^IBian fifth 'part, iTT^TilJ?
and n^"l'iTlJ? tenth part ; in which sense are also used such forms
as "it^ii fifth part, yS"! and ^''2'! fourth j)art.
For the manner of expressing other relations of number, for which
the Hebrew has no appropriate forms, see Sj^ntax, § 120.
CHAPTER lY.
OF THE PAETICLES.
§99.
GENERAL VIEW.
1. The particles, which in general are signs of the subordi-
nate relations of speech, expressing the close connection of words
with one another, and the mutual relation of sentences and
clauses, are most of them borrowed or derived forms from the
noun, and in part also from the pronoun and verb (§ 30, 4).
Very few of them can be regarded, with certainty, as primitive,
2. Of those which are not primitive, the origin is threefold :
I) they are horroioed from other parts of speech ; i. e. certain
forms of the verb, noun, or pronoun, are employed as particles,
retaining more or less of their original signification, like the Lat.
verum, cansa, and the Eng. save, lieve, fain ; 2) they are deri-
ved from other parts of speech, either a) by the addition of for-
mative syllables, like D'ai"' by day from Di"" (§ 100, 3), or most
commonly b) by abbreviation occasioned by the frequent use of
these words. This abbreviation is effected in various ways ; and
in many of the forms resulting from it, the original one can no
longer be recognized ; e. g. ^X only (prop, certainly, certe) for
Compare in German, gen from gegen, Gegend ; seit from Seite ; weil
(orig. a particle of time like the Eng. while) from Weite ; in English
since (old Eng. sithence), till, contr. from to while.
§100. ADA^ERBS. 183
Such words suffer still greater changes in the Greek and Latin lan-
guages, and in those derived from the Latin ; e. g. (mo, ah. a ; H, ex. e
ad Fr. d ; ant.^ Fr. ou, Ital. o; super. Ital. s«.*
In some instances the particle has been so niuch abbreviated
that it has lost its character as an independent word, having
dwindled away to a single consonant prefixed to the following
word (like the preformatives of the Imperfect, §47, 1, 2); e. g.
b from bx (§ 102).
That this reduction of a whole word to a single letter belongs actually
to the history of the language, in its -"ocess of formation, is evident from
the fact, that in the later Hebrew ana the Aramtean (that is, in the pro-
gressive history of the Semitic stock), such abbreviations become greater
and more frequent. Thus the shortening of "ld^( to ''.^ and even to \a.
becomes more and more common in some of the latest books of the Old
Testament, and afterwards in the Rabbinic writings, nearly supplanting
the full form ; from "''^ of the Biblical Chaldaism comes the later form "n ;
the modern Arabic has, e. g., hallaq (now) from hdhcaqt. Ush (wherefore ?)
from li-ayyi-sheiin. and many others. This is shown also by the above
analogies from the western tongues. Such, indeed, is the natural pro-
gress of all languages. The use of the simplest particles belongs, how-
ever, to the earliest epochs of the Hebrew language ; at least to the
oldest of its monuments that have come down to us.
It is not strange that the derivation of these particles, which often
differ widely from the original form, should sometimes be obscure. This
is the case, however, with but k\v of them ; and, in regard to these.
there is at least the general probability of a similar derivation.
3. Less frequently, particles are formed by composition ; as
y^Ta wherefore 7 for y^^^TTa Jtow tanglit 1 i. e. qua ratione
ductus 1 comp. Ti jLtad-cov ; '''l?'?^ besides, from bs and "^'It ;
T^)^'ab'Q from above, from "J^, b, nb^is.
More frequent is the combination of two or more words without con-
traction ; as "D ^"ins, 13 TiN . CX 13, p h'J ''S .
§100.
ADVERBS.
1. As primitive adverbs, may be regarded the negative Js^b,
and perhaps some particles of place and time, as Ut there,
TX then.
* Even short phrases are coutracted to one word, e. g. forsitan from fors sit an,
Fr. peui-itre. In the Chinese, most of the particles are verbs or nouns ; e. g. iii,
to give, employed as a ^ign of the dative; \, to make use of, hence for ; net, tht
interior, hence in.
184 PART 11. PARTS OF SPEECH.
So at least we may regard them, for the immediate stand-point o{
grammar, though a reference to still other roots, particularly the pro-
nominal, is possible.
2. Examples of other parts of speech, which, without any
change of form, are used adverbially, are :
a) Substantives with prepositions ; e. g. ^Ji'a^ [with might),
very, greatly ; inb alo7ie (prop, a part), with suff. ^'l^^ I alone ;
n'j'Z'Q within ; ^7^? (^-^ o?ie), together.
b) Substantives in the accusative (the casus adverbialis of
the Semites, § 118), comp. tjjp ccqxW- ^xs. "755^ {might), very,
greatly ; DB!S {cessation), no more; Di'^Pi {this day), to-day ;
in^ {union), together. Many of these substantives very seldom
exhibit their original signification as nouns, e. g. 1*^:10 and plur.
nin'^np {circuit), around; others have wholly lost it, as nns
{length), long ago ; W {repetition), yet again, farther, longer.
c) Adjectives, especially in the feminine (answering to the
neuter), as )'2 recte, ita (proj). rectum), HDiTiJX"! {primum), at
first, formerly, T'\2'\ and ran {jjiultimi), much, enough, nii^bB?
wonderfully (pi"op. mirahilibus, sc. inodis), fT'SI? the second time,
ni'lin;' Jewish, i. e. in the Jewish language.
d) Verbs in the Infinitive absolute, especially in Hiphil,
which are also to be regarded as accusatives (§ 130, 2) ; e. g.
na'in (prop, mtdtum faciendo), much, ^
e) Pronouns, as HT (prop, this (place) = at this place), here.
For a list of the most usual adverbs, arranged according to their
signification, see § 149.
3. Some adverbs have been formed by the addition of the
formative syllable D— to substantives ; as DS'aS and D?'52S truly,
from XQ^ truth ; D2n {gratiarum causa), gratis, in vain (from
]n); D)?"'") vainly, fi-ustr a ; D'OT by day, from oi"'. Comp. also
Di<ri2 for oynB in a twinkling, from ysns tioinkling.
The termination d— occurs also in the formation of substantives,
e.g. d|p ladder {^rom. bbo) ; and hence those adverbs may be regarded
as denominative nouns used adverbially, Q— and n— being = "li and "j—
(§ 84, No. 15) ; comp. niiTS = "P'^IQ ransom, Xvtqov. But more pro-
bably, n— is an obsolete plnr. ending of the noun (§ 87, 1, d), and these
adverbs are properly nouns in the accus. plur. ; hence, 03^5$ like D'^'iia''^
used adverbially Ps. Iviii. 2, DSn like the Lat. gratis, i. e. gratiis.
4. Adverbs formed by the abbreviation or truncation of longer
words ; such, for example, as ^i? only (prop, an affirmative parti-
§101. PKEPOSinONS. 185
cle, certainly, from pJJ, Chald. "J'^sn, "'^O), and especially the
interrogative <1 , e.g. l/^Vt nonne 7 DSn num etiam 7 which origi-
nated in the more full form bn, Deut. xxxii. 6.
Punctuation of n interrogative : 1) It has usually Chateph-Pattach,
as nioilJti hast thou set ? (see the examples in § 152, 2) ; 2) Before a
letter with SMva, it has commonly Pattach followed by Daghesh forte
(like the article), as "ja^li Gen. xvii. 17, xviii. 21, xxxvii. 32, and once
without this condition, viz. 3Mi*n in Lev. x. 19; 3) Before a guttural
it tiikes Pattach (with Daghesh f. implicilinn), T^^xn shall I go? tirixn
num til 7 4) But before a guttural with Qamets it takes Seghol, as
''33Nii num ego ? «^!^"'vj'^ numfuit 7 Its place is always at the beginning
of the clause.
5. Certain adverbs, which include a verbal idea, take also
the pronominal suffixes, and generally in the same form as
verbs, particularly with Nun (§ 58, 4). E. g. ijTO;^ lie (is) exist-
ing ; ^arx I [am) not, ^3.pX he {is) not ; ^3^iy he {is) still ; 'Vi^
where {is) he 1 The same is true of "jn and T\tr\ behold ! (prop.
here, here is), with suffixes ; as 'ipsn, in pause '^psH and "'sifl,
behold me ; ?12n ; is!! , ^^fr*; in pa,use ^jIJI and ^23rt ; Dsn.
§101.
PREPOSITIONS.
1. Most of the words which, in the usage of the language,
appear as prepositions, were originally —
«) Substantives in the accusative case and in the covstruct state,
the noun governed by them being properly in the genitive,
which is actually expressed in Arabic by the genitive ending.
Compare in Eng. in stead of, in Latin Mijus ret causa*
Exs. ItlX {hinder p>art* \rear\j, behind, after ; bss {side*),
at the side of, by ; X'^ {intermediate space, onidst*), between ;
lya , 1^3 {hiterval of space, distantia), behind, about ; flb^T
{removal, vmnt), without, besides; 'J^^ {object), on account /
of; ^'^ before, over against ;_.1'Q {]}art), from, out of ; iy\ 1/
{that ivhich is before), before, over against ; 1? {progress,
duration*), during, until; by {upper part [space above]),
* The original signification of the noun is enclosed in parentheses, and marked
with an asterisk if it is still in use. On the like usage in other languages, see
W. von Humboldt uber die Kawisprache, Bd. III. S. 621.
186 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
upon, over ; D^ {cofinectloii, also IT)?!!?, JTayb), with; riHP
{under part* \sj)ace beneath]), nnder, in 2>lace of.
b) Substantives in the construct state with jirepositions (spec.
. the inseparable) ; as ''SBb {in face of), before ; ''SS, ''B^ {after
the 'nio\Uh, i. e. the command*), according to ; ^^^3 {in the
matter), on account of, 'j^'O^ {for tlie purpose), on account of.
2. Substantives used as adverbs very readily take, in this
manner, the construction of prepositions. E. g. '''?3S, 'J''i?3, DBS?3
{in the want of), loithout ; liys {in the continuing of), during ;
'''IS, I'lS {for the need), for, according to.
§102.
PREFIX PREPOSITIONS.
1, Of the prepositions given in the preceding section, "j^ is
frequently written as a prefix, yet without wholly losing its Nun,
which is represented by a Daghesh forte in the following letter,
as 'ST^y^ from the forest.
The different forms of this preposition are used as follows, a) The
full and independent form yo is employed chiefly before the article, as
]^"ixrt 'i^i ; but also, especially, before the feebler letters, as ts "j^ Jer.
xliv. 18, ■'Ja "i^a 1 Chr. v. 18, and elsewhere in the later books (as in
Syriac). There is, besides, a poetic form "i?^ (comp. § 90. 3, a), b) Most
frequent is the form '53, viz. as q. prefix with Daghesh forte in the fol-
lowing letter, which can be omitted only when the letter has Sh^va
{§ 20, 3, b). Before gutturals this becomes p {§ 22, 1), e. g. n'lxa , osa .
and also 53 before n, as ywri, 'Jin^a Gen. xiv. 23.
2. There are also three other prepositions, the most common
in the language, which have been reduced by abbreviation (§ 99,
2) to a single prefix consonant, with the slightest vowel {Sh^va) ;
namely,
3 in, at, on, with (from fT^3, "^S),
b towards, to (from bss),
3 like, as, according to (from "JS).*
* The derivation of h immediately from ^X, and more remotely from a stem
meaning appropinguavit, accessit (Heb. and Aram, nib , Kl^ adhccsit, se adjunxii,
Arab. "^bT accessit) is beyond question. On the derivation of a from n'^a, in
Aram, also ^a, proj). /». tlir fiou.te, hence in (not from "J'^a between), see Gesenius,
Man. Lex. art. 3, "SvU' ;ii the end. The signification of 3 (from "ja) is properly,
so ; doubled 3 — 3 as — k".
§ 103. PREPOSITIONS WITH SUFFIXES. 187
The pointing of these prefixes is as follows :
a) They have properly simple Sh'va, which is varied, however,
according to § 28, 1, 2, e. g. "'isb to fruit, '^'^i*? as a lion; and before
feeble letters according to § 23, 2 and § 24, 1, a, e.g. "i^xb for "i^Jtb,
6) Before the article they usually displace the !i and take its point-
ing, as "imS for "jSrta in the garden. See § 35, Rem. 2.
c) Immediately before the tone-syllable, in monosyllabic or dissyl-
labic words with the tone on the penultima, they also take Qamets
{PrcBtonic, § 26, 3); not always, however, but only in the following
cases : «) before Infinitives of the above-mentioned form, as nnb to give,
1'^'ib to judge, f^l^b to bear, except when the Iiif. is followed by another
word as its subject or object § 133, as niljja Num. viii. 19, ri2ii:2 Judges
xi. 26 ; /5) before many pronominal forms, as ilta, <Trb, no, nibxs like
these; particularly D33, Dsb, 1253, and nna, Dnb, ens (see § 103, 2);
y) when such a word is closely connected with the foregoing one. and is
thereby separated from the one following, e. g. nsb no month to mouth
2 Kings X. 21, O'^ab c^^a "pa between water and water Gen. i. 6 ; espe-
cially at the end of a clause, as in the instructive example Deut. xvii. 8;
likewise nsBb to eternity, but 0*^11?? '^^•?r' to all eternity, Is. xxxiv. 10.
d) To the interrogative n^i they are very closely joined by Pattach
and Daghesh forte; as naa by what? nas how much? n^b {Milel) for
what ? why ? Comp. the Vav consecutive of the Imperfect (§ 49, 2).
Before gutturals, n^b (Milra) is used for the latter.
Bern. The word i^'^f^'^, , which has not its own original vowels (pro-
bably niri'^) but those of ''pN (see the word in the Lexicon), takes pj-e
fixes also p.fter the manner of the latter; as nin^b, niiT^a, nin";ia^
because these were to be read ^VMfh . "'3"iS3 . i3"7Xa ,
§103.
PREPOSITIONS WITH SUFFIXES, AND IN THE PLURAL FORM.
1. The prepositions being originally nouns (§ 101), they follow
the analogy of the noun in their connection with pronouns ; i. e.
they take the nominal form of the suffix (§91, 1,2), as '^V^S?
(prop, my side) 6y me, "^riN! (my vicinity) with me, '^'^Vi^ (i^fiy
place) instead of me, like tnea causa, on accou7it of me.
Rem. 1. The preposition rx at (apud), with (from np.N), is distin-
guished from PS , the sign of the definite accusative (§117, 2), when they
take suffixes, by the difference of pointing. The former has, e. g., ^FiX,
iFlN, DnPiN, nnx, while the latter retains its original 0 before most of the
persons, as "^nst me, ~|nx, T\^k thee, ir.k him, nns Aer; ^lanx us, D3f!''<,
•JsriN you. cnx and cnns them. But in the later books, especially in the
books of Kings and in Jeremiah and Ezekiel. are found "^HN. DHX inaccu-
rately formed from riK with.
188 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
2. The preposition DS xcith takes Qameis before DS and cri , by which
the doubling of the Mem is made more audible, as 035335, cinjas. In the
first person, besides ''535 is found "''1533 .
3. It is but seldom that verbal suffixes are attached to prepositions,
as "'Jnntl 2 Sam. xxii. 37, 40, 48 (for which ''tinn occurs in Ps. xviii. 37,
40. 48). nsnnrn Gen. ii. 21, and ijnsa Ps. cxxxix. 11 (here in order to
rhyme with ''3S!illJi). We may, however, explain this form oiUhe sjtffi.v
here, as expressing a direction whither ; namely in 2 Sam. above quoted,
ijpinn [coming or brought] under me. place whither (together with
"ipinn [being] under me, place where), n^nntl into its place (" he put
flesh into its place"), ■'31?3 around about me.
2. When pronominal suffixes are attached to the inejix pre-
positions (j 102), there is a tendency in some cases, especially
with the shorter suffixes, to lengthen the preposition in order to
give it more body and support. This is at least apparent in 3
and b with a full vowel, for S, b (§ 102, 1, c) ; to 3 is appended
the syllable i'sa, and "Jia is lengthened into X^^ (prop, a j^arte, on
the part of ).
a) b with suffixes :
Sing. Plur.
1 '^b to me. "-P to us.
^ ( m. ^b, nDb, in pause -lb ] ® HDb )
{ m. ^^ to hbn. ^ DHb, nianb, poet.iiab'*
/. fib to her. iribf
to them.
2 takes suffixes in the same manner, except that with the 3c?
pers. plur. the forms are Dr?3j ^^,feni. "JHS.
* It has often been asserted, that the form 1533 stands also for the sing, "ib .
For this various explanations have been sought ; something analogous may cer-
tainly be found in the form t^;bbp^l used for bopFl (§ 47, Rem. 3). But, in fact,
it is so used only with reference to collectives ; see Gen. ix. 26 (in reference to
Sem = the Semites), Ps. xxviii. 8; Ixxiii. 10 (in reference to the peoj^le), Is. xliv.
15 (in reference to bOQ, bx, which the Seventy have rendered S^iol), liii. 8 (in
reference to the foregoing ili'H his generation, i. e. He and his contemporaries).
Tlie same is true of iO'^.^S for Dl^■'b5 ; see Job xx. 23 (in reference to the
ungodly man, who in the whole representation, vs. 5-20, is a collective, — nay, it
begins v. 5 with the plural Q'^i'd'n), and xxvii. 23 (comp. at the beginning, v. 13,
Q1S1-I5)). More strange is 'i'S'^bs Job xxii. 2 in reference to "125 man {homo)-
But this also is undoubtedly collective.
f Not "jilb , which signifies therefore.
§ 103. PREPOSITIONS WITH SUFFIXES. 189
*)
3 with suffixes :
Sing.
Plur.
1
"iSi^S* as I.
^21^3 as we.
2l
1
\ m.
{/■
\ m.
^ V as thou.
DDS, seldom DSi^S
3I
ini^S as he.
Din3, oris, D^s
1
if-
ruiai as she.
as ye.
as they.
c) l^ with suffixes :
Sing. Plur.
1 '^312'a, poet. ''2'a, "'p^from me. '^^%yzfrom> us.
n { m. '^'B'Q , in pause 'TiWZ ) . . OS'S ) ^
( /. 1\i)2 '" ' \f^^^'^ ^^^^' 13^ Yfrom you.
\ m.^3^^,poet.^n2'a,^in3)2/rom/im. Dn)?, poet. DM ] from
\ f.T\^WZ from her. IJiyQ ) them.
The syllable I'a in "^Sias (in Arabic N« = Heb. na what, prop, ac-
cording to what I, for as /) is in poetry appended to the simple prefixes
3, 3, b, even without suffixes, so that 1533, i?03, I'Tsb appear again as
independent words. In this case, poetry distinguishes itself from prose
by the longer forms ; but in the case of ya it has adopted the shorter
ones, resembling those of the Syriac.
In the table of yo with stifi.ves, >i3-aa from him is contracted from
!irt"Da5a (according to § 19, 2, e.vlr.), and coincides in form with >i2S;a
from us, which comes from ^i~i72'0. The Palestinian grammarians pro-
posed to distinguish the latter by writing it *1353^, which Ibn Esra
justly censures. The form n2^?3 is always written without Mappiq,
and comes from rj'SH^ .
3. Many prepositions, especially those which express relations
of space and time, are properly plural nouns, like the Germ, we-
gen [and the Eng. besides]. For the ground of this, see § 108,
2, a.t They occur (some of them exclusively, while others have
also the singular) in the plural construct state, or in connection
with those forms of the suffixes which belong to plural nouns
(§91,2). These are:
* The use of "^3 for ^— , in this case, is merely euplionic.
\ Some of these words, which come from stems fib , namely "'blX , 'O^ , '''IS ,
might indeed be referred to singular forms, as "'bs , ^by , i"]? ; but the analogy
of the others makes it more probable that these are also to be regarded as plurals.
Comp. the plural forms ''Ja from "jS ; ''S'l , ?J'^?1) j *^*^* ^om ST .
190 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
ini^, more frequently '^'^Hi? (pi'op. space behind, rear), hehhid,
with suff. always "^inx behind me, ^''^ns behind thee, T^'^H^,
"yX, poet, also "^^Si {regions, directions), towards, to, with
suff. always ^bx ^o me, ^^^S5, ^,^bx, DD'^bi?.
1"iSl {interval of space), between, with 5Z(^. "^T%.-, ^P'^^j but also
^''ra, DD^S^a, li^rii:^^, QS^is^a (from O^i^a, nii'^a, intervals).
1^12 from, out of, seldom ''I'Q {pltir. constr. state), Is. xxx. 11.
ny {progress, duration, from n'ly) a.? /ar as, tmto, jjlur.
(poet.) -^-T?, but w'lih suff. ^^V, TJ?, 1^^5 0?^^:? (the last also
with Qamets).
b? ?«jt>ow, over, constr. state of b;^ that r^hich is above (from
nby ifo ^0 ?«;?), pZ^ir. (poet.) "^b?, but with 5?(/. also in prose '^by,
T]i5y, T'by, Dn''by, for which i'a'iby is also frequent in poetry.
mnp under (prop, ^/mif 7Z?Aic/i is beneath), with sm^. in the
plural ''rinn, Tnnn, but also in the singular DPnr).
§104.
CONJUNCTION'S.
1. Conjunctions serve to connect words and sentences, and
So express their relation to each other. Most of them were origi-
nally other parts of speech, viz.
a) Pronouns, as "itJi!; and "^3 that, because, for, the former
being at the same time the common relative pronoun, the latter
also derived from a pronominal stem {h 36).
6) Adverbs, as b^« (not), tliat not, DS? (num?), if. Also ad-
verbs with prepositions ; e. g. D'nba {in the not yet), before that ;
or with a conjunction added, as "^3 Cl^ there is added that= much
less or much more.
c) Prepositions which are fitted by the addition of the con-
junctions ITSilt and ■'S to show the connection between proposi-
tions ; e. g. Ili'S? "jy^ because (from )?"}_ on account of), prop, on
this account, that, "itOX inx after that, "11^X3 according as, 1]??
■^3 and "itJS? ipy {in consequence, that), for the reason that, be-
cause. The preposition may still be employed in this manner,
even when the conjunction is omitted ; e. g. by (for "iffiX by) be-
cause, ]3'b? (for llCS'lS'by) on this account that, because.
In like manner, all prepositions before the Infinitive may be trans-
lated by conjunctions with the finite verb (§ 132, 2).
§105. INTERJECTIONS. 191
2. Even those words which are no longer in use except as
conjunctions, seem to have belonged originally to other parts of
speech, particularly the noun, and they generally betray their
affinity with verbal roots. Exs. iS (prop, desire, choice, from
niS to desire, comp. Prov. xxxi. 4) or, like vel, ve, kindred with
velle ; "JS {a turning away, from n:s) that not. Even the only
prefix conjunction '1 and, must perhaps acknowledge relationship
with 11 a bijiding or fastening, a nail.
The pointing of l is in several respects analogous with that of the
prefix prepositions 3. 3, b (§ 102, 2) ; but it has also, as a feeble letter,
some peculiarities.
a) It has commonly a simple Sh^va (1 ).
b) Before words whose first consonant has simple Sh^va (excepting the
case c), the Vav is sounded w, as bbbi and to all. It is also sounded
thus (with the exception of the case d) before its cognate letters, the
labials 3, 53, 3, as Ti^.^^i ; and even before a Chateph (under letters
not guttural), as 3riT!i Gen. ii. 12.
c) Before 1 the Vav takes Chireq. e. g. "'li"'; (for ''H'?!'' comp. § 28, 1, and
§ 24, 1, rt) ; before n and n it takes Chireq and Seghol, as BH'^'^r)'] Jos.
viii. 4, and '"i|;n."! Gen. xx. 7 (comp. § 63, Rem. 5).
c/) Immediately before the tone-syllable, it often takes Qamets, like 3
3, h, and with similar limitations (§ 102, 2. c) ; especially when words
are connected in pairs, as ^iiiifi ^inn Gen. i. 2. nb';i^1 CV viii. 22, but
chiefly at the end of a short clause, hence rs5T cni DW Gen. vii. 13,
"^b?31 Difibx 1 Kings xxi. 10. But the case is different, Avhen it stands
in close connection with words following, as ns 1^^ ^^^t^i ^"^t* Ps.
Ivii. 5 ; and hence, especially, with certain monosyllabic words, whose
nature it is to attach themselves to that which follows ; so always,
iiTl, nxi. sbl. D51 and the like.
§105.
INTERJECTIONS.
1. Among the interjections, there are several which are merely
natural soimds expressed in writing, as i^T}i^., HX ah! "^in, lis?
wo ! nsn lio ! aha !
2. Most of them, however, like the other particles, were bor-
rowed from other parts of speech, which, in animated discourse,
gradually came to be used as interjections ; as )T\ or nsH behold !
(prop, here) ; <^3n, jjlur. I^n (prop, give, Imp. from 3^1^) for age,
agite, come on! HDb, isb (prop, go), in the same sense ;* ~'?''^n
ri3n and Jisb are also used, in this form, with the feminine and with the
plural ; a proof that they have wholly taken the nature of interjections.
192 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH.
far he it ! prop, ad j)rofana ! "^3 (perhaps for ''l^Sl entreaty), 1
beseech, hear me ; Kp (iq) ! come on ! in ^Ethiop. an Imp. go to !
come on !), pray now ! a particle of incitement and entreaty (al-
ways subjoined).*
* The particle N3 serves for the expression of various shades of meaning,
which are exhibited in different places in the Syntax. A brief view only is given
here. It stands a) after the Imp. in command as well as entreaty (§ 130, 1, Rem.) ;
h) with the Impf. as well the first as the third person (§ 127, 3, b, and § 128, 1);
c) once with the Perf. (§ 126, 4, Note) ; d) with various particles, as X3 tlSfl
behold 710W ; particularly with conjunctions, as XJ bx ne qiiceso, and Ni'DX if now,
tinoTE, t/ with a courteous or modest limitation. — In courtly language, these par-
ticles are heaped together in every way ; Gen. xviii. 3, xix. Y, 8, 19, 1. 1*7.
PART THIRD.
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER I.
SYNTAX OF THE NOUN.
§106.
RELATION OF THE SUBSTANTIVE TO THE ADJEOTIYE, — OF
THE ABSTRACT TO THE CONCRETE.
In the Hebrew language, there is a want of adjectives in
proportion to the substantives, and some classes of adjectives
(e. g. those of material) are almost wholly wanting.* This
deficiency is supplied by substantives, and especially in the fol-
lowing ways :
1. The substantive employed to express some quality in ano-
ther is placed after it in the genitive. So constantly in designa-
ting the mateiial of which a thing is made, e. g. ClDD ^bs vessels
of silver = silver vessels ; '^V "jilX ark of wood = wooden ark.
like des vases d'or ; in like manner Dbiy ri-jHS an eternal j^os-
sessio7i, Gen. xvii. 8, "iSp'O "^TP^ tneji of nnmher, i. e. feio men
Gen. xxxiv. 30, "JH I^X a py'ecions stone Prov. xvii. 8. This
construction was also employed, even in cases where the language
supplies an adjective ; e. g. 'C'l'pfl I'l^S the holy garments, Ex.
xxix. 29. Comp. un homt?ie de hien.
Rem. 1. Less frequently, the substantive which expresses a quality
in another is followed by it in the genitive ; as T]'^!^^? "I'Ti^a the choice
of thy vaUeya, i. e. thy choicest valleys, Is. xxii. 7, comp. xvii. 4, xxxvii.
24; Gen. xxiii. 6 ; Ex. xv. 4. But with the substantive Vs (the) lohole,
for all of all, this is the usual construction (see § 111, \. Rem.).
The place of an adjective, when it would be predicate of the sen-
tence, is sometimes supplied directly by the substantive ; e. g. Gen. i. 2,
and the earth was desolation and emptiness ; Job iii. 4, let that day he
* There are a few adjectives of this kind formed after the manner of passive
participles, as T^iiK of cedar, ttJWS of brass, comp. cM?ieates (wedge-formed).
13
194 PART m. SYNTAX.
darkness; Ps. xxxv. 6, Ixxxviii. 19, ex. 3, Is. v. 12, Job xxiii 2. xxvi. 13
More seldom the substantive takes a preposition ; as in Ps. xxix. 4, the
voice of Jehovah is fisa with power, for powerful.
2. Adjectives which denote a property, quality, or habit,
where they would stand by themselves as substantives, are often
expressed in Hebrew by a periphrasis, in which an abstract noun
lesignating the attribute is preceded by one of the following
wouiis denoting its subject ; viz.
a) By IIJ'^N ma??, e. g. D"'"}3? ''^''X an eloquent man, Ex. iv. lU;
r.v^ li^X a wise man, Prov. xxiv. 5. b) By b>'3 master, possessor, e. g.
-iSb bs3 hairy, 2 Kinops i. 8 ; ma'bnr! b:^2 the dreamer. Gen. xxxvii. 19.
c) By "iS son and na daughter, e. g. b'^fl"']? a valiant man, 1 Kings i. 52;
D'li?"")^ a?i inhabitant of the East, Gen. xxix. 1 ; n3^"")3 one year old,
Ex. xii. 5 ; ni^:— |a doomed to death, 1 Sam, xx. 31 ; ^?!!^a ria a worth-
less icoman, 1 Sam. i. 16.
It is a bolder construction, and found only in poetry, when the ab-
stract is used directly for the concrete, as bs*^a worthlessness, for worth-
less, like scelus for scelestissimus ; and at the same time for the plural,
as n\^|3 boiD for bowme7i, Is. xxi. 17. T'Si? harvest for harvesters, xvii. 5.
On this, as a common characteristic of language, see § 83, Rem. 1.
Bern. That, on the contrary, forms of adjectives and concretes often
lake the abstract signification, especially in the Feminine, has been
shown in § 84 ; comp. ^ 107, 3, b.
We may here remark also, that the poets employ certain epithela
ornatitia (which are at the same time pei^petna) alone without the sub-
stantive ; e.g. "i'^35< the Strong, i.e. God; i"^a5< the strong, i.e. the
bullock, in Jeremiah the horse ; ip the Majestic, August, =^ihe Prince;
nsab pallida i. e. Iu7ia. In Arabic this is yet far more common. Comp.
merum for vinum. vyqi] i, e. the sea. Odyss. 1, 97.
§107.
USE OF THE GEFDERS.
Whether the Hebrew regarded a substantive as feminine is
known partly from the feminine ending (§80, 1, 2), partly from
its construction with a feminine predicate, and in most cases,
though there are many exceptions (§ 87, 4), from the feminine
plural form. We are now to show in what manner the designa-
tion of gender was employed.
1. The most natural use of it was with reference to the phy-
sical distinction of sex in men and beasts, but with several gra-
dations, according as this natural distinction is more or less
strongly indicated. The principal cases are the following ; viz.
§ lOT. USE OF THE GENDERS. 195
a) when the male and female are designated by entirely differ-
ent words, and the latter, of course, requires no feminine ending,
as father, mother, in Heb. 3S, D&5 ; b'^i? rani, bnn eive, li'an ass,
llnx she-ass ; h) w4ien the female is designated by the addition
of the feminine ending, as flSJ brother, ininx sister ; Obj) young
7nan, "Tab? young woman ; '\^ juvencus, TTy^ juvenca ; ^yj vitu-
lus, nbSiy vitula ; c) when the feminine gender is shown only
by the construction (communia), as in 6, tj /Sovg ; 6, r) :i:atg ;
e. g. b'aa camel, masc. Gen. xxiv. 63, but fem. xxxii. 16 ; "ijps
ma^c. male cattle, Ex. xxi. 37, but fem,. for female cattle. Job i.
14 ; d) when, without regard to the natural distinction of the
sexes, only one form is employed in the same gender to designate
both [epiccena), as in 6 Xvxog, t) ^tXibcov ; e. g. b^3tj i^ masc.
a bear robbed of her young, Hos. xiii. 8 (but construed as femi-
nine in 2 Kings ii. 24) ; vjlbi? masc. ox, Ps. cxliv. 14, where the
female of the ox-kind is meant.
OCten, in cases where the language makes the distinction of genders
as in a, 6, and c, writers neglect to do it, and employ the more general
and indefinite terms. E.g. "H^ari and b^X as fem. for 'inx and <^^*X,
2 Sam. xix. 27, and Ps. xhi. 2 ; also "ii'3 a youth, for f^^??, in the Pent,
and in Ruth* ii. 21, comp. Job i. 19. Compare in German Gemahl for
Gemahlin ; in Arabic also, the older written language shuns the use of
feminine forms (e. g. ribra viistress, hbns bride), which become more
and more common in later usage.
This sparing use of the distinctions of gender appears also in other
examples ; viz. "[i^X masc. architect, Prov. viii. 30, where wisdom (fem.)
is meant (comp. artife.x omnium natura, Plin. 2, 1); rxj a dead body
(masc), spoken of the corpse of a woman, Gen. xxiii. 4, 6 ; tJ'^h'bs for a
goddess, 1 Kings xi. 5 ; so in Eng. instructor for instructress, and in Lat.
aicctor, martyr.
Among epiccBue nouns are found names of whole species of animals,
which the mind conceived as masculine or feminine, according as they
appeared strong and powerful, or weak and timid. E. g. masc. 2^3 dog.
2ST xoolf ; fevi. n:ii dove, nnipn stork, njs;; na ostrich, nasnx hare.
2. The designation of the feminine gender, by its appropriate
ending, is most uniform in the adjectives and participles. (§ 87, 5.)
3. Besides objects properly feminine, there are others (nearly
the same which in Greek and Latin are neuter), for which the
feminine form is preferred, viz.
a) Things wiliiout life, for which the feminine, as the weaker, seemed
to be the most suitable designation, as T]"}^ side (of the human body).
thigh, ns"}^ side (of a country), district ; nsx; brow, ^n::^ greave (from
the resemblance).
196 PAET in. SYNTAX.
b) Hence abstract ideas, which at least decidedly prefer the feminine
form, even when the masculine is also in use ; as Bj^J, '^'2f33 vengeance^
">?.?> i^"]!? help (§ 84, 11, 12). Adjectives when used in a neuter sense
as substantives (like to aaXov). commonly take the fem. form, as njis?
the right, Ps. v. 10 ; so also in the plur. nibHs great things, Ps. xii. 4.
c) The feminine is sometimes applied as a designation of dignity or
office, which borders on the abstract sense, as niSTQ Princes (like High-
nesses)', in like manner nbn'p cojzcronaior (applied to king Solomon,^
the preacher Wisdom) ; comp. nisb as the name of a man, in Neh. vii.
57, Ezra ii. 55. Even in the fem. plur. form n'iSN fathers, the reference
to dignity seems not improbable. These words are construed, agreeably
to their signification, with the masculine. This usage is more extensive
in Arabic, jEthiopic and Aramtean, e. g. in Chalipha {Caliph) •nS'^bn.
There is a remote likeness in the Lat. magistratus. Ger. Herrschaft,
[Eng. lordships for Herr [Eng. lord\ Obrigkeit for Oberer. Ital.
podestd, &c.
d) Collectives, as ri'iN wanderer, traveller, nrnij? caravan, prop, that
which wandereth, for the wanderers ; nbl's (from the masc. >^^^5) the com-
pany of e.xiles ; T\'y<Q^'^^ Is. xii. 6, Mic. i. 11. 12, prop, that which inhabiteth,
iov the inhabitants ; n3';;x, Mic. vii. 8, 10, for the enemies. So often in
the Arabic. Comp. the poetic "is fis equivalent to "lis "^52 the inhabit-
ants of Tyre, ''BS ri3 = 152? "^aa my countrymen. Examples of its
application to things without life, n^S timber, njjy clouds, npX cedar
wainscolting. Comp. to Innixov and ^ innog for the cavalry, ^ ndfii^Xog
(Herodotus I., 80).
e) On the contrary, the feminine sometimes appears, as in Arabic, to
denote an individual of a class, while the masculine is applied to the
class or species, e. g. *i3X ships, feet (1 Kings ix. 26, comp. 2 Chron. viii.
18), nj5X a single ship; "iSb /la/V (collectively), tT^Sb a single hair
(see Judges xx. 16, Ps. xl. 13) ; "t"^© so7ig, ode, also collectively, fTi^ttJ a
single ode ; so also i^JNFi afg, ti33 a flower (with the collective ys Gen.
xl. 10) ; nsuJiUJ a lily (with liaiiU), and others, though the distinction is
in part effaced in the Hebrew.
4. Many words (besides certain names of objects properly
feminine, No. 1, a) are distinguished by the feminine construc-
tion, without the characteristic ending. They are chiefly em-
braced in the following classes ;
a) Names of countries and towns, contemplated as mothers,* — as ii,
were nurses, — of the inhabitants ; e. g. "i^nax fem. Assyria, D"it< fem.
Idumea, lil Tyre; so also appellatives, denoting countries, towns, and
locality in general, as ynx earth, land, ban the world, "i*^? city, Tp.?. and
* Thus OK, 2 Sam. xx. 19 and on Phoenician coins, stands for mother-city,
iniXQonoXiq (corap. fifjtrig, mater) ; and by the same figure, the inhabitants were
(Mlled sons of the country, as so7is of Zion, Ps. cxlix. 2 ; sons of Babylon, Ezek
vxiii 15 (comp. son of the house, son of the womb).
§108. THE PLURAL, AND COLLECTIVE NOUNS. 197
nnjt way, "isn court, iiana cavip, bkvi under-world, pa threshing-floor.
^N3 well, &c., and sometimes even Dipa place.*
As names of people are commonly masculine, it often happens, that
the same word is used as masc. for the name of a people, and as fern, for
the name of a country; e. g. ITi^fTi masc. Jews, Is. iii. 8. feni. JudcBa,
Lam. i. 3 ; Q"iJ< masc. IduvKJeans, Num. xx. 20, fern. Idumea, Jer. xlix. 17.
But such names are also construed as fern, when the people is meant,
by a metaphorical use (like the German Polen ist im Avfstande), Job i.
15 ; 1 Sam. xvii. 21 ; Is. vii. 2 ; xxi. 2.t
b) Members anA. parts of the body in man or beast, *TJ and CjS hand,
bai foot, "i"^? eye, ")tx ear, Si"it arm, "jldb tongue, ""if? horn, Cj33 wing,
lia ^oo^A-, "ji^T beard, '|t33 womb ; probably with reference to their subser-
viency as mere instruments. J and hence also words for inanimate instru-
ments and utensils, as 3"in sword, in^ pin, rtC!?? and 12^^ staff, liix
cAes^, b'l:!^ 6efZ, DiS cz<p, 13 pitcher, also ")?i< s^one, and many others. Most
of these words and ideas have the same gender in the other Semitic lan-
guages.
c) The words for light, fire, and other powers of nature, as liJ^U sun,
^^fire {Mth. esat), lix (Job xxxvi. 32), so also nx and -;!isn oven, n?3
brightness, "ins window. Gen. vi. 16, nil -wi^if/, also spirit, and ffiS3
breath, soul, &c. §
§108.
OF THE PLURAL, AND OF COLLECTIVE NOUNS.
1. Besides the proper plural endings (§ 87, 1, 2), the language
employs some other means for the expression of plurality 5 viz.
a) separate words, whose appropriate signification is collective,
designating an indefinite number of a class of objects, and hav-
ing their corresponding nomitia iinitatis, or nouns which desig-
nate an individual of the class, as "^itJ aii ox {an individual of
the ox-kind), Ip3 oxen, e. g. "i]?! ni^'an five oxen, Ex. xxi. 37,
■Jbil small cattle, viz. sheep or goats, niS an i?idividual of the
* As this last word is regularly masc, so we find more or less fluctuation in
the gender of the others.
•j- Here belongs the poetical personification of a people as a female, Is, xlvii.,
I. 1, liv. 1 seq., Lam. i., Ez. xvi.
\ Of these words, too, some are not uniform in respect to their gender, and
occur also as masc. ; as I^int Is. xvii. 5, pW Ex. xxix. 27, "J^S Zech. iv. 10, "pliib
Ps. xxii. 16.
§ The particulars are supplied by the Lexicon. There are some words, more-
over, which have the feminine ending, as rUJnS brass, maj5 bow (from the stem-
word liJip), riS time (for H'lil), but yet are sometimes construed as masculino,
from a misappi'ehension of their origin.
198 PART III. SYNTAX,
same, a sheej^ or a goat ; h) the feminine ending ( j 107, 3, d) ;
c) nouns which have the proper signification of tlie singular, but
which are also used as collectives, as D'lS man, the hiniian race
Gen. i. 26, TiJ^iX collect, for wiew, l^'? words, y^^'& the enemy, for
enemies. These words take the article, when all the individuals
of the class are included (§ 109, 1). Comp. also § 107, 3, e.
2. On the other hand, the terminations which properly ex-
press pluralitT/, are employed in the expression of other kindred
ideas ; so that the Hebrew often uses plural forms where other
languages employ the singular. Thus, under the plural form
are expressed —
a) Extension* of space and time: hence the frequent use of it tc
express portions of space, regions or places, as ^*i'0'a heaven (§ 88, Rem.
2), D''pi"i52 height (of heaven) Job xvi. 19, mbr^n^a the place at the feet.
ni'iJN'n^? the place at the head; certain members of the body, which are
spaces on its surface,t as a^DQ /ace, CiXliS neck; spaces of time, as
Di'^'n life, D'''n!lS'3 youth, C"i3pT old age ; and finally states, qualities, which
are permanent or of long continuance, as n'^S'iS perverseness, D"''2n'i com-
passion, D^b^iS^ childlessness.
b) Might and power, these being originally conceived as something
distributed and manifold. So, particularly, D'^ri^?* God, — ^^whether ori-
ginating in a polytheistic conception and then passing over to the " God
of gods," or in monotheism, and intended to express the divine power
in its developments ; so a few times Di\23lp the Holy (God) Hos. xii. 1 ;
Prov. ix. 10 ; xxx. 3; (comp. Jos. xxiv. 19, and Chald. "I'^ii"'^? tlie Highest.
Dan. vii. 18) ; and CSTFi penates, always in the plural even when only
one image is meant, 1 Sam. xix. 13, 16. Farther: D'^j"ii<= ')'ilX lord,
e. g. ndj3 Q-'sSx a cruel lord Is. xix. 4, "j^nxn i_:Sx the lord of the land
Gen. xlii. 30 ; so also i>S"5 lord, master, with suf. often 1"^^^3 his master,
rr^bsa her master.X
Rem. 1. The use of the plural, as given under letter 6, is confined
within very narrow limits, not extending beyond the words above quoted ;
and these, moreover, have the same use in the singular. On the con-
* A trausferring (in mathematical language) of an expi-essiou for arithmetical
(iuanlity to geometrical (coiui). Rem. 1). The language has other examples of the
designation oi great and manii by the same word (as a"! , DilSS)),
\ Comp. the same use of Ihe^^wr. in t« ari^pa, tot i'wtm, pracordia, cerviccx,
fauces.
\ Somewhat similar is the use of we by kings in speaking of tliemselves (Ezra
iv. 18, vii. 24, comp. 1 Mac. x. 19, xi. 31), a form which is then transferred to
(Jod (Gen. i. 26, xi. 7; Is. vi. 8). Such a plural the Jewish grammarians call
ninbri "^ilS"! {pluralls virium or virtuttwi) ; the moderns call it pluralis excellen-
Ike or pluralis majestaticus. The use of the jilural in modern languages, as a fonn
of I'espectful address, is more remote from the Hebrew usage.
§ 108. THE PLURAL, AND COLLECTIVE ^OUNS. 199
struction of these plurals witli adjectives, see § 112, 1, Rem. 3; with
verbs, § 146, 2. On '^jns, used of God. see § 121, Rem. 4.
2. The u.-;e oC the plural given under a is also, in common prose.
limited to a few words ; but in the poets it is somewhat more extensive.
e. g. Diadn tenebrce (of dark places), D'^53?n delicicB, Q'^i-'Cii failhfuliies.'!,
and many others.
3. When a substantive is followed by a genitive, and this
compound idea is to be expressed in the pknal, it is done a)
most naturally by the plural form in the governins' 7iomi, as
b^t] i"i33 stroJ7g heroes (prop, heroes of might) ; so also in com-
pounds, as ''p'a';'"'j3 Benjcmiinite, phi?'. '^r'^'Q'} ''33 1 Sam. xxii. 7 ;
b) in both, as C^^H I'liiil 1 Chron. vii. 5. C'^'ibp ''na prisoti hous-
es, Is xlii. 22, and hence W'bii i23, Ps. xxix. 1, sojis of God ;
c) even in the noun governed alone, as 3S rii3 father^s honse,
family, riinx rr^a ancestral houses, families Num. i. 2 foil., ''IS
D'''75''2 precious fruits Cant. iv. 16, vii. 14. On this observation,
which has hitherto been overlooked by grammarians, compare
also Judges vii. 25 [the head of Zeeb and Oreb, for the heads),
2 Kings xvii. 29 ; Dan. xi. 15. Here the two words by which
the compound idea is expressed, are treated directly as a nomen
com posi film*
The union with suffixes is also conformed to letter c, as "'?::' S
OS eoriim for ora eorum Ps. xvii. 10, UT^'O'^ Ps. cxliv. 8, where we
also say their mouth, their hand.
4. To the modes of expressing plurality belongs also the
repetition of a noun, with or without the copula. By this is
indicated the whole, all, every, as CT" WV day by day, every day,
1»iK ir-^S every man, and ffi^NI ffi^S? Ps. Ixxxvii. 5, D'PT oii Esth.
iii. 4, lilT li^ every generation Deut. xxxii. 7 ; hence distribu-
tively, as iinb "iiy I'ly each flock by itself Gen. xxxii. 17 ; also
a great multitude, even with the plural form. Gen. xiv. 10.
^tin r.l'ii^a rrnss asphalt-pits in abundance, nothing but as-
phalt-pits, 2 Kings iii. 16, Joel iv. 14 ; finally (with the copula)
diversity, more than one kind, as bs signifies all and every
kind ; e. g. "juK^ "jnx iivo kinds of iv eights Deut. xxv. 13, 3bl sb
a double heart Ps. xii. 3, 1 Chron. xii. 33.
Impassioned repetition, in exclamations, e. g. Jer. xxii. 29, Is. vi. 3
* All three are found in Syriac and Ethiopia See Hoffviann, Gram. Syriacii,
p. 254; Ludolf, Gram. zEthiopica, p. 139.
200 PART III. SYNTAX
(with little emphasis in many writers, however, to whom it has become
habitual, e. g. Is. xl. fF.) is a rhetorical usage, and does not belong here.
JRem. 1. Substances cohering in masses are mostly conceived as a
unity, and hence very seldom occur except in the singular, as SfiT gold,
ClpS silver, fSi wood, "j";^ wine; though D"a water is plural, but in Ara-
bic this also is singular. But when portions of a substance are meant,
the plural form is used, as 0"'S0I3 pieces of silver Gen. xlii. 25, Q'^^S ligna
(for building or for fuel). So of grain, as niin wheat (growing in the
Jield), c^an wheat in the kernel.
2. Even in cases where the plural form is regarded as merely poetic,
we are to connect with it the idea of real plurality, e. g. Job vi. 3, D'^a;^
the seas for the sea, comp. Gen. xli. 49 ; Job xvii. 1, the graves are my
portion, equivalent to hurying-place, many graves beiro^ usually found
together ; xxi. 32.
§109.
USE OF THE ARTICLE.
The article ('n, n §3.5) was originally a demonstrative pro-
noun (as in other languages, e. g. the Romanic, comp. 6, r], to
in Homer), yet with so little force that it was scarcely used ex-
cept as a prefix to the noun.
Its stronger demonstrative force {this) it has still in some connections,
as oi'iH this day, hodie ; ■^^'I'^'l this night, to-night; DSBri this time.
To this original, demonstrative signification points, especially 1) its
occasional use for the relative before the verb, e. g. siXSTSSrt that are
found 1 Chron. xxix. 17. xxvi. 28, Jos. x. 24, Ezra viii. 25 ; comp.
Gen. xviii. 2.1, xlvi. 27, Job ii. 11 ; so also rj"'^.?'! = O""^? ^^^^ 1 Sam.
ix. 24 ; 2) when it serves, mostly with a participle, to form a connec-
tion with a previous subject-noun, repeating it once more ; e. g. Ps. xix.
10, the laws of Jehovah are truth . . . . v. 11, ni'i^Dnsn they, that
are precious, — where the article has nearly all the force of natn avxol.
So also in Ps. civ. 3 (three times), Is. xl. 22, 23, xlvi. 6, Gen. xlix. 21,
Job xli. 25 ; and still stronger, Ps. xviii. 33, b^n in-txan bxn the God
that girds me with strength; ver. 48, Jer. xix. 13, Neh. x. 38.
The article is employed with a noun, to limit its application,
In nearly the same cases as in Greek, German, and English ;
viz. when the subject of discourse is a definite object, 'previously
mentioned (Gen. i. 3, God said. Let there he light, lix, verse
4, and God saw the ligJit, liSHTii^ ; 1 Kings iii. 24, brinsr me
a sword, and they brought the sword), or already known Eccl.
ix. 15 ; (nb'bllj tjb'an the king /Solomon), or the only one of its
kind (ffittisn the sun, fnijn the earth).
§ 109. USE OF THE ARTICLE. 201
In such cases the article can be omitted only in poetry, where
it is used, in general, less frequently than in prose ; e. g, tjb'a for
^b^n Ps. xxi. 2, f-iX for l^nsjn Ps. ii. 2.
Special cases in which the article is -commonly employed,
are :
1. When an appellative is used collectively, denoting all the
individuals of the class ; as the righteous, the unrighteous, Gen.
xviii. 25 • the woman for the female sex, Eccl. vii. 26 ; the Ca-
naanite. Gen. xiii. 7, xv. 19, 20 ; as in Engl, the Russian, the
Turk*
2. When an appellative is applied by way of eininence to a
particular person, and thus becomes a kind of proper name, as
6 TtocrjTrjQ (Homer). E. g. "JTato adversary, X4^'*^ ^he adversary,
Satan ; bya lord, b?^n (prop, name of the idol) Baal ; D^^H ^^^^
first man, Adam ; bi?«7, D^nbifin d {)t6g,, the only, true God =
nini (though this word, from its frequent occurrence in this
sense, is often so used without the article, approaching the na-
ture of a proper name, § 110, 1) ; ^T\iT\ the river, i. e. the Eu-
phrates ; I33n the region around, viz. around the Jordan.
3. Hence it is also used with actual proper names of rivers,
mountains, and of many toivns, with reference to their original
appellative signification (comp. the Hague, le Havre, la Plata) ;
as "ii5^n the Nile (prop, the river), li'S^n Lebanon (prop, the
white mountain), lyn the town Ai (prop, the stone-heap). But
its use in connection with names of towns is unfrequent, and in
poetry is generally omitted. (Comp. §110, 1.)
Rem. 1. The Hebrew article certainly never stands for the indefiniie
article ; but the Hebrew conceives and expresses many ideas definitely,
which we are accustomed to conceive and express indefinitely. This is
most commonly seen,
a) In comparisons, where the imagination pictures lo itself a definite
image of the object; e.g. white as the wool, as the snow, red as the
scarlet Is. i. 18 ; as the sheep Ps. xlix. 15 ; he hurls thee like the ball Is.
xxii. 18; the heavens are rolled up like the scroll xxxiv. 4; comp. x. 14,
xxiv. 20, xxvii. 10, liii. 6, Ps. xxxiii. 7. See instructive examples in
Judges xiv. 6, xvi. 9, Is. xxix. 8, 11. But where the noun used for com-
parison is already made definite by an adjective, the article is omitted
as when a genitive follows, e. g. 1(33 Is. x. 14, but n^o^ )p3 xvi. 2 ;
comp. Ps. i. 4 with Is. xxix. 5. Exceptions are rare, as "11353 Job xvi. 14,
2N3 xxxi. 18.
* And so among the Attics, 6 'A&rjVaiog, 6 2vQax6<jiog.
202 PART III. SYKTAX.
6) In designating classes of objects which are universally known, e. g
the gold, the silver, the cattle, the water. Hence Gen. xili. 2, Ahra-
hayn was very rich in the (smaller) cattle, the silver, and, the gold
where most languages would omit the article. He had much, is the
Hebrew's conception, of these well-known treasures. Comp. Gen.xli. 42,
Ex. xxxi. 4, XXXV. 32, Is. i. 22.
c) Often also in the expression of abstract ideas (like to Itutixov, la
modestie), hence of physical and moral evils, as the blindness Gen. xix.
11, the darkness Is. Ix. 2, the falsehood Is. xxix. 21.
On these principles, it is easy to explain the use of the article in
single, special cases ; as in 1 Sam. xvii. 34, '^'iXfi the lion, as the well-
known enemy of the flocks (comp. tov kvxov, Johnx. 12); 1 Kings xx. 36,
Gen. viii. 7, 8, xiv. 13. The frequent expression ni'n "'H'^l should not
be translated, and it happened on a day, but on the day, (at) the time, as
determined by what precedes.
2. The vocative also takes the article, and for the most part in those
cases where it is usually required ; e. g. ^iijrt '|«i3n S'tJifTl' . O Joshua
high priest. Zech. iii. 8 ; 1 Sam. xxiv. 9.
§110.
USE OF THE ARTICLE (CoNTmjED).
The article is regularly omitted,
1. Before the pi'oper name of a 'person or a country i^'^'Vu
Dl^'l^'a), and also of a people, when it coincides with the name of
the founder of the race or the name of their country (bx'nil5i. D"^S).
On the contrary Gentilic nouns admit it both in the sing, and
plur., as C'lnS'n the Hebrews, 1 Sam. xiii. 3, "'pySSH tlie Canaan-
ite {collective § 109, 1).
2. Before substantives made definite by a following genitive
or suffix, which renders the use of the article unnecessary ; e. g.
D^n'bif! nnn God's word, "^nx my father.
When the article is used in these two cases, some special reason can
generally be assigned for it. E. g..
a) In some cases, the full demonstrative power of the article is
required ; as Jer. xxxii. 12, / gave this bill of sale (njp^an "iBSn-nx)
with reference to ver. 11 ; Jos. viii. 33, ii^n a half thereof in the next
clause 'i'^itnri the (other) half thereof ; Is. ix. 12.
b) In other cases, the genitive is a proper name, and, according to
No. 1, does not admit the article [comp. § 111, 1] ; as ^i<"n"'2 n^VZU the
altar of Bethel 2 Kings xxiii. 17, bx-n^a bxfi the God of Bethel Gen.
xxxi. 13, n^iax ~^Bn the king of Assyria Is. xxxvi. 16; comp. Gen. xxiv.
67; Jer. xlviii. 32 ; Ez. xlvii. 15, comp. xlviii. 1.
§111. USE OF THE ARTICLE. 203
c) In others, the connection between the noun and the followmg
genitive is somewhat loose, so that the first forms a complete idea by
itself, the second being only supplemental, relating to the material or
design; as b'^'iart TaN'7 the weight, the leaden one Zech. \v. 10, natHfl
mrnsn the altar of brass 2 Kings xvi. 14. n-i-ian li^N^' ■^^5ia3 Jos. iii. 14
Ex. xxviii. 39, Jer. xxv. 26.
3. Before the predicate, which from its nature is indetermi-
nate, as Gen. xxix. 7, bil3 DT^n lij' yet is the day great., it is
yet high day ; xxxiii. 13, xl. 18, xli. 26 ; Is. v. 20, liiob D'^'ilQi^ri
yi who call the good evil ; Ixvi. 3.
Yet there are cases where the nature of the predicate requires the
article : Gen. ii. 11 assn i<!in the same (§ 122, 1, 2d T[) is that which sur-
rounds; xlv. 12 "^anari IS "^"S that my mouth (it is) that speaketh ,-* Gen.
xlii. 6, Ex. ix. 27, Num. iii. 24. For another case, where the article
stands before the predicate, see §109. 2d T[.
§111.
USE OF THE ARTICLE (Oontetoed).
1. When a compound idea, represented by one noim followed
by another in the genitive, is to be expressed definitely, it is done
by prefixing- the article to the noun in the genitive ; as ttJ''i?
TVQTfi'O a man of VKir Jos. xvii. 1, T\(lTh'2X\ "'TiJpS the men of war.,
Num. xxxi. 49 ; ^ptp 1^'^ a word of falsehood Prov. xxix. 12,
i?''33n yy^ the word of the projjhet Jer. xxviii. 9.
The article has the same position, when only the genitive is definite,
as iTniari nfsbn a part of the field 2 Sam. xxiii. 11 (see on the contrary
Jos. xxiv. 32, Gen. xxxiii. 19). frs^xn ^^X a husbandman Gen. ix. 20
(on the contrary tTib d'lX Gen. xxv. 27). But, in this case, to avoid
ambiguity, another construction was usually chosen ; see § 115.
N. B. This explains the use of the article after Vs prop, totality, the
whole. The article is inserted after Vs, Avhen it expresses definitely aZZ,
whole (like tons les hommes, toute la ville), and is omitted when it is used
indefinitely for of all kinds, any thing, or distributively for every {tout
hotnme, d tout pri.v) ; e. g. D'lxn-bs all men, yiXin'bs the whole earth,
prop, the whole of men, the whole of earth ; but "|3J<"^ all kinds of stones.
1 Chron. xxix. 2, la'n-bs a7iy thing Judg. xix. 19, Di^'bDa every day Ps.
vii. 12. But also ''n bb every living thing = all living.
* Not, however, in its ordinary use as the mere definite article. In such
forms, it is rather to be referred to its original import, as a demonstrative pi-o-
noun (§ 109, 2d *^), that which surrounds. — Te.
fe
204 PART III. SYNTAX.
Even compound proper names may be resolved again into two
words, and the second then takes tlie article ; e. g. iDi^^-ja Benjaminile
(§ 86, 5), ''r^":n"|3 Judges iii. 15, '^»f^^^ n^a the Bethlemile 1 Sam.
xvii. 58.
For exceptions, where the article stands before the governing noun
and not before the genitive, see § 110, 2, h. So in the later style, Dan.
xi. 31 ; comp. xii. 11.
2. When the substantive has the article, or (what is equiva-
lent) is made delinite by a following- genitive or suffix, the adjec-
tive (as well as the pronoun HT, li^^n, § 120, 1), belonging to the
substantive, takes also the article. Gen. x. 12, nb^iin "I'^S'n the
great city ; xxviii. 19, fi<^nn DipTan that place ; Deut. iii. 24,
npTnn Tj'i;; thy strong hand ; bi^l^n nin;' nil??^ the great ivork
of Jehovah.
Not very unfrequent is the use of the article —
a) With the adjective alone, so that the limitation is superadded ;
e. g. ■'^liin Di"", Gen. i. 31, the sixth daij, prop, a day, the sixth (on the
contrary ''Vq Dl'i a second day, ver. 8) ; xli. 26, 1 Sam. xix. 22, Ps. Ixii. 4,
civ. 18, Neh. iii. 6, ix. 35, Zech. xiv. 10. So also n^nr; ^?3 Gen. i. 21,
ix. 10. When the adjective is properly a participle, this is the usual
construction ; as Jer. xlvi. 16 ri3l*n n"in the sword that doeth violence.
h) It seldom stands only with the substantive, as in Ez. xxxix. 27,
Gen. xliii. 14, 2 Sam. vi. 3 (perhaps to be emended) ; but somewhat
frequently in connection with the pronouns X^in and nj, which in them-
selves are sufficiently definite, as X^ii nb^^a Gen. xxxii. 23, >n li^n Ps.
xii. 8 ; especially when the noun is made definite only by a suffix, as
rtibN ^""^a? 1 Kings x. 8 ; comp. Ex. x. 1, Jos. ii. 20, Judg. xvi. 5. 6, 15.
Purposely indefinite is inyn ens'! Gen. xxxvii. 2, evil report respecting
them (i^^'^D -^^'^ would be their evil report); xlii. 19, inx dDinst =
one of your brethren.
k 112.
CONNECTION OF THE SUBSTANTIVE WITH THE ADJECTIVE.
1. The adjective, as an appendage of the substantive and
subservient to it, stands after it, and agrees with it in gender
and number ; as bi^5 Tlji5<, ns^ !^1?^. On the position of the
article, see § 111, 2.
Rem. 1. It is very seldom that the adjective, as an epithet of the sub-
stantive, stands before it, as when some emphasis rests on it ; Is.
xxviii. 21, liii. 11, Ps. Ixxxix. 51, cxlv. 7; compare also Ps. xviii. 4.
Merely poetic is the form of expression n'^sa^a '')1?''S!!<, Job xli. 7. strong
among the shields for strong shields (comp. ver. 21 ; Is. xxxv. 9) ; or with
§113. APPOSITION. 205
a collective noun instead of the plural, fi'isj ^5''ai< the poor among men
= the poor. Is. xxix. 19 ; Hos. xiii. 2. Comp. the Latin construction ca-
nuni degeneres.
2. When substantives of the teminine gender or those which incline
to it (§ 107, 4) take two adjectives, the feminine form sometimes appears
only in the one which stands nearest the substantive ; as njn^] "^^xb^
Diajl 1 Sam. xv. 9; p^n) nb'ia m-\ 1 Kings xix. 11 ; Ps. lxiii.2. Comp.
§ 147, Rem. 1.
N. B. In respect to number, nouns in the dual take adjectives in the
plural (comp. § 88, 1) ; as ni'ri'n O'^i^^' lofty eyes Prov. vi. 17 ; Ps. xviii.
28, Job iv. 3, 4, Is. xxxv. 3. Moreover the constrrictio ad sensum is
frequent. Collectives are construed with the plural, as in 1 Sam. xiii.
15, Jer. xxviii. 4; the so-called pluralis majestatis (§ 108. 2. 6), on the
contrary, with the singular, as p'^'nS D'^li'^X Ps. vii. 10. Is. xix. 4; (but
with \heplur. 1 Sam. xvii. 26.)
2. An adjective, when its application is limited by a substan-
tive, is followed by it in the genitive case,* as iXPrns';' beautiful
inform Gen. xxxix. 6, D'I'BS ""p? pure in hands Ps. xxiv. 4, "'laiJi?
T^SD sorroioful in spirit Is. xix. 10. Participles and verbal ad-
jectives are often construed thus, though they also govern the
cases of their verbs ; see § 135.
3. On the adjective as predicate of the sentence, see § 144 foil.
§ 113.
OF APPOSITION.
1. By this is meant the placing together of two substantives,
when one of them (commonly the second t) serves as a limitation
or restriction of the other. E. g. n:'abs5 niCi? a looman (who is)
a roidow 1 Kings vii. 14 ; nb^nn nn?: a damsel (who is) a virgin
Deut. xxii. 28 ; rrai? O'l'l^i* icords (which are) truth Prov. xxii.
21. The first of the two substantives sometimes takes the form
of the construct state (§ 116, 5).
Two 'adjectives may also be placed in apposition, when the first
modifies the sense of the second ; as nisab nins ninns pale while spots
Lev. xiii. 39 ; in verse 19, nB'nia'ix njnb rnna a ichile-red (clear red)
spot.
* lu Greek and Latin the genitive is employed in the same manner, as tristes
animi ; see Ruhnkcn. ad Veil. Paterculum, 2, 93.
f The first only in certain formulas, as T^l^ Tj^.San , ria'^l^ '=1^-'?^ ' ^"^^^ ^™
the king David, the king Solomon ; where the arrangement "l^V.^.n "''^I'J j 2 Sam.
xiii. 39, like Cicero Consul, is of rare occurrence.
206 PART III. SYNTAX.
§114.
OF THE GENITIVE.
1. It has already been shown (§ 89) that the relation of the
genitive is regularly expressed, by attaching the genitive noun
to the preceding nomen regens in the construct state. A geni-
tive can be thus annexed to u)nly one governing noun.* The
language also avoids attaching to one such noun several geni-
tives connected by the conjunction and, sometimes by repeating
the nomen regens ; as Gen. xxiv. 3, 'f'}^'*} '^T?^'^^ C'^l^^n '^n"bx,
the God of heaven and the God of earth. Several genitives
may indeed follow one another, each dependent on the preceding
one. This repetition of the construct state is often avoided, how-
ever, by adopting a periphrasis of the genitive (§ 115) ; but not
always, e. g. "^ni^X "^.^n "^Dp '^12'} the days of the years of the life
of my fathers, Gen. xlvii.9 ; inp-^.:3 ^"liaa ni^J^-ISD^ nST» the
remnant of the number of the hoios of the mighty ones of the
children of Kedar, Is. xxi. 17.
In these two examples (comp. also Is. x. 12. Job xii. 24 and others)
all the substantives, except the last genitive, are in the construct state.
But there are also examples, where a genitive subordinate to the
leading idea, and serving only as a periphrasis for the adjective, stands
in the absolute state, while only the genitive that follows is dependent
on the leading idea. E. g. Is. xxviii. 1, ')'::: ''^^ibn Q-^aailJ N'-a the fat
valley (prop, the valley of fatness) of the smitten ofivine, 1 Chron. ix. 13;
Ps. Ixviii. 22.
Similar is the unusual case, of a substantive followed immediately
by an adjective, and then by a genitive ; as 3.'&^ ^^''z^. 15^. U7ihewn
stones of the quarry, 1 Kings vi. 7. The usual arrangement is, rina?
nVSj ant a great crown of gold, Esther viii. 15.
2. The noun in the genitive may stand not only for the sub-
ject, but sometimes also for the object. E. g. Ez. xii. 19, O'ari
n-i^Tjrj^n the wrong which the inhabitants have done ; on the con-
trary, Obad. ver. 10, 'n^'HiJ Can tlie wrong against thy brother ;
Prov. XX. 2, tfb'a n'a''N the fear of the king ;f QIO rip5^T the cry
* It would be a violation of Hebrew idiom to say, ni'n nisai "'32 Jilii et
filicB Davidis ; it would be necessary to say, T^rSS^ Tl'l '''^ii filii Davidis ejusque
filiw.
\ In Latin there is the same use of the genitive after injuria (Cbbs. B. Gall. 1,
30), metus (as metus hostiiim, metus Pompeii), apes, and other words. Comp. Aul.
Gell. 9, 12. In Greek compare nlattg tov Osov, loyog tov atavQov 1 Cor. i. 18.
^115. EXPRESSION OF THE GENITIVE. 207
concerning" Sodom, Gen. xviii. 20 ; 12 i?'!2TiJ the rumor concern-
ing Tyre, Is. xxiii. 5 ; '^''5'!'^ ^^1^ jirceda hostihns tiiis erepta
Deut. XX. 14. Comp. further § 121, 5. Other applications of the
genitive are : f3? 1\y^ ivay to the tree, Gen. iii. 24, DID "'IJ'^Sp
judges like those of Sodom, Is. i. 10, D'^Jlbi^ "'fl^^T sacrifices accejj-
table to God, Ps. li. 19, nin^' ^?^1^ an oath sioorn by Jehovah
1 K. ii. 43.
3. Not unfrequently the genitive relation supplies the place of
apposition, as tTiE '^T\'2 fluvius Eujihratis. See further, § 116,5.
Rem. 1. In very rare cases, a word intervenes between the nomen
vegens and the nomen rectum, as in Hos. xiv. 3, 2 Sam. i. 9, Job xxvii. 3
(after ^3, in all these passages ; comp. also Is. xxxviii. 16).
2. "Wiih. propernames, which are generally in themselves sufficiently
definite, the genitive is seldom used for limitation or restriction. In-
stances of it occur, however, in geographical names ; as D'^'nbB "i^lN Ur
of the Chaldees Gen. xi. 28, C'^'irtS cnx Aram of the two rivers = Meso-
potamia ; in like manner nixas nitr^ Jehovah of hosts ^ov Jehovah the
Lord of hosts.
§115.
EXPEESSIOX OF THE GENITIVE BY CIRCUMLOCUTION.
Besides the expression of the genitive relation by subordina-
tion to the governing noun in the construct state (§ 89, and § 114),
there are modes of expressing it by j^criphrasis, and chiefly by
the preposition b, which means 2^crtai7iing or belonging to, and
thus expresses a relation not unlike that of the genitive. Thus
we find —
1. b "ittJX, used principally for the genitive of possession, as "iKSf]
ti"^25<b i^x Gen. xxix. 9, xlvii. 4, the flock of her father (prop, the flock
which was to her father) ; and also where there would be several
successive genitives (to avoid the repetition of the constr. state, but see
§ 114, 1), as blxi^b n\!3!)t n-i^j'-ir! n^ax the chief of the herdsmen of Saul
1 Sam. xxi. 8, rin'^db ndx cinili;r! -i^d the song of songs of Solomon
Cant. i. 1 ; Gen. xl. 5, 2 Sam. ii. 8, 1 Chron. xi. 10. (Hence the Rab-
binic designation of the genitive b\a ; in Syriac and Chaldee, the rela-
tive '^'7, 'n serves also by itself as a sign of the genitive.)
2. b (without iTiJi*), also for the genitive of appertaining and oi' pos-
.'iession,* as bsixi^b n"'s'sr] the tcatchmen of Saul, 1 Sam. xiv. 16. This is
* Essentially, the Gascon is no less correct in saying lajille a Mr. N., than the
written language in the form la fille de — ; the former expresses the idea belong-
Hijr to, the latter that of origin, descent. The Arabians distinguish a twofold geni-
208 PART III. SYNTAX.
used especially, a) when the governing noun is to be expressed indefi-
nitely,e. g. ''IJ^'?^ 1? ft son nf Jesse, 1 Sam.xvi. IS (whilst '^'w:';i-'i3 signifies
also the son of Jesse) ; "i'^'sj^ ^N^ '^'3 a priest of the most high God, Gen.
xiv. 18. xli. 12; ''S^tub D-^-inss-iai:? itvo servants of Shimei, 1 K. ii. 39;
1)'ih anx a friend of David (was Hiram) 1 Kings v. 15; Tl'ib "ibta
also I'fl'J'? ''^'^^ a psabn of David (prop, belonging to him as author),
and elliptically "il'il? of David, Ps. xi. 1, xiv. 1 : b) when there are several
genitives depending on one substantive, e.g. TJibb f^T^H ri^bn a portion
of the field of Doaz, Ruth ii. 3 ; 2 Kings v. 9, bxnb':' ^D^Tsb 'c'i?D*n '>nn'n
if/<e chronicles of the kings of Israel, 1 Kings xv. 31 ; nilSTsb ni~i<!i "^Oitn
ix'iiU'^ ■'SS Josh. xix. 51, where the more closely connected nouns, ex-
pressing one compound idea, are joined in pairs by the construct state,
whilst between them is the looser connection indicated by h ; (comp.
however, § 114, 1) ; c) after specifications of number, e. g. MSJSda
IJJn'nb oil D'^'i^?'! on the seven and twentieth day of the month. Gen.
viii. 11.
§116.
FARTHER USE OF THE CONSTRUCT STATE.
The construct state, as it serves only to indicate the close
connection of two nouns, is used in the current of discourse for
other near relations besides that of the genitive ; viz.
1) Before prepositions, especially in poetry, and most fre-
quently when the governing word is a participle ; e. g. before 3,
as T^jja ntl'ato the joy in the harvest, Is. ix. 2, v. 11 ; before b,
as n^sb ^nn« is. Ivi. lO, xxx. 18, Ps. Iviii. 5, Job xviii. 2 ; before
\Q, as ^^H'a '^^^'535 weaned from the milk, Is. xxviii. 9 ; before bl?
Judg. v. 10.
2) Before the relative pronoun, e. g. ^tpSj! Dip)? the place
where , Gen. xl. 3.
3) Before relative clauses without 'iTlJi?, e. g. Tl'l npH fi^l'^p
the city where David dwelt, Is. xxix. 1, bi< S'l'^ )kb Dip's the ]) lace
of him who knows not God, Job xviii. 21, 1 Sam. xxv. 15, Ps.
xc. 15. Gomp. § 123, 3, Rem. 1.
4) Rarely, even before Vav copidative, as tyTT) ^''5^0 I^*
xxxiii. 6, XXXV. 2, Ii. 21.
5) In cases of apposition (i. e. where there is not, as in h 114,
tive ; viz. one which may be explaiued by b , and another by "j^ . From the lattei
conception proceeds the de of the Romanic languages. In Greek maybe compared
the so-called ff/f/it/a Koloffxaviov, e. g. i] tcscpali] tw uv&gwnoi for xoi) uv&gainov
(see Bernhardifs Syntax, p. 88).
§111. DESIGNATION OF THE OTHER CASES. 209
3, an actual genitive relation) ; e. g. 1 Sam. xxviii. 7, rt?S mcx
iii? a ivoman, mistress (possesso?-) of a divining spirit (comp.
TvacdiO^ij t/^ovOu Tcvtiif^ia Tvv&iovo^ Acts xvi. 16) ; and so
also, 'ji^'2 ns fibrins the virgin-daughter of Zion, Is. xxxvii. 22,
Jer. xiv. 17.
6) Also in other close connections of words ; e. g. "IHS one
sometimes used for 1HX 2 Sam. xvii. 22, Zech. xi. 7 ; see more-
over Is. xxviii. 4, 16. Compare also the construct state in the
numerals, as thirteen^ fourteen (§ 97, 2), and in the adverb (§ 100,
2, c).
Rem. As in the above cases, the absolute slate might be used about
equally well instead of the construct^ so on the contrarj'- there are con-
nections, where we should expect the constr. state rather than the
absolute. E. g.
a) in geographical names like nas^ ni2 bax Abel Beth-Ma'^chah
(i. e. Abel at Beth-Ma^chah, in distinction from other places called Abel).
Comp. on the contrary § 114, Rem. 2.*
6) in some other examples, where the connection is not sufficiently
close for the genitive relation, so that it must rather be understood as
an apposition, or an adverbial use (in the accusative § 118) of the second
noun. Here belongs, among others, Ez. xlvii. 4, Di3"i3 C';':^ not so well
water of the knees as water up to the knees ; Is, xxx, 20, 'j^rib n'^a water
of affliclion, or rather water in affliction.
c) in the combination mxas C^n'^i* , elliptical for nix3S •'tib^ Q'^n^^J
God (the God) of hosts.
§117.
DESIGNATION OF THE OTHER OASES.
1. The Hebrew language having lost the living use of case-
endings (§ 90), it becomes a question how this defect was sup-
plied, in designating the relation of the noun to the sentence.
The Nominative can be known only from the syntactic construc-
tion. On the modes of indicating the Genitive, see §§ 114-116.
The Dative, is periphrased by the preposition b, the Ablative by
yn (from,, out of), the Locative and Insti^uniental by 3 {in, at,
by). But tile noun thus dependent on a preposition, is in the
Semitic form of conception a genitive ; for these particles were
originally nouns, and still retain in Arabic the genitive ending.
Comp. §101, 1.
* Latin, Augusta Vindelicornm. But in Kuglish, e. g. York street, Covent'
(/arden ; a m^re juxlapositiou, for near Covent-garden.
14
210 PART III. SYNTAX.
On the use of the sign of the dative (b), so far as it encroach-
es on the sphere of our genitive, see § 115, 1, 2.
2. The Accusative^ when it expresses a local direction oi
motion towards^ frequently retains its ending n_ (§90, 1).
Elsewhere, it is usually known, like the nominative, only from
the structure of the sentence. But it may often be recognized
by the prefixed TiX or fiS? (and before pronominal suffixes nis) ;
which is not used with a noun, however, except when it is made
definite by the article, by a genitive (whether noun or pronominal
suffix), or in some other way (Gen. vi. 2, 2 Sam. xiii. 17, xviii.
18), or is a proper name. Such is its prevalent use, especially in
prose ; but less use is made of it in poetry. E. g. Gen. i. 1, UK
psn nXT D'^^it^n (on the contrary D^^TC'i 'jrnx Gen. ii. 4, vi. 10,
Ex!i. 11).*
The examples are rare in whicli ns stands before a noun that is not
rendered definite ; but somewhat more frequent in elevated style, where
the article also may be omitted with a noun which is definite in signifi-
cation (§ 109). E. g. Prov. xiii. 21, n-'pi^S-nit. Is. 1. 4, Job xiii. 25, Ez.
xliii. 10 ; in prose very rarely, as 1 Sam. xxiv. 6, Ex. ii. 1 (where, how-
ever, the noun is also limited by the connection).
§118.
USE OF THE ACCUSATIVE.
The accusative is employed, 1) as the object of transitive
verbs (§ 138) ; and also 2) in many forms of adverbial limita-
tion, where it is no longer governed immediately by the verb.
We shall here treat only of the latter.
* nix (whence, in close connection with a following noun, the toneless niSt,
and then again with independent tone T!*) proceeds from a pronominal stem,
and is properly a substantive meaning essence, substance (comp. nis sign). But
when connected, in the constr. state, with a following noun or suffix, it forms a
periphrasis of the pronoun ipse, avtog (comp. the similar case in § 124, Rem. 3).
In common usage, however, it has so little force that it merely indicates a definite
object, having become as feeble as the cas^cs ohlifjui avTov, avio), aviov, ipsi,
ipsum, desselben, demselben, denselben ; and the Heb. D'^at'n nx , prop, ahxov
lov ovQKVuv (comp. aviijV XQvaii'iSu II. I. 144), it, the heaven, is no stronger than
Tor oi'QdVov. — That nX should also express the nominative, is not in itself incon-
ceivable ; and of this there seem to be a few examples, as Hag. ii. 17, 2 K. xviii.
30 (but in the parallel passage R xxxvi. 15, it is wanting), perhaps also Jos. xxiL
17, Dan. ix. 13. But in other passages, which some woidd reckon here (e. g.
§118. THE ACCUSATIVE, 211
The second of the above usages is undoubtedly derived from Uie first,
and to this still belong several constructions in which the accusative is
commonly supposed to be used adverbially (§ 138, 1, Rem. 3). But we
are not therefore authorized to reject altogether the adverbial use of the
accusative.
Accordingly the accusative is employed :
1. In designations of 2>lcice : a) in answer to the question
whither ? after verbs of motion,* as T\i'^T\ X2iD let lis go out into
the field, 1 Sam. xx. 11, T^^'^nn n^bb to go to Tarshish, 2 Chron.
XX. 36, Ps. cxxxiv. 2 ; b) in answer to the question where !■
after verbs of rest, as '!T'3X n^S in the house of tJiy father, Gen.
xxxviii. 11, bni^n T\rj^ in the door of the tent, xviii. 1. It is then
employed also c) with reference to sj}cice and measure, in an-
swer to the question how far 7 Gen. vii. 20, the water rose fifteen
cubits.
In the cases a and h, especially the former, the noun often takes the
accusative endind M— , on which see § 90, 2. The first relation may
also be expressed by bi)^ (as it commonly is with reference to persons),
and the second by 3 ; but we are by no means to suppose that Avhere
these particles are omitted the construction is incomplete.
2. In designations of time : a) in answer to the question
whe7i ? as Dl'^n the day, i. e. on the day, then, or on this day.
to-day ; H'n? at evening, Hb^b noctu ; D^'ir.2 at noon Ps. xci. 6 ;
^'TTQ T\yiD n-iil):^ tht the thirteenth year {in the thirteenth year)
they revolted. Gen. xiv. 4 ; Di"li?iEi "ii^p nbnn at the beginning
of barley harvest, 2 Sam. xxi. 9 (K^thibh) ; b) in answer to the
question how long ? U'^p'^ ^^.'^. six days {long) Ex. xx. 9.
3. Where we say in respect to, according to, (fcc. and in
other adverbial limitations : Gen. xli. 40, b'l.^X N&3n pn only in.
respect to the throne icill I be greater ; 2 Sam. xxi. 20, four
and txoenty "lED^ in number (comp. rgti^ dqcd (.lov three in
number); 1 Kings xxii. 13, inx ns loith one mouth i. e. with
one voice ; Zeph. iii. 9, they served God ini? DDTIJ with one
shoulder i. e. with one heart. With a following genitive, nxi"^
T'affi for fear of thorns. Is. vii. 25 ; Job i. 5, he brought burnt-
2 Sam. xi. 25, Neh. ix. 32, and even 1 Sam. xvii. 34), there is rather to be under-
stood a loosely governed accusative, — as is certainly the case in its connection
•with the Passive (§ 143, 1, a). — In Ez. xlvii. 17, 18, 19, nx stands for m'T
unless indeed the passage is to be so emended ; comp. vs. 20.
* In Greek, this use of the accus. is exclusively poetical; II. 1, 317, xr/tr?; (5'
ovoavov ins.
212 PAET III. SYNTAX.
offerings D^3 ISp'a according to the number of them all. Here
belong also such cases as '7\0'2 nptp'a the double in money Gen.
xliii. 15, D^nh?to nS^N an ephah of barley Ruth ii. 17, D^'a^^ D:'n3T»
two years' time Gen. xli. 1. Comp. also § 116, Rem. h.
See analogous cases of the accus. in connection with a verb, in
§§ 138 and 139. By this same process, carried still farther, many sub-
stantives have come to be distinctly recognized as adverbs (§ 100, 2, &).
Rem. Such a reference to place, time, &c., the noun may have, when
it is connected with 3 (as, according to, after the manner of), though
then the preposition 3 alone is in the accusative, while the noun is to be
conceived as the genitive after it. So, a) o{ place ; B'^3']3 as in their
pasture, Is. v. 17, xxviii. 21 ; "jaxs after the manner of the stone i. e. as
into stone (the water contracts in freezing) Job xxxviii. 30, xxx. 14 ;
ttJinb 1^3 as in gorgeous dress Job xxxviii. 14 ; nibns as in a dream,
Is. xxix. 7, comp. xxiii. 15 ; b) of time, especially in the combinations
ni'^3 after the manner of the day = as on the daxj, Is. ix. 3 ; Hos. ii. 5 ;
"^HiB as in the days of — , Hos. ii. 17, ix. 9. xii. 10 ; Amos ix. 11 ; Is. Ii. 9,
c) In other relations : e. g. Job xxviii. 5, m i733 after the manner of
fire = as by fire ; Is. i. 25, I fuse away thy dross "I'ss as with lye.
Rarely, another preposition is used after such a 3, e. g. njiUX'nnS Is.
1. 26 ; 1 Sam. xiv. 14.
The substantive with 3 may, of course, be the accusative of the
object, or the nominative.
§119.
MODES OF EXPRESSING THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLA-
TIVE.*
1. When the comparative is to be expressed, the particle l^
(•'0) is prefixed to the word with which comparison is made ;
e. g. 1 Sam. ix. 2, oyJI'bS'a ?|lh5 taller than any of the people ;
Judg. xiv. 18, ^y^^ 'P'^'^'9 sweeter tJian honey ; so also after a
verb, especially such as express a quality or attribute, as 1^311^5
XSSTrbyQ and he luas taller than any of the people, 1 Sam. x. 23 ;
T^ia'bS'a v|Dii"nX nns he loved Joseph more than all his (other)
so?ts.
* In Arabic, there is a strengthened form for the comparative and superlative,
which in Heb. would be iopX. To tliis, perhaps, belonged originally "Itas
cruel, 3t3S deceitful (of a failing brook), and its opposite 'jH'^X (contr. from aitan)
■unfailing, perennis. These forms have, indeed, lost their force and stand like
solitary fragments ; somewhat as the Latin comparative dies out in the Italian,
and still more in the French, and its place is supplied by periphrasis (with pitl,
plus).
§ 120. SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS. 213
In other cases also the particle "jO often expresses pre-eminence
(s- g- I'? f'liri';! excellence above, Eccles. ii. 13, comp. Deut. xiv. 2). which
the Hebrew conceives as a separation from, a c/e-signation. Compare
the Latin ablative with the comparative ; also the etymology of the
Latin words e.vimins, egreg-ius, and in Homer ey. Ttdriav (iuliaTu, II. 4. 96.
and merely bk naamv, 18, 431). Hence the signification more than con-
nects itself with the fundamental signification out of. (Compare the
use of \>'3 in comparisons, Job xxiii. 2 ; Ps. cxxxvii. 6.)
The predicate is sometimes not expressed, and must be sup-
plied from the connection. E. g. Is. x. 10, pbiWlT'O DPl^b'^pS their
idols are more numerous (mightier) than those in Jerusalem :
Job xi. 17, D'l'^n^'a clearer than the noonday.
The correlative comparatives, greater, less, are expressed
merely by great, little, Gen. i. 16,
2. The several modes of expressing the superlative are in
principle the same : thus in all of them the positive form, by
means of the article, or a suffix, or a following genitive, is made
to designate an individual as pre-eminently the possessor of the
quality expressed (comp. le plus grand). E. g. 1 Sam. xvii. 14,
and David was "J^llO ihc small (one) i. e. the smallest, and the
three great {ones), i. e. greater, &c. ; Gen. xlii. 13 ; Jon. iii. 5,
Oiup Tyi Q^'lilia from the greatest among them (lit. their great
ones) even unto the least among tliem ; 2 Chron. xxi. 17, ]il2)5
T'Jil the youngest of his sons.
A kind of superlative, in substantives expressing quality, is made by
the construction D''UJTI^_ iIJIp (he holiest of all, prop, the holy {holiest)
among holy things.
§120.
SYKTAX OF THE NUMERALS.
1. The numerals from 2 to 10 (which are properly substan-
tives, but may also be used adverbially, §97, 1), are connected
with substantives in three different ways. They stand either
a) in the construct state before the substantive (the object num-
bered being therefore in the genitive), D'^'a^ '^^^V three days,
prop, triad of days ; or h) in the absolute state before it (the
object numbered conceived as the accusative or in apposition),
D'^31 mcbtp three sons ; or c) in the absolute state after it, and
in apposition with it (in the later books, where the adverbs also
are so placed), \lJiblJ3 rii:a three daughters, 1 Chron. xxv. 5.
214 PART m. SYlsTAX.
In like manner, the constructions nJlL" Hiir: Gen. xvii. 17, and fijia MSB
XXV. 7, 17. a hundred 7/ears, are equally common.
2. The numerals from 2 to 10 are joined, with very few
exceptions (e. g. 2 Kings xxii. 1), with the plural form of the
substantive. The tens (from 20 to 90), when they precede the
substantive, are regularly joined with the singular (in the accu-
sative), and when they follow it in apposition, with the plural.
The first is the more frequent construction. E. g. Judg. xi. 33,
-li;;? wySS'S^ twenty cities ; on the contrary Dili!)?' ni'Di^ tioenty
cubits, 2 Chron. iii. 3 seq. The plural may be used in the first
case (Ex. xxxvi. 24, 25). but the singular never occurs in the
second.
The numerals from 11 to 19 are joined to the singular form (in the
accusative) only with certain substantives, which there is frequent occa-
sion to number, as Di'' day^ HSUJ year. 'd'^X man. &c. (comp. '■•four foot
deep.^^ ^' a thousand pound,'''') ; e.g. Di"' "ib-S nS3"iN . 'proY^. fourteen day
Ex. xii. 6. With this exception, they are joined to the plural ; and in the
later books may then stand after the substantive (1 Chron. iv. 27, xxv. 5).
3. Numerals compounded of tens and units (as 21, 62) take
the object numbered either after them in the singular (accusa-
tive), as n;TD D'^'ilSTiJI D^rilT sixty-two years Gen. v. 20 ; or before
them in the plural, as in the later books (Dan. ix. 26) ; or the
object is repeated, with the smaller number in the plural, with
the larger in the singular, as Gen. xii. 4, TO© D'^ynTyi U^'lt TlJ)2n
seventy five years Gen. xxiii. 1, a^2T^ ^2X5) npTS D^"lilJ?1 HDT^ nx)a
07ie hundred and twenty-seven years.
4. Beyond 10 the ordinals have no peculiar fowms, but are
expressed by those of the cardinals, either before the object num-.
bered, or after it in the genitive ; as Di"' "iil?y ~y3t^3 on the seven -
teenth day Gen. vii. 11, S'SlO'l D'''?W W^3 in the twenty-seventh
year 1 Kings xvi. 10. In the latter case, the word nsiS is some-
times repeated, as in Gen. vii. 1]. 2 Kings xiii, 10. — In num-
Itering days of the month and years, the forms of the cardinals
are used, even for the numbers from 1 to 10, e. g. W]T\'!D ri3TJJ3 in
the second year, tJib© ri?TilJ3 in the third year 1 Kings xv. 25,
2 Kings xviii. 1 ; TiJ'inb nytdna on the ninth of the month, 1T}^^
ili"inb on the first of the tnonth, Lev. xxiii. 32, Gen. viii. 13.
Rem. 1. The numerals take the article when they stand without a
substantive, and refer to subjects mentioned before, as C^?^'?] the two
Eccles. iv. 9, 12. The case Qia^ri risa\r the seven days .Tudg. xiv. 17,
is to be explained on the principle stated Mil; 1.
§ 121. USE OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 21 5
2. Certain substantives employed in designations oi" weight, measure.
opof ime. are commonly omitted after numerals ; e. g. Gen. xx. 16. tlbx
t]!53 a thnusdnd {shekels) of silver ; so also before "tit gold 1 K. x. 16;
Ruth iii. 15. n''"ii>b i::a sz.r (ephahs) of barley ; 1 Sam. xvii. 17, nnb nna?
?e« (loaves) of bread. Tiius oi"' is omitted Gen. viii. 5, and liJ^n, viii. 13.
— Tlie number of ciibils is often stated thus : naxn i1NT2 a hu7idred cu-
bits, prop, a hundred by the cubit, Ex. xxvii. 18.
5. Numbers are expressed distrih^itively by repetition of the
cardinals, as O^ITIJ Q'!';!^ ^?co by tivo, Gen. vii. 9, 15. 0/?e «^i/«e,
07«ce, is expressed by Jnnx D^B (piop. a tread), D';''C?;e ^?i--o times,
tivice, □"''ays ffiibtC thrice. These may also be expressed by the
fein. forms of the cardinals, as inx once, W;^'^ twice, TlJibiC
thrice ; also rinX3 once. Num. x. 4. The ordinals are used in
the same manner, as fT^2TlJ a second time Gen. xxii. 15, Jer.
xiii. 3, Ez. xxi. 19.
CHAPTER II.
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN.
§121.
USE OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUN.
1. The personal pronoun as subject of the sentence, like any
other word in the same relation, requires for its union with the
predicate no separate expression of the copula, when this is
merely the substantive-verb to be (§ 144). E. g. ns""in id:X /(am)
the seer 1 Sam. ix. 19, ^;n:N Dips upright (are) ive Gen. xlii. 11,
nr\S D^^n blameless (wast) tltou Ez. xxviii. 15, DH D^TSI'^y "'S
that naked (were) they Gen. iii. 7, X^n inx Dibn one dream (is)
it Gen. xli. 26.
2. The pronoun of the tldrd person often serves to form a
connection between the subject and predicate, and then supplies
in some measure the; place of the copula, or of the verb to be.
E. g. Gen. xli. 26, the seven good kine ~:n U^'.t! y^'iT seven
years (are) they ; Eccles. v. 18, X'^n n"^n'5S npi'a oT this is a gift
of God. — Sometimes such a pronoun of the third person refers
to a subject of the first or second person ; e. g. '^S^'O S^n nriS<
thou art my king Ps. xliv. 5, where S'^H points at the same time
216 PART ni. SYNTAX.
to the predicate and gives it prominence (prop, thou (art) he, mp
king) ; Is. xxxvii. 16, Neh. ix. 6, 7, Deut. xxxii. 39. (Comp. in
Chaldee, Ezra v. 11 ; so in the Coptic.)
3. To the ground-rule (s33, 1), that the separate pronouns
express the nominative and the suffixes the obhque cases, tliere
is but one exception, viz. when there is an emphatic repetition
of the personal pronoun in an obhque case (me, me ; of tJiee.^ of
thee) ; it then takes, the second time, the separate form of the
pronoun, in the same case as the preceding <!uffix, with which it
is in apposition. E. g. the accusative of the verbal suffix, Gen.
xxvii. 34, ■'wX Q5i ''P^TIS hless me, me also, comp. Prov. xxii. 19 ;
still oftener in the genitive, witii a nominal suffix, nps Q^ ?i^l
1 Kings xxi. 19, thy blood, yea thine (piop. sanguis tui, iitique
tut) ; Prov. xxiii. 15, Ps. ix. 7. So also when the pronoun, thus
placed in apposition, is under the influence of a preposition (i. e. is
in the genitive, according to § 101, 1, comp. % 154, 4), as Hag. i. 4,
□nb< W2 for you, for you ; 1 Sam. xxv. 24, ''2J!|! "^3 on me, on me ;
1 Sam. xix. 23, N'n na ^'hv also on him ; 2 Chron. xxxv. 21, bib
nr\X T^'^by not against thee. On the same principle is to be ex-
plained Gen. iv. 26, N^n D^ intJb to Seth, to him also ; x. 21.
4. The suffix to the verb is, properly, always the accusative
(§ 33, 2, a, § 59), and is the most common form of expressing
the accusative of the pronoun (see Rem.). In certain cases,
however, it is used also (with an almost inaccurate brevity of
expression) for the dative ; as Zech. vii. 5, "^iriTpsn did ye fast
for me 7 i. e. in my behalf, for "h QPi)22n ; Job xxxi. 18, ''?b'l^
USD he (the fatherless) grew up to me as to a father, Ez. xxix.
3, comp. ver. 9.
Rem. The accusative of the pronoun is necessarily expressed by nx
(§ 117), the sign of the accusative, a) when the pronoun, for the sake
of emphasis, precedes the verb, as '^RS'^rt ^i^iN Num. xxii. 33 ; h) when
the verb has two pronouns in the accusative (as only one of them can
be a suffix), as ini< "^SX'nn 2 Sam. xv. 25. The use of this sign with
the pronoun is not confined, however, to these cases ; see Gen. iv. 14,
XV. 13.
5. The suffixes to nouns, which are pvopeiiy ge7iitives (§33,
2, 6), and supply the place of possessive pronouns* express, like
* The possessive pronoun may also be expressed by a periphrasis, as is usual
in the Aramiean ; e. g. Ruth ii. 21, ^b "ilTX D"'n3JSri the servants which (are) tc
me, lor my servants; especially when the substantive is followed immediately by
§ 121. USE OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 217
nouns in the genitive (§ 114. 2), not only the subject, but also the
object. The latter, e. g. : '^D'aJl the lorong done to me, Jer. li.
35 ; inijn;' the fear of him, Ex. xx. 20.
6. When one noun is followed by another in the genitive, so
that they together express but one complex idea, a suffix which
refers to this whole idea is appended to the second of the two
nouns (compare the analogous position of the article, §111, 1).
This occurs most frequently in the case (mentioned § 106, 1),
where the second noun is used to express a quality of the first,
as a periphrasis of the adjective ; e. g. Ps. ii. 6, ''TlJIjP "^H my holy
mount ; Is. ii. 20 ; xxxi. 7, iSC? ^^^bi? his silver idols ; '''I??
ijis his strong steps, Job xviii. 7.
Very rare is the construction na? T;?"}'!! thy lewd conduct, Ez. xvi. 27 ;
comp. xviii. 7. So also Lev. vi. 3, Ps. xxx. 8.
Bern. 1. A masculine pronoun is sometimes used with reference to a
feminine substantive (probably an inaccuracy of the colloquial language,
which passed into that of books); e. g. Gen. xli. 23, Ex. i. 21. The
reverse also occurs, but less frequently ; Deut. v. 24, 2 Sam. iv. 6.
2. The accusative of the pronoun, as object of the verb, is often
omitted where it is easily supplied from the connection, especially the
neuter accusative (it) after verbs of saying; e. g. "i^K'^'T (like dia:it) he
said it Ex. xix. 25 ; "15*1 and he told it Gen. ix. 22. As accus. of the
living object it is also omitted ; Gen. xxxviii. 17, until thou sendest (him) ;
xxiv. 12, let (her) meet me. [?]
3. It is merely emphatic pleonasm, on the contrary, and minute
formality of expression, when the noun, for which the pronoun stands,
follows immediately in apposition with it. E. g. Ex. ii. 6, she saw him,
the child; Pro v. v. 22; Ez. x. 3, a-^xn isha rohen he, the man, entered
in; 1 Sam. xxi. 14. So also Gen. ii.'l9, n*n lasi ib to them, thi
living beings ; and with the preposition repeated, Josh. i. 2.
4. In some examples also, the force of the nominal suffix, or posses
sive pronoun, has become so weak as almost to have disappeared. E. g.
■^aiX prop, my Lord (see § 108, 2, 6), namely in addressing God (Gen.
XV. 2, xviii. 3, Ps. xxxv. 23) ; then also (without regard to the pronoun),
/Ae Z/ord, spoken of God : * Ti'n';; (prop, in his, or its, connections = he,
it, together), as 1W^ DSn-bs Ex. xix. 8; and even (disregarding the
person of the suffix) after the first person, as Tnn;; 13H3X 1 K. iii. 18,
another in the genitive, as in 1 Sam. xvil. 40. (Comp. the analogous mode of
expressing the genitive, § 115.) — In this case there is sometimes a pleonastic use
of the suffix, as rijabiyiiUi ini:^ prop. Ms litter of Solomon, Cant. iii. 7 ; comp. i. 6.
* See Gesenius, Thes. Ling. Hebr., p. 329. Compare the Phoenician names of
gods, Ado7iis C^sSx) and Baaltis (inb^a) ; and our Notre Dame, Unsere Hebe
Frau. -
218 PART III SYNTAX.
comp. Is. xli. 1 ; and after the second. Is. xlv. 20. In a similar manner,
Mic. i. 2; hear, ye peoples C^3 .
§ 122.
OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
1. The personal pronoun of the third person N^n,yew. ^'^^^
plur. rran, fem. ']T^. riin (^Is, ea, id; a, ecs, ea), is used also for
the demonstrative pronoun. It then takes, regularly, the article
(exceptions see in § 111, 2, 6), but scarcely ever except when the
substantive also is made definite. E. g. i?inn ©"^sn is vir, Di'^S
}lt,^T\T^ eo die.
The distinction between S<»n and the demonstrative fiT, is as follows:
rrj ( = ot'TO?, Mc), always points out a present or near object; Xilfi ( = av-
Tog, is), like the article § 109, indicates an object already mentioned or
already known. This distinction is made very clear by Judges vii. 4 ;
of whom I say to thee, this (nt) shall go with thee, let the same (i<!in) go
with thee; and every one of whom I say to thee, this (HT) shall not go with
thee, let the same (X^in) 7iot go. In like manner, Ps. xx. 8, H^iX ovtoi,
and in52ti ulnoi in ver. 9. Hence, ^f^ Di'fi means this day. i. e. the
present day on which one is speaking or writing (Gen. xxvi. 33) ; on the
contrary, Xinn Di*?! is the day or the time of which the historian has
just been narrating (Gen. xv. 18, xxvi. 32), or the prophet has just been
prophesying (Is. v. 30. vii. IS. 20), and of which he goes on to narrate
or to prophesy.
2. The demonstrative, in its leading form riT (as well as ^T,
it), has also, especially in poetry, the force of the relative "TttJX ;
comp. in Engl, tliat for which. E. g. Ps. civ. 8, to the place HT
^r}^ ^"l^T fvhich thou hast destined for them. It is even em-
ployed (like TCii, §123, 1) to give a relative sense to another
word ; e. g. Ps. Ixxiv. 2, Mount Zion 13 MDtO HT on ivhich thou
dwellest.
nt is used adverbially, a) for there, rit ^ITi see there ! and then
merely as an intensive particle, especially in questions, as MT iia^
wherpfore then'? b) in reference to time, for now, as C^^SS ii}_ now
(already) ticice, Gen. xxvii. 36.
3. The interrogative "^"Q may be used in reference to a plural,
as TXi)^ "^"G Gen. xxxiii. 5 (for which, however, the more accurate
expression is ^12^ ''^, Ex. x. 8); and also in reference to things,
but only where the idea of persons is implied, e. g. QDffi "''Q who is
Shechem {the ^hechemite.s) ? Judg. ix. 28 ; comp. Gen. xxxiii. 8.
Moreover^ "''0 may also stand in the genitive, as "''Q na whose
§123. RELATIYE PRONOUN. 219
daughter 7 Gen. xxiv. 23 ; and both '^'52 and ITfl are also used
indefinitely, for any one lohoever, and any thing luhatever (Job
xiii. 13). For the latter, the language has also the word fl^^Si'a.
For the use of no in a form of negative command, see § 153. 2. first
Note.
§123.
EELATIVE PRONOUN AND RELATIVE CLAUSES.
1. The pronoun Itdsj! often serves merely as a sign of rela-
tion, i. e. to give a relative signification to substantives, adverbs,
or pronouns. E. g. DID there, QIC — ITCS where; n^fe thither,
n^TC— niesi: tvhither ; DIS^ thence, df^— ntii ivhejice. In the
same manner the Hebrew forms the oblique cases of the relative
pronoun, who, ivhich, viz.
Dative, ib to him, i^ *ltDS< to whom ; Dfl^, Itlb to them, DH^ "li?^.
Accusative, irii?, rtnk /iim, Aer; iViii "ittJii!, «lin!!< "iTDit whom
{quein, quam).
With 2^repositions, i2 therein, i3 11^!* loherein, '12'ffl'a therefrom,
^s^^ nt^X wherefrom.
Genitive, isiijb ^'©N whose language, Deut. xxviii. 49.
The accusative whom may, however, be expressed by iTBifl
alone, as in Gen. ii. 2.
i?e?/i. L The Hebrew is able, in this way, to give a relative sense to
the pronoun of the first and second persons in the oblique cases, for
which in English the third must be used. E. g. Gen. xlv. 4, ^nk "itJN ;
Num. xxii. 30, iby nrx ; Is. xli. 8, Jacob rpinnns ^^wX lit. whom I have
chosen thee ; Hos. xiv. 4. Only in the nom. of the 1st and 2d person is
this possible in German also^ e. g. der ich, der du, die wir, where der
stands for welcher, and (like the Heb. ^^N) is merely a sign of relation.
2. The word "iCX is commonly separated from the one which it thus
affects, by one or more words, as D^ !^^'^ n^N where %cas, Gen. xiii. 3.
But seldom are they Avritten together, as in 2 Chron. vi. 11.
2. The relative ITlJil! often includes the personal or demon-
strative pronoun, in such combinations as he (or she) who, that
which, those who, see § 124, 2, as in Latin qui stands for is qui.
E. g. Num. xxii, 6, "li^n "ItCNI and (he) whom thou cursest ; Is.
lii. 15, ^'Sflt! bib -nrx (that) which they have not heard. The
pronoun is almost always to be supplied where a preposition
stands before "^tDij; ; the preposition is then construed with the
220 PART III. SYNTAX.
supplied pronoun, and the relative takes the case which is requi-
red by its connection with the following part of the sentence.
E. g. ittJSitb to him who, and to them who; ^i^^^ from him
who, from those loho or which ; "TttJi*? prop, according to that
which, hence, as ; "lllJXTiS; him who, those luho, and also tliat
which*
Sometimes the idea of place or time is also to be supplied ; as iisjxa
in (that place) where ? i^.st'? from (that time) when.
3. The pronoun "nlJii may be omitted in all the cases which
have been specified : there is then no expression of the relative,
as in the English construction, the friend I met ; the hook I told
you of ; where the relation is indicated only by the subordination
of the relative clause. This omission of l1i?S|! (most frequent in
poetry) takes place —
a) Where it would stand as a pronoun in the nominative or accu-
sative ; e. g. Gen. xv. 13, DHb sb f ""^^ '^" " ^"'^^ (which be-
longs) not to them; IsyS";! f^HTE'S bb'^l and he falls into the pit
(which) he makes ; Gen. xxxix. 4, ib-ttj;!-!:! all (which) ivas,
i. e. belonged, to him, comp. ver. 5, Avhere IIDS is inserted ;
Eccles. X. 5 (comp. vi. 1, where with the same words iTCi? is
employed).t
h) When it would be merely a sign of relation, e. g. Ps. xxxii. 2,
happy the man, 'jiS' ib Tf\tTi niu'n^ iJb to whom Jehovah impu-
teth not sin ; Job iii. 3, Ex. xviii. 20. Frequently in speci-
fications of time, where it would have the signification when ;
2 Chron. xxix. 27, nbis^ti bnn nyn at the tifne (when) the
offering began; Ps, iv. 8, ^^l DlDiT'ri'i D:5i'^ ny in the time
(when) their corn and 'must are abwidant ; Jer. xxxvi. 2.
c) When there is also an omission of xhe personal or demonstra-
tive pronoun (No. 2) ; e. g. Is. xli. 24, DDSi in^"} nn^in an
abomination, (he who) tnakes choice of you ; Job xxiv. 19,
* The examples are very rare, in whieh the preposition before "IIUN refers, as
with us, to the relative itself; as IliJX dSJ Gen. xxxi. 32, for ilZV idx with whom
(xliv. 9, 10) ; perhaps "illJX3 Is. xlvii. 12, for Dti3 "itix in which. Comp. also
tl-il^-n-i^X nx Zech. xii. 10, for inx !inp|n -|'Ij^{ .
•j- The Arabic omits the relative when the substantive to which it refers is
indeterminate, as above ; but inserts it when the substantive is determinate. In
the latter case, the Hebrew commonly inserts it in prose (see Jer. xxiii. 39, Ex.
xiv. 13 et al.); though it is sometimes omitted, Ex. xviii. 20, 2 Sam. xviii. 14,
especially in poetry, Ps. xviii. 3, xlLx. 13, 21, Deut. xxxii. 1*7, Job iii. 3.
§ 124 MODE OF EXPRESSING PRONOUNS. 221
Sheol [sweeps away] IX'jn (those who) sin ; comp. ver. 9.
The pronoun thus omitted may include the idea of place or
time, as 1 Chron. xv. 12, ib ''nirpn-bs to (the place which)
I have j^repared for it ; comp. Ex. xxiii. 20.
Rem. 1. When the pronoun to be supplied would be in the genitive,
the preceding noun takes the constr. state. E. g. Ex. iv. 13, nban I'^a
by the hand (of him whom) thou wilt send ; Hos. i. 2. nin'i—ia'n r^nri
beginning (of that which) Jehovah spake; Ps. Ixxxi. 6;, '''^'S^'^ xb rsb
the speech (of one whom) I knew not ; Ixv. 5. Lam. i. 14, Jer. xlviii. 36.
Comp. § 116, 3.
2. Relative clauses are also attached by the copula ( ■! ). e. g. Job
xxix. 12. the orphan, i^ "iti? !!<b'i and he that hath no helper.
§124.
MODE OF EXPEESSING THOSE PRONOUNS FOR WHICH THE
HEBREW HAS NO PROPER FORMS.
1. The reflexive pronoun in the oblique cases, 5e, sihi, &c.,
is expressed —
a) By the conjugations Niphal and Hithpael.
b) By the pronominal suffix of the third person ; e. g. Judg. iii.
16, n")!! Tirii? ib toy^;i ajid Ehud made him (sibi) a siDord ;
Gen. xxii. 3, Abraham took tivo of his servants ins with
him, for loith himself ; 1 Sam. i. 24, she carried him up
rt^y with her, for with herself ; Gen. viii. 9, Jer, vii. 19,
Ez. xxxiv. 2, 8, 10.
c) By periphrasis with a substantive, especially IZJBl?, e.g. y'^^5 iib
''tpBD / should not know myself, Job ix. 21 ; Jer. xxxvii. 9 ;
rta"ip3 within herself (I'll? the inner part), Gen. xviii. 12
Comp. Rem. 3.
The idea self is similarly periphrased. in Arabic by eye, sold, spirit,
in Sanscrit by soul, spirit (dtman), in Rabbinic DSS. D"ia (bone). Cl^ia
(body), in Amharic by iiJX"i (head), in Egyptian by mouth, hand* et al.
Comp. in Engl, my body (I myself), in Middle High Germ, mm lip, din lip.
2. The relative "Wif;^ commonly includes the personal and
demonstrative pronoun (in the combinations he who, that uiho,
those who, h 123, 2) in all cases of the singular and plural. Yery
seldom it is expressed by the interrogative pronoun, as 'iB'Slia
that which, Eccl. i. 9, iii. 15.
* M, Q. Schwarze, kopt, Gramm. Berlin, 1850, S. 846, 861.
222 PART III. SYNTAX.
Rem. 1. Each, every one, when a person is meant, is expressed by
^"ix a man, sometimes repeated ^"'X UJiX Ex. xxxvi. 4, O'lNl tj^x Ps.
Ixxxvii. 5 ; with reference either to persons or things, by bb, commonly
without the article (§ 111, 1) ; by repetition, "ijrina i;^i2a every morning ;
and by the plural, t3''"i|53^ every morning Ps. Ixxiii. 14.
2. Any one, some one, is expressed by tjix Ex. xvi. 29, Cant. viii. 7 ;
and by Q'lX Lev. i. 2 ; any thing, something (especially with a negation),
by 12'n, "la'n-bs without the article. Comp. also § 122, 3.
3. jSe//" (besides the above forms in No. 1, c), is expressed, in refer-
ence to persons and things, by X^iti , tf^li ; as X^lti "'jHx the Lord, he for
the Lord himself, Is. vii. 14; n53ii D^'iin^n the Jews themselves. Esther ix.
1. — TVie same is expressed by X^in , X'ln with the article; as Xinn iiJ"^xri
the same man, X'^^r! '^^i ^'^ ^^^ same time (but also, that man. in that
time, § 122, 1). In reference to things, the noun d^S (bone, body, in this
case figuratively for essence, substance) is also used as a periphrasis for
this pronoun ; e. g. ii-rri Di'."! n:s:5;3 on the selfsame day, Gen. vii. 13 ;
3omp. Job xxi. 23, ifflPi DSSa in his prosperity itself^ in his very pros-
perity.
4. The one — the other (alter — alte?-) is expressed by nt or "inx
repeated, or by d''X with nx brother or ?"i friend, and where the femi-
nine is required, by nt^X woman, with ninx sister or ni2Jn friend ; both
the masc. and /em. forms are used also with reference to inanimate
objects of the same gender. The same form is used to express one
another, as Gen. xiii. 11, and they separated, I'^nx b^x: ^ix the one from
the other, i. e. from one another; Gen. xi. 3, they said wsn-^x 12J''X to
one another ; F^x. xxvi. 3, Jive curtains shall be joined tnn'inx'bx rtTTX to
one another.
5. Some is often expressed by the plural form alone, as d"i»^ some
days Dan. viii. 27, Ci3\!j some years Dan. xi. 6, 8 ; and sometimes by
"iiax ir;) sunt qui, Neh. v. 2-4.
CHAPTER III.
SYNTAX OF THE VERB.
§125.
USE OF THE TENSES IN" GENERAL.
From the poverty of the Hebrew language in the means of
expressing the relations of time, absolute and relative (§§40 and
48), we should naturally expect some variety in the uses of the
same form.
We are not to infer from this, however, that there was no
well-defined and established use of the two existing tense-forms ;
§126. USE OF THE PERFECT. 223
Oil the contrary, each has its own definite sphere, as aheady sta-
ted in general, in the Note on page 88. The Perfect serves for
the expression of i\\G finished and passed, what is come to pass
or is gone into effect ; whether it actually belongs already to
past time, or lies properly in the present or even in the future,
and is only represented as finished (i. e. expressed with the same
certainty as if already done) or as relatively prior to another and
later event. The Imperfect {Infectmn, Fiituriim) expresses, on
the contrary, the unfinished, and hence the continuing and pro-
gressive (even in past time), that which is coming into being,
and the future. The Imperfect, moreover, in a modified form
(§48), is also used to express the relations of the Optative, the
Jussive, and the Subjunctive. To which is to be added another
peculiarity of the Hebrew diction, already noticed in § 49, viz.
the attachment of Imperfects to a Perfect, and vice versa of Per-
fects to an Imperfect, by means of the Vav consecutive. The
details are given in the following sections.
It is a false view, which regards the so-called Perfect and Imperfect
not as tenses, but as designed originally to express distinctions of mood
rather than relations o^time.*
As examples of the Perfect and Imperfect used expressly to denote
opposite relations of time, we refer to Is. xlvi. 4, Ntax "isx;! "^H'^bS "^ax /
have done it, and I loUl (still) hear (you) ; and ver. 11, tns^'^nx v|X ""Pills'^}
nsbsx v|X "Ti"!^^ I have spoken it and will bring it to pass, I have pur-
posed and will accomplish it ; Deut. xxxii. 21, Nah. i. 12, 1 K. ii. 38.
§126.
USE OF THE PERFECT.
The form of the Perfect stands
1. In itself and properly, for absolutely and fully past time
(P renter it u.m peifectiim), e. g. Gen. iii. 10, 11, Tj^ ^'''^^ "^^ who
hath showed to thee 1- ver. 13, rnhy hast thou done this ? Comp.
vs. 14, 17, 22. Hence it is used in narrating past events ; Gen.
i. 1, in the beginning God created (Perf.) the heaven and the
earth ; iv. 1, xxix. 17. Job i. 1, there ivas (Perf.) a man in the
land of Uz ; ii. 10.
* On the contrary, very nearly corresponds the distinction of Actio perfecta
and Actio infecta, introduced after Varro into Latin grammar.
224 PART III. SYNTAX.
In continued narration, it is usually followed by the Imperfect, con-
nected with it by Vac consecutive. § 129. 1.
•* 2. For the Pluperfect. Gen. ii. 2, TWV 'im iriDSib^a his
work which he had tnade ; ver. 5, Jehovah had not yet caused
it to rain ; vii. 9, xix. 27, xx. 18, xxvii. 30, xxxi. 20, Jon. i. 5.
3. For the abstract Present of our languages, where this de-
notes, r'a) a condition or property aheady long- continued and
still existing, as '^r^^'l^ I loiow, Jobix. 2, x. 13 ; '^)n?"j^ i?^ I know
not, Gen. iv. 9 ; ''nx/iO I hate* Ps. xxxi. 7 ; ^nj^lS / am right-
eons, Job xxxiv. 5 ; nb^iji thou art great, Ps. civ. 1 ; ^T\fCi'^ I am
little, Gen. xxxii. 11 ; or (^y)in already existing, but still recur-
ring (habitual) action or state (frequent in expressing general
truths); as, ''Tr\yy^ I say, I think. Job vii. 13, Ps. xxxi. 15. — Ps.
i. 1 ; happy the man, who walks not (^^ri) in the counsel of the
wicked, nor staiids ("TSy) in the loay of sinners, nor sits {^''0'^) in
the seat of scoffers ; x. 3, cxix. 30, 40.
Here, in the sphere of our Present, the Perfect and Imperfect
meet. The one or the other is used, according as the speaker
regards the action or state expressed by the verb as one that be-
fore existed, but still subsisting, or perhaps just then completed ;
or, as then about coming to pass, continuing, perhaps happening
at the moment (comp. § 127, 2). We accordingly find, in about
the same sense, '^vbb'^ sb Ps. xl. 13, and b^^S i^b Gen. xix. 19,
xxxi. 35. Often, in such cases, Perfects and Imperfects are inter-
mingled ; e. g. Is. v. 12, Prov. i. 22, Job iii. 17, 18. «
4. The Perfect refers even io future time ; namely, in asseve-
rations and assurances, where the will of the speaker views the
act as done, as the same as carried into effect. Our Present
also, in such cases, is readily used for the Future. So in con-
tracts, or proinises of the nature of a contract : e. g. Gen. xxiii.
11, I give (■'rif??) thee the field ; ver. 13, I give (""riri?) money for
the field ; especially when it is God who makes the promise
(Gen. i. 29, xv. 18, xvii. 20) : and also where one expresses him-
self with confidence, especially when declaring what God is about
to do ; e. g. Ps. xxxi. 6, ^riS "Ji'^'is thoii, O God, deliverest me.
Hence it is frequent in animated description of the future, and in
prophecies ; e. g. Is. ix. 1, the people, that walk in darkness, see
(^i{"i) a great light ; v. 13, therefore, my people goes into cap-
As m Latin, novi, memini, odi, in Gr. oiSa, /xifivtjfiai.
§ 126. USE OF THE PERFECT. 225
tivity (nb5) ; vs. 14, 17, 25, 26 ; xi. 1, 2, 4, 6, 10. In these
cases, also, it alternates with the Imperfect ; e. g. Is. v. — Comp.
No. 6.
In Arabic also, the Perfect, strengthened indeed by the particle ip,
is employed in the emphatic expression of a promise, and the like. Thus
it is said : 1 have already given it thee ; i. e. it is as good as done.
Similar to this is the use of the Lat. perii. and the Gr. oXm7.u, Siicfd^oqag
II. 15, 128.*
5. Of the relative tenses, those are expressed by the Perfect
in which the past is the principal idea, viz. a) the Imperfect
siihjimctive (which is also expressed by the Imperfect, § 127, 5) ;
e. g. Is. i. 9, ll'i^'l !T^b?b ^r^^n D^pS ice should have been [csse-
mus^ as Sodom, we should have been like Gomorrha ; Job iii.
13 ; b) the Pluperfect subjunctive ; 3 g. Is. i. 9, l^riin "^b^b if
he had not left ; Num. xiv. 2, ^;ri'a ^b if we had but died ! (^b
with the Imperfect would be, if we might but die ! § 136, 2) :
Judges xiii. 23 ; Job x. 19, n;ini« ^n^^^n i?b ni^S? / should be as
if I had never been ; c) the Future perfect {futurum exactum) ;
e. g. Is. iv. 4, fn'l DX ivhcn lie shall have washed away, prop.
when he hath washed away ; vi. 11. — Gen. xliii. 14, ''PbbTlJ 1tJS2
"iribDffi if I ain bereaved (for sitall be, ubi orbus fuero), then am 1
bereaved (expression of hopeless resignation).
6. In the cases hitherto considered, the Perfect stands by
itself, independently, and without any immediate connection
with verbs that precede it. But its uses are no less various,
when it is connected by '1 ( Yav consecutive of the Perfect) with
a preceding verb ; it then connects itself also {in signification)
with the tense and mood of that verb. The tone, in this case,
is thrown forward ; see §49, 3. It is thus used —
a) Most frequently with reference to future time, when pre-
ceded by the Imperfect. E, g. Gen. xxiv. 40, Jehovah will send
his angel T]3'n'^ H'^'p^H'!! and prosper thy way (prop, and then he
* The assurance, that something shall take place, can also serve for the expres-
sion of a wish that it may take place. So in Gen. xl. 14, lOn ^"MZV njTfbr"
151 ''3fl'i2iri'1 and deal kindly with me (prop, and thou dealest kindly with me,
I hope) and make mention of me, &c. The addition of X5 puts this sense of the
Perfect here beyond doubt. The Arabic also employs the Perfect, in the expres-
sion of a wish and of earnest entreaty. In Hebrew, see also Job xxi. 16, the counsel
of the wicked "'Sia ni^H"] be far from me! xxii. 18. Comp. the use of the Perfect
consecutive, after the Imperative No. 6, c.
15
226 PART ni. SYNTAX
■prospei's) ; Judg. vi. 16, 1 Sain. xvii. 32. Here the Future, as
the discourse proceeds, passes over into the narrative form of the
PrcBteriie ; and this use of the Perfect is connected, in significa-
tion, witii that explained in No. 4.
b) For the Present subjunctive, when that is the meaning
of the preceding Imperfect (§ 127, 3). E. g. Gen. iii. 22, nb-SO-} "JS
bDS"! JipbT 11^ lest he init forth his hand and take and eat ;
prop, and so takes and eats. xxii. 12, xix. 19, Num. xv. 40, Is.
vi. 10.
c) For the Imperative, when this form precedes. Gen. vi. 21,
riBCST T]b rrp take for thyself, and gather ; prop, and then thou
gatherest. xxvii. 43, 44, 1 K. ii. 36. As under letter a, the
expression of command here passes over into plain narration of
what is to be done. The Perfect is sometimes separated from
the Vav ; Ps. xxii. 22.
d) For past or present time, when this is expressed by a
preceding Perfect or Imperfect.
Bern. 1. The Pe^f. witli Vav consec. has also reference to future
time, when preceded by any indication of futurity ; as Exod. xvi. 6, 7,
DPS'ii'i yys_ at even, then ye shall know ; xvii. 4, yet a little while •^a^brjOl
and they will stone me; 1 Sam. xx. 18, 1 K. ii. 42, Ex. xxxix. 27 ; after
a participle referring to future time, 1 K. ii. 2.
But also, without any previous indication of futurity, after antecedent
clauses implying, a) a cause, or b) a condition, the Per/, with Vav
consec. is employed in the sense of the Fhitiire (and Imperative). For
letter a, comp. Num. xiv. 24, because another spirit is with him T^nX"i2n5
therefore will I bring him; and without the causal particle. Gen. xx, 11,
there is no fear of God in the land, ■'3^5"if!i!! and therefore they will kill me
(for, because there is none, therefore) ; xlv. 12, 13, Ex. vi. 6. Comp. Ps.
xxv. \\. for thy name'' s sake, rnboT therefore forgive {ov, wilt thou for-
give). For letter b, comp. Gen. xxxiii. 10, if I have found grace, 0^15^?
then take ; and without the conditional particle (§ 155, 4, a), xliv. 22,
leaves he (if he leaves) his father, naj then he dies, xxviii. 29, xlii. 38,
Is. vi. 7, /o, touches this (if this touches) thy lips, lOI then departs &c.
1 K. iii. 14. — Also with various other references to the present, there is
connected the expression, by means of 1 with the Perfect, either 1) of
futurity (Judges xiii. 3, thou art unfruitful Fi'7^^1 n'^nrji but thou shall
conceive and bear ; 1 Sam. ix. 8, here is a quarter shekel, ripjl that will
I give) ; or 2) of a wish (Ruth iii. 9, I am Ruth nbnsi therefore spread
out &c.) ; or 3) of an interrogation (Ex. v. 5, the people are numerous
in the land, cnx cnadni and tcoidd ye let them rest? Gen. xxix. 15,
1 Sam. xxv. 10,'ll). '
2. A very frequent formula of the prophetic style (like "^tl^l a}id ii
cam.e to pass, in narration) is ^^n") and it will come to pass, either with
§ 127. USE OF THE IMPERFECT. 227
a preceding Future, or without it (see Rem. 1). especially when a speci-
fication oUime is added ; as Is. vii. 18, p""il2J-i xwn Di'^a f^^'7']•
§127.
USE OF THE IMPERFECT.
The significations of the Imjierfect are even more various,
perhaps, than those of the Perfect. But here," the language can
give a more definite expression to certain modal relations, by
lengthened and shortened forms of the Imperfect (see § 48),
namely the Jussive and the Cohortcitive (§ 128). Here also, the
Vav consecutive has a very comprehensive and important appli-
cation (§ 129). The shortening, however, as already stated
(§48, 4), is not apparent in all forms, at least in the mode oJ
writing them ; and, aside from this, usage is not constant, the
common Imperfect being also employed in almost all the relations
for which the shortened one was formed.
The Hebrew Imperfect is, in general, directly the opposite of
the Perfect, and accordingly expresses tlie unfinished, what is
coming to pass, and is future ; but also what is continuing and in
progress at any period of time, even in the past. See p. 88, Note.
Accordingly the Imperfect stands —
1. For the pwper future ; Gen. ix. 11, b^^'Q "112? •n^_ri'} xb
there shall not again be a flood ; 1 K. i. 13, 24, 30, '^'^HX 1fbl21
he will (or shall) reign after vie ; also, in narration for the fu-
ture with reference to some point of time in the past, as 2 Kings
iii. 27, the first-horn who was to reign {regnaturiis erat).
2. As often also for present time ; 1 Kings iii. 7, 5!''jS xb /
know not ; Is. i. 13, bD^S iib I cannot hear. Gen. xxxvii. 15. It
is employed especially in the expression of permanent states and
conditions, which are now and always will be (where the Perfect
also is used, but more rarely, § 124, 3, a, 6), and hence in the
expression of general truths. E. g. Gen. xliii. 32. the Egyptians
■may not eat with the Hebrews ; Job iv. 17, is man just before
God 7 ii. 4 ; Prov. xv. 20, ns TVm:^'} DDH ']'! a ivise son rejoices
his father. This is very frequent in Job and in Proverbs.
In the same formula is used sometimes the Perfect, and sometimes
the Imperfect, but not necessarily without any difference of meaning,
e. g. Job i. 7, N^n "i-^x^ ivhence couiesl, Ihou ? Gen. xvi. S. rxn nt^a-'X
whence didst Ihou come ?
228 PART ni. SYNTAX.
3. For a number of relations which in Latin are expressed
by the Subjunctive, especially by the Present Subjunctive ; name-
ly the future, or what is to be, according to a subjective view or
in some other conditional relation. Thus it stands— :-
a) For the Subjunctive after particles signifying that, that not
{ut,ne), as lirs, especially IITX ]?)2b, and "J^rb (without -l©i||),
also max "jy^ that, in order that* E. g. Gen. xi. 7, iJb m»»
lyaip;! that they may not understand ; Num. xvii. 5, '}?'ab
2'ij:';' i5b "iiDii; that he may not come near ; Deut. iv« 1, 'J?'ab
^■^nn in order that ye may live ; Ez. xii. 12, HSn;' iib "iffiS 1?^
^?^ order that he tnay not see ; and also after )'^ that not, lest,
e. g. i'l;' nbc:* id Gen. iii. 22.
6) For the Optative ; Job iii. 3, UV 13's?i j^ereat dies ; vs. 5, 6, 8 ;
vi. 9. In this signification, the lengthened or shortened form
is properly employed (§ 128, 1, 2), often with the particle N3 ;t
e. g. xriia;^':, Ps. vii. 10, O that might cease ! N?""'!^;'
Tj'iay Gen. xliv. 18, thy servant woidd speak, i. e. let thy ser-
vant speak. Ver. 33, i^I'^tJ';' let hitn, I pray, remain. Some-
times, however, the common Imperfect occurs in place of the
shortened one, even when the latter is distinctly formed ; e. g.
ns^ri let there appear, Gen. i. 9 ; comp. xli, 34 ; riiil^ bs
Job iii. 9.
c) For the Imperative, for which, in negative commands (prohi-
bitions), it always stands ; when prohibitory, with iib^ as :
13;\ri i?b thou shall not steal, Ex. xx. 15 ; when in the sense
of dissuasion, of a wish or opinion that something should not
be done, with bi?, as : K'l'^ri bx do not fear Gen. xlvi. 3, Job
iii. 4, 6, 7. Here too, especially in connection with bx, the
proper form is the Jussive, viz. the shortened Imperfect. It is
also used for the Imperative when the third person is required,
and for the Imperative in the passive conjugations, where
this form does not exist (see § 46). E. g. lis ""n;^ let there he
light. Gen. i. 3 ; n^l"" let him he put to death, Ex. xxxv. 2.
Comp. §128,2.
rf) For the so-called Potential, where we use may, can, might,
could, <fec. E. g. Gen. ii. 16, bssp bbsj thou mayest eat ;
* When these particles have a different gignification, the Imperfect is not used ;
e. g. 15^ because, with the Perf. Judg. ii. 20, "illJX because, Gen. xxxiv. 27.
f The particle N3 (§ 105) gives to the verb the form of a request and of a wish.
On the use of it with the first person, see § 128, 1.
§ 127. USE OF THE BIPERFECT. 22S
Prov. XX. 9, I'QS'' ■•'a who can say 7 Gen. xliii. 7, J!''!? ?^^n
could ice knoio ? Gen. xx. 9, iW"! ^b ^TTS ivhich may not (or
should not) be done.
4. Tho^idea of the Imperfect falls even within the sphere of
the;;a5;; and, chiefly, in the following cases :
a) After the particles T6« then* Q^'J not yet, Dnt:a (when not yet)
before.t E. g. Josh. x. 12, ?"Din;i na*!;" TX then spake Joshua ;
Gen. ii. 5, ni^n^ on-J //tere was not yet ; Gen. xxxvii. 18 ;
i52P Onm 6e/o/-e thou earnest forth, Jer. i. 5. Compare the
use of the Perf and Impf. in the same sentence, 1 Sam. iii. 7.
b) Often also of continuous, constantly repeated acts, of custom-
ary and habitual action, like the Imperfect of the Latin and
French languages. Repeated or customary action involves
the idea of continued renewal, the incomplete, the unnnished,
which lies in the conception of the Imperfect. 1 K. iii. 4, a
thousand burnt-offerings did Solomon offer (nb?;:). Job i. 5,
thus did (niS?^) Job continually ; xxii. 6, 7, 8, xxix. 12, 13,
Judg. xiv. 10, 1 Sam. i. 7, 1 Kings v. 25, Is. x. 6, Ps. xxxii.
4, xlii. 5. But also —
c) Of singly occurring, transient events, where the Perfect might
be expected. t So at least in the poets, as we use the Present
tense in lively description of the past. Job iii. 3, perish the
day in ib^X wherein I was born ; ver. 11, T.^'QS? Dtin'O sb niab
wherefore died I not from the ivomb 7 iv. 12, 15, 16, x. 10, 11.
5, For the Imperfect Subjunctive, especially in conditional
sentences (the modus conditionalis) both in the protasis and
'apodosis. Ps. xxiii. 4, i?n^X i?b . . . ^b^-iS DS even if I should
* But when ti* signifies then with reference to futurity, the Imperfect has a
future sense (Ex. xii. 48).
f The term not-yet, implying something yet to be, not yet existing, could not be
followed, in the Hebrew's conception, by the expression of the finished and past.
He must therefore use the Imperfect tense, with reference to the point of time indi-
cated by D"! i: . So of TN ; the act following it is conceived as something proceeding
onward from that point of time, not as a thing then completed and past.— Tr.
\ This would seem irreconcilable with the idea of the Imperfect ; but it cer-
tainly lies in the examples adduced. In Job iii. 3, the wish is predicated of the
day, when he was yet to be born ; (in the verses following, treated as a past reality.)
Ver. 11 belongs, properly, to letter a; from the womh (= from birth) being the
point of time, at which the act is conceived as belonging to the future. In iv. 12,
15, 16, the instantaneous is excluded by the nature of the case. Still more clear is
X 10, 11.— Tr.
230 PART III. SYNTAX.
go ... I should not fear ; Job v. 8, / would ajJi^ly unto God
(were I in thy place); ix. 21, / must he ignorant of myself
(should I speak otherwise) ; x. 18, / had died, and no eye had
seen me ; iii. 16, vi. 14. In this case, also, the shortened form
of the Imperfect is appropriate (§ 128, 2, c).
§ 128.
USE OF THE LENGTHENED AND SHOETENED IMPERFECT
(COHORTATIVE AND JUSSIVE).
1. The Imperfect with the ending Si—. (Cohortative), found
almost exclusively in the fiist person, is expressive oi purpose or
endeavor (§ 48, 3) ; and hence is employed, a) to express excite-
ment of one's self, or a determination, with some degree of em-
phasis. Ps. xxxi. 8, nri'oilJS^'l nb'^^ij let me he glad and rejoice !
ii. 3 ; njpPSp come! let us hreak asunder. Also, with less em-
phasis, in soliloquy ; Ex. iii. 3, !^X"1X j iiiTinOSJ / ^cill go noiv
and see ; Gen. xxxii. 21 ; h) to express a wish, a request (for
leave to do something) ; Deut. ii. 27, ri'lSyi^ let me pass through ;
Num. XX. 17, n3"rn23>3 let us j)ass through. I pray thee ; c)
to express an object or design, when it is commonly joined by
1 to a preceding Imperative ; Gen. xxvii. 4, hring it hither, ribDi?'!
and I will eat =that I may eat ; xxix. 21. xlii. 34, Job x. 20.
More seldom, d) it stands in conditional sentences with if,
though, expressed or implied, Job xvi. 6, xi. 17. Ps. cxxxix. 8.
It also stands, e) frequently after Vav consecutive (§41, 2).
In Jeremiah, it is used to give force and emphasis of almost every
kind; iii. 25, iv. 19, 21. vi. 10.
2. The shortened Imperfect (the Jussive) is used principally.
a) in the expression of command, wish, as if.%'yp\proferat Gen. i.
24 (on the contrary, Indicative, X'^SZin prnferet Is. Ixi. 11); Dp;;'
sistat Jer. xxviii. 6 ; ""^^ lb utinam sit xxx. 34 ; and joined to
an Imperative by 1 (comp. No. 1, c), Ex. viii. 4, entreat Jehovah
"IC^I and let hifii take away= that he may take away ; x. 17.
Judg. vi. 30, 1 Kings xxi. 10, Esth. vii. 2 (toS'n'i) ;* 6) in prohi-
bition and negative entreaty, as lUJn sb thou shalt not hring
hack, Gen. xxiv. 8 ; rnttJri"bs do not destroy, Deut. ix. 26 ; in
the tone of request, "^^JSTiS n^^ri'bx do not turn me away [1 K.
* On these two cases (a and 6), see § 127. h and c.
§ 129. BIPERFECT WITH VA V COXSECUTIVR 231
ii. 20] ; of warning, yo^^ bi5 iie conjidat Job xv. 31, xx. 17 ; c)
often in conditional clauses (the usage of the Arabic) both in the
piotasi.? and apodosis. E. g. Ps. xlv. 12 {y&TT^), civ. 20 (nrp
and ■'n^l), Hos. vi. 1 {V.): Is. 1. 2 (nbn), Gen. iv. 12 (^oh), Lev.
XV. 24 (■'nn . . . Di?), Job x. 16, xiii. 5, xvii. 2, xxii. 28, 1 Sam.
vii. 3 (^S?!^'l) ; d) after Vav conseMtive (§ 49, 2).
As the distinction of the Jussive from the common form of tlie Imper-
fect,'hy its orthograpliy. is very far from universal (§ 48, 4, and § 127.
3, b. c), it is sometimes uncertain how this tense should be understood ;
especially as, in the poets, the shortened form occurs, now and then,
where the common one might be used without essential ditierence in the
sense ; e. g. Ps. xxx. 9. The Jussive then expresses rather a subjective
view, it may be. it might, should^ could be, as the sense and connection
in each passage require.
§129.
USE OF TIIE IMPERFECT WITH YAV CONSECUTIVE.
1. The Imperfect with Vav consecutive (Vl3j5^1 cind then kill-
ed he. § 49, 2), stands only in close connection with what pre-
cedes. Most usually, a narration begins with the Perfect, and is
then continued by Imperfects with Vav consecutive. This is the
usual way of relating past events. E. g. Gen. iv. 1, and Adam
knew i^Tl) Eve his ivife, and she conceived and bare (~'"n!] "i«!?J?!!)
Cain ; vi. 9, 10, ifcc, x. 9, 10, 15, 19, xi. 12, 13-15, 27, 28, xiv.
5, (fee, XV. 1, 2, xvi. 1, 2, xxi. 1, (fee, xxiv. 1, 2, xxv, 19, 20.
(fee, xxxvi. 2-4, xxxvii. 2.*
But where there is a connection with earlier events, the
Impf. with Vav consecntive may commence the narration, or a
division of it. Very often, it begins with Tl''^ {xcd tyivtro)
and it happened Gen. xi. 1, xiv. 1, xvii. 1, xxii. 1, xxvi. 1, xxvii.
1 ;t nin;> l''?^'''] and Jehovah said, xii. 1.
* Sometimes, the preceding Perfect is only imphed in the sense ; e. g. Gen. xi.
10, Sem (was) a hundred years old l^.'i'^ "'^'^ ^^^^'^ ''■^ begat ; x. 1. So also in the
following sentence : on the third da>/ ^'^I'^VTii. xi^^l then he lifted up his eyes;
fully expressed : it happened on the third day, and then — ; Gen. xxii. 4, Is. xxxvii.
18, vi. 1.
\ This connection is the usual one, when a designation of time is to be introdu-
ced; e. g. Gen. xxii. 1, nS5 DTlPSrjn i^^Xin ni"i3'nl-t nns inil and it happened
after these thinrjs, that God tried; xxvi. 8, Clpd*1 n''53lin c\li ib ^iDnx -3 ""tTyy;
xxxix. 13, 15, 18, 19, Judg. xvi. 16, 25. See the numerous passages in Gesenius,
Thes. Ling. Hebr. \>. 3'72. In lite manner we find n^lHI used of the future; see
§ 126, Rem. 2.
232 PART III. SYNTAX
It stands also, especially, a) after the protasis ; e. g. after because.
as in 1 Sam. xv. 23, hecmise thou hast rejected the loord of Jehovah,
^CN^"^^ therefore he rejects thee; Gen. xxxiii. 10 ; after since ("'3) Job iv. 5 ;
b) after an absolute substantive, e. g. 1 Kings xii. 17, as for the children
of Israel, Q^'Srt'i cnibs T(^'3'?5 Rehoboam reigned over them; ix. 21,
Dan. viii. 22.*
In such sentences as the following, -1 may be rendered that : Ps.
cxliv. 3, what is man iS^S'jni that thou regardest him ! (comp. Ps. viii. 5
where ""S is used); Is. li. 12, who art thou '''^'^''n^ ihat thou shoiddest
fear ? Bui here, the thought is properly : G^hovv little account is man ;
and yet, thou dost regard him.
2. As to the relations of time denoted by it, the Imperfect of
consecution refers, according to the tense which precedes it, ei-
ther—
a) To present time ; namely, in continued description of it,
with a preceding Perfect (as a Present ; Gen. xxxii. 6, Is. ii. 7,
8, Job vii. 9, xiv. 2) ; or Imperfect (as a Present ; Job xiv. 10,
1 Sam. ii. 29) ; or Pai^ticiple ; Nah. i. 4, 2 Sam. xix. 2, Amos
ix. 6.
b) Or, less frequently, to futurity ; with a preceding Perfect
(as a Future; Is. v. 15, 16, xxii. 7, S, Joel ii. 23, Micah ii, 13,
Ps. cxx. 1) ; or Jussive (Joel ii. 18, 19) ; or Imperative, Ps. 1. 6 ;
also, when joined to a clause without a verb, Gen. xlix. 15 ; or
to an absolute substantive, Is. ix. 11 ; or leading back to the
future. Is. ii. 9, ix. 13.
In the apodosis after X^ib stands ■^rj!!! Is. xlviii. 18, 19, for then had
been; and i'3Xl in a conditional clause, Ps. cxxxix. 11, for and (if) /
should say ; comp. the common Imperfect § 127, 5.
§ 130.
OF THE IMPERATIVE.
1. The Imperative expresses not only command in the proper
sense, but also exhortation (Hos. x. 12), entreaty (2 Kings v. 22,
and with X3 , Is. v. 3), wish (Ps. viii. 2, and with "^ Gen. xxiii.
13), permission (2 Sam. xviii. 23, Is. xiv. 11). It is employed
especially in strong assurances (comp. thou shalt have it, Avhich
expresses both a command and a promise) ; and hence ill pro-
* On the sentences ■which begin with the Infinitive or Participle and then pro-
ceed with this Future of consecution, see ^ 132, Rem. 2, and () 134j Rem. 2.
§ 130. THE IMPERATIVE. 23?-
plietic declarations, as Is. vi. 10, thou shalt make the heart of
this jyeople hard for thou wilt make. These may be either a)
'promises., Ps. cxxviii. 5, thou shalt see (f^i?"?) the jirosperity of
Jerusalem ; Is. xxxvii. 30, Ixv. 18, Ps. xxii. 27, Gen. xx. 7 ; or
6) threatenings* Is. xxiii. 1, wail, ye ships of Tarshish, for ye
shall (vnll) wail ; vs. 2, 4, x. 30, xiii. 6. In all these cases the
use of the Imperative approaches very near to that of the Im-
perfect, which may therefore precede (Gen. xx. 7, xlv. 18) or
follow it (Is. xxxiii. 20) in the same signification.
A more lively expression is given to the Imperative, in almost all
its senses, by the addition of the particle N3 age ! (§ 105) ; particularly,
in command, as well its milder form (do now, this or that) Gen. xxiv. 2,
as that of rebuke and menace. Num. xvi. 26, xx. 10 ; and in entreaty,
S3 "inriN Gen. xii. 13. Tauntingly permissive is NJ "'l':^', Is. xlvii. 12,
persist now !
2. We may, from the above, explain the peculiar use of two
Imperatives usually connected by and : a) where they are em-
ployed in a good sense, the first containing an admonition or
exhortation, and the second a promise made on the condition of
obedience implied in it (like divide et impera! Engl, do loell
and have well). E. g. Gen. xlii. 18 T'T)'] TO2? rii?T this do, and
(ye shall) live ; Prov. xx. 13, keep thine eyes open (be wakeful,
active), and thou shalt have 2)lenty of bread; Ps. xxxvii, 27
(comp. ver. 3), Prov. vii. 2, ix. 6, Job xxii. 21, Is. xxxvi. 16, xlv.
22, Hos. X. 12, Amos v. 4, 6 ; b) where a threat is expressed,
and the first Imperative tauntingly permits an act, while the
second declares the consequences ; Is. viii. 9, '^.T\h'\ D''1Q? '^5?1
rage ye people, and ye shall soon be dismayed ; xxix. 9. In
the second member, the Imperfect also may be used ; Is. vi. 9,
viii. 10, 1 Sam. xvii. 44.
Hem. 1. How far the Perf. and Impf. may also be employed to express
command, has been shown in § 126, 6, c, and § 127, 3, c, § 128, 2.
2. It has been incorrectly asserted by some grammarians, that the
form of the Imperative is used, in certain passages, for the third person
(let him kill). E. g. Gen. xvii. 10, ^3}-^^ ^'^^ ^'^'^H ^^'^ ^^^^^ '"^^'^
among you be circumcised. (In verse 12 bia']' is used. But hiizii is the
Infinitive, which gives the same sense, § 131, 4, b). Ps. xxii. 9 (bj Infin.) ;
Gen. xxxi. 50, Judges ix. 28, Is. xlv. 21 (in the last three passages are
actual Imperatives of the 2d person).
* Analogous is the form of contemptuous menace in the comic writers, vapula-
Tercnt. Phorm. V. 6, 10, vapulare tejubeo Plant. Curculio, IV. 4, 12.
234 PART III. SYNTAX.
§ 131.
USE OF THE INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE.
The Infinitive absolule is employed, as has been remarked in
§45, 1, when there is occasion to express the abstract idea of tlie
verb by itself, neither in connection with what follows, nor in
dependence on a preceding noun or particle.* The most impor-
tant cases in which it is used, are :
1. When it is governed by a transitive verb, and consequently
stands as an accusative. Is. xlii. 24, 'ijibn '^IJ^ i^b they would
not go; vii. 15, niiaa nina^ ^-\^ cisia in^^lb tmtil he learn to
refuse the evil and to choose the good ; Jer. ix. 4. Here, how-
ever, the ////. constr. is oftener used, either with or without a
preposition, according to the construction of the preceding verb,
§ 142, 1, 2.
In the same construction is Is. xxii. 13, behold ! joy and gladness
'lJ1 "JNIS ain'a'i "ip3 ailii the slaying (prop, to slay) oxen, the slaughter-
ing sheep, the eating Jiesh, the drinking wine (where the Injin. is a mere
accusative governed by behold!); v. 5, I will tell you what I xoill do to
my vineyard^ ii'iS "j'ilQ . . . ins^iba "iDin the taking away {to take aivay)
its hedge and the tearing down its wall. — q. d. that will I do.
2. ."When it is in the accusative and used adverblalli/t (the
Latin gerund in do) ; e. g. litS'^n bene faciendo, for bene, n3"in
multuni faciendo, for inulttmi. Hence,
3. When it is used emphatically, in connection with &, finite
verb.
a) It then stands most commonly before the finite verb, to which
it adds, in general, an expression of intensity. 1 Sam. xx. 6,
"'f'B'a bxir: bi^llJ; he urgently besought of me ; Gen, xliii. 3,
he strictly charged us (T'S^H "IlS^n). A very clear example is
in Amos ix. 8, I will destroy it from the surface of the earthy
* Where the Inf. constr. is always used. But when several successive infini-
tives are to liave a preposition, it is often written only before the first, and the
second (before which it is to be mentally supplied) stands in the absolute form ; as
inilJI bbxb to cat and (to) drink, Ex. xxxii. 6 ; comp. 1 Sam. xxii. 13, xxv. 26. Jer.
viL 18, xliv. 17. This case is aualogous.with that explained §121, 3. Comp. also
No. 4, a, of this section.
f On the Accusative as a casus advcrblalis, see § 118. In Arabic, iu this case,
it takes expressly the accusative ending. In most cases (see Nos. 1, 2, 3, of this
section), the Inf. absol. answers clearly to the Accusative of the Infinitive, and to
this No, 4 also is to be referred.
§ 131. USE OF THE INFTNITIVE ABSOLUTE. 235
excejit that I will not utterly destroy (I^^T^i? ^^^^^l i^b).
Judg. i. 28. Its effect is often merely to give a certain promi-
nence to the thought contained in the finite verb, — which in
other languages is done chiefly by the expression of the voice
or by particles, — as in assurances, questions (such especially
as express excitement in view of something strange and im-
probable), contrasts; Gen. xliii. 7, could we (then) know?
xxxvii. 8, ^S'^by ^'biari tjib'an wilt thou (haply) riile over us 7
[is that likely to happen !] xxxi. 30, if thou wouldst needs he
gone* (^pbn 'Ffibn), because thou so earnestly longest (51033
ri&DDD) ; Judg. XV. 13, loe will bind thee, hut we will not
kill thee ; 1 Sam. ix. 6, 2 Sam. xxiv. 24, Hab, ii. 3,
b) When the Infinitive stands after the finite verb, this connec-
tion generally indicates continued or lasting action. Is. vi. 9,
yi^aia '^'Slli: hear on continually ; Jer. xxiii. 17 ; Gen. xix. 9,
taiSTC tSSTC'li and he must he always playing the judge !
Two Infinitives may be thus used ; 1 Sam. vi. 12, 'Tjibn ^Dbn
ly^'l they went going on and lowing, for they ivent on lowing
as they went ; 1 Kings xx. 37. Instead of a second Infini-
tive is sometimes used a finite verb (Jos. vi. 13), or a partici-
ple (2 Sam. xvi. 5).
Rem. 1. This usage in regard to the position of the Infin. is certainly
the common one, though not without exceptions. Il sometimes follows
the finite verb to which it gives empliasis and intensity, where the idea
of repetition or continuance is excluded by the connection. Is. xxii. 17,
Jer. xxii. 10, Gen. xxxi. 15, xlvi. 4, Dan. x. 11, 13. hi Syriac, the Infin.
when it expresses intensity stands regularly before, and in Arabic always
after, the finite verb. — The place of the negative is commonly between
the two (Ex. V. 23), seldom before them both (Gen. iii. 4).
2. With a finite verb of one of the derived conjugations may be con-
nected not only the Infin. absol. of the same conjugation (Gen. xvii. 13
xl. 15), but also that of /laZ (e. g. O'nb Ci'to Gen. xxxvii. 33 ; Job vi. 2)
or of another of the same signification (Lev. xix. 20, 2 Kings iii, 23).
3. In expressing the idea of continuance (letter &), the verb t]^ii
is frequently employed, with the signification to go 07i, to continue on, and
thus denotes also constant increase. E. g. Gen. xxvi. 13. b'lji Ti'ibii T\^v\
and he became contimialJy greater and greater. 2 Sam. v. 10 ; Gen. viii. 3,
ailijl '^ibn .... n-^^an ^labjl and the waters fiowed of continually. (The
participial construction is also frequent here : e. g. 1 Sam. ii. 26, "1?:^
'^'^'^) '15'^ TjV^ ^i^.'^^Tii the child Samuel went on increasing in stature and
* That is, I understand why thou art gone, namely because of thy earnest
longing. Vulgate : csto, ad tuos ire cupicbas.
236 PART in. SYNTAX.
in goodness; 2 Sam. iii. 1). A similar mode of expression is found m the
French : le mal va loiijours croissant, la maladie va tovjours en augmen-
tant el en empirant^ grows worse conlinually.
4. When it stands in place of the finite verb. We have here
the two following cases, viz.
a) When it is preceded by a finite verb. This is frequent, espe-
cially among the later writers, in the expression of several
successive acts or states, where only the first of the verbs em
ployed takes the required form in respect to tense and person,
the others being in the Infinitive with the same distinctions
implied. (Comp. j 121, 3.) E. g. with the Perf. Dan. ix. 5,
"lici ^TTpIl we have rebelled and (we have) turned away ;
Gen. xli. 43, he caused hiin to ride in the second chariot,
ins< 1'if^?'] and placed him ; 1 Sam. ii. 28, Jer. xiv. 5. With
the Imp/. Jer. xxxii. 44, they will buy fields for money
(Impf.), and write and seal bills of sale, and take loitnesses
(three Infinitives) ; Num. xv. 35.
6) It may stand at the beginning of the sentence, without a pre-
ceding finite verb ; for the Infinitive (the pure abstract idea
of the verb), serves as a short and emphatic expression for
any tense and person which the connection requires. E. g.
it stands a) for the Perf. in lively narration and descrip-
tion, like the Latin infinitivus historicns ; Is. xxi. 5, ^i"ll^
rVTi^D biDN n^San nb^ ]nbwr\ to prepare the table, to set the
watch, to eat, to drink (sc. this they do), for they prepare,
(fee. lix. 4, Hos. iv. 2, Ez. i. 14, Job xv. 35 ; also /j) for
the Impf. in the sense of the Future ; 2 Kings iv. 43, blDX
*iriini to eat and to leave thereof (sc. this ye shall do) ; y)
most frequently for the emphatic Imp. (as in Greek) ; Deut.
V. 12, "li^TO to observe (sc. thou art to, ye are to) ; so Ex. xx.
8, "list to remember (oughtest thou) ; hence, with the full
form, yT\rmv\ ni'aTr, Deut. vi. 17; nSTPi nbT, vii. 18. For
the Cohortative Is. xxii. 13, iritOI bi2ij to eat and to drink !
(sc. let us eat and drink.) 1 Kings xxii. 30 to disguise my-
self and go (I will disguise, <fcc.).
Rem. 1. Very schlom is the Infin. for the, finile verb found in connec-
tion with the subject, as in Job xl. 2 ; Ez. i. 14.
2. The examples are also few of the Infin. conslr. employed in these
cases. Such are Is. Ix. 14, where it is used adverbially like the gerund
in do; Neh. i. 7 (hhn). Ps. 1. 21 (ni-'n), Ruth ii. 16 (biu), Num. xxiii. 25
(ap), where it is connected with a finite verb.
§132. INFINITIVE CONSTRUCT. 237
§ 132.
INFINITIVE CONSTEUOT.
1. The Iitfinifive constmct, as a verbal substantive, is sub-
ject to the same relations of case with the noun, and the modes
of indicating them (§ 117) are also the same. Thus it is found,
a) in the nominative as the subject of the sentence. Gen. ii. 18,
i'lDb DHSJ^ ni'^n nilS i?b it is not good, (lit. the being of man in
his sepai^ation) that man should be alone ; b) in the genitive,
Gen, xxix. 7, ?|DXn fiy tempus colligendi ; here belongs also the
case of an Infinitive depending on a preposition, as originally a
noun, see No. 2 ; c) in the accusative, 1 Kings iii. 7, yiS iib
i^ill nSi? / knoio not (how) to go out and to come in, prop. /
k7ioiv not the going out and coming in. In this case the Inf.
absol. may also be used, § 131, 1.
2. For the construction of the Inf. with a preposition, as in
the Greek sv red tivat, the German and English languages
generally employ a finite verb with a conjunction which express-
es the import of the preposition, E. g. Ninii. xxxv. 19, i3"iy!JSii
tohen he meets with him, prop, in his meeting loith hi?n. Jer.
ii. 35, ^I'GS by because thou sayest, prop, on account of thy say-
ing. Gen. xxvii. 1, his eyes were dim riis"i'a so that he could
not see (comp. the use of yQ before a noun to express distance
from,, and the absence or want of a thing). The lexicon must
be consulted, for particular information on the use of the differ-
ent prepositions.
3. As to the relations of time expressed, the Infinitive may
refer also to the past (comp. on the Participle, § 134, 2), e. g.
Gen, ii. 4. DS"i3ns when they were created (prop, in their being
created).
Rem. 1. nibsb iT^m (or nibsb with the omission of iT^f^) signifies,
1) he is about to do, intends or purposes to do, and he is intent zipon, is
eager to do (comp. Eng. / roas to do something). Gen. xv. 12, '^>^i'}^
xSab UJpt^n and. the sun %vas about going down. Hence it serves for a
periphrasis of the Imp/. 2 Chr. xxvi. 5, n^n'bx ^"i1^ '^'lll and he served
God J without ti'n, Is. xxxviii. 20, "^Dspdinb nin^ Jehovah saveth me;
xxi, 1, Eccles. iii. 15, Prov. xix. S, comp. xvi. 20. 2) It is to do for it
must be done (comp. Eng. lam to give for I must give). Jos. ii. 5. ^f}']'^
Tiaob "i^^'i"! and the gate was to shut for was to be shid. More commonly
fi'^n is omitted ; 2 Kings iv. 13, nib?.^ TMO what is to be [can be] done;
238 PART III. SYNTAX.
2.Chr. xix, 2. Also 3) He was able to do (comp. the Lat. non est sol
vendo). Judges i. 19, laininl; xb he coidd not drive out.*
2. The Hebrew writers frequently pass from the Infinitive construc-
tion (described in No. 2) to the use of the finite verb, before which the
mind must then supply a conjunction answering to the preposition before
the Infinitive. Thus the Per/, is connected with the Iirftn. Amos. i. 11,
liTani rn'l3i — "is^ii h'S because he pursued — and stifled his compas-
sion ; Gen. xxvii. 45 ; the Imp/, with Vav. consec. Gen. xxxix. 18,
K^pXl "^bip •'53"''nn3 when I raised my voice and cried; Is. xxx. 12,
xxxviii. 9. Most usually the Imp/, with the simple 1 prefixed, as in Is.
V. 24, X. 2, xiii. 9, xiv. 25, xxx. 26. Comp. the similar succession of the
participle and finite verb, § 134, Rem. 2.
§ 133.
CONNECTION OF THE INFINITIVE CONSTRUCT WITH SUBJECT
AND OBJECT.
1. The Infii^tive may be construed directly with the proper
case of the verb, and hence, in transitive verbs, with the accusa-
tive of the object. E. g. Num. ix. 15, "jSTlptin-nX n^pT} to set up
the Tahernacle ; 1 Sam. xix. 1, ^'I'H'fli? J^'^'^Jl^ to kill David;
Gen. xviii. 25, p'^'lIS ri'i'arib to kill the righteous ; 1 Kings xii. 15,
XV. 4, 2 Kings xxi. 8, Ez. xliv. 30 ; Lev. xxvi. 15, "^STiii niiu?
■'niS'a to do all my commands ; Gen. xix. 29, Diiyn"^^? ^f^na
lohen he overthreio the cities ; Prov. xxi. 15, t22ffi'a hito to do
justice ;\ with the accusative of the pronoun, 'TfiTiSi D'^pH 'j^'ab in
order to establish thee, Deut. xxix. 12 ; ''plS'^t^n to bring me back,
Jer. xxxviii. 26 ; '^35i"in'? to slay me, Ex. ii. 24 ; iDtJpab to seek
me, 1 Sam. xxvii. 1, v. 10, xxviii. 9, 1 Chron. xii. 17 ; OKi? ri'lbs
quiim {mater) eos luireret. So if the verb governs two accusa-
tives, as : ns<T-b2-nx ^ns5 D'^n'bx y^^in ^nnx since God hath
caused thee to knotv all this, Gen. xii. 39.
The Verbal Noun, analogous to the Infinitive, retains the
* The connection shows this to be the true sense, expressed in the parallel pas-
sage (Josh. xvii. 12) by UJininb ^bs"' xb. Comp. moreover, the Hebrew ib "J^iX
non licet mihi, and the Syr. "ib rr^b non possum (Agrell. Stippl. Synt. Syr. pp. 9, 10).
\ In examples like this, we might regard 05111373 as genitive of the object (§ 114,
2), a construction common in Arabic ; but as nx is used in other examples, and as
there never occurs in such a connection a form like Cl^i^ (which would decidedly
indicate the constr. state and consequently the genitive relation), we must suppose
that, as a general rule at least, the Hebrews regarded the object of the Infin. as an
accusatic '' 'iip. Nos. 2 and 3.
§ 133. INF. CONSTR. WITH SUBJECT AND OBJECT. 239
same construction ; e. g. nirrii'ns ni^'n knowledge of Jehovah
(prop, the knowing Jehovah) ; Is. xi. 9 ; ''rii? •^ij"'!''? to fear me,
Deut. V. 26 ; Is. xxx. 28, Ivi. 6.*
2. The subject of the action is usually placed immediately
after the Infinitive, sometimes in the genitive (where the Inf. is
regarded rather as a substantive), sometimes, and for the raoi=t
part, in the nominative. E. g. 2 Chron. vii. 3, t'&r} JTl") the
coining down of the fire ; Ps. cxxxiii. 1, "in;; D^ D''l7i? J^^^ the
dwelling of brethren together ; Ex. xvii. 1, there was no icater
UST\ tlinisb/o;- tlie j^cople to drink (prop. /or the drinking of the
■people). That the subject is in the genitive, is very clear after
Infinitives with a feminine ending ; as in Gen. xix. 16, rib'cna
'Thv nirp on account of Jehovah'' s compassion for him ; Is. xlvii.
9, "i5'!i '?f'?"i3n ITQ^^a though thy enchantments are very many ;
and also when it is a snfiix, as in "'i^^lfi' when J call, Ps, iv. 2, 4
(but also incorrectly, ''331^3 iDhen I return, Ez. xlvii. 7, for
''^^'©3). On the contrary, the relation of genitive is excluded,
and the subject is rather to be regarded as the nominative, in
Ps. xlvi. 3, f"i5« "l"^ian3 (not T^^n^) ivhen the earth shakes;
Deut. xxv. 19, Tjb nin'' H'^rH'^ when Jehovah gives thee rest;
2 Sam. xix. 20, i3b-:x ^fb^n n^^) that the king should lay it to
heart; also where the Inf. and its subject are separated, as in
.Tudg. ix. 2, "ns5 t^^ ana bir^ nx irix D'^yniij d33 bir^n whether
that seventy men rule over yon, or that one man rules over you 7
Job xjfiv. 22, "JIK ''bi^S Dffi "iriBnb that the workers of iniquity
may hide themselves there ; Ps. Ixxvi. 10. See farther in No. 3.
3. When the object of the Infinitive, as well as its subject, is
to be expressed, the subject is regularly placed next after the Inf.
and then the object. The latter is here manifestly the accusa-
tive ; but the subject stands, as in No. 2, sometimes in the geni-
tive, but most commonly in the nominative. The genitive
(prevalent in the Arabic) shows itself, e. g. in Deut. i. 27, ri5S:iC3
^;ri? nini because Jehovah hates us ; Is. xiii. 19, DTl'bs DSSn'OS
Dhy"ri5? as God overthrew fSodoni ; Deut. vii. 8, 1 Kings x. 9 ;
Is. xxix. 13, "^riX criSJ")'? their {eorum) reverence for me ; Gen.
xxxix. 18; ''bip "''Qi'in? u'hcn I lifted up my voice. But the
nominative occurs, e. g. in Is. x. 15, li'Q'i'l'aTiS u^TlJ Cl'^ins as if
the rod could shake him that lifts it up (where the form would
* For examples of an acciis. of the object with the Inf. passive, see § 143, 1, a.
240 PART III. SYNTAX
be v|''2TO, if t3ST!p were the genitive) ; and so, commonly, the sub-
ject is to be regarded as the nominative, e. g. 1 Kings xiii. 4,
DT^'biCn TiJ^« in'7-ni« ^bian ybffiS when the king heard the word
of the man of God. Gen. xiii. 10, Josh. xiv. 7, 2 Sam. iii. 11,
Jer. xxi. I, Ez. xxxvii. 13. — If the finite verb governs a double
accusative, the same construction is employed also with the Infi-
nitive, as in Gen. xli. 39, nST-52-ns ?^ri55 D^n'bx ?"i"n"n ^nns since
God hath caused thee to knov) all this.
It is an unusual order of- the words, when the object is placed first
after tlie Infinitive, and tlien the nominative of the subject is added by
way of complement ; e. g. Is. xx. 1, "iS"iO "in^ n'bitJa when Sargon sent
him; Ezra ix. 8, ^S^n'^x ^li^i'^S "^"^'^'l^ ^hat our God may enlighten qui
eyes ; 2 Chron. xii. 1, D^^ri"i n^iDbo T^.'^'^ xchen Rehohoam had estab-
lished the kingdom. Josh. xiv. 11, Is. v. 24, xxix. 23. Ps. Ivi. 1.
§134.
USE OF THE PARTICIPLE.
1. The only existing form of the Participle is used to express
all the relations of time, as tTQ dying (Zech. xi. 9) ; he who has
died, dead (so very often) ; he who is to die (Gen. xx. 3) ; bsb he
who falls, has fallen, will fall ; 7W'$ factnriis (Gen. xh. 25, Is.
V. 5) ; though it most frequently has the signification of the Pre
sent. The passive participles may therefore stand for the Latin
Participle in -ndus, e. g. i^'li: metuendus, terrible, Ps. Ixxvi. 8 ;
bbrra laudandus, worthy to he praised, Ps. xviii. 4.
2. The Participle, standing in place of the finite verb as pre-
dicate of the sentence, denotes :
a) Most frequently the Present.* Eccles. i. 4, X3 "lini T\^h "li'n one
generation goes, another comes ; ver. 7, C^V^ C^iblisn'bs all the rivers
Jlow . . . . ; Gen. iv. 10. If the subject is ^personal pronoun, it is either
written, in its full form, in immediate connection with the participle, as
"fsiiij S<n^ I fear Gen. xxxii. 12, Q"'i<;"i'? ^sriax we are afraid 1 Sam. xxiii. 3;
or it is appended as a suffix to the word UJ;) {is), as .Tudges vi. 36,
S'^lZil'ii T]UJ'7. D!!< if thou savest. In the same manner it is appended, in
negative sentences, to I'^St ; e.g. n^ia^ t^i'^X DN if thou send him not.
Gen. xliii. 5.
Hence b) the Future (conceived as present, comp. § 126, 4). Is. v.
5, I will tell you nil)5> isx nm nx what I do, for what I will do. Gen.
xix. 13, xli. 25, 1 K. i. 14.
* In Syriac aud Chaldee it is more frequently used thus than in its proper
signification as a participle.
§ 135. CONSTRUCTION OF THE PARTICIPLE. 241
Also c) the Past, especially when it stands connected with the
statement of past and contemporaneous circumstances. Job i. 16. tit lis
6t2 nn la"!^ the one (was) still speaking when another came ; ver. 17.
Gen. xlii. 35, Ex. ii. 6, Judges xiii. 9, 1 Sam. xvii. 23, 1 K. i. 5, 22. But
it is also used with reference to past time, and even for the perfect Pre-
terite, without any such connection ; e. g. Deut. iv. 3, nixnn DDii"^? your
eyes which have seen*
With the verb fTJfi it serves as a periphrasis of the Imperfect.f Job
i. 14, niiDTh ii'^H i)^2ri (as in English) the oxen icere ploughhig ; Gen.
XV. 17, Judges i. 7, xvi. 21.
Rem. 1. In all the three cases, a, 6, c, riSii is employed before the
participle for awakening special attention. E. g. (a) where the Part.
stands lor the Present, IT^rt T^Sii behold ! thou (art) with child Gen. xvi.
11. xxvii. 42, Ex. xxxiv. 11 ; 6) for the Future, Gen. vi. 17, Is. iii. 1. vii.
14, xvii. 1 ; c) for the Past, Gen. xxxvii. 7, xli. 17.
2. Often, the construction is changed, from the participial form to
that of the finite verb ; the pronouns who, or v)hich, &c. (iiyN.) implied
in the participle, must then be mentally supplied before the verb. E. g.
the Part, and Per/, in Is. xiv. 17, icho made (Db) the earth a wilderness.
and (who) destroyed (C^i^) the cities thereof; xliii. 7 ; Part, and Impf
(Present), with or without ) before the second clause, e. g. Is. v. 8.
iiai'ip;: iTiia:? iria n^aa r^'^n '''?"'a73 lin woe to those who connect house
with house, and (who) join field to field ;. vs. 11, 23, xxxi. 1, 1 Sam. ii. 8,
Prov. xix. 26; also with Vav consec, e. g. Gen. xxvii. 33. xa^l TiS nsn
who hunted game and brought it ; xxxv. 3 ; Ps. xviii. 33. (Compare
the strictly analogous change from the Infinitive-construction. § 132.
Rem. 2.)
§135.
CONSTEUCTION OF THE PARTICIPLE.
When participles are followed by the object of the action
which they express, they are construed in two ways : 1) as ver-
bal adjectives having the same regimen as the verbs to which
they belong ; e. g. 1 Sam. xviii. 29, Tl'lTli? DI^K David's enemy
(prop, one that hated David) ; 1 Kings ix. 23, 0^3 D'^'7"in they
who rule over the people; Ez. ix. 2, D'^'IS TlJ^^b clothed ivith
linen garments : 2) as noims followed by a genitive (§ 112, 2) ;
e. g. Gen. xxii. 12, DTl'bii X'l'" one that fears (a fearer of) God;
Ps. Ixxxiv. .5, ^n"!! 'iDTC'i they that dwell in (inmates of) thy
house ; Ez. ix. 11, D'^'^SJl 12J^3b the one clothed with linen gar-
* For the use of the article here before the predicate, see § 110, 3, Rem.
f In Syriac, the Present and Imperfect are expressed, directly, by interficiens
ego (comp. letter a), and interjiciens fui = interjicicbam.
16
242 PART III. SYNTAX.
ments ; D^'l?^ '^??'^p those whose garments are rent, 2 Sam. xiii.
31 ; "jiy '^'^IC? he whose guilt is forgiven, Ps. xxii. 1.
This latter construction with the genitive is properly confined to
active verbs (§ 138). The participle of tiie verb Si3, to enter in, is also
construed thus, as this verb is followed by the accusative (comp. ingredi
portam); e. g. Gen. xxiii. 10, i?"«l3 "^NS those who enter in at the gate.
But there are also examples of the participle followed by a genitive, in
cases where the verb to which it belongs is construed only with a pre-
position. E.g. I"''??', '^'3|^ those who rise 2ip against him, — against
me, for 1''^?, "^^^ Di^;? Ps. xviii. 40. 49, Deut. xxxiii. 11 ; 25irs ""Sia they
who turn away from transgression. Is. lix. 20.
2 The two constructions, explained in No. 1, are found also
in connection with suffixes. The first is followed in '^Diflb he loho
made -me, the second in lilpb my maker.
§136.
EXPEESSION OF THE OPTATIVE.
We have already seen (§ 127, 3, h) that the Imperfect, espe-
cially the cohortative form with the ending <1— , and with the
particle 552, is employed to express the Optative. It remains to
mention two other forms under w^iich it is expressed by periphra-
sis, namely :
1. By questions -expressive of desire. E. g. 2 Sam. xv. 4, ^'Q
"JSilJ '^?^TiJ'? loho ivill make me jtidge 1 i. e. woidd that I were
made judge! Judg. ix. 29, ''^1'2 ""n Qyii'nx "{T^^ "''a would that
this people were placed under my hand ! Ps. Iv. 7, Job xxix. 2.
In the phrase "jri^ "')2 the proper force of the verb is often wholly
lost, and nothing more is expressed than loould that ! {utinam !)
God grant ! It is followed a) by an accusative, as Deut.
xxviii. 67, 1127 '}ri'?"'^''3 would it loere evening ! prop, who loill
give {will make it) eveni?ig ? b) by an Infinitive, as Ex. xvi. 3,
'iniTa ')ri"'"'''2 would, we had died ! c) by a finite verb (either
with or without ^), Deut. v. 26, DHb HT Dinb n^HI ^T^'^-^'Q O that
they had this heart ! Job xxiii. 3.
2. By the particles DSi si, O si ! ^b O si ! especially by the
latter, Ps. cxxxix. 19. The particle is followed by the Impf
Gen. xvii. 18, by the Part. Ps. Ixxxi. 14, seldom by the Imp
Gen. xxiii. 13. When it is followed by the Perf. the desire
expressed has reference to past time ; as Num. xx. 3, IS^'lJi 'i?
would we had died !
§ 13Y. PERSONS OF THE VERB. 243
§137.
PERSONS OF THE VERB.
1. In the use of the persons of the verb there is sonietnnes a
neglect of the distinctions of gender : especially are the mascu-
line forms (as most readily occurring to the mind) employed with
reference to objects which are feminine. E. g. DPl^l'!' Ez. xxiii.
49 ; Dln'iTlJy Ruth i. 8 ; ri'ipm thou (fem.) hast viade a league
Is. Ivii. 8 ; comp. Cant. ii. 7. Compare the analogous use of the
pronoun, § 121, Rem. 1.
2. The third person (most commonly its tnasc. form) is very
often employed impersonally. E. g. '^n'^l and it liappeiied ; ib "^^l
and ib "l2;;iT (lit. it loas strait to him) he urns in trouble ; ib DH
and ib Dri^l he became war?n. It is also employed thus in the
/em., e. g. 1 Sam. xxx. 6, Tl'lb isril and David was in trouble ;
Ps. 1. 3, Jer. X. 7.
The Arabic and ^thiopic commonly employ here the masc, and the
Syriac the fem. form.
3. The indeterminate third person (Germ. nia7i, Fr. ou, Engl.
thei/, one, or simply the passive voice) is expressed, a) by the
3d pers. singular, e. g. J?"!]? thei/ called Gen. xi. 9, xvi. 14,
1 Sam. xix. 22, xxiv. 11 ; b) by the 3d pers. plural, as Gen.
xli. 14, ^n:£i"i^1 a?id they brought him in haste, for he was
brought ; c) by the 2d person, e. g. Is. vii. 25, rTDTU i^inrrsb
there shall no one go thither ; so in the common phrase ^^2. ^y
or '^Xia tmtil one comes ; d) by the passive voice, as Gen. iv. 26,
^"^Ipb bn^n Ti< then they began to call upon .*
Rem. 1. In the first case (letter a) the force of 11J"'S (impersonal, as
we use one, men, Ihey) is implied. The full construction occurs in one
instance, 1 Sam. ix. 9, \L'i5<n -i^aN nb bx"nb';ia d^isb /orme?/?/ they said
thus in Israel. Sometimes the Part, of the verb is added, as its nomi-
native ; e. g. Is. xvi. 10, T|'i'^«l T]"!'?'!"^^ ^^e treader shall not tread, for
they shall nut tread z= there shall be no treading ; xxviii. 4, Ez. xxxiii. 4.
Deut. xxii. 8. The last is not unfrequent in Arabic.
2. When the pronoun is to be expressed with emphasis, it is written
separately before the corresponding verbal form. E. g. PtPJ nnx thmi
* Sometimes on the contrary the impersonal dicunt must be understood a.»
Btrictly the passive dicitur. Job vii. 3, nights of pahi have they appomted me, for
are appointed 7ne (so. by God); iv. 19, xvii. 12, xxxii. 15, xxxiv. 20. So in Chaldee
very frequently (Dan. IL 30, iii. 4, v. 3) and in Syriac.
244 PART m. SYNTAX.
hast given Judges xv. 18, 1 Kings xxi. 7, Ps. cxxxix. 2 ; also after the
verbal form, Judges xv. 12, which, in the later writers, is done without
any special emphasis, as iJ!* Tiia'n Eccles. i. 16. at the beginning; ii.
11, 12, 13, 15. 20. viii. 15.
3. In the poets and prophets, especially, there is often, in the same
construction, a sudden transition from one person to another. Is. i. 29,
dnn^on "itJX C'^biN^ iids;^ '''^ far they shall be ashamed of the groves in
which ye delight, where both the third and second persons are employed
with reference to the same subject ; Ixi. 7, Deut. xxxii. 15, 17. Mic. ii. 3.
— In Job xiii. 28, the third person is probably employed dHKtin&g for the
first ; compare also vi. 21 (according to the reading ib).
§138.
CONSTEUOTION OF THE YERB WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.
All transitive verbs govern the accusative (§ 118). On this
general rule we remark :
1. Many verbs are construed both without an object (abso-
lutely), and with one (the latter use commonly indicated in Ger-
man by a prefix-syllable [in Engl, moan, bemoan]). E. g. nD3
to weep, and to weep for, bewail ; HttJI^ to dwell, and to dwell in,
mhabit ; i<2|) to go forth, and also like egredi in the form egredi
urbem, Gen. xliv. 4.
Here notice further :
Rem. 1. Several verbs of this kind take after them the substantive
from the same root and with a corresponding signification, as ins "ins
Ps. xiv. 5, nss yv"^ ] K. i. 12, like ^ovXevhv ^ovXug II. 10, 147 ; most fre-
quently (as in Greek) as a specification, or a limitation of the general
idea of the verb; e. g. Gen. xxvii. 34, tTi^!| nVlJ n;DS:i P?^'!! he cried
a loud and bitter cry ; ver. 33 ; Zech. i. 14 ; 1 Chr. xxix. 9. Comp. voaelv
voaov xax^v &c.
2. Verbs which signify tojlmv, to stream, take in the poets an accu-
sative of that which is represented as poured forth in a stream. Lam.
iii. 48. '^S'^S! 1*in D'iia"i5ba my eye floxcs down streams of water. Joel iv.
18, the hills flow milk. So btD to run. to Jloic, Jer. ix. 17, Cjaj to distil,
Joel iv. 18, and Ciiiia to gush forth, to fiow abundantly (hence to bear
along as does a torrent). Is. x. 22 : similar, but more bold, is Prov. xxiv.
31, tD-'SillJap i^2 nbs nsril and behold it (the field) has all gone up to
thorns, — in spinas abit. Is. v. 6. Compare in Greek, tiqoqesiv vdcag, Hymn,
in Apoll. 2, 202 ; duxQva aia^siv; [in Eng. "which all the while ran
blood."]
3. It is also to be regarded as a mere poetic usage, when verbs which
signify to do, to speak, to cry, and the like, take an accusative of the
instrument or member with which the act is performed. Most clear is
thiSj for our view of the subject, in bna bip p'S] to cry a loud voice
§ 138. VERB WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 245
(comp. Rem. 1), for to cry with a loud voice, Ezek. xi. 13 ; to speak (with)
a false tongue (Ps. cix. 2), hence Ps. iii. 5, X'^pN ^bip with my (whole)
voice I cry ; TNTj:? "^Q Ixvi. 17, with my (with full) month levy; so. to
speak with the mouth, Ps. xvii. 10, with the lips, xii. 3 ; to labor with
the hand, Prov. x. 4 ; to help with the right hand, with the hand, with
the sword, Ps. xvii. 13, 14, xliv. 3, Ix. 7, 1 Sam. xxv. 26, 33 ; in which
cases the accusatirus instrumenti is employed. In the same cases 3
instrumenti is also used, e. g. to praise with the mouth Ps. Ixxxix. 2,
cix. 30 5 to entreat with the mouth Job xix. 16. The same use of the
accusative ivS found in Greek ; e. g. ngo/ialvsiv noda, nuieiv ^Icpog (see
Porson and Schafer ad Eurip. Orest. 1427, 1477, Bernhardy Synt. Gr.
Sprach. S. 110) ; and that the accusative is actually dependent on the
verb in these cases, is clear from a comparison with those given under
Rems. 1 and 2. In like manner* in German the instrument is sometimes
construed as the object of the verb, as in the following examples, which
are strictly analogous 1p those given above : Schlittschuhe laiifen ; eine
herrliche Stimme singen ; eine tuchtige Klinge schlagen [so in English,
to play the harp, to sound the trumpet}.
2. Many verbs govern the accusative in consequence of a
peculiar turn given to their signification, when the corresponding
verbs in Greek, Latin, and German are construed with other
cases. E. g. nsy to reply to (like d^ti/3o^ial Ttva, piop. to
acquaitit, to inform one) ; H"*"! causam alicujus agere (piop. to
defend him before the judge ; "IK'S to hring joyful news to one.
to cheer him with glad tidings ; ClNp to commit adultery with
one (prop, to embrace adulterously) ; 1^1? to become surety for
one {to bail him). ,
Rem. 1. In the same manner are construed even the passive and
reflexive conjugations Niph. Hoph. and Hithpa., the verb sometimes
assuming under these forms a signification which requires the accusative.
Exs. N33 to prophesy, Jer. xxv. 13 ; 303 to surround (prop, to place them-
selves around), Judges xix. 22 ; "^ri^riJf^ / am made to possess, i. e. have
taken in (unwilling) possession. Job vii. 3 ; b3?nn to plot against, Gen.
xxxvii. 18 ; 1.313011 to consider Job xxxvii. 14.
2. In very common formulas, the accusative after such verbs may be
omitted without injury to the sense (elliptic form), as nns, for rr^TS n"n3
* On the contrary, the Hebrew employed the 3 instrumenti where we use the
accusative. Equally common, as in German also, are the constructions to shake the
head (Ps. xxii. 8), and to shake with the head (Job xvi. 4) ; to gnash the teeth (Ps.
XXXV. 16), and to gnash with the teeth (Job xvi. 9), where head and teeth could be
treated either as the object of the verb or as the instrument. But the form of
expression differs fi'om ours in the phrases : n23 I^D to open the mouth (Job xvi.
10, prop, to make an opening with the mouth), D'^T''3 TU"1Q to spread out the hands
(Lam. i. 17, prop, to make a spreading with the hands), comp. IsipS )T\i and bip )n .
246 PART in. SYNTAX.
to make a covenant, 1 Sam. xx. 16 ; nbll" to stretch forth, sc. ^IJ the hand.
Ps. xviii. 17.
3. Classes of verbs which govern the accusative are : «)
those which signify to clothe and unclothe, as TCSb to put o?i a
garment, lSTTS /o put off a garment, rTi;^ to put on as an orna-
ment; e. g. "jSSiri D''"lD '^t:'!'^; tJie pastures are clothed with flocks ;
Ps. Ixv. 14, cix. 29, civ. 2 ; 6) those which signify fulness oi
wa7«^, as sb'a /o 6e /<<//, f^T^ ^^ swarm with (Gen. i. 20, 21),
1^3123 /o be satiated, f"}? ^o overflow (Prov. iii. 10). "IDH ^ ivant,
bbXO to lose {children) ; e. g. Dinii f')!?'? ^■?^r^!] aud the land wai
fllled with them, Ex. i. 7 ; r;%"^n 3):^"^^ D^1?^n ^'TC'n^: ^b^S
hi. perhaps the fifty righteous will wa^it five, i. e. perhaps there
will he lacking five of the fifty, Gen. xviii, '^S ; DD'^Dffi 05 bsiljij
{why) should I lose you both together. Gen. xxvii. 45 ; c) most
verbs of difelling, not merely iw a place {to inhabit, Judg. v. 17,
Is. xxxiii. 16, Gen. iv. 20). but also among a people, with one,
as ^ytt , nia ; e. g. !3'^I?n'b r.23tpX I dwell among those that breathe
out flames, Ps. Ivii. 5, v. 5, cxx. 5 ; d) those which express
going or coming to a place {peter e locum); hence Xia, with
the accus. ^o befall one. Here belongs the accus. loci, § 118, 1.
§139.
•VERBS WHICH GOVERN TWO ACCUSATIVES.
Such are :
1. The causative conjugations {Piel and Hiphil) of all verbs
which in Kal govern one accusative. E. g. fTOpn Jll"! 1''rii«5)2
I have filled him ivith the spirit of wisdojn, Ex. xxviii. 3 ; t"3b^]
IIJTIJ "^1^2 iri? a»fZ he clothed him in {caused hi7n to put on) gar-
ments of fine cotton, Gen. xli. 42. And furtJier, 1:T^ to gird one
u'ith Ps. xviii. 33, 'TJ'ia to bless one with Deut. xv. 14, "li^y to
crown one ivith, and "i5n to cause one to lack something Ps.
viii. 6.
2. A numerous class of verbs whose signification in Kal i.s
causative ; such e. g. as, to cover or clothe one with any thing
(Ps. V. 13, Ez. xiii. 10; hence also to soio, to ])la7it Is. v. 2,
xvii. 10, XXX. 23, Judg. ix. 45 ; to anoint Ps. xlv. 8) ; to fill
(with), to bestotv (upon), to deprive (of), Ez. viii. 17, Gen. xxvii.
37 ; to do one a favor or an injury, 1 Sam. xxiv. 18 ; to make
§ 140. VERBS WITH PREPOSITIOIfS. 247
one something (Gen. xvii. 5), e. g. tt'ip nniC^ ^'affi insi tfw^ and
make it a holy anointing' oil* Ex. xxx. 25.
In such combinations as the one last mentioned, we often
adopt another construction, viz. and make of it a holy anointing-
oil, i. e. we treat the first noun as an accusative of material,
1 Kings xviii. 32, ri3T^ D'^?nii:n-rs n:n^1 aiid he built of the
stones an altar, pro]), huilt {formed) the stones info an altar ;
Lev. xxiv. 5. More striking examples of this constiuction are
those in which the accusative of material is placed last ; as Ex.
xxxviii. 3, riirnp nicy Tb3"b3 all its vessels he made of brass ;
Gen. ii, 7, Ex. xxv. 39, xxxvi. 14.
There is another use of two accusatives after tne same active verb,
viz. when the second serves to limit the first, by expressing more defi-
nitely the object of the action. This nearly resembles the adverbial use
of the accusative (§ 118). E. g. "^nb 's nsrt to smite one on the cheek.
for to smile upon his cheek. Ps. iii. S (comp. Deut. xxxiii. It, 2 Sam. iii.
27); u;S3 's nsti to smite one as to Jiis life, i. e. to smite him dead. Gen.
xxxvii. 21; so also with tflis, Gen. iii. 15.
§140.
CONSTEUOTION' OF VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.
The Hebrew language has no verbs compounded with prepo-
■eitions. Those modifications of the verbal idea, which other
languages indicate by composition with prepositions, are ex-
pressed in the Hebrew either a) by appropriate verbal stems, as
Sia in-trare, ^'^'^ ex-ire, niTiJ to re-turn, D")P to pre-cede, Hnp
oc-currit ; or b) by prepositions written after the verb [as in
English], e. g. X"np to call, with b to call to, with 3 to call upon,
with ■'"ins to call after ; bs: to fall, with by to fall upon, and
also [with or without by] to fall off — to (i. e. to desert from one
to another), with ^'.tb to fall down before ; ^bn with *^t''T!^ to go
after, to follow.
It belongs to the Lexicon to show the use of the several prepositions
with each particular verb. Of classes of words, construed Avitli this or
that particle, we shall most properly treat in § 151, on the meaning and
construction of the different prepositions,
* On the passives of these verbs, see § 143, 1.
248 PART III. SYNTAX.
§141.
CONSTRUOTIO PR^GNANS.
The so-called constructio prcegnans occurs in Hebrew, chieily
when a verb not implying motion is construed with a particle of
}notion ; and consequently, in order to complete the sense, a
verb must be mentally supp.ied, corresponding to the idea of
motion implied in this connection. E. g. bx rt'ari to turn (or
look) with astonishment to one, Gen. xliii. 33 ; nin^ "^y^^ ^^''r
for ^1 'I'ins? DDbb S{^^ to follow Jehovah fully, Num. xiv. 24 ;
Ps. xxii. 22, '':rT^:N D^^n ^.?1j?^ hear (and save) me from the
horns of the wild bulls; Is. xiv. 17, nni'S nns ikb ^Tpx his
prisoners he did not release (and let go) to their homes; Ps.
Ixxxix. 40, Gen. xlii. 28, Is. xli. 1.
§ 142.
UNION OF TWO VERBS FOR THE EXPRESSION OF ONE IDEA.
When one verb has another for its complement, the second
(in sense the leading verb), is construed as follows :
1. It stands in the Infinitive, either absolute (§131, 1) or
(more commonly) cotistruct, after the other verb. E. g. Deut. ii.
25, 31, nn bns I begin to give; Gen. xxxvii. 5, Xbto IS^pi^l and
they went on to hate ; Ex. xviii. 23, ^b? P^?^ thou canst endure ;
Is. i, 14, i<Tl3: T'"'^^? I (im weary with bearing. Still more fre-
quently—
2. It stands in the Infinitive preceded by b, as Deut. iii. 24,
nisiinb ni?nn thou hast begun to shoiu ; Gen. xi. 8, ni:ab ^b^n^i
and they ceased to build ; xxvii. 20, ^5i'Qb TOXyo, thou hast has-
tened to find, i. e. hast quickly found, &c.
These are the usual constructions in prose after verbs signifying to
begin (^f^f^. ^''is^'ii^), to continue (Sri'^Oin), to hasten ("iH'?), to cease (^"^H,
il^S), to be finished {o'O'n) ; so also, to make good= to do well (a'^a'^ri),
to make much or maiiij (nann), and the like modes of action expressed,
for the most part, by Hiphil ; to be willing (f^SN, ysn), to be unwilling,
to refuse {'\»rq), to seek, 'o strive for (^j^a), to be able (bb^, sn;;, the lat-
ter signifying to know (how) to do), to learn, C^?^)) to permit* It is to be
* To permit one to do a thing is expressed by inibyb 's "jjia , and m'iys S T?5 >
prop, to give or grant one to do a thing. Gen. xx. 6, SSSb ?]'^rin3 Nb / have nol
permitted thee to toitch.
§ 142. TWO VERBS TO EXPRESS ONE IDEA. 249
remarked, however, that in poetry the h is often omitted where it is
used in prose, as iT^H to be willing, with h , Ex. x. 27, with the mere Inf.
Job xxxix. 9 ; Is. xxx. 9, xlii. 21.*
3. It has, like the first, the form of the finite verb ; they are
then construed —
a) With '1 before the second verb, agreeing with the first in
tense, gender, and number, both forming one idea, as in Nos. 1
and 2. [Comp. in Engl. '^ make haste and come dowiV^ = make
haste to come down.] Judg. xix. 6, 'yh") n3"bsin he ^pleased now
and tarry all night ; Jos. vii. 7. Gen. xxvi. 18, isn?!) ^^^^
and he returned (repeated) and dug, for he dug again ; xxxvii.
7, 2 Kings i. 11, 13 ; Gen. xxv. 1, he added and took a ivrje, for
he again took a ivife. Esth. viii. 6, Ti'^iil'^'l ^3^i5 '^?7'''^ how
should I he able and witness, for hoio should I he ahle to witness.
Cant. ii. 3, Eccles. iv. 1, 7.
The construction may also begin with the Impf. and be continued
by the Perf. with ^ (according to § 126, 6) ; as in Esther (above quoted) ;
Deut. :;jxxi. 12, that they may learn {Impf.) and fear {Perf), for to fear ;
Hos. ii. 11, Dan. ix. 25 ; and vice versa, it may begin with the Perf and
be continued in the Impf. with ^, as in Job xxiii. 3.
b) Without 1 and (dovi^dsrcog), the second verb connecting
more nearly with the preceding one, and the first (as in letter a)
agreeing with it in tense. Deut. ii. 24, liJ'^ bnn begin, take pos-
session, for begin to take ; Hos. i. 6, Dtini? Cl''pis isb / will not
go on and pity, i. e. / will no longer pity ; 1 Sam. ii. 3, bx
llS'iri ^la'^n multiply not and speak = speak not much ; Lam.
iv. 14, ly^';' ^bpl"! iiba so that they could not touch ; Job xix. 3,
Hos. V. 10.
This construction is more poetical than the one under letter a. Comp.
e. g. C]''Oin followed by "i in Gen. xxv. 1, xxxviii. 5; but Avithout it in
Hos. i. 6, Is. lii. 1. — It occurs, however, in common prose, as in Josh. iii.
16, Neh. iii. 20, 1 Chron. xiii. 2, Jos. iii. 16, Deut. i. 5.
c) Also d6vv8i:TCog, but with the second verb in the Imper-
fect, as being more strictly dependent on the first, which we may
express by the conjunction that. Job xxxii. 22, !n.3DN! ''py'1^ ikb
I know not how to flatter (prop. I know not what to do, that 1
* So after words which include an analogous verbal-idea. E. g. X12b ')''S
it is not permitted to enter in; t]"!? T^N (poet.) there is nothing to be compared to
thee, Ps. xl. 6 ; TTliJ ready, prepared, commonly with b , without it in Job iii. 8.
250 PART III. SYNTAX.
may flatter = I cannot flatter). 1 Sam. xx. 19, "inn nir^ffil and
cause on the third day, (that) thou come down, for on the third
day come down. Is. xlii. 21.
In Arabic and Syriac this construction is very common ;* in Hebrew
rare, but was necessary at least in those cases, where the second verb
was to be distinguished from the first in person or number. Is. xlvii. 1,
Ti^"^^1P'? "'BiDin xb thou shall not add (that) they shall call thee, for thou
Shalt not continue to he called; Num. xxii. 6, ^S'a-ijxi 1■3-■'^^^ b?'!^ "'^IX
perhaps I may be able, (that) we shall smite him, and I shall drive him out.
All three constructions (letters a, b. c) and still another nearly like
that under letter c, are found together in some verbs in the Syriac. He
could go may be expressed by potuit et ivit (letter a), potvit ivit (.-etter 6),
potuit et iret (not in Hebrew), f)o/m7 ?Ve/ (letter c). See Agrell. Suppl.
Synt. Syr. p. 33.
4. It takes the form of tlie Participle ; Is. xxxiii. 1, Tj^'^nTO
TlitJJt when thou shalt cease as a destroyer, i. e. to be a destroyer
-=■ to destroy ;t 1 Sam. xvi. 16.
In the same manner is construed also the verbal adjective, 1 Sam. iii.2.
his eyes m'ns ^iinn began (to grow) dim. Of this construction is Gen.
ix. 20. n^ixti d-'X nb btri and Noah began (to be) a husbandman.
Rem. 1. In very many of the above examples the first verb only
serves, in effect, to qualify in some manner the second, and hence we
translate it by an adverb. Compare also Gen. xxxi. 27, n'inb nxanj nab
wherefore hast thou secretly Jled ; xxxvii. 7, your sheaves stood around
and bowed, for bowed around; 2 Kings ii. 10, bxdb n-^apn thou hast
dealt hardly in asking, i. e. hast made a hard demand. The verb which
qualifies the other may also occupy the second place, but never without
special cause ; e. g. Is. liii. 11. 'S'si'C'] <ix"ii he shall see and be sati-ijied
(with the sight), and Ixvi. 1 1. that ye may suck and be satisfied (thereby) ;
xxvi. 11. — Jer. iv. 5. ^xbjD ls<"ip means, call ye (and that) with the fidl
voice r= call aloud.
2. Of a different construction are those verbs, which take after them
(in place of an accusative) a sentence or clause depending on "^S or "iiUN
that (§ 155, 1) ; such e. g. as to see (Gen. i. 4, 10), io knoio (Gen. xxii.
12), to believe, to remember, to forget, to say, to think, to happen. On the
omission of the conjunction before such clauses, see § 155, 4. c.
* The Arabian says volehat dilaceraret {he was inclined, that he should rend), for
he would rend ; and so the Syrian >a^p \£>, volehat tolleret (Luke xviii. 13), he
would lift tip, but oftener with the conjunction that, ]Z)J9 j-b. he would come.
The Latin also may omit the conjunction in this case : Quid vis faciam ? Ter.
Volo hoc oratori conlingat, Cic. Brut. 84. So in German, Ich ivolltc, es ware ; Ich
dachte, es ginge, I toould it were, <fee.
\ For T]snri3 (§ 20, Rem.) Inf. Iliph. of D^n .
1 This construction also is common in Syriac (see Hoft'mann's Gram. Syr. p.
343, b), where it is by no means to be taken (as by J. D. Michaelis) for a Grsecism.
§ 143. CONSTRUCTION OF PASSR^ VERBS. 251
§ 143:
CONSTEUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS. .
1. When a causative conjugation {Plel, Hlphil) has two
accusatives (§ 139), its passive retains only one of them (viz. the
second, or more remote object), taking the other (the immediate
object) as a nominative, or including its subject in itself. Ps.
Ixxx. 11, n^2 D'^"i<7 ^&| the mountains are covered w\th its (the
vine's) shade ; 1 Kings xxii. 10, D'^'7?3 D'^llOab'a clothed with gar-
ments (prop. m,ade to put on gartnents) ; Ex. xxv. 40, nrii<"miJi|:
ni^nti which was shown thee (prop, which thou wast made to
see).
Several striking phenomena in the construction of the Passive are
readily explained, if we regard it as an impersonal Active (dicitur ^^ they
say), just as, on the contrary, the impersonal Active often supplies the
place of the Passive (see § 137, Note). We may thus explain those
cases, in which —
a) It takes the object of the action in the accusative. Gen. xxvii.
42, liys i'n2'n"nN •^fsS'ib 1»^1 and they made known to Rebecca the words
of Esau J iv. 18, Tiis-PN i\i:ri}_. nb^'^i one bore (for his wife bore) to
Enoch Irad ; xxi. 5, pn^J'ii'nx ib ^^jna at the time of bearing (iv xoi
Tixtlv) to him Isaac ; xl. 20, ns''iB~ri< T\'^^}h1^ ni'' the day on which Pha-
raoh was born ; xvii. 5, n"i3X Tj^UTN li^ Ntli^"? ^ '*o longer shall they
call thy name Abram. Ex. x.' 8, rii>-iB bx n^n-nx 3\2J!i'='l and they
brought Moses back to Pharaoh. Lev. xvi. 27, Jos. vii. 15, 1 K. ii. 21.
b) It does not agree (as often happens) in gender and number with
the noun, even when preceded by it (comp. § 147) ; for it is not, in the
Hebrew conception, the subject of the passive verb, but is governed by
it in the accusative as its object. Is. xxi. 2. "^h'^^t} H;y|5 x\^^'n visionem
diram nunciarunt viihi (the noun in the accus.) ; Dan. ix. 24, septua-
ginta septimanas destinarunt (TiP-HJ?) ; 1 K- ii- 21. Is. xiv. 3. Gen. xxxv.
26, Hos. x. 6.*
2. The efficient cause, after a passive verb, most frequently
takes b, and is therefore in the dative (as in Greek); as •J^'13
bi^b blessed of God (rw Oicp)^ Gen. xiv. 19, Prov. xiv. 20. More
rare, but entirely certain, is the same use of "I'Q (prop, out from,
by which origin, source, in general, is often denoted) ; Ps. xxxvii.
23, Gen. ix. 11, Job xxiv. 1, xxviii. 4 ; "^DSTS a parte. Gen. vi. 13 ;
3 hy. Num. xxxvi. 2, Is. xiv. 17 ; and sometimes of the accusal.
instrum,enti (comp. § 138, 1, Rem. 3) without a preposition, Is.
Comp. Olshausen, Emeudationea zum A. T., S. 24, 25.
252 PART III. SYNTAX.
i. 20, ^bssn nnn hy the sword shall ye he devoured^ comp. Pa
xvii. 13.
Rem. Many neuter verbs are sometimes used as Passives, in conse-
quence of a peculiar application of their original meaning. E. g. in;;!
to go rfoion,— spoken of a forest, to he felled; r\h'S for to he brought up, to
be laid upon (the altar) Lev. ii. 12, to he entered (in an account) 1 Chron.
xxvii. 24 ; XS'; Lo be brought out of Deut. xiv. 22.
CHAPTER IV.
CONNECTION OF THE SUBJECT WITH THE PKEDICATE.
§ 144.
MAiTNER OF EXPRESSING THE COPULA.
The union of the substantive or pronoiui, which forms the
subject of the sentence, with another substantive or adjective as
its predicate, is most commonly expressed by simply writing
them together without any copula, 1 Kings xviii. 21, nirT^
D''n"bs:ri Jehovah (is) the true God ; Gen. ii. 4, nilbin n^N this
(is) the history ; ii. 12, nil: Xinn f-jxn nriT the gold of that land
(is) good ; Is. xxxi. 2, DDH i?^n 03 he too (is) wise. — The fre-
quent use, in this connection, of a pronoun of the third person
referring to the predicate, for marking more distinctly its union
with the subject, has already been noticed, j 121, 2.
More seldom the copula is expressed by the substantive-verb
rr^n. Gen. i. 2, and the earth was (nn'j'n) luaste and empty ;
iii. 1, the serpent loas (n^n) cunning ; ver. 20. Also by 1X5'^ and
']''i!5 (which include the idea of the substantive-verb) when the
subject is the pronoun and the predicate is a participle (see § 134,
2, a).
On the gender and number of the copula see § 147.
Rem. Instead of the adjective the Hebrew often employs the abstract
substantive as a predicate (§ 106, 1, Rem. 2) ; especially when there is
no adjective of the signification required (§ 106, 1), e. g. y? Iinliip his
walls (are) roood = of wood, wooden. The sense is here the same, as
if the substantive, which stands as subject of the sentence, were repeated
in the conslr. state before the predicate (ys nit^p T'tiinip) This full
construction occurs Job vi. 12, "^nb tJ'ijnx ri3 DX is my strength the
strength of stones! Similar examples are: Cant. i. 15, Dilii T^'^3''? thy
§ 145. PARTS OF SPEECH IN A SENTEKCE. 253
eyes (are) fZores'-eyes ; Ps. xlv. 7, BTl'^J* 'l^P^ '% throne (is) a throne
o/" G'orf = a divine throne ;* second member (with the full construction)
?]n!lDb73 •^'yii niijia t:3tt3 d righteous sceptre is the sceptre of thy dominion.
This occurs, especially, with 3 of comparison ; as Ps. xviii. 34, nib^JXS "^bsn
my feet after the manner of hinds = lii^e feet of hinds ; Is. Ixiii. 2, ^"'7.22
riSS '!T;)'i3 thy garments (are) like the garments of one who treads the
\oine-press ; xxix. 4 ; Jer. 1. 9, "i2J3 1'^^n his arrows like the arrows of
a mighty man.
§ 145.
AERANGEMENT OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH IN A SENTENCE;
CASE ABSOLUTE.
1. The most natural order of words, in the simple sentence
in calm discourse, is this : subject, copula, predicate ; or, when
the predicate consists of the verb with its object, subject, verb,
object. Adverbial qualifications (of time, place, for example)
may stand either before or after the verb ; a negative always
immediately before it.f
But the Hebrew can, at pleasure, render either of these mem-
bers prominent, by giving it the first place in the sentence ; e. g.
a) The verb : Prov. xxviii. 1, there flee, token there is no pur-
suer, the wicked. Gen. xlii. 30. This is its common position,
when there is implied in it an indeterminate subject (the im-
personal construction, § 137, 3), as Gen., i. 14, riilS^'Q "^T}'} let
there be lights, D'^l^Sj! TVlV they howl (to wit) the jackals, Is.
xiii. 22 (comp. il vient des hommes) ; and also wherever the
sentence or clause is connected with a preceding one by 1 (of
course where the Imjif. cons, is employed), "ITiJi? or ""S ; as
Gen. iii. 1, all beasts ""^ nicy "niJX which Jehovah had made ;
ii. 5, "^^ "I'^'^'^ri ^^ ^^for Jehovah had not caused it to rain.
b) The adjective : this, when it is the predicate, is commonly
placed first as the most important member of the sentence.
Jer. X. 6, ^lailJ bin^l nriS bins great art thou, and great is
thy name.
c) The object of the verb : the verb then immediately follows, as
Prov. xiii. 5, lying tvords hates the righteous man ; [Judges
* Philology requires, ho-wever, no other than the simple and natural construc-
tion, " Thy throne, O God !"— Tr.
\ Rarely is the object interposed between the negative and the verb (Job xxii.
7, xxxiv. 23, Eccles. x. 10), or the subject (2 Kings v. 26), or an adverbial qualifi-
cation (Ps. vi. 2).
254 PART III. SYNTAX.
V. 25, nilna Dbn b^t^ W^IZ ivater he asked ; milk she gave.^
Very rare is the arrangement in 2 Kings v. 13, some great
thing had the pi'ophet commanded thee. Ex. xviii. 23.
d) The adverbial qualification, which is then immediately fol-
lowed by the verb. Gen. i. 1 ; Jos. x. 12, ^jtiT\^_ ^5"!? TS ;
Judg. V. 22.
Another arrangement, viz. subject, object, verb, which is common in
Arameean (Dan. ii. 6, 7. 8, 10), is seldom fcund in Hebrew, and only in
poetry. Ps. vi. 10, ni?'^ "^ri^En ^)^') \ xi. 5; Is. xiii. 18; xlix. 6. See
Gesenius, Comm. zu Jes. xHi. 24.
2. But the greatest prominence is given to any substantive
in the sentence (whether it 'is the genitive, or accusative of the
object, or employed by way of limitation, or qualification of any
kind) by permitting it to stand, absolutely, at the beginning of
the sentence, and then representing it, in its proper place, by a
pronoun ; (compare c^est moi, qii'on a accuse.) E. g. the geni-
tive, Ps. xviii. 31, i31'l Di'an b^n God — perfect is his way, for
the loay of God is perfect ; xi. 4, civ. 17 ; the accusative, Ps.
Ixxiv. 17, winter and summer — thou hast made them, for thou
hast made ivinter ajid smnmer ; Gen. xlvii. 21, "I'^^JJn Ql^nTiS
ink the people — he transferred them ; xxi. 13. comp. Jer. vi. 19.*
The suffix may also be omitted, Ps. ix. 7, and the connection
indicated by '1 (as sign of the apodosis). Ps. xviii. 41 (comp.
2 Sam. xxii. 41). Job xxxvi. 26, n;>n ^\ ™ IBD^, sc. QHb
the number of his years — there is no searching (to them) ; iv. 6,
xxiii. 12, XXV. 5, Gen. iii. 5, 1 Sam. xxv. 27, 2 Sam. xv. 34.
The participle, when placed thus at the beginning of the sentence,
resembles the Latin ablative absolute. Prov. xxiii. 24, n^bil can l^i"'
he who begets a wise son (i. e. xchen one begets, &c.) then he may rejoice,
1 Sam. ii. 13, "jn'sn "i?3 N^!! naT nat ;ai5<-b3 ^chen any one brought an
offering, then came thepriesOs servant ; ix. 11, Gen. iv. 15.
§ 146.
RELATION OF THE SUBJECT AND PPvEDIOATE IN RESPECT TO
GENDER AND NUMBER.
The predicate (verb, adjective, substantive with copula) con-
forms, regularly, to the subject in gender and number. From
this rule, common to all languages, there are many deviations,
* Such an absolute case may also be introduced by Ip [in respect to), e. g. Gea
xvii. 20, Ps. xvi. 3, Is. xxxii, 1.
§ 146. RELATION OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 255
partly occasioned by regard to the sense rather than the gramma-
tical form of words {constructio ad sensum), partly by the position
of the predicate before the other members of the sentence.
In respect to the first cause, we remark : —
1. Collective nouns, e. g. Qy, "^13 jjeoplc, Ti'^a family, and
nouns used as such, as it'^^ men (see § 108, 1), are usually con-
strued {ad scnsiim) with the plural. Judg. ix. 55. ~i:^S. ^S'l*'^
bsn'Tl?;! and the men of Israel saio ; xv. 10. 1 Kings xx. 20,
D"1X ^Dp^T ; Prov. xi. 26. So when the collecvive is itself /ew.
but represents individuals which are of the Ttiasc. gender ; e. g.
2 Sam. XV. 23, D^D13 V")«0"^l (^e ichole land (i. e. its inhabit-
ants) wept ;* 1 Kings x. 24, Gen. xlviii. 6, 1 Sam. ii. 33, xvii.
46 ; and vice versa, Job i. 14, riiTZJ"in T'T\ 1]p3n the cattle (kine)
were ploughing. For examples of the predicate with the sin-
gular form in such cases, see Gen. xxxv. 11, Is. ii. 4 (comp.
Mic. iv. 3).
Often the construction begins with the singular (especially
when the verb is placed first, § 147, a), and then, when the col-
lective is introduced, proceeds with the plural. Ex. xxxiii. 4,
■^.baNniiT . . . D:?n yatJ^l a7id the people heard . . . and mour?ied ;
i. 20.'
2. On the other hand, plural nouns with a singular signifi-
cation (§ 108, 2) are construed with the singular, especially the
so-called pluralis e.vcellentics. Gen. i. 1, 3.t Ex. xxi. 29, T^^^S
r\'QV his oivner shall be put to death. So feminine forms with
a masculine signification are construed with the masculine ;
Eccles. xii. 9, CDH r!5rip n^n the preacher was wise.
3. Plurals which designate beasts or things (but not persons),
whether they are masculine or feminine, prefer the construction
with the feminine singular + (comp. the feminine form with the
* Sallust. Jngurth. 14, jiars in crucein acti, pars bestiis objecti.
•j- C^n'^S is construed Avith the plur. only here and there in the older biblical
books, and in certain forms of expression which perhaps had their origin in poly-
theism. Gen. XX. 13, xxxv. '7, Ex. xxii. 8, Ps. Iviii. 12. The later writers studiously
avoid this construction as polytheistic; comp. Ex. xxxii. 4, 8, with Neh. ix. 18;
2 Sam. yii. 23, with 1 Chron. xvii. 21. See the lexicon.
J Perfectly analogous is the Gi'eek construction tw tiqo^uth ^uiiet, where the
Attics admit the plural only when persons are designated : ju urdQunodu I'lu^ov.
In Arabic, such a plural is called pluralis inhumanus (i. e. not used of men) and is
construed chiefly with the feminine singular, like all its so-called pluralia fracta
(collective forms).
256 P^^T ni. SYNTAX.
collective signification in § 107, 3, d). Joel i. 20, ^'^^^ hi'ona
^"i"^?^ the beasts of the field pine for . Job xiv. j9, s|bT2?ri
}l"in"'2p its floods wash axoay. Jer. xlix. 24, nr\Trii|! D''!?^)! pains
have seized upon her. Ps. xxxvii. 31, Job xii. 7. The same
principle applies to pronouns in connection with their antece-
dents ; Job xxxix. 15, Is. xxxv. 7, 2 Kings iii. 3.
4. Moreover, those plurals also which designate persons are
construed with the singular, when, instead of the whole sum of
individuals spoken of, the attention is directed to each one of
them (comp. Isb for omnes and omnis). Num. xxiv. 9, ^''D'lS'a
"111X ^"^"it^fi^l 'FJ11D loho bless thee, let him be blessed ; who cnrse
thee, let him be cursed. Gen. xxvii. 29, Ex. xxxi. 14. Prov.
iii. 18, "TSiiia tn'^D'ain happy (is every one of) those who retain
her ; xxvii. 16, n'Ti"'jB:i; nilBi ; xxviii. 1.
5. Dual substantives have their predicates in the plural, as
verbs, adjectives, and pronouns have no dual form (§ 88, 1). Gen.
xxix. 17, riis'l nsjb liiyi and Hie eyes of Leah were weak ; Ps.
xviii. 28, Is. xxx. 20, 2 Sam. xxiv. 3. 1 Sam. i. 13, ni5?2 \l''f?siri
her lips moved ; 2 Chron. vii. 15, nil^J? ^STXI ninns r^T)"} ^3iy ;
vi. 40 ; Micah vii. 10, npx'ir^ "^S'^y tny eyes shall see. Jer. xiv.
7, Is. i. 16, Job X. 8, xx. 10, xxvii. 4, Ps. xxxviii. 11. Seldom
is the rule in No. 3 of this section extended also to the dual ;
e. g. Mic. iv. 11.
§147.
SUBJECT AND PEEDIOATE IN RESPECT TO GENDER AND NUM-
BER (Continued).
A frequent cause of deviation from the general rule, is the
position of the predicate at the beginning of the sentence. The
subject, to which it would regularly conform, not being yet ex-
pressed, it often takes its simplest and readiest form, viz. the
masculine singular, even when the subject, which comes after,
\s feminine or plural. The predicate in this case is not subject
to inflection. E. g.
a) The verb : Is. xlvii. 11, nyn 1\iyS X3 there comes upon thee
evil ; Mic. ii. 6, ini'sbs yo'] sib reproaches shall not depart.
Ps. Ivii. 2, Deut. xxxii. 35 ; Esther ix. 23, D-'^^n;'?! bap) and
the Jews adopted : 2 Kings iii. 26, rranbiGn pTn ha7-d was the
battle ; 1 Sam. xxv. 27. Often, the verb may here be regard-
§ 14Y. RELATIOIS' OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 257
ed as impersonal, as in il vient des homines, il a paru deux
volumes (§145, 1, a). More seldom before the plur. fern,, we
find (at least) the masc. plwYil ; Judg^. xxi. 21, ^S2;;;~DS
n'b">T^ in*:3 ivhc7i the daughters of Shiloh come forth.
b) The adjective : Ps. cxix. 137, T'^?^''? "l^?^ righteous are thy
judgments ; ver. 155, WW^ . . . pin"! /a?* aivai/ (is) salvation.
(The German also neglects, in this case, the inflection of the
adjective : gerecht {sind) deine Gerichte.)
c) The participle as substantive : Gen. xlvii. 3, ^''l^? l&^Sr nyh
shepherds (are) thy servants. Also
d) The copula belonging to the predicate-substantive, when it
precedes the subject.* Is. xviii. 5, H^p '^'^XT] ^'03 ^p3 the
hlossoin becomes a ripening grape ; Gen. xxvii, 39, xxxi. 8
If the construction is continued after the introduction of the
subject, the verb must conform to it in its gender and number.
Ez. xiv. 1, \D^b ^'21t>^ D^CDij: ^bx ^^'2.'^^ ; Gen. i. 14, Num. ix. 6.
Rem. 1. In general, the language is sometimes sparing in tlie use
especially of the feminine forms (corap. § 112, 1, Rem. 2), and, when a
feminine substantive has more than one predicate, contents itself witli
giving to the nearest one the appropriate feminine form. This is well
illustrated by the following examples : Is. xxxiii. 9, "p'lX ■^^t'^l!* ^35* the
land mournelh and languisheth ; xiv. 9, 0*^X3"! ?I^ ^l^is .... njSn rnn^ bx'r
Sheol beneath is moved . ... it stirrelh zip the shades to (meet) thee.
Examples of the masc. form in remote predicates, Gen. xxxii. 9, xlix. 15.
Lev. ii. 1, V. 1, xx. 6 ; in such as stand in dependent sentences. Job vi.
10, Vbrj'^ ikb (n^x) "^"^na ; xx. 26 ; after "isi, vi. 20.
On the same principle pronouns, which refer to plural nouns, take the
form of the singular when they stand remote from their antecedents.
Job xxxviii. 32 ; Deut. xxi. 10.
2. The cases where the predicate follows the subject without con-
forming to it in gender and number, are mostly those in which a passive
verb must be conceived as impersonal, and as construed with the accu-
sative (§ 143, 1. Rem.) or where the predicate is a participle used as a
substantive ; e. g. Gen. iv. 7, j'?"! nsan ntisb at the door (is) si7i, a
lurker (as it were, a lurking lion). — Eccles. ii. 7, "^h n^^ri n';i2~''3a vernce
mihi sunt (where ''h n^n is to be understood as I have). Gen. xv. 17,
n^ii Jiabs;; aiid darkness, there became (with a special emphasis on the
noun, — the verb standing impersonally).
* Independently of this arrangement, the pronoun KW, representing the copu
la, is retained between the jo^wr. and the /cm. unchanged. Josh. xiii. 14, "^"^ ''VBii
inPHi a^il . . . the offerings of Jehovah . . . that is his inheritance. Comp. Jer, x. 3.
17
258 PART m. SYNTAX.
§148.
CONSTEUOTION OF THE COMPOUND SUBJECT.
1. When the subject is composed of a nominative and geni-
tive, the verb sometimes conforms in gender and number to the
genitive instead of the governing noun, viz. when the word in
the genitive expresses the principal idea. E. g. Job xxxii. 7,
Srasn IS^i'l''^ D'^STC I'l the multitude of years (i. e. many years)
should teacli luisdom ; Gen. iv. 10 ; 2 Sam. x. 9, ''32 T^bs S^J^^n
ntinbisn the front of the battle was against him. Is. vi. 4, Job
xxix. 10, xxxviii. 21.
With the substantive hb the whole, and the numerals, this construc-
tion is almost universal ; e. g. Gen. v. 5, CiN '^'3';'"b3 ^T!*! and all the
days of Adam were — ; Ex. xv. 20, Gen. viii. 10.
2. When several subjects are connected by the conjunction
and^ their common predicate usually takes the plural form, espe-
cially when it follows them ; Gen. viii. 22, . . . dHt 1p1 I'^Spl :?nT
^nsip^ seed-ti?ne and harvest, and cold and heat . . . shall not
cease ; if the subjects are of different gender, it takes the masc.
form ; Gen. xviii. 11, CSpT 'rniO'} DH'iaS Abraham and Sarah
(were) old. Deut. xxviii. 32, 1 K. iii. 17. When it precedes, it
often conforms in gender and number to the first (as being the
nearest) subject. Gen. vii. 7, TSII nb Xin^T there loent in Noah
and his sons ; Ex. xv. 1 ; Num. xii. 1, ]i"ini<1 D^'i'a "i^'lPI there
spake Miriam and Aaron : Gen. xxxiii. 7, xliv. 14. More rare
is the singular form, after more than one subject ; Prov. xxvii. 9,
ab"n^tD';i fr^tsp.l '\Q^ ointment and perfiime rejoice the heart
(where the masc. also is preferred). If the construction is con-
tinued, it is always under the plural form ; e. g. Gen. xxi. 32,
xxiv. 61, xxxi. 14, xxxiii. 7.
CHAPTER Y.
USE OF THE PARTICLES.
§ 149.
Up the particles, as connected with the system of forms and
inflections (§§ 99-105), we have already treated in their relation
to the other parts of speech. We are now to consider the signi-
§160. THE ADVERBS. 259
fication and use of these words, which are so necessary to the
exact perception of the sense, and hold so important a place in
the philosophical treatment of the language. We shall present.
in a general view, their most important peculiarities, leaving the
more complete representation, as well as the necessary proofs, to
the lexicon.
§150.
OF THE ADVERBS.
The most important adverbs, classed according to their signi-
fication, are : —
1. Adverbs q/';j/ace ; U^ there ; .IS, TTS. trr and Hta, hie, here, Q'bn
and njti hither, the latter also here (from the Chald. 'jfi this), nxbn
thither, farther on (prop, to a distance), hence «^3ni ?]53^ {from thee
hither) on this side of thee, and "^ij^vj)! ^5?^ {from thee farther on) beyond
thee, 1 Sam. xx. 21, 22, 37, Is. xviii. 2 ; bs, more commonly b?52a above,
nliPia below, ii^y^ upwards, tils'O downwards, yw outside, ysin^Q on the
outside, ni3?a and fT3''?Q within, oip. , Cilsa before, on the east, "linx be-
hind, niS'ihx backwards, 123 over against, "pa^ to the right, V^a^^a on the
right, tfiiz on the west (prop, on the side towards the sea), i"'3D and -"'aS'3
around, n^'^aaip upright.
To many of these adverbs "'O is prefixed, or the accusative ending H—
appended, indicating respectively the relationsyro?/i and toxoards. E. g.
n;a thei^e, Diaa ^Ae;ice, n:ao thither ; yw outside, nsw outwards. There
are several which occur only with rt— appended, as fiti^, nxbri.
But these additions, however, express also the relation of rest in a
place, as ii^B sometimes there (not merely thither), T^'3*'? on the right (not
yro??t iAe right). The rt— is in both cases ihe accusative ending (§ 90,
2), and "(o properly denotes hanging off from an object, and hence being
upon the side of it, like a dextra et sinistra, a latere, a tergo, and in
French dessous, cZessus, (/edans, f/ehors.*
2. Adverbs of time: these are in part the same with those which
have been mentioned as adverbs of place, and which, by an easy transi-
tion, are made to express relations of time ; as Dili then, like ixu ; nis
now ; n5<bn forward, '^'^J\ i? and contr. ns"!^ hitherto.
Exclusively such are : i'i'nv at the time, hence, now, at this time (also
besides the pure designation of time, like viiv, vvv), and presently, soon;
Di'n {this day) to-day; Di'3, ci'ns at this day, now; bi^n, bi^nx
before, yesterday ; UJ^S yester-evening, last night; Dliabia (from dbllJ
three, and Di"') three days since ; ^TVQ to-morrow {eras); nin^a on the
* Cant. iv. 1, isba Ifna wba they lie along the declivity of Mount Oilead, e
monte quasi pendentes. Comp. Soph. Antig. 411, xa&rj(J.E&^ uxqaiv ix nuymv \
Odyss. xxi. 420, iy. dlcpgno ya&ij^tvog.
260 PART III. SYNTAX.
■morrow; wai"^ by day ; i^^"^? by night ; "ij^'a and SSliJii in the morning^
early; Di''r)"b3 the whole day, then, all the time, always; T^sn perpe-
tually, always, Q^ii', Cibisb for ever, ns,3. nsjb continually ; Tij <7ien,
with reference to both past and future time, tX53 /o??o- since, formerly,
CisbIs do., "133 (length) long since; lis (repetition) again, repeatedly,
commonly yet, with a negative no more ; ini<3 (as 07ie) at once, together;
Ti'in^ do., njidx-i at first, )o i-inx (after it was so) afterwards, iTnno
speedily, DXna instantly.
3. Adverbs for other modal ideas, as a) of quality : Hs, nss and
■jS so; ii<^ rery, in^ exceedingly, very, "ini"i more, too much, Th^ , nsJ
wholly, I'l'NS, w?'23 (about or ?iea7- nothing, about i. e. within a little =
wanting little) almost, S1SX so, so ?Aen (Job ix. 24), hence often used
intensively in questions (see § 153, 2, Rem.), 3ii2 and a■^E3^'^ 7i)eZZ, Vs (in
connection with other adverbs) wholly, just, as "il'S'bs wholly (just) so
long. Job xxvii. 3.
6) Of quantity : ri3"irt m2<c/i, 'y'h abundantly, ']'\'n (riches) plentifully,
■^■n followed by the genitive (prop, sufficiency), enough, as 7\}y\ what is
enough for thee, ns"! much, enough; "13^, "^'J3b (m separation) alone,
the former also with suffixes, as '''nsb I alone ; "in^ together.
c) Of affirmation : )'an , BJ'Stj truly, ')3!i< certainly, indeed, and by
apocope T)!!< ; ^3X tndy, also (corrective) nay rather, immo Gen. xvii.
19 ; 1 Kings i. 43 ; "'I'lX perhaps.*
The expression of affirmation may easily pass over into that o^ con-
trariety (comp. verum, vero) and of limitation ; and hence some of the
above-mentioned affirmative particles are partly adversative and restrit
ive, as Tji* only, I5N, b3^l; (especially in later usage) but. Most strongl)
adversative is ob^ix on the contrary (the LXX. oh fii]v alXd), thus used
almost exclusively in the Pentateuch and Job. Restrictive also is pi
(used before adjectives like Tji*) merely = only.
d) Of cause : )'3~h^ , "jab , "jtib , on that accoiint, therefore, e) Of
accession : oa aUo, and (more poetical, and expressive of gradation) t\ii
adeo, yea more, even — both which, however, often take the character
of conjunctions.
4. Adverbs of negation: on these see § 152.
5. Interrogative adverbs include all the former classes : thus the
question may relate to place, as "^X, rt^s< where! the first with suff. i'X
where (is) he! so nt ^X, nnx, ns^N, nD-^x where?— 'n^r: ^X, -j-^xa
'whence'? i"i3X (from f^5'^x) whither? — to time, as "'ti'? when? "^n^a IS m?z-
<i7 when ? how long ? njx n? , the same ; — to quality, as fi^'^X , Tpx ,
HDDiX how? — to quantity, as nss /tow much? how often? — to cause, as
fiab' and S^Thj? (§ 99, 3) wherefore ?— Respecting the pure interrogative
particles n, DX, see § 153.
* Compounded, probably, of "fX and "^b = tib , comp. Aram. Xa^'^'n whether not,
perhaps, /j.^noT{. It is used once in the sense of ''bib if not, Num. xxii. 33 ; then
whether not, (who knows) whether not, hence perhaps, expressing doubt, solicitude,
and also hope.
§ 152. WORDS WHICH EXPRESS NEGATION. 261
Most of these interrogative particles are formed by prefixing ^X. "^X
which in itself signifies where (comp. Germ, wovon ? wo\\\n ?), but by
usage becomes also a mere sign of interrogation before particles of place,
time, ifcc.
In this manner, and by the application of the ending ri— , of the pre-
fix "jia , and of the relative *ili3X , are formed whole classes of correlative
adverbs, as fit here. Wp hence, nt ^x where 7 n;153 ^X whence ? UTa "ifflx
whence (relative) ; DO there, 7M2^ thither, Dia^ thence, DirJ "i^yx where,
naB niiJit whither, m^^ -naN wheyice.
§151.
CONSTEUOTION OF ADYERBS.
1. Adverbs not only express, in general, the qualifying circum-
stances of a sentence, but also qualify single words, as adjectives,
e. g. 155'a sits very good, and even substantives (like /} ;/i^ic
i)/ui^c(). They are placed either a) in apposition (after the
word qualified, as t:2?^ D"^1!3:N afeiv men Neh. ii. 12, n^nn np^nn
nb^'a i;ery wmc/i wisdom 1 Kings v, 9 ; or b) in the genitive,
DsH nbbp « causeless curse Prov. xxvi. 2, Dsn 15? a witness with-
out cause xxiv. 28, where the adverb is treated substantively, as
in sponte sua.
The adverbs also appear in the nature of the substantive, when, ag
in the later writers, they take a preposition ; e. g. "jaa in the [whilst it
is] so ='{2, Esth. iv. 16; DSn'bx, prop, for in vain Ez. vi. 10.
2. The repetition of an adverb sometimes denotes intensity,
and sometimes continual accession ; e. g. 1S?'52 1S^^ exceedingly
Num. xiv. 7 ; Gen. vii. 19, nn^ npiQ lower and lower Deut.
xxviii. 43, TD^ia tD^'a 6y little and little {peu a peu) Ex. xxiii. 30.
On the use of verbs with the effect of adverbs, see § 142, Rem. 1.
§ 152.
OF WORDS WHICH EXPRESS NEGATION".
1. The most important adverbs of negation are: i<^=ov^
not, ^i<= jufj not (subjective), 'J'^N (opposite of it"}) there is not,
D")t3 not yet, OSX no more. Almost exclusively poetic are ^3,
''V^, not ; negative conjunctions, bx, 'JS, ''H^'r^^, that not.
We subjoin a more particular view of the use of these words :
iib , like ov, ovx, is used principally for the objective, unconditionaL
negation, and hence is commonly connected with the Perfect or Iraper-
262 PART III. SYNTAX.
feet (as Indicative), and with the Imperfect (as a Future) to express pro-
hibition {^ 127, 3, c). — In connection with bb, Avhen the latter is not
followed by the article and therefore means any one. any thing, it
expresses the Lat. nullus, none (comp. Fr. ne — personne). Ex. xii. 16,
ntJS;)-xb nsx^a-bs no labor shall be done ; x. 15, xx. 4, 2 Chron. xxxii.
15. Prov. xii. 21, xxx. 30. (The negative stands here in immediate con-
nection with the verh: there happen^-vot any thing :^ there happens
nothing). So also 'pN with bb ; Eccles. i. 9, AlJ'in-bs ■J'^S there-is-not
any thing new, for there is nothing new. But the case is different when
bb is made definite, where it means all., the whole. Num. xxiii. 13,
nx'nn xb i^s all of him {his whole) thou shall not see (but only a part).
On the use of iiib in interrogative sentences, see § 153, 1.
On the position of xb in the order of words, see § 145. 1, and Note.
bx . like pt] and ne, for the subjective and dependent negation, is used
with the Imperfect (as Jussive) ; hence xh'^ bx , ne veniat, let him not
come, may also mean he would not come; see above, § 127, 3, c, and
§ 128, 2.
Sometimes it stands absolutely, without the verb (like /u»/ for pr]
rovxo yivi]Tai), nay I pray, not so, i. e. let it not be; e. g. Ruth i. 13,
■^nbs b5< not so, my daughters. On the interrogative use of it, see
§ 153, 1.
I^x (prop, consir. state of I"]!;? nothingness) is the negative of ui^ {he.
she, it) is, and includes the verb to be in all its tenses ; e. g. Gen. xxxvii.
29, "ii33 C]t>ii"']''i< Joseph was not in the pit ; Num. xiv. 42, iiin"; "px
n33lp3 Jehovah is not among you. The same formulas are expressed
positively with IJJ" and negatively with 'J'^N as Gen. xxxi. 29, i"!^ bxb-ia";
it is in my poxcer (in the power of my hand) ; Neh. v. 5, IS'i'; bxb ^ix it
is not in our power. It follows, moreover, a) that the personal pro-
nouns, when they are the subject of the sentence, are appended to *px
as suffixes ; as "'?3''i< I am not, I was not, I shall not be, ^SDiX, dJ'^X, &c.
/5) When the predicate is a verb, it almost universally takes the form
of a participle, the verb to be being implied in T^X ; Ex. v. 16, "itlS )'^i< "(an
stravf is not given ; ver. 10, "jna ''33"'i< / will not give ; viii. 17, Deut. i. 32.
Y) As ^^ signifies being, existence, so V!!? expresses the opposite, viz.
not being, non-existence ; ^ti}^^_ he was not {no longer) existing = was no
more, Gen. v. 24.
From T^X is abbreviated the privative syllable ''N, employed in a
few compounds as a prefix, as in Job xxii. 30. "^pj""^*? not guiltless. lu
^thiopic it is the most common form of negation, and is there prefixed
.also to verbs. On the origin of the interrogative "^S from yiti, see
§ 153, 1.
•^ribab (prop, constr. state with the ending i— , § 90, 3, a, from nba want,
non-existence, stem-word S^ba) is most frequently employed before the
Injin. when it is to be expressed negatively with a preposition ; as bbi<b
to eat, bbx Tlbab not to eat. Gen. iii. 11. Rarely with a finite verb, fbr
that not, Jer. xxiii. 14.
"jQ {turning away, removing) means that not, lest, especially after the
mention of an act by which an apprehended evil is to be prevented or
§ 153. INTERROGATIVE WORDS AND SENTENCES. 263
shunned (Gen. xi. 4, xix. 15); or alter verbs signifying to fear, to he-
ware (like Ssldbi fxi'i, vereor ne) xxxi. 24, 31 ; and at the beginning of the
sentence, especially in the expression of apprehension or fear, as Gen.
iii. 22, n^ nbc:';i-iQ nny^ and now. lest he stretch forth his hand.
2. Two negatives in the same sentence, instead of destroying
each other as in Latin, make the negation stronger, hi<e ov^
ovdsig, ovx ovdajLico;. 1 Kings x. 21, n^s^K^b mrn: b«b rip? "iij*
silver was regarded as nothing- ; (in the parallel passage, 2 Chr.
ix. 20, Sb is omitted.) Ex. xiv. 11.— Zeph. ii. 2, Si2;i-i5b Drjii
before there shall not come, [so in Lat. priusqiiam . . . non.] Is.
V. 9, miJii )''^'Q prop, without no inhabitant.
3. When one negative sentence follows another, especially in
the poetic parallelism, the negation is often expressed only in
the first, while it is implied also in the second. 1 Sam. ii, 3,
nniJtiply not ivords of j)Ti'ide., — let (not) that which is arrogant
come forth from your mouth. Ps. ix. ^9, xliv. 19, Job iii. 10,
xxviii. 17, XXX. 20. Compare the same usage in respect to pre-
positions, § 154, 4.
§153.
OF INTERROGATIVE WORDS AND SENTENCES.
1. Interrogation may be expressed merely by the tone of voice
in which it is uttered ; e. g. 2 Sam. xviii. 29, "i?3b D'ibt& is it
well with the yoimg man 1 Gen. xxvii. 24, ViC? "^23 "T nPii art
thou my son Esau ? 1 K. i. 24, This is somewhat more fre-
quent when the sentence is connected with the previous one by
1 ; Jon. iv. 11, D^nsj &?b '^pL'^l and should I not spare J Job ii.
10, X. 8, 9, 13, Judges xi. 23, xiv. IG ; and when it is introduced
by the particle D3 (Zech. viii. 6) or 5li? (Job xiv. 3). But nega-
tive sentences still more readily take, in utterance, the interro-
tive form ; e. g. with iib, when an affirmative answer is expected
{7io7ine ?), Job xiv. 16, '^nsan-b:;? n^n ^b dost thou not watch
for my sin? Jon. iv. 11, Ex. viii. 22, Lam. iii. 36, 38 ; once
with bi? , in expectation of a negative answer, 1 Sam. xxvii. 10.
Oi^'fl DripTBS"bi< yc have not then made an excursion in these
days 7*
* In the same mauner are used olx {nonne?) and (ii] ; the former (Horn. II. x,
165, iv. 242) in expectation of an affirmative, the hitter (Odyss. vi. 200) of a nega-
tive answer.
264 PART m. SYNTAX.
Even the few interrogative particles originally expressed either
affirmation or negation, and gradually acquired by usage their
interrogative power,*
The interrogative ti is originally demonstrative, and related to the
article ; see § 100, 4.
On the contrary, "^X where 1 probably sprung from a negation ; the
full form being T^X (hence *(')X'3 whence?), prop, not there, is not there, —
uttered interrogative. y, is not there? = where is 7 i'X is he not there!
for where is he? Job xiv. 10, man dies i'NI and where is he? = *l3|!''S<T
and he is no more. In Arabic "'X has become an interrogative pronoun
=^^"0 who? (comp. the German ico {where), and Eng. who) ; but this is
not its original use. On the abbreviation of T^X into "^N see § 152.
2. Most commonly the simple question begins with He inter-
7'ogative H, — the disjunctive question with H followed in the
second clause by Di? (□&? — D =titrum — an ?) ; 1 Kings xxii. 15,
b'in;"DJ< , , . -jbin shall we go . . . or shall wa forbear 7 The indi-
rect form of inquiry differs only in having Di? more frequently in
the simple question, and in the first member of the disjunctive
question.
More particularly : —
The rt is strictly a sign of the simple and pure question, when the
mquirer is uncertain what answer may or should be given. Job ii. 3,
hast thou considered (^3^ P!^^C.) my servant Job? Often the inquirer
expects [or implies] a negative answer {num ?), which may be expressed
in the tone itself; e. g. Gen. iv. 9, ^sbx "Tis* "i^itJfi am I the keeper of my
brother ? Job xiv. 14. wheii man dies, f^^^l'^. will he live again ? Such
a question may have precisely the force of a negative assertion ; 2 Sam.
vii. 5. rr^a ife-n^an nnsrt shalt thou build a house for me? (in the paral-
lel passage, 1 Chron. xvii. 4. 'l3l ninx xb thou shalt not build a house
for me:) and, vice versa, the negative form of the question has the
effect of an affirmation ; tkhT\ oionne ? is it not so ? the same as tiSfi
behold ! 2 Kings xv. 21, xx. 20, comp. 2 Chron. xxvii. 7. xxxii. 32.t On
the other hand, the question may be so uttered as to show that the
speaker expects affirmation and assent ; where we are obliged to insert
not, whilst the Greek says in the same sense i] yaq and »} yaQ oi, and the
Latin says ?ie also for nonne?X Job xx. 4. P^"!^ J^^^fti dost thou {not)
know this? This simple question is very seldom introduced by DK, and
* So in Greek and Latin, originally affirmative and then interrogative are ^,
nam (= nunc), an (probably, perhaps) ; originally negative, and then interroga-
tive, are oiix, fiT], ne, in German 7iicht wahr ? {not true ?) nicht ? {not ?)
■]• In a similar manner H^ what ? [why .?] indignantly uttered, expresses prohi-
bition under the form of reproachful expostulation. Cant. viii. 4, ill^Sln'rilS why
should yc rouse ? Job xvi. G, xxxi. 1. In Arabic, its negative force is very frequent.
\ See Hcindorf ad Plat. Phredr. 266. D. Heusinger ad Cic. de Off. iii. Vl.
§ 154. THE PREPOSITIONS. 265
then only when there is implied in it a disjunctive relation to something
that precedes, or haply, the Lat. an; Is. xxix. 16, 1 K. i. 27, Job vi. 12.
The disjunctive question {utrum — an7) is usually expressed under
the form Dit — n, also 13X1 — rt, Job xxi. 4; with emphasis on the first
question nXT — ^^^, xxxiv. 17, xl. 8, 9 ; but also with ix or before the
second clause (as in German and English) ; Job xvi. 3, Eccles. ii. 19.
This construction of the two particles nx — rt does not require opposition
of meaning in the clauses to which they belong, but often presents, in
the poetic parallelism and elsewhere (Gen. xxxvii. 8, Hab. iii. 8) merely
the repetition of the same question in different words ; the variation in
the second question lying more in the form of expression than in the
thought itself E. g. Job iv. 17, is man just before God, or (CN) is a man
pure before his Maker 7 vi. 5, 6, viii. 3, x. 4, 5, xi. 2, 7, xxii. 3. Hence,
in the same relation, the second member may be introduced by 1 (Job
X. 3, xiii. 7, XV 7, 8), or without any particle (xxii. 4). — Rarely, n occurs
again in the second member (Judges xiv. 15) where actual contrariety
is expressed; more commonly in a continued, twofold interrogation
(1 Sam. xxiii. 11). Also rare is DX in the first member.
The form of the indirect question is, in general, the same. After
verbs of inquiring, doubting, examining, the simple question takes rt
{whether), Gen. viii. 8, Ex. xvi. 4 ; and QX. Cant. vii. 13, 2 Kings i. 2 ;
the disjunctive question {whether — or) is expressed by CX — n, Gen.
xxvii. 21, and also by i^ — n. Num. xiii. 18. — The formula CX S'i'ii ^a
{who knoweth whethei — not, is also used affirmatively like the Latin
nescio an, Esther iv. 14.
For interrogative adverbs of place, time, &c. see § 150, 5.
The words nt (§ 122, 2) and Xisx wholly, then, serve to, give anima-
tion or intensity to a question (like noxs, ta?idem, Eng. ihe7i. now) ; as
xisx T^l"'"!'? ^vhat aileth thee now? quid tibi tandem est! Is. xxii. 1 ;
xisx rt*X where now? Job xvii. 15.
3. The affirmative answer is given, as in Latin, by repeat-
ing the predicate of the interrogative sentence ; Gen. xxvii. 24,
xxix. 6, Judges xiii. 11 ; the negative answer is ikb no, Gen.
xix. 2.
§ 154.
OF THE PREPOSITION'S.
1. The simple* prepositions, like the adverbs, originally de-
note for the most part physical relations, viz. those of space, and
are then used tropically of immaterial relations, as those of time,
* Among these yre reckon such forms as ''SSl?, I?'?^, which in themselves
considered are indeed compound words, but as prepositions they express only one
idea, and are thus distinguished from the comuounds under No. 2, e. g. ''JB^a
from before.
266 PART III. SYNTAX.
cause, &c. Those of place originally denote either rest in a
place, or motion from or to a place ; but in each class there are
some (more in the first than in the second), which take also the
signification of the other.
a) The most important prepositions of place are : —
«) Ofres^n a place, 3 in, by, at, h'S upon and over, mnPi under, "inx,
innx behind, after, "^i^h before, 153, nsb, ^1^2 before, opposite to, ^35*, n«
with (apud), by. near, nS3 , 153 (on the outside of near by) but especially
behind, about (i^iq>i), T^3 betioeen, 132? o?i the other side of beyond.
|i3) Of motion. '|T0 from, bx and h to, toioards, ^'S_ unto, — and also (from
the former class) 3 to {usque ad), b? iipon, towards.
b) Very many of the above-mentioned prepositions express also
relations of time, as 3 i7i, within, ']'0, bx, IS, &c.
c) Of those which denote other relations we may mention, 3 as
(113. "^23 according to), dS> together with. with. ^\^f , "^"l^bs besides,
if}b3 without, besides, 'j?'^, )^_'oh on account of 3:i^ (prop, as a reivard)
for, because.
2. The composition of these particles exhibits a great degree
of dexterity, and accuracy of discrimination, in expressing those
relations which are denoted by prepositions. Thus those of mo-
tion are set before others denoting rest, so as to express not only
a cliange of relation, but also the local one which was existing
previously to the change, or which follows as the result of it ;
(comp. in Fr. cle chez, cVmqjres.)* E. g.
a) With '\i2 : irii?'52 aioay from behind, "{""S^ out from between,
^Ti2 away from upon or above, D5''53, nx'a de chez quelqu'un,
nnriTp aivay from under.
b) With bx (more seldom) : "i-ini? b&« in behind or after ; b ^Mni
without, i. e. on the outside of, b Y'^T\12 bs forth without,
Num. V. 3.
Adverbs, moreover, which are compounded of prepositions,
take after them b (more seldom 'I'O), and thus again become pre-
positions. E. g. ^TCi (adv.) above, b bTQ (prep.) above, over,
nrfriia (adv.) beloiv, b nnn'a (prep.) below, under, b f'^ITQ (prep.)
without, isb (adv.) separately, aside, ]'52 lib (prep.) aside from,
besides.
* When the Hebrew says, he took the offering n3t5ail bsa from upon the altar
[away from the top of the altar), he presents the idea fully; while it is but haK
expressed iu the Fr. il prend le chapeau s^ir la table, the Germ, cr nimrnt den Hut
vom Tische weg, and the Eng. he takes his hat from the tabic ; the Fr. omitting one
relation, the Germ, and Eng. another.
§ 154. THE PREPOSITIONS. 267
This accessory preposition may also precede the adverbial form ;
e. g. T3^a= 1^ lib besides, ''l?^?^ without^ Syr. ^ r^^ '■>* "^ore
rarely it is wholly Avanting, as rinti^ for h nnpi^, Job xxvi. 5.
3. We will now present a few prepositions, — such as occur
most frequently and have the greatest variety of meaning, — with
their principal significations, in order to explain their construc-
tion with verbs (§ 140), and the most important idioms connected
with them.
_ a) 2, which has the greatest number and variety of significations,
denotes, 1) prop, rest in a place (fV), hence in with reference to time,
and to state or condition, as V"'^3) ni2;si"i3. niblTJa. — with reference to
a company, or number of individuals, among, e. g. D'^'i^? ? — with reference
to bounds or limits, within, as Q'''iS^3 xcithin the gates, — of high objects,
upon, as D'^p'iSa upon horses. Is. Ixvi. 20 ; rarely, it has these significa-
tions after verbs of motion = tig (like ponere in loco). The Hebrew
says «) to drink in a cup (for. to drink Avhat is in it). Gen. xliv. 5 (so in
Arabic and Chald., Dan. v. 2, iv noTrj^ioj, iv j^^fffw nlvtiv Xen. Anab. vi.
1, 4, 3, Ezra iii. 6, in ossibus bibere in Florus, French boij-e dans une
tasse); /5) in the manner, in the model or rule, for after the manner or
model (comp. iv rw vofxo), hunc in modum), as 's "i^TS according to the
command, 'a nsSJa according to the counsel of any one, iiJn^i^'iS ^iJiabsa
in {after) our image, after our likeness Gen. i. 26 ; ver. 27 and v. 1, 3,
Adam begat a son i^bss in^ijjna ; somewhat differently, Gen. xxi. 12,
in Isaac (pns';'3) = after Isaac shall thy seed call themselves. Deserving
of special notice are the passages, where ;') the grammarians assume
a so-called 2 essential, to be translated by as, tanqiiam (Fr. e»). Ex.
vi. 3, I appeared to Abraham, &c. "^^liJ isxa as the mighty God. Is. xl.
10, the Lord will come Pjns as a strong one. The most striking use of
it is before the predicate-adjective after the verb to be {= conduct ov
behave as), Eccles. vii. 14, in the day of joy 211:3 n;]ii be thou joyfid ;
Ex. xxxii. 22, thou knowest the people XmH S"ia "^S that they are evil;
Job xxiii. 13, 117x2 xsin he is one alone. (In Arabic this idiom is fre-
quent ; see Thes. Ling. Heb. p. 174.)
2. Nearness, vicinity (Lat. ad, apud), at, by, on ; nnsa = ev noxaftM,
by the river, Ezek. x. 15; '^S'^sa in the eyes of= before the eyes of one
(iV ocp&alfiolg, II. 1, 587). In this sense it frequently indicates motion
(Lat. ad), to, unto; differing, however, both from bx to, towards (where
the object is not necessarily reached), and from 1? unto, usque ad (with
the attainment of the object), namely where the act of touching tipon,
striking against, reaching unto and the like, is meant. Gen. xi. 4, a
* In the Syr. —ie '^.S^^, is a preposition, over, \^:^ — iiO an adv., above;
(see Hoffmann, Gram. Syr. p. 280 ima). The Hebrew iu like manner says "jab
from (a starting-point) onward, precisely the Lat. usque a, usque ex, comp. also
i7ide.
268 PART III. SYNTAX.
tower D7'3\B2 1l23x"i whose top may reach to heaven. Hence it expresses
the relation of verbs of motion (and others analogous to them) to their
objects, where in Lat. and Germ, verbs compounded with ad, in and an
are used. E. g. 3 tns to lay hold on, 3 553 to touch, 3 bsia to ask at,
to consult^ 3 N"!!? to call tipon, 3 nx'n to look upon, 3 S^iij to hearken to.
Verbs having the signification of the last two, often include the idea of
the pleasure or pain with which one sees or hears any thing. Gen. xxi.
16, I coidd not look upon the death of the child! Hence, in a tropical
sense, in respect to, on account of, our over, as 3 n?aia to rejoice over, i. e.
to have joy in a thing.
With the idea of vicinity, nearness, that of accompaniment, and of
help, instrumentality {with), readily connects itself Gen. xxxii. 11, loith
my staff {'^h'p'Oi^) I passed over this Jordan. Ps. xviii. 30. icith thee (~i3)
have I rushed upon troops. Verbs oC coming and going; with 3 (to come,
or go, with) express the idea of bringing ; e. g. Judg. xv. 1, Samson
visited his wife with a kid, brought her a kid. Deut. xxiii. 5.
— b) bs , signifies upon (ejil) and over (iinig) ; very frequently of mo-
tion (down, up) upon or over a thing. In the sense of (resting) upo7i,
(coming) itpon, it is used after verbs signifying to be heavy, i. e. burden-
some, afflictive (prop, to lie 'i<cavily upon), Is. i. 14, Job vii. 20, — to set or
appoint over {commission), as bs "ij5Q, — to pity, to spare, as bs DW
(prop, to look tenderly upon). With the primary idea is connected that
oi^ accession (conceived as a laying upon) and ol^ conformity, after, accord-
ing to (with reference to the rule or pattern, 7ipon which a thing is laid
to be measured or modelled), and o^ cause (comp. the Lat. ob, the Germ.
daro&. and the Eng. on account of), although. In the signification over.
it is often used with verbs o? covering, protecting, bs ■^03. b^ "jJJ (prop.
to make a covering, a shield, over) ; and also with those of kindred mean-
ing, as bs Dtibs to contend for one (prop, in order to protect him), Judg.
ix. 17. It is used for at, by, chiefly in cases where there is an actual
elevation of one of the related objects above the other, conceived as an
impending over; e. g. D^"] b? by the sea [Eng. on the sea] ; but also
where this is not the case, as i^ bs, like our on the side. Hence it
expresses the relation of motion to the object at which it terminates, —
to, towards, so that in the later Hebrew style and in poetry it is often
used for bx and b ; e. g. Job vi. 27, xix. 5, xxii. 2, xxxiii. 23.
_ c) '■'a (§ 102) expresses motion, removal, away from any thing. Its
fundamental signification is separation from a whole, derivation, descent.
As constr. state of the noun '"O part, it properly means part of, hence
off from, used at first with reference to the part which is taken from the
whole, — as to give, to take part of = from. Most clear is this funda-
mental signification when it expresses some (more rarely one) of ; e. g.
'iU'' '^5h-'!'3 (Ex. xvii. 5) some of the elders of Israel, D'lJ^a (Ex. xxix. 12)
soyne of the blood (Fr. du sang). It has the same signification when it
is connected (apparently pleonastic) with the words one. none, in the
often misapprehended idiom of the Hebrew and Arabic no7i ab uno, i. e.
not any one, not the least, prop, not even a part, a piece, the least bit,
of one. Lev. iv. 2. Deut. xv. 7, Ez. xviii. 10.
§ 154. THE PREPOSITIONS. 269
In its most common use, with reference to motion away from, it forms
the opposite ofbx, 1?, and is employed not merely after verbs which
express actual motion, as to depart [from), to flee {from), but also those
of kindred signification, as to be afraid, to hide, to beivare: comp. in Gr.
and Lat. auhumoi uno, custodire ab. Transferred to time, it may mean
either/ro??i (a time) o?i, in which case the reckoning is to be made from
the beginning, not from the end of the period specified (like ano rnxio?,
de node, from the coming on of night), as ?i^53^J3 , Job xxxviii. 12, from
the beginning of thy days onward; or next from., i. e. immediately after
(£| uQlaxov, ab itinera), as V'^PH^' ^^- ^^^^'^'^- 20, from (the moment of)
awaking. Gen. xxxviii. 24, n^iU'jn ^^^^9 «/'«'' '^'^ ^^P^^ ^f '^^"^^
months. Hos. vi. 2.
For the use of it to denote rest on Jie side of an object, where the
idea is that of near distance, or being just off from (the prope abesse ab,
pendere ex aliqua re), see § 150, 1. For its use in the expression of
comparison, see § 119, 1.
— d) bx , "i^N (prop, regions, directions, hence towards), denotes motion,
and also merely direction toxoards) with reference both to material
objects and the operations of the mind), whether one reaches the place
towards which the motion is directed, and even passes into it, or not.
In the former case it is equivalent to IS, e.g. WB-bx even unto his
mouth Job xl. 23; in the latter to T^iPi'^, e. g. nann-bs xia to go into
the ark.
It is certainly an unfrequent and improper use of this particle (though
sustained by unquestionable examples), when it is employed to denote
rest in a place at which one has arrived. Jer. xii. 12, they found Mm
Dian C^ia-bx by the great waters in Gibeon; dipan-bx at the place,
Deut. xvi. 6, 1 Kings viii. 30 ; "'nrt bx by the mountain, 1 Sam. xvii. 3.
Compare the Gr. a'c, k, for iv, e. g. eg Sofiovq ^ivnv, Soph. Ajax. 80. In
the Germ, zu Hause, zu Leipzig, this interchange has become the
established usage of the language ; [so in vulgar, but incorrect, Eng.
to home for at home.]
e) h (an abbreviation of bx, but more commonly used in the tropical
~ significations), to, towards; hence employed as a sign of the dative,
and also of the genitive of possession (§ 115), and then in the significa-
tion with respect to, on account of in behalf of . Such a dalimis commodi
is used pleonastically (chiefly in the language of common intercourse
and in the later style) after many verbs, especially in the Imperative;
e. g. :]l5 Tib go, get thee away, ?|b-nna fee (for thy safety) ; but also
as r^-i^•Qy\ be thou like Cant. ii. \l. It is a solecism of the later style
(frequent in the Syriac), when active verbs are construed with b instead
of the accusative, as b bDX, Lam. iv. 5.
Very often also, especially in poetry, it denotes rest in a place,—
hence at, or in, with reference to place and time ; as ^S'^^'^b on thy right,
a'nsb at evening ; [and condition, see lex. B, 3.] On the use of it after
passive and other verbs to denote the efficient cause or author, see
§ 143, 2.
270 PART III. SYNTAX.
/) 3 (as an adverb, about, nearlij), as a prep, as, like to, for denoting
similarity ; doubled, 3 — 3 as — so, and also so — as Gen. xliv. 18, in later
writers 3>1 — 3; according to, after, from the idea of conformity to a
model or rule ; as a designation of time, about (circa). Of the pleonastic
3, or Kaph veritaiis as the grammarians called it, there is no certain
example; it has, every where, the sense of comparison. It is true, indeed,
that :22J'23 is = 1:5x5 little, but it is prop, as a scrap; Neh. vii. 2. for he
was trax 'U'^J^S as a faithful man must be.
4. A preposition (like the negatives, § 152, 3) may be omitted
when the relation which it expresses is repeated, as e. g. in the
second member of the poetic parallelism. E. g. 3, is. xlviii. 14,
he ivill execute his will on Babylon (^5?^), and his power on
the Chaldeans (O^^iU? for 0^^1233). Hab. iii. 15, Job xii. 12. So
also ^, Job xxxiv. 10, Is. xxviii. 6 ; "jTa, Gen. xlix. 25, Is. xxx. ^ :
nnn, ixi. 7.
§155.
OF THE CONJUNCTIONS.
1. The Hebrew language, considered with reference to the
number of its conjunctions, frequently consisting of several words
combined, and its ability to form still others from most of the
prepositions by the addition of 11^5? and ""S (§ 104, 1, c), exhibits
no small degree of cultivation and copiousness compared with its
usual simplicity. But writers often neglect these means for accu-
rately expressing the relations of sentences and members of a
sentence, contenting themselves with less perfect modes of con-
nection ;* and hence the numerous significations which certain
favorite conjunctions have in the Hebrew (particularly 1, ""S,
"112351!), or at least by which they must be translated in our west-
ern languages, wliere we are not permitted (see No. 3) to retain
the loose and indefinite connections sometimes made by these
particles.
Of the most extensive application is 1, 1 (§ 104, 2):t
a) Properly and usually copulative (and), connecting single words
as well as whole sentences. When three or more words stand in con-
nection, it is used either before every one after the first (2 Kings xxiii. 5)
or before the last only (Gen. xiii. 2) ; rarely after the first only (Ps.
* Comp. § lOT, 1, Rem. § 147, Rem. 1.
f See Gesenius, Tlies. I. p. 393 seqq. for a more complete view of the use ol
Vav copulative.
§155. THE CONJUNCTIONS. 271
xlv. 9). In certain phrases it is commonly omitted, as yesterday (and)
the day before = heretofore, Ex. v. 8. The tone of animated description
or narration may also occasion the omission of it {conslriictio asyndeta) ;
as Judg. V. 27, at her feet he bowed, he fell, he lay. Job xx. 19, Cant. ii.
11, V. 6, Is. xxvi. 17.
As a connective oC words it is often explicative (like isque, et quideni).
1 Sam. xxviii. 3, i~i''3?'2l tra-ia in Ramah and (= namely) in his own
city, 2 Sara. xiii. 20, Amos iii. 11, iv. 10; even when the second idea is
subordinate to the first, and would properly be expressed as the genitive
after it (the "ev 8ta dvoTf of the grammarians); as Gen. iii. 16, / will
vudtiply '^pn'i 'r]3ha:y thy pain and thy conception, i. e. the pains of thy
pregnancy, — the pains connected with thy pregnancy.
When it connects sentences or parts of a sentence, it is either conlinu-
ative (so, then), hence placed before the apodosis, and after absolute desig-
nations of time (Gen. iii. 5, Ex. xvi. 6, Prov. xxiv. 27} ~n"'3 ^^^"^^ "^T^^
afterward, then build thy house ; or it expresses heightening, enhancement,
as Job V. 19 in si.v troubles he ivill deliver thee, yea in seven there shall no
evil befall thee; or even comparison (and so), Job v. 7 inan is born to
trouble, and so the sons of lightning soar on high, for, — just as these
( = birds of prey) fly up; xii. 11, xxxiv. 3, Prov. xi. 16, xvii. 3, xxv. 3, 25.
b) Adversative {and yet, ivhen yet) ; Judg. xvi. 15, how canst thou say
I love thee ""FIX 'pN J^abl and (yet) thy heart is not with me (i. e. when
yel), Gen. xv. 2, xviii. 13, Ps. xxviii. 3.
c) Causal {for, because) ; Ps. v. 12, let them ever shout for joy, because
{when, since) thou dost defend them. Is. xliii. 12, ye are my witnesses
Sx-i35<1 a7id /(am) God, that I am God. Gen. xx. 3.
d) Inferential {then, so then, therefore) ; Ez. xviii. 32, I delight not in
the death of him that dieth — ^^''llJrtT therefore turn ye. In this sense it
may stand even at the beginning of a sentence, when it implies an infer-
ence of some kind from circumstances already mentioned ; 2 Kings iv. 41,
and he said n'Op-mp^ then take meal; Ps. iv. 4, ^V^^ hnow then; ii. 6,
10, 2 Sam. xxiv. 3.
e) Final {in order that, that) ; in this sense chiefly with the cohorta-
tive or jussive (§ 127).
Of scarcely less extensive application are the two relative conjunc-
tions "iU3n and ''S = on, quod, quum, that, because, — running almost
parallel with each other in their significations, except that "I'iJX is at
the same time and radically a relative pronoun and takes prefixes, while
''S occurs as a conjunction far more frequently, and in a greater variety
of senses.
Both are prefixed, like quod, to a whole clause, standing in place of
an accusative, and governed by the preceding active verb as its object.
Before i^JN, indeed, is j)laced the accusative particle r.X ; Josh. ii. 10,
nin-i u:iSin~i;rN nx ^is:?^?^ we have heard it, that Jehovah hath dried
up, — more commonly ili3x ''SS^^, and still oftener "^s siSi'^ad. Hence
the following uses of "'S ; a) it is employed before words directly quoted,
like the Gr. on (very seldom IIJJX, 1 Sam. xv. 20) ; 6) it is iemporal =
oTf, prop, (at the time) that, (at the time) when, hence as, when, some-
272 PART III. SYNTAX.
times strongly distinguished from the conditional DX if (see, on this
point, the very instructive chap. Ex. xxi.). sometimes nearly approach-
ing to it, as in Job xxxviii. 5. comp. vs. 4 and 18 (^i^K here also seldom.
Lev. iv. 22, Deut. xi. 6) ; c) causal, eo quod, because, fully "^S "J?^ , n^ix ')?r ;
pivpterea quod, also /or = yuQ ; repeated ("'3 — "^s, Is. i. 29,30, "^Sl — "'3
because — and because, Job xxxviii. 20), Avhen more than one cause for the
same thing is assigned. Only "^3 is used, d) adversatively after a negation,
6m/ (on the contrary), — prop, but it is because ; e. g. thou shalt not take
a wife for my son from the daughters of the Canaanites — but thou shalt
go to my native land, =^for thou shalt go ; and also where negation is
only implied, e. g. after a question which involves denial (§ 153, 1, 2),
when it may be rendered nay but,— for surely («AAa yuQ), Mic. vi. 3, what
(injury) have 1 done to thee ? . . . .for surely I brought thee up, dec. Job
xxxi. 18. See on DX i3 below in No. 2. i.
2. We will now arrange the remaining conjunctions in the
order of their significations ; but, as many of them have several
meanings, the different uses of each will be given in connection
with it, where it is first mentioned. We must here confine our-
selves to a brief general notice, leaving the more complete view,
with the references and proofs, to the lexicon.*
a) Copulative : besides '] , 1 , the properly adverbial forms ca also,
and v|X, denoting accession, yea more, also, even, once combined
DSTiS'i and even also, Lev. xxvi. 44. The first is often used with
plural forms emphatically, to include all, e. g. D'!'?^ da both the two,
Vs ca all together. It also merely gives emphasis to the following word,
as Gen. xxix. 30, and he loved hryrT^^rui Rachel (not, also Rachel)
more than Leah ; 1 Sam. xxiv. 12. — "'S Cjx is prop, add that, hence not
to mention, nedum, — according to the connection, much more, much
less.
b) Disjunctive : especially ix or (etym. free will, choice, hence prop.
vel, but also aut exclusive, 2 Kings ii. 16). Sometimes it stands elliptic-
ally for ■'S iX or (be it, it must be) that, Is. xxvii. 5 ; — hence the transi-
tion to the conditional sense, if but if Ex. xxi. 36 (the LXX. iav di,
Vulg. sin autein), if haply, 1 Sam. xx. 10, which has been contested
without reason (comp. on '^\^^, § 150, 3, Note). Repeated, lit — ii<,
sive — sive, it is the same as DX — DX.
c) Temporal : ^'3 , "iCX = ore, quum (see above), for which more
rarely is used the conditional particle DX (Is. iv. 4, xxiv. 13) ; 1? , "HUX 15 ,
13 IS until that, also CX IS , DX lUX IS until that when, 1? also during,
so long as, lira, the same, iiijx ''^inx after that, txa (for "im txa)
si7ice that, nnoa and D'lis before, n^^i;? for iiax M^^I? before (Pe.
cxxix. 6).
* See especially the Hebrew and English Lexicon, translated from the Latin ol
Oesenius, by Dr. Robinson, fifth edition, 1854. — Tb.
§ 165. THE CONJUNCTIONS. 273
d) Causal: (besides "^S and nr.s, No. 1. e, c) n-^x 13 bs because,
or merely ■)? b?, with the omission ofn^X (§ 104, 1, c), Ps. xlii. 7, xlv. 3.
•jB-bs-iS (Gen. xviii. 5, xix. 8, 2 Sam. xviii. 20), and ")3-by niTN (Job
xxxiv. 27), == 13 13-b?, niax 13"b?;*"im 13^ b'j, ^wx ninix bs.
prop, for the circumstances that =^for this cause that, and emphatically
-lias ni'lis bs bs/or ^/t/s very cause that, "iffix -liinSiB, (prop, oti the
account, that), iiax "|?V "^3 nnn {therefore that), eo quod, because,
13 aj^S the same (prop, as a reward that),
e) Final : "iias -jl^^ab <o fAe end that, "iirx lias? in order that (also
causal), 1 that ^= in order that (No. 1, e), perhaps b, 1 Kings vi. 19.
With a negative force : bx, "JQ that not, lest (§ 152).
/) Conditional: principally DX and >tb (rarely ^^^), if The first
(which is also a particle of interrogation, § 153, 2) is purely conditional,
leaving it uncertain whether what is expressed by the verb is actually
so, is actually done, or not (rather the former^, — as, if I do — have done —
shall do ; on the contrary, ibf expressly implies that it is not so, is not
done (if I should do — had done), at least that it is very uncertain and
even improbable. Hence fiit niay properly stand where lb might also
be used (Ps. 1. 12, cxxxix. 8, Hos. ix. 12), but lb cannot be used for DX .
Especiallj' in solemn asseveration, expressed under the form of condi-
tional imprecation, DX is always employed ; as Ps. vii. 4-6, init3s"DX
'^T^ Ci^'^1 — nxT if I have done this — then let the enemy persecute me, &c.
The speaker assumes it as possibly and even actually the case, that he
has done this or that, in order that he may offer himself for the severest
punishment, should it prove to be so. Ps. xliv. 21, Ixxiii. 15, cxxxvii. 5.
These particles (ex and >ib) retain their distinctive character when
combined with negatives, as Xb DX, Stb^ib, ^blb. Of DX it is to be
remarked, moreover, that after forms of swearing, e. g. MJtT^ Ti as Jeho-
vah liveth, it has the effect of a negative particle (hence Kb DX is
affirmative) ; 1 Sam. xiv. 45, 2 Sam. xi. 11, xx. 20. There is here an
ellipsis, which is sometimes actually .supplied, as in 2 Sam. iii. 35 ;
DX CjiOi-i rr2') Dinbx ib-nu5Si nb so do God to me, and more also, if—.
Hence, in general, after verbs of swearing, adjuring, DX has the force
oinot (Cant. ii. 7. iii. 5). and elsewhere in the poetic style. Judges v. 8.
Is. xxii. 14. Respecting ix, i3, "iilJX, which sometimes a^^sume the
character of conditional particles, see No. 2, b, and No. 1, c, b.
g) Concessive: DX. with the Perf, even 7y(:= though) I am, Job
ix. 15, with the Tmpf {though one were), Is. i. 18, x. 22 ; b? (ibr "iii;x bs;.
although, Job xvi. 17 ; ^3 Da even when, although.
h) Comparative: "illJS3 as, quemadmodum, with 'S in the second
member, as — so, Is. xxxi. 4, Iii. 14, 15. — "^1^X3 may be omitted in the
* See on these much disputed groups of particles, Gesenius, Thes. II. p. 682.
f !lb , fully -written X>lb , is originally not different from xib , xb , not ; hence,
uttered as a question, it became first an optative particle {^ 136, 2), as rtini ^b
nonne vivat ? for 0 that he were alive, and then a conditional pai'ticle, if he were
alive (implying tl.e contrary).
18
274: PART III. SYNTAX.
protasis, Is. Iv. 9, Ps. xlviii. 6, and "jS in tiie apodosis, Obad. 15. Exact
conformity is expressed by 'V nsS'bs in all points as, Eccles. v. 15.
i) Adversative : (see on the adverbs. § 150, 3). Decidedly belong
here, ''3 OSN only that ^= but, nevertheless, and the difficult combination
ax ■'S, prop, that if , for if most frequently hut if in the sense of i3
explained under No. 1, e, d, but united with DX to form a connection
with the verb. Ps. i. 1, happy the man rvho walks not (if he walks not)
in the counsel of the ungodly .... 2, but {/"(DS ^'3) his delight is in ....
Then simply b^it, Ps. i. 4, Gen. xxxii. 29 ; but if but when = unless,
Gen. xxxii. 27, and merely but = except (after a negative), xxxix. 9,
xxviii. 17.
k) On the interrogative particles, see § 153, and
Z) The optative particles, above under letter /.
3. A certain brevity and incompleteness* of expression (see
No. 1) appears in this among other things, viz. that instead of
the compound conjunction, by which the relation is fully ex-
pressed, may be used one or the other of those composing it.
Thus instead of the full form "IT^S? 'pj^ on the account, that= be-
cause, we have the shorter ]?!;' or ItOJ} ; instead of "^tDi^S as (conj.),
3 Is. Ixi. 1 1, and "ITIJ^ Ex. xiv. 13, 1 Kings viii. 24.
4. This brevity of expression is sometimes carried so far,
that the conjunction, which is required to show the relation of
one sentence or part of a sentence to another, is omitted alto-
gether. This occurs,
a) In conditional clauses : Gen. xxxiii. 13, should one drive
them hard, they looiild die, — for, if one should drive, &c. Job
vii. 20, (if) I have sinned, what have I done unto theel Gen.
xlii. 38.
6) Where comparison is expressed : Ps. xiv. 4, Dlnb ^bpx iTS!^ ^bDJ?
who devour my people (as) they ivould eat bread, prop, (as)
those who eat bread. Job xxiv. 19, drought and heat bear
off the snow-water, IS^Ifin biXTT (so) Sheol (those who) sin.
Jer. xvii. 11.
c) In members which are usually dependent on the relative con-
junctions. Gen. xii. 13, say PK Tihil! thou art my sister,
commonly PVK "'tlhs "iS. Ps. ix. 21, [that] they may learn,
* More rare is pleonasm, or au unnecessary fulness of expression ; e. g. DX "'S ,
for if, Ex. xxii. 22, conip. old Gemi. wctut, dass (prop, if it is that) and old Eng.
if that. On the contrary, a degree of pleonasm in the particles is quite character-
istic of the Chaldee ; e. g. "''n"bnp~b3 (German «Wdieweil) wholhjfor-that = be-
cause, X^'i'^~h'yp~h'3 just for this = therefore. Emphatic, not pleonastic, is the repe-
tition of the conjunction in '{SJ^ZA "S^ because, even because, Lev. xxvi. 43.
— — §156. THE INTERJECTIONS.— — --^— - 27-5
they are men. Is. xlviii. 8, for I knew, thou art utterly faith
less. Ps. xvii. 3, / have purposed, my mouth shall not sin.
In all these cases, the second member stands properly in the
accusative ; comp. § 142, 4, Rem. 2.
§ 156.
OF THE INTERJECTIONS.
The interjections which correspond to our ah! oh! alas!
woe! expressing denunciation as well as lamentation (f^riil!, '''ii?,
■^in), are connected with the object of the threatening or lamen-
tation either by the prepositions b?, bii, b, or without any inter-
vening particle ; as IDb lix qcoe to us ! ""iil ''in icoe to the people !
Is. i. 4 ; '^nx lin alas, my brother! 1 Kings xiii. 30. — On the
construction of nsfl with suffixes, see § 100, 5.
A. THE PER.
NOMINATIVE OP THE
PRONOUN, OR
SEPARATE PRONOUN.
Singular.
1. com. ^iDDJ^, in pause "j
^'dS^ ; 'iii; , in pause I /.
2. <
rm. nn» (riK), in-"
pause nri^
/. ri5< (^m'prop.
^ffl
3.
m, Kiin
/. i^'^n
Plural.
1. com. ilDriDiJ; (il5ri3),
* thou.
he.
she.
> we.
/•
• > > we.
rm. UU, iVSih
3. J
f. in, nsn
/Aey.
ACCUSATIVE OF THE
VERBAL SUF-
A.
Simple Form.
me.
!?I , ft— , in pause ft^
(^— ) ^ <ftee.
^n, 1; W^ (ti), i;K.^_
H; »n— ; n- *cr.
T T T V
il3 ; il5^ ; 13^ (no*) tw.
D5, Di- )
15' 1?-' >
(Dfl), D; D-, D^,l
i:Q^* (eos)
(eas)
you.
> them.
* The forms with an asterisk are exclusively po-
276
SONAL PRONOUN.*
PRONOUN, OR
FIX.
B.
With D Demon-
strative.
not used.
iinj^, il3^, (13)
T V
aot used.
not used.
GENITIVE OP THE PRONOUN, OR
NOMINAL SUFFIX (PRON. POSSESSIVE).
With Nouns Singular.
''— my.
S , S— , in pause "j
iin,i; ^n^, i(ri) ^i*
[^ejics ^ suus.
Ti ; H— ; In— Acr.
T T T T
^15; il5^; (^15^) our.
?> 15-' >
D5
15' 1?
your.
dri; D-
T
> their.
B.
With Nouns Plural and
Dual.
^ — my.
thy.
r-, 1-, iin^.* his.
tV^ her.
^5h!L
our.
your.
>■ their.
etical, and those in parenthesis are of rare occurrence.
277
B.
REGULAR
Kaij.
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
Perf. 3.m.
bt2pp*
^^15*
"• T
bpp*
3./.
inbtig*
mns*
^^pp?*
nbtDp*
2.m.
nb^j:*
T : -"T
^b§)??*
nb^p *
2./.
'^M
ri"5?
^^^1??
nS^p
1. c.
"Tibtsp
'^1^??
'^^Sp?
^nb^p
Plur. 3. c.
^%P.
: IT
'Sipp?
iibtpp
2.7W.
Dnb^i?*
Dnins*
dPib^p?
DiDb'^P
2./.
IPi^'^P
i^?i?
I^^^P?
I^^^^P
1. c.
^3i^l?
: — T
^i^^P?
^Spp
Inf.
bbp*
btJpri*
bpp*
Inf. absol.
biti^*
bbp?,bbj5n*
b^p, bbp *
Imp. w.
bbp*
xi^*
btign*
bpp*
/
^btip*
^ini*
"^PE^*
^bt3p='
Plur. m.
^btip
^ids)
iibtipn
^bt?p
/.
^jV^l?*
{15753*
nDbtspn*
T : "(t •
n;bS)p *
Impf. 3.m.
bbp^*
1^3^*
bpE?*
bpp'*
3./.
bbpn
insn
bti]3n
bt?pn
2. m.
bbpn
nn3n
bts^n
bppFi
2./.
"bppn*
^nniri*
'btpp^n*
'btf pn '
1. c.
bt:p^^
i^P^
bpp^
bppti
Plur. 3. OT.
^btpp;-
snip':
^bpjs":
^btop:^
3./.
nib^pri*
nrabn*
njbtipn*
TObfepri*
2. 7W.
5b^pri
"^i^in
5bto]3n
"^^btopn
2./.
nib^n
riDbtJpn
T ; ••It •
nsbrspn
1. c.
''bbpp
"l^??
^t?)$?
^'^"^12?
Impf. shortened
(Jtwsiue.)
Part.
bttp*
113
•• T
bttpa*
btsp5?*
.^..^.'^R!...
278
VERB. §§ 42—54.
PUAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
HITHPAEL.
btDp*
nytjpri*
nb^^pri*
^b^ppji
nbt:pn*
^5§p6*
nSt:pn
iiiS^pn
^btppn
Dr)b^p6
nbtip^ri*
nb^pnn*
ni^pnri
■]nS"^pnri
iiDblpinri
btojD*
b'tppn*
b^t:pn*
bt:i?M*
btopmn^
wanting
^yt)pri*
wanting
riDbtjpn*
'^btaprirr
rabt)pnr;=
btDp^*
b^t:p^ *
b::p^*
bt2pn^ *
btipn
b'tppn
^Ppi)
bt?priri
btopin
b^t:pn
btipn
bt:pnn
^btapn*
^b^tipn*
'bppn*
^btDpinri=-
- b'^pi<
b't?p5<
^^P^
'^^PP^
^btap-^
iib^tjp
^bpp;
^btoph'^
nDb^pn*
J^jbtjpn*
rob^pn*
rijbtjpnri*
^iiStDpn
^b-^ppn
tppn
"^bt:prri
HDbSpn
^pP!?^
HDb^pn
T : — ': T
nrbSptiP
b^j^5
b^t)J53
^^I?5
^'■^pb?
^^i?:*
b^jDi:*
b"t?p)-3*
b^p^*
btapr^j*
279
0. REGULAR VERB
Suffixes /or 1 Sing. 2 Sing. m. 2 Sing. f. 3 Sing. m.
F^n..Kal.S.m. ^?Hbp ^bti]^ tjb^I? ''^^l
3./ ^pinHbl? ^t??biD tinHb]? -"^I^gj^j
1. c. — ^'Pi^^I? T^^^^I? 'i"'^^^!?
PZwr. 3. c. ^p^HbjD ^l^bttp
1. c.
2. /. ^?^nbt:p
!rj^D^t2p Ij^i^t:!? ^n^D^Jt:]?
II! Ill m ^^m
Imp, ITaZ.
^??^B
^nHbg
Impp. Kal. 3. wj.
3. 7n.
with Nun demonstrative ,
Plur. 3. m.
^n^b'bp';
Peet. Piel'
''PJ^P
^btap
^^?P
ibtflj?
280
1
WITH SUFFIXES
. §§57—61
•
3 Sing.f-
1 P/wr.
2 PZwr. wi.
2Plur.f,
3 PZwr. m.
3 Plur.f.
^^?1?
^5t:p
T t):
t35bt:f
l?^^l?
Dbt:p
T t);
1^?)?
nnHbi?
iiinbbp
^?^^?I?
I?^^?I?
Drjbbp
Vf^P.
nnbt:)D
^Dnb^i?
Dnbt:p
V)^\^
trvba^^
iirnbtii:
D'Pl^^l?
T^^^l?
O'^^^i?
D^^nbt:]?
l?'^^^l?
D^nbts]^
1^nbt:j:3
^]iib*t2j:5
Di^bt:]?
1?^^?1?
D^bt:]^
1^^?1?
n^ribt:p
T : — *:
^iD^nbt:]?
D^nbt:]:
I^nbt:!^
ni!ba]?
05^3^^!?
15^5^^!?
n^iDbt:]?
I^^^^l?
'^^^1?
^5?PI?
dibtjp
1?^^1?
«=^?1?
I^^i?
T : 'T '^
^3?r^i?
°5?^l?
St:p^ )
^^^^i??
^?^?I?'
15^?!?:
Dbtpi^':
1^?i?r
nsbpp^
^sHbp:
T : ': •
iis^b'bj^^
d^^bt))?;'
1?^^?!?"
Qilbtpl?^
i^'^^i?:
y^btfip
^5b^t?p
t35^^)?
1?^^P
DbtDp
i^^i?
281
D. Verb PE
Guttural
. §63.
KAL.
NIPHAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
Perp
3.m.
1)J5>
^2$^ *
T'ayn*
i7j3?n=^
3./.
m/jy
m7J5>D *
ni^7j5>n
riTjyn*
2.m.
ni7j5>
ni705?5
ni7:j5>n
ni7j3>r)
T : — T
T : — t: it
2./.
ni/25>
ni7^5)D
rn535?n
r\rQ:^n
1. c.
^rn:a3?
^ni7jyD
^riTjyn
■nTj5>n
Plur
.3. c.
ill'/SS?
^17:3?3
in^7j3?n
in7jyn
2.m.
Dm^j3>*
Dni7jyD
c:rn7j5>n
Dn'i^jyn
2./.
1S?Ti2?*
WW-
■jnn^^yr;
"pTjjn
1. c.
: — T
^Dl^JJD
^377jyn
: -jt: IT
Inf.
iw*
1533>n*
T7J5>n*
152 3>n
Inf.
ahsol.
T
-:r
^'5-2>;rj*
Imp.
m.
lb?* ptn*
77j5>n*
i7j:>n*
/•
"7?? ^pm
^i53yn
^7^/2yn
wanting
Plur. m.
mi siptn
^i^iyn
^-i^^js^n
/•
nra?* ^l^Itl*
T : •• T ••
T : ••-: 1-
Impf.
3.m.
"I'^s?"* Pin;.*
112T *
• -:r
— TIT
3./.
"i53?n ptnn
n7jyn
i^7;]:5>n
173 2>n
2.m.
2./.
^i7jJn
i^7j>r,
i7:35>n
^i^7:iyn
TO^n*
1. c.
I'^S'??* Pltl¥^
tj:>5^
"I'7J3?J^
— T IT
Plur
. 3.m.
TO?;* ^pm:]*
^""^?,T
3./.
2.m.
ina^n ^pTnn
^i7j3>n
^i^7j5>n
ni2yir\
2./.
T : -: 1- T»: — v: iv
n5i7j5?n
n5i7j5>n
T : ••-: 1-
T : — T IT
1. c.
153^5 pmj.
17J5>3
112^11
Impf. .
ihorten
ecZ {Jussive."^
"l'-??-
Part
. aci.
T:a:??j*
1)2^)2*
^V
17J3>5 *
pass.
T
282
E. Verb
AYIN GuTT
URAL. § 64.
KAL.
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
PUAL.
HITHPAEL.
ntsntj
ntiniTD
nsnn
msnin
n^nnnti
ntsn^ij
nt:ni23
n5^:=i
niD^ia
ns-nmni-;
'Tit^nis
^nt:r!T233
^nsnn
^ni-is
TOnntin
^r^m*
^tiTOD*
^Dnm
^iDnh
^^^nnn
Dnt:nT2j
Dnt:nT2J5
un^^iL
Dniih
fins^snn
: — T
1^?^^
^3?^^
: — T : •
TO^n*
wanting
TO^"*
nitpnii
T : — T •
T : — T
T : — T : •
TO'*
TO^
TO^?*
nstinidh
nitsnujn
riDS-inn
ffisnnn
nsiinnn
^Dniijn
iit:n^n
^s^nn
^s^hn
iii^isnn
n^tinirn
nDt:ni2n
riD^Dnnn
niinhri
riDiDnnrin
tinir?
^:^5?
TO?
TO^?
impf. with suff. ^ntsnp;^
T
t:nT2JD
TO?*
TO?*
TO'^?*
283
F. Verb
LAMEDH
KAL.
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
Perf. 3.m.
nbia
nbuJD
nbTiJ*
3./.
nnbia
nnbuji
nr(^i3i
2.m.
nnb^ia
nnb^irs
nnb"^
2./.
nnbiij *
Pinb'^iji*
nrib'ir *
1. c.
^TiP^i
^nnb'Ti]
''nn^j
Plur. 3. c.
\rtt
^nbiri
iirib'ia
2.m.
Dnnbuj
Dnnbir^
annbir
2./.
1. c.
Inf.
nbiB*
rt>m*
nbia*
Inf. absol.
— T
nb^p*
nbia*
Imp. m.
nbifl*
nb^n*
nbta*
/
^nbtij
^nb^ii
^nbiB
Plur. m.
iiriS^
iinStiri
sinS^a
/.
ninb""-©
T : — :
T : ~ T •
ininlir*
Impf. 3.m.
nbuj^*
nbis^*
nbis^'
3./.
nbirh
nb¥r.
nbirri
2. m.
nbi^n
nb^n
nbirn
2./.
^nbirn
^nb^n
^nWn
1. c.
nSi25x
nSiin
nb^r^^
Plur. 3. OT.
^nbiij^
iinbiJS''
^nb^''
3./.
niinb'icn*
ninbyn*
nDn^u:n*
2. m.
"^ribtan
'^rib^n
?rib^ri
2./.
nsnb'irn
riDnb'isn
TOnS'^n
1. c.
" nbir?
— T-
" "nbTij?
Impf. shortened
(jMS5Jve)
Impf. tm7A (Si{/.
^snbuj'^
Part. aci.
nViD'*
nbtsD
nbtfiS3*
pass.
mbTi:*
— T
284
Guttural.
§ 65.
PUAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
HITHPAEL.
n)>ifi
n^bm*
rbm
nbnw*
nn^
nn^HTijn
nnb^'n
nnbmr"!!
Ttnim
nnb'iin
nnb'ujn
nnbriisn
nhfiz:*
nrib'iiin*
nnbiir;*
r\r<frmti*
^rH^-i
^rinHiiiiri
'^nnbizin
^rinfniiin
^fi^
^n'^b'iiri
iinbujn
^nbnirn
Dnny
nnnbi^n
Dnnbirn
nnnbrnrn
1P}nbtDri
:— : T
■jnnbnirri
tT'b^^n*
nbnirn*
"nb^ri*
nbirn *
"-•• : T
nbuin*
nbmrn*
wanting
wanting
iinbnir;
njnHii^n
njn^'npn*
riiiTr''
n^bir^*
nbiij''
nbnifl^* !
nls^n
n^b^h
nbirn
nbnujn
n^dn
n^bi^n
nb^n
nbniin
^nb^n
^n^biiJn
^nb^n
^nbni^n
ny^^
n^b^i^^^
rii^k
nbnirjj^
^nlsi:^
iin^bla^
iinbuj''
^nbniij^
nsn'jlrn
nsnbujri*
nsnblzjn
nin^nuj'n*
'^nbuin
^n^b'^n
"^nbujri
iinbn^n
ninlsiiJn
nsnb'i^n
nDnJTijp)
nin^nuJn
nbiri
n^biw
— :t
" '^ibnir?
nbuj^
rrbm*
nbica
T : T
nbnpa ♦
285
G. Verb
AYIN Dou-
KAL.
NIPHAL.
Perf. 3. m.
nD*
nD3*
3./.
2. m.
2./.
niSD
ninDD
1. c.
•^n^no
^niSDD
Plur. 3. c.
JQD
^ICD
2. m.
dnlsD
DnisD?
2./.
1. c.
Inf.
nb*
nisn*
Inf. ahsol.
T
ni&n*
Imp. m.
nb*
n&n*
/•
^^D*
^n^n*
Plur. m.
^no
^ntsri
/•
nj^no*
T V — •
'
Impf. 3. m.
ID^*
no"'*
ntD^*
3./.
nbn
nbn
n&n
2.OT.
son
ntDFi
s&n
2./.
'^aSn*
^ni3n*
■^non*
1. c.
ibi^
nsj^
^^J^
Plur. 3. m.
^IlO^
5)35)''
i^nD^
3./.
n^^raon*
n^ntDD
ns^nsn*
2.m.
^mon
nsn
^laon
2./.
1. c.
T V \ :
nb3
T
t
' nb?
Impf. with Vao cons.
noy*
Impf. with Suff.
'?l^r
Part. ac<.
nnio
n&5*
f>a5s.
T
286
BLED (5>3>).
§67.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
POEL.
POAL.
ncn*
nwn*
nnio*
nnSo*
nnDi-i*
n:aD^in*
ronio
nnniD
ninon*
nino^n*
nnnio
nnniD
ninDii
ni:iD^n
nnniD
niiio
"riiicn
^niiD^n
^nnn'^D
^nnniD
iQon
^SD^n
^nnio
^nnio
dt-iiscn
DM^D^n
dnnnSo
cnnniD
siiiipq
iiiiipiin
ncn*
•■ T
np^n*
nniD
nsi'D
non*
nniD
wanting
wanting
j^rl^n*
riDnSio
no^*
np^ np^h*
(np.;^) niio;^
nnio^
son
no^n
nnlDD
nnicn
s&n
np^n
nsioFi
nnion
"^aon*
^SD^n*
^nnion
''nnicn
npi5
np^5<
niioi^
niioi^
sq6^
!l^D^^
iinniD^
^nnio^
nrmcn*
nriDiin*
nDiiiori
riDnniori
^l^DD
ii^iD^n
^niion
^nnion
nr:?iDri
TO^^Dsin
nsnnion
nDn£icn
np5
ip^D
^^^
nnio?
^^.^y
^?|pr
(D5^P^)
'?=i?'io;'
=15^*
T
niiog
T :
287
H. Verb
PE NUN
(■}l). § 66.
KAL.
NIPHAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
Perf. S.m.
i2J:;5
i2:r.5*
ir^^fi*
i2:r.n*
3./.
ni2J53
ni2j^Bn
ni233ri
2. m.
ni235D
n;2JBn
m2:Bn
2./.
ni2J3D
nmti
ni2JBn
1. c.
Plur. 3. c.
regular
^ri-jpBri
^i2j'^Bn
^i2J5ri
2.m.
cinirsD
Dni2:5n
Dniij-in
2./.
"p^ii?
IPl'^^ri
"p^sn
1. c.
ilil^lp
iiDi^Bri
^:"i2:Bn
: - \
Inf.
m^a*
m^r^
^^^Ti*
i2jan*
Inf. absol.
^i-nj
T •
i2j^ar]*
Imp. wi.
m*
m^n
i2jan*
Plur. m.
^i25i3n
in2:^Bn
wanting
/.
nj^l
n3i2j5sn
T : "T •
n3i2:3n
T : •• —
Impf. 3. wi.
^a^*
i2j:^r
^^-h *
12Jr*
— ..
3./.
2. m.
i2J^rin
i2j'^an
i2jan
i2japi
2./.
"^•in
^uj^an
^iran
1. c.
Plur. 3. m.
regular
125a«
3./.
2. m.
n5i2J3n
iiuj'^Bn
2./.
1. c.
MBn
njirBri
— •.
Impf. shorted
(Jussive)
^3^*
Part, ac^
v::^
i2:m*
12:^^)2*
izja^j*
paw.
T
288
I. Verb PE
ALEPH
(«3). § 68.
1
KAL.
NIPHAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
Perf. 3. m.
— T
^^W
^'?5jn*
bs«n*
— t: it
Like the Verb Pe
Guttural, in Paradigm D.
Inf.
Inf. dbsol.
T
bbjJri
b^S5<n
• -: 1-
— t: IT
Imp. m.
bbi«*
bsxn
b55<n
Plur. m.
ETC.
ETC.
wanting
/.
T : -:
FuT. 3. m.
3./.
• -:r
— •nrr
2. m.
bsi^n
2./.
^biDi^n
ETC
ETC.
ETC.
1. c.
bsi^*
Plur. 3. m.
^biDj^^
3./.
riibSkn
2.m.
^b35<n
2./.
r^3bD^^n
1. c.
"bs^D
iMPF. Fat) cons, b'yi^y n/9&<^^
*
Part. ac/.
b^5&5
T
b5i^5
T V.IV
b^ii553
• -; 1-
b5i^53
r t; IT
19
289
K. Verb
PE YODH
KAL.
NIPHAL.
Perf. 3. m.
1^^
ntijt*
3./.
ro^i3
2.m.
r.niBiD
2./.
nrnijis
1. c.
regular.
^niiBls
Plur. 3. c.
iini23l3
2. OT.
cirQi2Ji3
2./.
iriniBia
1. c.
^iim '
Inf.
nn^*, it
)*:
nirtin*
Inf. dbsdl.
T
Imp. m.
ji
nir*
OT*
nir^n*
/
^niD
^iijn^
^np^n
Plur. m.
^n-jj
iiir^^
^nir^n
/•
•^J^S
^3121';
T ; "T •
Impf. 3. m.
mi'i*
IIJT"^*
2123^*' *
3./.
i^n
^^■n
nir^n
2. ?n.
nii:n
iiJTn
nir^n
2./.
^nirn
''■aji'Ti
^^Tasin
1. c.
n^i^
^2*1^5^
niij^x*
Plur. 3. 7w.
^2123^
^•;2J-l'^^
^n^^^
3./.
HDniBn
T : — •
T : "T •
2. m.
^mrn
^irn^n
Antrim
2./.
T ; — ••
nj^n^n
T : "T •
1. c.
^^.5
^n^p
"T-
Impf. shortened (Jussive)
Impf. wiiA Fau cons. I^^ill *
Part, ac^
n^^
ni2jl3*
pass.
nv^j;:
290
•^3 (orig. "13).
§69.
L. Verb prop
.PEY0DH(^5). §70.
HIPHIL.
nOPHAL.
KAL.
HIPHIL.
■ s^in*
sujin*
nt:^
n^t2^n*
ni^irir;
nn-i^^n
nn^ti'^n
nn^in
nn^^n
ro'^^ri
nniiJin
nmr^n
nnti^n
''riiuiin
^nnuj^n
regular.
^rinr)^n
iin^iBin
^nip^n
ia^ti^n
dnniijin
Qnn^^n
dnn'D^r!
inni2:in
•nn^^n
I^^^'D
iiii^in
^Di^^n
^i^'^'D
n^irin*
nir^n*
nb^
n^^ti^n*
n^ujin,ni2jin*
T
nt:^ri*
'2m*
nt3^
st:^n*
^■^^m
^nt:^
^n^D^n
^n^TO
wanting
^ni^^
iQ^D^n
^??§:
HDin^^ri
i^iav*
nw*
^^hi*
2^t2^'' *
s^irin
n^^n
ut2^n
n^t^'Ti
n^ujin
niij^n
nt2^n
i^ti^n
^n^Tuin
^nu:^n
^nt:^n
^a^tb^n
n^iri^^
n^^!j<
nt:^}j5
n^t:^j!<
^n^Si-^
iairr
liti'^''
^n^t:'"'
n^niDin
riDnuj'^n
fflntb^ri
nin-j^n
ifi-^ujin
^nuj^n
^nt:^n
^n^D^n
nin^^n
nsn^^in
n^n^^ri
nsn^^n
a^isiD
112:^3
nt:^p
^'^".3
nirv*
nt:^^*
sici^i*
nm,
T5ii
n^'Tfii'a*
nu:^7j*
its'-^
n^t3^)j
T
291
M. Verb AYIN VAV
KAL.
NIPHAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
Perf. 3.m.
Dp*
DipJ*
D^pn*
Dp>in*
3./.
n^^l*
™p5*
n^^pn*
tl')2pTl*
2.WI.
^^1*
ni/^^pD*
riis]"pri*
ni^^n*
2./.
piP12
mi-^^pD
nii2^pn
n^jp^n
1. c.
^p>^&
^no2^p:i
^in^is^pn
•^ri-iip^n
Plur. 3. c.
^^I?
^^ip5
il7J^pn
ii:ap^n
2.7W.
Qp)^12
Dr)i-2^p5
l30'^''^Tn
Dn^^p^n
2./.
15?I2
",ni7j^p3
TT^i'^'pn
in^jp^n
I.e.
iii^^p
^Di^^pi
^i'^'pn
i!D>9l^n
Inf.
mp*
Dipn*
D^pfl*
Dp^n*
Inf. aJsoZ.
Dip*
D^pn*
Dpn, D^pn
*
Imp. m.
D^p*
Dipn*
t=K*
/.
^53^p*
^52ipr;*
^5a^pn*
PZwr. m.
^^'J^j:
ii^^^pn
^)2-ptl
wanting
/.
™j5*
nyqft]
•^2?K
Impf. S.m.
D^p;*
Dip: *
DV*
'•T
Dpi]^*
3./.
D^pn
Dipn
D^pn
Dp^n
2.OT.
D^pn
DIpPl
D^pn
Dp^n
2./.
^?^^pn*
^32ipri*
^12^pT\
^53p^n
1. c.
D^pjJ
Dlpi?
D^p«
Dp1i5
PZar. 3. m.
^^Jlp^^
^■aip:
si^-'p;
^^p^^
3./.
rimpT}*
n^/jpn
n;5;pn*
njap^n
2.m.
^"a^pT)
ii?jipn
iiri^pn
"^tjpiin
2./.
nr^a^pn
riD^jpn
nj^spn
n;53piin
1. c.
mp5
D^p?
D^P5
Dpiii
Impf. shortened
dp;*
OK*
Impf. ici/^ 1 cows
• t3p^j,Dp;v
t3)??r
Impf. ici^A <Siz^.
'???T:*
^???'r? : *
Part. act.
dj5*
Dip5*
D^p53*
Dgii^a*
pass.
D^p*
292
(•&). §72.
N. Verb AYIN YODH {<^). §73.
PILEL.
PULAL.
KAL.
NIPHAL.
D^aip
■]in;*
d^^ip*
^* ^^^*
mTp
riMp
T T T •
T r
T\)2')T\p
niSip
ran* inim*
t: — T
T :
trQ'-q^p
m^^p
ran n^rn
nis^n?
^n)i|ip
^n^j^p
^ran ^r\iD^n
^niD^ni
^m^p
iia^^ip
T •
T
tim2^p
^w^v
Dnpn m'rn
Dnis^n?
■iri^jiaip
]:^'^o'2^p
■jnDn -jMs^n
•jniD^n?
iii^f^ip
il5537jip
ii2| ^iiD^n
iiiis^ni
D53ip
I'^n*
■jinri
P*
linn
m'p
T^*
■jinn
'5a^ip
^^iijip
wanting
li4
as dipn
ns/j^^ip
tJtJT;'
D^T:
r^r
rat
D^^ipn
Q^jipn
r^^
as Dlp^
D^a'ipn
D^jipn
r?f)
■^/j/jipn
^mpT\
• • T
t3^-3ip5?;
mp^_
r^
si/j^^ip:'
^Mp^
np^j^ipn
n;^|ipn
TV-:
iiM'pn
^^)-3ipn
^5^nn
• T
ni^a^^ipn
nj^^Sipn
TV • :
.iv.- -
Q'^T?
ra'p5
r^5
i=^r
F4*
'.5r=?; *
D53ip5?
D:aip53
1?*
p=?
293
0. Verb
LAMEDH
KAL.
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
Perf. 3. m.
^'2,12*
i<rjD*
5<S5J
3./.
n^ii^j
n^^^'ji
nu^s^j
2.m.
ni<:s^j*
n>^is/jr
ri&^ii)j=*
2./.
Jn5^i£52
ni<li535
mxs^j
1. c.
^m^^/j
^t\^:i)2':
^n^s^j
Plur. 3. c.
iiiiiS/j
iixii/jD
^i^at^a
2.m.
Dr^xi£)j
dns^rjD
Dt1!j5a52
2./.
1. c.
T T
Inf.
&^i25j
i<i?:an
i^a53
Inf. absol.
T
u^is^'j?
i<^53
Imp. m.
i!(T/2*
I5<^^M
i<'^)2
/•
^i!Cll2
^i^ii^n
^i^2i53
Plur. m.
'^^'2)2
^^^lan
il5<2:53
/.
T V :
nji^^^ri*
njs^si)^*
Impf. 3. m.
iit,T/2^ *
5<ii^^*
^^12^
3./.
i^iii2n
i^is^n
a^'-im
2. wi.
^'2.12T\
«ii52n
^11)2T\
2./.
^i^ii^an
^i^is^n
^^112T\
1. c.
i^i£5j«
&5ii^iJ5
^'^'Di^
PZwr. 3. m.
ili^iS^J^
^«iS^^
il6<-2/J^
3./.
n55<2i>jn*
nii^^^an*
lrj55<2it3ri*
2.m.
ii^^is^^n
^s^ii^n
iij^si^n
2./.
n5«^)in
iii^^is^n
nii^2i53n
1. c.
^1)2':
•• T •
i<^l2^
Impf. shortened {Jussive^
Impf. with Svff.
^'ii^'S.'rr
Part. act.
pass.
iia)2
^1)2:
Jj^2S5a?J
294
ALEPH i^b). § 74.
PUAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
HITHPAEL.
^'^12*
i^^iS52n
5<2:an*
i!^T2t\in
nu^st^j
n5^^2/jn
Tii^Tcn
tii^T2tin
miiS^s*
n5^2"an*
ns^rjn*
tn5^2i/::nn*
t\'^Ta
IMi^TQtl
nj^ii/jji
5nj^2i/^nn
^t^i!i,^l2
^t^i<T2tl
^in^^is^on
^tyn^km
^i!^1l)2
^^^2i2n
^s^ii/jn
JiNSi/^nn
nt^^^i2
dn^ii^n
cnu^^^jn
Dnj^ronn
mki2
i^^Tcri
5^25311
^1112t\ri
5^^^9l!
«rjn
i^T2r\ti
wanting
wanting
nju^^/jjj*
nj^si^jnri*
i^s:5^^
j^^^j"^
55i£5:^
&5S/:in^
J<S[52n
«^22/jn
5<2/jn
s^S/jinri
xa^^n
i^^rjn
i^iS/jn
i<2i/jnn
^]j52i^n
^K^22)jn
^5^i2/jn
^i^S/jnn
;j^2i7;;s:
i<^ro^<
i^SS/JlJ^
i<22/^n5^
iii^s^j^
515^^2/^^
^J^253^
^5<2i/jn^
n5«2i)jn*
niN^^j'n*
n3j<252n*
nsij^a^jnn*
^a^^g'T)
iiN^/in
^!j5is)jn
iij^s^nn
ti^i<-i)2r\
n5i<s2/^n
nii^^^jn
n5X2i)jnn
^^V^l
15<:j7J3
^V^^7
^P^l
^^h^vt
m)2)2
ii(^T2'J2
^v?^
^^'Dtp2
295
p. Verb
LAMEDH
KAL.
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
Perp. 3. m.
nbr.*
nba3*
nba*
3./.
nrta*
nnbii*
nnba*
2.m.
rT^Sa*
rrbro*
t^'-.^xi*
2./.
n'^bB
n^bii
n^'ba
1. c.
^n'^^bs
^rrbii
^n^^ba
PJur. 3. c.
^ba*
^bi^
^ba
2. TO.
nm^b-n
Dn^bii
Qn^ba
2./.
f^-bi
IJn^bii
1^'^?«
1. c.
• T
^3^^b??
^f-br.
Inf.
nib-i*
niban*
nibs*
Inf. absol.
T
nb:H?
rrba
Imp. jw.
nbB*
nban*
nba*
/.
^bi*
^bsn*
^ba*
Plur. m.
ibii
iibsiti
^ba
/•
T V :
J^J'bsri*
nfir
Impf. 3. m.
nb,"i^ *
nb-i'^*
nba^*
8./.
nb'n'n
nbun
nbari
2. »i.
nbin
nban
nban
2./.
^br^n*
^br,n*
^ban*
1. c.
nbiu^
nbiii^
nbabi
PZwr. 3. m.
*T
^br
^ba^
3./.
nf^b:iri*
re'^ban*
ni^bari*
2.m.
^bin
^ban
^ban
2./.
nf^biri
nf^ban
ni'^bar,
1. r.
^^??
nba3
VT.
^ba?
Impf. shorVd
b?V
bs''*
T .
ba-;*
Impf. wi<^ Su^.
'??:?:*
'?!f^';*
Part. act.
nbii*
nb55*
nba^a*
pasa.
^^ba*
29G
HE (A).
§75.
PUAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
HITHPAEL.
^)r
nbrin*
nbr^n*
nbsnn*
nn'sa*
n^br^n*
nmbiri*
nr^b-irin*
trS.*
n*Siri*
xfSiri*
ri4-»rin*
n^^a
ri^bin
r^^brin
n^brm
^nv^s
^m'bin
^t\^bifi
^trii^rn
.^^
iibin
iibin
iibri^n
Qt^^^a
cin^bir;
nn^bin
Dn-'bsinn
1^?
^rbir;
•• : T
nib-i*
nibr^n*
nibsn*
nib-itnn*
{^5?^l1
nbifi*
•• : T
nbsnn
nb;»n*
nbunn*
wanting
^bin*
^bin
wanting
5ifb:ir]*
T V — : •
n^5^^
nbr*
nb:;^*
nbr.n^*
n^?n
nbih
nbhn
nbsnh
n^;in
nbin
nSin
n^srin
^S:n*
'^Sin*
^bin*
^snri*
n^^i^j;
nbi;j<
nbi5<
nbsn^^
^^?^
&^
fe^^
^'bsh''^
nj'^^^n*
nf^br^n*
ns'^br^ri*
n^^bsnh*
^S^n
"i-i&n
^bin
^^snn
nj^^Vr^n
n5*bin
nf^biri
riD^b-iinn
^^??
J^b;o
V :t
'^b^w
bj^*
bsn:*
^5b>*
^1?^*
nb^i^'j*
nb:;53*
••• : T
nbari52*
297
EXERCISES
IN
HEBREW GRAMMAR
EXERCISES
HEBREW GRAMMAR,
HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
PREPARED WITH KEFERENCE TO THE TRANSLATION OF DR RODIGER'S SEVEN
TEENTH EDITION OF GESEMUS HEBREW GKAMW"
BY
THOMAS J. CONANT,
PBOFISSOR OF HKBREW IK EOCITESTEK THEOLOGIOAL SKMINABT.
NEW YORK :
D. APPLETON & COMPANY,
310 & 348 BROADWAY.
1859.
The plan proposed for the use of these Exercises, is as follows.
In going over the Elements for the first time, only those parts of the
Grammar need be studied, which are indicated at the head of the fol-
lowing sections, other portions being consulted when reference is made
to them. The exercises in each section should be thoroughly mastered,
in connection with the sections of the Grammar there referred to,
before any farther advance is made in the Grammar. When the first
five sections of the exercises have been gone over, the whole of Part
First in the Grammar may then be studied with profit. By this
method, teachers will find their own task lightened, and the progress of
their pupils greatly facilitated.
The Grammar is referred to for the statement of principles, which,
as far as practicable, is avoided in the Exercises and Chrestomathy.
A summary is occasionally given for the learner's convenience, the
particulars being supplied in the Grammar.
The student should beware of hurrying over the elements, from an
impatience to commence translating while he is yet spelling his way
over Hebrew forms. He will otherwise find himself embarrassed with
petty difficulties, when his whole attention should be directed to other
objects. — The practice of reading TIebreiv aloud is too much neglected ;
and hence few acquire the habit of reading with ease and fluency, so
necessary to the full understanding and appreciation of a writer's senti-
ments in any language.
*^* The sign ^ is used in references to the sections of the Gram-
mar ; those of the following pages are indicated by the abbreviation
Sect.
EXERCISES m HEBREW GRAMMAR.
SECTION I.
EXERCISES ON THE MANNER OF WRITING AND PRONOUN-
CING THE CONSONANTS AND VOWELS.
On §§ 5—8, and § 12.
The following examples will accustom the student to the
forms of the consonants, and their sounds as given in the alpha-
bet and in § 6, 2, and to the manner of writing and pronouncing
the consonants and vowels in connection. — The jiromiscuous
examples are to be studied for recitation.
*j^* Every syllable begins ivith a consonant ; see §26, 1,
where the only exception is given. The tone {accent) is com-
monly on the final syllable (§ 15, 2) : when it is on the penulti-
mate, this is indicated by the sign ['], as in the Grammar (§15,
Rem. 3).
An open syllable is one which ends with a vowel ; a closed syllable
is one which ends with a consonant ; §26, 2, a, c, and d.
For the signs used to represent the sounds of the Hebrew vowels,
see the first Note to §8. — For the effect of the point in certain lettera
(2 &c.) see Note to p. 20.
a) Open syllables (see the table of vowels, p. 24) :
First class, of the A sound ; letter a), iinchangeahle d{— =
S?_, §9, 1, 1), I? (for X)5) q&, p (for X3) nu, "} (for wSn) rd, n (for
xn) ta ; changeable a (its proper use), "q ma, 0 sa, t2 ta, 5 gu,
5 na, b Id, 1 za, ^ ya, 3 ba, TS sa, XD sha, ij i<a, ^ da, "1 ra, T} ha,
n hha, n ta, 1 va, 3 kii, p qd, 3 pa, ^ tsu ; letter 6), short d, "I rd,
"0 id, n hhd, n hd ; letter c), unchangeable d (modification of a
see Rem. 2 below), wlien in union with '', as ^^ dd, "^b Id, "^a bd,
■^S tsd {a like e in there) ; short d (modification of short a), "a mil,
tD shd, is sd, 2 tsd, 2 n^.
6 EXERCISES IN HEBREW GRAMMAR.
Second class : / sound : letter a), unchangeahle i {— = "^-r
defectively written, § 8, 4), b (for "h) l^ a (for ^3) bi, 7) (for ^t\)
hi, "1 (for i"i) ri ; letter 6), short i (its proper sound), tt ?m, 0 sz,
T 2;^, b /?, p ^f, "1 ri, 1 vf, P ^e ; ^^ sound ; letter c), unchangeahle
e {— = "^-r defectively written), 3 (for "^S) 6e, "n (for '^'n) /'e, a (for
■'5) ge, S (for "^B) jje, T (for ''T) ^e ; changeable e (its proper use),
3? ^56, a ^e, Fl te, n Ae, >1 AAe, p se, to 5e, to she, "! ye ; letter d),
short e, to 5/i^, '^ rS, 3 6e, p se, to se. Pi /e, b /d".
Third class : U sound ; letter a), ^b H, IT ;2;m, ^12 mu, '^T\ tu;
letter 6), short u (its proper sound), 5 7iu, T 2;m, & pit, to 5/w*, 3 M '
but also 7mchangeable li {— ='^ defectively written),* 2 (for ^2)
tsu, p (for ^'a) mzi, 3 (for ^3) 6^2; to (for ito) s/izi; O sound;
letter c), unchangeable d (— = i defectively written), p (for ip)
56, 3 (for i3) 60, S (for ii) ^56; changeable 6 (its proper use),
3 A'd, b 50, ^ c?d, ri to, "I ?'d, T 2:0 / letter d), short d, 3 b6, T a^d,
P. t6 ; letter e), obtuse e (from n or 0), i? i<e, Pi ^^.
6) Closed syllables :
Ub lam, "13 bar, Oto shem, ^H hadh, TiD 5/iar, Dp 5am (D, § 5,
3), Pib /i^/i, pb /e^, "jto 5/ia«, bp qal, ^'l yddh, Db /ow. Up torn,
n3 60^/i, "js Xo/i (§ 5, 3), b"'i yol, bp ^6/, t:'b Zo^, in tm, to';: ye^A,
ri^ yith, 'la gddh, b& p?i/, p;^ yng, ia ^ai;, ia giv, 1) yav (more
nearly waw),\ bs ^'dZ (— = 6, 3d class, d).
Rem. 1. In itself, each vowel is changeable, and it is only by accidental
union with a vowel-letter (letter c below), that it becomes unchange-
able.
2. The same sign („) represents two distinct vowel-sounds, one of
the first and the other of the second class, differing in their nature (ori-
gin) and in sound. The former is a modification of the a sound, familiar
to the German ear, made by elevating the root of the tongue while
uttering the sound of a (as heard in father) ; hence represented, as in
the original, by the Germ, a (nearly e in there, Fr. c in mere). The
latter is the shortened sound of Tsere, viz. the clear sound of short e in
met. The learner will soon distinguish them by the knowledge of their
origin. — In the few instances of its use in the third class (letter d), it is
merely an obscuring of the 0 and u sounds, just as our 0 is obscured in
atom, pronounced nearly as atum or atem.
The " accented e" (under letter d of the second class) belongs rather
to the first class, letter c; see § 24, 2, c, a, and §93, Expl. 9, Rem.
* When !l is to be -written defectively, it is represented by —7 . which is then
long ; otherwise it is short. Shureq can be written only in connection with 1 (1).
f On account of the difficulty in sounding the EngUsh w at the end of a sylla
ble, the Hebrew 1 is commonly sounded as v.
PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS AND VOWELS. 7
c) Voivels in connection with theii' homogeneous vowel-letters
(p. 26, Note *) :
lb 16, '^ III, ''5 ge, '^^. It, ^iS tson, D^p qimi, '^"'2 bin, )''2 hen^
■J'^ta tan, ""S gd.
Here the sound of 1 and ^ is not heard separatel}^ from that
of the preceding vowel, — i. e. they are pronounced as vowels :
see § 7, 2 ; comp. §24, 1, a. The feeble consonant power of S
and n is also often lost after a vowel (§ 6, 2, 1), like that of the
English h in ah, oh. E. g. x:2 tsu, ^"1 tso, nb la, rib l6, T'\'Q tne:
so S4 (§ 23, 3, Rem. 3) after 1 and "^ when pronounced as vowels ;
xis pd, ^it sho, s«i3 710, x^5 M, m^b III, Kill? 52, «^n hi, m^:^ tsl*
Hholem is written over the left side of the consonant to which it be-
longs (and after which it is pronounced), unless i or !!< is the following
letter, over which it is then written ; as fil'p qdm, ni? lo'-velh, xb lo.
When it belongs to h it is commonly written over the right side of the
following letter ; e. g. lib lot; but often as pb. — Shureq is never written
except in the bosom of its homogeneous vowel-letter (^).
Promiscnous exani'ples : Give the name of the consonant,
the name, class, sound (whether a, e, i, o, or 7i), and quantity
of the vowel, and pronounce them together : D, ri, b, "i, 12, 3,
h, ^,t!, ^T, Dip, nia, 7, :5, tJin (ro^A), ^jsi^ f3,'nb, Di3,'n.s*,
D2?, bip, m^, D?, "i^, QXp (<?am), na, 13, nx, nx, dk, ::?, bs,
31, b-ib, ap, 13, nV(Zo), nb (/«), i®, nja, np, id:', xia, en, m
(-=6), D'^S (n, §5, 3), ri? iSb.), ^1 {ib.), li? {ib.), ]r\\ib.), bn,
11:^, 1)3, Dy, qb, Tb, r^, 13, d:, 3-j (_-d), in, dtzj, d-j:, bb,
</) Dissyllables :
b::p qa-tdl, bbp qa-tol, bpp q6-tel, DTS gu-zdm, "13:2 tsd-bhdr,
"Tj| tsd-dhddh, bbn hd-ldl, ^3T za-bhudh, 3X7 z6-^ebh, )'QT\ ha-
mdn, T\r\ te-redh, 311J'^ ye-shebh, ibii) she-Uv, "TOi? 6-mdr, bb^ ya-
Mo^, nbn ha-ldm, ab^' sha-Um, ba^ ^o-khel, ^3"^ da-bhar, ^:b
le-vdy,\ b3i5 ^o-bhdl, ibp qa-ton. ^tJpn hOq-tdl {— =d). — Exam-
ples containing feeble letters sounded as vowels : itTI rd-tho, "^STD
5/ia-n2, ffiib^a sha-losh, trbt shd-luth, ibiT 5A«-/«, n^tj;^ ya-shith,
bbi'a md-Ze7, in^3 6e-^/id, "^Ty^^a mii-shi, 1^;; ye??,, "lib ^e-r^, '^b'qb /?2-/e,
* Until the student has learned to distinguish cases of quiescence, he will be
guided by the pronunciation appended to the Hebrew form, giving the proper
representative of the feeble letter wherever it retains its power as a consonant.
•)• The full consonant sound of y,
20
8 EXERCISES IN HEBREW GRAMMAR.
^r}^^be-thi, ^i'^V H-nu, ^n^ ii-bhen (§26, 1), n'cxb le-mor, D^SIC
shd-nim, ^?''2? "Se-ne, Q''P3 bdi-twi (— =0).
For explanation of the following examples, see § 8, 2, H 2 and
3 (in small type) : 'tDE po^A, "jiy s67i, y^ shon, IS'y^ sho-resh, lip
qo-vav, "ltJJ< kosher, Din td-v6m, 11151 vd-shodh.
e) Double letters :
A consonant is sometimes doubled in pronunciation, when
preceded by a full vowel, and followed by a full or a half vowel.*
This is indicated (§ 12, 1, a) by the doubling point in the letter,
showing that it is to be pronounced twice. E. g. biap qit-tel^
V4r'^ hdsh-shen, ^ipH hdq-qol^ ^^^ ^im-mi. "jan hdb-ben.
The same sign is used for the hardening point (§ 12, 1, h) in certain
\ letters (a, a, t, 3. 2, n, §6, 3), when they are not preceded by a vowel-
sound, — which distinguishes it from the doubling point.
Promiscuous examples: D^3, ']'^'2. bdg-gun, iX^'I^ bit-td, I^^I
dab-ber, D2.n, niS {tsiv-vd, §12, 1, Note *), n]5n, I2l6, ^n^^ {shad-
dui/, the consonant y), D^fl hdy-ydin, '^^p, Dsri, oi3n, D'^H, njj^,
nan, n>t^, ins, 0^7, i^a'b, s^ir:, "ji^, b'ls, nj^-', oiro, m^;?, irisi-i,
an, >-ib,' n;^b, m©, 'i^^, biia, w, ipn, fa^, ";?, "isn, qD|n,
TOb, "^n;!, n-i'T [zd-yith), in'', n;?;', fn'ty, ^jip, dt», nto, nps,
Dip, 1)2p (§8, 4, a), XSiS, "in, DTI?.
SECTION II.
EXERCISES IN SYLLABICATION.
On §§ 10 and 26.
The uses of Slfva as a half-vowel (§ 10, 1), or as merely
marking the division of syllables (§ 10, 3), depend on the theory
of the syllable exhibited in § 26 ; it is found most convenient,
therefore, to present the subjects of these two sections in connec-
tion.
Sh^va, vocal and silent.
Simple ShVa (.) is the sign either of a half-vowel, as e. g.
under the first letter of bbp q^-tol, where it forms a prefix half-
syllable (§ 26, 4) ; or of a mere division of syllables, as undei
* A consonant can be doubled in no other position.
EXERCISES IN SYLLABICATION. 9
the second letter of "'bpp qit-li, where it stands at the end of a
syllable, and is not sounded (silent Sh^va).
Sh^va is, therefore, vocal only under the first of tivo conso-
nants before a full vowel. There is but one case, in which the
learner finds any difficulty in determining whether Sh®va is vocal
or silent ; viz. when it stands between two full vowels^ as nbt:]?^
njiap. In this case the letter, under which it stands, might be
the final consonant of a closed syllable, as !"i3)ap qom-nd (silent
Sh^'va) ; or it might form with the Sh®va a prefix half-syllable,
as Jlbpp qa-f-la (vocal Sh'-'va). This is determined by the na-
ture of the syllable, as taught in 5 26. A vowel-sound is natu-
rally prolonged, unless interrupted by a consonant. Hence an
open syllable has properly a long vowel (§ 26, 3). A syllable
closed by a consonant, though its vowel is most naturally short,
may have a long vowel when the tone (accent) causes the voice
to dwell upon it (§ 26, 5 and 7, Rem.). Accordingly, c^s a gene-
ral rule, —
Simple &7i%a is silent under a final letter, and under a
letter lohich is preceded by a short vowel or an accented long
vowel ; in all other cases it is vocal. E. g.*
Silent Sh^a : tj"n dakh, tjbi ye-lekh, ribtpj? qd-tult, S"i'' yirb,
nsbia mul-ka, ?JJ?nj5 quhh-tekh, "I'^p''? muq-tar., ^j"?? 'Ser-vuth.
roiap qom-na, n:b''6pn tiq-tol-na, pTO";! yesht^ "^li nei^d, "^"Cpy^
sdni-tl, ''innys bt-:^"thuth-nl, '^:rim ^a-sath-nl, ''?ri??i^ "Ar/ta-
Idth-ni, nby'a mCCS-ld, J^yi^ yd-dhd'S-td.
Vocal Sh'va : ^3 b^-khd, ikb) vUo, r.:rib no-thUid, HDbD ne-
l^-khd, '^ini ii-bhUie, ^TZJnnn tidh-r^-shii, ^5?pnD nibh-q^-'^ii, niniry)?
ma'i-s-'-roth, ^blpp (= ^btplpp, see § 12, 1, V) qit-f-lu, ^^l^ (§ 12, 1,
note) = ^'I'l^ tslv-v^-khu.\
The composite Sh'^vas.
The composite Sh'^vas are always vocal (§ 10,2, § 26,7, Rem.),
and of course always form a prefix half-syllable. E. g. 'HTiJS?
Vi"-sher, itJSi:? ka-^''-shSr, ttr.^, m'-nosh, f ^2^13 ve-m^jiHts, ^i?:"
ya-T-nu, ^ay '^''-bhi, D^ns^ tsipp^-rim, ib^D sidj-b^-lo.
* Teachers will observe, that the rule here given is intended merely to guide
the learner, at first, in the division of syllables. Comp. Rem. to § 26, 1. The ex-
ceptions are few, and need not be noticed till the application of this general prin-
ciple has become familiar.
f It will be perceived, that in this and the preceding example, the written
Sh«va follows an implied silent Sh«va, and is therefore vocaL
10 EXERCISES IN HEBREW GRAilSIAR.
Exercises on the use of the composite Sh^vas are furnished by the
paradigms of nouns, of verbs with guUurals. &c.
Promiscuous examples, for recitation : ^'nS^^'l, '^npB:, "ritOXI,
bbbi,' ?jina,' ^is^aj ^bp, '^^nx^, s^nsia^ab, 'isriD, ?jb5in, ^n^ai^.
^::>'i.':, ^a'lpa, ^n^na," ^snn^.
^e?n. The exceptions mentioned in §26, 3, a — e, exhibit no essential
deviation from the general principle. Thus in the forms given under a,
-"!"!! T|^^. ; tor example, are nearly equivalent to xfir'hh, mcl'kh. the first
vowel of which, in rapid pronunciation, strikes the ear nearly as if uttered
in a closed syllable. In all the remaining cases, the voice (under the
influence of the tone, or of the half-accent Methegh, §16.2) dwells upon
the vowel, so that — though not strictly long. — it may properly stand in
an open syllable.
SECTION III.
DOUBLING OF CONSONANTS : ASPIRATION OF THE MUTiS.
On §§ 20 and 21.
Distinctio7i of the doubling point and the hardening jyoint
{Daghesh forte and Daghesh lene).
It will be perceived, by comparing the two sections, that —
DagJiesh forte is always preceded immediately hy a full
vowel, which is never the case with Daghesh lene. E. g.
Daghesh forte : 13'j^ y^-dhuh-her, D%'^ mish-sham, Ti'^"} ylq-
(juhh, nriX i^at-td, n^S tsiv-va, ''"ITIJ shad-day, y^'^'C mih-hm.
Daghesh lene : UZtt'i yush-kem, nafl' yiz-b&hh, Wa g^-shii,
'iTsnn tir-g^-zii.
Examples, for recitation: ^V\^,yi, bbsn^, iS3. IlST^ni, nan.
i:ii-Diu, bn^-*, br5^i, nnn, ''ny|ii?:, wn. '^Dnann', Trp_ (§14, l)i
tins, "Ifn^l 0, §10, 3, e-iVr.).
Use of Daghesh lene (§21).
The learner will observe, tliat the hard sound of the letters
3, 5i, T, D, S, m, is the original one (i. e. they are properly
Mutes, § 6, 3), and tliat it is the intermingling of a preceding
vowel-sound which produces the softer or aspirated pronuncia
tion (§ 21, first 1). By comparing Nos. 1 and 2 of § 21, he will
QUIESCENCE OF THE VOWEL-LETTERS AND BREATHINGS. ll
perceive that the statements which they contain may be briefly
expressed thus :
These letters take Daghesh lene, except ivhen preceded hy a
full vowel or a half-vowel [vocal Sh^va).
A vowel in which one of the feeble letters quiesces (the vowel-sound
alone being heard in this case), of course aspirates the following nuue
in the same manner as a pure vowel.
Often, as in the following examples, the aspirated letter be-
gins a word, and the vowel-sound which produces the aspiration
closes the preceding one, — the two words being uttered in so
close connection that the effect is the same as if they were but
one. E. g. "^^2 ■>"13'1 tvords of the sons of . Sometimes,
however, the two words are so separated in pronunciat.'on, that
the closing vowel-sound of the first does not affect the proiuincia-
tion of the following mute. E. g. "lUJXS lii'^l and it happened,
when ; "^i^i^a I ipXl and as for nie, ivhen I came.
Promiscuous examples : ^37^?, i^HST^^, iM, ''SDiDS, DPS'"};',
'jn'^i, D^n^sn, Dp^-^s^a, nar^i, pssnn, ^m':^, onn?^', onxn^,
SECTION IV.
ClUIESCENCE OF THE VOWEL-LETTERS (l, "^ ) AND OF THE
BREATHINGS (S?, H).
On §§ 23 and 24.
The letters 1 and "^ often lose their consonant power,* and
are sounded strictly as voivels (§24, 1st 1"). Of a different na-
ture is the so-called quiescence of H and &§. The former repre-
sents no vowel-sound ; the latter only that of long a, for which,
however, it is very rarely written (§23, 3, Rem. 1). These two
letters are sometimes lost to the ear, when preceded by a vowel,
merely in consequence of their feebleness, and not of any natu-
ral affinity with a vowel-sound. Compare h in hah ! eh ! where
* The sound of T is more nearly represented by w (better stiU by the Germ, w)
than by v ; bnt the latter is employed for representing the consonant power of l ,
on account of the difficulty of making our to heard as a consonant afler a vowel.
In English, w and y have •wholly lost their consonant power at the cud of a syllabi''.
where they are always sounded as vowels, or, in the language of Heb. grammar
quiesce. The Hebrew follows the same law, except in its univei-sality.
12 EXERCISES IN HEBREW GRAMMAR.
final h is sounded, and in «/i, oh, where it is lost to the ear.
Hence (with the single exception of SJ occasionally used for long
a), they are not treated as hotnogeneous with the vowel in w^iich
they quiesce (p. 26, note *), or as rendering it immutable (§25,
1 and 2). — But the two cases may properly be treated together,
as in both the effect on the pronunciation is the same (i. e. the
sound of the consonant is not heard separately from that of the
vowel), and instances of quiescence are distinguished in the same
manner.
For convenient reference, we here present these letters in
connection with the vowels in which they resjiectively q.uiesce.
65 in all the vowels (§ 23, 1) ; i<3 bo, X:£ tsu, S«S tsd, i5B ;je, «n rl,
ifh la (§23, 2, extr.), «B j)u, Xis p6, S^TT shi, S^3 kii (§23, 3,
Rem. 3).
C Cholem,
n in^ Glamets, .^^ ...^ ^^^ 23. 4, and 2d T
I Ibeghoij
1^ Tsere,
\ Cholem,
I Shureq,
[ Chireq,
■• in -< Tsere,
( Seghol,
The following rule will enable the learner to determine, 6y
the punctuation, where these letters are quiescent, and where
they retain their power as consonants :
The feeble letters are to be regarded as quiescent, in the
midst of a word, ivhen they have no full voicel or Sh^va ; and
also, at the end of a ivord, when preceded by vowels with which
they are homogeneous.
This rule is founded on the principle (comp. § 10, 1, 3) that every
consonant must have either a full vowel or a ShVa. When the feeble
letter stands at the end of a word, where ShVa is usually not written.
the character of the preceding vowel must determine whether it is to be
sounded or not.
He Mappiq (fi, §14. 1) of course retains its power as a consonant,
whatever vowel may precede.
Examples of quiescence : S'Ji'' yi-tdbh, fl^'lS V-rith, Sta'^'a
me-tabh, n""? beth, TT^'Q'^ ya-ma-ha, bs^i yo-khel, isis: tsOn, TO ko,
CHANGES OF VOWELS. 13
fliia tsdth, "^"yy^ dlbh-re, t^S'n rush, "niiS jni-ra, "ilS he-ri, Sib ^6,
iito sa, Ni ^56, ll'ttJNI rl-shon, Sib Zw, i«i-i2 i^-;^', ^S'lSb lu-dho-ni
{a, § 24, 2, e.r/r.), ib /d, ''b /^, nb^:^ ^o-Za.
Compare, with the above, the punctuation of these letters in
the following examples, where they retain their power as conso-
nants : an hem, 2t2J5|i yei^-tubh, v|bx;;i ye-^^-soph, tii^^ v^-'&oth,
qnn.'i ySh-doph, tiSlT^ ya-h"-r6gh, bbsi: i<'-kh6l, 11 vav, ^^j day, t^^"
yah (§ 14, 1).
Let the learner point out, in the following examples, the
instances in which these letters are quiescent, and those in
which they retain their power as consonants, and give the pro-
nmiciation of the words : 1SS% DTl'bNI, nbiy, I'j^, m, ins^l,
nix, n2i5>, nib, ia, ^^t^r^, its, nis5, n^'i^' iidtu, tJiiisi, ^ibii,
nsa, "ii^, nb^5, I'np, 1:2;?, ^i«, i'^ni^i (_=(3), "iipi, ip, rpib,
iTDii^i, 1^, xis^K, ^^nis^5, ^n^i, isn;'i, is, is, s'^ibni, ip^-i,
infi^s, ii2r;ii, ffiS3, isn, ns^^is, ima(_=6).
SECTION V.
THANGES OP VOWELS IN THE INFLECTION OF NOUNS AND
VERBS.
On § 21.
[IneludiDg references to §§ 9, 25, and 26.]
The following brief outline (collecting into one view the lead-
ing points scattered through several sections of the grammar),
will aid the learner in understanding and applying the principles
of inflection in Hebrew. The more minute details and specifi-
cations are supplied in the grammar.
The system of vowel-inflections in Hebrew, first fully developed by
Dr. Rodiger, is very simple and perfect. The deviations from general
laws, occasioned by accidental influences on a living tongue, or by the
imperfection of traditional pronunciation, are fewer than in most other
languages. A few points, it will be seen, are supplied in the following
outline of it, but entirely in harmony with his views.
The changes of vowels, in inflection, are all founded on the
natural laws of utterance and intonation. E, g., when the form
bpip qd-tal takes the accented syllable DH at the end, the tone of
the word is thrown forward one syllable : and as the voice con-
sequently delays less on the first part of the word, the vowel o(
14 EXERCISES IN HEBREW GRAMMAR.
its initial syllable (if changeable) is shortened to a half-vowel*
(vocal Sli^va) ; thus ^'d^ qd-tdt becomes orib^p (f-tal-t^iii . On
the contrary, when the unaccented syllable "^r is added, the tone
not being thrown forward, the vowel at the beginning retains its
full sound ; as ''n^'Pj? qa-tdl-ti.
Again : when the sound i (with the accent) is added to the
end of ^l3j?; it unites the final b in a syllable with itself (as a
syllable cannot begin with a vowel in Hebrew, § 26, 1), and the
second syllable of the word thus becomes an open one, requiring
naturally a lo7ig vowel ; the tone is also thrown forward, lessen-
ing the sound of the initial syllable ; thus bt^jp qd-tdt becomes
"ib'jp cf-td-l6.
It is the application of such simple and natural laws of vocal-
ization, that constitutes the chief part of Hebrew inflection.
But the vowels, in Hebrew, do not all yield to these natural
laws of utterance, some being unchangeable on account of their
peculiar origin, and retaining, therefore, the same form in all
situations.
A classification of the vowels is made in \ 9, according to
iheir origin and the nature and character of their sounds, show-
ing what vowels are subject to change, and how they are affected.
These classes are here presented together, as follows :
1.) Unchangeable voivels, which remain the same in all situa-
tions (comp. §25).
2) Voivels jirosodially long, or tone-long, i. e. long by the influ-
ence of the totie and rhythm ; viz. such as stand in the tone-
syllable or next to it, and become either short vowels or half-
vowels on the removal of the tone.
3) JS'hoi'i vowels.
A table of the long vowels subject to change, and of the corresponding
nhnri ones, is given on p. 58 of the grammar.
LaiDS of the Vowel-changes.
The changes of vowels, in inflection, arc caused —
I) By a change in iheform of the syllable (viz. of an open to a
closed syllable, or of a closed to an open one).
* Compare in Eng. pusilldnimous and pusillanimity, philanthropy and philan-
thropic; where the a of the accented syllabic becomes (in utterance) a half-vov/el,
when the tone is thrown forward. In Hebrew, such a change from a full to a
lialf-vowel is indicated by a change in the written sign for the sound.
CHANGES OF VOWELS. 15
2) By a change in the position of the tone of tlie word, when it
is removed one or more syllables.
3) By a change in the division of syllables.
The laws of the syllable, in Hebrew, are stated in § 26, Nos.
3 and 5, and may be thus grouped in one view :
1) An oj)en syllable requires a long vowel.
2) An open syllable lias usually Qaniets (less frequently Tsere)
when immediately followed by the tone-syllable ; hence the
name Pretonic vowel, § 26, 3.
3) A closed syllable has naturally a short vowel, and can take
a long vowel only when it has the tone.
On these principles, and on the necessary effect of a change
in the division of syllables, are founded the following rules for
the vow^el-changes, as given in § 27, and here collected together.
Rules.
r) A short vowel is lengthened, when the syllable is changed
from a closed to an open one (see No, 1, above) ; as '2.T\ hubh,
^nn hd-bhu.
\i) A Pretonic vowel ( Qamets or Tsere, § 26, 3) becomes a half-
vowel when the tone is moved forward a full syllable (No. 2) ;
as bap qd-tai , UT)^'^'^ (f-tal-tini; "ip^ yd-qdr , "0)?'? y^-kd-rd .
On the contrary, when the tone is moved forward only a Aa//"-syllable.
the pretonic vowel retains its place ; as ^^|5, nbtip? qa-i^-la .
in) A long vowel is sliortened, when the syllable is changed
from an open to a closed one without the tone (No. 3) ; as "^BD
se-pher {book), i"i&p siph-ro {his book).
iv) A long vowel, in a closed syllable, is changed to its corres-
ponding short vowel when the tone is removed (No. 3) ; as
bDp qit-tel', ^)^p. qit-tef-khd {tel% § 21, 2, b).
v) When the tone is moved forward two syllables, the ultimate
and penultimate vowels are shortened as much as is possible ;
viz. the former to a half-vowel, the latter to short I (Chireq) ;
as ISi"! dd-bhdr {ivord), aoi'nn" dlbh-re-khSm' {ivords of you)
your loords.
This is the utmost shortening of the wofd, since a vowel is necessary
under the first of these consonants, and Chireq is the shortest of the
vowel-sounds (comp. §27, 1. remark).
16 EXERCISES m HEBREW GRASIMAR.
vi) The vowel of a final closed syllable, when an addition is
made wliich unites the final consonant in a syllable with
itself, is shortened to a half-vowel in inflection of the verb
bi/ gender, miQnher, and person, as well as by cases when
the vowel is prosodially long ; but in inflection of the noun
(and of the verb by cases, with the above excejDtion) it is re-
tained. E. g. (inflection by persons, &c.), bp]? he killed, <"'^'Cl)?
qd-f-ld, she killed, l'5t3j5 qu-f-lii, they killed: (by cases),
ibtpp (f-ta-lo , he killed him ; (bbp';^ he unll kill, tone-long o),
iJlblSp^ yiq-f-U-hu, he will kill him; H^ hand. 'TX^ his hand.
Rem. 1, The most perfect amalgamation is effected by the shorten-
ing of the vowel to a half^vowel ; and hence its use in the inflection of
verbs by person, gender, and number. In the other case, viz. the union
of suffix pronouns (the genitive and accusative) with nouns and verbs,
a less perfect amalgamation is required.*
2. In Kal Imp. of some classes of verbs (see Parads. B, D, F, I, K.
L, O), this inflection brings three consonants before a vowel. In the utter-
ance of these, a slight vowel-sound (namely «, the shortest of the vowels)
is heard after the first. This the punctators have indicated by Chireq,
as they have done in the analogous case, §28. 1. In Parad. E. the guttu-
ral causes the a sound to be heard before it.
Full illustrations of these principles are furnished in the
Paradigms of nouns and verbs, and of the verb with suffixes.
E.g.
Rule I.) §95, Parad. A, light suff. (comp. §27, 2, a); so TtC
breast, "^"IT^ sha-dhdy {tny breqsts) ; ^S^i^ i^ets-bd^ {finger),
iyass i^Sts-ba-Vo [his finger); ya^i? ^dr-bO^ {fo2ir). plur.
a-'OTi?, mr-bd-^im.
Rule I. & II.) Parad. 0, Pe?-/. 3 m., with tlie si/ffi. in all the per-
sons, except 2 plur. m. c5*/.
Rule II.) Parad. C, Peifi. 3 m., with 2 plur. in. ^ /. suff.;
Parad. III. ; Parad. IV, sing, light i^uff., plur. absol. ; so
2ab heart, "^^^b my heart.
Rule III.) Parad. VI, 6, c, and e, sing, light and grave suff.
Rule IV.) Parad. C, Imp/. 3 m., with 2 sing. m. srff. and with
2 plur. m. (S^ f. suff. : Perf. Piel, with 2 sing. m. suff. and
* The table, on p. 82, shows the inflection of verbs by formative additions.
These arc the same, in all the conjugations and in all classes of verbs.
CHANGES OF VOWELS. 17
wilh 2 'jiliir. m. 6f f. stiff. ; Paiad. II, IV, and V, sing, grave
stiff.. VII, sing, grave suff.* VIII, a, b, and c.
Rnle V.) Parad. II. IV, and V, pbir. constr. and grave stiff. (In
Farad. II, the penultimate vowel is iinchaugeahle.)
Rule VI.) Inflection by persons, ij'c. .* Parad. B (in all conj. ex-
cept Hiphil), Per/, sing. 3/., phir. 3 c. ; Imp.] sing. f.. and
plur. m. i^f. ; Imp/, sing. 2/., jylnr. 3 m. and 2 m. — Inflec-
tioti by cases (viz. of nouns and verbs with the genitive and
accusative, § 33, 2, a and b) ; Parad. II, IV, and V, sing,
light suff., j/lur. absol. and light stiff. ; Parad. C, Per/. 3 m.
with all stiffixes except 2 j)lur. m. <S)' f. (— lengthened to —
when a closed syllable becomes an open one ; see above (p.
15), laivs of the syllable, No. 1) ; 3 /. and j^lur. 3 m., with
all siffixes ; (with a merely tone-long vowel), Impf. sing. ^*
plur. 3 m., and Perf. Piel, with all stiffixes except 2 sing.
m. and 2 plur. in. ^' f.
These rules, applied to the Paradigms on pp. 166, 167, will
make the inflection of nouns very simple and clear, — Parad, VI.
has properly only three forms, distinguished by the A, E, and O
sounds after the initial letter (answering to the three forms of
the verb, from which they are derived, §43, 1, and §84, 10 and
11); e, g, ^b^ (for tfb^ §27, Refti. 2, c),t nSD (for ^^^),t mp
(for ^'"p),t The other examples {d — i) only show the efiect of
a guttural, and of a middle or final vowel-letter (§ 24, b and c)
on these three forms. The inflection is very simple : viz.
1) To the monosyllabic form with the vowel after the f^^rst
radical ('^r'a, "iBD, IS"!]?), are appended all stiffixes in the sing,
number, and the construct ending and grave suffixes in the
plur. ntimher.
2) To the other form with the vowel («) after the second
radical (tfbl3, "iSC, li;'lj?),§ are appended the absol. 2)ltir. ending,
and all light suffixes in the ]:>lnr. ntimher. — These two state-
ments should be impressed on the memory by comparison with
the Paradigm.
* This Paradigm vacillates between the Verbal onA Nominal mf[Qci\on ; follow-
ing the latter in sing, grave snff., and elsewhere the former.
f See above, Rule vi, Rem. 2. \ See § 28, 4.
§ The characteristic vowel of the form being exchanged for the customary pre.
tonic a, in an open syllable next before the tone (§ 26, 3). Compare, however.
Rodiger's statement of the principle, p. 170, No. 6.
18 EXERCISES IN HEBREW GRAiyiMAR.
SECTION VI.
EXERCISES IN ANALYSIS.*
(After the study of Part Second of the Grammar.)
1. '^'Citdb, to my name: DTS name, Parad. VII ; "^-^ my (§91,
1, table),' ^flis my name; h to (§102, 2); -^^liib, i^aisb (§28, 1).
— Analyze, in like manner, the following combinations, (the nouns
are of Parad. VII) : "^"fSD^b ; rt^yi^b (H, § 14, 1, suff. § 91, 1, ta-
ble) ; Q^nsi^bl (^, conj.'l, § 104, 2, a and b, § 26, 1 ; D-i-, § 87, 1) ;
ibpttni (p without Dagii. §20, 3, 6; n uuV/i, §102, 2).
2. ^'l^'S, «w my hand: S, §102, 2; -;;' hand, Parad. II. —
Write in Hebrew, in our hand, in thy (m.) hand, in thy (f.)
hand, in your (m. <fc f.) hand (§93, expl. 2, remark).
3. ^'l.'J^^ ««c? wi ^/iy (m-) hand : ^, as in No. 1 ; ^— , § 91, 1,
tahle.
4. ^~^Xl, from, thy {ra.) hand : yi^from, § 102, 1, and 7'ewa7'^,
§ 19, 2, a., § 20, 1, 6. — Write in Heb. /rom /i^'s, Aer, thy (f.) /m/ic?,
yowr (pi. f.) hand.
5. D^i;', hands: Dual number, §88, 1, Parad. II ; TO ^'i;',
hands of Esau ; ^W "T3, as Esaii's hands ; 3, § 102, 2.— "''l^S,
^"^3 {kiy-dhe), §28, 1, ^"^S, §24, 1, a; O^^T^^ aw(/ in {ivith)
your (j5l. m.) hands ; D3^"ip, (Dual with sw/".) 3, % § 104, 2, 6.
6. ^ins ^Zory ; "linsn (§ 35) the glory ; ^in33 =nin2ns (with
prep. S, §\02, 2, and art. § 35, Rem. 2, §19, 3, 6, § 102, 2, b),
according to the glory. — Analyze : il^2i'52'^, 2d 1, p. 60, Rem. 1 ;
illjilpl ; ^iyilpV'1, 1 without Dagh. lene, §21, 2, a ; D'^TTilpa.
7. 1\'^'D^,fro?n thy pitcher : "j^ , "I| (Parad. VIII), 1^-, § 91, 1,
^aJZe.—Analyze : ^s.? ; is^b ; D^m ; ins^S^ (Sisa, §95, A; — un-
changeable by position, §25,3); ''pn (n, §27,1, e7id); ^pH ;
D^I^T^nS (n, §35, 2, A; comp. §22, 1); "ppn^ (^, §102, 1, b;
52(/. §91, 2, ifa6/e); T"iypb ; Ul'jm, suff. §91, 1, ^aWe; 5?, ^'/m-
y'cg' defective § 9, 9, 6, shortened from i § 27, Rem. 1 ; sharpened,
ibid.) ; I'^'^n, suff., §91, 2, /ai/e, § 8, 5, e«£/; n, _ lengthened in
an open syll. (§27, 2, a), Dagh. forte being omitted in 1 §22, 5,
a: D^-ina (3, §35, i?ew. 2, and No. 2, B, a; D^nnb ; innn^ (^n,
* A thorough mastery of the exercises in this Section, ■will save the student
much perplexity and trouble in his subsequent reading. The lexicon should ba
consulted ou each word, and on the elements given in the analysis. — In recitation,
the Hebrew form should be written on the blackboard, to be analyzed by the stu-
dent from memory.
EXERCISES IN ANALYt^LS. . 19
§89, 2, a) ; 155 j Ujb ; ri5?b (;?, in pmise §29, 4 ; :, aS'/Y^m^ § 15
A, 1, 1 ; _ for - §29, 4, 6, §91, 1, table); ni55b (ni, §87, 2 ,
with a 77iasc. noun, ibid. No. 4) ; DH'^rihS (h. defectively/ Avritten
§ 8, 4 ; "Ti— ; double expression of tlie phi?\ §91, 3) ; n^^n (n_,
§90, 2, «).
8. T]2ri«^,/rom ?% /a?i£Z; )'a, §102, 1, 6; "l^ns, inonosyll
root ^-!S, Parad. VI, a ; stiff . ^-.
9. inS'S, «i 7^5 season: 3, n? (Parad. VIII), i.
10. is^'a^a, «i ^/5 right hand: 3, 'j^'a;i (Parad. Ill), i ; "^n, as
in No. 5.
11. '7\'Z'\p12,froJ7i th9/ midst : 'j'52, i*!)? (lit. i/HyfW'c^^jar/, Parad.
VI, a, suffix form Sip, p. 170, Reins. 2d IF), 7|. — Write in Heb. in
our midst, and in thy (f.) midst, from their midst ; my inward
quarts {light siff. p. 166, Note), and in his inivard 'part, and in
their inward part, in 7ny inioard part {loithin me), in your
inward parts.
12. DS', people : DI^H the people, H art. § 35, 2, B, a : "^SjpT
D^n elders of the people ; llpT plur. constr. Parad. V ; U$T\ '^pJp-T'ai
and of {the) elders of the people, "^ No. 3.
13. '^!^r5'3, on my affliction: a, ^':'S_ (orig. monosyll. root yp^,
Parad. Yl,i, p. 171, Rem. 6 ; like ibn, with suff. ^-hV}), suff. V-
14. D'lSaiitn'l, a?id the stones: W^— plur. ending ; 15^5 stone,
Parad. VI, a ; 'n art., § 35, 1 ; 1 . I^TJTCb^ (ir, § 8, 2, 2d 1), TJlO ^a/
Par^. ac^. (— defectively written § 8, 4, §50, Rem.) ; Parad. VII.
15. ''T'inni^bl, a7id I have taken thee: ^hr)inpb|^ ; npb, iTa^
Perf. 1 5m^. "^ri n^b I hcive taken ; with 6?(^. ^hriln^b (§59. and
§ 58 table, and 3, a ; tone, § 59, 2, § 27, 3, a)] 1. Give the forms
with suff. for I have taken them, thee (f.), /wm, /ier, you (m. & f ).
16. Iljrilnpb, thoiL hast taken us : Perf 2 m. sing. I^injbb.
17. "^pnj^b, Ac ^oo/v we; Hpb and ■'?I^, §58, 3, b; for vowel-
clianges see tSect. V, Rules i and ii, §27, 3, a, and 2, a. Give
the form with the suffixes her, him, us, them, you (m. & f.).
18. "ibllJ'aS, according' to his ruling-: btO)a Ae ruled; Infin.
constr. bilJ^ (a kind of verbal noun, §45, 1, §132, 1 and 2), to
rule, the ruling ; with suff. ibi^tt (__=(5)^ §61, 1, p. 171, Rem.
4, /u5 ruliiig ; 5, § 102, 2.
19. isbiaa (^b/O , hif constr. '^f'b'a), ^^/ie?* he reigned {began to
reign), lit. in (or a^) /i?5 reigning.
20. bDX, Ac «^e, Inf. constr. bbx ; i:bDS3 (§61, 1), when we
ate (or eat), lit. mi (at the time of) our eating ; DsbDSa (_ =6)
20 EXERCISES IN HEBREW GRAMMAR.
iDhen ye eat {in or at your eating) ; D^'p^X (§ 61, Rejn. 2), § 27,
I ; with prefix 3, DD^DXa (§28, 2), in your eating = when ye eat.
21. "^"'^'111, and when I speak, lit. and in my speaking ;
"12^ (like bDp), Inf. constr. Piel of "in'n ; change of 3 to ^, >S'ecif.
Vj Rule VI. Give the forms with other suffixes.
22. ''pDT^b, that I may diuell (there), lit. /or {in order to) my
divelling; V, P^ (^«/ co?istr. of ]2W) ■ b (§ 102, 2, § 132, 2).
23. ^nilJSia (_ =d, p. 31, 1, a), Ti\s: (§ 8, 2, 2d H) Parad. VI, c.
—Analyze : '^b™'? (5nS) ; n, § 22, 4 ; !s^ (_ =e), Methegh, j 16,
2, a. ^^v^a, n, §22, 4, e/ic/.
24. ^DbsmtJ, loho, in our Jiumiliation : •'it, for ItTS?,
§36, §19, 3, a, and 2, 6 ; a ; bsiij, Parad. VI, h ; suff.
25. nn'iT;! ; % Sl04, 2', c; see No. 5.— "jn^T^.
26. inabn)21, and of their fat: ^, No. 3 ; ^, No. 4 ; in^bn,
plnr. constr. of mbn (Parad. VI, Z), § 93, Expl. 6, i^em. 2), com-
bined with the suff. §91, 2, and defectively written, ibid. Rem.
1 ; a hardened (irregularly), compare Parad. VI, a, phir. grave
suff., and §21, 2, a; (but softened (3), in some editions of the
Heb. Bible.)
27. asiana, when they are {were or shall he) created, lit. i/i
their being created: 3 ; S^'I^H, A'iiyjA. //?/. constr. of S?'i3 Parad.
O ; with s7/ff. {nominal, §61, 1), Di<'i|n, 'i, A'ec^f. V, i??^/e vi.
28. Drii"^n3, lohen they are {were or shall be), lit. in their be-
ing: a ; ni"'n, ^aZ //?/. constr. from n^n, a verb Pe guttural
and Lamedh He (§41, Rem.); Parad. D must, therefore, be
consulted for the initial Aa/f-syllable, and Parad. P for the final
syllable, and so in all cases, when a verb belongs to more than
one class ; with the prefix 2, fli"'?!^ § 63, Rem. 5 ; nominal suff.
§61,2.
29. '^ri5"in^1, and then he sleio him: .V"lfl^, Kal Impf from
yy), Parad. D ; •'l, Vav consecutive of the Imjif. §49, 1 and 2,
and Rem. ; with the suff'. '^ftl-, the final tone4ong o is short-
ened to a half-vowel {Sect. V, Rule vi, p. 16), hence 'H^nn^l, and
then ^ninni^l, §28, 3 ; i^ (not 5), §21, 2, a.
30. T^pi^?"); (^^id unto thee: conj. ; jjrep., originally a noun
(of space) §101, 1, in the plnr. implying extension, § 103, 3 and
§ 108, 2, a ; hence with a suff. to a. plur. noun ; see p. 190, 4th
line, and comp. the inliection of Parad. II. It is originally a
noun, in the accusative of place whither, § 118. 1, a ; lit. and to
the region of thee = and towards thee, and unto thee.
HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
SELECTIONS FOR CHRESTOMATHY.
SELECT PORTIONS TO BE EEAD IN THE HEBREW BIBLE.
NOTES.
I. General account of the creation, Gen. i.-ii 3. Page 25
n. More particular account of the creation of the
first human pair, and of the circumstances
in which they were placed. Gen. u. 4-25. 31
HL Temptation and fall of man, Gen. iii, 35
rV. Death of Abel ; immediate descendants of
Gain, Gen. iv. 89
V. Account of the flood. Gen. "vl-viii. 43
VL Jotham's parable, Judg. ix. 1-21. 48
VII. Raising of Samuel, 1 Sam. xxviii 3-25. 49
Vni. Nathan's parable, 2 Sam. xii. 1-14. 61
SELECTIONS IN POETRY.
Preliminary remarks on the form of Hebrew
poetry, 68
IX. Charge to the night-watch in the temple,
and their response,
X. Profession of humility,
XI. Preciousness of fraternal union,
XIL A general psalm of thanksgiving,
Xni. The captivity, a commemorative psalm,
XIV. Rewards of piety,
XV. Assertion of Jehovah's supremacy; security
of those who trust in him, Ps. cxv. 62
XVI. God's exaltation above all, and his care for
the lowly, Ps. csdii. 63
XVIL Worth of wisdom, Peov. iii 13-24 64
Ps. CXXXIV.
68
Ps. CXXJO,
59
Ps. cxxxiii.
59
Ps. cxxxvi.
60
Ps. cxxxviL
61
Ps. cicsvii.
62
21
I^OTES
SELECTIONS FOK CHRESTOMATHY.
The student is supposed to be already familiar with the elementary
principles taught in Part I. of the grammar, and fully illustrated in the
preceding Exercises.
The following Notes are strictly limited to the wants of the learner,
and are intended to supply the place of oral instruction, in acquiring the
elementary knowledge of the language. The instruction is given, as far
as possible, by references to the grammar and lexicon. — References to
paradigms of verbs include the §§ quoted at the top of the page ; referen
ces to paradigms of nouns include the explanations subjoined. An attempt
is made to interest the learner in the neglected use of the accents. Of
course, the more difficult laws of their combination are reserved for maturer
study. — It is recommended to the learner, to mark in the grammar every
passage to which his attention is directed in the following Notes.
Hahn's and Theile's editions of the Hebrew Bible are referred to, as
being in common use in our schools. The references to the lexicon, are
to the fifth, improved edition of Dr. Robinson's translation of Gesenius'
Hebrew Lexicon, 1854.
I.
GENERAL ACCOUNT OP THE CREATION.
Genesis, ch. i. — ii. 3.
V. 1. tr^m^% ; a, §102, 2 ; rr^Csn, §86, Rem. 6 ; position
in the sentence, § 145, 1, d.
The little circle on 3 (§17) refers lo the margmal note, which means
Beth magnum. See the clavis notariim masorethicarum at the end of
the Hebrew Bible, where these marginal notes are alphabetically arran-
ged and explained. In this instance, look for m in Hahn's ed. (in
Theile's, for Tisi , and the word there referred to).
26 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
ii'na, Parad. O : sing, with plur. subject, §146, 2 ; position
before the subject, § 145, 1, d. Ci^'^N ; from •jl'i^S?, Parad. I ;
P attach furtive, §22, 2, 6/ 6 defectively written in the plural,
§ 8. 4 ; use of the plur., § 108, 2, h. rx, sign of the definite
occns. ; oiig. form and meaning, § 117, 2, and Note. D"'121!l;"n ;
§88, 1, Rem. 1; article, §35, 1st 1, §109, 3d 1. 7"}^^^ ]
art. § 35, 1 ; f "IS (monosyll. root, 7"*^?), Parad. VI, a, with Eiyl
6, and (for — under S) Rem. 1, fifth hne. iS'illuq (not Methegh),
§ 15, Refji. 4, Note *. Soph-pasnk, § 15, A, I, 1.
This verse is divided by the accents (§15, spec. No. 3), as follows:
a double hyphen indicating the connection of words by a conjunctive,
and a dash the great division in the middle of a verse by Athnach
[breathing): In-the-beginning, created=God — the-heavens, ancUthe-earth.
More literally: Jji-principio, creavit=Deiis — ipsum-caelum^ijysam^^ue^
terram. In this manner, every acliierbial limitation of time, place, or
other circumstance, the action and its subject, and the object of the action.
are presented separately, each by itself, as a distinct idea. But the
Hebrew accent has also a rhetorical use ; a pause in utterance being
often indicated after the subject (especially if it is the name of the
Divine Being), as in this verse, and in each of the three clauses in the
next verse. Here, it is a greater pause than usual, as it falls in with
the grand division of the verse.
V. 2. nn^in, Parad. P ; Methegh, § 16, 2, a. ^nn and ^ns
are prop, of Parad. VI, c (the O sound), and i (viz. with a final
vowel-letter) ; comp. §24, 1, 6, p. 151, V, 15, and p. 171, Rem.
6. Use of the substantive as predicate in place of an adjective,
§106, Rem. 1, 2d H ; omission of the copnla, §144; the ^r^^
accent marks the tone-syllable; ), §104, 2, d. 1\tin (§8, 2,
2d 1), Parad. VI, c. "5^, §101, 1, a, §154, 3, b ; Maqqeph,
§ 16, 1. — -''DS (lex. rOE), Parad. IX ; pbir. § 87, 5, i?em. 2, and
§ 108, 2. a. — — D'inri, Parad. I ; ri softened by the closing vowel-
sound of the preceding word, p. 11 of the Exercises. Jim
(§22, 2, b), Parad. I. risnnia, from ^lin, Parads. D and E,
Piel Part. (— in a sharpened syll. §22, 1, §64, 3); with /ew.
ending, §80, 2, b, and §94, 2, b; syntax, § 134, 2, c. D^i:n,
§88, 1, Rem. 1 ; Qamets m. pause, §29, 4, a.
V. 3. -i^S5''T, Parad. O ; -T, §49, 1 and 2, §129, 1 ; "i^ for
1)2 (viz. obscure — for the clear — , when, the syllable loses the
accent), comp. §27, 1, with Rem. 2, and §68, 1, extr. ; sing.
with 2)lur. subject, as in ver. 1 (1 and 2) ; position, § 145, 1, a ;
L ACCOUNT OF THE CREATION. 27
W7ij. accent Merka (§ 15, table, 21) connecting the verb with its
subject. "^Ty}, from n^ri (Parad. P), Kal Impf. apocopated
(§ 48, 1, 2, and 4 ; § 75, Remarks, 3, i) ; used as a Jussive, § 128,
2, comp. § 127, 3, c. — — '^Ty^'y ; the same, with Vav consecutive,
§118, 1, c^; omission of doubling- point in '^, §10, 3, c, Rem.;
Methegh, § 16, 1, a.
V. 4. X-i:!l ; from nxn (Parads. D, E, and F), Kal Impf. aj)oc.
§ 75, Remarks, 3. c ; conj. accent Darga (No. 26), connecting
verb and subject. tli? as in verb I (4) ; orig. vowel shortened
before Maqqeph (§ 16, 1, and § 27, 1) ; comp. table of vowel-signs,
p. 24, 3d class, e. — - nisn, art. § 35, 1. — nit3, Parad. I. Ad-
jectives are inflected like substantives. Saw, that good (was it) :
the copula is not usually expressed in Hebrew (§ 144) ; nor is the
subject, when it would be a pronoun referring to something just
mentioned. ^"^"^y] , from b'12 , Hiph. Impf. apoc. ("•— short-
ened to —J § 48, 4), with Vav consec. § 53, Rem. 4. )'^2'^ • • • V?
(^, § 104, 2, 6) ; prop, the constr. state of X!% (Parad. VI, h), in the
accus. § 118, 3; loith a division, or separation. Lit. and inade
a division, with a separation of the light (to one side, in time),
and with a separation of the darkness (to the other) ; = divided
between the light and the darkness. 'iJT^nn ; art., form §35,
2, A, a, syntax § 109, 3d H.
The place o? Athnach {breathing) is properly about the middle of the
verse, which it divides into two nearly equal parts (§ 15, A, I, 2), gener-
ally corresponding to a division in the sense. See, e. g. verses 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 8, 14, 17, 20. When, however, the first member of the verse con-
sists of several minor divisions, and the second member is short in com-
parison, Athnach then stands nearer the end, as in verses 7, 9, 11, 12, 15 ;
and vice versa, it is nearer the beginning, when the second member ia
made longer by embracing several divisions.
V. 5. Cti'JX has two accents, viz. the conj. No. 24, and the
disj. No. 20. The latter shows its relation to the sentence ; the
former is added to mark the tone-syllable, which the other, from
its position, would not do. lixb (lixrib) ; §35, 1, and Re?n.
2, §102, 2, b. nv, §96 : 5/;^ o-. /of Parad. I ; plur., of Parad.
II. ^T?n^); ), ), -0, ami ;|Tyn. rh->}{b'^'^, Parad. VI.
h) ; ri— . obsolete accusative ending § 90, 2 ; b in 2)ause, § 29, 4, a.
— — ''T^'^^, as in ver. 3. 1"?:? and "ij^a, Parad. VI, a and c.
"ins, cardinal for ordinal, lex. 2. Meaning: And there
was evening (i. e. evening came on, the close of a period of light),
28 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHT.
and there ivas morning (the close of a period of darkness), a first
day (comp. § 111, 2, a).
The letter S marks a section in the Jewish division of the text. See
the Clavis Not. Masoret., letter 's. 3, in Hahn^ and rvO'^ti in Theile.
V. 6. ^ryi, as in ver. 3. TT^ (§22, 2, 6), of the form No.
5, §84 ; Parad. III. -lina ; 3, and constr. state of 1\)T\ Par-
ad. VI, ^. a:^^n, §88, l', Rem. 2; 13, § 29, 4, a. "^ri'il ;
for "^n^l , then "^n;''] §28, 1, then ^rr^^ §24, 1, a; Jussive, § 128, 2,
aH(Z let it be. '^'^'^n'a, from b'la iifi/jA. Par/., Parad. B ; let
it be dividing = let it divide. D'^'a^ ; b for b, §102, 2, c, /.
b , . . "j'^a, iz;i/A a separation of waters towards waters, i. e.
so that each body of water should be opposite to the other, facing
towards it. — See another explanation in the lex., X!"^. 1, mid.
V. 7. (1) from ntoy, Pe guttural, and Lamedh He (see Par-
ad. D for initial^ and Parad. P for final syll.), Kal Impf. apoc.
with Vav consec, §75, Remarks,'^, d. Snfi^, as in ver. 4.
TVT^ ; art., form §35, 1, syntax §109, 3d 1 ; the accent (No.
4) is postpositive (§ 15, Retn. 2), and the tone-syllable must be
learned where it is marked by another accent (as in the preceding
verse), or from the structure of the word (§ 22, 2, b, and Note).
-^ b tT\T\12 ; I'D part of, constr. state of the noun y&, § 154, 3,
c ; rinn, space beneath, § 101, 1, a ; b (b in foil, word, § 102, 2, c),
belonging to, § 115, 2 ; which are o/(lit. p>tirt of) the under-space
belonging to= which are beneath. b b^ia ; ya § 102, 1, b, by
§ 101, \, a ; part of the upper space belonging to= above.
And it becaine so (a fixed, established thing).
V. 8. rp"?^ ; ^, \l, §35, 1, and Rem. 2, § 102, 2, c. ^5©,
§98 ; a second day, § 111, 2, a.
V. 9. ^^1?:^ ; ni)?, Parad. P (comp. §72, Remarks, 10), M/^A.
Impf. ; for the /m;j. 3 j)ers. § 127, 3, c ; reflexive, § 51, 2, a.
bx, §103, 3, §154, 3, d. Dipia, of the form No. 14, §84
(comp. §85, IV, 14), Parad. III. ^i^"}^) ; !^i?t' {Pe guttural,
Ayin guttural, and Lamedh He, Parads. D, E, P) ; Niph. Impf.
for the Imp. 3 pers. ; passive, § 51, 2, d : the full instead of the
shortened form, § 127, 3, b, extr. •^l?^!!^ ; art., and fern, of
the adj. mi (§ 84, 6), like /} '^rjQa.
V. 10. nij?iabl ; ni;?ti, of the form No. 14, §84 (comp. §85,
V, 14), place of collecting, see the verb, ver. 8 (3) ; constr. state,
Parad. IX. n'^^1, Parad. VIII, Expl 8, 1.
1. ACCOUNT OF THE CREATION. 29
V. 11. KtiJnn, Parad. O, Hiph. Impf. apoc. §128, 2.
nte?, Parad. VI, h, Expl 6, Remarks, 2. T"}]"^, Hiph. Part. ;
syntax §138, 1, Rem. 1. S?"?!, Parad. VI, a, §22, 2, a.
"ins, Parad. VI, i, syntax §106, 1. ''"IS liiDV {^6-sep-p^-ri).
§ 20, 2, a ; nfey (D and P), Kal Part. 'i|3^'a|V ia , § 103,
2, a ; ia . . . ItDX in which, § 123, 1. Above the earth (aloft
over), in reference to its towering trunk.
V. 12. (1), from TO^, §76, 2, d [Pe Yodh. first class, §69,
and Lamedh Aleph ; see Parad. K for the initial, and Parad. O
for the final syll.) ; Hiph. Impf. apoc. with Vav cons. § 128, 2, d.
b, 1^)3, ^rC:, table, §91, 1. Xn^^r ver. 4, (1). V. 13.
{ult.), § 98.
V. 14. (3), ver. 3, (3) ; position, § 145, 1, a ; number, § 147, a.
(4), "\to (from niK to shine, § 84, 14, comp. § 85, IV, 14,
place of shining-, or of giving light) ; defect, written, § 8, 4 ;
masc. noun with /em. plur. ending, §87, 4. bi'ianb ; b, lex.
C— nb;'>n, see ver. 5. W1 (n;'^), ^aZ Per/ 3 jw^-, with
Vav cons. oV the Pe?/ § 49, 1, and § 126, 6, c. nhi«b ; b, lex.
A, 2 ; riix, with /em. plur. ending, defect, written (§8,4), in
both syllables. n^l'ia (§84, 14, comp. §85, III, 14), Parad.
VII ; 'I, § 155, a, 2d T {hendiadys). In the next word (Di'^, ver.
5), 1 is explicative [ibidem), and indeed = namely. And let
them be for signs of set periods, even for days and years.
D'^2TS , plur. of riDTD ; see § 95, Parad. B, a, and compare lex.
V. 15. (1), as in preced. verse. For lights ; ^, lex. A, 2.
TSinb ; b, and Hiph. Inf. constr. of ni«, Parad. M.
. V. 16. (1), as in ver. 7, (1). ''StD , § 97, 1, and table ; constr
state, prop, twain of, comp. §91, 3, Rem. 2. The two
lights ; art., see § 111, 1. D'^^'ljin (Parad. Ill), lit. the great
ones, an expression of the superlative, § 119, 2 ; positio7i, § 112
1. The greater light, — and the lesser light ; § 119, 1, 4th H
For the ruling of the day ; tb^WZ, constr. state of ribtj'a'a
(§ 95, Parad. B, and Expl. 1, 3d 1), fern, of the form No. 'l'4,
§ 83 (comp. § 94, 2, a). [ult.) Parad. II, accus. after i»?:'1 .
V. 17. (1), inp, Pe Nun verb, Parad. H, Kal Impf (§66, 2),
with Vav cons. QC^; § 103, 1, Rem. 1 ; comp. § 121, 4, Rem.
extr.
30 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
V. 18. (1), % b, bic^. (2), a-, -n, niv (3), ), a n,
nb-'b. Y. 19. {nit.) §98.
V. 20. y^W, §138, 1, Rem. 1 : comp. lex.'pffi, 1. — "iJ^.?
lex. 4, and H^H lex. 3, living animal (collect, animals), in oppo-
sition with Vnir. qeir ; q^5>, Parad. M, Pi/eZ Imjjf. (§55,
Remarks, 2).-^— ''5S, ver. 2 ; b?, lex. 3, h. V. 21. l^sn, of
the form No. 7, § 83. n^nn (lex. n^n, 3), art. § 111, 2, a.
bs (bb, Parad. VIII), followed by the art. § HI, 3d 1. Disj.
accent Pesiq, table, No. 20. ^iO^""^^ 5 art. §109, 2d H, 2 ;
Kal Part. with. fern, ending, §94, 2, b. "itCi?, accus., ivith
which the waters creep, or swarm ; comp. references on ver. 20.
5153, Parad. IV ; syntax §106, 1, fowl of wing = winged
fowl.
V. 22. (1), Parad. E, Piel Impf with Vai consecutive ; with
retracted tone § 29, 3, a, and shortened final vowel § 27, 1 ; comp.
§ 64, Rem. 2, h. (2), see ver. 17. ibi^b (b, nbx, Parad. I),
§23, 2 ; a sort of Gertmd {dicendo, §45, 3), in sayings saying.
^15 (and foil, word), Parad. P. Observe the par anomasia,
in the three verbs connected by ^. U'^'lZ'^^ ; 3, -n, Q"^, Parad.
yill, -in': (nn*!, Parad. P), §75, Remarks, 3, a; comp. §26,
3, a; Jussive.
V. 24. (3), comp. ver. 12, (1); here, it is the Jussive.
in^m (n^n, §95, Parad. A) ; orig. fern, form n;:n (§80, 2) with
the obsolete constr. ending i, §90, 3, h, and Rein.
V. 26. (3), §108, 2, b. (5), 3, Qbs, Parad. VI, a, ^5_.
(6), n^^^, Parad. I ; §84, 16. ^'^^^^ ; nr^, Parad. P.
ra^a ; 3, nW, §95, P^rad. ^, a ; r^ soft, §21, 2, a. V. 27.
in"^, see veryi7, (2). nsT, Parad. IV.
V. 28. (1), ver. 22. Onb, §102, 2, c, /3, and §103, 2, a,
[table.) ™^P^ ; TZJaS, Kal Imp. 2 jylur. 1T1J33, with svff. P
(toftZe §58, it,fem. for ??ez«;., comp. §80, 1); — for 1 defectively
written, § 9, 9, b, and § 8, 4, i?em. a.
V. 29. "'nn:, §66, iZem. 3. DDb, comp. ver. 28, (5). — -
?nT ; 3?nt, Kal Part. Parad. F. i3-^tD^{, comp. on ver. 11.
— ^3>nT (see ver. 11), §29, 4, a. {ult.) b, lex. A, 2, mid. ;
nbps (1 =d),/em. of bDi5 (§94, 1, £a;5. ParacZ. VI), §95, Parad.
d'c, Expl 2.
II. ACCOUNT OF THE CREATION. 3l
V. 30. n^n m) breath of life; lex. 11JS.3,-1, and n^n, 3.
bs-lriK, governed by "^I^rip, ver. 29, (4). 'p''\';, syntax §106, 1,
Rem. 1 ; every green herb (lit. all greenness of herbs), viz. of
all kinds, §111, 3d T V. 31. littt, §100, 2, 6. (iilt.),
§111, 2, «.
Ch. II. V. 1. (1); nbs (Parad. P), intrans. to be complete;
Piel, causative, to make complete (§ 52, 2, b) ; Pual, j)assive of
Piel (§39, 4, table, § 52, 1), ^o be made complete, to be finished;
here, Pnal Impf with Far? consec, . . . ^Ai«5 were finished.
{lilt.), Parad. IV (final vowel affected in some of its forms by the
quiescence oi ^).
V. 2. (1), Piel Impf. {p^p^) apoc, §75, 5, and Remarks, 10.
(5), from HDSb'a ; for inflection, comp. § 95, ExpL 1, 3d 1".
The proper form of the noun is '^^5<^^ (/e^'i- of the form No. 14, §83),
Parad. B. c, in §95. But the sound of X is lost to the ear, and its vowel
is consequently heard in connection with b, which it unites in a syllable
with itself, §23, 2. The short, closed syllable before it, losing the sup-
port of its final consonant, becomes a half-syllable ; comp. Sect. V, Bute vi.
— On the seventh day. The meaning is : that the beginning of the sev-
enth day closed the work of the preceding days, which continued through
the sixth, and closed on (i. e. with the beginning of) the seventh. It
might appear superfluous to remark this, so obviously consonant with
the simplicity of the style ; had not inattention to the writer's manner
led to a change of the text (seventh to sixth, in the Sept. »fec.), lest the
sanctity of the Sabbath should seem to have been violated by its Author.
( Ult.), b, nils?, a kind of gerundial form, § 45, 3. • • • i^na
niicyb created in making, i. e. made by creation ; the first verb
qualifying the second, § 142, 4, Rem. 1.
II.
MORE PARTICULAR ACCOUNT OF THE CREATION OF THE
FIRST HUMAN PAIR, AND OF THE CIRCUMSTANCES IN
WHICH THEY WERE PLACED.
Genesis, ch. ii. 4—25.
The first three verses of this chapter belong to the general account
of creation given in ch. i, and should have been included in it.
V. 4. (1); §34, table ; phir, to correspond with the noun.
(2), of the form No. 27, § 84, comp. § 85, III, 27 ; lex. 2. — (5),
32 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
a, i{'ia?l, Niph. Inf. constr. with suff. D— , §45, 1 ; shortening
of the final, prosodially long vowel. Sect. V, Rule vi ; in their
being created = when they were created (§ 132, Nos. 2 and 3).
The circle on T\ (§ 17) refers to the note in the margin {He par-
vum). Lit. in the day of Jehovah God's making earth and
heaven. The Inf. has here its subject in the genitive ; this fol-
lows first, and then its object in the accusative ; see § 133, Nos.
2 and 3.
V. 5. bs is followed by a verb with a negation (contained in
D^lt?) ; any plant of the field was not yet in the earth = there
was yet no plant of the field in the earth. See § 152, 1, 2d 1".
Plant of the field = fie]d-p\sint, viz. wild plants; lex. fTlte, 1,
extr. n^lto, Parad. IX. ^DTJ {7wt yet, lex. 2), with the
Impf § 127, 4, a, and Note t. ^'''^^^ {Hiph. Perf) ; posi-
tion, §145, 1, d. X!^., lex. 2, and Note at the end. 1h?b
for tilli?ig, § 45, 3. {idt.), § 95, Parad. B, c.
V. 6. The Impf. nbs?;' (nb:?, Parads. D and P), expresses the
continued ascent of vapors, from time to time (§ 127, 4, b) ; on
the contrary, the watering of the ground (as a single act, com-
pleted at once), is expressed by the Perfect tense, . . . and it wa-
tered, &c. The Vav is here a simple conjunction.
V. 7. (1), from "IS^ of the second class of verbs Pe Yodh,
Parad. L, see § 69, 2d H ; lex. (both under one root) No. 2. The
proper to7ie of the word (on the penultimate, § 29, 3, a), is not
marked here by the written accent (the co?ij. little Telisha, No.
28) ; see § 15, Remarks, 2. Final syll. as in ver. 3, (1).
D'IbJJI, art. §109, 2. IBS', of dust, accus. of material, §139,
2,' 2d 1.- ^ns^l, from'ns;, Parad. H.- ^^B«^ ; ^, B«
(contr. of Sl3i<, § 19, 2, a, and 2d l, §93, E3:pl. 8, 2), Dual with
suff. §91, 2 ; i7ito his nostrils, lex.vji? (II). •^'312?? ; here in
the ong.feni. form (§ 80, 2, 2d If) for the constr. state (§ 89, 2, b) ;
Parad. A, p. 175, the first syllable being unchangeable by posi-
tion, §25, 3, and Note. D'l^n, Parad. VIII, §93, Expl. 8, 1 ;
plur. §108, 2, a; breath o/ Zi/e == life-breath. {tdt.), see lex.
m:, 4, and n^H, 3.
V. 8. (1), 5?t:5, Parads. H and F.^ — -)^, Parad. VIII, Expl.
8, 1. ni)^, )12, § 154, 3, c; lit. part of the east, 07i the east,
viz. of the writer and the readers whom he had in view.
n. ACCOUNT OF THE CREATION. 33
t3TC^T ; d^te and Q'TC, Kal Impf. §73, 2, mid. Observe the
division of the verse, and the correct accentuation of each word,
by the accents.
V. 9. (1), Hiph. Impf. apoc. (§ 65, 1, last IF), with Vav cons.
§128, 2, d. "im, Niph. Part., §134, 1, at the end.
nsn^', § 84, 14, Parad! IX. ^Di?^, ibid. Parad. II. D^t'nn ;
lex.' "^n (Parad. VIII), B^ subst. plur., §108, 2, a; art. §111, 1.
^ina, ver. 6, (5). n?^ (S?'!^ Parads. K and F), Kal
I?if. with fern, ending-, §69, 1, 4th IF, and 3, Ref?i. 1 ; used as a
verbal noun (§ 83, 1 and 2), § 85, III, 10), and as such governing
the case of its verb (here the accus.), § 133, 1. 2d IF. (nit.),
), §104, 2, d; y^, §29,4, a.
V. 10. (1), Parad. IV. (2), X2^, Kal Part., syritax § 133,
2, c. (4), njpffi, Parad. P, H^ip/i. /n/. with b ; comp. §52, 3,
Rem. 7. nii^] 1, yn, DTB, §150, 1, and '2d T '^nB^
M/:>/i. Impf. This is analogous to the case given in § 127, 4, a ;
thenceforth having the same influence on the use of the tense,
whether referring to space or time. "^^0% §125, 6, a.
(wZ^.)f lex. TCS5-I (I), prop. TC^JT, Parad. VI, c ; hence, pliir. D^T2?iJ"l,
Expl. 6, Rem. 3, 2d 1, and tlien W'm'} § 23, 2, of Parad. I.
For the /orm and gender of the numeral, see § 97, 1.
V. 11. (1), Parad. VII. (2), ver. 5, {iilt.) (3), §84,
15. (5), 130, Parad. G, Kal Part, with art. ; syntax § 110,
3, Rem. That traverses, lex. 2. ^Z^ #Ae la^id of Havilah ;
art. with the gen. § 111, 1 ; bb followed by the art. § 111, 3d IT.
mr...niCS<!, §123, 1. {ult.), art. §109, Rem. b.
V. 12. (1), !, § 10, 2, Rem. b. Vi^r\r\, §32, Remarks, No.
6, 2d % and No. 8 ; art. § 111, 2. Hit:, proper place of adj.
as predicate, §145, 1, b. {tilt.), art. §111, 1, §109, 3, Rem.
b. ^V. 13. (4), comp. ver. 11, (3). {nit.), see art. ttJ^S (by
Dr. Robinson) in the lex. V. 14. n^a'lp, §95, Parad. A, first
syll. unchangeable by position, §25, 3 ; acciis. of place, §118,
1, b. {last clause), order of words, § 145, 2.
V. 15. (1), §66, Rem. 2. ^nns;:^ ; mi, Parad. M, Hiph.
Impf. (n'^3^), § 72, Remarks, 9 ; long t retained with siiff"., § 60,
Rem. 5 ; furtive Pattach falls away, § 22, 2, 6, 3d ^ ; defect.
written; with Vav consec. and suff. {pe?i7ilt. iS^ nit.), Kal
Inf. "ih? (Parad. D), and ibUJ, with suff. §61, 1, and prefix b ; ^
softened, § 21, 2, ^:rc. a.
3'4 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
V. 16. (1), m (Parad. P, and § 72, Remarks, 10), Piel Imp/,
apoc. (§ 75, Remarks, 10), with Vav consec. , "^ without Dagh.
h 20, 3, b. (6), ver. 22, (4). {ult. c^- penult.), Parad. I ;
use of Inf. ahsol. h 131, 3, a ; of Impf. § 127, 3, d ; thoii mayest
with eating eat = thou mayest freely eat.
V. 17. (1), ),)'!2, fy. For foil, words, comp. ver. 9.
bss^n (with final a), used jussively, § 128, 2, b ; but comp. § 68,
J, extr. "'lilS^, §103, 2, and table, c, '3d pej's. tn. ^V?^
{kh6l, §27, li'/S'ec^. V, Rule iv), Kal Inf. with siiff., §61,\,
i?e7?i. 2 ; in the day of thy eating thereof. {ult. ^ j)e?iult.),
Kal Impf. and I?if. absol. of niia, Parad. M ; ye shall with
dying die = shall surely die (as in ver. 16). *
V. 18. ni^n, §132, 1; its subject, §133, 2. iinb ; na,
noun of Parad. VIII, with st/ff., and b, § 154, 3, e, 2d IF ; m^ /its
separation = alone, § 100, 2, a. ib , § 20, 2, a. "1T5?, Pa-
rad. VI, b. (ult.), 5, X15 (lex. B, 1), i.
V. 19. (1), see ver. 7, (1); here, defect, written. iiS^'l ;
i^iS (Parads. M & O, §76, 2,/), Hiph. Impf apoc; he caused
to come = he brought. f^'ii^'lb (HiJ"!), for seeing = in order
to see, §45, 3. ib"S}'np';'TTa, pronounced as one word, 9?iay-
yik-rd-lo , with the full accent on the final syllable. The eu-
phonic Daghesh, and the Maq(jeph, are designed to preserve
such delicacies of vernacular enunciation. ("Ta), § 37, 1, a, comp.
§27, 1. For all which (wliatever) the Qnan shoidd call to it,
the livbig being, that (should be) its name : expressing the pur-
pose of God, in bringing them to him. Should call, § 127, 3, d ;
call to, § 140, 6, = to name, comp. i. 5 ; TlJSD in apposition with
i (in ib).
V. 20. (3), Parad. VII ; pi. ending, § 87, 4. XS^, § 137, 3.
V. 21. (1), bSD, Hiph. Impf (4), /em. of form No. 27,
§84; Parad. A, p. 175. )^^'J^ ; )V.^, Parad. K ; Impf A,
and initial Yodh retained, §69, 1, bottom of p. 123 ; Qamets in
pause, §29, 4, a. r\'p_^'\, ver. 15, (1). Tni^b^^ ; ybir,
Parad. IV, Expl. 4. 2d IF, and Rem. ; double indication of the
plur., §91, Z.——{idt.), rinri, ver. 7, (9); with verbal siiff.
{accus.), § 103, 1, Rem. 3.
V. 22. (1), nja, §75, Remarks, 3, a. niEsb ; b, lex. A,
2 ; §96, nTDS. — «^n^1 (ver. 19), Hiph. Impf', full form with
m. TEMPTATION AND FALL OF MAN. 35
8uff. (§60, Re7n. 5) ; verbal suff. §58, table, with un^on-vowel e,
No. 3, 6, taking the tone, § 59, 2 ; hence the shortening of pre-
tonic damets ; KD defect, written.
V. 23. (3), §34. (4), D?S, Paracl. VI, d, lex. 3, a; art.
§109, 2d 1. DSy, Paracl. VI, a. li?!, Farad. IV.
^'y^'! (Niph. Imp/.); masc. with /em. subject, §147, a; to this
one, shall be called woman = this shall be named woman.
tJ'^Jit'a, §96, tCiX. {penult.), nj:b, Pual ; JJ^, with Chateph
Qamets, §10, 2, Rem. 3d 1 ; (in Theile^s ed., erroneously, JJ ,
with Dagh.). {ult.), with eujjhonic Dagh., §20, 2, a.
V. 24. (1 & 2), lex. 15, near the end. (3), nt?;: (Farad.
D), § 27, 1. l-^nsj, § 96, ax C^nK with suff., § 91, 1, ^a6Ze, Rem.
a.) ilGS ; DS5, Farad. VIII. pn^l (a verb middle A 6r E,
§43, 1, with Imjif. A, §47, Rem. 2) ; §126, 6, a. i|m2KlSi ;
§96, TOES, §95, jB^r;^/. 3, i2em. {j)emdt.), ver. 23, (7); h ,
lex. A, 2.
V. 25. (2), §97, Rem. 2, at the end. (3), lex. Diny, Fa-
rad. VIII ; i shortened to % § 27, Remarks, 1 ; the asterisk (§ 17)
refers to the marginal note, " Daghesh after Shureq ;" for ? in
a sharpened syllable (§26, 6), see §27, Remarks, 1. {iilf.),
TSi3, Farad. M (mid. O), §72, Remarks, 1; unusual, reflexive
conj. Hithpolel (passive, Hithpolal), §55, 2, and §72, 7; ^owe
shifted to the pemdti??iate half-syllable, for a better cadence,
§ 29, 4, b ; the original — restored and lengthened in pause {ibi-
dem). Impf. used of past time, in the expression of what is con-
tinued from time to time, or is habitual, § 127, 4. b ; place of fib,
§ 145, 1.
III.
TEMPTATION AND FALL OP MAN.
Genesis, eh. iii.
V. 1. (1), "iJn?, Farad. IV. Copula expressed, § 144, 2d T
(3), Faradrm. Comp. Mat. x. 16. (4), "i^, §119, 1.
nicy ; position, § 145. 1, a. wji? : lex. ^l^ (I), and (near
the end) ^"2 v|S, 1 ; tittered interrogativel)^ (§153. 1), is it added
that = is it even so, that ; implying, is there so grievous a pro-
hibition laid upon you. — — sb with Impf. expressing absolute
prohibition : § 127, 3, c, comp. § 152, 1, and 2d 1. b2T2, § 111,
36 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
3d ^ ; ye shall not eat of any tree = ye shall eat of no tree
(§ 152, 1, 2d II). The answer (in ver. 2), corresponds to the
question in this form.
V. 2. (5), see i. 11, (10). {ult.), ii. 16 {iilt.). V. 3.
(4), i. 6, (5). -^3^^, ii. 17. mT\ (y?D) ; with prejj. §140.
-jB^ lex. IE (II), 1 ; § 152, 1, at the end, {ult.\ ii. 17 {ult.) ;
with original p\m. ending (§44, 1, at the end, and Rem. 4, at
the end, and spec. §47, Ret7i. 4), which takes the tone (§72, 6),
and shortens pretonic Qamets {Remarks, 4, 2d H). {last
clause), place of sb, § 131, 3, Rem. 1, at the end. It is here
prefixed to the phrase in ii. 17, as negativing that assertion.
V. 5. (1), for, lex. B, 2, a, raid. ; §155, e, 3d % c. (2),
yT, Parad. D, Kal Part.; syntax §134, 2, a, §146, 2, §145,
Ij a. ^^ that, lex. B, 1 ; § 155, e, 3d IT, h. In the day of
your eating (§61, 1, Rem. 2 ; comp. on ii. 17)= in the day that
ye eat. ^Hjp&D'l ; HpS, Niph. Perf , with Vav consec. § 126, 6, a,
and Rem. 1 ; "l then, before the apodosis, § 155, 1, a, 3d TI. Lit.
then are opened, for, will be opened. Order of words, § 145, 1, a.
DD^Si? (^i;^^ Parad. VI, h; Dual with suff. §91,2).
Qn'':'n^" (comp. i. 6, (7)), § 63, Remarks, 6 (§ 28, 1). {foil, loord),
i53 for S3, §23, 2. — -^5?^^ § 135, 2.
V. 6. (1), ni<n, §75, Remarks, 3, 6. bDSp., of the form
No. 14, § 84 ; Parad. II. nixn (§ 85, V, 27) ; Parad. A, of p.
175. Xin, § 121, 2 ; following word, b for n), § 102, 2, b. •
Httns (Parad. D), Niph. Part. ; hard combination, § 63, 2, 2d *\\ ;
syntax § 134, 1, desirable, or pleasant. bsio {Hiph. Inf. with
b) ; lex. Hiph. 1 (or 5, as some translate). ^4«c? ( = for) pleasant
was the tree to look upon, is the remark of the narrator ; and
desirable the tree to make (one) wise, would be a continuation
of the reflections ascribed to the woman. '^|?Pi'] , § 66, Rein.
2; (following word), Parad. VI, i. l^l^T ; 103, Parad. H,
§66, 2, a. ^1p., with herself (§ 124, 1, b), to share with her.
{ult.), shortened Impf. with Vav consec, § 128, 2, d ; comp.
§ 29, 4, c, 3d 1.
V. 7. (1), Parad. F, Niph. Impf, plur. 3 /em. (6), D"l^5,
Parad. VIII ; tone-long 6 shortened to u, § 27, /a6/e, and No. 1,
at the end. ^"^Bn^T, i/z^Ap. §54, 3, 6. — nb? ; nby, Pa-
vad. IX, the leaf, collectively for leaves. n]sn,/em. of the
m. TEMPTATION AND FALL OF MAN. 37
form bplp, No. 13, § 84 ; Parad. A, p. 175. (penult.), § 124,
1, b. -(ult.), nniSiti ; fern, of the form biu]?, No. 13, §84;
Parad. A, p. 175.
V. 8. ?I^nnp, Hithp. §54, c. ninb ; b, § 154, 3, e, 2d 1 ;
n^i, lex. 1, c. At the breeze of the day = 3it evening.
xnnn^T, Hithp. §54, 3, a; agreeing with the nearest subject,
§ 148, 2, mid. ^^^"q, lex. n;B (i. 2), F. {petiidt.), collect.
trees.
V. 9. {ult.), where art thou 7 lex. ^i?, 1 ; § 150, 5, and § 154,
1, 4th IF (treated as a noun of Parad. VIII) ; with verbal suff.
ns- (p. 107, Rem. 1), § 100, 5.
V. 10. (3), emphatic position, §145, 1, c. Kn-i^l ; 1, §49,
2, a ; sn^, Parads. K & O, § 76, 2, d ; Kal Impf. § 69, 1, bottom
of the page. Naked (am) /; omission of copula, § 144, § 121,
1. {ult.), Parads. D &. O, Niph. Impf. {reflexive, §51, 2, a),
with Fat? cotisec.
V. 11. (2), §37, 1. (3), ^53, Parad. H, Hiph. liar);
n, §154, 2. ITCK, a5 to which. ^^)^), §152, 1, last 1
but one. bDS, tone-long o shortened (§27, 1) in a closed syll.
when the tone is removed by Maqqeph, § 16, 1. {ult.), D, —
lengthened in pause, § 29, 4, a.
V. 12. nnns , § 66, Rem,. 3, and § 44, Rem. 4, 4th line.
'''iriy, § 103, Rem. 2. ^Xin (ii. 12) ; emphatic, § 137, 3, Rem.
2. '^^, euphonic Dagh. (m/^.), Parad. I, Kal Impf, \st
■pers. (radical i5 dropped, § 68, 2), with Vav consec.
V. 13. What is this thou hast done ! expression of surprise
and displeasure. Why hast thou done this (§ 126, 1, lex. <"»T9?,
3), is less pertinent, and less suited to the order of the words.
{penult.), S1S3 (Parads. H & O, §76, 2, a), Hiph. Perf
with suff. § 58, 3, b ; tone, § 59, 2,
V. 14. nii-T, euph. Dagh. "I'l"'^, Kal Part, pass., Parad.
G. bbti, §119, 1. Tj^m ; ■jim'(form No. 3, §84), Parad.
III. ^jbn ; from ^bn (§69, Rem. 8), Kal Impf nsy,
Parad. IV ; comp. Mic. vii. 17, Is. Ixv. 25. {j)enidt.), §96,
Di\ {ult.), see ii. 9, (13).
V. 15. (1), /em. of form No. 13, §84 (nn-^S, contr. nS'^X),
Parad. A. (2), n^ll? {Ayin Yodh verb, Parad. N, § 73, 1), Kal
38 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
hnpf. \st j)Grs. X'^^ • • • T-? between : see the origin of this
usage, i. 4. ^^'^'^y, vl^O, Paiad. M, Kal Impf. with suff.
{pretonic vowel shortened, Sect. V, Rule ii); second acciis. [on
the head), § 139, last T. (penult.), with strengthened S7iff.
[demonstrative Nun), §58, 4. [ult.), Parad. IV, Expl. 4,
2d IT. For the letter D in the open space, see the Clavis, 'O,
3, Z>, in Theile, and '0,-3, /?), in Hahn.
V. 16. 'i^'i^'y) i^^l: Parads, P and D), Hiph. Inf. ahsol. ; see
§ 75, Remarks, 14, where by the pleo7iastic Inf. is meant (more
properly speaking) its intensive use in § 131, 3 ; / will with
tmiltijilying multiply = 1 will greatly multiply.; T-^^?, of
the form No. 15, §83; Parad. III. linn (comp. §83, 15);
Parad. I. Thy pai7i and thy conception {hendiadys, § 155,
1, a, 2d 1^) = thy pains of conception, i. e. consequent upon it.
22? , Parad. VI, a ; lex. 3. 'I'lbn ; 'lb;', Parad. K, § 69,
1.— 'o^sa, §96, 'J3. njpwn (§ 85', IV, 27), Parad. A; de-
sire (or, resort), indicating dependence. (penult.), btij, shOl,
without the tone, §16, 1, §27, 1. (tdt.), §103, 2, table, a;
a, §140.
V. 17. T\^^T\if.,fe?n. (see masc. in ver. 14), § 94, 1, III ; jyosi-
tion, § 145, i, b. ^ij^a3?|3 (n for n, §29, 4, b, extr.), see lex.
I^ay, A, 2. Another solution : I'lay the act of passing or of
being passed (from one to another) ; with 2 pretii (lex. 3, B, 3),
n^aya/or ^/ie exchange of = in exchange for ; then, more gene-
rally, on account of. HsbDiin ; suff. § 58, 4 ; prosodially long
vowel shortened, Sect. V, Rule vi ; 5, comp. p. 34, at the top, b.
V. 18. n^nn, a Pilpel form, § 85, II, at the end. ?yb (in
pause), § 103, 2, table, a), 2, ?7i ; dative of the one affected.
V. 19. (1), TOT, Parad. A ; of the form No. 10, § 85, III. (So
lex. ; Fiirst (concordance), of the form No. 2, § 85, IV ; but par-
tially retracted in his hebr. u. cliald. Handworterbuch.) (2),
see ii. 7, (10). (3), with retracted tone (as shown by the ac-
cent), §29, 3, b. nnb, p. 170, last H. ^'ird, Parad. M ;
§132, 1. "^3; see lex. ''S (I), A, (whence thou wast taken-,
§ 123, 1) ; but the signif. for (lex. B, 2, a, mid.) is equally perti-
nent. V. 20. (ult.), lex. A, 1.
V. 21. (1), see i. 7, (1). ni;n| (k6th) ; lex. n:h3, nearly
as Parad. D, b ; see the forms in the lex. The j^lur. constr
rV. DEATH OF ABEL. 39
takes in the first syllable a slioitening of the radical vowel
sound; comp. §61, 1. {^ilt.), tJ^b, Hiph. Impf. with Yax
consec, and siiff. D— §58, 1, table.
V. 22. (4), lex. in (II). "JS, ver. 3, {pemdt.).- ^m ;
i^n, Parad. G, Kal Per/, with Vav consec, as also the two pre-
ceding verbs. (ult.), Parad. II.
Behold, the man is become as one of us, to know good and evil ; as one
of us in respect to this. To know for himself is the meaning ; to decide
for himself what is good and what is evil, and to make his own choice
irrespective of his Creator's will. In this respect, man had becoine as
God to himself, his own will being now his supreme law.
V. 23. (1), nbtD, Piel Imp/., with Vav consec. and siiff.;
prop. nb'lB'^ (^65, 1, c), tone-long vowel shortened before suff.,
Sect. V, Ride vi ; on the contrary, Kal Impf. nb©^ (short — ),
with suff. '^pnbtp';'. Rule i ; !l, therefore.^ analogous to the case in
§ 129, 2, Rem. a. [idt.\ see ii. 10 ; with the sign of relation.^
§ 123, 1.
Y. 24. (1), Parad. E, Piel; ?, §22, 1, and 5, a. b D'!]^^,
at the east of {ox simply, before) ; lex. d*!)?, 2 init. ; lit. part of
the east = on the east ; b q/", § 115, 2. ^^"^S, Parad. I.
lanb, §106, Rem. 1 ; the glittering sword, art. §111, 1. The
use of the article here, and with the preceding noun, shows that
these terms represented well known and familiar conceptions.
^Sn, to turn ; Hithp. Part, (with fern, ending, §94, 2, 6),
reflexive, § 54, 3 ; art. § 109, 2d ^, 2. Way to the tree,
§ 114, 2, near the end.
IV.
DEATH OP ABEL : IMMEDIATE DESCENDANTS OF CAIN.
Genesis, eh. iv.
V. 1. nnni ; rr\r\, §75, 3, d. "ibni, iii. i6, (9).
'TT'S]?, Parad. P. ©"'X, lex. 1. TX. prep., ivith. lex. nx
(11);2.
V. 2. (1), 51D^, Parad. K, Hiph. Impf apoc. ; ^7S, table,
with the following Inf. as its complement. § 142, 2. (2), ^b^,
§69, 1, Inf.; with b, §102. 2, Rems. c, a. T^HS, §96. — -
22 " '
40 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
niTI, Parad. IX, constr. state of Kal Part. Parad. P ; syntax
§135, 2. 1iil% §108, 1. Y 3. Vi?^ ; lex. p, 4, c, and
71? (§85, II, 2, Parad. VIII), 2. Days ^ some days, § 124,
Rein. 5. {penult.), Parad. A. {ult.), §102, last II.
In this sentence, one qualifying- circumstance (of time) is placed
before the verb, and another (of material) after it ; compare
§145, 1.
V. 4. nilbril2; ^^, §154, 3, c, lex. 1, b.^ And of their
fat : "jri—. for ']rii— . , snff. to a j)lur. noun defectively written,
§91, 2, Rem. 1. The 5?/^. refers to nilba ; and the noun is
plural, because the fat of more than one is meant, as in Levit.
ix. 19. It has been rendered ya^/m^5 of them, i. e. of the flock
(1^2), but improperly. i^Vt, Kal Impf.
V. 5. "IH!*!?? lex. <T^I7j Ij ^\ h75, Remarks, 3, d; syntax
§137, 2. [penult.), bSS. (mZ^.), i. 2, (7); S hardened,
though preceded by a vowel-sound, being separated from it in
pronunciation (§21, 1, and Sect. Ill, p. 11).
Observe the prevalence of the physical, in the ideas and imagery of
these early records : here, e. g. the burning fush of the countenance in
anger ; the downcast look of sullen discontent, in contrast (ver. 7) with
an elevated cheerful aspect.
V. 6. n^b, § 102, 2, d. (ult.), 5 softened by the preceding
vowel-sound, §21, 1, at the end.
V. 7. (1), 7ionjie? is there not? 7^, iii. 11, (8). (3), nt2^^,
Parad. L, Hiph. Impf ; syntax § 127, 2. (4), xiCD (§ 76, 2, a),
Kal Inf., for nSTIJ (comp. §74, Rem. 3, and §94, Rem. 1); a
lifting np, viz. of the countenance, lex. 1, c. nsnisb (b, -n);
at the door (viz. of the tent) is sin, crouching doum, i. e. lying
in wait. Or better, perhaps : at the door is sin, a lurker, i. e. a
lurking beast of prey. In the former case, the Part, (masc.) is
construed ad sensum with Vi fern, norm (§146, IstTI); in the
latter, it is used substantively, in apposition with it (§ 147, Rem.
2; lex. fnn, a. TT^bx^ {accerits, i. 2, (3)), §103, 3; (foil.
word), Parad. A ; masc. suff. construed ad sensu?}i, or with the
Part, taken as a noun. But thou (§ 137,3, Rein. 2) shalt rule
over him. This is said, either imperatively (§ 127, 3, c), = do
thou rule over him (that he may not over thee), or as a prom-
ise of victory, should the warning be heeded.
IV. IMMEDIATE DESCENDAI^TS OF CAIN. 41
This is the most simple, grammatical construction of the words. Ano
ther could be defended, on more general grounds ; but they would be
out of place here.
V. 8, (1 & 2), and Cain said (it), = told (it); omission of
the object, § 121, 6, Rem. 2. (7), Sect. VI, No. 27. D^^^l,
§72, Remarks, 4. b«, lex. bx (III), A, 3. (ult.), and
slew him ; Sect. VI, No. 29.
V. 9. ''^5, iii. 9, {ult.) ; here, in the constr. state, the where of
thy brother 7 =- where is thy brother ? - — ''P?'^^ § 126, 3.
{ult.),h29,^,c.
V. 10. rm, §37, 1, c. D^ (Parad. II); see lex. plur. 1.
V. 11. 1^, §143. Tp^] §96, riB. nnpb ; rxpb (see
11. 15, (D), Kal Inf.. with b, §102, 2, c, a. {iilt.)', a new
-penultimate syllable for the sake of the cadence, § 29, 4, 6.
V. 12. ""S, lex. 4. (6), comp. ver. 2, (1). t\T\ ; "JW,
§66, 1, and Re7n. 3. f^nb ; rb, Parad. I,' lex. 1, c. 1^3
and "15, Kal Parts, of ?^5 (lex. 2), and 113 (lex. 2), comp. i. 2,
(3 & 4). V
V. 13. (pemilt.), -jiy, §8, 2, 3d T (zf^^.), "J^ (§119, 1),
siiCS, ifiCa; J/i/. (full form, §66, Rem. 1), of Xfe?, lex. 2, b ; my
5t7i t5 greater than can be forgiven = too great to be forgiven.
But "ji!^ may be understood as in lex. c, and i5T0!i as in lex. 4,
(Engl, version, my punishment is greater than I can bear) ;
which accords better with the spirit of Cain, and with what fol-
lows.
V. 14. (2), a, comp. iii. 24, (1). (3), see on 1.17,(2).
DW, §109, 2d 1. ^b?)2, i. 7. T'^^O^ §126, 6; to7ie,
§49, 3, Rem. b. "^^O^ comp. §126, Rem. 2. {penult.),
Kal Part., Parad. VII ; §135, 2. {ult.), comp. Section Yl,
No. 29.
V. 15. (4), lex. 13 (I), 'with Preps., c'. ^i^Jt^^^ia, §97, 3,
Rem.. 1. -D)^^ ; D|53, Hoph. Impf. (§53, 3, Re?n..9), shall be
punished ; or (impersonally, § 137, 2), it shall be avenged, the
preceding Part, construed absolutely, §145, 2, i?em. DTp^'],
see on ii. 8, (7). ■^r^^^'?, see on iii. 11. -m'sn; HDp, Pe
A'-^/zi, and Lamedh He (trace the peculiarities of each class, In
Parads. H and P) ; Hiph. Inf. For its subject and object, see
§133, 3, and Rem. {ult.), ver. 14 {penult.).
42 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
V. 16. (1), see on i. 12; Kal Inipf. {feeble form, §69, 1).
(3), lex. nSB, ^ with Preps., E'. [penult.), on the east
of = eastward of, § 118, 1, 6.
V. 17. (5), ver. 1, (6). nsla, Parad. P, Kal Part.; with
n^n, as a periphrasis for the fnite verb, § 134, 2, c, 2d H ; comp.
i/e, (7 & 8). [penult.), § 96, "ja.
V. 18. (1), Niph. Impf. §69, 2; passive, §51, 2, c^; with
the accus. of the object, § 143, 1, a.
V. 19. •'niO, Gram. p. 179, Note *. 0^1233, § 96, t^m.-. —
[penult.), fern, ordinal, §98.
V. 20. '^Si? , § 96, DSJ ; here, ancestor, the first who followed
this mode of life. {last clause), lex. ITC^, 3, mid. ; see also
§ 138, 3, c. The dweller in the tent, sing, used collectively.
V. 22. Xin, see on ii. 12, (3). nini*, §96.
V. 23. "j?^©, §46, Rem. 3. "^n^X^ I ^^8, 2, c, and §53,
2, 3d T ; radical 3 expressed by doubling that of the sufforma-
tive, §20, 1, a. nni3X, Parad. C, b. ^/sfib ; V, 5>?|, ^;
suffi.v used objectively, § 121, 5 ; /or my wound, i. e. a wound
inflicted on me. [ult.), my, as before.
V. 24. (2), see on ver. 15. Should Cain be avenged,
§ 127, 5. -• — {penult.), § 97, 3. The order, usual in the earlier
writers {ibidem), is reversed in order to give seventy the emphatic
position.
The oldest specimen of the poetical form of composition. It is the
language of one glorying in an act of revenge ; and boasting that the
sevenfold vengeance, promised to Cain, should be light compared with
what he would inflict. It seems to have been preserved as an expres-
sion of the spirit of the time.
V. 25. "liy, §100, 2, 6.- Tit, see on iii. 15, (2). "^S,
relative pronoun, giving a relative sense to the following stiff.
(§ 123, 1) ; see lex. ''3 (I), A, mid. But if we take this clause as
the explanation of the narrator, the signif. /or is appropriate.
V. 26. {jirst clatise), §121, 3, extr. bn^n ; bbn, Parad.
G, Hophal, impersonally (§ 137, 2), it was begun, cosptuni est,
= men began. This case is distinguished, by the nature of the
act, from the one in § 127, 3. d. 3 nyb ; lex. «np (I), 2, g, /?.
V. ACCOUNT OF THE FLOOD. 43
|I3^ It is not intended to make any further allusion, except in special
cases, to the numerous points already explained by reference to the
grammar ; and the student should, therefore, carefully review them all.
before he proceeds. This will be an easy task, if the passages referred
to have been marked in the grammar, as recommended.
V.
ACCOUNT OF THE FLOOD.
Genesis, chs. vL-viii.
Ch. vi resumes the account of the two lines of descent from Adam,
through Cain (ch. iv), and through Seth (ch. v), and describes the effect
of their union by intermarriages, in the universal corruption of the hu-
man race.
Y. 1. (3), see iv. 26, (11). nib ; nan, Kal Inj, ; §142,
. nisa, §96, na.
V. 2. (1), 1 that; §129, 2, Note *. Sons of God; his
worshippers, lex. "ja, 9, c (not angels, letter a ; an opinion based
on a false theory of the passage). The descendants of Seth are
meant ; among whom, as a people, the worship of the true God
had thus far been maintained. Daughters of man. is the
appropriate designation for the females of the other race, who
were not worshippers of the true God. tiab ; lex. ait2, 1, a,
a ; observe the prevalence of the scriptio defectiva, throughout
these earliest specimens of Hebrew writing. '^np^'1, ii. 15,
(1) ; )?, §20, 3, h. Of all whom they chose, probably indi-
cates the abuse of the marriage relation, by the introduction of
folygamy, among the descendants of Seth ; which is the most
natural, though not the necessary, meaning of the words.
Y. 3. 'ji'l^ (comp. § 72, Remarks, 2, and 4), from ']1^ or 'ji'1 =
Y"^, §73, 2. See lex. 'j'^'^f, 2, and letter a. Here it means, to act
the part of a judge, or magistrate, in rej)roving and pnnishing.
nil , lex. 4, the last two offices there ascribed to it.
DatJa, for their transgressing; a, lex. B, 5, b ; WIS (lex. 2),
Parad. G, Kal Inf. § 67, Remarks, 3 ; suff. D— . Compare John
xvi. S, and 2 Peter ii. 5. The meaning is : this course of proba-
tionary and punitive discipline shall not continue on without
end. "^i?? ; \i\s frailty axid mortality dixevaedini; comp. lex.
44 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
2 and 3. ^'^n, § 126, 4. A hundred and twenty years ^
this period shall still be allowed him, for repentance and refor-
mation ; comp. 1 Peter iii. 20.
V. 4. (1), see lex. b^Bp, at the end. The literal meaning is
given in the ancient Gr. version of Aquila {ol tncTviTVTOVTtQ),
and the sense in that of Syinmachns {ol /ScaTot), as there quo-
ted. Men of violence, the article denoting a known and dreaded
class ; comp. also § 109, 2. Q^'^j 5 122, 1. ~D^1 and also,
lex. 2 (not 3). After (it was) so that = after that ; see lex.
nnx, Plur., 4, and mOi|t, B, 1. lNh;;i, §76, 6 ; comp. on ii.
19. Then they bore to them = bore them sons, the verb used
absolutely; 1 before the apodosis, §155, a, 3d 1^. ^'^'Oj
§ 122, 1, 2d TI ; {2(lt.), §111, 1. • The mighty men, — the men
of name = m,en of renown (lex. DTI?, 2, a, mid.) ; the predicate
here requires the art., as a particular and well known class of
men are designated.
V. 7. From — to, lex. ']12, 3, a.
V. 8. {penult.), X^V, Parad. VI, h.
Here begins one of the greater sections in the Jewish division of the
text, marked by the triple S (see Clavis Not. Masoret., letter S, 3, in
Hahn, and n^^S in Theile), and followed by the number two (2 3), being
the second in order ; the third begins with the twelfth chapter.
V. 9. (2), comp. on ii. 4, (2). (6), adj., as an epithet,
placed after the subst. (§112, 1, and Rem. 1) ; (7), as predicate,
is placed first in the clause ; perfect icas he. rii{, lex. rs
(11)^ 2. -^bn, Hithp. 2. V. 10. (3), §97, 1, §120, 1, h.
V. 11. (3),lex.n2S, '' with preps.,'' 1} A, h,2A%,h. {nit.),
the second accus. after the Pass, of a verb governing two (§ 143,
1, §139, 2). V. 12. (6), for the new, penultimate syllable.
see §29, 4, b ; comp. ii. 25, {iilt.). ^^2'\'] : 1\y},. Parad. VI, a.
V. 13. X3, ver. 4, (10). Before me ; see ver. 11, (3)-
liere as in b, 1st H, at the end. — — Is full of, with the accus.,
§138, 3, b. DH^pBtl, lex. F, 2. -"DSn, §98, 5. About
to destroy, § 134, 1.
V. 14. (4), 7?, § 108, 4, Rem. 1, and lex. 2, Plur. D'-sp ;
for the construction, see TVSiV, 2, a, extr. (§139, 2); but also,
§118, 3, loith cells shalt thou make the ark. f^!"^^ ; lex.
n^a, 7. {penult.), pn, 2, c. {ult.), § 109, 3, Re7n. b.
V. ACCOUNT OF THE FLOOD. 45
V. 15. STBi?, §118, 3 ; th7-ee himdreds, by the cubit ; i. e
with the cubit as the unit of measure. '^^n'l (^n'l).
V. 16. (1, 5, & 6), see lex. ins. (6), ii. 2, (1); §58, 4.
nb^^b^ ; lex. byw (II), 4. finsa (T^, §93, Expl. 8, last
1, §27, i?em. 3). Dl'rinn and the two foil, words ; §86, 5,
§93, Expl. 8, 3, syntax § 118, 3 ; with loioer, second, and third
(stories) shalt thou make it (or, with a different construction,
§ 139, 2).
V. 17. (1), § 145, 2, contrasted with ver. 21, (1). (2), nsn,
§ 100, 5, §75, Remarks, 19, §20, 3, b; ^ex. 2d 1, mid. ^ D^^,
the adverbial accus., § 118, 3, at the end. -Wiri'a ; see on i. 7
and 9.^ {ult.), §72, Remarks, 10.
V. 18. (1); to7ie, §49, 3 ; comp. § 126, 6, Rem. 1. ^m,
§ 103, 1, Re7?i. 1.
V. 19. (2) ; art. with — , comp. §35, 2, A, a. The asterisk
refers to the marginal note (' the He with Qamets ') ; Clavis,
letter n, 1 and 2. bs followed by art. § 111, 3d 1. Aiid of
all the living- of all flesh, tioo of all shalt thou bring. f^'^nnb |
n^^n, Parad. P; b, §45, 3.
V. 20. (1) ; 1^, § 102, 1, Rem. 6 ; n, § 35, 2, B, a. V. 21.
(1), contrasted with ver. 17, (1). (2), § 66, Rem. 2. bDiJi,
§ 127, 3, d. And collect, § 126, 6, c. (tilt.) ; b, lex. A, 2.
V. 22. A7id Noah did (it); §121, 6, Rem. 2.' {seco?id
clause) ; arrangement of words, § 145, 1, a, at the end.
Ch. VII. V. 1. Thee, § 145, 1, c, § 121, 3, Rem. Before
me, lex. D, 1. V. 2. (3), adj. with art. § 111, 2. Seven,
seven (= by sevens), distributively (§120, 5) for seven of each.
A male and its mate, lex. i2?''X, 1. Which not clean
(is) it = which is not clean, § 121, 2.
V. 4. For nnto days yet seven (that being the limit of time,
at which the act should take place) = in seven days ; comp. lex.
b, B, 2, c. rr^ (in the sing.), § 120, 2. — Dip;"?! ; art. §35,
i, at the end. b:PT3. § 154, 2. V. 5. {pemilt.), with suff.
nn_, §75, Rem. 19.
V. 6. "ja, § 106, 2, c. n:TC ; the object numbered is con-
ceived as the accusative (§ 120, 1, b), six Jiundreds by the year
(§ 118, 3), viz. as the unit of measure. And the flood icas
46 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
( = when the flood came) ; waters upon the earthy dli'a being in
apposition with b^^'sn.
V. 7. (1), § 148, 2. From before (with the idea ofjlecin^
or escaping impHed) ; lex. n:s, F, 1,
V. 8. "IT^X gives a relative sense to the following suff. pron.,
§ 123, 1. — - ^SD\^?, § 100, 5. V. 9. (1 & 2), § 120, 5. V. 10.
rynicb (§97, 1), to the seven of clays (= a week), viz. the one
named in ver, 4 ; hence the art., § 120, 4, Rem. 1 ; for b, comp.
on ver. 4, (2). Observe the septimal division of time, through-
out this account of the flood. '')ai ; '^ . § 152, a, 3d 1.
y. 11. In the year of six hundred years, i. e, in the year
that completed that number of years ; but comp. § 120, 4.
Of the life of Noah ; 5, § 115, 2, b. t^nb ; b, § 115, 2, c.
V. 12. (2), the heavy rain just before referred to, by the open-
ing of the windows of heaven ; hence the art. § 109, 3d ?I.
V. 13. (1), §124, Rem. 3, mid. V. 14. {ult.), of every
wing (§ 106, 1), i. e. of every species. V. 15. In ivhich was
the breath of life ; lex. tl^"!; 1, h.
V. 16. (1), § 109, 2d 1, § 145, 2, a 7nale and afeinale, of all
flesh, came they. {ult.), lex. 2, mid.
V. 17. "^W^ ; iito: (§ 76, 2, a), to without Dagh. § 20, 3, b.
U'yP\^ ; UT\ (lex. 1), Kal Impf. apoc. with tone retracted by
Vav consec, § 72, Remarks, 4, mid.
V. 19. ^^T.l] r\iD'2,FualIfnpf Dinnn (nn, Parad. VIII) ;
art. §3.5, 2, B,'a.-^V. 21. Cjiys ; lex. S, 2, c.
V. 22. "iTiJiH gives a relative sense (§ 123, 1) to the suff. in T^SS?
(see on ii. 7); H'affiD, lex. 2 ; iii ivhose nostrils was the breath
of the spirit of life, i. e. the breath that sustains the spirit of
life, the vital principle. {penult.), 3, §102, 2, b; art. §35,
2, B, b. {?ilt.), §72, Remarks, 1.
V. 23. (1), nn'a, Nlph. Impf. apoc, § 75, Remarks, 8 ; syn-
tax §143, 1, a. V. 24. {penult.), §120, 1, Rem.
Oh. VIII. V. 1. {penult.)', ^DTT, Parad. G, Kal Impf
V. 3. ni^l tribn, § 131, 3, Rem. 3.
V. 4. (1), n^3, Kal Impf. apoc, §72, Reniarks, 4, at the end.
V. 5. "^iDn"! libri, § 131, 3, Rem. 3 ; here in the accus. used
V. ACCOUNT OF THE FLOOD. 4t
adverbially (see No. 2 of that § ), and with the subsL verb ex
pressing state or condition, — were continually decreasing.
V. 6. The loindow ; art., as in Engl, and other languages,
V. 7. The raven, with the art. as the name of a class or
species. Went forth, with going forth and ivith returiiing
(§131, 3, 6), i. e. continued to go out from the ark and to return
to it, till the drying up of the waters. ^^2? (^r?^), § 69, Rem.
I, at the end.
V. 8. The dove ; art. as in ver. 7. ^>;?n ; bbjp, Kal Perf.^
lex. 3. ^V. 9. nn]5!'1 ; with suff. H-, iS'ect V, Rule vi.
V. 10. (1), from b^n and b^n (§73, 2, mid.), Parad. N, Kal
Impf. apoc, with retracted tone ; for signif. see lex. No. 6.
qD^1,see §78,qD\ V. 11. (4), b, § 154, 3, e, 2d "H ; lex. B, 2.
'^''^^j see § 96, HS ; all the forms are given in the lex.
V. 12. (1), from bn^, Niph. Impf (with tone retracted); see
§69, Rem. 5. V. 13. "ilTCSina, on the first (§98), viz. month.
nc^l ; I^D, Hiph. Impf apoc, §72, Remarks, III, N. B.
V". 17. Niin, Hiph. Imp. ; the points belong to the marginal
reading (§ 17), comp. § 70, 2 ; the pointing of the text would be
X2in. ^2:nTC1, Kal Perf with the force of the Imp., §126,
6, c ; and let them swarm in the earth, i. e. scatter abroad and
occupy it. And let them be fruitful, and let them multiply
on the earth ; nns and 3nn , in Kal Perf. with Imper. sense, as
before ; tone (of the second word), § 49, 3.
V. 20. (1), npa, §75, Remarks, 3, a. (3), Parad. VII,
Expl. 7, a. (4), § 102, last T by>^ ; nby, Hiph. Impf
apoc. n'bi) ; lex. nbi), 2.
V. 21. (1), nil, Hiph. Impf apoc, §72, Remarks,!!!,^. B.
nh^p, noun of Parad. I; art., §111, 1; the siveet fra-
grance, namely of the sacrifice just mentioned. ?lDi5 {script.
defect., §8, 4, Rem. b); see ver. 10. ^bbp, Piel Inf.; comp.
§67, 1, at the end. "i^a?3 ; comp. on in. 17. "T^nS?? (y —
>y, p. 29, 9, b), § 108, 2, a. nisnb (nap, Parads. H & P) ;
§ 142, 2.
V. 22. (1), lex. ^iy, 3 ; yet all the days of the earth {accus.
of time how lotig, § 118, 2, 6), i. e. so long as they continue. — — •
The succeeding words are grouped thus, by the accents (day
48 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
and night distinguished from the seasons by a greater pause) ;
seed-time, and harvest, and cold and heat, and summer and
winter, — and day and night, — shall not cease. f'?)?) l^^- ^-
nb'i'b (old accus. form used as nominative), p. 144. Note *, 3.
nniij, lex. 2.
VI.
jotham's parable.
Judges, ch. ix. 1-21.
V. 1. (1), Vav consec. §129, 2. nT2?T)3 (lex. DD», 3);
accus. local, § 90, 2, a (lex., erroneously, STOpTJ? ; comp. Rodiger,
Thes. p. 1408). ^ni|!, §96, HiJ ; kindred, lex. 2. And to
all the family of his mother'' s ancestral house, i. e. to which it
belonged ; see lex. ti^3, 11, and nnStC^, 2.
V. 2. N5, p. 192, Note, a, § 130, 2d 1. b:?a, lex. 3.
biij^n ; n, § 100, 4, i?ew. 2 (Da^A. omitted, §20, 3, h) ; Db?— ri,
utrum — an, § 153, 2. Comp. § 133, 2, at the end. And re-
member, § 126, 6, c. {ult.), §29, 4, h, at the end.
V. 3. 'T'by (§ 103, 3), lex. b?, 2, e. 13?1 ; npp (§76, 2, h),
Kal Tmpf. apoc. ; final vowel lengthened, § 20, 3, a ; see lex. 3,
at the end. V. 4. (1), )t}2. ^Seventy, (fcc, § 120, 4, Rem.
2. House = temple ; lex. 4. b^3, lex. 5, a.
V. 5. nnnSi? (/o Ophra) accus. local, §90, 2, a. nns (in
pause; see §96, If^i*) ; construed as an adjective, §97, 1.
"in^, M;jA. T?npf. The youngest, § 119, 2. (zfZ^), iVi^jA.
Perf, reflexive, § 51, 2, a.
V. 6. (1), Niph. Impf Xi!3)3, lex. b. Made A. king,
here with l^"!?^, pleonastically ; lex. ^jbia, Hiph. mid. 05?,
6y, lex. 2. The oak, <fcc., lex. n^)2. — -Y. 7. (1), I?? ; § 137,
3, h. fiiiCp, lex. 1, e. That God may hearken / 1 , § 155,
1, e, § 128, 1, c. V. 8. (1), § 131, 3, a. {penult.), is point-
ed for the marginal reading ; see § 46, Rem. 2, and § 48, 5. The
form in the text is not noted in the grammar.
V. 9. Do I leave = can I be persuaded to leave ; b^in (lex. 2,
b), Kal Perf. with interrog. T\ (§ 100, 4, Rem. 4). The pointing
of the verb (ri) is irregular. ^"13?^ ; lex. {Piel, 2, c), " which
in me both God and me^i do honor ;" rather : / luith whom (i. e
Vn. RAISING OF SAMUEL 49
with whose precious fruit, the oil I yield), they honor God and
men, — the former in oblations, the latter in acts of consecration,
by anointing, <fec. ''3"*ltiJS!, as in § 123, 1, Rem. 1, the pron.
of the 1st pers. taking a relative sense, = I with whom, the near-
est expression of it in English. ?'^D, lex. 1, c,
V. 10. ^Ob (?fbn), §69, Remarks, 8. (penult.), §46, Rem.
2. My siceetness and tny goodly increase (Jiendiadys, § 155,
l,a, 2d 1^)= the sweetness of my goodly fruit. V. 11. nTQffl'atl,
Piel Part., with art. (§20, 3, h), §109, 2d T V. 14. -rbtt,
comp. §47, Rem. 1, and letter h.~ — ^-V. 15. If in good faith ye
will anoint me king over you ; Part., §134,1. lon ; non, 1.
b?, Parad. VIII ; § 93, Expl. 8, last T KSn, Missive.
{ult.), art. §109, 3.
V. 16. (1), and now = now then. A7id have made king
= in that ye have made king. According to the desert (^1^5)
of his hands, — the benefits which his hands have wrought.
V. 17. tiy-hv . . . ^ti^. (§ 123, 1, Rem. 1), ye for whom my fa-
ther fought, and cast his life from him. ; see § 154, 3, b, mid. ;
lex. "I??, B, 3, a, and 1\'y^, Hiph. 2d IF, a. b^^^ ; bsp, Hiph.
(lex. 3), Tmpf apoc. V. 18. But ye have risen up against,
&c. — and have slain, (fee. Seventy men (§ 120, 2), including
the intended murder of himself
V. 19. The two preceding verses, 17 and 18, intervene be-
tween the apodosis and the conditional clauses (in ver. 16),
which are summarily repeated in this verse, and followed by the
apodosis. DXl, and if = if then.
V. 21. (1), DID, §72, Remarks, 4, § 128, 2, d. n^xa, ac-
cus. local, § 90, 2, a.
VII.
THE RAISING OF SAMUEL.
1 Samuel, ch. xxviii. 3-25.
V. 3. (2), n^'a, verb middle E, §72, Remarks, 1. In
Ramah ; art. §109, 3. Eve7i his own city; 1, §155, 1, a,
2d 1, lex. 1, c. -i^pn (l^C), Hiph. Perf nini5, lex. ais,
2. [penult.), '^py'l'!'. V. 4. And encamped; lex. Hpn, 2.
{ult.), art., as before.
50 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
V. 5. sn^^l ; K"1^, p. 123, at the bottom. V. 6. (3), 3,
§ 154, 3, a, 2, mid. ; § 102, last 1. ^nsy , with siif. § 75, Re-
marks, 19. DS, lex. 2, at the end.
V. 7. ritJit, cotistr. state in place of simple apposition, § 110,
5. nb5>2|, § 106, 2, 6, lex. bya, 4. That I may go, § 128,
1, c. {pemilt.), lex. 'J''?, 2, c. ^V. 8. <^bib, acciis. oi time
when (§ 118, 2, a) ; see p. 44, Note *, 3. ''''310)5 (marg. note,
Vav is superjlvous) ; the pointing is for '^'53p|5 [qb-s^-mi), with
the final o sound partially preserved (p. 34, 2d H), the corres-
ponding short vowel being supplied before it, as in Parad. E.
For the form in the text (final vowel retained), comp. the analo-
gous case in ? 47, Rem. 1, c. "^^^5 ^ 123, 2, at the end.
yq^, §68, 2.
V. 9. The second "itOS? is a relative conj. that (lex. B, 1).
^i^^']r^,art., §109,1. nnx, §134, 2, «. ■'n, lex. A, 1, mid.
DS,' § 155, 2,/, 2d 1[. xi'^^ (nnp), Kal Impf., with siiff. § 75,
Re7n. 19 ; the Dagh. (p) is euphonic, § 20, 2, 6 ; marg. note, the
p dagheshed. V. 12. (1), § 75, Remai^ks, 3, c. i^or ^Aoi<
art Said ; 1, § 155, 1, c.
Her terror indicates the actual appearance of the prophet, and unex-
pectedly to herself. The suggestion (Thenius in loc.) that she feigned
terror, in order the more effectually to deceive Saul, is an assumption
merely, and is contradicted by the whole pasi^age. From the well
known relation of the two parties, thus confronted again by a divine
power, she inferred the person and rank of her visitor.
V. 13. bx, § 127, 3, c. -t3-'nbS5, lex. B, 5, '' a godhke form."
Strictly : / see a god ascending out of the earth (i. e. a being
superhuman, in her view accounted a god). D'^bj? ; Hby , Kal
Part. nbl>, Parad. IX. nx'n, Parad. VI, /. -niy, see
lex. 2. Ip^l ; lex. Tip (II) ; loith the face earthward.
{iilt.^, see § 75, Remarks, 18.
V. 15. 12 ; T\'t (lex. 2, c), Perf. 3d sing., used impersonally,
§ 137, 2. ■ D^n'bKI ; x:i, §23, 2. ^^V12 ; see lex. by, C, ^TQ
(II), 2, at the end. "S<"?pi<3 (^ §49, 2, a), Kal Impf, cohor-
tative form (with n_ for n_), §48, 3, Rem. ; syntax § 128, 1, e.
3?^^ ; with suff. §61, 1. V. 16. bs©n, with suff., Sect.
V, Rule VI. Why then shonldst thou ask me, when Jehovah
has turned away from thee, and is become thine enemy'}
YIII. NATHAN'S PAEABLE. 51
V. 17. na^, §52, Rem. 1, at the end. "jn^l, with suff.
(tone-long vowel shortened, Sect. V, Rule vi). In the Avords,
hath done to him. David is naturally implied ; but some prefer
the reading ^b, for which there is some authority. V. 18.
(1), because ; see ItpSS, 1, c, in the lex. after the article 3.
His fierce anger ; the suff. belongs to the complex idea, § 121, 6.
Y. 20. (1), § 64, 3. (1 <fe 3), § 142,- 3, a. xb^, lex. 1
mid. On account of the loords of — ; ')'J3 , lex. 2, f. V
'22. ™^tpiJ1, and let me set, §128, 1, h. ■'n^l (joined to an
Imp.), and let there he = that there may be, § 128, 2, a. "^3,
that thou Tnayest go, &c. ; that thou mayest have strength to go
on thy way. V. 23. y^^, lex. 3, b. -bi^ , lex. B.
Y. 24. (1) ; Vj denoting possession, lex. 3, d, § 115, 2 ; the
woman had. ^^J?^ (IC^b). (penult.)', HBiJ, Kal Impf.
(S$ omitted, § 68, 2, Rem.), with suff. as accusative of material
(§ 139, 2, 2d 1^) ; and baked of it unleavened cakes.
YIII.
Nathan's parable.
2 Samuel, ch. xii. 1-14.
Y. 1. fini!?, comp. above (YI), on Judg. ix. 5. 'CS'n, Kal
Part, of TC11 ; here written fully, comp. § 7, 2, end, § 8, 3, and
Rem., §9, 1, 1, and spec. §23, 3, Rem. 1, §25, 2 : marg. note, S
is superfluous.
Y. 2. (1), b; comp. above (YII), on 1 Sam. xxiii. 24.
[penult.), §75, Remarks, 14, and §131,2. Y. 3. (2), 'j;'?,
constr. state ; nothing of all = not any thing, nothing.
DSl "13, except ; lex. B, 2 (after the article ^'2). ^3T2p, Parad.
YIII ; §93, En;pl. 8, Rem. 4, case 21. inn^, nil. Rem. 4.
ns (above, YII, ver. 22), Parad. YIII, Expl. last 1.
bsiin, was icont to eat, § 127, 4, b. Marg, note : Q,amets, with
ZaqepJi-qaton.
Y. 4. (4), art. with adj. only, §111, 2, Rem. a. nnpb
(nnp § 66, Rem,. 2, b § 102, 2, c, «), § 142, 2, and i?em. ^
nib^b (lex. 2, e), a gerundial form, §45, 3. n"iS5, see lex.
nns (I), Kal Part.
52 HEBREW CIIllESTOiLiTIIY.
V. 5. ''S, lex. B, 1, a. "ja. § 106, 2, c. V. 6. Fourfold,
§97, Rem. 1. 1)??, lex. 2, and § 104, 1, c. ^m by ; lex.
by, A, 2, d, andnffiJ;!!, B, 9.
V. 7. House ; lex. 3. TAy master ; for the 2>^"?'- see
§108, 2, 6, end, and lex. Plur. House of Israel, <fcc., as
descended from one common parent, and in this sense forming
one household or family; comp. lex. 9. Lit., and if little
(if not enough), then would I add (§ 127, 5) ; the lengthened
Impf used emphatically. Hiin, lex. 1, end ; = so, and so.
V. 9. (1), §99, 3. — V. 11. A7id I will take, (fcc, § 126, 6,
and Rem. I, last clause. In secret ; lex. "itlD, 3, end.
V. 13. ninib ; b, lex. 8.
The circle {Clavis, XpDS), refers to the marg. note: space in the
midst of the verse; the space indicating an important division of the
sense, within the verse.
V. 14. (1 <fc 2), lex. D5X, B, 4. fXi, Piel Inf. with i, for
the sake of the paranomasia (so Maurer and Thenius) ; syntax
§131, 3, a.
SELECTIONS IN POETRY.
The form of Hebrew poetry, as distinguished from that of prose, is not
a proper metre, based on the quantity and accentuation of syllables. All
the attempts to define and establish the laws of such a versification in He-
brew, have failed. The language has every where indeed, even in its
prose, a measured movement (§29, 3, Note), a kind of Iambic rhythm,
which is better adapted to poetic expression than the less regular accen-
tuation of our Western languages.
The external characteristics of Hebrew poetry were poii ted out by Lowth
(Leet. on the Sacred Poetry of the Hebrews, and afterwards more fully in the
Prelim. Diss, to his Trans, of Isaiah) ; and his suggestions may still be read
with profit by the student, as an introduction to the subject. A more complete
view will be found in Dr. Torrey's elegant translation of De Wette's Introduction
to the Psalms, Biblical Repository, vol. iii. pp. 479-508. The poetic parallelism
is well treated by Rodiger, in Ersch and Gruber's Encyclop. Sect. III. Th. 11,
art, Parallelismus Membrorunu
I. The chief characteristic of the poetic form in Hebrew, is a measured
adjustment, or rhythmical proportion, of the successive members in a sen-
tence, technically called the parallelism of members. The corresponding
terms are called parallel terms. Its most perfect forms have been arran-
ged in the three following classes :
1. The Synonymous Parallelism ; in which the parallel members
express the same, or nearly the same, sense in different words. E. g.
Ps. viii 5. What is man, that thou art mindful of him,
and the son of man, that thou visitest him !
xxi 8. Thine hand shall find out all thine enemies ;
thy right hand shall find out those that hate thee.
Some variety is given to this otherwise monotonous form, —
1) By inversion, in the second member : e. g.
Ps. xlx. 2. The heavens declare the glory of God,
and the work of liis hands showeth the firmament,
xci. 14. Because ho hath set his love upon me, therefore will I deliver him ;
I will place him on high, because he hath known my name.
2) By repeating only a part of the first in the second member : e. g.
Ps. viil. 4. When I consider the heavens, the work of thy fingers,
the moon and the stars, which thou hast ordained.
Ixxii. 12. For he shall deliver the needy, when he crieth,
the poor also, and him that hath no helper.
54 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
There are many similar variations of this form of parallelism, whicli is fre
quent, and without such change would weary the ear by its monotony. The
above instances will suffice for illustration.
2. The Synthetic Parallelism (or, Constnictive Parallelism) ; in
which the construction of the sentences is the same, or very similar, but
with more or less variation of the sense. E. g.
Ps. xix. 7-10. The law of the Lord is peifect, converting the soul ;
the testimouy of the Lord is sure, making wise the simple ;
The statutes of the Lord are right, rejoicing the heart;
the commandment of the Lord is pure, enlightening the eyes.
The fear of the Lord is clean, enduring forever ;
the judgments of the Lord are true, and righteous altogether.
This form is varied like the preceding one.
3. The Antithetic Parallelism ; in which the correspondence con-
sists in an opposition or contrast of sentiment and of the terms employed.
This form is most frequent in the book of Proverbs. E. g.
Ps. XX. 8. They are bowed down, and fallen ;
but we are risen, and stand upright.
Peov, sxvii. 7. The full soul loatheth the honeycomb
but to the hungry soul, every bitter thing is sweet,
xiv. 18. The simple inherit folly ;
but the prudent are crowned with knowledge,
ver. 34 Righteousness exalteth a nation ;
but sin is a reproach to any people.
The form of parallelism is most perfect, when both members contain the same
number of words of about equal length. This is not unfrequent, especially in
the book of Job, e. g. vi. 1, 9, 14, 16, 1*7, 18, 25, 26, 28 ; viii. 2, V, 9, 11, 12, 22 ;
xxiii. 2, 4, 8, 9, 12, 14. — But the freer forms of parallelism (see below), often
exhibit great variety in the length of parallel members.
The above examples consist of himembral parallelisms, or distichs.
This form is the most usual one in Job, Proverbs, and many of the Psalms.
But in the later books, and still oftener in the prophetical diction, occur
compound parallelisms, of three, four, and sometimes of still more mem-
bers. E. g.
Pb. i. 1. Blessed is the man,
that walketh not in the counsel of the wicked,
nor standeth in the way of sinners,
nor sitteth in the seat of scorners.
A compound stanza of four members may contain two simple parallels :
e. g.
Job vii. 18, 14. When I say, my bed shall comfort me,
my couch shall ease my complaint;
Then thou scarest me with dreams,
and terrifiest me by visions.
Or the first member may answer to the third, and the second to the
fourth : e. g.
Ps. ciil 11, 12. For as the he.avcn is high above the earth,
80 great is his mercy towards them that fear him ;
n« far as the east is from tlie west,
80 far hath he removed our transgressions from us.
SELECTIONS IN POETRY. . 55
A stanza of five lines is similarly constructed, by inserting an isolated
member between two parallelisms : e. g.
Is, 1. 10. Who is among you, that fears Jehovah,
that hearkens to the voice of his servants,
who -walks in darkness and has no light ?
Let him trust in the name of Jehovah,
and stay himself upon his God.
There is sometimes an antithesis of the two parallel members : e. g.
Is. i 3. The ox knoweth his owner,
and the ass his master's crib ;
but Israel doth not know,
my people do not consider.
Hv. 40. For the mountains shall depart,
and the hills be overthrown ;
but my kindness shall not depart from thee,
nor shall my covenant of peace be removed.
An elegant stanza is formed of five lines, when the odd member either
closes the stanza after two complete distichs, or is inserted between them :
e.g.
Is. xliv. 26. Who establishes tho word of his servant,
and performs the counsel of his messengers:
who saith to Jerusalem, thou shalt be inhabited,
and to the cities of Judah, ye shall be built;
and her desolated places wUl I restore.
Joel lii. 16. The Lord also shall roar out of Zion,
(Heb. iv. 16.) and utter his voice from Jerusalem ;
and the heavens and the earth shall shake :
but the Lord will be the hope of his people,
and the strength of the sons of Israel.
These are the most regular and perfect forms of parallelism. But
there are others, more imperfect, in which there is a less exact corres-
pondence of the sense and grammatical construction, both being often
continued from one member to the next, and even from one distich to ano-
ther : e. g. .
Ps. Ixviii. 7, 8. O God, when thou wentest forth before thy people,
when thou didst march through the desert ;
The earth shook, yea the heavens dropped, before God,
that Sinai, before God the God of Israel.
In the prophetic style, especially, the construction is often continued
through a series of parallelisms, of which there is a fine example in Hab.
iii. 17, 18.
In many passages of the Psalms, and esi^ecially in the prophets, the poetical
form differs from that of prose, only by the uniform division of the sentence
into members of nearly equal length, which have no special correspondence in
sense or construction, forming a mere rhythmical parallelism ; (comp. Ps. cxv.
1-8.) But with these are intermingled the more perfect forms, giving a higher
poetical effect to the whole. It is the interchange of these numerous varieties
of parallelism, that constitutes the principal charm in ie external form of He-
brew poetry.
23
56 . HEBREW CHRESTOMATHT
II. An occasional peculiarity, not essential to he form of Hebrew
poetry, is assonance, or the recurrence of the same sound in the initial or
final syllables of words. It abounds in Hebrew, the structure of the lan-
guage being favorable to it. E. g.
Gen. ix. 7. ^isn^ ■n-\s tpixi
Grater (in Ersch and Gniber^s Encyclop. Sect. I. Th. 6, art. Assonanz),
has attempted an investigation of some of the laws of the initial asso-
nance. But the usage is manifestly arbitrary, and regulated by no fixed
laws. As a trait of poetic diction, it is most striking, when the assonance
occurs at the beginning or the end of successive lines. Of the former,
there are examples in Num. xxi. 14, 15, Ps. civ. 28, 29, ix. 2, 3. Of the
final assonance, or rhyme, the instances are more numerous ; see, e. g.
Gen. iv. 23, Num. xxi. 27, 28, Ps. vi. 2, viii. 5, xxv. 4, Ixxxv. 4, cvi. 4, 5,
cxi. 9.
III. Of the poetic diction the chief peculiarities are the following. 1)
Poetical words and significations of words, and poetical forms and construc-
tions. See examples in the grammar, p. 10 and p. 194 ; also, a) the use
of til for "itix ; b) ellipsis, especially of prepositions and the particles of
negation in the second member of a parallelism (§152, 3, § 154, 4), and of
other parts of speech. 2) Paranomasia, or the union of words similar in
sound. It is frequent in Hebrew, especially in proverbial forms ; e. g. Gen.
i. 2, Whj 'inn ; xviii. 27, "iSXI "iS^ . But it abounds in the poetic diction ;
e. g. Nah. ii. 11, npJSlMI n;^13 ; sometimes with intervening words, either
in the same or a parallel member, as Hos. viii. 7, nas {the stalk) yields no
n^^ (meal) ; Is. v. 7, he looked WQiIJ^l? (for equity) and behold riQlIJa
(blood shedding), for fi'iyi'^ (righteousness) and behold n;?:^S (a cry). 3)
Play on words ; viz. a) on words similar in sound but differing in signifi-
cation (Joel i. 15, Micah i. 8) ; b) on different meanings of the same Avord
(Eccl. vii. 6, Judg. x. 4) ; c) on the etymological meaning and the sound
of proper names. Of the last case, the most remarkable example is Mic.
i. 10-15.
IV. Peculiarities of structure, in some poems, are the following. 1)
The acrostic, or alphabetic form. Of these there are twelve : viz. Lam.
i-iv, Prov. xxxi. 10-31, Ps. xxv, xxxiv, xxxvii, cxi, and cxii (these two the
simplest examples of this form), cxix, cxlv. Lam. iii is a fine example of
it, containing twenty-two stanzas of three lines, each line beginning with
the initial letter of the stanza. — Ps. cxix is constructed with equal regu-
larity, in twenty-two stanzas of eight parallelisms, the first line in each
parallelism beginning with the initial letter of the stanza. — Prov, xxxi.
10-31, is a poem consisting of acrostic stanzas of two lines, the first line of
each commencing with the initial letter of the stanza. Lam. iv is a poem
of the same form. — Lam. i and ii contain each a poem of acrostic stanzas
of three lines, only the first line in each having the initial letter of the
stanza. 2) The gradational form, where the closing expression in each
parallelism is resumed in the following one ; e. g. Ps. cxxi. Is. xxvi. 3-15.
3) The strnphic form ; e. g. Ps. cvii, where the divisions are made at vs.
SELECTIONS IN POETRY. 57
8, 15, 21, 31 ; Ps. xlii and xliii, evidently one psalm as in many Mss., and
divided into three nearly equal portions by the refrain in xlii. 6, 12, xliii.
5 ; Ps. Ivii, divided into two equal parts by the refrain in vs. 6, 12 ; Ps.
Ixxx, divided into four strophes, at vs. 4, 8, 15, 16, 20. Another fine exam-
ple is found in Is. ix. 8 — x. 4. 4) The choral form ; e. g. Ps. cxxxv ; see
an analysis of it, in Prof. Stowe's ed. of Lowth's Lect. on Heb. Poetry.
Note to Lect. xix. Ps. xxiv is a still more remarkable example ; see the
arrangement of it in Herder^s Spirit of Heb. Poetry, vol, ii. p. 234 of the
excellent translation by Prof. Marsh.
The parallel members are, in general, correctly indicated by the accents.
The division is made in the simple parallelism, usually by Athnach (— ), some-
times by Merka-m,ahpakh {-j^ ). In the compound parallehsm, they mark the
principal division, and the minor ones are made usually by Zaqeph-qaton (— )
and Rcbhia ( — ). See, e. g. Joel iv. 16, Is. xliv. 26, L 10. — The subordination
of Athnach to Merka-mahpahh (§ 15, 1, 3, and Gesenius, hebr. Leseb. Ii ed. by
J)e Wette, p. 81), is not so certain.*
♦ The Book of Psalms has been recently published, from the Leipzig edition, by Rudolph
Garrigue, 178 Fulton-street, New York; which is recommended to the student aSAbeaatifal and
accurate copy of the Psalms, metrically arranged.
IX.
CHARGE TO THE NIGHT-WATCH IN THE TEMPLE, AND
THEIR RESPONSE.
Psalm cxxxiv.
V. 1. (2), prop, ascents or ascensions ; also (from a step, at
stair'), gradations, degrees ; see lex. nb^'a, 4, and remarks be-
low. nsH, the common form for awakening and directing
attention ; here used for incitement and exhortation, lex. 1st IF,
end. Bless, is applied (lex. 1) to every act of religious ado-
ration, in which God is worshipped. The exhortation was spe-
cially suited to the occasion, that the service of guarding the
sacred edifice, oy night, might not become a merely secular one.
Those who stand, &c. {art. § 109, 2d IT, 2), i. e. who have
an office and a service there by night ; comp. lex. TQ^, 1, y, and
the reference to Dan. i. 4.- [ult.), ^"^b, Parad. VI, h, §87, 4 ;
lit. i7i the nights = during the night, by night.
V. 2. (1), XTDp, see lex. 1, a, "in prayer," &c. ; marg. note :
other copies, '^ijiiC (i. e. with Methegh on the final syllable).
TC'lp, toivards the sanctuary ; here, for the inner sanctuary, or
most holy place (lex. 3, end) ; acciis. of direction, § 118, 1, a.
V. 3. Response of the watch. (1), §64, Rem. 4. Out
of Zion ; a common formula for the place consecrated by Jeho-
vah's presence and worship, from which his power went forth to
save or to destroy. Zion is used with special reference to the
part (see lex.) on which the temple stood ; and the whole phrase
has here the same meaning as "ow^ of his holy hill" (i. e. from
his temple) in Ps. iii. 4. — —Maker of ; § 105, 2.
This Psalm belongs to a collection, fifteen in number (Ps. cxx—
cxxxiv), to each of which is prefixed the title nib2>5ari niTU. The differ-
ent interpretations of this title are given in Gesenius' Lexicon. The
one proposed by him (and approved by De Wette, Bib. Repos. vol. iii. p.
477), fails unless it is applicable to every psalm in the collection ; for
why should any other be reckoned a psalm of gradations in that sense,
a name founded solely on the structure of the psalm ?
There is more probability in the suggestion, Lex. 4, a, /5, viz. that
this was a collection, made from psalms already in use, of such as were
X., XI. HUMILITY— FRATERNAL UNION. 59
adapted for the devotions of those who went up to the annual feasts,
both while on their way and during their stay at Jerusalem. On this
supposition, it is not necessary that every one of the number should
have a direct and specific reference to the occasion, as if written ex-
pressly for it ; it is enough, if the devotional spirit of the psalm is in
harmony with it. — They may properly be called Pilgrim Songs.
X.
PROFESSION OP HUMILITY.
Psalm cxxxi.
V. 1. Tl*!^ ; ^ [Lamedh auctoris), § 115, 2, a, end, Jnaa,
§75, 3d l.-^-^m (Din), lex. 1, a. 3 1\)>7) (lex. Piel, 1), to
go about in = to concern one's self with. In great matters ;
fern, as neut.^ §107, 3, and letter h. {penult.), ^'"^, Niph.
Part.} lex. Niph. 2. (nit.), §103, 2, c; )^, §119,' 1, and
lex. 5, b ; too difficult for me.
V. 2. (1 & 2) ; § 155, 2,/, 2d 1. (3), § 72, Remarks, 10.
-(4) ; nm, Poel, § 55, 1. — b^a (lex. b)35, II, 1), Kal Part.
pass. As one weaned (as a weaned child) upon its mother, — or,
with its mother (lex. by, 3, d) ; as a weaned child is my spirit
within me (letter e).
V. 3. (1), bn^, Piel Imp. ; hope, O Israel! bs, indica-
ting the direction of hope, to the source of the expected blessing.
XI.
PRECIOUSNESS OP FRATERNAL UNION.
Psalm cxxxiii.
V. 1. niTS (nc;^, Kal Inf.), § 133, 2. — D5, makes the fol-
lowing word emphatic (§155, 2, a); in union. V. 2. As
the precio7is ointment ; see the description and use of this "holy
anointing oil," in Ex. xxx. 23-33. The second member should
close with flH^, as indicated by Athnach and required by the
sense. ■ nn^T» ; -tD for n^CX, § 36. "^S ; lex. ns, 2, mid. —
r\ya, lex. 2.
V. 3. Second member : Tl^tD •, 3 is here implied from tlic
60 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
preceding member (§ 154, 4), the pronoun including antecedent
and relative (§ 123, 2) ; as that which descends. "l^n, Parad.
IV, plur. constr.
XII.
A GENERAL PSALM OF THANKSGIVING.
Psalm cxxxvi.
The Psalm consists of three parts ; in which God is praised, 1) as
the Supreme God and Creator (vs. 1-9), 2) for national blessings (vs.
10-25), 3) for his universal bounty (ver. 25).
V. 1. (1), nn^, Hiph. Imp. For good (is he); see on
Gen. i. 4. V. 3. (2) ; marg. note : i< movable {m,obilis, p. 26,
note *), in distinction from "^Hi?^, § 23, 2. at the end. V. 4.
(2), see lex. xbs, Niph. 3. i^nb, see on Gen. ii. 18. ,
V. 6. (1), Kal Part. co?istr. §65, 1, c, Rem. ^V. 8. For
dominion over the day ; — (ver. 9) in the plur., referring to the
separate dominion of the moon and of the stars.
V. 10. (1), nD3 (§ 76, 2, b), Hiph. Part., Parad. IX. (3),
a. lex. B, 5. V. 11. (1), transition from the Part, to the
finite verb, § 134, Bern. 2. (3), ))2, 1\)r^ (Gen. i. 6), D_.
V. 12. (4), nt23, Kal Part. pass. fern. V. 13. (4), b, lex. A,
2. V. 14. (1), as in ver. 11.
V. 15. (1), (lex. "i?3 , II), Piel Perf., § 64, 3 ; shake otit, as
one shsikes out the contents of the lap ; see Neh. v. 13. V.
16. (1), § 69, Rem. 8. V. 18. (1), as in ver. 11.
V. 19. (1), b, § 154, 3, e, end ; lex. A, 3, g. (3), § 109, 1.
V. 21. (1), And he gave (or made), begins a new construc-
tion. (3), b, lex. A, 2. V. 22. (2), b, sign of the dative
(§117, 1) with the first signif ofins,— or of the gen. (§115, 2)
with the second.
V. 23. (1), -ID §36, a, bsTC Parad. VI, b, snff. ^2- ; who, in
our humiliation ; viz. under the Babylonian power. (3),
§103, 2, a; b, as in ver. 19. V. 24. (1), p-?B, Kal Impf.
with suff. ; tone-long vowel shortened, Sect. V, Rule vi ; § 129,
I. (2), -12, lex. B, 1, Parad. VIII. V. 25. (1), giving =
who giveth — the giver of.
ym THE CAPTIA^ITY. 61
XIII.
THE captivity: a commemorative psalm.
Psalm cxxxvii
V. 1. (1), § 154, 3, h, lex. 3, a. ba3, the province (lex.)
through which the captives were dispersed. ^3"lp|a ; §61, 1,
§ 132, 2. V. 2. (2), lex. nnr II. hi her midst; for the
fern, see § 107, 4, a. {ult.), masc. with fern. plur. ending,
§87,4.
The weeping willow is here meant, which grew by the water-courses
(Is. xliv. 4, XV. 7, Job xl. 22, and Lev. xxiii. 40). The last reference
suggests the particular occasion of the incident alluded to in the follow-
ing verses ; viz. the great feast of tents after the harvest, the festival of
thanksgiving for the fruits of the earth, and also of commemoration for
the deliverance from Egypt (Lev. xxiii. 39-43), when willows of the
brook (ver. 40) were gathered as a part of the joyful pageant. This
season of festivity Avas now turned to mourning ; and the willow, so asso-
ciated with it, need not be taken (as by Lengerke and others) for an
ideal symbol. Such a season of mourning seems alluded to in Ezek.
iii. 15, compared with Lev. xxiii. 41.
V. 3. (3), bit© ; see § 64, Rem. 1, and comp. § 59, 2, table,
plur. 3d com. ; with two accusatives, § 139, 2. The first mem-
ber of this verse should end with this word. (4) ; HiT^, Kal
Part., Pa,rad. IX, with the norninal suff. (§135, last H) ; o^ir
captors bbin ; and our oppressors. '^'^l&'a ; ))2, lex. 1,
b, /?. ^
V. 5. (3) ; proper pointing, ObiBin^ ; see lex. 2d 1, at the end.
Let my right hand forget, i. e. become forgetful, — lose its
skill. V. 6. (3), 1\n , Parad. VIII. ^pnSTS : S2if. (unu-
sual form) §91, 1, Rem. 2. ^^bs^^, Hij)h. hnpf.; cause to
ascend ot'er = place above. liJSi, lex. 2, d; chief of joy
(§106, 1, Rem. l)=chief joy ; with suff. (§121, 6), my chief
joy-
V. 7. (3) ; b, sign of the dative ; to the sons of E., i. e. against
them. Tlie day of J. (of its capture and destruction), lex.
Di'', 1, b. They who said (§109, 2d H) ; comp. Obad. vs.
1-14, Ez. XXV. 12 (comp. ver. 3). iny ; nn^, Piel Imp.;
retraction of the tone in pause, § 29, 4, h, at the end.
V. 8. (1), poetical personification of a city or country, § 107,
3, rf, lex. 5, at the end. (3), T1T», Kal Part. pass. = Lat.
GZ HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
Part, in -ndus (§ 134, 1), vastanda, vastationi devota ; but see
lex. Kal, at the end. (4), see lex. ItDK, Parad. VI, a. The
genitive here, is the antecedent implied in the foil. IT^S (§ 123, 2) ;
O the happiness of him, 2cAo = happy he, who, (fcc. (5),
DbtD, Piiil, e; final vowel, §27, 1. ^^^'05, (kc. see lex. b^a,
Kal, at the end.
V. 9. (2), ^m and in)k^ ; §68, 1. (3), fB3, Piel Per/.,
§126, 6, a. {ult.), the stone, referring to the well known
manner of immolating the infants of a captured city ; compare
2 K. viii. 12, Is. xiii. 16, Nah. iii. 10.
XIV.
REWARDS OF PIETY,
Psalm cxxvii.
V. 1. (1), comp. above (XIII) ver. 9. (3), § 135, 1st t, 2.
{penult.), §109, 2d IF. V. 2. ''3, inserted, like enim,
after other words in the clause, lex. B, 2, a, end of 1st 1^.-
(5), happiness of thee! = happy thou ! :iil3, lex. B, 2.
V. 3. (1), §95, Exp)L 3, Rem. It has jSeghol with Aleph only
in this instance. (3), STiS, Kal Part, fern., §75, Remarks, 5.
— — (4), HD'l';', Parad. B, c, Dual constr., lex. 2. Olive-
plants, §106, 1. In the circuit 0/"= around ; lex. 3''30, 1,
mid.; b, §115,2.
V. 4. Lit. Behold, that thus, &c. = Mark well, that thus, &.c.
^13, §29, 4, a; marg. note, Q,amets ivithout Athnach and
Soph-pasuq. V. 5. And see thou = an(\ thou shalt see, in
the sense of a promise ; § 130, 1, a. 3, lex. B, 4, a ; § 154,
a, 2, end.
XV.
ASSERTION OP JEHOVAh's SUPREMACY : SECURITY OF THOSE
WHO TRUST IN HIM.
Psalm cxv.
V. 1. (2), §103, 2, a. ^3, Gram. p. 272, d ; lex. 3, a.
^Pi, § 66, Re7n. 3. by, lex. 2, d. The first minor divi-
sion is made by Merka-malipakh. V. 2. N3, comp. Gram. p.
192, Note, and lex. 5 ; here tauntingly used : ichere now, pray i
XVI. EXALTATION OF GOD. 63
V. 3. (1), 1 adversative (§ 155, 1, h, lex. 2), and yet, hut yet,
hut ; i. e. notwithstanding the adverse circumstances^ on which
this reproach is founded ; our God is still supreme over all, and
has done his own pleasure in our humiliation.
V. 4. (1), lex. nsy.
V. 6. {ult.)] H^T, Hiph. Imp/., the original full form, §47,
Rem. 4. V. 7. (1), absolutely, — as for their hands. For
the use of 1 after an absol. subst., see § 145, 2, at the end.
V. 8. (1), § 103, 2, and table, h. (3), § 135, 2. V. 9.
{penult.), "jaia, Parad. VII.
V. 12. Divided first by Merka-mahpakh, and then by Ath-
nach. V. 13. (2); X")^, phir. cojistr. ; p. 60, mid. V.
14. (1), § 78, t|p^, add upon = make additions to ; Jussive form :
Jehovah increase! -V. 15. (3), b, §143, 2. V. 16. The
heaven, heaven, is Jehovah's (b, § 113, 2), emphatic repetition ;
or, as it may be construed. The heavens are JehovaKs heavens,
which is favored by the omission of the art.
V. 17. (3), p. 10, at the top, §20, 3, c, end of 2d 1. Jn^
poetic form ; see lex. {ult.), § 118, 1, a.
XVI.
god's exaltation above all, and his care for the
LOWLY.
Psalm cxiii.
V. 2. (x;. Jussive. (4), § 64, 3, end, § 27, table. V. 3.
Praised (be) the name of Jehovah; bbji, Part, of the regular
conj. Pual, §67, Rem.. 10.
V. 5. Like Jehovah, viz. both in his majesty and in his care
for the lowliest ; the construction, in the following verses, shows
that both ideas are included here. (4), Hiph. Part, of f^sa,
§ 75, 3d 1; § 90, 3, and letter a, followed by a prep. {ibid, and
§ 116, 1) ; he who sits (enthroned, lex. 3®^, 1, b) o?i high ; he
who, § 109, 2d IF ; sits on high, § 142, 4, Rem. I. {ult.),
§ 29, 4, a.
V. 6. He who looks far doion, oti the heavens and on the
earth ; lit. inakes loro in seeing, references as before. — V. 7.
64 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY.
(1), §90, 3, a, comp. § 116, 1. {penult.), § 134, Rem. 2.
V. 8. (1), the l7if., as a verbal noun (§ 45), takes the ending "^-^ ;
references as above. ^ V. 9. (1), ''— , as before. (2 & 3),
the barren (one) of the house, — as required by the constr. state
and the accentuation ; only the proper mistress of the house, can
be meant by such a form. Causes . . .to sit, the rejoicing
mother of children ; the verb to sit is the appropriate one here,
expressing the quiet contentment of her now favored lot.
XVII.
THE WORTH OP WISDOM.
Proverbs iii. 13-24.
V. 13. (1), comp. above (XIII), ver. 9. Who findeth, . . .
who getteth (lex. p^B (II), Hiph.), Perf and Impf. used indif-
ferently in the sphere of the abstract presejit (§ 126, 3, 2d H) ;
omission of the relative, §123, 3, a. V. 14. See lex. "llnD,
and pnn, 1, b. "j^, § 119, 1. V. 15. (3), pointed for the
margin ;%ee lex. D^ppS. (5), lex. fSH, 2. V. 16. (4);
quadriliteral, § 30, 3 ; see lex., Note.
V. 18. (tilt.), "IT?^?, Pual Part.; sing, with jilar. subject,
§146, 4. V. 19. tSiS; y^, Pil. Perf- — V. 20. (3), lex.
yj?3, Niph. 2. — (4), priTD, Parad. VI, d. (penult.), §138,
1, Ref}i. 2.
V. 21. (3) ; let them not depart from thine eyes (i. e. keep
them ever in view), — the masc. form, though referring to subjects
which are both /em. (§137, 1, comp. §147, Rem. 1). (5);
(lex. 12p, 2, mid.), §66, Rem. 1. {penult.), lex. 3. {iilt.),
lex. 3. V. 22. (1), masc. as before ; and they shall be life to
thy sold, and grace to thy neck, — an inward life, and an out-
ward ornament. To thy neck ; where precious metals and
jewels were worn, for ornament, and as a badge of honor and
dignity ; see ch. i. 9, Gen. xli. 42, Dan. v. 7.
V. 23. (1), § 127, 4, a. Note *. (3), b, B, 3 ; § 102, 2, c, y.
{ult.), ?l?i3, 3. V. 24. (1), i/" thou shdlt lie down = when
thou liest down. -(5), 1 intensive (lex. 1, cc), — yea, thou
shalt lie down (§ 126, 6, a). {penidt.), lex. S^^^ (IV), 1 ; and
9weet shall be thy sleep.
6 - " 1 1
.0 URL
V-V^ 1 vJ
m
UNIV-
\UFORMlA
M
UCLA-Young Research Library
PJ4564 .G33hE
y
L 009 527 772 9
OCT 16 1947
J Ml
DEC 1 4 ]m >
JAN 7 1952
FEB 13 rn^'i
1 6 1953
^CT g a 1Q53
DEC 1 2 1953
FEB
rrr. "*
iECU
JUL 2 195i
Main Loan BmR
25nt-2, '43(5205) n^^
DEC 9
JAN 3 1 ipei
A.M.
959
360
,CEI VED
Jin loan desk
JM8I9
m^
i96t
r
MAR 2 0 196:
LD URU
a 1^ 1S6S
I nlll|12lll2l3t4|5|6j|
7 I96r
ifte^**
CO ^C'O ) A n.
OCT 311973
RtC'U LU-UKL
. .NQV 1
\n
!-~ORiMte
UCLA-Young Research Library
PJ4564 .G33hE
y
m
L 009 527 772 9
i
x^^v ^, 4 1974
MAR 91976
OlSGHARG^
[
h^ ^^
i VI Sv>r ^
'^
REt
Form L9-Series 444
.o..n!tf)^
25m-2, ■43(5203) „^
T^^
%\%^
f EB 2 3 1983
"V"^,:^'^ FFR 171984
n 0.
REC'D LD-^RL
JUN 0 6 3989^
m
UCLA-Young Research Library
PJ4564 .G33hE
L 009 527 772 9
I
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
Los Angeles
This book
is DUE on the last date stamped below.
|984
m
UCLA-Young Research Library
PJ4564 .G33hE
y
L 009 527 772 9
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11